JP7460565B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

As shown in Patent Document 1, some conventional gaming machines are capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition, and are also capable of controlling the gaming state to a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be established.

JP 2015-80649 A

There was room to improve marketability in gaming machines that could be controlled to special states, as in Patent Document 1.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state and has improved marketability.

(1) A gaming machine that displays identification information in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result,
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to a special state after a predetermined display result based on the variable display being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform variable display of production identification information,
In the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, it is possible to make the production identification information in an emphasized mode before the specific display result is stopped and displayed,
In the variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed, the production identification information is not highlighted before the predetermined display result is stopped and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (E), the variable display result (The part where the stop symbol action is not displayed in the variable display where the time is shortened or missed),
After the specific display result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform an effect that notifies that the control will be in the advantageous state,
After the predetermined display result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform an effect that notifies that the predetermined display result will be controlled to a special state,
In the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, the aspect of the presentation means may be a special aspect,
In the variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed, the aspect of the presentation means is not a special aspect,
In the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed in a special state after the predetermined display result, the aspect of the presentation means may be a special aspect,
Effect data for setting the mode of the effect means to a special mode in a variable display in which the specific display result in the non-special state is displayed, and a variable display in which the specific display result in the special state is displayed after the predetermined display result. The production data for making the mode of the production means a special mode includes common data,
Variable display is performed with different variable display patterns in the variable display in which the specific display result in the non-special state is displayed and the variable display in which the specific display result in the special state is displayed after the predetermined display result. However, with common performance data, the mode of the production means becomes a special mode,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the marketability of a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. A diagram to explain the special pattern LED board, the fourth pattern unit, and the relationship between the fourth pattern unit and the game effect lamp. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. A diagram to explain the various boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure for explaining a hit type. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining each random number. A diagram to explain the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a performance control command. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. A figure to explain an example of a subsequent fluctuation pattern on the main side. A diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table when a miss occurs. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a previous variation pattern determination table. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. A figure for explaining an example of lottery for effect patterns on the sub side. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. A flowchart showing an example of processing during a jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of presentations. It is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after determination of success, SP first half reach A jackpot, and SP final reach jackpot. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the starting part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the accessory action part (at the time of SP latter half development). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the scenario of the provocation part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of a winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and a loss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the relief part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (odd number symbols are derived after button operation) and the fanfare part. It is a figure for explaining the scenario of the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation) and the fanfare part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism for outputting to an LED driver. It is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of the game effect lamp. 13 is a diagram for explaining the lighting mode of a game effect lamp. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the presentation mode in the start part. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the start part. This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocation part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the presentation aspect in a loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the provocative part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B). FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the accessory action part (at the time of SP second half development). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocation part (SP second half reach A). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach A). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the provocative part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance mode in the inciting part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a diagram for explaining the performance mode in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in an inciting part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the instigation part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). This is a diagram to explain the presentation style in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). A diagram to explain the presentation style in the miss epilogue part (SP final reach). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the relief hit part. It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in the relief hit part. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design or even number design derivation after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (odd number design derivation after button operation). A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the re-selection part (deriving an odd number pattern after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). A figure to explain the presentation mode in the re-drawing part (deriving an even number pattern after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the effect mode in the re-lottery part (even number pattern derivation after button operation). It is a figure for explaining the performance aspect in a fanfare part. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b11) to (b13). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a volume level. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a volume level. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r24) to (r27). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (r28) to (r31). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (r32) to (r35). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role movements in (b18) to (i1). A detailed explanatory diagram of the role movements in (b18) to (i1). It is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). A detailed explanation of the reel action in (r54) to (s4). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (A1) to (A23). A detailed explanatory diagram of parts (A24) to (A46). They are detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (b4) to (b6) and comparison diagrams during the jackpot round. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for dialogue and sound output. They are detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (b4) to (b6) and detailed explanatory diagrams of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitles. FIG. 3 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (B4) to (B11). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the pattern display. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of re-drawing. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. It is a figure for explaining the modification of re-lottery. FIG. It is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. 13A to 13C are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamp when a miss occurs and diagrams for explaining modified examples when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a detailed explanatory diagram of part (r48). FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in a start part. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the start part. FIG. It is a figure for explaining an example of the parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of the SP Reach A. This is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the first half of SP Reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach B. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the reel operation part during the latter half of a SP development. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP second half reach A. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the loss epilogue part of SP second half reach A. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of SP Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the second half of the SP, Reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B. A figure to explain an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the promotion part of the SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the promotion part of SP final reach. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of the parent table and child table for frame lamps in the brightness|luminance data table used for the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. This is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the missed epilogue part of the SP final reach. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a relief part. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in the re-lottery part. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). FIG. It is a figure for explaining an example of the child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part (design promotion after operation promotion). A figure to explain an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-drawing part (maintaining the pattern after operation promotion). FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare part. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a smooth rainbow luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a role lamp and a grandchild table for a left panel lamp in a smooth rainbow brightness data table. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a grandchild table for an Attacka lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the accessory action red blinking brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a yellow haze luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a white blinking (white flash) luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common red cut-in luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a feature lamp in a common green cut-in brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacker lamp in a common green cut-in luminance data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the unpromoted operation brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the shutter luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the miss luminance data table; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the luminance data table per repair; FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a hit-determined brightness data table. FIG. It is a figure for explaining an example of the grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery production brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the re-drawing performance brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a background brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a comparison of lamp control when a win occurs and when a miss occurs. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the swinging pattern of the pattern. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. It is a figure for explaining the modification of the re-lottery performance. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining reference to a luminance data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining reference to a brightness data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table; FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing various judgment tables. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the types of jackpots, and (B) is a diagram showing the types of misses with time reduction. 1A is an explanatory diagram of each time-saving state, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of the case where the start condition for the second time-saving state is met while the first time-saving state is in operation. It is a diagram showing the transition of gaming states. It is a diagram showing the transition of gaming states. It is an explanatory diagram of a data holding area for game control. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of a performance control data storage area. It is a diagram showing game control main processing. It is a diagram showing special symbol process processing. A diagram showing the start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows random numerical value determination processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a diagram showing special symbol normal processing. A diagram showing a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern determination table. A diagram showing the variation patterns that can be selected by the variable display of the first special pattern. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern which can be selected in the variable display of a 2nd special symbol. A diagram showing the variation patterns that can be selected by the variable display of the second special pattern. A diagram showing the variation patterns that can be selected by the variable display of the second special pattern. A figure showing the average variable display time of the second special chart when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state A. It is a figure which shows the average variable display time of the 2nd special figure when a variable display result becomes a failure in time saving state B. A figure showing the average variable display time of the second special chart when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C. A diagram showing special pattern stopping processing. A diagram showing special pattern stopping processing. It is a diagram showing a pattern determination period in a normal state. It is a diagram showing a symbol confirmation period in time saving state A. It is a diagram showing a pattern determination period in time saving state B. A diagram showing the pattern determination period in time-saving state C. A diagram showing the processing during the opening of a small win. It is a figure showing small hit end processing. It is a diagram showing jackpot end processing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the performance control process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a variable display start setting process. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of an effect related to a time saving state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the entry effect, (B) is an explanatory diagram of the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is displayed, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the countdown to the end of the time-saving feature, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the result effect. 11 is a timing chart showing the timing of updating the time-saving countdown until the end of the time-saving state and the remaining number of times display. It is a figure which shows the notice performance execution decision ratio during variable display during the variable display of the 1st special figure. It is a figure which shows the notice performance execution decision ratio during the variable display during the variable display of the 2nd special figure. A diagram showing the presentation patterns of preview presentations during variable display. A diagram showing the presentation form of the preview presentation during variable display. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an average variable display time in each time-saving state. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing executable variable display notice effects in each time saving state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing variation patterns that can be selected in a modified example. (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table for the second special pattern in the modified example, and (B) to (D) are diagrams showing the variation patterns that can be selected in the modified example. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of an image displayed on the image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device. This is a timing chart for when you win a time-saving prize. It is a timing chart at the time of winning with time saving. This is a timing chart for when you win a time-saving prize. This is a timing chart for when you win a time-saving prize. This is a timing chart for when you win a time-saving prize. It is a timing chart when winning with time saving. This is a timing chart for when you win a time-saving prize. This is a timing chart when a time-saving chance presentation can be executed on the first special chart and the second special chart. A diagram showing whether or not a preview performance can be executed during variable display when the variable display result is a miss with time reduction. A diagram showing whether or not a pending display preview effect will be executed and the decision rate of the effect pattern. A figure showing the display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a hold display preview performance can be executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a pending display preview performance is enabled. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a pending display preview performance is enabled. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a pending display preview performance is enabled. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a pending display preview performance is enabled. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of image data to be drawn. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of image data to be drawn. A diagram showing the execution rate of preview effects during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the preview performance during variable display. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the preview performance during variable display. It is an explanatory diagram of the execution timing of the preview performance during variable display and the executable winning performance pattern. It is an explanatory diagram when performing a promotion effect. It is a figure showing the execution rate of promotion production. A figure showing the display mode of an image displayed on an image display device when a promotion effect is executed. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the arrangement of frame lamps provided on an opening and closing door frame. FIG. 1A shows various lamps provided on a game board, and FIG. 1B shows the relationship between the various lamps and a brightness data table. (A) is a diagram to explain the background music and the light colors of various LEDs, (B) is the rainbow effect and the movable object effect, (C) is the rainbow effect, (D) is the rainbow display mode, and (E) is a diagram to explain the stopped pattern action display. (A) to (F) are diagrams for explaining right-handed hitting promotion effects A, V, and F. This is a diagram showing the presentation pattern from the jackpot fluctuation through the jackpot to the entry presentation A. It is a figure showing the production mode of winning variation and ceiling reaching variation in time saving and losing B. It is a diagram showing a performance mode of rush performance B. This figure shows the presentation mode when a time-saving miss B is won during the time-saving state A1. (A) to (E) are diagrams showing an example of a stop symbol action display. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mechanism of output to an LED driver. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table based on timer management of a child table. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a luminance data table used in a fanfare production part, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare performance part. 13A to 13G are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a fanfare production part. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the entry performance part A, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table. 13A to 13I are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the entry performance part A. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 1) part, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the break-in performance part B (scene 1). (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 2) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 3) part, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table. 13A to 13F are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the break-in performance part B (scene 3). (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. 13A to 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the break-in performance part B (scene 4). (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 5) part, and (B) is an example of a child table. 13A to 13D are diagrams illustrating an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the entry performance part B (scene 5). 13A to 13G are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamp control between fanfare effects, break-in effects A, and break-in effects B. (A) and (B) are diagrams for explaining similar colors. (A) is a parent table in the brightness data table used for right-handed driving promotion effect part A, and (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table. (A) to (D) are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the A part of the right-handed driving promotion effect. (A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table, (B) is a child table, and (C) is an example of a grandchild table in the brightness data table used for the V part of the right-handed driving promotion effect. (A) is a diagram to explain an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the right-hit promotion performance F part, (B) is a child table, and (C) is a diagram to explain an example of a grandchild table. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the display mode of the image display device and the lighting mode of the lamp in right-handed hitting promotion effects A, V, and F. A figure showing grandchild tables LLA1, ELA1, and ERA1 used in right-hit promotion performance part A. This figure shows the grandchild tables ATA1, ATV1, and ATF1 used in the right-hit promotion performance parts A, V, and F, as well as the display mode of the image display device and the lighting mode of the lamps. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing. It is a flowchart etc. which shows timer interrupt processing for game control. 1 is a flowchart showing a special symbol process. A figure showing an example of determining the special chart display result. It is a flowchart showing production control main processing. It is a flowchart etc. which shows production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an address map of a memory area in a microcomputer for game control. It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a production control command. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of RWM initial setting processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command set processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a command transmission table. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a command extended data address table. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a data set process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a specific number of times command transmission process. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a configuration example of a first specific number of times designation command. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol determination processing. It is a flowchart etc. which shows an example of special symbol buffer shift processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of designation value determination. A figure showing an example of setting the number of times the large prize opening is opened. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of determining a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a fluctuation pattern determination. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of special symbol stop time setting processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of settings when a pattern stops. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a counter decrement process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of arrival time data setting. It is a flowchart which shows an example of time-saving subtraction processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing targets to be cleared when the time-saving feature ends. A diagram showing an example of performance settings after a winning streak ends. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance setting table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. This figure shows an example of data setting before a small hit begins and the settings to be cleared after a miss stops. 1 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot start setting process. This is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit end processing. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. A figure showing an example of state settings at the end of a jackpot. A diagram showing the setting contents corresponding to the state setting types at the end of the jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of data setting at the end of a jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows an example of performance side counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of number of times suggestion control processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of count display control. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of performance execution.

<Configuration of pachinko machine, etc.>
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 1 shows an arrangement layout of main components in a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine. A pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. There is. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a game is played by variably displaying special symbols. "Variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

In addition, two types of special symbols are provided as special symbols that are variably displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also called the "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also called the "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." In addition, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol game."

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative symbols are displayed variably (for example, vertically scrolling display or (updated display). Note that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

On the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5, a character called Yume Yume-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is depicted. Yume Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, on the game board 2 on the lower right of the image display device 5, a character called Jam-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is depicted. Jam-chan is a character who appears in the content used by the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole (electric chute) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 6). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, equipped with an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), a predetermined ball rest is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7A having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7A includes a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 6), and a big winning hole (as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state) by the big winning hole door. (hereinafter referred to as a large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1, and a glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 2) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. A big winning opening door is provided in the space between, and by sliding open and closing horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1, the regular big winning opening with game balls is opened. The route to is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 6), game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters a normal big prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting winning opening, and a general winning opening 10. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 6), and a big winning hole (hereinafter referred to as a V big winning hole) that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. (referred to as the winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the V big winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 24 (see FIG. 6) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 24, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the high probability game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal high probability prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as high probability prize openings. The high probability prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also referred to as a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also referred to as a starting winning port.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, etc.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is configured with the character string "POWERFUL II". "POWERFUL II" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime or the name of a singer). The characters attached to the movable body 32 may also represent the name of a character that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, "Yume Yume" representing the main character Yume Yume-chan). In this embodiment, the model name of the pachinko game machine 1 (Powerful II) is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 and a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 1. Specifically, the movable body 32 stops at a position where it covers (overlaps) the front of the image display device 5 by causing the letters "POWER II" to fall diagonally (so that the "P" falls downward and the "II" falls upward). The movable body 32 is also referred to as a role-playing object.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, there is a stick controller 31A that serves as an operation stick that can be held by the player and tilted (operation in front, back, left, and right directions, and operation in which the player pulls it toward the player). is installed. A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 6) is provided inside the main body of the stick controller 31A to detect a tilting operation on the operation stick. Further, the stick controller 31A has a built-in vibrator motor (not shown) for vibrating the stick controller 31A. Note that the stick controller 31A is also referred to as a "trigger" because it can be pulled toward the player by the player.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 6).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special symbol LED board 20 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 20 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the special symbol LED board 20, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(a) described later, in the special symbol LED board 20, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22. In this embodiment, the term "lighting mode" is used as a concept that includes lighting, blinking, and extinguishing for various lamps, such as the frame lamp described below.

The pachinko game machine 1 further includes a fourth symbol unit 50 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 50 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies the change in the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 53, for example, as shown in FIG. 4(b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 50, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 54, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by the multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 54.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps (also referred to as game effect lamps) on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes an accessory lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, and a special variable winning ball device 7B provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B. The V attacker lamp 9E installed near the special variable winning ball device 7A and the V attacker lamp 9F installed near the special variable winning ball device 7A indicate that the V jackpot is open and the round is in a jackpot game state in which a V winning can occur. A V lamp 9G that notifies you of the occurrence of an electric shock, an electric chew lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, and a push button provided on the push button 31B. It includes a button lamp 9K, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. The V lamp may notify that a jackpot has occurred.

The reel lamp 9A is composed of multiple lamps, namely reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, a component labeled "POWER II" and included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, with reel lamp 9A1 located behind the "P" and "O" parts, reel lamp 9A2 located behind the "W" and "E" parts, reel lamp 9A3 located behind the "R" and "F" parts, and reel lamp 9A4 located behind the "U" and "L" parts. As a result, when reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) behind the component labeled "POWER II", "POWER II" lights up (emits light).

The left board lamp 9B is made up of multiple lamps, such as left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5. A main character (for example, "Yume Yume", which refers to the main character Yume Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is depicted on the left side of the game board 2, and the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are each positioned behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted. As a result, when the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (emit light) behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted, the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted lights up (emits light).

The attacca lamp 9E is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, when the attacca lamp 9E lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B. In addition, the V attacca lamp 9F is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, when the V attacca lamp 9F lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is located behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V". As a result, when the V lamp 9G lights up (emits light) behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V", the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V" lights up (emits light). The electric chute lamp 9H is located near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when it lights up (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), the stick controller 31A lights up (emits light). The push button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when turned on (emits light), the push button 31B is turned on (emits light).

The left frame lamp 9L is composed of multiple lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The right frame lamp 9R is composed of multiple lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 3) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as frame lamps. The role lamp 9A, the left board lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chute lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the push button lamp 9K, the left frame lamp 9L, and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see FIG. 6).

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 6) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the gaming board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 3 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (12 lamps in this example), causing the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow. Meanwhile, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example), causing the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the special pattern LED board 20 and the fourth pattern unit 50. As shown in FIG. 4(a), the special figure LED board 20 includes a special figure 1 variable display part 21 that shows a variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows a variable display of the second special figure. 22, a special figure 1 memory display section 23 indicating the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section 24 indicating the second pending memory number corresponding to the second special figure game. , a normal pattern memory display section 25 that shows the number of stored normal symbols, a normal pattern display section 26 that shows a variable display of normal symbols, a right hitting display section 30 that prompts the player to play right, and the presence or absence of a probability change state. , a time saving display section 29 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 27 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 20 can prompt the player to make a right hit by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 30. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to make a right hit, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 30 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to make a right hit, that is, when the player is prompted to make a left hit, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 30 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 30, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 30. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 30 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 30.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into.

In this embodiment, in the jackpot game after the occurrence of a jackpot and in the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state or probability variable state), the player hits the right to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right-hit display unit 30 urges the player to hit the right. By hitting the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the player can obtain the right to play the second special game, or can make the game ball enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number (for example, ten) of prize balls are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, during the round of the probability variable jackpot, the V large winning hole is opened, but the player can also hit the right while the display urging the player to hit the right is being displayed to make the game ball enter the V large winning hole and obtain the right to be controlled in the probability variable state. Therefore, by hitting to the right while a display is being displayed encouraging the player to hit to the right, the player may gain an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the fourth symbol unit 50 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 51 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 52 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 53 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 54 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 55 that encourages the player to hit to the right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 53 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 54 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

In the following, the variation display of the first special symbol (variable display) will be described as representing the variation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 1 variable display section 53. Also called. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 54 is also referred to as a variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol. to be called.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50 lights up (lights up), prompting the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 55 is turned off. The production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 55 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting designation command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and displays the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After the determination is made, the right-handed player display section 55 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed player display extinguishing designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 55 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 55 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

Figure 4 (c) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fourth symbol unit and the game effect lamp. In the pachinko game machine 1, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a front fluctuation pattern command and a rear fluctuation pattern command, or a symbol determination command, among the performance control commands, the fourth symbol unit 50 and the game effect lamp are made to differ in whether or not they switch their lighting state, such as on/blinking/off. The front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are commands output from the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, which will be described later, to the performance control CPU 120 of the performance control board 12, and the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are output from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120 as a set. Hereinafter, the front fluctuation pattern command and the rear fluctuation pattern command are collectively referred to as fluctuation pattern commands.

Specifically, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special symbol 1 variable display 53 and the special symbol 2 variable display 54) in the fourth symbol unit 50. For example, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the first special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 1 variable display 53 from off, which indicates that the first special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates that the first special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command. Also, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a variation pattern command corresponding to the second special symbol game from the CPU 103, it switches the lighting state of the special symbol 2 variable display 54 from off, which indicates that the second special symbol has stopped, to blinking, which indicates that the second special symbol is varying, based on the received variation pattern command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamp, but maintains the lighting state before receiving the variation pattern command.

In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it changes the lighting state of the LEDs (the special pattern 1 variable display 53 and the special pattern 2 variable display 54) in the fourth pattern unit 50. For example, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of the pattern variation in the first special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 1 variable display 53 from blinking, which indicates the variation of the first special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the first special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command. In addition, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103 that specifies the end of the pattern variation in the second special pattern game, it switches the lighting state of the special pattern 2 variable display 54 from blinking, which indicates the variation of the second special pattern, to off, which indicates the stop of the second special pattern, based on the received pattern determination command.

On the other hand, even if the performance control CPU 120 receives a pattern determination command from the CPU 103, it does not change the lighting state of the LEDs (frame lamps, etc.) in the game effect lamp, but maintains the lighting state before the pattern determination command was received.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp (LED) in the fourth pattern unit 50 changes in response to receiving a variation pattern command or a pattern determination command. In contrast, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the state of the lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is maintained before and after receiving the command, regardless of whether the variation pattern command or the pattern determination command has been received. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 in response to receiving a variation pattern command. For example, when the game state changes from the normal state to the time-saving state after a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may change the state of the game effect lamp 9 from the lighting state in the normal state to the lighting state in the time-saving state in response to receiving a variation pattern command that starts the time-saving state.

FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 displays images such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (designs indicating numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

At the lower end of the screen of the image display device 5, there is a first pending memory display area 5D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A displayable second pending storage display area 5U and an active display area 5A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display are provided.

At the upper right end of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth symbol 5J indicating that a special symbol is being variably displayed is displayed. At the bottom of the fourth symbol 5J, numbers indicating the first pending memory number and the second pending memory number are displayed. As for the numbers indicating the number of reservations, the left side shows the first reservation storage number, and the right side shows the second reservation storage number. At the bottom of the display showing the number of reservations, a small pattern 5M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the ornamental symbols are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction. Moreover, the small pattern 5M is a pattern that is always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 5, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is arranged at the right end of the screen of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 5(a), the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or nearly rectangular, but the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edges of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edges) cannot be seen or is difficult to see because of the game board 2.

<Substrate configuration>
FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining various boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port for inputting various signals (detection signals described later), and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 20, etc., solenoid drive signals). It consists of:

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals ( A detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image, and supplies brightness data (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the LED driver in order to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The performance control CPU 120 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

As will be described in detail later, each game effect lamp has a game effect lamp LED board on which an LED (lamp) and an LED driver that supplies current to the LED are mounted. The LED driver lights/blinks/extinguishes the game effect lamp 9 by adjusting the current to each LED (lamp) included in the game effect lamp 9 based on the brightness data from the performance control CPU 120. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 controls lighting/blinking/extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and transmits various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, brightness data signal). It consists of an output port for

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12 and the sound control board 13, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The fourth symbol unit 50 is connected to the production control board 12, and is capable of lighting up (blinking) each display section under the control of the production control CPU 120.

<Outline of game progress>
In the pachinko game machine 1 having the above-mentioned configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started by the special game 1 variable display unit 21 of the special game LED board 20.

When the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special pattern game by the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 20 is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (if a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special figure game, a combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 and the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20 is a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol, described later). The actual pattern differs depending on the type of jackpot.) When a combination of lighting modes corresponding to the above is achieved, a "jackpot" is achieved. In addition, in the combination of lighting modes of a plurality of LEDs provided in the special figure 1 variable display section 21 and the special figure 2 variable display section 22 of the special figure LED board 20, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is also referred to as a "specific display result." In addition, the combination of lighting modes of the plurality of LEDs provided in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22 of the special pattern LED board 20 corresponds to a special pattern (losing pattern) that is different from the jackpot pattern. When a combination of lighting modes is reached, the result is a "lose". In addition, it corresponds to a special symbol (losing symbol) different from the jackpot symbol in the combination of lighting modes of multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22 of the special symbol LED board 20. This lighting mode is also referred to as a "lost display result."

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot", the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player. It may also be controlled to a small jackpot game state as an advantageous state. A small jackpot is a win in which the number of times the large prize opening is allowed to open is smaller than that of a jackpot. It should be noted that when the small jackpot game state ends, the game state does not change. In other words, there is no transition from a special jackpot state to a normal state or from a normal state to a special jackpot state before or after the small jackpot game state. Also, like the jackpot types, a small jackpot type may be set for a "small jackpot".

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the game may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of a common figure (the period during which a common figure changes) is shorter than in the normal state, and the probability of hitting a "normal figure" in the common figure game is improved compared to the normal state. Accordingly, control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Note that the gaming state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. Note that the presentation is performed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting of the game effect lamp 9, etc. The effect may be performed by turning off the lights, moving the movable body 32, or using any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach. Further, the super reach includes the first half of the super reach that ends with the first half of the super reach, the second half of the super reach that develops from the first half of the super reach, and the final reach that develops from the first half of the super reach. In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived during the normal reach. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. Moreover, the jackpot reliability is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the final reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the latter half of the super reach. In addition, in the following, "super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", "first half of super reach" is "SP first half (SP first half reach)", "second half of super reach" is "SP second half (SP second half reach)", " "Final reach" is also referred to as "SP final (SP final reach)".

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "jackpot" (the specific display result described above), a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, the odd numbered decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and the even numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with a non-probability jackpot symbol, a promotion effect that finally results in a "probability jackpot" may be executed. As a promotion effect, for example, a re-lottery effect may be executed to incite whether or not to promote to a probability jackpot symbol after a non-probability jackpot symbol (normal symbol) is temporarily stopped as a jackpot display result. Also, a round promotion effect may be executed during the jackpot game state to promote from a non-probability jackpot to a probability jackpot.

If the display result of the special figure game is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to "losing" (the above-mentioned losing display result), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will not be the reach mode, but the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be changed. As a display result, a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also referred to as a "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns may become a "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, other effects, such as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

<Various tables related to jackpots>
Various tables relating to big wins will be described with reference to Figures 7 and 8.

[Win type]
FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the winning types. As shown in FIG. 7, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the base after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the number of openings in the jackpot ( number of rounds) is shown.

Specifically, there are three types of jackpots: normal jackpot 1 and 2, and special jackpot 1 to 9. In the following, each round may be indicated with the letter "R." For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of a 3-round jackpot game state. In normal jackpot 1, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of three rounds. In normal jackpot 2, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the three rounds of jackpot game states. In the probability variable jackpot 1, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 6, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Probable variable jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 7th round jackpot game state. In the probability variable jackpot 7, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable probability jackpots 8 and 9 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In probability variable jackpots 8 and 9, such a high probability high base state continues until the variable display (special symbol variation) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Random numbers]
Fig. 8 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in Fig. 8, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot has been reached. Random 1 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, after which it is incremented again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the type of jackpot.

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining a post-variation pattern) that determine a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as a post-variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to a post-variation among the variation patterns. The later variation refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the special symbol. Note that Random 3 is a random counter that determines the post-fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a loss.For example, it is updated by 1, and then added and updated from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then added again from 1. Updated. Random 4 is a random counter that determines a post-variation pattern corresponding to the winning time, and for example, is incremented and updated from 1 to 239, which is the upper limit, and then added and updated again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining the previous variation pattern) that determines a variation pattern (hereinafter referred to as the previous variation pattern) (variation time) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns. The front fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the fluctuation of the special symbol. Random 5, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 until it reaches the upper limit of 251, and then is updated again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 6, for example, is updated by adding 1 from 1 to the upper limit of 201, and then is updated again from 1.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots will be the jackpot is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

In addition, first, the post-variation pattern is determined according to the hit or loss using the random numbers for determining the post-variation pattern (Random 3, 4), and the pre-variation pattern is determined using the random number for determining the pre-variation pattern (Random 5). be done. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

[Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table]
9 is a diagram for explaining the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 9(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal time jackpot determination table, jackpot determination values are set as many as the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 9(a), and in the variable probability jackpot determination table, the jackpot determination values are set in the lower column of FIG. 9(a). Jackpot determination values are set for the number of determination values listed in . The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table when the probability is variable is the same as the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table during normal times, by adding the jackpot judgment value unique to the jackpot judgment value when the probability is variable. A larger number of jackpot judgment values than the jackpot judgment table are set. As a result, in the variable probability state, a jackpot is determined with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that FIG. 9(a) shows the probability (percentage) of a jackpot or the probability (percentage) of a miss.

FIGS. 9(b) and 9(c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 9(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 9(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(b) contains numerical values that are compared with the random 2 value for determining the jackpot type, and correspond to normal jackpots 1 and 2 and probability variable jackpots 1 to 4. Judgment values are set for the number of judgment values that have been set. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(b), for the first special figure, the normal jackpot 1 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the normal jackpot 2 is assigned the value of 25 random 2s out of 100 random 2s. 25 random 2 values out of 1 are assigned, probability variable jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 2 is assigned 37 out of 100 random 2 values. random 2 values are assigned, probability variable jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s, and probability variable jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2s. is assigned a value of

In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 9(c), judgment values are set as many as the number of judgment values corresponding to each of probability variable jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of random 2. has been done. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(c), for the second special figure, the probability variable jackpot 5 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s out of 100 random 2s, and the probability variable jackpot 6 is assigned the value of 10 random 2s. 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's are assigned, probability variable jackpot 7 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's, and probability variable jackpot 8 is assigned 70 random 2 values out of 100 random 2's. 10 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values are assigned to probability variable jackpot 9.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 2 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

<Production control command>
FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main side control board, transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a previous variation (previous variation pattern) among variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the previous fluctuation pattern). The front variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the first half of the variation in the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command corresponding to each of the previous variation patterns specified by the number.

Command 84XX(H) is a variation pattern that specifies a variation pattern corresponding to a later variation (later variation pattern) among the variation patterns of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. This is a command (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The after variation on the sub side refers to the variation in the latter half of the variation of the decorative symbol variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. When a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns, there is a post-fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each post-fluctuation pattern specified by the number.

The front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command are sent as a set from the CPU 103 to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 cannot identify the variation pattern by receiving only one of the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command, but can identify the variation pattern by receiving both the front variation pattern command and the rear variation pattern command.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8101 (H) or command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07 (H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08(H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09(H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11(H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12(H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that probability jackpot 9 has been determined. Each of the miss designation command, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and probability jackpot 1 to 9 designation commands, or these collectively, is also referred to as an 8C series command.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the variation of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies that the initial screen at power on is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies power outage recovery (specifies that the power outage recovery screen is displayed) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state specification command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special-variable state specification command that specifies the background of the special-variable state. The normal state specification command, time-saving state specification command, and special-variable state specification command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 95 series commands or background specification commands.

Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies transition to a customer waiting demonstration display. The performance control CPU 120 determines that there is currently no reservation after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Then, the production control CPU 120 causes the demonstration video to be displayed on the image display device 5 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Note that the performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a demonstration lamp mode 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command. Note that the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 for demonstration is more lively (higher brightness, more flashing modes, rainbow lighting, etc.) than the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 in the normal state. Thereby, the appeal of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be shown to the players. In addition, in the demonstration display while waiting for a customer, a background in a normal state (hereinafter also referred to as a normal background) is displayed, and decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. Further, in the demonstration display while waiting for a customer, the title of the gaming machine 1 (for example, "POWER FUL II") may be displayed, or an introductory image (still image or video) of a part of the performance may be displayed.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a special jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a special jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a special jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a special jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a special jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a special jackpot start 9 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a special jackpot start 10 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a special jackpot start 11 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 designation command that designates the end of probability variable jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1 to 11 designation commands or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passing designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a variation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates the winning judgment results, such as whether or not a winning will occur and the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

<Variation pattern>
The contents of the variation pattern, determination of the variation pattern, etc. will be explained with reference to FIGS. 11 to 17.

In this embodiment, multiple types of variation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each variation pattern is managed by a main variation number and is composed of a combination of a front variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a front variation and a back variation pattern that is a variation pattern corresponding to a back variation, and each combination contains different contents. The front variation pattern corresponds to the front variation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using FIG. 10, and the back variation pattern corresponds to the back variation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using FIG. 10.

[Main side previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a pre-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of previous variation patterns each assigned a previous variation number, the previous variation number 1 is a previous variation pattern command (8000 (H)) that specifies a normal variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern for 13 seconds). It is. The previous variation number 2 is a previous variation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). The pre-variation number 3 is a pre-variation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super-shortened variation (for example, a variation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Previous change number 4 is a previous change pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (normal or SP first half) (a reach that ends in a normal reach or SP first half reach after entering a reach state). Previous change number 5 is a previous change pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (SP second half development) (a reach that develops into an SP second half reach after entering a reach state). Previous change number 6 is a previous change pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that develops into a final reach after entering a reach state).

Pre-variation number 7 is a pre-variation pattern command (8006(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or SP first half) is executed after one pseudo variation. Pseudo-variation means that after the variable display (variable display) of a decorative pattern starts until the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the variable display is temporarily stopped and then restarted. This is a variable display (variable display). A performance that repeats such pseudo fluctuations is also called a pseudo-run. By executing the pseudo series, a variable display based on one suspended memory can be shown to the player as if it were a plurality of pseudo variable displays. Note that a variable display that restarts after being temporarily stopped is also referred to as a "re-variable display." Pre-variation number 8 is a pre-variation pattern command (8007(H)) that specifies to execute a normal reach (SP second half development) after one pseudo variation. Pre-variation number 9 is a pre-variation pattern command (8008(H)) that specifies normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo variation.

Previous change number 10 is a previous change pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (normal or first half of SP) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 11 is a previous change pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (second half of SP development) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 12 is a previous change pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after two pseudo changes.

A change time is specified for each previous change pattern, and an animation (video) is displayed on the image display device 5 for each change time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (called a frame) that makes up the video. For example, for patterns with previous change numbers 7 to 9, the change time is set to 41,500 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,246. For patterns with previous change numbers 10 to 12, the change time is set to 62,000 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,861.

[Main side post-variation pattern]
FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-variation pattern on the main side. Among the plurality of types of post-fluctuation patterns to which post-fluctuation numbers are assigned, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second variation. Post-variation number 2 is a post-variation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second variation. Post-variation number 3 is a post-variation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second variation. Post-variation number 4 is a post-variation pattern command (8403(H)) that designates execution of a pseudo continuous sequence. Pseudo-sequence is a performance that pretends to execute a pseudo-sequence but ends up not executing the pseudo-sequence.

Post-variation number 5 is a post-variation pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (loss) (a variation of a decorative symbol that becomes a reach mode but becomes a loss mode without developing into an SP reach). Post-variation number 6 is a post-variation pattern command (8405 (H)) that specifies the first half of SP (loss) (a variation of the decorative symbol that develops into SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the first half of SP reach). Post-variation number 7 is a post-variation pattern command (8406 (H)) that specifies the second half of SP (loss) (a variation of decorative symbols that develops in the second half of SP reach but becomes a loss mode in the second half of SP reach). Post-variation number 8 is a post-variation pattern command (8407 (H)) that specifies the final reach (loss) (a variation of the decorative pattern that develops into the final reach but becomes a loss mode in the final reach).

Later change number 9 is a later change pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and then a hit state). Later change number 10 is a later change pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 11 is a later change pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 12 is a later change pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies a final reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach and then becomes a hit state in the final reach).

[Determination of Later Fluctuation Pattern]
The after-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a miss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the after-variation pattern determination table in the case of a miss. As shown in FIG. 13, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using the random 3 described in FIG. 8. Furthermore, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using different judgment value numbers according to the number of reserved memories after consumption, and the after-variation number determined is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13(a), when the number of reserved memories after consumption is 0, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. Note that the probability of determining one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is one, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of retained memories after digestion is two, one of the post-fluctuation patterns is determined from post-fluctuation numbers 2, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different number of judgment values is provided for each post-fluctuation pattern. ing. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of post variation numbers 6 to 8 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is three, one of the following change patterns is determined from the following change numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each following change pattern. The probability that one of the following change numbers 6 to 8 that develops into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of following change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the subsequent variation pattern is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, and further, the subsequent variation number is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, so the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, which adds variety to the game and increases the interest of the game.

Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in Figure 14, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using Random 4 described in Figure 8. Furthermore, if a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14(a), when a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8 is determined, a post-change pattern is determined from post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability of determining one of post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develops into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If either the guaranteed jackpot 3 or 9 is determined, one of the post-change patterns is determined from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12 that develop into the SP reach or final reach (selection rate of the post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

When the probability variable jackpot is determined to be 4, one of the later variation patterns is determined from among the later variation numbers 9 to 12, and a different number of determination values is provided for each of the later variation patterns. Note that the probability of being determined to be one of the post variation numbers 10 to 12 that develops into SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post variation numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, since the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using a different number of judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, and this makes it possible to add variety to the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13, the probability of being determined to be one of the variable numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP Reach or Final Reach is approximately 1/102 when there is a miss, but is higher at approximately 1/1.1 when there is a jackpot, so that if there is a development into the SP Reach or Final Reach, the player can be made to expect a jackpot to occur.

[Judgment of previous fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the previous variation pattern determination table. The pre-fluctuation pattern is determined using the number of random 5 determination values that differ depending on the type of the pre-determined post-fluctuation pattern. Further, the pre-variation number to be determined also differs depending on the type of the post-variation pattern previously determined.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 1 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(b), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 2 is determined, the previous variation pattern with the previous variation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 3 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(d), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 4 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with pre-variation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(e), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 5 or 9 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4 or 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(f), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 6 or 10 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4, 7, or 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(g), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 7 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 15(h), when the post-variation pattern with post-variation number 11 is determined, the pre-variation pattern with any of pre-variation numbers 5, 8, and 11 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(i), when the after fluctuation pattern with the after fluctuation number 8 is determined, the previous fluctuation pattern with any of the previous fluctuation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined. As shown in FIG. 15(j), when the subsequent variation pattern with the subsequent variation number 12 is determined, the previous variation pattern with any of the previous variation numbers 6, 9, and 12 is determined.

[Total fluctuation pattern]
FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of a total variation pattern on the main side. When the post-variation pattern and the pre-variation pattern are determined as explained in FIGS. 13 to 15, one of the variation patterns with main variation numbers 1 to 26 as shown in FIG. 16 will be obtained.

Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining an example of the lottery of a presentation pattern on the sub side. As shown in Figure 17, the presentation control CPU 120 on the sub side determines the presentation pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103 on the main side.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 7 to 9 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A miss pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B miss pattern performance. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 18 to 20 from the CPU 103, it determines from among the multiple types of reach performances to either the SP first half reach A hit pattern performance described below, or the SP first half reach B hit pattern performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 10 to 12 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a production of a loss pattern of SP second half reach A, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or SP Decide on one of the second half reach B losing pattern productions. When the effect control CPU 120 receives a variation pattern command corresponding to any of the main variation numbers 21 to 23 from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 performs a SP second half reach A winning pattern production, which will be described later, among multiple types of reach production, or SP Decide on one of the second half reach B winning pattern productions.

<Operation>
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

[Main operations of main board 11]
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design process processing)
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in an off state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the setting confirmation process (step S5) after executing the recovery process (step S4). The CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 through the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes the initialization process (step S6) and then executes the setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc., are stopped, and control may be performed such that a missing symbol or the like is frozen and a display corresponding to a game stop state other than a missing symbol is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102 based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor or the like. The display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the settings are being confirmed or that the settings are being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). The CPU 103 then sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Timer interrupt processing for game control)
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of game control timer interrupt processing. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and can generate a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. Data such as information (information indicating the number of starting winnings, etc.), probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability change state, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing every time the timer interrupts, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting up the normal symbol memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. The special symbol process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 19. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a starting winning, storing pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and a pre-read judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of starting winning that is set to be transmitted in this way is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S117), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot" and, if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also called "winning order consumption").

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using random values for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the displayed result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol change process includes a process of making settings to change the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special symbol started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special symbol started to change reaches the special symbol change time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol change process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stopping process involves stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display section 22, and stopping and displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbol. Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "lose", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the game state after the jackpot game ends is controlled to a probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, and the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the assignment of determination values in the fluctuation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the start winning judgment process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning judgment process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 20. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (step S51). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step S52 (N in step S52), the storage value of a start port buffer provided in a game control buffer setting section (not shown), for example, is set to "1" (step S53).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (step S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), it is judged whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown. If the number of reserved second special charts is not the upper limit in step S55 (N in step S55), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (step S56).

After executing either step S53 or step S56, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. Also, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count is also updated to add 1 (step S58). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM 1 for determining a jackpot, the random number value RANDOM 2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number values RANDOM 3 and RANDOM 4 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (step S59). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot and the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the result of the variable display of the special and decorative patterns is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the result of the variable display is a "jackpot". The random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variable pattern are used to determine the variable pattern including the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns.

Following the process of step S59, transmission setting of a starting opening winning prize designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S60). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the effect control board 12 Settings are made to send the first start prize designation command to. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, 2. Configure settings for sending the start prize designation command. The start winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 19 after the special symbol process process is completed. Ru.

Following the process of step S60, the CPU 103 stores the random number value in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage (step S61). Thereafter, the CPU 103 clears the starting opening buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the starting winning determination process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 22, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first reservation storage buffer (a storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reservation storage buffer (the storage buffer for storing reservation storage information of the second special symbol). It is determined whether there is any pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information (step S1001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step S1001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation stopped (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step S1002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation was stopped (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step S1003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step S1004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step S1005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step S1006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Through the control in steps S1004 to S1006, if even one piece of data in the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data in the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step S1009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step S1010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a variable-probability jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (the table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 9(a) are set), and a table in which the number of jackpot determination values is A normal jackpot judgment table (table in which the numerical values in the upper column of FIG. 9(a) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the jackpot judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 9(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step S1011), the process moves to step S1012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step S1011), the process advances to step S1015, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random 1) matches any jackpot determination value in step S1011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type shown in FIG. 9(c) are tables used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the determination tables. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9(b). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 9(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and stores them in the pending storage buffer using the selected jackpot type determination table. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 2) for jackpot type determination are determined (step S1013).

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol to be stopped (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the special symbol is set to a "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol is set to the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step S1016) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 23, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on Random 3 and Random 4 according to the number of reserved memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a miss, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13 according to the number of reserved memories, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 3. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 4.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the front fluctuation pattern based on the random 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects a front fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 15 according to the rear fluctuation pattern determined in S1102, and determines the front fluctuation pattern based on the selected front fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of the random 5.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern (previous variation pattern and subsequent variation pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special symbol fluctuation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S1201), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), the value of the special symbol process flag is changed to the special symbol It is updated to a value corresponding to the stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N in step S1202), the process ends.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 25, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 (step S1301). If the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 is ended, and if the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step S1304). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROM 101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times to open (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In the case of a jackpot of 5R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 3R and 5R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 4R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a jackpot of 10R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 8R and 10R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 9R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

Further, a value corresponding to a fanfare time (a time for notifying the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5, for example) that is a jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step S1309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the process moves to step S1316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step S1311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step S1311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step S1312). Thereby, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (100 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step S1311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process moves to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step S1313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step S1313), the probability variation flag is reset (step S1314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step S1315), and proceeds to step S1316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process moves to step S1315 without performing the process in step S1314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in Fig. 26, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by -1 (subtract update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is terminated.

When the value of the big winning hole control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a big winning hole opening designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step S1404). As a result, in the 1st round, the normal big prize opening is opened.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (e.g., data stored in RAM 102 by step S1306) (step S1405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and ends the process.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 27, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step S1502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open (step S1503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

In step S1503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 24 is on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability determination flag is set (step S1506). The high probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled to the high probability state when a V win occurs. If the high probability determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the high probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step S1507), the high probability determination flag is set (step S1508), a high probability determination device pass command is sent (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V large prize opening (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates (step S1513) the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (step S116), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
28 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win release post-processing. As shown in Fig. 28, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the opening number counter is 0 or not (step S1601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (for example, the time at which the image display device 5 notifies the user that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), and the process ends.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V large prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the jackpot opening is in progress (step S1610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot termination process. As shown in FIG. 29, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process ends. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process moves to step S1705. In step S1704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step S1704), a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is present is set (step S1707). Next, a probability variation state designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), a probability variation determination flag is reset (step S1709), and the process moves to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step S1710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 100 (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, in step S1704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step S1704), in step S1705, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is in effect is set (step S1705), and a time saving number counter is set to 100. (step S1706), and the process moves to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

[Major operations of the performance control board 12]
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described.

(Production control main processing)
When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the production control main process. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. The performance control process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 30. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 31, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a judgment, decision, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice performance is performed based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the reserved display is executed based on the reserved memory number specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display rendering process in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the rendering process flag is "2". In this variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , by driving the movable body 32, by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, by outputting a command (lamp control data) to the LED driver. Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/blinking the game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., a determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in FIG. 32, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a loss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a loss, the production control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variation pattern has been received as a variation pattern command (step S7103).

When determining that the command corresponding to the non-reach variation pattern has been received, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result of a loss that does not become a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol using the data table for determining a loss symbol (step S7105), the process advances to step S7106.

If the process of step S7103 determines that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (if the pattern is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern), the stopping patterns of the performance patterns that make up the reach pattern combination are determined (step S7104), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

In addition, if it is not determined to be a loss in the process of step S7101 (if it is determined to be a jackpot), the performance control CPU 101 configures a combination of jackpot symbols according to the type of jackpot. A stop symbol of the production symbol is determined (step S7102), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Next, after executing a performance setting process (step S7106) for setting various performances in the variable display, the process advances to step S7107. For example, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether or not it is a jackpot) in the performance setting process of step S7106. Specifically, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether to execute a cut-in performance shown in FIG. 128 (r41), which will be described later, as a performance that suggests a jackpot (incites whether it is a jackpot or not). In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 specifies whether or not the final reach will develop based on the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command, and if it develops into the final reach, the performance control CPU 101 determines whether or not it will develop into the final reach, based on the fluctuation pattern. Based on the identified result of whether or not it is a jackpot, determine whether or not to execute a cut-in effect, and if so, determine the type of cut-in effect (red cut-in effect, green cut-in effect). do. When executing a cut-in effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets information for executing the cut-in effect in the effect setting process.

In step S7107, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple types of performance control patterns. In step S7107, depending on the various performance control (performance operation) patterns specified by the variation pattern command and the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the processing of step S7106, one of the multiple types of pattern variation control patterns stored in the pattern variation control pattern table that corresponds to the various specified performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in the ROM 121 includes, for example, the performance symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from the start of variation of the performance symbols until the final stop symbol, which is the final stop symbol, is stopped and displayed. Multiple types of data indicating the control contents of various production operations such as the variation display operation in the reach production, the production display operation due to the pseudo series production, and the production display operation in the preview production are stored in multiple types as symbol variation control patterns. has been done.

In addition, each pattern change control pattern includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the display change of the performance pattern, such as a performance control process timer setting value, a performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, brightness data, and an end code, and the contents of various performance controls and the switching timing of the performance controls are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the process in step S7109, the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and Control of the speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is started (step S7110). For example, according to the display control execution data, a command is outputted to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a production pattern) according to the variation pattern. Further, in order to control lighting/extinguishing of light emitting bodies such as various LEDs, a control signal (lamp control data) is output to the LED driver. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step S7112), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

<Details of game progress>
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 21 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability-variable jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 30 of the special pattern LED board 20 and the right-handed hitting display section 55 of the fourth symbol unit 50. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times for a 3R regular jackpot, 10 times for a 10R jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

When the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). Further, when a V win occurs during a jackpot round, the gaming state is controlled to be variable in probability over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) controlled to be in a time saving state.

Even in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 30, and the right-hand game display section 55 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) more than in the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) more than in the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game more than in the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (high entry, high frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 22 changes to a display mode showing a jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the second special figure game include probability-variable jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 30, and the right-handed hitting display section 55 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening opens a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending performance after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times), similar to the first winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 30, and the right-handed hitting display section 55 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 30, and right-handed hitting display section 55 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area.

<Flow of the production>
Next, the flow of a series of effects executed in the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. FIG. 33 is a diagram for explaining the flow of a series of effects. In the pachinko game machine 1, a notification effect is executed from when the variable display starts until the variable display stops. The notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether the variation of the special chart and the decorative pattern stops in a manner indicating a jackpot, that is, whether the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The notification effect is formed of a plurality of parts of effects, and in this embodiment, includes a start part, an instigation part, a winning epilogue part, a losing epilogue part, a role operation part, a relief winning part, a re-lottery part, and a fanfare part. After the re-lottery part, a fanfare part is executed until the game state transitions to a jackpot game state. The instigation part is also called an introduction part. The winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part are also collectively called an epilogue part.

[Start part]
The start part is a part where the performance corresponding to the previous variation pattern is executed. The start part is also a part that indicates the period from when the variation starts to when the pseudo consecutive or normal reach is executed until the SP reach starts. The start part also includes variations that are not reach misses.

[Inciting part (introduction part)]
The teasing part (introduction part) includes the start of the SP reach (also called super reach) (the start timing of the SP reach title display) to the timing of the branching to a big hit or a miss. The teasing part is a part that teases whether it will be a big hit or a miss depending on the performance that is executed. The teasing part includes a part corresponding to the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B that is executed after the start part, and a part corresponding to any of the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach that develop from the SP first half reach. Note that the SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP first half, and the SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP final reach are sometimes collectively referred to as the SP second half.

[Epilogue part]
The epilogue part includes a winning epilogue part which notifies the player that a jackpot display result will be obtained after each promotion part, and a losing epilogue part which notifies the player that a losing display result will be obtained. In the winning epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed based on a story development such that the player is notified that the changing symbols will be a jackpot display result and the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In the losing epilogue part, at least in the final part of the epilogue part, a performance is executed based on a story development such that the player is notified that the changing symbols will be a losing display result and the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in the epilogue part, the notification of the jackpot display result may be made by moving the role when the win/loss notification is made after the introduction part, as in the final reach described later, or by the story development on the liquid crystal (image display device 5) without using the role, as in the SP reach other than the final reach. Among the epilogue parts, the winning epilogue part that notifies by moving the role is also called the win/loss notification part. Specifically, in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, if a jackpot occurs, the winning epilogue part as described above notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the losing epilogue part notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. The initial story development in the story presentation may also suggest whether or not there is a win. On the other hand, in the final reach, in the epilogue part executed after the introduction part, first there is a branch as to whether or not the jackpot game state will be controlled by the operation of the jackpot by the hit/miss notification part (device operation part), and then, if a jackpot occurs, the hit epilogue part as described above notifies that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal, and if a jackpot does not occur, the miss epilogue part notifies that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state as the conclusion of the story presentation using the liquid crystal. In this way, the hit epilogue part in the final reach includes a hit/miss notification part and the hit epilogue part or miss epilogue part that comes afterwards.

In addition, corresponding to SP first half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP first half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP first half reach B are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach A, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach A are executed. Corresponding to SP second half reach B, a winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B and a loss epilogue part of SP second half reach B are executed. Corresponding to the SP final reach, a winning epilogue part of the SP final reach and a loss epilogue part of the SP final reach are executed.

[Role actor movement part]
The reel operation part is a part corresponding to the period during which the performance indicating the progression from the first half of the SP to the second half of the SP is executed by operating the movable body 32. The reel operation part is executed after the provocation part of the SP first half reach A or the provocation part of the SP first half reach B. After the reel operation part, either the provocation part of the SP second half reach A, the provocation part of the SP second half reach B, or the provocation part of the SP final reach is executed.

[Relief part]
The rescue hit part is a part where a rescue hit performance is executed that initially appears to be a miss and then suggests a big hit. The rescue hit part may develop from any of the miss epilogue parts of the SP latter half reach A, the miss epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, or the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

[Re-lottery part]
The re-lottery part is a part that is executed after the winning epilogue part in which the jackpot display result is displayed. Specifically, the re-lottery performance is the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of first half of SP reach B, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach A, the winning epilogue part of second half of SP reach B, and the winning epilogue part of SP final reach. Executed after the win epilogue part and the rescue win part. In addition, in this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after each winning part (winning epilogue part, relief winning part), but there may be cases where the re-lottery presentation part does not proceed. For example, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the relief part, the re-lottery part may not be executed after the winning epilogue part, or the jackpot display result may be a variable probability symbol (probably variable). The re-lottery part may not be executed when an odd number symbol (shown in the figure) is derived.

[Relationship before and after the decision]
Next, an example of a case where a series of performances is divided by the timing before and after the hit/miss determination will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram for explaining the relationship before and after the hit/miss determination, the SP first half reach A big hit, and the SP final reach big hit. Here, the hit/miss determination is a performance that indicates a branch of whether the result is a big hit or a miss display result at the final stage of the hype part. As shown in FIG. 34(A), a series of performances can be divided into parts that are executed before and after the hit/miss determination at the timing before and after the hit/miss determination from the start of the fluctuation to the stop of the fluctuation. The part before the hit/miss determination includes a start part and a hype part. In addition, the part after the hit/miss determination includes an epilogue part (hit, miss), a relief hit part, and a re-draw part.

In this way, the series of effects from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation is made up of multiple parts. Also, the period from the start of fluctuation to the end of fluctuation can be divided into before and after the start of the SP reach (start of post-fluctuation). In such a case, the period before the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the pre-fluctuation described above, and the period after the start of the SP reach corresponds to the fluctuation pattern of the post-fluctuation described above.

Next, the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 20, which is the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot among the fluctuation patterns, will be explained using FIG. 34(B). In the variation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the starting part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (later variation start). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-variation) to the determination of validity is the inciting part (SP first half reach A). In the fluctuation pattern of the SP first half reach A jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of the success or failure decision. The period from the determination of success to the start of the re-lottery performance is the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit). Then, the period from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of the variation becomes the re-lottery part. For example, in the fluctuation pattern of SP first half reach A jackpot, the start part is 60 seconds, the incitement part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the epilogue part (SP first half reach A hit) is 15 seconds, and the re-drawing part is 20 seconds. A time has been set for this.

Next, the variation pattern of main variation number 26, which is the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, will be explained using FIG. 34(C). In the variation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the starting part is from the start of variation to the start of SP reach (post-variation start). Then, the period from the start of SP reach (start of post-fluctuation) to the development of the second half of SP becomes the inciting part (first half of SP reach A). The incitement part (SP final reach) is from the development of the second half of the SP to the determination of validity. In the fluctuation pattern of the SP final reach jackpot, the accessory does not move at the timing of the success/fail determination. The period from the determination of success to the start of the re-lottery performance is the epilogue part (SP final reach hit). Then, the period from the start of the re-lottery performance to the stop of the variation becomes the re-lottery part. For example, in the SP final reach jackpot variation pattern, the start part is 60 seconds, the incitement part (SP first half reach A) is 20 seconds, the incitement part (SP final reach) is 25 seconds, and the epilogue part (SP final reach) is 30 seconds. The time is set such that the re-lottery part is 20 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 34(B) and (C), the SP final reach, which has a higher expectation level, has a longer fluctuation time than the SP first half reach A. In addition, the total duration of the incitement part and the duration of the epilogue part are longer in the SP final reach, which has higher expectations than in the first half of SP reach A. As a result, the period of excitement for the player can be lengthened as the variation has a higher degree of expectation, and the lingering time when a win can be lengthened, thereby increasing the sense of celebration.

<About the scenario>
Next, the correspondence between the performance contents executed in the series of performances and the game effect lamps 9 will be explained using the scenarios for each part. The scenario described here serves as a script summarizing the contents of each scene in the series of performances. The scenario for each part corresponds to a diagram for explaining the performance mode corresponding to each part, which will be described later. The contents of the performances executed on the screen of the image display device 5 and the mode of the game effect lamps 9 will be described in detail using diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later. Below, the correspondence between the diagrams for explaining the scenarios for each part and the diagrams for explaining the performance modes, which will be described later, will be explained.

FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the start part. The scenario of the start part corresponding to number 1 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 55 to 61, which will be described later. FIG. 36 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the inciting part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 2 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 62 to 67, which will be described later. FIG. 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 3 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 68 to 69, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) corresponding to number 4 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 70 to 71, which will be described later.

Figure 38 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the instigation part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the instigation part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 5 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 72 to 77 described later. Figure 39 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 6 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 78 to 80 described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach B) corresponding to number 7 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figures 81 to 82 described later. Figure 40 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the reel operation part (at the time of SP second half development). The scenario of the reel operation part (at the time of SP second half development) corresponding to number 8 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 83 described later.

Figure 41 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the provocative part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 9 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 84 to 96, which will be described later. Figure 42 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 10 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 97 to 98, which will be described later. The scenario of the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A) corresponding to number 11 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in Figures 99 to 100, which will be described later.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the inciting part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 12 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 101 to 109, which will be described later. FIG. 44 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) and the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 13 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 110 to 112, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP second half reach B) corresponding to number 14 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 113 to 114, which will be described later.

FIG. 45 and FIG. 46 are diagrams for explaining the scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach). The scenario of the inciting part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 15 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the performance modes of FIGS. 115 to 132, which will be described later. FIG. 47 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) and the losing epilogue part (SP final reach). The scenario of the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 16 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 133 to 136, which will be described later. The scenario of the lose-lose epilogue part (SP final reach) corresponding to number 17 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 137 to 138, which will be described later. FIG. 48 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the relief part. The scenario of the relief hit part corresponding to number 18 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the production mode shown in FIGS. 139 to 140, which will be described later.

Figure 49 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation). The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 19 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 141 to 156 described later. Figure 50 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario of the re-draw part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) corresponding to number 20 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation modes of Figures 157 to 159 described later. The scenario of the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in Figure 33 corresponds to the presentation mode of Figure 160 described later. Figure 51 is a diagram for explaining the scenario of the re-draw part (deriving even symbols after button operation) and the fanfare part. The scenario for the re-draw part (deriving an even number after pressing a button) corresponding to number 21 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation modes in FIG. 161 to FIG. 163, which will be described later. The scenario for the fanfare part corresponding to number 22 in FIG. 33 corresponds to the presentation mode in FIG. 164, which will be described later.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 lights/blinks/turns off one or more lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data for the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/blinking/lights out performed on lamps, such as LED, by CPU120 for performance control is also called lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the performance control board 12 store a brightness data table in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data table includes the error brightness data table used when an error occurs, and the SP reach brightness used in each part of the SP reach (incitement part, winning epilogue part, loss epilogue part, role model action part, etc.) It includes a data table and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare performance is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in a jackpot game state, an ending background brightness data table used in an ending state in which an ending performance is executed to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability variable background brightness data table used in a high probability high base state (probability variable state).

Each of the background brightness data tables described above is used without overlapping, and is controlled to any one of a plurality of gaming states such as a normal state, a fanfare state, a jackpot gaming state, an ending state, and a variable probability state. One of the background brightness data tables is used depending on the background brightness data table. That is, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each gaming state under control, and outputs brightness data based on the background brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, the priority level when used is determined for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, the priority level increases when the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table are used in this order.

For example, if SP reach occurs while outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state, the production control CPU 120 outputs the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach as the normal background. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background and it develops into SP reach, the mode corresponding to SP reach is based on the brightness data table for SP reach. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for background is normally not output to the LED driver, but after SP reach ends, the brightness data is normally output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and becomes the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. Output.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the game progresses to an SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table, but since the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that was being updated.

For example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during an SP Reach, the performance control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the error brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP Reach based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is released and the game state returns to the SP Reach state, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to that SP reach, but when an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error brightness data table corresponding to that error in preference to the SP reach brightness data table. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table, but since the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the error brightness data table, the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the SP reach luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that had been continuously updated.

<Lighting status of the game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 are controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the performance control CPU 120 as described above. Here, the lighting state of each game effect lamp 9 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 53 and 54. Figures 53 and 54 are diagrams for explaining the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9.

In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the attacker lamp 9E, the V attacker lamp 9F, and the electric chew lamp 9H, are used as "lights out", " Use terms such as "almost off," "on," and "blinking." Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data of the frame lamp is "000", the frame lamp is "extinguished". Further, when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights in white at extremely low luminance. In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RRRR (Red, Red, Red, Red) data defined as the brightness data of the reel lamp 9A is "0000", the reel lamp 9A is "off". Also, when the brightness data of the reel lamp 9A (RRRR data) is "1111", the reel lamp 9A is lit in red with extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the reel lamp 9A when the RRRR data is "1111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWWWW (White, White, White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the board left lamp 9B is "00000", the board left lamp 9B is "off". Also, when the brightness data (WWWWW data) of the board left lamp 9B is "11111", the board left lamp 9B is lit at an extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the board left lamp 9B when the WWWWW data is "11111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the attacker lamp 9E is "000", the attacker lamp 9E is "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacker lamp 9E is "111", the attacker lamp 9E is lit at extremely low brightness. In the present embodiment, the state of the attacker lamp 9E in which such RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the WWW (White, White, White) data defined as the brightness data of the V attacker lamp 9F is "000", the V attacker lamp 9F is "extinguished". Further, when the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacker lamp 9F is "111", the V attacker lamp 9F is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the V attacker lamp 9F in which the WWW data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X1), when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of the electric lamp 9H is "000", the electric lamp 9H is turned off. Further, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "111", the electric lamp 9H is lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the electric lamp 9H in which the RGB data is "111" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, wave lighting, in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." Note that the brightness data is hexadecimal data and can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

For example, as shown in FIG. 53 (X2), when the luminance data (RGB data) of the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 is "AAA", the frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12 are "lit", and especially in this case, Since the brightness is high, the lamps 9L1 to 9L12 on the left side of the frame are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 53 (X3), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is "AAA", the right frame lamps 9R2 to 9R12 are "lit", and especially in this case, the brightness is Because of the high temperature, the lamps 9R2 to 9R12 on the right side of the frame are lit brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X4), when the brightness data (RRRR data) of the accessory lamp 9A is "AAAA", the accessory lamp 9A is "lit", and especially in this case, since the brightness is high, the accessory lamp 9A is "lit". The object lamp 9A lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X5), when the brightness data (WWWW data) of the left panel lamp 9B is "AAAAA", the left panel lamp 9B is "lit", and in this particular case, since the brightness is high, the left panel lamp 9B lights up brightly.

As shown in FIG. 54 (X6), when the brightness data (RGB data) of the attacca lamp 9E is "AAA", the attacca lamp 9E "lights up", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the attacca lamp 9E lights up brightly. When the brightness data (WWW data) of the V attacca lamp 9F is "AAA", the V attacca lamp 9F "lights up", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the V attacca lamp 9F lights up brightly. When the brightness data (RGB data) of the electric lamp 9H is "AAA", the electric lamp 9H "lights up", and in this case, since the brightness is particularly high, the electric lamp 9H lights up brightly.

The term "blinking" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is in a state other than the above-mentioned "off" or "on" and in which the brightness of each lamp when it is on alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. For example, "blinking" includes repeating on and off or almost off, and specifically, "blinking" includes switching over time between a case in which the brightness data is any of "2" to "F" and a case in which the brightness data is "0" or "1". As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hazy lighting as a lighting state of the lamp, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing its brightness, whereas the blinking is a state in which all of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are repeatedly lit and off or almost off.

<Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1>
Next, the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 during a game will be described with reference to Figures 55 to 164. In this embodiment, the performance when any one of the main variable numbers 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26 is selected will be described.

Specifically, when the variation pattern of main variation number 9 is selected, among the multiple routes shown in FIG. 33, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part of SP first half reach A (2), and the miss epilogue part of SP first half reach A (4), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), the teasing part of SP first half reach B (5), and the miss epilogue part of SP first half reach B (7).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 12 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the losing epilogue part (11) of the second half of reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role-playing part (8), and the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B. (12), the production transitions in the order of the loss epilogue part (14) of the second half of SP reach B, the start part (1), the instigation part of reach B of the first half of SP (5), the character movement part (8), and the second half of SP The production transitions in the following order: Reach A's inciting part (9), SP second half Reach B's loss epilogue part (14), or start part (1), SP first half Reach B's inciting part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the promotion part (12) of SP second half reach B, and the loss epilogue part (14) of SP second half reach B.

When the variation pattern of main variation number 15 is selected, the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17), or the performance will transition in the following order: start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), reel operation part (8), SP final reach teasing part (15), SP final reach miss epilogue part (17).

When the variation pattern of main variation number 20 is selected, the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach A teasing part (2), and SP first half reach A winning epilogue part (3), or the performance will transition in the order of start part (1), SP first half reach B teasing part (5), and SP first half reach B winning epilogue part (6).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 20 is selected, the start part (1), SP first half reach A incitement part (2), accessory movement part (8), SP second half reach A incitement part (9), SP The production transitions in the order of the hit epilogue part (10) of the second half reach A, or the start part (1), the inciting part of the first half of the SP reach A (2), the role movement part (8), the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach B (12), the production transitions in the order of SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role-playing part (8), SP second half The production transitions in the following order: Reach A incitement part (9), SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (10), or start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), and role-playing part ( 8), the SP second half reach B incitement part (12), and the SP second half reach B hit epilogue part (13).

When the variation pattern with main variation number 26 is selected, the start part (1), the SP first half reach A incitement part (2), the accessory movement part (8), the SP final reach incitement part (15), and the SP final The production transitions in the order of reach epilogue part (16), start part (1), SP first half reach B incitement part (5), role-playing part (8), SP final reach incitement part (15) , and the SP final reach hit epilogue part (16).

Further, in the figure, the mode of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, the effect sounds output from the speakers 8L, 8R, etc. are also shown. In this embodiment, the re-lottery part is always executed after the winning epilogue, but there may be a variation pattern in which the re-lottery effect is not executed and ends with the winning epilogue part. Furthermore, although the description of the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part is omitted in the example of the total variation pattern, the variation pattern corresponding to the relief part will also be explained. In addition, in the case of a win, since the variation time is longer than the variation pattern of a loss, the rescue winning part that pretends to be a loss and becomes a win may perform a performance by the rescue winning part using the variation time.

[Production style in the start part]
The production mode in the start part will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when variable display (changing display) starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of a flying girl named Yume Yume-chan is displayed as the character that appears in the change during the normal game state. Yume Yume-chan is a main character that appears as an ally character in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1.

When the variation starts, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background. During the variable display, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L, 8R as appropriate, but the sound effects are only shown in some of the drawings. The lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, is referred to as "yellow background lighting." The performance control CPU 120 lights up the game effect lamp 9 in a yellow background lighting pattern based on the normal background brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. Note that "lighting" here includes constant lighting, wave lighting, and hazy lighting, as described with reference to Figures 53 and 54, and the same applies in the following explanations.

As shown in FIG. 55(a2), after the left and right decorative symbols reach a reach state where they temporarily stop at the "2" symbol, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo consecutive symbol in the center symbol. The "NEXT" symbol stops, indicating that the second pseudo variation will begin. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Note that "flashing" here includes the lamp repeatedly turning on and off, as explained with reference to FIG. 53 and FIG. 54, and this also applies to the following explanation. After that, as shown in FIG. 55(a3), the letters "x2" are displayed, indicating that the second variable display will be performed by the pseudo consecutive performance. When "x2" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a4), the re-change is performed as the second change of the pseudo-change. The letters "x2" are displayed in small letters in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that this is the second variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with a yellow background. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a5), after the reach state is reached, the "NEXT" symbol stops as a pseudo consecutive symbol in the middle symbol. The stopping of the "NEXT" symbol indicates that the third change of the pseudo-change will start. When the "NEXT" symbol stops, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in FIG. 56(a6), the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that the third variable display will be performed by the pseudo consecutive performance. When "x3" is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a7), a pseudo re-change is performed as the third variable display. In the upper left corner of the screen, the letters "x3" are displayed in small letters to indicate that this is the third variable display. During the re-change, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a pattern with the background lit yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 57(a8), a "2" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, and a "2" also stops in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, resulting in a reach state called reach tenpai. During reach tenpai, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(a9), the background starts to darken and the screen goes dark while the middle pattern remains variable in the reach tenpai state. When the background starts to darken, the game effect lamp 9 lights up red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a10), a shutter-shaped image (hereinafter also simply referred to as a shutter) is displayed so as to hide the display of the decorative pattern and Yumu-chan's character image. The shutter layer has a higher priority than the decorative pattern layer or Yumu-chan's character layer. High priority means that the image layer (image layer) is located on the front side. As shown in FIG. 58 (a10), the shutter is displayed so as to close from the top and bottom of the screen toward the center of the screen. Due to the image of the shutter, images behind the shutter become invisible. In addition, the screen brightness gradually decreases as the shutter gradually closes. When the shutter is closed (a10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while decreasing the brightness step by step.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a11), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a10). In the state where the shutter is closed (a11), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a10), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the shutter is further closed and the screen brightness is lower than at the time (a11). In the state where the shutter is closed (a12), the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 further decreases from the time point (a11), and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. The screen brightness gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12) such that, for example, (a10) 75%>(a11) 50%>(a12) 25%. Further, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 gradually decreases from (a10) to (a12).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the shutter is completely closed. When the shutter is closed in (a13), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a12). Thereafter, the shutter remains closed from FIG. 59(a14) to FIG. 59(a15). In the state where the shutter is kept closed in (a14) and (a15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a13).

Thereafter, from (a16) to (a18) in FIG. 60, the screen brightness gradually increases as the shutter gradually opens. When the shutter is open in (a16), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a15). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a17), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a16). When the shutter is open in (a17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a16). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (a18), the shutter is further opened and the screen brightness is improved compared to the time (a17). When the shutter is open in (a18), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red with the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 maintaining the same brightness as at the time (a17).

The screen brightness gradually increases from (a16) to (a17) such that, for example, (a16) 25%<(a17) 50%<(a18) 75%. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red while maintaining the brightness from (a16) to (a18). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (a19), when the shutter is completely opened, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach A is displayed. When the shutter (a19) is open, the screen brightness is 100%. Furthermore, when the shutter (a19) is open, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Note that it may be "substantially off" instead of "lights off". Further, when the shutter is opened, if it has been determined to move to SP first half reach B, a screen corresponding to SP first half reach B will be displayed. When SP first half reach A is executed from the state of (a19), the process moves to the effect of FIG. 62(b1), and when SP first half reach B is executed from the state of (a19), the effect shown in FIG. Shift to e1) performance.

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach A)]
With reference to Figures 62 to 67, the presentation in the teasing part (SP first half reach A) will be described. The teasing part (SP first half reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which Yume Yume, an ally character, chases the enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP first half reach A), a story unfolds in which Yume Yume will win if she can catch Bakuchu, and will lose if she cannot.

As shown in FIG. 62(b1), in the inciting part in which the SP first half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP first half reach A, "Catch the Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance in the first half of the SP that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (b1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b2), the title display is erased and an image showing the enemy character Bakuchu landing is displayed. When the title display of (b2) disappears, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display in (b2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach A is output. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62(b3), an image of the enemy character Bakuchu landing in the center of the screen and posing is displayed. In the state (b3) where the enemy character appears, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4), an image of a confrontation between friendly character Yume Yume and enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state of (b4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side where Yume Yume is displayed lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side where Bakuchu is displayed lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (b5), a subtitle display "I found you" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I found you" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (b5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63(b6), a subtitle display "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Found" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (b6), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red in response to Bakuchu saying his lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (b7), Yume Yume, an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b7), on the Yume Yume close-up screen, a subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!". Also, in the Yume Yume close-up state of (b7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Then, as shown in (b8), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (b8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking the line "Too". Then, as shown in (b9), an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume Yume is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu running away state of (b9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu speaking the line "Hehehe".

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b10), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background of (b10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (b11), an image of Yume Yume on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (b11), the subtitle display "Wait~" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Wait~" is displayed on the screen of chasing Yume Yume. In addition, the sound of Yume Yume's footsteps "Zazz zazzazz" is output as a physical sound (hereinafter referred to as physical sound) in accordance with the image of Yume Yume. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" is output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of chasing Yume Yume of (b11), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green in response to Yume Yume speaking. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red in response to the character Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (b12), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (b11), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Further, in the state of Yumemu chasing (b12), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume-chan. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b13), Bakuchu's back view is displayed, and a part of Yumu-chan's hand is also displayed, resulting in a screen where Bakuchu runs away from Yumu-chan. As shown in (b13), on the screen of Bakuchu running away, the subtitle display "Catch me!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Catch me!" is displayed. In addition, the physical sound of Yume-chan's footsteps ``Zazazaza'' is output along with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Furthermore, in the state of (b13) in which Bakuchu runs away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to Bakuchu uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 66 (b14), an image is displayed of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Yume-chan on the left side of the screen. As shown in (b14), the sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output as an artificial sound (hereinafter referred to as an onomatopoeia) to accompany the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (b14), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white to indicate that Bakuchu is jumping. After that, as shown in (b15), the enemy character Bakuchu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (b15), on the Bakuchu up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red to indicate the Bakuchu character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (b16), Yumu-chan, who is an ally character, is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Further, as shown in (b16), on the Yume-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in (b17), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (b17), Yume-chan's line "Toriya~!" is output on the Yume Jump screen. Furthermore, in the state of Yume-Yume jumping (b17), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Yume-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 67 (b18), a screen in which Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed at the time of deciding whether or not the win has been determined is displayed. Also, in the scene before the win/loss decision in (b18), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the win/loss decision scene. By muting the sound in the scene before the win/loss decision, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene for winning/loss decision. If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a big win in the SP first half reach A, the performance transitions to (c1). If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a miss in the SP first half reach A, the performance transitions to (d1). If it is determined from the state of (b18) that there will be a development to the latter half of the SP reach, the performance transitions to (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
The production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the hit epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A, an image of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with her hand is displayed. In addition, in the state of (c1) where Bakuchu is caught, a physical sound of Yumu-chan catching "Bashit!" is output in accordance with the video of Yumu-chan catching Bakuchu. Further, in the state of catching a Bakushu (c1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (tb18) indicating the lighting mode of (b18) in response to catching a Bakushu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 68(c2), an image of Yume-chan making a V sign after catching the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (c2), in the state of catching the Bakuchu, a subtitle display "Easy win!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "Easy win!". Also, in the state of (c2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors to indicate a big win. Hereinafter, the smooth lighting of rainbow colors is also referred to as rainbow lighting (smooth). Also, in the state of (c2), background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (c3), an image of Yume-chan making a V sign after catching the Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in a comic book style. In the still image state of (c3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(c4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (c4), the "222" symbol is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated lines in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (c4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in bright white. Thereafter, as shown in (c5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (c4). In the state of displaying symbols (c5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (c6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (c5) and displayed in normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (c6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP first half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP first half reach A) will be explained. The lose-lose epilogue part (SP first half reach A) is the part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan not being able to catch the Bakushu unfolds and that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in Figure 70 (d1), in the miss epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, an image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu, "Skatch", is output in sync with the image of Yume Yume failing to catch the Bakuchu. Also, in the (d1) state where the Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tb18) which indicates the lighting mode of (b18), in response to the failure to catch the Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (d2), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was unable to catch Bakuchu, kneels in disappointment while Bakuchu is happy. As shown in (d2), in the disappointing state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (td1) showing the lighting mode of (d1). After that, as shown in (d3), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (d3), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (d4), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (d4) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same yellow background lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance in the provocation part (first half of SP Reach B)]
With reference to Figures 72 to 77, the presentation in the hype part (SP first half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friendly character Yume Yume and enemy character Boingo face off in hockey. In the hype part (SP first half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Yume Yume beats Boingo, it will be a big hit, and if she loses to Boingo, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 72 (e1), in the promotional part where SP first half reach B is executed, the title "Bilibili Hockey Showdown" corresponding to SP first half reach B is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance of the SP first half that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (e1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in FIG. 72 (e2), an image is displayed in which the screen is cracked and the title display is erased. When the screen is cracked and the title display is erased in (e2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green. After that, as shown in (e3), an image of the opponent character appearance is displayed in which the ally character Yume Yume and the enemy character Boingo appear on the screen. When the opponent character appears in (e3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up green.

After that, as shown in FIG. 73 (e4), an image of a confrontation between Yume Yume, who is an ally character at the front left of the screen, and Boingo, who is an enemy character at the back right of the screen, is displayed. In the confrontation state of (e4), the left side of the game effect lamp 9 where Yume Yume is displayed lights up in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character. Also, the right side of the game effect lamp 9 where Boingo is displayed lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character. Also, when the title display of (e4) disappears, BGM corresponding to the SP first half reach B is output. After that, as shown in (e5), a subtitle display "I won't lose" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I won't lose" is displayed on the screen where the characters are confronting each other. In the confrontation state of (e5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the Boingo character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (e6), a subtitle display "Come on" corresponding to Boingo's line "Come on" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state of (e6), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to Yumu-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in cream color in response to Boingo uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (e7), an image of Yume Yume, an ally character, shooting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e7), on the screen during Yume Yume's turn, Yume Yume's line "Yaaa~" is output. Also, in the Yume Yume turn state of (e7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume's line. After that, as shown in (e8), the puck shot by Yume Yume is displayed in an enlarged manner. Also, in the puck display state of (e8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white twice corresponding to the physical sound "shoo" of the puck moving. After that, as shown in (e9), an image of Boingo blocking Yume Yume's puck is displayed. Also, in the Boingo blocking state of (e9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up cream corresponding to the Boingo character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 75 (e10), an image of the puck flying through the air is displayed. In the state of (e10) of flying through the puck, the physical sound of the puck spinning, "Shurruru," is output. Also, in the state of (e10), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in green corresponding to the character Yume Yume-chan. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in cream color corresponding to the character Boingo. After that, as shown in (e11), an image of the enemy character Boingo shooting the puck is displayed. Also, as shown in (e11), on the screen during Boingo's turn, Boingo's line "Yoisho~" is output. Also, in the state of Boingo's turn (e11), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in cream color corresponding to Boingo speaking. After that, as shown in (e12), the puck shot by Boingo is enlarged and displayed. Also, in the puck display state of (e12), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the physical sound of the puck moving, "shoo."

After that, as shown in FIG. 76 (e13), Yumu-chan is damaged by being directly hit by the pack, and an image is displayed in which electricity is running and her bones are visible. As shown in (e13), in the state of Yumu damage, Yumu-chan's line "Wow~" is output. Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e13), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e14), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e14), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e15), an image of Yumu-chan being damaged and electricity running through her bones is displayed with the same content as (e13). Furthermore, in the state of Yumemu damage (e15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to Yumeme receiving damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (e16), Yume Yume is damaged, and an image of electricity running through her bones is displayed in the same manner as in (e14). Also, in the Yume Yume damage state of (e16), the background music is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white in response to Yume Yume receiving damage. After that, as shown in (e17), the scene before the win/loss determination is displayed, in which the state of Yume Yume receiving damage is displayed. In the scene before the win/loss determination of (e17), the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in white to correspond to the scene before the win/loss determination. Since the scene before the win/loss determination is muted, it is easy to understand that this is the branching scene of the win/loss determination. If it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be a big hit from the state of (e17), the performance transitions to (f1). If it is determined that the SP first half reach B will be a miss from the state of (e17), the performance transitions to (g1). If it is determined that the game will progress from state (e17) to the second half of the SP Reach, the game will transition to the performance shown in (h1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 78 to 80, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part where it is announced that the story of Yumu-chan's victory over Boingo unfolds and the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 78 (f1), in the first half of the SP reach B hit epilogue part, an image of Yumu-chan hitting the puck back is displayed. Further, in the state of the Yumu attack (f1) in which Yumu-chan attacks by hitting the puck back, a subtitle display "Go!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Go!" is displayed. In addition, in the state of Yumu attack (f1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yumu-chan's attack. do.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (f2), an image of Boingo being blown away by Yume Yume's attack is displayed. As shown in (f2), when Boingo is attacked, a subtitle display "Wow!" corresponding to Boingo's line "Wow!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f2), the game effect lamp 9 turns to rainbow lighting (smooth) indicating a big win. Also, in the state of (f2), a background music for a win is output. After that, as shown in (f3), an image of Yume Yume making a fist pump and Boingo falling down is displayed. As shown in (f3), when Yume Yume is in the state of a win, a subtitle display "Easy win!" corresponding to Yume Yume's line "Easy win!" is displayed. Also, in the state of (f3), the game effect lamp 9 turns to rainbow lighting (smooth).

Thereafter, as shown in (f4), the image of Yumu Shoshi is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (f4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (f5), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (f5), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (f5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (f6), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in (f5). In the state of displaying symbols (f6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80 (f7), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (f6) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (f7), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the Miss Epilogue Part (First Half of SP Reach B)]
The presentation of the miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) will be described with reference to Figures 81 and 82. The miss epilogue part (SP first half reach B) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume's defeat by Boingo unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 81 (g1), in the loss epilogue part of reach B in the first half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan being blown away after being attacked by Boingo is displayed. As shown in (g1), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white. After that, as shown in (g2), an image of Yumu-chan flying further away than in the state (g1) is displayed. As shown in (g2), in the state of Yume-chan being blown away, the game effect lamp 9 is darker than the white color of (te17) indicating the lighting mode of (e17) in response to Yume-chan being blown away. Lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 81 (g3), an image is displayed in which Yume Yume, who was defeated by Boingo, kneels in disappointment while Boingo smiles. As shown in (g3), in the disappointment state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tg1) and (tg2) which indicate the lighting modes of (g1) and (g2). After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g4), the screen goes dark. In the screen dark state of (g4), the game effect lamp 9 goes out. After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (g5), the pattern "232", which is a losing pattern combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state in (g5) where the normal screen is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern common to (ta1) which indicates the lighting mode of (a1).

[Performance during the role action part (later development)]
With reference to Figure 83, the presentation mode in the reel action part (later development) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 83 (h1), when the SP first half reach A or SP first half reach B develops into any of the latter half SP reaches among SP second half reach A, SP second half reach B, and SP strongest reach, the movable body 32 as the reel moves. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the reel falls while tilting diagonally from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen in response to the start of the reel's fall. The effect image makes it impossible to see the Yume Yume character or the reduced decorative pattern of the "2". Also, in the (h1) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to the reel's fall.

Thereafter, in the state (h2), the accessory falls further from the state (h1). In the state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory. After that, in the state (h3), the accessory is further moved so that the letter "P" among the characters of the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. Fall. In the state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. An effect in which the accessory rises from the state of (h3) is executed. If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach A after the rise of the accessory, the transition is made to the production (i1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into second half reach B after the rise of the accessory, the process moves to the production of (n1). If it has been determined that the SP will develop into the final reach after the accessory rises, the process moves to the production (r1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to Figures 84 to 96, the presentation in the teasing part (SP latter half reach A) will be described. The teasing part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which a story unfolds in which friendly characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan chase enemy character Bakuchu. In the teasing part (SP latter half reach A), a story unfolds in which if Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan can catch Bakuchu, it will be a big hit, but if Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan cannot catch Bakuchu, it will be a miss.

As shown in FIG. 84 (i1), in the inciting part in which the SP second half reach A is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach A, "Catch the Bakushu!", is displayed. The title display indicates the contents of the SP second half reach performance that will be executed from now on. In the state where the title display (i1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (i2), an image of a confrontation between the friendly characters Yumu-chan and Jam-chan (characters on the far left) and the enemy character Bakuchu is displayed in the center of the screen. In the confrontation state (i2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white on the left side where Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed, corresponding to the two characters. Further, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red on the right side where the Bakushu is displayed, corresponding to the Bakushu character. Furthermore, at the timing when the image related to the title display (i2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the SP second half reach A is output. After that, as shown in (i3), a subtitle display ``I won't let you escape!'' corresponding to Yumu-chan's line ``I won't let you escape!'' is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the confrontation state (i3), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering her lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i4), the subtitle display "I'll help you too!" corresponding to Jam's line "I'll help you too!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i4), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes purple corresponding to Jam's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu's character. After that, as shown in (i5), the subtitle display "I'll run away again!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I'll run away again!" is displayed on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (i5), the game effect lamp 9 on the left lights up white corresponding to the two characters Yume Yume and Jam. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes red corresponding to Bakuchu's line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 85 (i6), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "I'll catch you!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam-chan's line "I'll catch you!". In the Jam-chan display state of (i6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i7), when Yume-chan is displayed, the subtitle display "Let's go!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume-chan's line "Let's go!". In the Yume-Yume display state of (i7), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green, corresponding to Yume-Yume speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 86 (i8), when Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Bring it on!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Bring it on!". In the Bakuchu display state of (i8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in (i9), when an image of Jam chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" is displayed, which corresponds to Jam's line "Wait!". In the Jam chasing state of (i9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple, which corresponds to Jam speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87 (i10), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Jam-chan is displayed, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatap" is output as a physical sound. Further, in the state (i10) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red in response to the Bakushu running away. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (i11), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the room background state (i11), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (i12), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. Further, as shown in (i12), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the Jam Chasing screen. As shown in (i12), Jam-chan's footsteps "za-za-za-za" as a physical sound are output in accordance with Jam-chan's image. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. In addition, in the jam chasing state (i12), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i13), an image of Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i13), the physical sound of Jam-chan's footsteps, "Zazz zazz," is output in sync with the image of Jam-chan. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta," is output in sync with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Jam chasing state of (i13), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i14), an image of Jam-chan jumping and jumping on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i14), in the Jam jump state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 88 (i15), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i15), Bakuchu's jumping sound "Pyon" is output as an onomatopoeic sound in conjunction with the video of Bakuchu's jump. Further, in the Bakuchu jumping state (i15), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i16), an image of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of not being able to catch Bakuchu (i16), the subtitle display ``I can't catch you'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``I can't catch you'' is displayed. Additionally, in conjunction with the video of Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound ``Sukak'' that Jam-chan was unable to catch is output. Furthermore, in the state (i16) where Bakuchu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89 (i17), when Yume Yume is displayed, the subtitle "I'm next!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "I'm next!". In the Yume Yume display state of (i17), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume speaking. After that, as shown in (i18), an image of Yume Yume chasing Bakuchu is displayed. In the Bakuchu chasing state of (i18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes green corresponding to Yume Yume taking action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i19), when an image of Bakuchu running away from Yume-chan is displayed, Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output as a physical sound. Also, in the state of Bakuchu running away in (i19), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red in response to Bakuchu running away. After that, as shown in FIG. 90 (i20), the background of the room is displayed on the screen. In the state of the room background in (i20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (i21), an image of Yume-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i21), a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed on the screen of chasing Yume-chan. Also, as shown in (i21), Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazz zazz" are output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Yume-chan. Also, Bakuchu's footsteps "Tatatatat" are output as a physical sound in accordance with the image of Bakuchu. Also, in the Yume Yume chasing state of (i21), the left game effect lamp 9 flashes green to indicate that Yume Yume is speaking. Also, the right game effect lamp 9 lights up red to indicate that the Bakuchu character is on.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i22), an image of Yumu-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. As shown in (i22), the sound of Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazazaza" as a physical sound is output in accordance with Yume-chan's video. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Further, in the state of chasing Yume (i22), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. After that, as shown in (i23), an image of Yumu-chan jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i23), in the state of Yume-Yume jumping, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Yume-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 91 (i24), an image of Bakuchu on the right side of the screen jumping to escape from Jam-chan on the left side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i24), the onomatopoeic sound of Bakuchu jumping "Pyoon" is output in accordance with the image of Bakuchu jumping. Also, in the Bakuchu jump state of (i24), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to Bakuchu jumping. After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i25), an image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. Also, in the Bakuchu cannot be caught state of (i25), a subtitle display "I can't catch it" corresponding to Yume-chan's line "I can't catch it" is displayed. Also, in accordance with the image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu, the onomatopoeic sound of Yume-chan failing to catch it "Skatch" is output in accordance with the image of Yume-chan failing to catch Bakuchu. Also, in the Bakuchu cannot be caught state of (i25), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in green corresponding to Yume-chan uttering a line. Additionally, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red to correspond to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (i26), two allies, Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, are displayed. As shown in (i26), when two allies are displayed, a subtitle display "Next time, two people!" corresponding to the two allies' dialogue "Next time, two people!" is displayed. In the state of displaying two allies (i26), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (i27), Yumu-chan is displayed enlarged on the screen. In addition, in the state of (i27) Yume-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93 (i28), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the left side of the screen, and Yumu-chan is displayed on the right side of the screen. As shown in (i28), in the state of Yumu and Jam Up, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in green corresponding to the Yume-chan character. After that, as shown in (i29), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is displayed. As shown in (i29), when two characters are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 30 (i30), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan on the left side of the screen chasing Bakuchu on the right side of the screen is successively displayed. In (i30), an image in which the two people are closer to Bakushu than in (i29) is displayed. As shown in (i30), the physical sound of Yume-chan and Jam-chan's footsteps ``za-za-za'' is output along with the images of Yume-chan and Jam-chan. In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps, ``tatatatat'', is output along with the image of Bakuchu. Further, in the state of (i30) where two players are chasing each other, the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i31), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i31), on the Jam Up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple corresponding to the Jam-chan character. Then, as shown in (i32), an image of Jam-chan jumping and pounces on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i32), Jam-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Jam Jump screen. Also, in the Jam Jump state of (i32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple corresponding to Jam-chan jumping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94 (i33), Yume Yume-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (i33), in the Yume Yume close-up screen, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to the character of Yume Yume-chan. Then, as shown in FIG. 95 (i34), an image of Yume Yume-chan jumping and jumping into the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), Yume Yume-chan's line "Wow" is output on the Yume Yume jump screen. Also, in the Yume Yume jump state of (i34), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan jumping. Then, as shown in (i35), an image of both Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping and jumping into the Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (i35), in the two-person jump state, the subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to the lines of the two allies "Wait!" is displayed. In the two-person jump state of (i35), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white three times corresponding to the two people jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 95 (i36), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 1. In the state of two people jumping (i36), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the fact that two people are jumping. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i37), an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 2. In the two-player jumping state (i37), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players jumping. Thereafter, as shown in (i38), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 3. In the two-player jumping state (i38), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players jumping.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 96 (i39), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan jumping is displayed as still image 4, which is a scene before the decision is made. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (i39), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. If it has been determined from the state (i39) that there will be a jackpot in reach A in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance (j1). In the state of (i39), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach A or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (k1).

[Performance in the epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
The presentation in the winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) will be described with reference to Figures 97 to 98. The winning epilogue part (SP latter half reach A) is a part in which the story of Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will be controlled to a big win game state.

As shown in FIG. 97 (j1), in the hit epilogue part of reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu's tail with their hands is displayed. In addition, in the (j1) state of catching Bakuchu, the physical sound of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching ``Bashi!'' is output in conjunction with the video of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan catching Bakuchu. Furthermore, in the state of (j1) of catching a Bakuchu, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in a white color brighter than the white color of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to catching a Bakuchu.

After that, as shown in FIG. 97 (j2), Yumu-chan, who caught Bakuchu, makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (j2), in the state of catching Bakushu, the subtitle display ``It was a shame!'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``It was a shame!'' is displayed. Further, in the state (j2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow direction (smoothly) indicating that a jackpot has been won. Furthermore, in the state (j2), BGM for winning is output. After that, as shown in (j3), Yumu-chan who caught Bakuchu makes a buoy sign, and an image of Jam-chan sitting on Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (j3), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (j4), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (j4), the symbol "222" is enlarged in the symbol display, and the symbol is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (j4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j5), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in (j4). In the state of displaying symbols (j5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Thereafter, as shown in (j6), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (j5) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of two symbols (normal size) (j6), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach A)]
With reference to FIGS. 99 to 100, the production mode in the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP second half reach A) is the part where the story of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan not being able to catch the Bakushu unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 99 (k1), in the loss epilogue part of Reach A in the second half of the SP, an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu is displayed. In addition, in the state of (k1) where Bakuchu could not be caught, the onomatopoeic sound ``sukak'' is output along with the video of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan failing to catch Bakuchu. In addition, in the state of (k1) where the Bakushu cannot be caught, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a color darker than the white of (ti39) indicating the lighting mode of (i39) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Lights up in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99(k2), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Furthermore, as shown in (k2), on the Bakushu-up screen, a subtitle display "Ussushi!" corresponding to Bakushu's line "Ussssss!" is displayed. In the explosive tune-up state of (k2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color of (tk1) indicating the lighting mode of (k1). After that, as shown in (k3), an image of Yumu-chan and Jam-chan kneeling down and disappointed that they couldn't catch Bakuchu is displayed. As shown in (k3), in the regrettable state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (tk1) indicating the lighting mode in (k1). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state (k4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in (k5), the symbol "232" which is a losing symbol combination is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (k5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). From the state (k5), if it has been determined that the game will be rescued, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Performance in the provocation part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to Figures 101 to 109, the presentation in the hype part (SP latter half reach B) will be described. The hype part (SP latter half reach B) is a part where a story unfolds in which friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan face off against an enemy character, a crab robot. In the hype part (SP latter half reach B), a story unfolds to hype up the fact that if Jam-chan and Nana-chan's crab robot beats Boingo, it will be a big win, but if Jam-chan and Nana-chan lose to the crab robot, it will be a loss.

As shown in FIG. 101 (n1), in the inciting part in which the SP second half reach B is executed, a title corresponding to the SP second half reach B, "Gekushin Robo Battle", is displayed. The title display indicates the content of the performance in the second half of the SP that will be executed from now on. Below the title display, the number of stars indicates the expected jackpot in this reach. Note that this display indicating the jackpot expectation level may be displayed at another SP reach. In the state where the title display (n1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (n2), an image of a confrontation between friendly characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan (leftmost characters) and an enemy character crab robot is displayed. As shown in (n2), on the screen where the characters are facing each other, a subtitle display ``I will not lose!'' is displayed corresponding to the lines ``I will not lose!'' of the two allies. In the confrontation state (n2), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in white in response to the two players saying their lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Further, at the timing when the image related to the title display (n2) disappears, the BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP reach B is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (n3), an image of a crab attack in which an enemy character, a crab, shoots a beam is displayed. Also, in the crab attack state of (n3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white corresponding to the crab's attack. After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n4), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n4), on the screen where the two are running away, a subtitle display "Kyaa!" corresponding to the words "Kyaa!" spoken by the two allies is displayed. In the state where the two are running away of (n4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white corresponding to the action of the two running away.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (n5), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan escape into a depression in the rocks to escape the crab's beam. In the state of two people jumping in (n5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n6), an image is displayed in which the beam passes over the rocks. In the state of the beam passing in (n6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n7), an image is displayed in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan look relieved in the shadow of the rocks. As shown in (n7), the subtitle display "Haa haa" corresponding to Jam's line "Haa haa" is displayed on the screen in which the two are relieved. In the state of confrontation in (n7), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes in purple in response to Jam-chan's line. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes in pink in response to Nana-chan's character.

After that, as shown in FIG. 103 (n8), Jam-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, as shown in (n8), the subtitle "It's your turn!" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "It's your turn!" is displayed on the jam-up screen. Also, in the jam-up state of (n8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan speaking. After that, as shown in (n9), an image of Jam-chan attacking the crab with the technique called Delta Break is displayed. Also, in the jam attack state of (n9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes purple corresponding to Jam-chan speaking the line "Delta Break".

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10), an image of the crab being damaged by Jam-chan's attack is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab uttering the line "Gununu~". After that, as shown in (n11), an image of a confrontation between Jam-chan and Nana-chan and the crab is displayed. In the confrontation state of (n11), the left game effect lamp 9 lights up in white corresponding to the two characters. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. Thereafter, as shown in (n12), an image of a crab attack in which the enemy character crab shoots a beam is displayed. Furthermore, in the crab attack state (n12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white twice in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (n13), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan running away from the crab's beam is displayed. As shown in (n13), on the screen where the two people are running away, a subtitle display "Kya!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Kya!" is displayed. In the state of (n13) where two people run away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the two people running away. After that, as shown in (n14), an image of the beam approaching Jam-chan and Nana-chan is displayed. In the beam state of (n14), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, as shown in (n15), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being damaged by the crab's beam is displayed. Furthermore, in the state (n15) in which two players receive damage, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the fact that two players have received damage.

After that, as shown in FIG. 106 (n16), an image of the damaged Jam-chan and Nana-chan standing up is displayed. As shown in (n16), on the screen where the two stand up, a subtitle "It's about to begin!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies "It's about to begin!" In the state where the two stand up in (n16), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side lights up in purple corresponding to Jam-chan's character. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n17), Nana-chan is enlarged and displayed on the screen. Also, in the Nana up state in (n17), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink corresponding to Nana-chan's character. After that, as shown in (n18), a screen is displayed where Nana-chan is praying. Nana-chan's prayer action is executed as a performance to confuse the enemy. Also, in the Nana Prayer state (n18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's prayer action.

After that, as shown in FIG. 107 (n19), an image of the crab being confused by Nana's prayer performance is displayed. Further, in the state of crab confusion (n19), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to the crab's confusing movement. After that, as shown in (n20), an image of the crab recovering from the confusion and getting angry is displayed. In the crab angry state (n20), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the crab character. After that, as shown in (n21), an image of a crab waving its arms to attack is displayed. Further, in the crab attack state (n21), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the crab attack.

After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (n22), an image of Nana receiving damage from a crab attack is displayed. Furthermore, in the state of Nana receiving damage (n22), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times in response to Nana receiving damage. After that, as shown in (n23), an image of Jam-chan holding and operating the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n23), the subtitle display ``Leave it to me!'' corresponding to Jam's line ``Leave it to me!'' is displayed on the Jam remote control operation screen. Furthermore, in the Jam remote control operation state (n23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (n24), an image of Jam-chan trying to press a button on the remote control is displayed. As shown in (n24), in the Jam remote control operation state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple in response to Jam operating the remote control.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 109 (n25), an effect in which a hand appears from the sky is performed. As shown in (n25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks twice in white when the hand is out of the sky. After that, as shown in (n26), an image of a hand extending from the sky going to catch a crab is displayed. As shown in (n26), while the player is going to catch crabs, the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white. After that, as shown in (n27), the scene before the decision of whether the decision is made or not, in which an enlarged image of the crab and hand is displayed. In the scene before the determination of success or failure (n27), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the white lighting so as to correspond to the scene before the determination of success or failure. Since the scene before the decision is made is muted, it is easy to understand that the scene is a branching scene of the decision. From the state of (n27), if it has been determined that there will be a jackpot in reach B in the second half of the SP, the process shifts to the performance of (o1). In the state of (n27), if it has been determined that the second half of the SP will be a loss in reach B or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (p1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 110 to 112, the effect mode in the winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part in which it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan winning against the crab robot unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 110 (o1), in the epilogue part of the winning round in the second half of the SP, Reach B, an image of a hand reaching down from the sky catching a crab is displayed. Also, as shown in (o1), the screen where the crab is caught displays a subtitle "You got me" corresponding to the crab's line "You got me". Also, in the crab catching state of (o1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in a brighter white than the white of (tn27) which indicates the lighting state of (n27) in response to catching the crab. After that, as shown in (o2), an image of the caught crab set up as the store's signboard is displayed. Also, in the state of (o2) where the crab has become the store's signboard, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth) indicating that a big win has occurred. Also, in the state of (o2), the background music for a win is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110 (o3), the screen shows Jam-chan and Nana-chan in front of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, as shown in (o3), the subtitle "Nice sign" corresponding to Jam-chan's line "Nice sign" is displayed on the screen of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, in the state of the store with a crab as its signboard in (o3), the game effect lamp 9 turns rainbow lit (smooth). After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (o4), the screen shows Jam-chan and Nana-chan in front of the store with a crab as its signboard, and continues. Also, as shown in (o4), the subtitle "Work hard" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "Work hard" is displayed on the screen of the store with a crab as its signboard. Also, in the state of the store with a crab as its signboard in (o4), the game effect lamp 9 turns rainbow lit (smooth). After that, as shown in (o5), the image of the store with a crab as its signboard is displayed as a still image in a comic-style style. In the still image state of (o5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow pattern (smooth).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (o6), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (o6), the symbol "222" is enlarged and emphasized by the concentrated line in the symbol display. In the state of displaying symbols (o6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (o7), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state (o6). In the state of displaying symbols (o7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (o8), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (o7) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) (o8), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Production style in the losing epilogue part (SP second half reach B)]
With reference to FIGS. 113 and 114, the effect mode in the loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) will be explained. The loss epilogue part (SP second half reach B) is a part where the story of Jam-chan and Nana-chan being defeated by a crab robot unfolds, and it is announced that the game will not be controlled by the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 113 (p1), in the failed epilogue part of the SP's second half Reach B, an image of a hand reaching out from the sky failing to catch a crab is displayed. Also, in the crab-cannot-be-caught state of (p1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tn27) indicating the lighting mode of (n27) corresponding to the failure to catch the crab. Then, as shown in (p2), an image of the crab running away sideways is displayed. In the crab-running state of (p2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tp1) indicating the lighting mode of (p1). Then, as shown in (p3), an image of Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who have been escaped by the crab, looking down in disappointment is displayed. Also, as shown in (p3), on the disappointment screen, the subtitle "What a shame" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the two allies saying "What a shame". Also, as shown in (p3), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a darker white than the white of (tp1) which shows the lighting state of (p1).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state of (p4), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. After that, as shown in (p5), the symbol "232" which is a losing symbol combination is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen of (p5) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined from the state of (p5) that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the effect of (v1).

[Production mode in the inciting part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 115 to 132, the production mode in the inciting part (SP final reach) will be described. The inciting part (SP final reach) is the part where a story unfolds in which six ally characters, Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, Maid A, Maid B, and AD, chase after the enemy character Bakuchu. It is. In the inciting part (SP final reach), a story is told that if 6 people can catch Bakchu, it will be a jackpot, and if 6 people can't catch Bakchu, it will be a loss. Moreover, the inciting part (SP final reach) is the reach with the highest jackpot expectation among all the reaches.

As shown in FIG. 115 (r1), in the teasing part where the SP final reach is executed, the title corresponding to the SP final reach, "Six people, catch Bakuchu!", is displayed. The title display shows the content of the performance of the SP final reach that will be executed from now on. When the title display of (r1) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 is lit in yellow. After that, as shown in (r2), an image of a confrontation between the six friendly characters AD, Maid A, Maid B, Nana-chan, Jam-chan, and Yume-chan and the enemy character Bakuchu, facing each other in the center of the screen, is displayed. On the screen where the characters are confronting each other, the lines of the six friendly characters, "This is the last one," are output. Also, in the confrontation state of (r2), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side flashes in white in response to the six characters uttering lines. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side is lit in red in response to the Bakuchu character. Additionally, when the image related to the title display (r2) disappears, background music corresponding to the SP final reach is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (r3), Bakuchu's line "I'm going to run away again" is output on the screen where the characters are facing each other. In the facing state of (r3), the game effect lamp 9 on the left side is lit in white corresponding to the six characters. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in red corresponding to Bakuchu's line. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (r4), when AD is displayed, the subtitle display "Leave it to me!" corresponding to AD's line "Leave it to me!" is displayed. In the AD display state of (r4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange corresponding to AD's line. After that, as shown in (r5), when Maid A is displayed, the subtitle display "Watch me" corresponding to Maid A's line "Watch me" is displayed. In the Maid A display state of (r5), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue corresponding to Maid A's line. After that, as shown in (r6), when maid B is displayed, the subtitle "I'll do my best" is displayed, which corresponds to maid B's line "I'll do my best." In the maid B display state of (r6), the game effect lamp 9 flashes Hawaiian blue, corresponding to maid B speaking the line.

After that, as shown in FIG. 117 (r7), when Nana-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "I'll catch you" corresponding to Nana-chan's line "I'll catch you" is displayed. In the Nana-chan display state of (r7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in response to Nana-chan uttering lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r8), when Jam-chan is displayed, the subtitle display ``Yakuryo dho'' corresponding to Jam-chan's line ``Yakuryo dho'' is displayed. In the Jam-chan display state of (r8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to Jam-chan uttering lines. After that, as shown in (r9), when Yumu-chan is displayed, a subtitle display "Everyone is going!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Everyone is going!" is displayed. In the Yumu-chan display state of (r9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yumu-chan uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118 (r10), when Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display ``Anyone can come over'' corresponding to the Bakuchu's line ``Anyone can come over'' is displayed. In the Bakuchu display state of (r10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering its lines. Thereafter, as shown in (r11), when an image of Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Maid A's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the jam chasing state of (r11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in response to Maid A uttering lines. After that, as shown in (r12), when the image of AD and Maid A chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles "Wait, wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait, wait!" are displayed. Is displayed. In the state of AD & Maid A chasing (r12), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in response to the AD character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side flashes in blue in response to the maid A character uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119 (r13), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, a subtitle display ``Will you be caught!'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``Will you be caught?'' is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. In addition, in the state (r13) where the Bakushu is running away, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakushu running away. After that, as shown in (r14), an image of Bakuchu running away from the screen is displayed. In addition, the sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" is output as a physical sound. Furthermore, in the state of (r14) where the game is running away, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. Thereafter, as shown in (r15), the background of the city is displayed on the screen. In the city background state (r15), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r16), when an image of Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait!" corresponding to Nana's line "Wait!" is displayed. In the Nana chasing state of (r16), the game effect lamp 9 flashes pink in response to Nana's line being spoken. After that, as shown in (r17), when an image of Maid B and Nana chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitle "Wait wait!" corresponding to the two allies' lines "Wait wait!" is displayed. In the Maid B & Nana chasing state of (r17), the game effect lamp 9 on the left flashes Hawaiian blue in response to Maid B's character speaking. Also, the game effect lamp 9 on the right flashes pink in response to Nana's character speaking.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (r18), when an image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle "Whoa!" is displayed, which corresponds to Bakuchu's line "Whoa!". In addition, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" is output. In addition, in the state of Bakuchu escaping in (r18), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red, corresponding to Bakuchu escaping. After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (r19), the background of a city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background in (r19), the game effect lamp 9 is lit yellow.

After that, as shown in Figure 121 (r20), when an image of Yumu-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, a subtitle display "Wait!" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line "Wait!" is displayed. be done. In the dream chasing state of (r20), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in response to Yume-chan uttering lines. Later, as shown in (r21), when an image of Yume-chan and Jam-chan chasing Bakuchu is displayed, the subtitles corresponding to the two allies' lines, "Wait, wait!" are displayed, "Wait, wait!" is displayed. In the dream dream & jam chase state of (r21), the left game effect lamp 9 blinks in purple in response to the jam character uttering lines. Furthermore, the game effect lamp 9 on the right side blinks in green in response to the Yume-chan character uttering lines.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r22), the background of a city is displayed on the screen. In the state of the city background of (r22), the game effect lamp 9 lights up yellow. After that, as shown in (r23), when the image of Bakuchu escaping is displayed, the subtitle display "Yikes!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "That's bad!" is displayed. Also, the physical sound of Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" is output. Also, in the state of Bakuchu escaping of (r23), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red to indicate that Bakuchu is escaping.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange, corresponding to AD. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), in a scene where the AD jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in orange. At this time, "Ahh!" is output as AD's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r26), in a scene where the maid A character is up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue, corresponding to maid A. After that, as shown in (r27), in a scene where maid A jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in blue. At this time, "Too!" is output as maid A's audible dialogue, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 124 (r28), when the character of maid B is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue, which corresponds to maid B. After that, as shown in (r29), when maid B jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue. At this time, the same line as maid A, "Too!", is output as maid B's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r30), when Nana-chan's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink, which corresponds to Nana-chan. After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r31), when Nana-chan jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in pink. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana-chan's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125 (r32), when Jam's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple, corresponding to Jam. After that, as shown in (r33), when Jam jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple. At this time, "Torya!" is output as Jam's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r34), when Yume Yume's character is shown up close, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green, corresponding to Yume Yume. After that, as shown in (r35), when Yume Yume jumps, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in green. At this time, "Orya!" is output as Yume Yume's voice sound, but no subtitles are displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126 (r36), an image showing a close-up of the faces of the six characters is displayed on the split screen. As shown in (r36), when the close-up image of the six allies is displayed, the subtitle "This is the last time!" is displayed, corresponding to the lines of the six allies "This is the last time!". Also, in the close-up state of the six allies in (r36), the game effect lamp 9 flashes twice in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking. After that, as shown in FIG. 127 (r37), the close-up image of the six allies continues to be displayed. Also, in the close-up state of the six allies in (r37), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127 (r38), Bakushu is displayed along with the city background. Further, in the state of Bakuchu display (r38), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red corresponding to the Bakuchu character. Thereafter, as shown in (r39), the Bakushu is enlarged and displayed. Also, as shown in (r39), when the image of Bakuchu-up is displayed, the subtitle display "Yabee!!!" corresponding to Bakuchu's line "Yabee!!!" is displayed. Ru. Furthermore, in the Bakuchu-up state (r39), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in response to the Bakuchu uttering lines.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (r40), an image showing the push button 31B and a time gauge are displayed together with a concentrated line superimposed on the image of the explosive chew-up. Further, in the state of (r40) Baku Cheup + button display, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times. After that, when the player operates the button within the valid button operation period, the three main characters of the pachinko machine 1, Nana-chan, Yumu-chan, and Jam-chan, will be cut in on the screen, as shown in (r41). will be displayed. A cut-in display is an effect in which another image is displayed by cutting into the currently displayed image. Further, the cut-in display can also indicate the degree of jackpot expectation by the color of the cut-in display. For example, when the cut-in display is red, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when it is green. Further, in the cut-in state (r41), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red or green depending on the color of the cut-in display.

After that, as shown in FIG. 128 (r42), after the cut-in display is finished, an image of six people jumping towards Bakuchu is displayed. Further, in the state of cut-in and release (r42), the BGM is turned off and the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129 (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white when the screen displays six teammates. Thereafter, as shown in (r44), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the screen where Bakushu is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r45), when the six allies are displayed in a larger size than in (r43), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (r46), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red when the Bakushu is displayed in a larger size than in (r44).

Afterwards, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), when the six allies are displayed larger than in (r45), the subtitle "I've got you cornered!" is displayed, which corresponds to the six allies' lines "I've got you cornered!". Also, in the state of (r47) where six allies are displayed, the game effect lamp 9 flashes three times in white, corresponding to the six allies speaking. Afterwards, as shown in (r48), the display of Bakuchu and the display of the six allies are displayed alternately. In the state of (r48), the game effect lamp 9 is lit in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49), an image is displayed in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathering in the center of the screen. As shown in (r49), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center, to encourage the player to perform an operation. Also, in the state of (r49) where the trigger display is in the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red. After that, as shown in (r50), an image is displayed in which the trigger display is gathering more in the center of the screen than in (r49). As shown in (r50), a sound corresponding to an operation prompt is output in response to the trigger display gathering in the center, to encourage the player to perform an operation. Also, in the state of (r50) where the trigger display is in the center, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (r51), the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 1. At this time, the text "Cut!" is displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. In a state where the close display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion to encourage the player to perform the operation is output. Further, in a state where the close display (still image 1) of (r51) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 132 (r52), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 2. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed together with the word "Pull!" superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu. The time gauge is decreased compared to (r51). In the state where the pull-out display (still image 2) of (r52) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. After that, as shown in (r53), an image of the Bakuchu is displayed as still image 3. At this time, a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge are displayed together with the word "Pull!" superimposed on the image of the Bakuchu. The time gauge is decreased compared to (r52). In the state where the pull-out display (still image 3) of (r53) is displayed, a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the scene before the decision is made where the image of Bakuchu is displayed as still image 4 appears. At this time, the words "Cut!" are displayed over the image of Bakuchu, along with a prompt to operate the trigger and a time gauge. The time gauge has decreased since (r53). In a state where the draw display (still image 4) is displayed as a pre-determined scene of (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation promotion is outputted, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. If it has been determined from the state (r54) that there will be a jackpot in the SP final reach, the process moves to the performance (s1). In the state of (r54), if it has been determined that the SP final reach will be a loss or that it will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance of (u1).

[Production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach)]
With reference to FIGS. 133 to 136, the production mode in the winning epilogue part (SP final reach) will be explained. The winning epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part where it is announced that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state as the story in which six people catch the Bakushu unfolds.

As shown in FIG. 133 (s1), in the SP final reach epilogue part, as shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen as the object begins to fall. be done. This effect image has a more flashy presentation than the effect image when the SP reach develops into the second half. In addition, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in the state of FIG. 133 (s2), the reel falls further from the state of (s1). In the state of (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors in accordance with the fall of the reel. After that, in the state of (s3), the reel falls further to a position where the character "P" of the reel overlaps with the position where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. In the state of (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. A performance in which the reel rises from the state of (s3) is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s4), in the state after the reel rises, a scene in which Yume-Yume-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s4), the subtitle display "Uuu, I got caught" corresponding to the Bakuchu's line "Uuu, I got caught" is displayed. In the state of catching Bakuchu of (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbow (smooth). Also, in state (s4), the winning background music is output.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134 (s5), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s5), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed, which corresponds to Yume Yume's line "Good job, everyone!". In the Bakuchu catching state of (s5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbows (smooth). After that, as shown in (s6), an image of six people rejoicing after catching a Bakuchu is displayed. Also, as shown in (s6), a subtitle display "Good job, everyone!" is displayed. In the Bakuchu catching state of (s6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in rainbows (smooth).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7), an image of six people celebrating after catching Bakuchu is displayed as a still image in the style of a comic book. In the still image state of (s7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a rainbow manner (smoothly). Thereafter, as shown in (s8), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (s8), in the pattern display, the ``222'' pattern is enlarged and the pattern is emphasized by concentrated lines. In the state of displaying symbols (s8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s9), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than the state in (s8). In the state of displaying symbols (s9), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced in size than the state in (s9) and displayed in the normal size. In the state of 2 symbols (normal size) of (s10), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the failed epilogue part (final SP reach)]
The presentation in the failure epilogue part (SP final reach) will be described with reference to Figures 137 to 138. The failure epilogue part (SP final reach) is a part in which a story unfolds in which the six players fail to catch the Bakuchu, thereby informing the player that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 137 (u1), in the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach, an image of Bakuchu running away is displayed. In addition, in the state of (u1) where the Bakushu escapes, the game effect lamp 9 is a darker white than the white color of (tr54) indicating the lighting mode of (r54) in response to the failure to catch the Bakushu. Light. After that, as shown in (u2), an image is displayed in which the six people are disappointed that Bakchu ran away into the distance and were unable to catch him. Further, as shown in (u2), on the Sorry screen, a subtitle display ``Unfortunate~'' corresponding to Bakuchu's line ``Unfortunate~'' is displayed. As shown in (u2), in the unfortunate state, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a white color darker than the white color in (tu1) showing the lighting mode in (u1).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3), the screen is darkened. In the screen darkening state (u3), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (u4), the symbol "232", which is a losing symbol combination, is displayed on the normal screen. In the state where the normal screen (u4) is displayed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in the same background yellow lighting pattern as (ta1) showing the lighting mode of (a1). If it has been determined from the state (u4) that the game will be a relief hit, the process moves to the performance (v1).

[Performance in the rescue part]
The presentation in the rescue hit part will be described with reference to Figures 139 to 140. The rescue hit part is a part where a story of rescue performance that becomes a big hit develops after the development of a losing story. In the rescue hit part, a premium character corresponding to rescue (revival) named Drum-kun, who did not appear in other reaches, appears.

As shown in FIG. 139 (v1), in the rescue hit part, a rescue effect is executed in which a character called Drum-kun is displayed on the screen. By seeing Drum-kun, the player can recognize that it is a revival hit disguised as a miss. In the rescue effect of (v1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a brighter red than (td4, tg5, tp5, tu4). After that, as shown in (v3), the screen goes white. In the whiteout of (v2), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v3), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (v3), the pattern "222" is enlarged and emphasized by a converging line. In the pattern display state of (v3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (v4), the pattern combination "222" is displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (v3). In the pattern display state of (v4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (v5), the pattern combination "222" is further reduced from the state of (v4) and displayed in normal size. In the two pattern (normal size) state of (v5), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the rainbow lighting (smooth) lighting mode.

[Performance in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 141 to 156, the performance mode in the re-draw part (deriving odd or even symbols after button operation) will be described. In Figures 141 to 156, the flow of a series of performances from the detailed performance of the symbol output in the fanning performance to the button operation in the re-draw performance will be described.

As shown in FIG. 141 (A1), a symbol display effect is executed in which the decorative symbol combination "222" indicating the jackpot display result is displayed in a large size on the screen. As shown in (A1), in the state of 2-symbol enlargement, the symbol "222" is enlarged and the symbol is emphasized by the concentrated line. In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (A1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A2), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a larger size than in (A1). In the state of 2-symbol enlargement (A2), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (A3), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a reduced size. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A3), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142 (A4), the symbol combination "222" is displayed in a further reduced size. In the two symbol reduced state of (A4), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (A5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the two symbol normal size state of (A5), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (A6), the background changes and the re-lottery performance starts. In the (A6) state, a shaking period occurs in which the symbol combination "222" shakes up and down. In (A6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols have risen from their normal positions to the top. In the two symbol shaking state of (A6), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

Here, the period during which the symbols are shaking is omitted from the state (A5) to the state (A6). Specifically, the symbols are shaking when they are normal size. After they become normal size, the symbol shaking for the re-draw part continues. At this time, at the timing related to the completion of the symbol release (for example, including the timing just before the symbol becomes normal size, the timing after the symbol becomes normal size, and the timing when the symbol shaking starts), the game effect lamp 9 switches from blinking white to smoothly lighting up in rainbow colors. This allows the smooth symbol release from the symbol release to the re-draw performance, the smooth transition to the shaking period, and the celebration of the symbol alignment to be performed by the illumination of the screen and lamps. After that, during the symbol shaking period of FIG. 143 (A7), a screen in which the symbol has moved downward from the normal position is displayed. During the two-symbol shaking state of (A7), the game effect lamp 9 goes out.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143 (A8), during the symbol fluctuation period, a screen with the symbol displayed in the center is displayed. As shown in (A8), the game effect lamp 9 is turned off in the state of two symbol fluctuations. Thereafter, as shown in (A9), during the movement start period of the re-lottery performance, the two symbols are displayed in a smaller size than in the state of (A8). In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A9), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (A10), two symbols are further reduced and displayed from the state of (A9). In the state of 2-symbol reduction (A10), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

Thereafter, from FIG. 144 (A11) to FIG. 148 (A24), the numbers used as decorative patterns change at high speed to perform replacement display. When the replacement display is performed, the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is sequentially replaced with another pattern, and thus the decorative pattern is switched one after another. For example, as shown in (A11), two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of variation (A11), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Thereafter, as shown in (A12), the three symbols are clearly displayed during high-speed fluctuation. In the state of the three symbols (A12), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. From then on, from Figure 145 (A13) to Figure 148 (A23), the symbols are changed at high speed, such as 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, etc., and the display becomes thinner. A clear display is repeated. From FIG. 145 (A13) to FIG. 148 (A23), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red.

After that, in FIG. 148 (A24), where the high-speed fluctuation that started from the 2 symbols passes through one cycle and the 2 symbols are clearly displayed again, a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the 2 symbols. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149 (A25), when the two symbols are displayed faintly during high-speed fluctuation, the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed. After that, from Figure 149 (A26) to Figure 156 (A46), 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, etc. , the symbols are replaced while changing at high speed, and a thin display and a clear display are repeated. Also, the time gauge gradually decreases over time. From FIG. 148 (A24) to FIG. 156 (A46), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red. Then, when the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an odd numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (B1). When the push button 31B is operated from the state of (A46), if it has been determined that an even numbered symbol will be derived, the process moves to the performance of (C1).

[Performance in the re-draw part (odd number pattern derived after button operation)]
With reference to Figures 157 to 160, the performance in the re-selection part (deriving odd symbols after button operation) will be described. In Figures 157 to 160, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated in the re-selection performance until an odd symbol is derived will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157 (B1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "333", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (B1), in the 3-pattern enlarged state, the background becomes brighter, the "333" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by a converging line. In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B2), the pattern combination "333" is displayed larger than in the state of (B1). In the 3-pattern enlarged state of (B2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. After that, as shown in (B3), the pattern combination "333" is displayed in a reduced size. In the 3-pattern reduced state of (B3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (B4), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 3-symbol reduction (B4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (B5), the symbol combination "333" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the state of the three symbols (B5) of normal size, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (B6), there is a shaking period in which the symbol combination "333" swings up and down. In (B6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position. In the three-symbol shaking state (B6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 159 (B7). The symbol shaking period continues even in the normal background (B7). In the normal background shaking state (B7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (B7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the decorative pattern "333" is fixed and stopped. In addition, in the symbol confirmation period (B8), the small symbol is also fixed and stopped at "333". During the symbol determination period (B8), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Thereafter, as shown in (B9), the symbol confirmation period continues. During the symbol determination period (B9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighting mode of flashing rainbow colors. Thereafter, during the fanfare period of FIG. 160 (D1), the same screen as in the state of (B9) is displayed. However, the game effect lamp 9 turns off in accordance with the fanfare. Thereafter, as shown in (D2), the screen changes to a screen on which the characters "FEVER" indicating the fanfare mode and Yume-chan are displayed, after the mode of the game effect lamp 9 is delayed. Further, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 remains lit in a fanfare manner.

[Production mode in the re-lottery part (even numbered symbols are derived after button operation)]
With reference to FIGS. 161 to 164, the production mode in the re-lottery part (even number symbols are derived after button operation) will be described. 161 to 164, the flow of a series of performances from when a button is operated until an even numbered symbol is derived in the re-lottery performance will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 161 (C1), a pattern display effect is executed in which the decorative pattern combination "222", which indicates a jackpot display result, is displayed large on the screen. As shown in (C1), in the two-pattern enlarged state, the background becomes brighter and the "222" pattern is enlarged, and the pattern is emphasized by a converging line. In the two-pattern enlarged state of (C1), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (C2), the pattern combination "222" is displayed larger than in the state of (C1). In the two-pattern enlarged state of (C2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. After that, as shown in (C3), the pattern combination "222" is displayed reduced. In the two-pattern reduced state of (C3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162 (C4), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed. In the state of 2-symbol reduction (C4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (C5), the symbol combination "222" is further reduced and displayed in normal size. In the state of the two symbols (C5) of normal size, the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, as shown in (C6), the background returns to the state of (A46), and a swinging period begins in which the symbol combination "222" swings up and down. In (C6), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are raised upward from the normal position. In the two-symbol shaking state (C6), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in a rainbow color. Thereafter, the background changes to a normal background as shown in FIG. 163 (C7). The symbol shaking period continues even in the normal background (C7). In the normal background shaking state (C7), a screen is displayed in which the symbols are lowered from the normal position. In the normal background shaking state of (C7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in FIG. 163 (C8), the decorative pattern of "222" is fixed and stopped. Also, during the pattern fixing period of (C8), the small pattern is also fixed and stopped at "222". During the pattern fixing period of (C8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. After that, as shown in (C9), the pattern fixing period continues. During the pattern fixing period of (C9), the game effect lamp 9 maintains its smooth rainbow lighting. After that, during the fanfare period of FIG. 164 (E1), the same screen as in the state of (C9) is displayed. However, the state of the game effect lamp 9 is turned off corresponding to the fanfare. After that, as shown in (E2), the screen switches to a screen displaying the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, with a delay from the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, the state of the game effect lamp 9 at this time maintains the lighting of the fanfare state.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 5)
The above-mentioned shutter is an image that makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible when closed, and makes the image of the performance being performed visible when opened after closing. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is in a closing state, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is in a opening state, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes it possible to make the flow of the performance look favorable by making the closing and opening of the shutter more realistic. Note that the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, but an image other than the shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a role object.

(Start 6)
Furthermore, the shutter described above is configured to close from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to suitably display an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

(Start 7)
Also, as shown in Fig. 58, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. This makes it possible to blur the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is low and the edge of the shutter just before the shutter is completely closed as shown in Fig. 58 (a12), and eliminates the sense of incongruity. Similarly, it is possible to eliminate the sense of incongruity when the shutter begins to open as shown in Fig. 60 (a16).

(Start 8)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 described above, after the shutter is opened, the SP first half reach is started. Until the shutter is fully opened, the SP first half reach performance does not start, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half performance progresses. According to this, since the SP first half reach performance is a performance that the player wants to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction caused by the performance being executed before the shutter is opened.

(Start 10)
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) described above, the brightness of the screen is first lowered before the shutter starts closing, and the shutter is completely closed at the timing when the shutter is completely closed. . Here, if the brightness of the screen is reduced at the same time as the shutter closes, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to reduce the screen brightness in advance, the speed of the screen darkening can be set to an appropriate value, and a series of effects can be presented in a suitable manner.

(Start 12)
In addition, the player is not able to know which SP first half reach will start until the shutter is opened. This allows the player to have high expectations as to which performance will be executed.

(Start 13)
The above-mentioned shutter effect may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development to the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed at the timing from the second re-variation to the third re-variation in the pseudo consecutive. Also, when the shutter is closed and then opened, an icon image (e.g., a green reserved image) indicating a change in the active reserved, which is the reserved display of the variation, may be displayed, and the active reserved may change in response to the icon image (e.g., from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can improve the interest of the shutter effect.

(Start 15)
In addition to the above-described pattern in which the shutter closes and opens automatically, a pattern may be provided in which a button image is displayed after the shutter is closed, and the shutter is opened by performing a button operation. According to this, since a plurality of types of effects by the shutter are provided, the interest of the effects by the shutter is improved.

(Inciting 1)
In addition, the above-mentioned inciting part in which the validity is incited was updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part.

(Incitement 2)
Also, as shown in Fig. 63(b5) and the like, in the provocative part, the lines of the friendly characters are spoken first, and subtitles corresponding to the lines are displayed. This allows the friendly characters to be easily recognized in the provocative part.

(Incitement 3)
The subtitle display of the ally character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period of time than the subtitle display in other scenes in the teasing part, so that the ally character can be clearly recognized.

(Inciting 4)
Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) described above, there are scenes in which subtitles are not displayed when an ally character utters a line. According to this, while suitably displaying the subtitle display of the ally character displayed first, it is possible to display the screen display more suitably than when subtitle display is attached to all lines.

(Inciting 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned inciting part, SP first half reach A, SP first half reach B as the first inciting part that is executed at the timing of the first half, and SP second half reach A as the second inciting part that is executed at the timing of the second half. , SP late reach B, and SP final reach. There are also scenes in which ally characters play an active role, whether in the first inciting part or in the second inciting part. Also, in any of the incitement parts, a line from an ally character occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in any of the inciting parts.

(Incitement 6)
In the above-mentioned provocation part, in the provocation part corresponding to the SP first half reach B, the character Yume Yume plays an active role, and in the provocation part corresponding to the SP second half reach B, the characters Jam and Nana play an active role. In the SP first half reach B, the ally character Yume Yume who plays the first role speaks a line, and a subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. In the SP second half reach B, the ally characters Jam and Nana who play the first role speak a line, and a subtitle corresponding to the line is displayed. This allows the ally characters to be appropriately recognized in each provocation part. The number of characters who play an active role may be one or more. The character who plays an active role in the first half provocation part and the second half provocation part may be the same.

(Inciting 11)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 63(b5) and 63(b6), there are scenes in which each character speaks a line in a situation where an ally character and an enemy character are displayed. Under such circumstances, subtitles for lines are displayed in a fixed size and at a fixed display position. According to this, by not changing the display mode of lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the chances of bugs and the like getting angry.

(Inciting cut-in 2)
Further, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the button image promotion display is displayed. According to this, the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen with attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. Can be done.

(Teasing cut-in 3)
As shown in the above-mentioned Figures 128 (r41) to 130 (r47), the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period of time after the cut-in display is cleared. Then, after the predetermined period of no dialogue has elapsed, a line is spoken and subtitles are displayed for that line. This allows the player to concentrate on the presentation during the period after the cut-in display, making for an ideal cut-in display.

(True or False 1)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r54), the scene where the winning or losing was decided was between the teasing part and the epilogue part. And, in the winning or losing decision scene, the player was notified of whether or not it was a big win by operating the trigger as the operating means. Also, in the winning or losing decision scene, if it was a big win, the role-playing device moved after the trigger was operated. In this way, the excitement of the presentation is increased by making the winning or losing decision scene suitable for using the operating means.

(True or false 2)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) described above, subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and after that, the screen corresponding to the operating means displays the subtitles. The performance that was being performed becomes no longer visible. Then, the performance that was executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means over the entire screen, and to display the performance that was being executed properly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be shown in a suitable manner. .

(True or false 3)
In addition, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51), while the introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are being displayed, The production is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

(True or False 4)
Also, in the above-mentioned FIG. 132 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54), when a trigger image is displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moves slightly each time the image changes. In this way, the performance may be progressed while the promotion display is being displayed. Here, the progress of the performance may not be limited to the tail moving, but may also include scene changes or character movements. This allows attention to be drawn to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

(5 correct or not)
Furthermore, the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the performance that was executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to pay attention to the prompting display for operating the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the progress of the performance. Note that the performance that progresses while the prompting display is displayed may be set to progress slower than the performance that progresses while the introduction image is displayed. This allows a difference in the progress speed of the performance between when the prompting display is displayed and when the introduction image is displayed.

(True or false 6)
Further, it is preferable to apply an echo to the lines before the introduction image as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) is displayed. According to this, the players can be excited before the introduction image is displayed.

(True or False: 7)
Also, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 130 (r47) to 131 (r49), the introduction image is displayed after deleting the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the timing of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

(14 correct or not)
In addition, from the above-mentioned FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39), the image in which the two characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and at the timing of (i39), one image is displayed still for a predetermined period. After that, if there is a big win, the image of the winning epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the image of the losing epilogue part is played. During the period in which one image is displayed still for a predetermined period, one image can be reused, so that the winning/losing decision scene can be favorably stirred up while reducing the data capacity. Note that, during the period in which the image in which the two characters are displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used as shown in FIG. 95 (i36) to FIG. 96 (i39).

(16 correct answers)
Also, from the aforementioned FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54), there is a display period of an introductory image in which images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. After that, there is a period in which a prompting display for operating the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the prompting display, multiple images are gradually moved to make the character appear to be moving. After that, by operating the trigger at the branching scene of winning or losing, an image of the winning epilogue part is played if it is a big win, and an image of the losing epilogue part is played if it is a loss. All of these periods are periods in which a dynamic display in which the images appear to be moving is performed. This allows a series of performances to be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

(True or false 18)
Also, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the scenes of the decision of validity shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. In addition, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

(Epilogue 1)
The aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition when a miss occurs, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which friendly characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the performance is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate performance to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of performances can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 4)
As shown in FIG. 104 (n10) described above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the provocation part. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 110(o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene where the enemy character receives damage in the winning epilogue part (crab catching scene). According to this, the subtitle display that was not displayed in the promotion part is displayed in the winning epilogue part, so that the feeling of celebration can be emphasized.

(Epilogue 6)
As shown in (s5) to (s6) of FIG. 134, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the teasing part. According to this, by displaying the subtitle display in the final winning epilogue part for a longer period, the player can be immersed in the afterglow of the big win and the feeling of celebration can be emphasized. Note that when displaying the subtitle display, the display may be made to be longer when the number of characters is greater than when the number of characters is smaller. Even in such a case, if the winning epilogue part and the teasing part have the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters), the display may be designed so that the period during which the subtitle display is displayed in the winning epilogue part is longer.

(Epilogue 15)
As shown in Fig. 134 (s6) to Fig. 135 (s8) above, the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from being covered by the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. Therefore, the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 17)
As shown in Fig. 136 (s10) described above, when the symbol presentation is completed and the player can recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the image of the character or the like displayed as the background are still images. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see due to the background of the decorative symbol being animated.

(Epilogue 18)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the video that was being played during the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at a timing before the symbol appearance is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of symbol display.

(Epilogue 19)
As shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special feature similar to a comic book. According to this, by adding a special type of effect to a still image, it is possible to emphasize that the video is still, and to suggest that the scene has changed, thereby making it possible to make it a suitable epilogue part.

(Epilogue 21)
It is desirable that the subtitle display before the display of the symbols shown in FIG. 134 (s6) described above does not have a fade effect that gradually erases the display. Here, subtitles displayed at other timings may be given a fade effect that gradually erases the display. According to this, by adding a fade effect to the display of subtitles other than the final one, effective switching can be achieved, and by instantly erasing the final subtitle display, the final subtitle display can overlap the decorative pattern. It is possible to prevent the message from being put away and from being mistakenly recognized as a message in the presentation of the symbols. Therefore, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

(Epilogue 22)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed when the pattern is displayed. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols, and to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable winning epilogue part.

(Epilogue 23)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Here, the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be synchronized at the timing when the display of the decorative pattern is completed. Specifically, during the pattern swing period when the display of the decorative pattern is completed and the pattern is swinging up and down, the small pattern may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative pattern. According to this, by matching the movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern, the flow of the performance in the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Epilogue 24)
As shown in Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5) above, when the re-draw part is performed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed. Then, the decorative pattern is added with an effect image using a convergent line, but the small pattern is not added with an effect image. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image, and is displayed in front. This makes it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner while enhancing the performance effect of the effect image for the decorative pattern.

(Epilogue 25)
As shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a state where the patterns are aligned. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-selection part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be changed again. This allows the decorative pattern and the small pattern to be displayed in a synchronized manner.

(Re-selection effect 3)
As shown in FIG. 142 (A5) above, in the final state of the pattern release performance in the winning epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying and an effect image with concentrated lines is added. When switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery performance as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Also, the game effect lamp 9 switches from a smooth rainbow light to an off state. In other words, from the pattern release to the re-lottery performance, the pattern swaying and effect mode continue, and the background and lamp are designed to switch. This makes it easy to understand which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance started from.

(Re-draw performance 6)
As shown in the above-mentioned flow of Fig. 144 (A10) to Fig. 156 (A46) and Fig. 157 (B1) to Fig. 158 (B5), in the re-lottery presentation, the symbol feed is performed by the reduced-sized decorative symbols, and a button action prompt is displayed. Then, when the player operates the button, a symbol release presentation is performed in which the symbols are enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative symbols that will be finally notified are enlarged and displayed from the moment the symbols are released. In this way, since the symbols that will finally be notified start to be enlarged, it is possible to easily show the player what the final notification symbol will be.

(Re-lottery performance 16)
The pattern display in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using substantially the same video. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern part including the background may be made completely the same.

(Re-draw performance 17)
In the aforementioned pattern display performance, a series of performances is executed in which the pattern is once enlarged and then returned to the normal size at the center of the screen. This allows the series of pattern display performances to be displayed in a favorable manner by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

(Re-draw performance 18)
In the above-mentioned pattern display performance, the data of the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance may use the same pattern display data. Then, a series of pattern display performances may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce the data capacity while making the pattern display performance look good. Note that the data of the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data of the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance may use substantially the same data.

<Detailed explanation of the performance mode>
Next, with reference to Figures 165 to 191, the following will explain in detail the characteristics and variations of the above-mentioned presentation aspects that should be particularly mentioned.

[About Inciting 12, 13, 15]
In FIG. 165, the characteristic parts of the inciting part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of parts (b11) to (b13))
FIG. 165 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (b11) to (b13) portions of the SP first half reach A described above. As shown in FIG. 165 (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume-chan is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right in the left-right direction. In accordance with this character arrangement, the frame left lamp lights up green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, and the frame right lamp lights up red corresponding to Bakuchu. Also, in the (b11) state, Yume Yume-chan's line "Wait~" is output as a dialogue sound, Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "Zazz zazz" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "Ta-ta-ta-ta-ta" are output as a physical sound.

Also, as shown in (b11), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is such that, in the front-to-back direction, Bakuchu is in front and Yume Yume-chan is in the back. From the player's perspective, their positions are such that Bakuchu is close by and Yume Yume-chan is far away. In contrast, the relationship in terms of volume is as follows: Yume Yume-chan's line "Wait~" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatatap" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, the volume data is set so that the line sound of Yume Yume-chan, which is far away, is louder than the footsteps of Bakuchu, which is close by.

In FIG. 165 (b12), the relationship between Yume Yume-chan and Bakuchu on the screen is the same as in the state of (b11) in both the left-right and front-back directions. In (b12), no dialogue sounds are output, and the physical sounds of Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za" and Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" are output. The volume relationship is Bakuchu's footsteps "tatatatat" > Yume Yume-chan's footsteps "za za za". In this way, when no dialogue sounds are output, the volume data is set so that the closer Bakuchu's footsteps are louder than the farther Yume Yume-chan's footsteps to match the front-to-back relationship on the screen.

In FIG. 165 (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume is on the left and Bakuchu is on the right in the left-right direction. Also, in the state of (b13), Bakuchu's line "I won't get caught!" is output as a dialogue sound, Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz za za" are output as a physical sound, and Bakuchu's footsteps "tata tata" are output as a physical sound. Also, as shown in (b13), the relationship between Yume Yume and Bakuchu on the screen is such that Yume Yume is in front and Bakuchu is behind in the front-to-back direction. The positional relationship as seen by the player is such that Yume Yume is close and Bakuchu is far away. In contrast, the relationship in volume is such that Bakuchu's line sound "I won't get caught!" > Yume Yume's footsteps "Zzz za za" > Bakuchu's footsteps "tata tata". In this way, the volume data is set so that Bakuchu's lines, which are far away, are louder than Yume-chan's footsteps, which are closer.

(Inciting 12)
In the inciting part, the BGM of SP Reach is output, and there are also scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also referred to as action sounds) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

(Inciting 13)
Here, the working process when actually creating various performances in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. First, in the pachinko game machine 1, videos for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created. To match this video, special software is used to add production sounds such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds one by one. The finished video and sound are played, and the strength of the sound is further added. In this series of work processes, rather than outputting sound with a sense of reality while maintaining the actual sense of distance on the video, it is better to abandon reality and output sound that ignores the actual sense of distance that is easier to convey to the player. The sound data is set as follows. Thereby, a series of performances can be suitably shown.

(Incitement 15)
In addition, when the dialogue sound of a character that the player feels is far away overlaps with a physical sound that the player feels is close, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This discards reality and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Regarding instigation 14 and 16]
In Figures 166 and 167, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Volume level explanation)
Fig. 166 is a diagram for explaining volume levels. As shown in Fig. 166(A), the relationship between the volume levels of dialogue sounds, physical sounds (footsteps), and BGM for SP reach among the sounds output from the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained. The output volume levels have the relationship dialogue sounds>physical sounds (footsteps)>BGM for SP reach. In addition, when these three sounds overlap, the way in which the sounds are output differs between dialogue sounds with subtitles and dialogue sounds without subtitles.

As shown in FIG. 166(B), in the case of dialogue sounds with subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) are output at a timing when the dialogue sounds (with subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of the BGM for the SP reach is controlled to be output at a lower volume. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 166(C), in the case of dialogue sounds without subtitles, when the dialogue sounds (without subtitles) overlap with the physical sounds and the BGM for the SP reach, the volume level of none of the sounds is changed while maintaining the relationship of dialogue sounds > physical sounds (footsteps) > BGM for the SP reach.

(Incitement 14)
In this way, when the physical sound of the character and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, the dialogue sound is adjusted and outputted so that it sounds louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are outputted in an overlapping manner, as shown in Fig. 166(B), the background music of the SP reach is adjusted to be quieter in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, the content of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player while creating a sense of reality.

(Incitement 16)
166(B) and (C), when comparing a case where the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound has subtitles and a case where the dialogue sound overlapping with the physical sound does not have subtitles, the dialogue sound with subtitles is adjusted to sound louder by lowering the volume of the BGM for the SP reach. The dialogue sound with subtitles is more related to the content of the SP reach than the dialogue sound without subtitles. Therefore, by outputting the dialogue sound with subtitles related to the content of the SP reach louder, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

(Explanation of volume level)
FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the volume level. A method for effectively outputting the volume by a method different from that shown in FIG. 166 will be explained with reference to FIG. 167. In FIG. 167 and FIG. 166, the relationship of output volume levels is the same: dialogue sound>physical sound (footsteps)>SP reach BGM. However, as shown in FIG. 167(B), when the character's physical sound and the dialogue sound overlap and are output, the dialogue sound is adjusted to be louder than the physical sound.

(Inciting 16)
As shown in Figures 167(B) and (C), there is a difference between a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle, and a case where a dialogue sound that overlaps with a physical sound has a subtitle. The volume will be adjusted to be louder only for those who are listening. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[About provocations 7 and 8]
In Figures 168 to 170, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r24) to (r27) parts)
FIG. 168 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r24) to (r27) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r24), in a scene where the AD character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in orange color corresponding to AD. Thereafter, as shown in (r25), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in orange in a scene where the AD performs a jumping action. At this time, "Ai!" is output as the AD dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r25'), when the AD is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r26), in a scene where Maid A's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to Maid A. Thereafter, as shown in (r27), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in blue in a scene where Maid A performs a jumping action. At this time, "To!" is output as Maid A's dialogue sound, but no subtitles are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (r27'), in the scene where Maid A is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r28) to (r31) parts)
FIG. 169 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r28) to (r31) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r28), in a scene where Maid B's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in Hawaiian blue color corresponding to Maid B. Thereafter, as shown in (r29), in a scene where Maid B performs a jumping action, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in Hawaiian blue color. At this time, Maid B's dialogue sound, which is the same as Maid A's "Too!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r29'), in the scene where Maid B is removed from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r30), in a scene where Nana-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r31), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in pink in a scene where Nana-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Teiya!" is output as Nana's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r31'), in the scene where Nana-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of (r32) to (r35) parts)
FIG. 170 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r32) to (r35) portions of the final reach mentioned above. As shown in (r32), in a scene where Jam-chan's character is up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to Jam-chan. Thereafter, as shown in (r32), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in purple in a scene where Jam-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, the sound of Jam-chan's dialogue, "Toriya!", is output, but no subtitles are displayed. After that, as shown in (r32'), in the scene where Jam-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Thereafter, as shown in (r34), in a scene where Yume-chan's character is close-up, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan. After that, as shown in (r35), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in green in a scene where Yumu-chan performs a jumping action. At this time, "Oya!" is output as Yumu-chan's dialogue sound, but subtitles are not displayed. After that, as shown in (r35'), in the scene where Yume-chan is released from the screen, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white three times.

Here, in scenes such as r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35, the output lines are one-word lines that seem to be enthusiastic. In these specific scenes, the scene switching is faster than in other scenes. Furthermore, in these specific scenes, the subtitles are not directly related to the story development compared to other subtitled scenes. For these reasons, subtitles corresponding to the lines are not displayed.

(Incitement 7)
As shown in Figures 168 to 170, there are scenes in the teasing part where the character speaks lines but no subtitles are added (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, and r35). However, even in such specific scenes, the brightness data of the game effect lamp 9 (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in scenes where no subtitles are displayed for the sound of the lines, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. This makes it possible to preferably execute the effect corresponding to the character, and to preferably show the teasing part to the player.

(Inciting 8)
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), colors other than those corresponding to the character in the previous scene are used. Control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in orange corresponding to the AD character. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. Also, before the scene of (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in the orange color of (r25) or the white color of (r25'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in blue color corresponding to the character of Maid A. This is the scenario. Also, before the scene of (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) or the white color of (r27'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the blue color of (r27) and the color of Hawaiian blue corresponding to the character of Maid B. This is a scenario where the lights turn on. In addition, before the scene of (r30), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the Hawaiian blue color of (r29) or the white color of (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color corresponding to Nana's character. This is the scenario in which the light is lit. In addition, before the scene of (r32), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/flashes in the pink color of (r31) and the white color of (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple color corresponding to the Jam-chan character. This is the scenario. In addition, before the scene of (r34), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in purple (r33) and white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 lights up in green corresponding to Yume-chan's character. becomes. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to light up the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the relevant character, and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the color corresponding to the character. Control takes place. Therefore, it is possible to express in the form of a lamp that the displayed character changes and to clearly indicate to the player which character the changed character is, which can be a suitable inciting part.

[About start 1 to 4]
Characteristic parts in FIGS. 171 and 172 will be explained by assigning numbers.

(Detailed explanatory diagram of accessory movements in (b18) to (i1))
FIG. 171 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (b18) to (i1). In the scene shown in (b18) before the determination of validity, the game effect lamp 9 maintains a white lighting state. Thereafter, when the SP develops into a second half reach, the movable body 32 as an accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the accessory falls from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen while tilting diagonally. As shown in (h1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. Due to the effect image, Yumu-chan's character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (h1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in red in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in state (h2), the reel falls further so that the letter "P" of the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative pattern was displayed. In state (h2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red. In addition, a reel-related sound corresponding to the falling of the reel is output as a sound effect. After that, in state (h3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (h2). In state (h3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes red.

After that, as shown in (h4), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the (h4) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow. When changing from the (h3) state to the retreating state (h4), the brightness data table output from the brightness data table of the reel operation part to the brightness data table of the SP latter half reach A (teasing part) changes. After that, in the (h5) state, the reel rises further. In the (h5) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes yellow.

FIG. 172 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory movements in (b18) to (i1). After (h5), in the state of (h6), the accessory increases further. In the state (h6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in yellow. Thereafter, as shown in (h7), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP starts to be slightly visible. In the state (h7), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Furthermore, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP, which is BGM corresponding to the second half of the SP reach, is output as a sound effect. Note that sound effects related to the title in the latter half of the SP may be output together with the BGM. Thereafter, in the state (h8), the accessory increases further from the state (h7). In the state (h8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h8), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

After that, in the state (h9), the accessory increases further. In the state (h9), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h8), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h9), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. After that, in the state (h10), the accessory increases further. In the state (h10), the effect image is lighter than in the state (h9), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state (h10), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow. Thereafter, in the state (i1), the effect image disappears and the title corresponding to the scene of the start of SP second half reach A is clearly displayed. In the state (i1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in yellow.

(Start 1)
As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the reel switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, an effect image corresponding to the action of the reel is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the SP second half reach A. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table of the reel action part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 to be described later) to the brightness data table of the SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIG. 204 and FIG. 205 to be described later). Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the SP second half (for example, BGM of the SP second half) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel has completed its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being spoiled. Also, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the latter half of the SP while the reel is returning to its initial position, the promotional part of the latter half of the SP can be displayed optimally.

(Start 2)
As shown in FIG. 171 and FIG. 172, the action of the role switches the action from the SP first half reach A to the SP second half reach A. Also, before the action of the role, the "2" symbol is reduced and displayed in the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the role operates, the role falls so that the character "P" of the role is located at a position where it overlaps with the location where the reduced "2" decorative symbol was displayed. Also, according to the action of the role falling, an effect image corresponding to the role action is displayed in a layer that is prioritized in front of the reduced "2" symbol. Then, after the role rises from the drop position and the "2" symbol is in a position where it does not overlap with the role, the effect image gradually fades and the background corresponding to the SP second half reach A and the "2" symbol are faintly displayed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display from becoming unsightly due to the reduced decorative symbol being displayed during the role operation. Also, the effect image corresponding to the role action is displayed on the premise that the role is in a position where it overlaps with the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the latter half of the SP before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the display can be made to look good. In addition, since a reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the reel's rise, it is possible to switch the performance in a way that is suitable for the reel's operation.

(Start 3)
As shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable performance by adding accessories.

(Start 4)
Note that an image related to the accessory may be displayed when switching from the effect image to the image of the performance that will develop in the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the accessory rises, the words "POWERFULII" and images of the main characters Yumu-chan, Jam-chan, Nana-chan, etc. may be displayed. According to this, by providing interlocking when the production changes, it is possible to show a suitable change in production that includes the use of accessories.

[About Epilogue 7, 8, 10-14, 20]
In FIGS. 173 and 174, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Detailed explanation of the role operation in (r54) to (s4))
FIG. 173 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the operation of the accessory in (r54) to (s4). In the scene before the winning/losing decision in (r54), a sound corresponding to the operation prompt is output, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes in red. At this time, an operation image corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed on the screen together with the Bakuchu character. In addition, a time gauge is displayed below the operation image as an operation prompt display for prompting the operation. When the player executes the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A within a predetermined period, or when a predetermined period has elapsed, the movable body 32 as the accessory operates. Specifically, an effect is executed in which the accessory falls while tilting obliquely from the top of the screen toward the front of the screen. Here, the time during which the accessory falls in the winning/losing notification scene is longer than the time during which the accessory falls in the scene that develops into the latter half of the SP.

As shown in (s1), a radial effect image is displayed on the screen at the beginning of the falling of the accessory. This effect image has a more flashy presentation than the effect image when the SP reach develops into the second half. Specifically, the effect image in the scene of the success/failure notification like (s1) is a rainbow color. Note that the effect images in scenes that develop in the latter half of the SP are blue and red. Further, due to the effect image, the Bakuchu character and the reduced "2" decorative pattern are no longer visible. Further, in the state (s1), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors in accordance with the falling of the accessory.

After that, in state (s2), the reel falls so that the letter "P" on the reel overlaps with the location where the reduced decorative "2" pattern was displayed. In state (s2), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. After that, in state (s3), the position of the reel is maintained at the position where it fell in state (s2). In state (s3), the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

After that, as shown in (s3-2), the reel starts to rise (the reel moves from the advanced position to the retreated position). In the (s3-2) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white. When changing from the (s3) state to the retreating state (s3-2), the brightness data table output changes from the brightness data table for the reel operation in the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part. After that, in the (s3-3) state, the reel rises further. In the (s3-3) state, the game effect lamp 9 flashes white.

FIG. 174 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the accessory motion in (r54) to (s4). After (s3-3), in the state of (s3-4), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-4), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. Thereafter, as shown in (s3-5), when the accessory further rises, the effect image displayed corresponding to the accessory becomes lighter. As the effect image becomes thinner (transmittance becomes higher), the background corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach begins to be faintly visible. In the state of (s3-5), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part, which is BGM corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, is output as a sound effect. Thereafter, in the state (s3-6), the accessory increases further from the state (s3-5). In the state (s3-6), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-5), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-6), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white.

After that, in the state of (s3-7), the accessory increases further. In the state of (s3-7), the effect image is lighter than in the state of (s3-6), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-7), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state of (s3-8), the accessory increases further. In the state (s3-8), the effect image is lighter than in the state (s3-7), so the background display becomes easier to see. In the state of (s3-8), the game effect lamp 9 blinks in white. After that, in the state (s4), a scene in which Yumu-chan catches Bakuchu is displayed. At this time, the sound when the production is successful is output as a sound effect. In addition, subtitles are displayed along with Bakuchu's line ``Ugh, I got caught.'' In the state (s4), the game effect lamp 9 lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

(Epilogue 7)
As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the final reach of the SP. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

(Epilogue 8)
It is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display changes to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the ascent, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to the initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

(Epilogue 10)
BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue starting. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part using the BGM.

(Epilogue 11)
A sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the sound effect, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 12)
BGM and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is suggested by the BGM and sound effects, so that the epilogue part can be started appropriately.

(Epilogue 13)
When the reel returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and when the reel returns to its initial position and the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitles are displayed. This makes it possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a time when they are difficult to see, and to execute the epilogue part in an optimal manner.

(Epilogue 14)
When the props return to their initial positions, the dialogue sound can be output and subtitles can be displayed in the epilogue display. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed appropriately.

(Epilogue 20)
As shown in FIG. 173 to FIG. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display is gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel is changed to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to the initial position, the display can be made to look good. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, since the subtitles are displayed after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[About Epilogue 2, 3, and 5]
In FIG. 175, the characteristic parts in the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

(Relationship between number of subtitles and number of lines)
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of subtitles and the number of lines. FIG. 175 shows the number of lines of characters being produced and the number of subtitles corresponding to the lines for each type of SP reach and the type of epilogue corresponding to each SP reach. For example, in the case of SP first half reach A, the number of lines is 8 and the number of subtitles is 5. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, there is no dialogue, so there are no subtitles.

In addition, in the case of SP first half reach B, the number of lines is 5 and the number of subtitles is 3. Also, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP Reach B, the number of lines is 3 and the number of subtitles is 3. In the case of the losing epilogue part of Reach B in the first half of the SP, there are no dialogues, so there are no subtitles. In addition, in the case of SP second half reach A, the number of lines is 16 and the number of subtitles is 14. In addition, in the case of the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1. In the case of the lose-lose epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A, the number of lines is 1 and the number of subtitles is 1.

In the case of SP second half reach B, there are 9 lines and 7 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there are 3 lines and 3 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP second half reach B, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle. In the case of SP final reach, there are 27 lines and 19 subtitles. In the case of the winning epilogue part of SP final reach, there are 2 lines and 2 subtitles. In the case of the losing epilogue part of SP final reach, there is 1 line and 1 subtitle.

(Epilogue 2)
As shown in FIG. 175, the ratio of subtitles displayed for the lines of the characters in the epilogue part is higher than the ratio of subtitles displayed for the characters in the SP reach, which is the provocative part. According to this, by displaying the subtitles clearly in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Also, since there are more screen changes in the provocative part than in the epilogue part, even if the subtitles are displayed, the display time is shorter, so that the auxiliary subtitle display does not interfere with the performance, and the primary focus is to convey the performance by switching images. This allows for a suitable performance to be executed in the provocative part.

(Epilogue 3)
As shown in FIG. 175, in the epilogue part, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue. According to this, in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to emphasize the sense of congratulations by clearly showing what the characters are saying.

(Epilogue 5)
As shown in FIG. 175, there are multiple types of SP reach, which is the inciting part, and each type has a different development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so it is possible to convey the effect primarily through image switching, and to prevent the effect from getting in the way by displaying auxiliary subtitles. . Thereby, suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[About re-draw performances 1, 4, 5, 7 to 18]
In Figures 176 and 177, the characteristic parts of the re-selection part are numbered and explained.

(Details of the re-draw part)
Fig. 176 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A1) to (A23) parts in the re-selection part. Fig. 177 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (A24) to (A46) parts in the re-selection part.

When the jackpot display result is derived, the symbols are enlarged as shown in (A1) and (A2), and then are reduced in size as shown in (A3) and (A4). Thereafter, as shown in (A5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (A6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect and the re-lottery effect is started. Here, from the state (A5) to the state (A6), the period in which the symbols are oscillating is omitted. Specifically, when the pattern is normal size, the pattern is shaking. Then, after the size becomes normal, the symbol fluctuation of the re-lottery part starts. At this time, at a timing related to the completion of symbol dispensing (for example, including the timing immediately before the normal size, the timing after the normal size, the timing when the symbol swing starts, etc.), the game effect lamp 9 The light changes from blinking white to smoothly lighting in rainbow colors. As a result, it is possible to perform smooth symbol display from symbol display to re-lottery performance, smooth transition to a swinging period, and blessings due to alignment of the symbols by illumination of the screen and lamp.

After that, as shown in (A7) and (A8), there is a period of oscillation in which the symbols oscillate up and down. After that, as shown in (A9) and (A10), the "2" symbol in the center is temporarily reduced in size. After that, high-speed fluctuations are performed in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols from (A11) to (A23) are all displayed. After that, high-speed fluctuations are performed again in a manner in which the "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1" symbols used as decorative symbols from (A10') to (A23') are all displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in (A24), after all the decorations have been displayed twice, the button image is faintly displayed together with the "2" symbol that was initially displayed. After that, from (A25) to (A46), the decorative pattern changes rapidly as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and as time passes The time gauge displayed under the button image will decrease accordingly. The time gauge is a display indicating the valid period of button operation. If the push button 31B is operated within the valid operation period, or if the push button 31B is not operated within the valid operation period and the valid period of button operation has ended, an odd number is displayed as shown in FIGS. 157 to 164. A symbol or an even number symbol is derived and displayed, and the game shifts to a jackpot.

(Re-draw performance 1)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which symbols are replaced by rapid variation from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and when the re-lottery performance starts, the symbol-sending performance is executed using the symbol that was temporarily stopped, so that the player can easily understand which decorative symbol the re-lottery started from. As a result, the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(Re-lottery performance 4)
At the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

(Re-lottery performance 5)
In the symbol feeding performance, the fluctuation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol being fluctuated is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to make the appearance of the fluctuation during the symbol feeding performance smooth, and it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of performances.

(Re-selection effect 7)
As shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-lottery performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance starts from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed variation from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, such as "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then the symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-lottery performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after the variation of multiple types of decorative symbols. According to this, the pattern-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed without the final display result being displayed immediately can make the flow of the series of performances look good.

(Re-selection effect 8)
In the symbol transfer performance in the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then all the decorative symbols are transferred again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are transferred in order, so that the flow of the series of performances can be clearly seen.

(Re-draw performance 9)
In the symbol forwarding performance in the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it is temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched such as a "2" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "2" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 0%, a "3" symbol with a transparency of 50%, a "4" symbol with a transparency of 0%, and a "4" symbol with a transparency of 50%. According to this, since all symbols can be displayed with a low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, it is possible to grasp what symbol is being sent.

(Re-draw performance 10)
In the symbol transfer effect in the re-draw effect, all the decorative symbols are transferred in order: "2,""3,""4,""5,""6,""7," and "1." The time each symbol is displayed is the same. This allows all symbols to be displayed for a fixed period of time, making the flow of the series of effects look good.

(Re-draw performance 11)
During the symbol forwarding performance, a promotion display formed of a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position where the promotion display is displayed is a position where it does not overlap with the position where the change in the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance is displayed. In this way, since the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance, it is possible to make the symbol forwarding easily visible to the player. Note that a part of the promotion display may overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance.

(Re-draw performance 12)
As shown in Figures 176 and 177, the promotion display starts at (A24) and (A25) after all the decorative symbols in the symbol forwarding effect have been displayed twice. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined symbol forwarding pattern is repeated twice, the player can be made to recognize the symbol forwarding effect clearly.

(Re-lottery performance 13)
Note that the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

(Re-lottery performance 14)
In the lottery performance, there are two patterns: a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, and a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. It was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 15)
In the lottery performance, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed after an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, Common data is used in any of the patterns in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In other words, the production data is the same, but the design is such that the data related to the decorative design is changed depending on the pattern. According to this, there is no need to provide a dedicated pattern, so the amount of data can be reduced.

[About provocations 21-27]
In Figures 178 to 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(fade effect)
FIG. 178 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the promotion part and a comparison diagram during the jackpot round. In the provocative part, a fade effect is applied to the subtitles for the dialogue. The fade effect is an effect consisting of a fade-in in which the display gradually becomes clearer and a fade-out in which the display gradually disappears. In FIG. 178(A), a part of the production with a fade effect in SP first half reach A, which is the inciting part, will be explained.

In state (b4), a screen where Yumu-chan and Bakuchu are facing each other is displayed. After that, as shown in (b4'), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line is displayed with a transparency of 70%. After that, as shown in (b5), the subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, a fade-in effect is added when subtitles corresponding to dialogue are displayed. In addition, in the state (b4'), the dialogue sound for "I found it" is not output, but as in the state (b5), the dialogue sound is output when the subtitle transparency is 0%. .

After that, as shown in (b5'), in the layer below the subtitle with 0% transparency for "I found it", which corresponds to Yumu-chan's dialogue, "I found it", which corresponds to Bakuchu's dialogue, is transparent. Subtitles with a rate of 70% are displayed with a fade-in effect. Thereafter, as shown in (b5''), the subtitle "I found it" and the subtitle "I found it" are displayed with a transparency of both 40%. After that, as shown in (b6), the subtitle "Found" corresponding to Bakuchu's line is displayed with a transparency of 0%. In this way, the subtitle "I found it" that corresponds to Yumu-chan's lines gradually fades out from (b5') to (b6). On the other hand, the subtitle "Found" that corresponds to Bakuchu's line gradually fades in from (b5') to (b6). Note that in the states (b5') and (b5''), the dialogue sound for "found" is not output, and when the subtitle transparency is 0% as in the state (b6), the dialogue sound is not output. There is output.

As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which the characters sing along with the music is performed. For example, in FIG. 178(B), subtitles (lyrics) such as "I'll definitely get it someday" are displayed as the song sung by Nana-chan progresses. Immediately afterwards, subtitles (lyrics) appear as the song progresses, saying, ``I'll grab it with my little hands.'' If such subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied. This is because when a song is playing, the progress of the song can be understood by the rhythm, so even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without adding a fade effect, the timing of the change is easy to understand.

(Inciting 21)
In the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitles display period overlaps with the second subtitles displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters with different states. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(Inciting 22)
As shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to one character's line is displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to another character's line. Sometimes. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 70%, overlapping the location where the first subtitle is displayed at a transmittance of 0%. After that, the first subtitle fades out, and the second subtitle fades in, resulting in a display with a transmittance of 0%. According to this, even if the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the switching of the subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect.

(Variation example of subtitle display)
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed at the same timing, a fade effect may be applied to one of the subtitles instead of applying a fade effect to both of the two subtitles. . Specifically, a pattern in which a fade effect is not applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display, and a pattern in which a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. A pattern that does not include is possible. Either pattern may be applied by replacing the pattern with the above-described pattern in which a fade effect is applied to the first subtitle display and a fade effect is applied to the second subtitle display. Furthermore, when applying a fade effect, the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display, or the second subtitle display may be superimposed on the first subtitle display.

Also, in the above, subtitles for lines of a first character and a second character are displayed at the same time. However, if the same character speaks consecutive lines, the subtitles for the first line may be displayed first, followed by the subtitles for the second line. In such a case, a fade effect may be applied to the subtitle display.

(Incitement 24)
As shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the big win round, a performance in which the character sings along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed along with the progression of the song. However, during the big win round, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously, the fade effect is not applied. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood by the rhythm while the music is playing, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are switched without the fade effect, the timing of the switch is easy to understand. Also, since the music during the big win round is a representative music of the content installed in the pachinko game machine 1, the lyrics to be displayed next are easy for the player to understand even without the fade effect. This allows the task of applying the fade effect to be omitted during the big win round, and the series of performances can be made to look good.

(Relationship between subtitle transparency and sound output)
FIG. 179 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the transparency of subtitles for lines and sound output. FIG. 179 shows the situation when Yume Yume's line "I found it" and Bakuchu's line "I found it" in FIG. 178(A) are uttered. In FIG. 179, the horizontal axis of the graph indicates the number of frames. The subtitle "I found it" is displayed at a transparency of 70% one frame after the transparency of 100%. Furthermore, one frame after that, it is displayed at a transparency of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames. The sound of the line "I found it" is not output during this period.

After that, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0% during the period when the dialogue sound "I found it" is output. Then, during period T1, which is a three-frame silent period after the output of the dialogue sound of "I found it", the subtitle "I found it" is continuously displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. . Thereafter, for the remaining one frame period of T1, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a transparency of 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "I found it" is displayed with a fade-out effect over a period of one frame.

Also, during the T1 period, the dialogue sound for "Found" is not output, but starting from one frame after the start of the T1 period, the subtitle "Found" is faded in. Is displayed. Specifically, the subtitle "Found" is displayed at a transmittance of 70% one frame after the transmittance is 100%. Furthermore, after one frame, the image is displayed with a transmittance of 0%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-in effect over a period of two frames.

After that, for the period during which the sound of the line "Found" is being output, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency of 0%. Then, during the period T2, which is a silent period of three frames after the output of the sound of the line "Found", the subtitle "Found" continues to be displayed with a transparency of 0% for two frames. After that, for the remaining one frame period of T2, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a transparency from 0% to 100%. As a result, the subtitle "Found" is displayed with a fade-out effect for the period of one frame.

As shown in Figure 179, the first subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Yumu-chan's character and the second subtitle "I found it" corresponding to Bakuchu's character have the same fade-in and fade-out. Effects are added. Furthermore, fade-in is performed over a period of two frames, whereas fade-out is performed over a period of one frame.

(Inciting 23)
As shown in Figure 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "found" is displayed so that the first subtitle and the second subtitle overlap, and is output during the period when the fade effect is applied. Not done. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, the switching of subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily understand the content of the performance visually and audibly.

(Comparison of subtitles in the promotional and epilogue parts)
FIG. 180 is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) and portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (b4) to (b6) in the provocative part. FIG. 180(B) is a detailed explanatory diagram of portions (o3) to (o5). FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B) have in common the fact that subtitles are displayed consecutively to the lines spoken by two characters. However, the period from when the first subtitle is displayed to when the second subtitle is displayed is different between FIG. 180(A) and FIG. 180(B).

As shown in FIG. 180(A), in the (b4) to (b7) portions, Yume Yume and Bakuchu are displayed facing each other in (b4). Then, in (b5), a first subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I found you" is displayed. Then, in (b6), a second subtitle corresponding to Bakuchu's line "I found you" is displayed. Then, in (b6'), Yume Yume is enlarged on the screen. Then, a subtitle corresponding to Yume Yume's line "I'll catch you!" is displayed. The time t1 from the start of (b4) to the end of (b6) is about 3 seconds.

As shown in Figure 180(B), in parts (o3) to (o5), a shop whose signboard was the crab that Jam-chan and Nana-chan defeated in (o3) is displayed, and Jam-chan's line " The first subtitle corresponding to "Signboard Nene" is displayed. After that, from (o3') to (o3''), the background of a shop with a crab as a signboard is displayed without subtitles. After that, at (o4), a second subtitle corresponding to Nana's line "Work hard" is displayed. Afterwards, the background of the shop with the crab as its sign becomes a still image. The time t1 from the start of (o3) to the end of (o5) is approximately 10 seconds.

As shown in FIGS. 180(A) and (B), in the incitement part and the epilogue part, subtitles corresponding to dialogue are displayed multiple times in one scene (period 0 to t1 and period 0 to t2). There are cases. In the case where subtitles are displayed multiple times, if there is enough time, it may be possible to erase the subtitle display that has been displayed to make it easier to understand the change in subtitle display. However, when there is not enough time, such as during the period from 0 to t1, it is difficult to temporarily erase the subtitle display. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to make the switching of subtitles easier to understand.

Here, in the pachinko game machine 1, a video is first created, and then audio such as dialogue is added. After that, subtitles corresponding to each line are added. Suppose that it would be time-consuming to recreate a video with a longer period for temporarily erasing the subtitle display during the period 0 to t1, where a large amount of time is not available. Therefore, by adding a fade effect, it is possible to make the change in subtitles easier to understand without having to recreate the video. In addition, even when there is sufficient time, such as the epilogue part when the crab signboard shop is displayed, by uniformly applying a fade effect, the overall workload is reduced, and when switching subtitles. This can prevent any discomfort from occurring.

(Inciting 26)
As shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps or not. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the workload from increasing.

(Incitement 25)
Although not shown, there are cases where the subtitle display timing overlaps even in the epilogue part. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in the epilogue part where the period from subtitle display to subtitle display is longer than in the teasing part. This is because the performance progresses quickly in the teasing part, and not as quickly in the epilogue part. As a result, the teasing part is more likely to be displayed at a timing where the subtitle displays overlap than the epilogue part. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when switching subtitles.

[Regarding Incitement 27]
In Figure 181, the characteristic parts of the provocative part are numbered and explained.

(Inciting 27)
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 in FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, it will be difficult to understand the subtitle display switching. Furthermore, when displaying subtitles for long lines or for lines that progress quickly, an unnatural feeling may occur if the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to overlay "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding a fade effect. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 in FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the area for displaying the effect, which impedes the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[About Epilogue 23]
In FIG. 182, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 182 is a detailed explanatory diagram of parts (B4) to (B11). With reference to Figure 182, the correspondence between the effects using the decorative symbols and small symbols on the screen and the effects using the game effect lamp 9 will be explained. As shown in (B4), in the effect of the re-selection part's symbol display, the enlarged "3" symbol is reduced. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in white. Next, as shown in (B5), the "3" symbol is displayed in normal size. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors. Next, as shown in (B6), the "3" symbol is displayed with a slight shaking up and down. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 flashes in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in (B7), the screen changes from the background for the re-lottery to the normal background, and in this normal background, the "3" symbol continues to be displayed with slight vertical shaking. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. Thereafter, based on receiving the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbols and small symbols are fixed and stopped, as shown in (B8). At this time, the game effect lamp 9 blinks in rainbow colors. As shown in (B9), the symbol confirmation period continues for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 s), and the same display as in (B8) is maintained on the screen. At this time, the gaming effect lamp 9 maintains the flashing rainbow color lighting mode.

After that, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes after about 10 msec to correspond to the fanfare. Also, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the screen changes after about 33 msec to change to a state in which "FEVER" is displayed. Specifically, as shown in (D1), during the fanfare period after the fanfare command is received, the screen maintains the state of (B9). In contrast, the state of the game effect lamp 9 changes to correspond to the fanfare earlier than the state of the screen. The state of the game effect lamp 9 in (D1) is off. Next, as shown in (D2), the screen changes to a screen in which the letters "FEVER" and Yume Yume-chan, indicating the fanfare state, are displayed, with a delay after the state of the game effect lamp 9. Also, at this time, the game effect lamp 9 maintains the lighted state corresponding to the fanfare.

[About Epilogue 28-31]
In FIG. 183, the characteristic parts of the epilogue part are numbered and explained.

Figure 183 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the pattern display. In the modified example, the pattern display may be performed in the order of (Y1) to (Y7). Specifically, as shown in (Y1), in the scene where the Bakuchu is caught, the reduced decorative patterns (reduced patterns) are aligned in the upper left corner of the screen in the form of "222". The game effect lamp 9 at this time is in a rainbow light (smooth) state. Next, as shown in (Y2), the screen becomes a still image and the reduced patterns flicker slightly up and down. The game effect lamp 9 at this time is in a rainbow light (smooth) state.

Next, as shown in (Y3), the reduced decorative pattern in the upper left corner of the screen is erased. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a rainbow light (smooth) state. Next, as shown in (Y4), the "222" decorative pattern that was erased from the center of the screen is enlarged and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a white flashing state. Next, as shown in (Y5), the "222" decorative pattern is enlarged from the state of (Y4) and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a white flashing state. Next, as shown in (Y6), the "222" decorative pattern is enlarged from the state of (Y5) and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a white flashing state. Next, as shown in (Y7), the "222" decorative pattern is enlarged from the state of (Y6) and displayed. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 is in a white flashing state.

In the modified pattern output, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode when the SP reach begins, and the patterns line up during the winning epilogue part as shown in (Y1). Then, after the reduced pattern oscillation period as shown in (Y2), the reduced pattern is temporarily deleted and then enlarged from the center of the screen, and the second pattern performance is executed.

(Epilogue 28)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbol is located at the edge of the display area of the screen (the position of the upper left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the winning epilogue video ends, the reduced symbol is erased and the central area of the screen is used to enlarge and display the symbol, and the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the video of the winning epilogue part, and when the video of the winning epilogue part ends and the symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, so that the big win symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, the scene change can be made to look good, and the epilogue part can be made to look good.

(Epilogue 29)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). ``222'' is displayed in the same position as ``222''. According to this, even while the winning epilogue video is being played, the player can be made aware of the fact that a jackpot display result has been obtained by the reduced decorative pattern.

(Epilogue 30)
In the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the winning epilogue video is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen (in the upper left corner of the screen). position). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display that was displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced image at the upper left corner is erased, and the image at the center of the screen is erased. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern, or from being misunderstood to be showing some kind of message when the pattern is displayed, and to appropriately display the winning epilogue part. I can show you.

(Epilogue 31)
In a modified example, the decorative pattern moves to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid disturbing the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and it is possible to suitably show a series of performances.

Figures 184 to 187 are diagrams for explaining modified examples of re-drawing. In the modified example, for example, a case where a re-drawing is performed from the pattern display in the order of (F1) to (F12) will be explained. Specifically, the pattern is enlarged and displayed as shown in (F1) and (F2), and then reduced as shown in (F3) and (F4). Thereafter, the pattern returns to normal size as shown in (F5). Then, as shown in (F6), the background is switched to a background for the re-drawing performance, and the re-drawing performance starts. After that, a shaking period occurs in which the pattern shakes up and down as shown in (F7). After that, the "3" pattern is displayed in a reduced size from (F8) to (F9).

After that, as shown in (F10), a button image and a time gauge are faintly displayed below the "3" symbol. After that, as shown in (F11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "3" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge indicates the valid period for which the button operation is active.

Figure 185 shows the case where the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state. In Figure 185, the re-draw effect executed in (G1) to (G27) will be explained. When the player operates the push button 31B from the (F12) state, high-speed fluctuation is performed in a manner in which the "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative symbols from (G1) to (G13) are all displayed. After that, as shown in (G14), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Thereafter, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (G15) and (G16), and then reduced as shown in (G17) and (G18). Thereafter, as shown in (G19), the symbol becomes the normal size. Then, the background is switched to a background for pattern shaking. Here, as the symbol shaking, an operation of shaking the symbol is performed by rotating the symbol on the screen from the back side to the front side. Specifically, after the symbol swings toward the back from (G20) to (G21), the symbol swings toward the front from (G22) to (G23), thereby changing to the initial position. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (G24) to (G25), and then swings toward the back from (G26) to (G27), thereby changing to the initial position.

FIG. 186 shows a case where the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12). In FIG. 186, the re-lottery effect executed in (H1) to (H27) will be explained. If the player does not operate the push button 31B from the state (F12), the "3" symbol will remain displayed from (H1) to (H6), and the time gauge will decrease as time passes. . Thereafter, as shown in (H7), the button image is displayed faintly and then erased. After that, "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and "2" used as decorative patterns from (H8) to (H20) are all displayed. A high-speed fluctuation is performed at After that, as shown in (H21), the "3" symbol that was displayed before the high-speed fluctuation is displayed.

Thereafter, the symbols are enlarged and displayed as shown in (H22) and (H23), and then reduced as shown in (H24) and (H25). After that, as shown in (H26), the pattern becomes the normal size. Then, as shown in (H27), the background is switched to the backgrounds shown in (G20) to (G27). The movement of the symbols in (H22) to (H26) when the push button 31B is not operated is the same as the movement of the symbols in (G15) to (G19) when the push button 31B is operated. However, when the push button 31B is operated, the amount of time the time gauge decreases when the push button 31B is not operated is absorbed by the period in which the effect of shaking three symbols is executed. In other words, no matter what timing the button is operated, the period until the button is operated is absorbed by the duration of the effect of shaking the three symbols.

Then, after (G27) or (H27), an effect as shown in FIG. 187 is executed. In FIG. 187, the re-lottery effect executed in (J1) to (J18) will be explained. After (G27) or (H27), the screen temporarily goes white out as shown in (J1). After that, the "3" symbol rotates once from (J2) to (J9). Specifically, from the state of (J2), move counterclockwise around the vertical direction of the "3 symbols" to (J3), (J4), (J5), (J6), (J7), (J8), ( J9) and rotate. The rotation is so fast that the design appears to rotate in an instant.

After that, as shown in (J10), the "3" symbol is displayed in a reduced size, and then the symbol swings backward from (J11) to (J12), and then swings forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to its initial position. After that, the symbol swings forward from (J15) to (J16), and then swings backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to its initial position. The movement of the symbol swing from (J11) to (J18) is the same as the movement of the symbol swing from (G20) to (G27). Then, at (J18), the symbol stops neatly in its normal position.

[About losses 1 to 7]
The characteristic parts of the failure epilogue part will be explained by numbering them.

(About the design confirmation period)
FIG. 188 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the pattern determination period. (X1) in FIG. 188 is a diagram showing the timing of winning/losing determination corresponding to (r54) in FIG. 132. Details of the pattern determination period when moving from this state to the winning epilogue part are explained in (X2) to (X5). Also, details of the pattern determination period when moving from the (X1) state to the losing epilogue part are explained in (X6) to (X9).

When transitioning from the state (X1) to the winning epilogue part, an image of the state (s5) in which the Bakuchu is caught is displayed, as shown in (X2). Thereafter, as shown in (X3), after being controlled to the normal screen, a symbol determination period begins in which symbols such as (B8) are determined and stopped. The symbol confirmation period continues for 0.5 seconds after receiving the symbol confirmation designation command. After that, as shown in (X4), a fanfare period like (B11) begins. After that, as shown in (X5), a jackpot round period begins.

When moving from the (X1) state to the failure epilogue part, an image of the regrettable (u2) state where the Bakuchu was not caught is displayed as shown in (X6). After that, as shown in (X7), the background goes black and a symbol combination showing the failure display result of "232" is displayed. After that, as shown in (X8), an eye-catching image depicting a character image that has the effect of attracting the player's attention is displayed. After that, the screen is controlled to the normal screen, and then a symbol determination period begins in which the symbol as shown in (X9) is determined and stopped. The symbol determination period continues for 0.5 seconds after the symbol determination command is received. If there is a reserved memory corresponding to the next variable display after the symbol determination period ends, the next variable display will begin.

(Detailed explanation of blackout)
FIG. 189 is a detailed explanatory diagram of blackout. The details of blackout will be explained in the order of FIG. 189 (X10) to (X22). As shown in (X10), an image of the unfortunate state (u2) of not being able to catch Bakuchu is displayed. From this state, the blackout background will be displayed with its transmittance gradually decreasing, and the background of the middle design showing "3", which is one of the decorative designs displayed in the center, will gradually decrease its transmittance. displayed. By lowering the transmittance, the blackout background gradually becomes darker, and the middle design gradually becomes clearer.

After (X10), as shown in (X11), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 70% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 100%. Then, as shown in (X12), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 60% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 90%. Then, as shown in (X13), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 50% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 80%. Then, as shown in (X14), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 40% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 60%. Then, as shown in (X15), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 30% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 40%. Then, as shown in (X16), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 20% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 20%. Then, as shown in (X17), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 10% and the middle symbol is displayed with a transparency of 0%. After that, as shown in (X18), the blackout background is displayed with a transparency of 0%, and the center pattern is displayed with a transparency of 0%.

After that, a pattern fluctuation period occurs in which the middle symbol "3" fluctuates up and down from (X19) to (X20). After the pattern fluctuation period, an eye-catching image is displayed as shown in (X21). Then, a pattern determination period occurs as shown in (X22). As shown in FIG. 189, the background blackout begins earlier than the middle symbol fade-in, and the background blackout has more stages of transparency change than the middle symbol fade-in.

(Loss 1)
As shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss symbol is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen when the game loses.

(Loser 2)
As shown in Fig. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the background when losing gradually blacks out, while the middle pattern gradually fades in. According to this, the image when losing and the middle pattern are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, so that the display when losing can be made to look good due to the relationship between the two.

(Missed 3)
As shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the middle pattern from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background blacks out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the middle pattern fades in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). According to this, the image and the middle pattern when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and the fade-in, and the number of steps of the change in transparency is different, so that the display when losing can be made to look good depending on the relationship between the two.

(Loss 4)
As shown in FIG. 189, the change in which the background is blacked out at the time of a loss starts earlier than the change in which the middle symbol fades in. According to this, the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, and since the blackout is faster than the fade-in of the symbol, the loss occurs due to the relationship between the two. It is possible to display the time in a suitable manner.

(Loss 5)
In the image before the blackout, the displayed image changes, whereas in the image at the time of the blackout, the displayed image does not change. In this way, the blackout can be made to look good by starting with an image that does not change. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. Also, no change in the image includes the same still image, and even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only a part of the image moves slightly.

(Loss 6)
As the background at the time of loss blacked out, the medium symbol faded in, and as shown in (X18) to (X20), the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% and the medium symbol with a transmittance of 0% A blacked-out background is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes symbol fluctuation periods as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the symbol oscillates repeatedly for at least two cycles, with one cycle being the period in which the middle symbol is moved from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set to be longer than the period during which the fade-in is executed from the state where the medium symbol changes from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to suitably show that the player has lost.

(Loser 7)
188 and 189, the eye-catching screen displays the title "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana as information about the pachinko gaming machine 1. This allows the information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 to be accurately conveyed by the eye-catching image.

[Regarding losses 8, 10 to 17]
The characteristic parts of the failure epilogue part will be explained by numbering them.

(About the game effect lamp when you lose)
FIG. 190 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp in the case of a loss and a diagram for explaining a modification example in the case of a loss. FIG. 190 also describes the lighting mode of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50. 190 (X30) to (X36) are detailed explanatory diagrams of the game effect lamps when the game is lost, and (X40) to (X46) are diagrams showing modified examples when the game is lost. The example shown in FIG. 190 shows the performance when losing in the final SP reach, but the performance when losing in other reaches such as SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, etc. The technique shown in FIG. 190 may be applied.

In this embodiment, the brightness data table at the time of loss is used from the effect (X30) in which six ally characters are disappointed to the effect in which the background image is blacked out (X31). Note that the brightness data table at the time of loss shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table specified by the times tu1 to tu3 of child table WD17 in the loss epilogue part shown in FIG. 216, which will be described later.

The featured image appears after the background image blacks out. An eye-catching image is an image that attracts the player's attention, and in this embodiment, as a result of a series of effects in SP Reach, an eye-catching image is displayed before a losing symbol is derived (temporarily stopped) and the screen returns to the normal screen. The image is displayed.

The brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the period when switching to the eye-catching screen (X32) to the display of the eye-catching screen (X33). After that, the brightness data table for background is used through the period when switching to the normal screen (X34) and the period when the pattern is determined (X35), and until the next variation (X36) that is executed when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold. Note that the brightness data table for background shown in FIG. 190 corresponds to the grandchild table 26 specified at time tu4 of the child table WD17 in the losing epilogue part shown in FIG. 216 described later.

Note that the background brightness data table is maintained even when a customer waiting command is received when there is no reservation after the symbol confirmation period (X35). In addition, in response to receiving the customer waiting command, the production screen may be displayed as a demonstration, and a brightness data table for demonstration may be used.

In relation to the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is blinking from (X30) to (X34). Then, by receiving the symbol confirmation command, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is turned off in the state (X35). After that, by receiving the variable pattern command when there is reservation, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 becomes blinking in the state of (X36). In addition, when there is no hold after the symbol confirmation period (X35), the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 remains off even if a customer waiting command is received.

Furthermore, as a modification in case of a loss, the brightness data table in each state may be different from that in this embodiment. Specifically, from the disappointment of (X40) to the background blackout of (X41), the brightness data table at the time of failure is used. After that, during the (X42) eye-catch screen switching period, (X43) eye-catch screen, (X44) normal screen switching period, and (X45) symbol confirmation period, the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is It may also be used. Then, in the next variation of (X36), the background brightness data table may be used.

Here, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the final brightness data (light off) in the brightness data table before the eye-catching is displayed (when it misses). Also, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (light off not included) that corresponds to the background when the change starts.

(8th loss)
The characteristic part of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of failure will be explained. The performance screen is switched to the image at the time of failure after the performance of the winning or losing decision. After that, after the blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, it is switched to the eye-catching screen. After that, it is switched to the normal screen and the screen in which the pattern is confirmed and stopped is displayed. Also, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of winning or losing decision to the brightness data table at the time of failure. Then, it is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). After that, it is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the time of starting the variation. Here, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen. Also, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table of the background at the timing of switching to the normal screen. And, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 is switched from flashing to off by receiving the pattern confirmation command, but the brightness data table for the background is not switched even by receiving the pattern confirmation command. In addition, the special pattern variable display of the fourth pattern unit 50 switches from off to flashing when the next variation pattern command is received, but the background brightness data table does not switch even when the pattern determination command is received. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, and the brightness data table continues until the next variation, so there is no need to create a separate brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the pattern determination command, and the lamp performance can be displayed without any sense of incongruity from the performance at the time of failure to the next variation, and the series of performances can be displayed appropriately.

(Missed 10)
After the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table with the end of the eye-catching screen, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no reserved memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. According to this, since the same brightness data table can be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, the lamp performance can be shown without discomfort, and the series of performances can be shown appropriately.

(Loser 11)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from blinking to off upon receiving a symbol determination command which is a trigger for the effect of the symbol being determined and stopped. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it is a miss.

(Missed 12)
The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from off to blinking upon receiving a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is the trigger for the start of the next variation. This allows the player to easily understand the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it is a miss.

(Missed 13)
A modified example of a miss will be described. From the performance where the six friendly characters are disappointed at (X40) to the performance where the background image is blacked out at (X41), the brightness data table at the time of miss is used. After the background image is blacked out, the eye-catching image is displayed. From the switching period to the eye-catching screen at (X42) to the pattern determination period at (X45), the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. After that, when a variation pattern command is received when there is a hold, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. That is, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and the brightness data table is maintained during the pattern determination period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for background. Also, during the pattern determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used, which is the light-off. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next variation pattern command is received, making it easier to recognize a miss, and as a result, the miss can be made to look good.

(Missed 14)
The final brightness data in the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is data for turning off and maintaining the brightness. The background brightness data table does not use data for maintaining the brightness off. According to this, since the background brightness data table does not use brightness data for maintaining the brightness off, turning off when the background is displayed is unique to a failure, making it easier to recognize that it is a failure.

(Missed 15)
If there is no reserved memory after the pattern is determined, the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting command. According to this, since the brightness data table for background is switched to by receiving a customer waiting command, it is easy to recognize that it is a miss.

(Loss 16)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) has a higher brightness than the last brightness data (lights out) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when losing). According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

(Loss 17)
The first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher in brightness than the first brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) corresponding to the background at the start of variation. According to this, since the game effect lamp 9 can be caused to emit light at high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, the switching can be easily recognized by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[About 8 to 12]
The characteristic parts related to the decision on whether or not a prize is awarded will be numbered and explained below.

(Detailed explanation of (r48) part)
FIG. 191 is a detailed explanatory diagram of the (r48) portion. FIG. 191 (r48) shows a scene in which the final instigation is performed before the decision is made. FIG. 191(A) is an explanatory diagram showing screen switching, and FIG. 191(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between screen switching and time. As shown in FIG. 191(A), in the (r48) part, after the Bakushu (r48-1) is displayed, six allies are displayed as (r48-2). After that, the display of Bakushu like (r48-1) is displayed again, and then the display of 6 allies like (r48-2) is displayed. Thereafter, switching between still images (r48-1) and (r48-2) is repeated, and the switching speed gradually increases as shown in FIG. 191(B). The image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed as time passes.

(True or False: 8)
The scene before the winning or losing decision of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow-motion period in which the movement of the image slows down. In addition, the performance executed before (r48) depicts the movement of the character from multiple image data, while the performance executed in (r48) is executed using the image of Bakuchu and the images of the six allies. The images of the ally character and the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make the characters look like they are moving. Here, if the image is created during the slow-motion period using the same amount of image data as during the period other than the slow-motion period, the amount of data is small and the movement is awkward. However, if a large amount of data is used to make the movement during the slow-motion period smooth, the capacity becomes too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used during the slow-motion period and making the character look like he is moving by switching and enlarging the display. The number of images used during the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than the number of images used during the period other than the slow-motion period.

(9 correct or not)
As shown in Fig. 191 (B), the speed of switching between the images of the ally character and the enemy character gradually increases. In this way, after the image switching speed reaches its fastest, a prompting display for trigger operation is displayed, making it possible to tease the player as to whether a scene in which the ally character has an advantage or an enemy character has an advantage will develop, increasing interest. In addition, by switching between images alternately, it becomes difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the ally character and the enemy character.

(10% correct)
The slow motion period performance in (r48) may be executed at the timing of development from the SP first half reach to the SP second half reach or the SP final reach. In this way, the performance can be executed appropriately even at the timing of development from the SP first half reach.

(11 correct answers)
During the slow-motion period in (r48), at least one of the friendly character and the enemy character may be constructed using two or more images. For example, for a friendly character, four images may be repeatedly used, such as image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1, etc., to make the character's hair and clothes appear to move gradually. In this way, the data of the character itself is reused while only a portion of the data is changed, thereby reducing the amount of work required for data change and more faithfully expressing the character's movements.

(12 correct answers)
In the slow-motion period in (r48), when the character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images, the movement of the hair or clothes may be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow-motion period. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow-motion movement in order to make the movement appear smooth during the slow-motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movement during the slow-motion period, the movement does not become awkward even if the number of images used is reduced, and the movement can be more faithfully expressed while reducing the data capacity.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 192 to 260.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 124 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 105 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 msec) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start a display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as the start part and the promotion part), the display control unit 124 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122. The display control unit 124 sets an extension command corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control performed by itself, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 124 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 124.

For example, FIG. 272 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 272, when the display control unit 124 performs display control on the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A, it transmits an extended command for specifying the winning epilogue of the SP first half reach A to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 124, the production control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the winning epilogue of SP first half reach A.

In the parent table, information is stored that specifies the lamps (lighting points) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information that specifies the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp, and information that specifies the child table that is referenced during lamp control for each lamp (designated address of the child table). Note that in the parent table, only the lamps that are the subject of lamp control are designated, and lamps that are not the subject of lamp control are not designated. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 192 described later, the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H are designated as the subjects of lamp control, and 600,000 msec is designated as the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 192, the child table WD1 is designated for the frame lamp, the child table YD1 is designated for the role lamp 9A, the child table LD1 is designated for the left panel lamp 9B, and the child table AD1 is designated for the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, and the electric chute lamp 9H.

The details will be described later using FIG. 206, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the parent table for the epilogue per reach A in the first half of SP, 600000 msec (10 minutes) is the maximum time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp. This is specified, and the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the counter every 10 msec in order to time this 600000 msec (10 minutes). That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 msec (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 msec (10 minutes) is counted. In the parent table for the epilogue per SP first half reach A, WD3 is specified as the child table.

The child table stores information specifying the lamp (illuminated location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the grandchild table to be referenced at each time when the lamp control is performed (specified address of the grandchild table). For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 193 described later, the grandchild tables (W4, W11, W12, W21, etc.) to be referenced for each time such as ta1 to ta19 are specified.

Details will be given later using Figure 206, but as shown in Figure 272, in child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, 300 msec is specified as the time for lamp control of the frame lamp, and the performance control CPU 120 times 3000 msec by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and performs lamp control using the grandchild table specified by child table WD3 until the time reaches 3000 msec. In child table WD3 for the epilogue of the SP first half reach A hit, W4 is specified as the grandchild table.

The grandchild table stores information specifying the lamps (illuminated locations) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and brightness data used at each time that the lamp control is performed. For example, grandchild table W4 shown in FIG. 230, which will be described later, stores brightness data that corresponds to RGB used every 30 msec.

The brightness data value corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values from 0 to F, and when the brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when brightness data "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element, when brightness data "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp can emit light in various colors by causing currents corresponding to brightness data to flow through each RGB element. Further, the frame lamp can be lit in a color corresponding to each character described above by emitting light based on the luminance data. For example, in a production where Yume-chan appears, the data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as the brightness data, and when the current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. . In a production in which Maid A appears, data of "00F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in blue. In a production where Maid B appears, data of "0AC" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and as a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in Hawaiian blue color. In a performance where an AD appears, data of "FF0" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in yellow. In a production in which Jam-chan appears, the data "A5F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in purple. In a performance where Nana-chan appears, "F3F" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in pink. In a production where Bakuchu appears, data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in red. In a performance in which Boingo appears, "FEA" data is output from the LED lamp to the LED as luminance data, and when a current corresponding to the data flows, the LED lights up in cream color.

Details will be described later using FIG. 230, but as shown in FIG. 272, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are alternately specified as brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 counts up the time specified by the child table, 3000 msec, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the count reaches 300 msec. Then, based on the received brightness data, the LED driver passes a current corresponding to the brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and performs lamp control based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while decrementing the timer at a fixed cycle (for example, every 10 msec).

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data from the first designated location of the grandchild table, and when the output of brightness data is completed up to the last designated location of the grandchild table, the production control CPU 120 outputs the grandchild table. If the timer value corresponding to the specified child table still remains, outputting the luminance data is started again from the first specified location in the child table. On the other hand, while outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the value of the timer corresponding to the child table that specifies the grandchild table becomes 0, the production control CPU 120 will output the brightness data based on the child table. A timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying is set, and output of luminance data is started from the first specified location of the grandchild table specified by the child table. As a result, the grandchild table is switched, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

Timer management of child tables by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 273 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table by timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 273, in the child table for the SP first half reach A hit epilogue, 3000 msec is specified as the time for lamp control for the frame lamp, and W4 is specified as the grandchild table. In the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp. For ease of explanation, the data "000" in the first 30 msec will be referred to as data 1, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 2, the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 3, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 4, the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 5, the data "AAA" in the next 30 msec as data 6, and the data "000" in the next 30 msec as data 7.

The performance control CPU 120 counts the 3000 msec specified by the child table WD3 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 msec, and outputs the brightness data of data 1 to data 7 to the LED driver at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W4 until the count reaches 3000 msec. However, if the count has not yet reached 3000 msec after outputting data 1 to data 7, it again outputs the brightness data to the LED driver in order starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 3000 msec, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table W4 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W1 specified by the child table. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 loops the output of the brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

Note that, as in the parent table shown in FIG. 192, which will be described later, child data is specified for 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and such 10-minute data in the parent table plays the role of troubleshooting. That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the CPU 103, but if some problem occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production control Even if the CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, which prevents different lamp control from being performed one after another after a problem occurs. can do.

Also, as in the child table shown in Figure 193 described later, grandchild data is specified over 600,000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in this child table serves to prevent lamp control from being performed again from the first specified location in the child table when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still remaining.

In addition, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 235, which will be described later, luminance data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table corresponds to the grandchild table. When the value of the timer becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, which plays the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by setting the brightness data specified at the end of the grandchild table as 10-minute data, the lamp is maintained with one fixed light emission, which prevents the problem of the lamp lighting constantly changing. Can be done. Furthermore, by specifying luminance data for 600000 msec (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, it is possible to more effectively prevent the problem of continuous changes in lamp lighting. can.

As mentioned above, the luminance data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the luminance data table used in each part described below, only characteristic tables among the parent table, child table, and grandchild table are shown, and other tables may be omitted.

[Luminance data table used in the start part]
FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the luminance data table used for the start part. As shown in FIG. 192, in the parent table of the brightness data table used in the start part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is set as 600000 msec (10 minutes). Information specifying child tables (WD1, YD1, LD1, AD1) to be referenced during control is stored.

Figure 193 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for the start part. As shown in Figure 193, in child table WD1 for the frame lamp, the time of the start part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period are specified. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are marked "omitted" and their description is omitted.

For example, at times ta1, ta4, and ta7, grandchild table W21 is specified. Grandchild table W21 is included in the normal background luminance data table described with reference to FIG. 52, and corresponds to grandchild table W21 for the frame lamp in the background luminance data table shown in FIG. 260 described later. As shown in FIG. 260, in grandchild table W21, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) corresponding to the normal background.

At time ta3 and time ta6, grandchild table W4 is specified. Grandchild table W4 corresponds to grandchild table W4 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table shown in FIG. 230 described later. As shown in FIG. 230, in grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in white by performing lamp control based on grandchild table W4. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to blink in white twice by performing lamp control over 150 msec (30 msec x 5) based on grandchild table W4.

At times ta10 to ta12, grandchild table W11 is specified. Grandchild table W11 corresponds to grandchild table W11 for the frame lamp in the shutter 1 brightness data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, grandchild table W11 specifies that the brightness data is gradually decreased from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W11, and lights up the frame lamp in red while gradually decreasing the brightness in response to the performance of the shutter closing as shown in FIG. 58 (a10) to (a12).

During times ta13 to ta18, grandchild table W12 is designated. The grandchild table W12 corresponds to the grandchild table W12 for the frame lamp in the shutter 2 luminance data table shown in FIG. 251, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 251, in the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to change the state from the shutter fully closed state as shown in FIGS. 59(a13) to (a15) and FIGS. 60(a16) to (a18) The frame lamp is lit in red while maintaining the brightness in a reduced state in response to the effect of opening in stages after being maintained for a certain period of time.

In this way, in the child table WD1 of the start part, during the time ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data switches so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during the time ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters close, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters open, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59 (a13), the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from the timing when the shutter is completely closed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness after a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed after the shutter is completely closed. Alternatively, the brightness data may be maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness from a timing related to the shutter closing operation (e.g., the timing when the shutter starts to close, the timing immediately before the shutter starts to close, etc.).

At time ta19, which is the end of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off in response to the effect of the shutter being kept in a fully open state as shown in FIG. 61 (a19). Note that "off" here refers to a state in which the brightness data is "0" as explained with reference to FIG. 53, but at time ta19, it may be almost off, with the brightness data being "1". Note that in the following explanation, "off" may also mean "almost off". At time ta19, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table, and the frame lamp remains off based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD1 reaches 0.

In this way, since the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, the timing when the shutter is fully opened can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot tell that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of SP Reach A fanning part]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of SP first half reach A. As shown in FIG. 194, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the first half of SP reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD2, YD2, LD2, AD2) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

Figure 195 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP first half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD2 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 195, in the frame lamp child table WD2, the time of the provocative part of SP first half reach A for a frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W3 is specified for 1560 msec of time tb10. Grandchild table W3 corresponds to grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp in the yellow haze brightness data table shown in FIG. 229, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 229, in grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamps to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

During the 150 msec interval of time tb14 and the 210 msec interval of time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash in white.

Here, as shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , the first 30 msec is "000" (lit), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (lit), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), and the next 30 msec is "000" (lit in white). 30 msec is "000" (light off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (lit in white), and the last 30 msec is "000" (light off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white multiple times (white flash) by alternately repeating "off" and "on" of the frame lamp over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). For example, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 for one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7), the frame lamp flashes white three times, and the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for 150 msec. When lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W4 for (30 msec x 5), the frame lamp flashes white twice.

At both time tb14 and time tb17, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at time tb14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time tb17, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD2, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time at which the grandchild table W4 is referenced between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp is blinked in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tb18, which is the last part of the promotion part of the first half of SP reach A, Yumu-chan makes a Bakuchu before the decision of success or failure (jackpot, loss, second half development of SP reach) as shown in Figure 67 (b18). The frame lamp lights up in white in response to a performance that incites whether or not the player will catch it. At time tb18, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8. For example, the grandchild table W8 corresponds to the grandchild table W8 for the frame lamp in the 2-luminance data table without operation promotion shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 is The frame lamp remains lit white based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until it reaches 0.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of Reach A in the first half of the SP, as shown in Figure 67 (b18), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the SP first half Reach A provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in a color corresponding to that character, and when the character speaks, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp flashes in a color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tb4, the performance control CPU 120 responds to a performance in which Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in FIG. 63 (b4). , the lamp on the left side of the frame lights up in green, which corresponds to Yumu-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD2 of the reach A incitement part in the first half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time tb11, the performance control CPU 120 responds to Yume-chan by making it correspond to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 65 (b11). The lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in green. Furthermore, at time tb8 and time tb9, when a character has dialogue as shown in FIGS. 63(b8) and 63(b9) but no subtitles, the production control CPU 120 creates a frame with a color corresponding to the character. Make the lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figures 64 (b8) and (b9), even if a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the first half of SP]
FIG. 196 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD3, YD3, LD3, AD3) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a2), in the child table WD3 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue portion in the winning epilogue part of the SP first half reach A is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD3 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild table W4 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance such as catching a Bakushu as shown in FIG. 68 (c1) after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 67 (b18). to make the frame lamp flash white.

As mentioned above, the white lighting in the win/fail branch (tb18) has RGB data of "FDC", whereas the white flashing in tc1 after the win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF". At the time of winning, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so that the winning can be clearly communicated to the player by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.

At times tc2 and tc3, grandchild table W1 is specified. Grandchild table W1 corresponds to grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 225, in grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, corresponding to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 68 (c2) and (c3).

As shown in FIG. 196 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 196 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the first half of the SP reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD0 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols is used in common in the first half of the SP reach A and B, the second half of the SP reach A and B, and the final SP reach.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for the 5000 msec period between time tc4 and time tc5. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, as shown in Figures 69 (c4) and (c5).

At time tc6, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 69 (c6). Light. At time tc6, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD3 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc2 and time tc3, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time tc6, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in SP first half reach A loss epilogue part]
FIG. 197 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of SP first half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 197(a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach A, for the frame lamp, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach first half A is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD4 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. Also, the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue is used in common in the SP reach first half A and B, the SP reach second half A and B, and the SP final reach.

For example, during 200 msec of time td1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The grandchild table W13 corresponds to the grandchild table W13 for the frame lamp in the loss 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which the player fails to catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 70 (d1) after the decision is made as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up in white.

As mentioned above, the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18) indicates that the RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white light at td1 after the loss notification indicates that the RGB data is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white light at the win/lose branch (tb18), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During the 5,800 msec period of time td2, grandchild table W14 is specified. Grandchild table W14 corresponds to grandchild table W14 for the frame lamp in the Loss 2 Brightness Data Table shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 252, in grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a darker white color than td1, corresponding to the performance shown in FIG. 70 (d2) in which Yume-Yume is disappointed after losing.

As mentioned above, when the rainbow lights up at the time of winning (tc2, tc3), the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, whereas when the darker white lighting occurs at the time of loss (td2), the RGB data changes for 250 msec longer than at the time of winning. Switch at intervals. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At time td3, grandchild table W15 is designated. The grandchild table W15 corresponds to the grandchild table W15 for the frame lamp in the loss 3 luminance data table shown in FIG. 253, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "111" is specified in the next 550 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. , "111" is specified in the last 600000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 70(d3). .

At time td4, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, lighting the frame lamp in a yellow background lighting pattern to correspond to a performance in which the normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 71 (d4). In other words, the grandchild table W21 used when the normal screen is displayed in the event of a miss has a lighting mode that corresponds to the normal background, and is the same as the grandchild table W21 specified at time ta1, time ta4, and time ta7 in the start part.

At time td4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21. Specifically, based on the grandchild table W21 shown in FIG. 260, which will be described later, the production control CPU 120 controls the time until it receives a variation pattern command that specifies the next variation when there is a hold, or when there is no hold. The lamp control is performed while switching the RGB data until the customer waiting command is received in the progress, and even if the lamp control is performed based on the final RGB data, if the fluctuation pattern command or the customer waiting command is not received yet, the lamp control is performed again. Lamp control is performed based on the initial RGB data.

As shown in FIG. 190, during the period from when the frame lamp goes out at time td3 until when the frame lamp lights up in a yellow background lighting pattern in response to the display of the normal screen at time td4. In this case, an eye-catching screen is displayed and a frame lamp based on the brightness data table corresponding to the eye-catching screen is lit. In this way, in the lamp control of the frame lamp at the time of failure, the brightness data table (grandchild table) corresponding to the eye-catching screen is used, and then the grandchild table, which is also used in the start part, is used as the brightness data table corresponding to the normal screen. Table W21 is used. As a result, there is no need to separately prepare a brightness data table to be used after the eye-catching screen is displayed and before the design is finalized, and lamp control can be performed based on the grandchild table W21 that is also used in the start part. , the performance using the frame lamp can be shown to the player without any discomfort.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B provocation part]
Fig. 198 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. As shown in Fig. 198, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD5, YD5, LD5, AD5) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 199 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP first half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD5 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 199, in the frame lamp child table WD5, the time of the provocative part of the SP first half reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 150 msec at time te8 and for 210 msec at time te12. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash white. Grandchild table W4 is specified at both time te8 and time te12, but at time te8, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at time te12, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time period of one cycle of 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD5, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time te17, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP first half reach B, the frame lamp lights up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume will lose or not in the win/loss branch (jackpot, miss, SP reach second half development) as shown in Figure 77 (e17). At time te18, the lamps are controlled based on the grandchild table W8 for a maximum of 10 minutes.

As a result, in the winning/losing branch in the teasing part of the first half of the SP, Reach B, as shown in Figure 77 (e17), the frame lamp will remain lit white with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the SP first half reach B incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time te4, the performance control CPU 120 lights the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan and lights the frame right lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, and Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, face each other as shown in FIG. 73 (e4). At time te5, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green corresponding to Yume Yume-chan, corresponding to a performance in which Yume Yume-chan, located on the left side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e5). At time te6, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame right lamp in cream corresponding to Boingo, corresponding to a performance in which Boingo, located on the right side of the screen, speaks a line as shown in FIG. 73 (e6).

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD5 of the first half of SP reach B incitement part, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time te11, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in cream color, which corresponds to Boingo, in response to the performance of Boingo shooting the puck as shown in FIG. 75 (e11). Furthermore, at time te7, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in green, which corresponds to Yume Yume, in the case where Yume Yume has a line but there are no subtitles as shown in FIG. 74 (e7).

In this way, as shown in Figure 74 (e7), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the luminance data (subtitles RGB data in the table) are specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach B in the first half of SP]
FIG. 200 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a1), in the parent table for the winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD6, YD6, LD6, AD6) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 200 (a2), in the child table WD6 for winning epilogue used for the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of SP first half reach B is subdivided for the frame lamp. In addition to specifying a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD6 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG.

For example, at time tf1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs ramp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that after the right/fail branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), Yumu-chan hits the puck back as shown in FIG. 78 (f1). The frame lamp blinks in white in accordance with the performance.

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in Figure 249 described below, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white flashing at tf1 after a win is confirmed has RGB data of "FFF." As a result, when a win occurs, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/lose branch and brighter than the win/lose branch, making it easy for the player to understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9.

During times tf2 to tf4, grandchild table W1 is designated. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to correspond to productions in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-chan wins, as shown in FIGS. 78 (f2) to (f4). The frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to the confirmed hit.

As shown in FIG. 200 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in Figure 200 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B, the time for the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the first half of SP reach B for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tf5 and time tf6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 79 (f5) and (f6). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tf7, which is the last of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 80 (f7). Light. At time tf7, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD6 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tf2 to tf4, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect in which Boingo is attacked and Yume-chan wins. Furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is also specified for time tf7, and the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1 in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the first half of the SP Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 201 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the first half of the SP Reach B.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in Figure 200 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP first half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the miss epilogue part in the SP reach first half B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, the grandchild table W13 is specified between time tg1 and time tg2, which is a period of 200 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17), the frame lamps are lit in white to correspond to the performance in which Yume Yume is sent flying as shown in FIG. 81 (g1).

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tg1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (te17), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

During 5800 msec of time tg3, grandchild table W14 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so as to correspond to the performance in which Yumu-chan is disappointed after losing, as shown in FIGS. 70 (g2) and (g3), and sets the frame Light the lamp in a white color darker than tg1.

The rainbow lighting during a win (tf2-tf4) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tg3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

At time tg4, grandchild table W15 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W15 to turn off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a loss is notified and the screen darkens as shown in FIG. 82 (g4). .

At time tg5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a yellow background lighting pattern in response to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (g5). Also, at time tg5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the role model movement part during the second half of SP development]
FIG. 202 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the accessory motion part during the second half of SP development. The grandchild table included in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 202, in the child table WD8 of the frame lamp, a grandchild table that is referred to in the accessory action part is specified for the frame lamp. In addition, the child table WD8 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the first half (falling part) of the accessory movement shown in Fig. 171 (h1) to (h3) (Fig. 83 (h1) to (h3)). It will be done.

For example, grandchild table W2 is specified for 7000 msec from time th1 to th3. Grandchild table W2 corresponds to grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp in the reel operation red flashing brightness data table shown in FIG. 228, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 228, in grandchild table W2, "A00" is specified for the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec. By controlling the lamps based on grandchild table W2, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamps to flash red in response to the performance of a reel falling as shown in FIG. 83 (h1) to (h3) after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 77 (e17).

In addition, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to time th3 during which the reel falls, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the 7000 msec period from time th1 to time th3 during which the reel falls, the performance control CPU 120 causes the reel lamp 9A to flash in red based on the child table corresponding to the falling action of the reel in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

This allows the lighting pattern of the frame lamp and the reel lamp 9A to more effectively draw the player's attention to the falling reel.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of SP Reach A fanning part]
FIG. 203 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the inciting part of the second half of the SP reach A. As shown in FIG. 203, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the inciting part of reach A in the second half of SP, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 msec (10 minutes), and each game Information specifying child tables (WD9, YD9, LD9, AD9) to be referenced when controlling the effect lamp 9 is stored.

Figures 204 and 205 are diagrams for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP latter half reach A. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD9 is included in the SP reach brightness data table explained with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figures 204 and 205, in the frame lamp child table WD9, the time of the provocative part of SP latter half reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach A, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach A has developed. I can tell you.

In addition, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, lamp control is also performed on the reel lamp 9A. For example, during the time th4 to th10 when the reel rises, the performance control CPU 120 gradually reduces the brightness of the reel lamp 9A so as to gradually turn off the reel lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the reel rise action in the reel lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table.

As a result, the lighting pattern of the reel lamp 9A does not make the player aware of the reel rising, while the lighting pattern of the frame lamp draws the player's attention to the screen indicating that the game has progressed to Reach A in the latter half of the SP.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time ti1, 1330 msec at time ti20, and 1560 msec at time ti11. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W3, causing the frame lamp to light up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10 and ti1, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At time ti20, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time ti11, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for the 150 msec interval between time ti15 and time ti24, and for the 210 msec interval between time ti14, ti23, and time ti35. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to flash in white. At times ti15, ti24, ti14, ti23, and ti35, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times ti15 and ti24, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times ti14, ti23, and ti35, the performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD9, thereby causing the frame lamp to blink in white at a plurality of mutually different timings. By controlling the lamp to vary the time to refer to the grandchild table W4 between a plurality of mutually different timings, the number of times the frame lamp blinks in white can be set to two or three times. As a result, by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, the data capacity used for lamp control can be reduced. The number of white flashes can be varied. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

During the 1000 msec period from time ti36 to ti38, grandchild table W7 is specified. Grandchild table W7 corresponds to grandchild table W7 for the frame lamp in the non-operation prompting provocation 1 luminance data table shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 249, in grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W7, causing the frame lamps to flash in white.

At time ti39, which is the end of the teasing part of the SP second half Reach A, the frame lamps light up in white, corresponding to the effect of teasing whether Yume Yume and Jam will catch the Bakuchu at the win/lose branch (jackpot, miss) as shown in Figure 95 (i39). At time ti39, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on the grandchild table W8. As shown in Figure 249, in the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and the frame lamps will maintain the white light based on the grandchild table W8 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD2 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table WD9 in the SP second half reach A, the reach is without operation promotion, and after the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, the frame lamp lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, the final brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, "FDC" (white lighting), is used for the right/fail decision in the incitement part of reach A in the second half of the SP where no operation promotion is performed. In addition, since the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed, it is possible to clearly communicate the win/fail branch (timing of decision) to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much. can.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 95 (i39), the frame lamp remains lit in white even with the sound muted, making it possible to clearly communicate to the player the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

Further, as shown in FIG. 249, "FDC" is specified for the last RGB data of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38, and furthermore, "FDC" is specified for the data of the last RGB of the grandchild table W7 used for 1000 msec from time ti36 to ti38. Similarly, "FDC" is designated for the last RGB data. As a result, the production control CPU 120 maintains the state in which the brightness data of "FDC" is output to the LED driver based on the grandchild table W7, and thereafter continues to output the brightness data of "FDC" based on the grandchild table W8 and outputs the brightness data of "FDC" to the LED driver. Since it is output to the driver, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to proceed by using simpler ramp control without increasing the amount of data too much.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the second half of the SP reach A incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time ti2, the production control CPU 120 creates a production in which Yumu-chan and Jam-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, confront Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 84 (i2). Correspondingly, the lamp on the left side of the frame is lit in white, which corresponds to Yume-chan and Jam-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame is lit in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. At time ti3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to a performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 84 (i3). Make the left lamp blink. At time ti4, the performance control CPU 120 displays a frame left lamp in purple corresponding to Jam-chan in response to a performance in which Jam-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i4). flash. At time ti5, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 85 (i5). flash.

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD9 of the reach A incitement part in the second half of the SP, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. ing.

For example, at time ti21, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame left lamp in green, corresponding to Yume Yume, located on the left side of the screen, chasing Bakuchu, as shown in Fig. 90 (i21). Furthermore, at times ti32 and ti34, when there is dialogue from a character but no subtitles, as shown in Fig. 94 (i32) and Fig. 95 (i34), the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in the color corresponding to that character.

In this way, as shown in Figures 94 (i32) and 95 (i34), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to ideally express that a character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9, even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an ideal way.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part per reach A in the second half of SP]
FIG. 206 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of SP second half reach A.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD10, YD10, LD10, AD10) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a2), in the child table WD10 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach A is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD10 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time tj1 to tj3, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 96 (i39), the frame lamp flashes in white to correspond to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 97 (j1).

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

At times tj2 and tj3, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figures 97 (j2) and (j3).

As shown in FIG. 206 (b1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the hit epilogue part of SP second half reach A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A, the time for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time tj4 and time tj5. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp display a symbol in correspondence with a production that produces a winning symbol as shown in FIGS. 98 (j4) and (j5). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time tj6, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the final winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 98 (j6). At time tj6, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD10 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times tj2 and tj3, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp is set to correspond to the effect of catching a Bakushu. It lights up smoothly in a rainbow color, and furthermore, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time tj6, and the frame lamp lights up in response to the effect that the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen based on the grandchild table W1. Lights up smoothly in rainbow colors. As a result, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when notifying the win and the grandchild table for drawing the symbol used when displaying the winning symbol, different It is possible to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity while reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to light them in rainbow colors without having to prepare a grandchild table. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach A Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 207 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach A.

As shown in FIG. 207(a1), the parent table for the common miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach A stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP reach A, the time of the loss epilogue part in the first half of SP reach B is subdivided with respect to the frame lamp. , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during 200 msec of time tk1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 creates a performance in which the player fails to catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 99 (k1) after the decision is made as shown in FIG. Correspondingly, the frame lamp lights up in white.

The white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC," whereas the white lighting at tk1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "888" or "444." This allows the frame lamp to light up in a dimmer white color when a loss occurs, while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting at the win/lose branch (ti39), so that the player can be conveniently notified that a loss has occurred.

The grandchild table W14 is designated for 5800 msec between time tk2 and time tk3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so as to correspond to the performance in which Yumume-chan loses and is disappointed, as shown in FIGS. 99(k2) and (k3). Light the lamp in a white color darker than tk1.

The rainbow lighting during a win (tj2, tj3) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tk2, tk3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than the interval during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, the player can easily understand whether they have won or lost with the contrasting lamp states.

At time tk4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 100 (k4).

At time tk5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (k5). Also, at time tk5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in the second half of the SP Reach B promotion part]
Fig. 208 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B. As shown in Fig. 208, the parent table in the brightness data table used in the provocative part of the SP latter half reach B stores 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD12, YD12, LD12, AD12) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 209 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the provocative part of SP second half reach B. Each grandchild table included in the frame lamp child table WD12 is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to Figure 52. As shown in Figure 209, the frame lamp child table WD12 subdivides the time of the provocative part of SP second half reach B for a frame lamp, and specifies the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period.

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from flashing yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of SP second half reach B, making it easier for players to understand that SP second half reach B has developed. I can tell you.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach B in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

Grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec at time tn5, 1330 msec at time tn14, and 1560 msec at time tn6. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the brightness data of the frame lamp switches over one period of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At times th7 to th10, tn1, and tn5, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec. At time tn14, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one period, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec. At time tn6, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1560 msec, which is more than two periods, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD12, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD12 can be used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Grandchild table W4 is specified for each of the 150 msec intervals of time tn3, tn12, and tn25, and the 210 msec intervals of time tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamps to flash in white. At times tn3, tn12, tn25, tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, grandchild table W4 is specified, but at times tn3, tn12, and tn25, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is shorter than one cycle of 150 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white twice, and at times tn4, tn13, tn15, tn19, and tn22, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4 in a time that is 210 msec, causing the frame lamp to flash white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD12, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without having to prepare a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tn27, which is the last part of the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, in response to the effect of inciting whether or not to catch a crab in the win/fail branch (jackpot, loss) as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), The frame lamp lights up white. At time tn27, lamp control is performed for a maximum of 10 minutes based on grandchild table W8.

As a result, in the win/fail branch in the inciting part of reach B in the second half of the SP, as shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp remains lit white with the sound muted, and the player Can communicate branching (decisive timing) in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP second half reach B incitement part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character, When a character utters a line, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in a color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tn2, the performance control CPU 120 responds to a performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan located on the left side of the screen confront a crab located on the right side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 101 (n2). Then, the lamp on the left side of the frame blinks in white, corresponding to Jam-chan and Nana-chan, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to the crab. Furthermore, since Jam-chan and Nana-chan, who are located on the left side of the screen, are uttering lines, the performance control CPU 120 causes the left lamp of the frame to blink in white.

As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

In addition, in the child table WD12 of the SP's second half Reach B provocation part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to that character.

For example, at time tn18, the performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in pink color corresponding to Nana-chan in response to the performance in which Nana-chan prays as shown in FIG. 106 (n18). Furthermore, at time tn10, the performance control CPU 120 displays the color (red) corresponding to the character (crab) when there is dialogue of the character (crab) as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) but no subtitles. to make the frame lamp blink.

In this way, as shown in Figure 104 (n10), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the luminance data (subtitles RGB data in the table) are specified. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second half of the SP Reach B]
FIG. 210 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the winning epilogue part of the SP second half reach B.

As shown in FIG. 210 (a1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD13, YD13, LD13, AD13) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210(a2), in the child table WD13 for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B, for the frame lamp, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP latter half reach B is subdivided, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD13 for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, at time to1, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27), the frame lamp flashes in white to correspond to the performance of catching a crab as shown in FIG. 110 (o1).

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. The data is "FFF".As a result, at the time of a win, the frame lamp flashes in the same color (white) as the win/fail branch and brighter than the win/fail branch, so it can be determined that the win has occurred depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

During times to2 to to5, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so that Jam-chan and Nana-chan can use the caught crabs as shown in FIGS. In response to the pleasing effect, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in a rainbow color that corresponds to the confirmed win.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b1), the parent table for displaying common symbols used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of the SP Reach B stores information specifying 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and the child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 210 (b2), in the child table WD0 for common symbol display used in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B, the time period of the symbol display part in the winning epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B is set for the frame lamp. In addition to subdivision, a grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time to6 and time to7. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a pattern in response to a performance that produces winning symbols as shown in FIG. 111 (o6) and FIG. 112 (o7). Flashes in a bright white color that corresponds to the current state.

At time to8, which is the last part of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp is colored smoothly in rainbow colors to correspond to the final winning symbol displayed in the center of the screen as shown in Figure 112 (o8). Light. At time to8, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD13 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table W1 is specified for times to2 to to5, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the caught crab serves as the store's signboard and Jam-chan and Nana-chan are happy, and further, the grandchild table W1 is specified for time to8, and based on the grandchild table W1, the frame lamp smoothly lights up in rainbow colors in response to an effect in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by sharing the grandchild table for the winning epilogue used when announcing a win and the grandchild table for displaying the winning symbol, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each performance with a unified performance. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Brightness data table used in the SP second half Reach B Miss Epilogue part]
Figure 211 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the miss epilogue part of the second half of SP reach B.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a1), in the parent table for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of the second half of SP Reach B, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). ) and information specifying child tables (WD4, YD4, LD4, AD4) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

As shown in FIG. 211 (a2), in the child table WD4 for the common loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part in the second half of SP reach B, the time of the loss epilogue part in the second half of SP reach B is subdivided with respect to the frame lamp. , the grandchild table that is referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, during 200 msec of time tp1, grandchild table W13 is specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W13, the performance control CPU 120 can respond to a performance in which the crab fails to be caught as shown in FIG. 113 (p1) after the correct/false branch shown in FIG. 109 (n27). to light the frame lamp white.

The white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27) is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later, and its RGB data is "FDC", whereas the white lighting in tp1 after the loss notification is based on the grandchild table W8 shown in FIG. 249, which will be described later. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". As a result, in the event of a loss, it is possible to maintain the same color by using the white lighting in the win/fail branch (tn27), while lighting the frame lamp darker in white, so that the player can conveniently notify the player of the loss. can be notified.

The grandchild table W14 is designated for 5800 msec between time tp2 and time tp3. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14 to correspond to the performance in which Jam-chan and Nana-chan are disappointed after losing, as shown in FIGS. 113 (p2) and (p3). Light the frame lamp in a white color darker than tp1.

The rainbow lighting during a win (to2 to to5) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals, while the darker white lighting during a loss (tp2, tp3) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than during a win. As a result, during a win, the frame lamp's lighting color switches at shorter intervals than during a loss, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, during a win, the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized than during a loss, while during a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued than during a win, and as a result, a win or loss can be easily communicated to the player by the contrasting lamp states.

At time tp4, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 114 (p4).

At time tp5, grandchild table W21 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W21, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a pattern with the background lit yellow, corresponding to a performance in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 114 (p5). Also, at time tp5, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the brightness data contained in grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach promotion part]
FIG. 212 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of the SP final reach. As shown in FIG. 212, in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the SP final reach promotion part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and each game effect Information specifying child tables (WD15, YD15, LD15, AD15) to be referenced when controlling the lamp 9 is stored.

FIGS. 213 and 214 are diagrams for explaining examples of child tables for frame lamps in the brightness data table used for the promotion part of the SP final reach. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, in the child table WD15 of the frame lamp, the time of the SP final reach promotion part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. .

The brightness data corresponding to times th4 to th10 is used for lamp control of the frame lamp corresponding to the latter half (rising portion) of the accessory motion shown in FIGS. 171 (h4) to 172 (h10). Specifically, from time th4 to th6, the frame lamp blinks in yellow in response to the effect that the accessory rises, and then from time th7 to th10, the frame lamp flashes in yellow based on the grandchild table W3. It lights up in a hazy yellow color that corresponds to the background. As a result, the frame lamp gradually changes from blinking yellow to yellow and hazy lighting that corresponds to the background of the SP final reach, thereby clearly informing the player that the SP final reach has been reached. Can be done.

Incidentally, during the time period th4 to th10 when the accessory rises, lamp control is also performed on the accessory lamp 9A. For example, between times th4 and th10 when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120, based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table, The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the accessory lamp 9A is gradually turned off.

As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp makes it possible for the player to place the player on the screen indicating that the SP has reached the final reach. can draw people's attention.

The grandchild table W3 is specified for 1130 msec of time tr1, 1330 msec of time tr19 and time tr22, and 1560 msec of time tr15. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color corresponding to the background of the SP reach.

Here, as shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, the luminance data of the frame lamp is switched over one period consisting of 720 msec (180 msec x 4). At time th7 to th10 and time tr1, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1130 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1130 msec, and at time tr19 and time At time tr22, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3 for 1330 msec, which is more than one cycle, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1330 msec, and at time tr15, for 1560 msec, which is more than two cycles. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W3, so that the frame lamp lights up in yellow for 1560 msec.

In this way, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table WD15, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in yellow at a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 using the lamp control between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD15 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, in each of child table WD9 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the provocation part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the provocation part of SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in multiple reach performances. Similarly, in child table WD2 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach A and child table WD5 used in the provocation part of SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

Grandchild table W4 is designated for 150 msec of time tr36 and for 210 msec of time tr40 and time tr47. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white. The grandchild table W4 is specified at time tr36, time tr40, and time tr47, but at time tr36, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in a time shorter than one cycle of 150 msec. By doing so, the frame lamp flashes white twice, and at time tr40 and time tr47, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 in one cycle of 210 msec, so that the frame lamp flashes white three times.

In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table WD15, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

Furthermore, child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, and child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach B. In both the child table WD12 used in the part and the child table WD15 used in the SP final reach promotion part, a common grandchild table W4 can be used without preparing separate grandchild tables at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the lamp, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the number of white flashes. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

At time tr41, grandchild table W5 or grandchild table W6 is designated. If the information to execute the red cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, the grandchild table W5 is specified at time tr41, and if the information to execute the green cut-in effect is set in the effect setting process, Grandchild table W6 is designated at time tr41.

The grandchild table W5 corresponds to the grandchild tables W5a to W5e for the frame lamp in the common red cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 233 to 235 described later. As shown in Figures 233 to 235, in the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at first at 30 msec intervals, data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified at the next 20 msec intervals, and finally data showing various brightnesses for only the R data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in red in response to the cut-in performance (red cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

The grandchild table W6 corresponds to the grandchild tables W6a to W6e for the frame lamp in the common green cut-in brightness data table shown in Figures 242 to 244 described later. As shown in Figures 242 to 244, in the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e), as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified at first at 30 msec intervals, data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified at the next 20 msec intervals, and finally data showing various brightnesses for only the G data is specified alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W6, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in green in response to the cut-in performance (green cut-in performance) shown in Figure 128 (r41).

As shown in Figures 128 (r40) and (r41), when push button 31B is displayed and a cut-in performance is executed, the character does not speak and subtitles are not displayed. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, the frame lamp that is the subject of lamp control in scenes other than the cut-in performance continues to be the subject of lamp control in the cut-in performance.

As a result, the display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (button display) and the subtitle display do not overlap when executing the cut-in effect, and the overlap between the two makes it difficult to recognize either display. It is possible to prevent the display contents from being stored away or from being misunderstood. Furthermore, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) is in the same frame as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. By being designed to use lamps, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoil the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable effect during the inciting part.

In this embodiment, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach have the same target of lamp control in that they both use frame lamps, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the button display and cut-in effects and other effects in the final SP reach may have the same target of lamp control in that they only use one or more of the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp, the role lamp 9A, and the left panel lamp 9B, or they may have the same target of lamp control in that they all use all of the game effect lamps 9.

At 860 msec, at times tr49 and tr50, grandchild table W9 is specified. Grandchild table W9 corresponds to grandchild table W9 for the frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W9, lighting up the frame lamp in red in response to a performance in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center, as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

In the time tr51 to tr54, which is the last time of the provocation part of the SP final reach, the grandchild table W10 is specified. The grandchild table W10 corresponds to the grandchild table W10 for the frame lamp in the operation promotion brightness data table shown in FIG. 250, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 250, in the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10 to make the frame lamp blink red in response to the performance that encourages the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) as shown in FIG. 131 (r51) to FIG. 132 (r54). In the time tr51 to tr54, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10 for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp continues to blink red based on the grandchild table W10 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD15 becomes 0.

As a result, at the win/loss branch in the provocation part of the SP final reach, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), the frame lamp will switch between flashing white, lit red, and flashing red in succession while sounds corresponding to operation promotions and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, enhancing the presentation of operations promotions for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

Here, if no operation prompting the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger) is given, such as with child table WD2 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach A, child table WD5 used in the teasing part of the first half of SP Reach B, child table WD9 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach A, and child table WD12 used in the teasing part of the second half of SP Reach B, the frame lamp will remain lit in white at the final win/loss branch of the teasing part, and then it will move to the win epilogue part or the miss epilogue part. On the other hand, when an operation is promoted to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A (trigger), such as in the child table WD15 used in the provocation part of the SP final reach, the frame lamp flashes white in a performance that provokes the player as to whether or not the ally character will catch the Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 130 (r47), and then lights up red in response to a performance in which the Bakuchu and the ally character are displayed alternately as shown in FIG. 130 (r48), and then switches to the grandchild table W9, and based on that grandchild table W9, the frame lamp lights up red in response to a performance in which the stick controller 31A (trigger) is displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 131 (r49) and (r50).

In this way, in the SP Reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, making it appear to the player that the performance has stopped, and the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. On the other hand, in the SP Reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/loss branch, a state is set in which a sound corresponding to the operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach is output, and further, by switching the grandchild table multiple times to control the frame lamp to a mode corresponding to the operation prompt, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/loss branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between the case where operation prompt is not given at the win/loss branch and the case where operation prompt is given. Furthermore, in the SP final reach, where a player is encouraged to make an operation at the win/loss branch, the brightness data (RGB data) switches sequentially between "500" and "D00" at 30 msec intervals based on the grandchild table W10. This allows the timing of the win/loss branch to be appropriately presented by the lighting state of the frame lamp.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach promotion part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character appears, the frame lamp is lit in the color corresponding to the character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when the character utters lines, the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the character.

For example, at time tr2, the performance control CPU 120 supports a performance in which six ally characters located on the left side of the screen and a Bakushu located on the right side of the screen face each other as shown in FIG. 115 (r2). Then, the lamp on the left side of the frame flashes in white, corresponding to the six friendly characters, and the lamp on the right side of the frame lights up in red, corresponding to Bakuchu. Furthermore, since the six ally characters located on the left side of the screen are uttering lines, the performance control CPU 120 causes the left lamp of the frame to blink in white. In addition, at time tr3, the performance control CPU 120 creates a red frame corresponding to the Bakushu, in response to the performance where the Bakushu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 115 (r3). Make the right lamp blink.

As a result, in scenes where multiple characters are displayed speaking lines, the frame lamp can be lit/blinking to clearly indicate which character is speaking, allowing the player to see the effects of the provocative part in an optimal way.

In addition, in the child table WD15 of the SP final reach promotion part, brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that when a character takes an action, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. There is.

For example, at time tr11, the performance control CPU 120 flashes the frame lamp in blue corresponding to Maid A in response to a performance in which Maid A chases Bakuchu as shown in FIG. 118 (r11). Furthermore, at time tr25, time tr27, time tr29, time tr31, time tr33, and time tr35, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIG. 123 (r25), (r27), FIG. 124 (r29), FIG. 125 (r31), (r33) and FIG. 126 (r35), when a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp is blinked in the color corresponding to the character.

In this way, as shown in Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29), Figure 125 (r31), (r33), and Figure 126 (r35), while the characters have dialogue, subtitles are Even if there is no such character, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach]
FIG. 215 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 215 (a1), in the parent table for the accessory movement used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD16a, YD16a, LD16a, AD16a) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215(a2), in the child table WD16a for the reel operation used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the reel operation part in the epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16a for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, the grandchild table W18 is specified for 10,000 msec from time ts1 to ts3. The grandchild table W18 corresponds to the grandchild table W18 for the frame lamp in the winning confirmation brightness data table shown in FIG. 256, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, and after the winning/losing branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to the performance of a falling role as shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to (s3).

As shown in FIG. 215 (b1), the parent table for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD16b, YD16b, LD16b, AD16b) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215(b2), in the child table WD16b for the winning epilogue used in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach, the time of the winning epilogue part in the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD16b for the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, from time ts3-2 to ts3-8, grandchild table W4 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so that as the ornaments shown in FIGS. 173 (s3-2) to 174 (s3-8) rise, it appears as if a bomb has been caught. The frame lamp is made to flash in white corresponding to the rise of the accessory in accordance with the performance in which the display appears.

From time ts4 to ts7, grandchild table W1 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamps in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in FIG. 215 (c1), in the parent table for common symbol display used in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WD0, YD0, LD0, AD0) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 215 (c2), in the child table WD0 for displaying common symbols used in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach, the time for displaying symbols in the epilogue part of the winning SP final reach for the frame lamp is subdivided, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec between time ts8 and time ts9. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to make the frame lamp correspond to the performance that brings out winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 135 (s8) and (s9). Flashes the corresponding bright white color.

At time ts10, which is the end of the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps light up smoothly in rainbow colors, corresponding to the effect of the winning symbol being displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 136 (s10). At time ts10, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamps continue to light up in rainbow colors based on grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD16 reaches 0.

In this way, in the child table of the winning epilogue part, grandchild table W1 is specified for times ts4 to ts7, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of catching a Bakuchu, and further, grandchild table W1 is specified for time ts10, and based on this grandchild table W1, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to an effect of displaying a winning symbol in the center of the screen. In this way, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when announcing a win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, it is possible to reduce the data capacity used for lamp control to light up in rainbow colors without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple different timings, while enhancing each effect with a unified effect. As a result, the effect in the winning epilogue part can be made to look better to the player using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the child table WD16 of the epilogue part per SP final reach, in the production where objects fall, the rainbow chromatic color and achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. The frame lamp is lamp controlled. As a result, by occasionally interposing achromatic colors between the chromatic colors of the rainbow, it is possible to perform an effect that congratulates the player by emphasizing that he has won the jackpot. After that, when an ally character catches a Bakuchu, a smooth rainbow color is lit without any achromatic colors, and the player is calmly congratulated on winning the jackpot. be able to. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be suitably shown to the player.

[Brightness data table used in SP final reach loss epilogue part]
FIG. 216 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table and a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the loss epilogue part of the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a1), the parent table for the miss epilogue used in the miss epilogue part of the SP final reach stores 600,000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child tables (WD17, YD17, LD17, AD17) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 216 (a2), in the child table WD17 for loss epilogue used for the loss epilogue part of SP final reach, the time of the loss epilogue part in SP final reach is subdivided for the frame lamp, and each time A grandchild table referenced in the band is specified. Note that each grandchild table included in the child table WD17 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52.

For example, during the 200 msec period of time tu1, grandchild table W13 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W13, and after the win/lose branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), lights up the frame lamp in white to correspond to the performance of the Bakuchu escaping as shown in FIG. 137 (u1).

The red blinking in the win/fail branch (tr54) is based on the grandchild table W10 shown in FIG. It is based on the grandchild table W13 shown in FIG. 252, and its RGB data is "888" or "444". Thereby, in the event of a loss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, darker than the flashing red in the win/fail branch (tr54), so that it is possible to suitably notify the player of the loss.

During 3900 msec of time tr2, grandchild table W14 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, the performance control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to tu1 in response to the performance in which six ally characters lose and are disappointed, as shown in FIG. 137 (u2). Lights up in a darker white color.

The rainbow lighting at the time of winning (ts4 to ts7) is based on the grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 225, which will be described later, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec, while the darker white lighting at the time of loss (tu1) is based on the grandchild table W14 shown in FIG. 252, which will be described later, and its RGB data is switched at an interval of 250 msec, which is longer than that at the time of hit. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, the frame lamps are lit in a lighting mode at the time of a miss based on the grandchild table W14, similar to child table WD17 of the SP final reach. However, while the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 5800 msec in the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, it controls the frame lamps based on the grandchild table W14 for 3900 msec in the SP final reach. In this way, while the grandchild table used for lamp control at the time of a miss is common between different reaches, the time for lamp control by referring to the grandchild table can be made different. This allows the child table used for each of the different reaches to use a common grandchild table W4 without preparing a grandchild table dedicated to when a win occurs for each of the different reaches, and by changing the reference time, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control while varying the time for which the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode corresponding to a loss. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in an appropriate manner for each of the different reaches.

At time tu3, grandchild table W15 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W15, and turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark, as shown in FIG. 137 (u3).

At time tu4, grandchild table W21 is specified. By controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W21, the effect control CPU 120 changes the frame lamp to a background yellow lighting pattern in response to an effect in which a normal screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 138 (u4). Turn it on. Further, at time tu4, lamp control is performed while repeatedly referring to the luminance data included in the grandchild table W21.

[Brightness data table used in each part of the rescue]
Fig. 217 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used for a part per relief. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp is included in the brightness data table for SP reach described with reference to Fig. 52. As shown in Fig. 217, in the child table WD18 of the frame lamp, the time of the part per relief is subdivided for the frame lamp, and the grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, at 1980 msec of time tv1, grandchild table W16 is specified. Grandchild table W16 corresponds to grandchild table W16 for the frame lamp in the one brightness data table per rescue shown in FIG. 254 described later. As shown in FIG. 254, in grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is specified for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild table W16, thereby lighting up the frame lamps in red in accordance with the rescue performance shown in FIG. 139 (v1).

In this way, from the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the grandchild table W21 specified last in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the event of a loss, the lighting mode of the frame lamp is changed to the lighting mode at the beginning of the child table WD18 used in the case of a rescue. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the designated grandchild table W16, the frame lamp lights even brighter. As a result, at the time of a rescue win, the frame lamp lights up brighter than in the state after the loss notification, so that depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the loss notification and the subsequent rescue win notification can be easily understood by the player. I can show you.

In this embodiment, the frame lamp lights up once in yellow, which corresponds to the normal background, after the miss notification, and furthermore, when the rescue hits, the frame lamp lights up even brighter in red, which corresponds to the rescue performance. However, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, at the end of each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used at the time of the miss, the grandchild table W15 may be specified, and "111" may be specified as the final brightness data (RGB data). As a result, at the end of the miss, the frame lamp goes out in a white system. Furthermore, "AAA" may be specified as the first brightness data (RGB data) in the grandchild table W16 specified first of the child table WD18 used at the time of the rescue hit. As a result, at the beginning of the rescue hit after the miss notification, the frame lamp lights up brightly in a white system. In this way, when a rescue hit occurs, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (white) as it did after the loss notification, but brighter than it did after the loss notification, so the loss notification and the subsequent rescue hit notification can be more easily seen by the player depending on the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9.

At 700 msec of time tv2, grandchild table W17 is designated. The grandchild table W17 corresponds to the grandchild table W17 for the frame lamp in the two-brightness data table per relief shown in FIG. 255, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, white system data such as "AAA" and "DDD" is output to each lamp at 30 msec intervals. is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W17 to light the frame lamp in white in response to the white-out performance shown in FIG. 139(v2).

During the 5000 msec period between time tv3 and time tv4, grandchild table W4 is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, causing the frame lamp to flash in white in accordance with the pattern display performance shown in Figures 140 (v3) and (v4).

At time tv5, which is the last part of the rescue part, the grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to the confirmation of a hit, corresponding to the design presentation shown in FIG. 140 (v5). . At time tv5, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1 for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD18 becomes 0. The frame lamp remains lit in rainbow colors.

[Brightness data table used in the re-lottery part]
FIG. 218 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part. As shown in FIG. 218, in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the re-lottery part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 msec (10 minutes), and the maximum time for each game effect lamp 9 to be Information specifying child tables (WD19, YD19, LD19, AD19) to be referenced during lamp control is stored.

(Brightness data table used before operation promotion)
FIG. 219 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamps in the brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (before operation promotion). As shown in FIG. 219, as the child table WD19 of the frame lamp, there are prepared a child table that is used before the symbol starts moving, and a child table that is used after the symbol starts moving. In each child table in these re-lottery parts, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

FIG. 219(a) shows a child table that is used before the symbol begins to move. For example, from time tA6 to tA8, a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the designated grandchild table, so that after the re-lottery performance is started, the symbols are changed by the re-lottery performance, as shown in FIGS. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8). Before it starts moving, turn off the frame lamp.

In this way, once the frame lamp goes out, the frame lamp lights up in a lighting mode that corresponds to an effect in which the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect, so depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, the symbols start to move due to the re-lottery effect. This can be communicated to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

Figure 219 (b) shows the child table used after the pattern starts to move. At times tA9 and tA10, grandchild table W19 is specified. Grandchild table W19 corresponds to grandchild table W19 for the frame lamp in the re-draw performance brightness data table shown in Figure 257 described later. As shown in Figure 257, in grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are specified alternately at 60 msec intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W19, and causes the frame lamp to flash in red in response to a performance in which the "2" pattern shrinks as shown in Figures 143 (A9) and 144 (A10).

During times tA11 to tA46, grandchild table W20 is designated. The grandchild table W20 corresponds to the grandchild table W20 for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table shown in FIG. 258, which will be described later. As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at intervals of 30 msec, which is shorter than in the grandchild table W20, as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. has been done. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20 to correspond to effects such as those shown in FIGS. 144 (A11) to 156 (A46) that change at high speed while switching symbols, Make the frame lamp blink red rapidly.

(Brightness data table used when the design is promoted after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in a re-draw part (pattern promotion after operation promotion). The child table WD20 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 220 is a continuation of the child table WD19 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 220, in the child table WD20 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-draw part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tB1 to tB4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "3" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

During times tB5 to tB9, grandchild table W18 is designated. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, the performance control CPU 120 displays the "3" symbol as shown in FIGS. 157 (B5) to (B9) in a reduced size and in normal size, A frame lamp is made to flash in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the symbol "3" is displayed in a swaying manner and then the symbol is confirmed.

The flashing of rainbow colors caused by lamp control from time tB5 to tB9 is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1. For example, the flashing is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting caused by lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 from time tB5 to tB9. Lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes from time tB5 to tB9, and the frame lamp continues to flash in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD20 reaches 0.

In this way, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamp lights up in rainbow colors as the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, just like child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part, but the flashing of rainbow colors from time tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is promoted to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the symbols start to move and sway due to the re-draw performance after the lights are turned off, the frame lamp flashes red in a lighting pattern different from the smooth rainbow colors based on the brightness data corresponding to the re-draw performance (for example, the RGB data in the grandchild table W19). This prevents the player from mistaking the lighting pattern of the frame lamp for the winning symbol that was provisionally stopped in the winning epilogue part to be confirmed.

In addition, the frame lamp is designed to flash in rainbow colors when the ``3'' symbol shown in Figures 159 (B7) to (B9) is displayed in a swaying manner and then the design is confirmed. This makes it easy for the designer to decide when to start blinking the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the flashing rainbow color when the "3" symbol as shown in FIG. 159 (B7) is displayed in a swaying manner will be changed during the period when the symbol is confirmed as shown in FIGS. 159 (B8) and (B9). will also be taken over. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

(Brightness data table used when the pattern does not increase after the operation is promoted)
Fig. 221 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table used in the re-lottery part (after operation promotion). The child table WD21 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 221 is a continuation of the child table WD19 of the frame lamp shown in Fig. 219. As shown in Fig. 221, in the child table WD21 of the frame lamp, the time of the re-lottery part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, grandchild table W4 is specified for 5000 msec from time tC1 to tC4. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, the performance control CPU 120 performs "2" after the operation promotion is executed in the re-lottery part, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C4). The frame lamp is made to flash in white in response to a design display in which the design is enlarged and displayed.

During times tC5 to tC9, grandchild table W1 is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to create a performance in which the symbol "2" is displayed in a swaying manner as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) and then the symbol is finalized. The frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors in response to the . From time tC5 to tC9, ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the grandchild table W1 is used for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to the child table WD21 becomes 0. Based on this, the frame lamp will remain lit in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part, the grandchild table is used as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. Table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

In addition, in the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the lights are turned off, and then the symbols start moving by re-drawing effect, and the symbols are displayed shaking. When there is, the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color based on the brightness data (for example, RGB data in grandchild table W19 and W20) corresponding to the re-lottery effect. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

In addition, when the "2" symbol is promoted by the re-drawing and replaced with the "3" symbol, the rainbow color lights up from time tB5 to tB9, and the "2" symbol is not promoted from the "2" symbol by the re-lottery and is replaced by the "3" symbol. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth lighting of the rainbow color from time tC5 to tC9 when the symbol is maintained. As a result, if the winning symbol is promoted in the re-drawing, the player can effectively celebrate the promotion of the winning symbol in the re-drawing, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp, and the winning symbol will be promoted in the re-drawing. If not, the data capacity can be reduced by using a common grandchild table W1 used in the winning epilogue part.

Also, as shown in Figures 163 (C7) to (C9), after the "2" symbol has finished appearing, the "2" symbol becomes the normal size and the design is confirmed. Since the frame lamp is designed to light up in rainbow colors, the designer can easily decide when to start lighting the frame lamp in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, the rainbow lighting that occurs when the "3" symbol is displayed swaying as shown in FIG. 163 (C7) continues even during the symbol determination period as shown in FIG. 163 (C8) and (C9). In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the system is designed so that lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is carried out as is without preparing a brightness data table for special lamp control, so there is no unnecessary increase in data capacity.

[Luminance data table used in fanfare part]
FIG. 222 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for a frame lamp in a luminance data table used for a fanfare part. Each grandchild table included in the child table WD22 of the frame lamp is included in the SP reach brightness data table described with reference to FIG. 52. As shown in FIG. 222, in the frame lamp child table WD22, the time of the fanfare part is subdivided for the frame lamp, and a grandchild table to be referenced in each time period is specified.

For example, at times tD1 and tE1, a grandchild table is specified for turning off the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1).

At times tD2 and tE2, a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, thereby lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode in accordance with the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2). At times tD2 and tE2, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table for a maximum of 10 minutes, and the frame lamp maintains its fanfare mode illumination based on the grandchild table for 10 minutes until the value of the timer corresponding to child table WD22 reaches 0.

[Smooth Rainbow Luminance Data Table]
Fig. 223 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 223, the parent table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table stores information specifying 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS1, YS1, LS1, AS1) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 224 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 224, in the child table of the smooth rainbow brightness data table, grandchild tables (W1, Y1, L1, A1) that are referred to in a predetermined time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 225 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 225, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, various brightness values corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are displayed at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. Data is sparsely specified. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

FIG. 226 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an accessory lamp and a grandchild table for a board left lamp in the smooth rainbow luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 226, in the accessory lamp grandchild table Y1, "FFFF" data is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. The production control CPU 120 lights up the accessory lamp 9A in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table Y1. In the grandchild table L1 for the board left lamp, data "FFFFF" is specified for 600000 msec (10 minutes) as the "WWWWW" data output to the board left lamp 9B. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L1, thereby lighting the board left lamp 9B in white.

Figure 227 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the smooth rainbow brightness data table. As shown in Figure 227, in the grandchild table A1 for the attacca lamp, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as the "RGB" data output to the attacca lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacca lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric chute lamp 9H. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table A1, causing the attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, and electric chute lamp 9H to light up smoothly in the rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win.

[Data table of red flashing brightness during reel operation]
Fig. 228 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a role object operation red flashing brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 228, in the grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp, "A00" is specified in the first 40 msec as the "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W2.

[Yellow haze brightness data table]
FIG. 229 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the yellow haze luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 229, in the grandchild table W3, "440", "660", and "880" are sparsely specified at 180 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W3 to light the frame lamp in a hazy yellow color.

[White blinking (white flash) brightness data table]
FIG. 230 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 230, in the grandchild table W4, "000" and "AAA" are specified alternately at 30 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The first 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30msec is "000" (lights off), the next 30msec is "AAA" (lights in white), the next 30 msec is "000" (light off), the next 30 msec is "AAA" (white light on), and the last 30 msec is "000" (light off). That is, the frame lamp blinks in white multiple times (white flash) by alternately repeating "off" and "on" of the frame lamp over one cycle of 210 msec (30 msec x 7). The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white.

[Common red cut-in luminance data table]
Fig. 231 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 231, the parent table in the common red cut-in luminance data table stores information specifying 3970 msec as the time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS5, YS5, LS5, AS5) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 232 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in Figure 232, in the child table in the common red cut-in luminance data table, grandchild tables (W5 (W5a to W5e), Y5 (Y5a to Y5e), L5 (L5a to L5e), A5 (A5a to A5e)) that are referenced in a specific time period are specified for each game effect lamp 9.

233 to 235 are diagrams for explaining examples of grandchild tables for frame lamps in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 233 to 235, in the grandchild tables W5a, W5b, and W5c, as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various changes are made to only R data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W5d, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only R data at 20 msec intervals. In the grandchild table W5e, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only R data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W5 (W5a to W5e) to light the frame lamp in red.

Figure 236 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a common red cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Figure 236, in the grandchild tables Y5a, Y5b, and Y5c for the reel lamp, data showing various brightnesses at 30 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5d, data showing various brightnesses at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y5e, data showing various brightnesses alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the reel lamp 9A. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild tables Y5 (Y5a to Y5e) to light or blink the reel lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

FIG. 237 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 237, in the grandchild tables L5a, L5b, and L5c for the panel left lamps, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. There is. In the grandchild table L5d, data indicating various luminances at intervals of 20 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L5e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L5 (L5a to L5e) to turn on or blink the board left lamp 9B in the color corresponding to the common red cut-in.

238 and 239 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common red cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 238 and 239, in the grandchild tables A5a, A5b, and A5c for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and data indicating various luminances at 30 msec intervals is specified as "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5d, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data indicating various luminances at intervals is specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. In the grandchild table A5e, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. Data indicating various luminances are specified alternately at intervals of 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the R data. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A5 (A5a to A5e) to light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric light lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common red cut-in. Or blink.

[Common green cut-in luminance data table]
Fig. 240 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 240, the parent table in the common green cut-in brightness data table stores information specifying 3970 msec as the time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WS6, YS6, LS6, AS6) to be referred to when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 241 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 241, in the child table of the common green cut-in brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, the grandchild table (W6 (W6a to W6e), Y6 (Y6a to Y6e)) is referenced in a predetermined time period. , L6 (L6a to L6e), A6 (A6a to A6e)) are specified.

242 to 244 are diagrams for explaining examples of grandchild tables for frame lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 242 to 244, in the grandchild tables W6a, W6b, and W6c, as "RGB" data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, various changes are made to only the G data at 30 msec intervals. Data indicating brightness is specified. In the grandchild table W6d, as the "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only the G data at 20 msec intervals. In the grandchild table W6e, as "RGB" data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data indicating various luminances is specified for only G data alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W6 (W6a to W6e) to light the frame lamp in green.

FIG. 245 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for accessory lamps in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 245, in the accessory lamp grandchild tables Y6a, Y6b, and Y6c, data indicating various brightnesses are specified at 30 msec intervals as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. There is. In the grandchild table Y6d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is designated as "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. In the grandchild table Y6e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "RRRR" data output to the accessory lamp 9A. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table Y6 (Y6a to Y6e), thereby lighting up or blinking the accessory lamp 9A in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in.

FIG. 246 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the panel left lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 246, in the grandchild tables L6a, L6b, and L6c for the panel left lamps, data indicating various luminances is specified at 30 msec intervals as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. There is. In the grandchild table L6d, data indicating various luminances at 20 msec intervals is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. In the grandchild table L6e, data indicating various luminances alternately at 30 msec and 40 msec is specified as the "WWWWW" data output to the panel left lamp 9B. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table L6 (L6a to L6e) to turn on or blink the board left lamp 9B in a color corresponding to the common 6 cut-ins.

247 and 248 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacker lamp in the common green cut-in luminance data table. As shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, in the grandchild tables A6a, A6b, and A6c for the attacker lamp, "RGB" data is output to the attacker lamp 9E, and "WWW" data is output to the V attacker lamp 9F. , and data indicating various luminances at 30 msec intervals is specified as "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6d, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 20 msec. Data indicating various luminances at intervals is specified. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. In the grandchild table A6e, the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E, the "WWW" data output to the V attacker lamp 9F, and the "RGB" data output to the electric tube lamp 9H are stored for 30 msec. Data indicating various luminances are specified alternately at intervals of 40 msec and 40 msec. In particular, as the "RGB" data output to the attacker lamp 9E and the "RGB" data output to the electric lamp 9H, data indicating various brightnesses are specified for only the G data. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table A6 (A6a to A6e) to light up each of the attacker lamp 9E, V attacker lamp 9F, and electric light lamp 9H in a color corresponding to the common green cut-in. Or blink.

[Data table of illumination brightness when no operation prompt is given]
Fig. 249 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a non-operation-prompting luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 249, in the grandchild table W7, "FDC" and "300" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 blinks the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamp based on the grandchild table W7.

In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100000 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white.

[Data table of illumination brightness when operation is promoted]
Fig. 250 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in the trigger display brightness data table and the operation promotion brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 250, in the grandchild table W9, "D00" is specified at 30 msec as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W9.

In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp.The production control CPU 120 outputs the lamp data based on the grandchild table W10. By controlling it, the frame lamp flashes in red.

[Shutter brightness data table]
Fig. 251 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a shutter brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 251, in the grandchild table W11, the brightness data is specified to be gradually decreased from "A00" to "600" at 30 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W11 to light up the frame lamp in red while gradually decreasing the brightness.

In the grandchild table W12, "600" is specified at 30 msec as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W12 to light the frame lamp in red.

[Loss luminance data table]
FIGS. 252 and 253 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the lost brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 252, in the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. ing. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W13 to light the frame lamp in white.

In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table W14, lighting the frame lamps in a white color that is darker than td1.

As shown in FIG. 253, in the grandchild table W15, "444" is specified as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp for the first 10 msec, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). The performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W15.

[Brightness data table per relief]
254 and 255 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a brightness data table per rescue. As shown in FIG. 254, in the grandchild table W16, "D00" is specified for each lamp in the first 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and "B00" is specified for each lamp in the next 30 msec. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in red by performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W17.

As shown in FIG. 255, in the grandchild table W17, white-color data such as "AAA" or "DDD" is specified for each lamp at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamp in white by controlling the lamps based on the grandchild table W18.

[Confirmed hit brightness data table]
FIG. 256 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the hit confirmation brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 256, in the grandchild table W18, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18 to cause the frame lamp to blink in seven colors.

[Re-lottery performance brightness data table]
FIGS. 257 and 258 are diagrams for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the re-lottery performance brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 257, in the grandchild table W19, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 60 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to cause the frame lamp to flash in red.

As shown in FIG. 258, in the grandchild table W20, "F00" and "700" are alternately specified at 30 msec intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in red. In this way, the grandchild table W20 is designed to cause the frame lamp to flash in red while switching the brightness data more quickly than the grandchild table W19.

[Background luminance data table]
Fig. 259 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 259, in the child table in the background brightness data table, for each game effect lamp 9, a grandchild table (W21 (W21a, W21b), Y21 (Y21a, Y21b), L21 (L21a, L21b), A21 (A21a, A21b)) to be referred to in a predetermined time period is specified.

FIG. 260 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in the background luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 260, in the grandchild table W21a, "550" or "880" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21a to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

In the grandchild table W21b, "550", "770", or "880" is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21b to light the frame lamp in yellow (background yellow lighting pattern).

<Regarding brightness data reference>
The brightness data table has been explained above, but below, the brightness data table used for lamp control after the winning epilogue part will be explained while being organized by performance content.

FIGS. 268 to 271 are diagrams for explaining reference to the luminance data table. As shown in FIG. 268, during times ts1 to ts3 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the accessory movement in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 18. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W18, so that after the validity branch shown in FIG. 132 (r54), the accessory shown in FIGS. 133 (s1) to (s3) The frame lamp flashes in seven colors to correspond to the effect of falling objects.

During the time ts3-2 to ts3-8 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white corresponding to the rising of the reel, in response to the performance in which the reel rises and a display appears that looks like a Bakuchu has been caught, as shown in Figure 173 (s3-2) to Figure 174 (s3-8).

During the time ts4 to ts7 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for the winning epilogue in the winning epilogue part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 1. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W1, and smoothly lights up the frame lamp in rainbow colors corresponding to a confirmed win, in response to the performance of catching a Bakuchu as shown in Figure 134 (s4) to Figure 135 (s7).

As shown in FIG. 269, during times tA1 to tA4 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table 4. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W4, so as to correspond to productions that produce winning symbols as shown in FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A4), and The lamp blinks in a bright white color corresponding to the pattern display.

At time tA5 of the winning epilogue part, the child table for displaying symbols in the winning epilogue part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W1. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, so as to correspond to the production in which the winning symbol is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 141 (A5), and the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIG. 270, during times tA6 to tA8 in the re-draw part, the child table before the pattern starts to move during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table for turning off the lamp is performed. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and turns off the frame lamp once after the re-draw performance starts and before the pattern starts to move due to the re-draw performance, as shown in FIG. 142 (A6) to 143 (A8).

At times tA9 and tA10 of the re-lottery part, the child table after the start of movement of symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and ramp control is performed based on the grandchild table W19. As a result, the effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19, thereby supporting effects such as the reduction of the "2" symbol as shown in FIG. 143 (A9) and FIG. 144 (A10). to make the frame lamp blink in red.

During the re-draw part, times tA11 to tA46, the child table after the start of the movement of the patterns during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W20. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, and causes the frame lamp to flash rapidly in red in response to the performance in which the patterns change and fluctuate rapidly as shown in Figures 144 (A11) to 156 (A46).

As shown in FIG. 271, during times tC1 to tC4 of the re-draw part, the child table for displaying the symbols during the re-draw part is used, and lamp control is performed based on grandchild table 4. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on grandchild table W4, and causes the frame lamp to flash in white in response to the performance of displaying symbols such as an enlarged display of the symbol "2" after the operation prompt is executed in the re-draw part, as shown in FIG. 161 (C1) to FIG. 162 (C4).

During times tC5 to tC9 of the re-lottery part, the child table for displaying symbols in the re-lottery part is used, and lamp control based on the grandchild table 1 is performed. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1, thereby finalizing the symbol after the "2" symbol as shown in FIGS. 162 (C5) to 163 (C9) is displayed in a oscillating manner In response to this kind of effect, the frame lamps are lit smoothly in rainbow colors.

At time tE1 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table for turning off the frame lamp is designated. As a result, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, so as to temporarily display the fanfare before the fanfare display is performed, as shown in FIG. 160 (D1) or FIG. 164 (E1). Turn off the frame lamp.

At time tE2 of the fanfare part, a child table for the fanfare part is used, and a grandchild table is specified for lighting the frame lamp in a fanfare mode. As a result, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the specified grandchild table, and lights up the frame lamp in a fanfare mode lighting mode in response to the fanfare performance, as shown in FIG. 160 (D2) or FIG. 164 (E2).

In this way, a predetermined child table is set at each timing of each performance part, and the performance control CPU 120 refers to the child table set at each timing of each performance part, and uses the child table to Luminance data (for example, RGB data) included in a designated grandchild table (luminance data table) is used to perform lamp control corresponding to the effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 268 to 271, the child table from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part via the re-drawing part when the symbols are not promoted is illustrated, but if the symbols are changed from the winning epilogue to the fanfare part, As for the child tables leading to the fanfare part via the re-lottery part in the case of promotion, predetermined child tables are set at each timing of each production part, as shown in FIGS. 192 to 260. There is.

<Explanation of the characteristic parts of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1>
Next, the characteristic parts and modifications of the lamp control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above will be explained in detail.

(Start 9)
As shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the lighting state of the frame lamp makes it easy for the player to know when the shutter is fully open. I can tell you. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot know that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Start 11, Start 14)
193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights/blinks while changing the color and brightness, such as background yellow lighting, red flashing, white flashing, and red lighting, during the time ta1-ta12 before the shutter is completely closed, whereas the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights in red while maintaining a reduced brightness during the time ta13-ta18 after the shutter is completely closed. In this way, the lighting state of the frame lamp before the shutter is closed can liven up the performance in the start part, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutter is closed, the player can be drawn to the content of the performance when the shutter is opened, and as a result, the performance in the subsequent teasing part can be better shown to the player.

(Inciting 7, Inciting 9)
Figure 64 (b8), (b9), Figure 74 (e7), Figure 94 (i32), Figure 95 (i34), Figure 104 (n10), Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29), As shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. /The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified to blink. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

(Inciting 10)
When a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character, and when the character speaks lines, the frame lamp lights up in the color that corresponds to that character. Luminance data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks. For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

(Incitement 17)
The CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at different timings in one child table used in the hype part, thereby lighting the frame lamp in yellow at different timings, while changing the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 in the lamp control between different timings, thereby changing the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. This allows the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach to be changed while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of different timings in one child table WD9. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Incitement 18)
The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the hype part, thereby blinking the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for referencing the grandchild table W4 in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to make the frame lamp blink in white two or three times. This allows the number of white blinks to be different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings, and by changing the reference time. As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing the data capacity.

(Incitement 19)
In each of the child table WD9 used in the stimulating part of the SP second half reach A, the child table WD12 used in the stimulating part of the SP second half reach B, and the child table WD15 used in the stimulating part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control in a plurality of reach performances. Similarly, in the child table WD2 used in the stimulating part of the SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the stimulating part of the SP first half reach B, a common grandchild table W3 is used but its reference time is changed without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of a plurality of different timings, so that the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of the SP reach can be made different while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control.

(Instigation 20)
Child table WD2 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach A, child table WD5 used in the inciting part of SP first half reach B, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach A, child table WD9 used in the inciting part of SP second half reach B. In both the child table WD12 used and the child table WD15 used in the inciting part of the SP final reach, a common grandchild table W4 is used without preparing separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time, the number of white flashes can be varied while reducing the amount of data used for lamp control. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

(Inciting cut-in 1)
The brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in grandchild tables W4, W5, W6) uses the frame lamp at the same location as the lamp control in the SP final reach inciting part. designed to be used. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(True or False 13)
In the SP reach performance where no operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/fail branch, the sound is muted and the frame lamp is kept lit in white, so that the player can see the performance as if it has stopped, and the win/fail branch (decision timing) can be easily conveyed to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance where operation prompt is given to encourage the player to operate at the win/fail branch, a state is set in which a sound corresponding to operation prompt or a sound (BGM) corresponding to a reach is output, and further, the grandchild table is switched multiple times to control the frame lamp so as to be in a mode corresponding to operation prompt, so that the timing of the decision of the win/fail branch can be suitably presented by the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing of the decision of the win/fail branch can be suitably presented by different sound control and lamp control between the case where operation prompt is not given at the win/fail branch and the case where operation prompt is given.

(15 correct answers)
In the child table WD9 in the SP latter half reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on the grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on the grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the provocation part of the SP latter half reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of the grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decision timing) can be clearly communicated to the player without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

(17 correct or incorrect)
In child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figures 131 (r49) to 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamp changes in succession from flashing white to lighting red to flashing red, etc., thereby enhancing the presentation of the operation promotion for the player at the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

(True or false 20)
In child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B, similarly to child table WD17 of SP final reach, Based on the grandchild table W14, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode when the game loses. However, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14 in the SP first half reach A, B and the SP second half reach A, B, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the time during which the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

(True or false 21)
From the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on the last specified grandchild table W26 in each of the child tables WD4, WD7, WD11, WD14, and WD17 used in the case of a loss, the first specified grandchild of the child table WD18 used in the case of rescue is determined. By switching to the lighting mode of the frame lamp based on table W16, the frame lamp lights up in the same color (yellow) and even brighter. As a result, at the time of a rescue win, the frame lamp is lit in the same color (yellow) as the state after the loss notification and brighter than the state after the loss notification, so depending on the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, the loss notification and The subsequent relief winning notification can be shown more easily to the player.

(Epilogue 9)
When the accessory rises, the production control CPU 120 gradually moves the accessory lamp 9A based on the child table corresponding to the ascending movement of the accessory in the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is lowered in stages so that it is turned off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

(Epilogue 26)
In the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used when notifying the win and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of the multiple timings that are different from each other, and the rainbow color While reducing the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on, it is possible to enhance each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

(Epilogue 27)
In the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 2)
As shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), in the winning epilogue part, when the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors and the winning symbol is temporarily stopped, before executing the re-lottery effect, the frame lamp is temporarily turned off. After being turned off, the frame lamp is lit in a lighting manner corresponding to the re-lottery performance, so that it is possible to clearly inform the player that the re-lottery performance is to be started by the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

(Re-lottery effect 7, re-lottery effect 14, re-lottery effect 16)
In the winning epilogue part, when the winning symbols are temporarily stopped, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, and then the re-lottery effect is executed with the lights turned off, and when the symbols are oscillating, the re-lottery effect is activated. Based on the brightness data corresponding to (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. Further, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short pattern determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control, so the data There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

(Re-lottery performance 19)
In the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part, the grandchild table W1 is used in common with the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. It will be done. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

(Re-lottery performance 20)
In the child table WD20 of the re-lottery part, the frame lamp lights up in the same rainbow color as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part as a lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part. However, when the "2" symbol is promoted to the "3" symbol due to the re-drawing, the rainbow color lights up from time tB7 to tB9, and the "2" symbol temporarily stops during the winning epilogue part. The lighting pattern is more intense than the smooth rainbow-colored lighting in the case. As a result, the player can more effectively congratulate the player on the promotion of winning symbols in the re-lottery, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp.

<Detailed explanation regarding lamp control>
Next, with regard to the above-mentioned lamp control, characteristic parts that should be particularly mentioned will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263.

[Comparison of lamp control when winning and losing]
FIGS. 261 to 263 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamps when winning and when losing.

First, referring to FIG. 261, the lamp control at the time of a miss will be described. As shown in FIG. 261, at the end of the stimulating part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. In the grandchild table W8, "FDC" is specified at 100,000 msec as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W8 to light the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing). In addition, at the end of the stimulating part in the SP final reach, the lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. In the grandchild table W10, "500" or "D00" is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table W10 to flash the frame lamp in red in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the loss epilogue part via the instigation part in each of the SP first half reach A, B, SP second half reach A, B, and SP final reach, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W13. . In the grandchild table W13, "888" is specified in the first 10 msec, and "444" is specified in the next 190 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W13 to light the frame lamp in white in response to a performance in which an ally character loses in a ready-to-reach performance after a win/fail decision.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W13, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W14. In the grandchild table W14, "444" or "111" is specified at 250 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W14, so that the frame lamp lights up in a darker white color than the white lighting based on the grandchild table W13, in response to the production that the ally character is disappointed in. let

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W14, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W15. In grandchild table W15, "444" is specified for the first 10 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, "111" is specified for the next 550 msec, and "111" is specified for the final 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W15, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the frame lamp in response to a performance in which a miss is announced and the screen goes dark.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W15, as explained with reference to FIG. 190, lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching), and then lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W26 that was also used in the start part before the reach. In the grandchild table W26, data corresponding to a yellow pattern that corresponds to the normal background is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W26, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in yellow (yellow background lighting pattern) that corresponds to the normal background, just like in the start part before the reach.

Next, referring to FIG. 262, we will explain the lamp control at the time of a hit when transitioning to the hit epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the first half SP reach A, B and second half SP reach A, B.

As shown in FIG. 262, at the end of the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and SP second half reach A and B, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W8. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W8, and lights up the frame lamp in white in response to the performance of the win/lose branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part via the promotion part in each of the SP first half reaches A and B and the SP second half reaches A and B, ramp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W19. In the grandchild table W19, "FFF" is specified for the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified for the next 30 msec as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W19 to cause the frame lamp to blink in white in response to a performance in which the ally character wins.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W19, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W1. In the grandchild table W1, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 msec intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

After lamp control is performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is then performed based on grandchild table W21. In grandchild table W21, "AAA" is assigned to each lamp in turn at 20 msec intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, and finally "000" is assigned to each lamp at 600,000 msec (10 minutes). By performing lamp control based on grandchild table W21, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the frame lamps in a bright white color corresponding to the display of a winning pattern, in response to a performance that produces a winning pattern.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Next, referring to Figure 263, we will explain the lamp control when a hit occurs when transitioning to the winning epilogue part via the teasing part in the SP final reach.

As shown in FIG. 263, at the end of the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W10. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W10, and causes the frame lamp to flash red in response to the performance of the win/loss branch (decisive timing).

After that, in the winning epilogue part after passing through the teasing part in the SP final reach, lamp control is first performed based on the grandchild table W20. In the grandchild table W20, as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified in the first 40 msec, and "333" is specified in the next 30 msec, and such RGB data is repeatedly specified. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table W20, the performance control CPU 120 causes the frame lamp to flash in seven colors in response to a performance in which a role object falls.

After lamp control has been performed based on the grandchild table W20, lamp control is now performed based on the grandchild table W1. The effect control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light up the frame lamp in a rainbow color corresponding to a confirmed win.

After lamp control has been performed based on grandchild table W1, lamp control is now performed based on grandchild table W21. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W21, thereby lighting up the frame lamp in a bright white color corresponding to the appearance of a winning symbol in response to a performance such as the appearance of a winning symbol.

After lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table W21, lamp control is performed again based on the grandchild table W1. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table W1 to smoothly light the frame lamp in rainbow colors in response to a performance in which the winning symbol is finally displayed in the center of the screen.

Characteristic parts of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 261 to 263 will be described below.

(19)
As shown in FIG. 261, when the game moves to the losing epilogue part via the provocative part in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part is "FDC", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the losing epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the game loses in each of the SP first half reach A and B and the SP second half reach A and B, the frame lamp can be lit in white more dimly while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, so that the player can be suitably notified that the game has lost. Also, when the game moves to the losing epilogue part via the provocative part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the provocative part includes "D00", whereas the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the losing epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the SP final reach is a miss, the frame lamp can be lit in white, which is dimmer than the red flashing that occurs during the win/loss branch, so that the player can be conveniently notified that he or she has missed.

(Accessory action 1)
As shown in FIGS. 262 and 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at intervals of 30 msec. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamp lights up in a darker white color based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data is switched at intervals of 250 msec, which are longer than in the case of a win. Thereby, since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at a shorter interval when winning, than when losing, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he has won by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, while the lighting of the frame lamp is more emphasized in the event of a win than in the case of a loss, the lighting of the frame lamp can be made more subdued in the event of a loss. This can be conveyed to players in an easy-to-understand manner.

(Role Action 2)
As shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the role object falls, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is turned on so that the rainbow chromatic color and the achromatic color (RGB data of "333") are alternately switched. In this way, by occasionally inserting the achromatic color between the rainbow chromatic color, it is possible to execute a performance that emphasizes the big win and congratulates the player. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is turned on in a smooth rainbow color without an achromatic color, so that it is possible to execute a performance that congratulates the player in a calm manner on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be preferably shown to the player.

(Regarding the swinging pattern of the design)
Here, the pattern swinging mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 264. FIG. 264 is a diagram for explaining the pattern swinging mode. In the pattern swinging period in the above-mentioned instigation part and re-lottery part, the decorative pattern moves as in the first mode to the third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) or the first mode to the third mode shown in FIG. 264(b). Specifically, the first mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located above the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(a) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located below the first mode.

The first mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is located at the center of the screen when viewed from the front. The second mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated right around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more left than in the first mode. The third mode shown in FIG. 264(b) is a mode in which the decorative pattern is rotated left around the vertical axis, with the center of the decorative pattern facing more right than in the first mode.

(Variation example of re-lottery performance)
FIG. 265 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the re-lottery effect. FIG. 265(A) is a detailed explanatory diagram of the re-lottery effect using 7 symbols. Moreover, FIG. 265(B) is a timing chart of each re-lottery performance. As shown in FIG. 265(A), after the symbols are enlarged as shown in (D1) and (D2), the symbols are reduced as shown in (D3) and (D4). Thereafter, as shown in (D5), the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (D6), the background is switched to the background for the re-lottery effect, and the re-lottery effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in (D7), there is a shaking period in which the symbols shake up and down. Thereafter, the "7" symbol is displayed in a reduced size from (D8) to (D9).

After that, as shown in (D10), a button image and time gauge are faintly displayed below the "7" symbol. After that, as shown in (D11), the button image and time gauge are clearly displayed with the "7" symbol displayed. Then, as shown in (F12), the time gauge decreases over time. The time gauge is an indication that shows the valid period for button operation. If the player operates the push button 31B from the (D12) state, the "7" will rapidly change, and a faint and clear display will be repeated, as shown in (D13) to (D20). Similar rapid changes are repeated after (D20).

As shown in FIG. 265(B) and the timing chart for each re-lottery performance, the pattern forwarding period when a re-lottery performance in which the patterns change at high speed by button operation is executed is the same for all re-lottery performances. Here, there are a first re-lottery performance in which even numbers change to odd numbers, a second re-lottery performance in which even numbers do not change to even numbers, and a third re-lottery performance in which 7 numbers do not change to 7 numbers. For example, in the first re-lottery performance, if the button is operated immediately after the timing at which the pattern forwarding performance can be performed and the pattern forwarding performance is started, there is a period (t1) in which the decorative patterns shake after the pattern forwarding period ends, and then the pattern is finalized.

In addition, in the second re-draw performance, if the button is operated t2 after the button can be operated and the symbol forwarding performance is started, there is a decorative symbol shaking period (t1-t2) after the symbol forwarding period ends, and then the symbol is finalized. In the third re-draw performance, if the button is operated t1 after the button can be operated and the symbol forwarding performance is started, there is no decorative symbol shaking period after the symbol forwarding period ends, and the symbol is finalized. In this way, the symbol forwarding period is constant no matter when the button is operated, and the time from the subsequent symbol shaking period to the button operation is absorbed in the period from the button operation to the symbol determination. This relationship is the same when the button is operated in any of the first to third re-draw performances.

[About re-draw performances 26-28]
The characteristic parts of the re-drawing part will be numbered and explained.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 266 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. As shown in (K1) to (K3) of FIG. 266, no matter when the button is operated during the winning/losing scene, the decorative pattern moves in the same way after the whiteout. Specifically, when the button is operated immediately after the promotion display is displayed as shown in (K1), the role movement and the winning epilogue part are executed, and the pattern is displayed in the epilogue part as shown in (K4). After that, 5 seconds later during the pattern shaking period, the three patterns face forward as shown in (K5).

In addition, if the button is operated 1 second after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K2), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part are executed, and as shown in (K4) The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 4 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols are in a state facing leftward from the front as shown in (K6). In addition, if the button is operated 2 seconds after the promotion display is displayed in the scene of winning or rejecting as shown in (K3), the movement of the accessory and the winning epilogue part will be executed, and as shown in (K4). The pattern will be displayed in the epilogue part. Thereafter, after 3 seconds during the symbol shaking period, the three symbols will be in a state where they are facing to the right from the front, as shown in (K7).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the pattern will be in a forward position after the pattern shaking period, at the second operation timing, the pattern will be in a position facing left after the pattern shaking period, and at the third operation timing, the pattern will be in a position facing right after the pattern shaking period. However, even if the orientation of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing during the pattern shaking period, a common effect is then executed, as shown in (K8) to (K17), in which the pattern is rotated and reduced after whiteout. Then, after (K17), a pattern advance effect is executed. Note that although FIG. 266 has been explained using odd-numbered patterns, a similar effect is also executed with even-numbered patterns.

(Re-lottery performance 26)
As shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect will be executed thereafter. In the time until the predetermined timing, a time period may be provided for the symbols to absorb the scale (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

(Re-draw performance 27)
The time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-lottery effect is executed may be the same for any of a plurality of reach effects. This can reduce the data capacity of the effect data.

(Re-lottery performance 28)
The movement of the symbols after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings from the front side to the back side on the spot due to an axis rotation centered on the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement in which the image is rotated clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while being enlarged. According to this, by displaying a whiteout in between movements that are extensions of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the design from feeling strange, and to make a series of effects appear more suitable. be able to.

(Re-draw performance 29)
Among the multiple SP reaches, there are some that do not notify the user of a button operation or other operation promotion at the branch when determining whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state. In such SP reaches, no time shift occurs due to the operation. However, even in such SP reaches, a re-draw performance similar to that of an SP reach in which a time shift occurs can be executed. In this way, a common performance can be used regardless of the time shift, so that no discomfort is felt even when there is only one re-draw performance. In addition, by limiting the re-draw performance to one, the data capacity can be reduced.

(Re-draw performance 30)
As shown in FIG. 266, the timing of the movement of the pattern after the whiteout screen is set so that it is an extension of the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen. For example, the movement of the pattern before the whiteout screen is designed to be one of a series of movements in which the pattern moves from the right position (K3) to the left position (K6) via the front position (K5). In other words, when the pattern is swinging in a clockwise direction, the whiteout by the re-lottery performance is executed, and then the pattern is enlarged and rotates to the right. According to this, the series of right-rotating pattern movements from the pattern swinging period to the re-lottery performance can prevent the pattern movement from feeling strange.

[About re-lottery effects 21-25]
The characteristic parts of the re-lottery part will be explained by numbering them.

(Variation of re-selection effect)
FIG. 267 is a diagram for explaining a modified example of the re-draw performance. (L1) is a diagram of the case where the button is operated at an earlier timing after the action prompt display is displayed during the pattern forwarding period. (L2) is a diagram of the case where the button is operated at a later timing than (L1) after the action prompt display is displayed. (L3) is a diagram of the case where the button is operated at a later timing than (L2) after the action prompt display is displayed. And, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, the pattern is produced in the same way regardless of the timing at which the button is operated during the pattern forwarding period in the re-draw performance. Then, the decorative pattern with the whiteout in between moves in the same way and then stops. Specifically, as shown in (L1), when the button is operated immediately after the action prompt display is displayed, the pattern is produced as shown in (L4) to (L5), and then the pattern becomes normal size. Then, as shown in (L6), the pattern starts to shake, and after a predetermined period has passed, the three patterns are in a state of facing rightward rather than forward as shown in (L7).

In addition, as shown in (L2), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L1) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. After that, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L1), the three symbols turn to the right rather than the front as shown in (L8). Become. In addition, as shown in (L3), if the button is operated at a later timing than (L2) after the movement promotion display is displayed, the symbols shown in (L4) to (L5) are executed. After that, the pattern becomes normal size. Thereafter, as shown in (L6), the symbols start to shake, and after a shorter symbol shaking period than in (L2), the three symbols are in a state facing forward as shown in (L9).

In this way, at the first operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing to the right after the pattern shaking period, at the second operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing to the left after the pattern shaking period, and at the third operation timing, the pattern may be in a position facing forward after the pattern shaking period. However, even if the orientation of the pattern differs depending on the operation timing during the pattern shaking period, a common effect is then executed in which the pattern is rotated and reduced after a whiteout, as shown in (J1) to (J10). Then, the pattern stops after the pattern shaking period, as shown in (J11) to (J17). Note that although FIG. 267 has been explained using odd-numbered patterns, a similar effect is also executed with even-numbered patterns.

(Re-lottery performance 21)
In a modified example, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

(Re-draw performance 22)
When the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is displayed (an example of no operation in FIG. 267 (L3)). When the push button 31B is operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the first timing (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L2) during the operation valid period). When the push button 31B is operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the operation valid period, after the notification of whether or not the player will be promoted, the display of the decorative pattern shaking is extended by the amount of time that it was earlier than the second timing (an example of the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) during the operation valid period). In this way, regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, the length of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the pattern. By performing a common performance after that, the pattern can be stopped cleanly, and the series of performances can be displayed in a favorable manner.

(Re-lottery performance 23)
As shown in FIG. 267, after performing a whiteout as a common performance, a performance different from the previous pattern is performed in which the swinging decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what position the symbol is in when the symbol is oscillated during shaku absorption, by performing a different style of presentation after the whiteout, the flow of presentation until the pattern stops can be adjusted. This can be done so that it does not make you feel uncomfortable.

(Re-lottery performance 24)
As shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol swinging period, the symbol swings to the back from (J10) to (J12), and then swings to the front from (J13) to (J14) to return to the initial position. Change. Thereafter, the symbol swings toward the front from (J15) to (J16), and then swings toward the back from (J17) to (J18), thereby changing to the initial position. Such a series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the period in which the symbols are determined, the design is such that the symbols are always located at the initial position facing forward as shown in (J18). According to this, the symbols can be fixed and stopped in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Re-lottery performance 25)
The game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing (J1) is a performance that is executed as a common performance regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is performed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed performance.

<Main components and effects>
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are listed individually.

(F2019-116)
A gaming machine (for example, gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, an accessory, a movable body 32),
Display means (for example, image display device 5),
It is possible to execute a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled (for example, a notification performance that notifies whether or not there will be a jackpot),
The notification effect includes an introductory part (for example, an incitement part) in which the validity of whether or not the control is controlled to be in the advantageous state is announced, and a validity notification part (for example, the winning epilogue part) in which the success or failure is notified. (a win/fail notification part that notifies you of a jackpot by moving a role object), and an epilogue part (for example, a win epilogue part) that is executed after the win/fail notification and when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state. It consists of
In the introduction part, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and the first character whose dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound is an ally character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 115 (r2)),
The display means makes it difficult to visually recognize the performance display by giving priority to the introduction display of the promotion display that prompts a specific action to the performance display in the introduction part at the timing of transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part. state, and then performs a promotion display in a state where the effect display is visible (for example, examples shown in FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54)),
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body moves from the first position (for example, the retracted position) to the second position on the front side of the display means. advance to a position (for example, advance position) (for example, the example shown in FIG. 133);
The display means is
Displaying an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and terminating the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position; A display corresponding to the epilogue part is performed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174),
In the epilogue part, the final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, the decorative pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area (for example, Examples shown in FIGS. 134 to 136),
In the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds uttered by the character is higher than the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds uttered by the character in the introduction part (for example, the example shown in FIG. 175). .

Specifically, in each SP reach as an incitement part, the character who first speaks a line is an ally character (for example, FIG. 115 (r2)). According to this, it is possible to make the player accurately recognize the ally character at the start of SP reach. In addition, at the timing of transition from the incitement part to the success/failure notification part, the introductory image of the trigger display that prompts you to operate the trigger is displayed with priority over the display of the effect in the incitement part, so that the effect display of the incitement part becomes invisible, and then The image of operating the trigger button and the effect in the inciting part become visible (for example, FIGS. 131 (r48) to (r51)). According to this, the introduction image gives an impact, and since the introduction image changes to the image of the trigger button, the performance of the inciting part can be confirmed, thereby making it possible to excite the players. In addition, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being spoiled during the flow of the performance, which becomes the background display for the epilogue part until the evacuation of the accessory is completed. In addition, since the symbols are enlarged and displayed after the display of the final dialogue subtitles has finished in the winning epilogue part, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping the symbols and to prevent the player from mistaking it as a message for displaying the symbols. In addition, the above-mentioned inciting part in which the validity is incited was updated as the friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.). In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part. In addition, subtitles are properly added to the slow-paced epilogue part, making it easier to understand what the characters are saying and emphasizing the sense of celebration. Furthermore, in the fast-paced inciting part, the content can be primarily conveyed through video switching, and auxiliary subtitles can be displayed so as not to disturb the video development. Thereby, a series of performances can be presented in a suitable manner.

(F2019-117)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the lines of characters in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for characters in the SP reach, which is the teasing part. By clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the teasing part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the performance, and the primary focus can be on conveying the performance through image changes. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the teasing part.

(F2019-118)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
Execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

(F2019-119)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-draw performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped before the re-draw is enlarged, reduced, and swayed, and then the re-draw performance is started using the "2" symbol as it is. When the re-extraction performance starts, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the re-draw performance starts to change from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-draw performance, a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2". During the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order, from "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1", and then a symbol-sending performance is executed in which the "2" symbol is displayed again. In this way, the re-draw performance is started using the decorative symbol that was temporarily stopped, and the decorative symbol that was initially temporarily stopped is displayed again after multiple types of decorative symbols are changed. In this way, the final display result is not displayed immediately, and the symbol-sending performance in which all the decorative symbols are displayed can make the flow of the series of performances look good.

(F2019-120)
(5) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second re-drawing of the plurality of types of re-lottery performances in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, the second symbol is repeatedly displayed, and in the second half part, the second symbol is displayed repeatedly. It is possible to perform a third re-lottery effect that is displayed again,
The first re-lottery performance, the second re-lottery performance, and the third re-lottery performance have the same performance length,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity.

(F2019-121)
(6) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
A performance execution means,
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a first re-lottery in which a first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in the second half part. It is possible to perform the production,
When it is determined to be controlled to the first advantageous state, among the plurality of types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform the second re-lottery performance,
Displaying the first symbol with the same or substantially the same animation when displaying the first symbol once in the epilogue part and when displaying the first symbol again in the second half of the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the brightness data table for rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. do.

Specifically, the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using approximately the same video. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. Note that the images of the pattern portion including the background may be made completely the same.

(F2019-122)
(7) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the latter half part, from when the first pattern is displayed again until a pattern determination period, a swinging display is performed in which the first pattern is displayed as if it is swinging by changing the display mode of the first pattern to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode;
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until the pattern determination period, a swinging display is performed in which the display mode of the second pattern is changed to the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode, so that the second pattern is displayed as if it is swinging;
The first mode is a mode in which a player can easily visually recognize the symbols compared to either the second mode or the third mode,
The performance execution means includes:
In the re-selection part, a display for prompting the player to take an action can be executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if an action is performed at a first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes the third mode when the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the second pattern is difficult to see from the predetermined timing, and then the second pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the pattern determination period begins, the second pattern is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if an action is performed at the first timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in the second mode when the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if an action is performed at the second timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in the third mode when the predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the first pattern is difficult to see from the predetermined timing, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when the pattern determination period begins, the first pattern is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) of FIG. 267, an action prompt display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed while the symbols are being sent in the re-draw effect. During the period in which the action prompt display is displayed, the player operates the push button 31B to execute the common symbol release effect shown in (L4) to (L6). Regardless of the timing at which the push button 31B is operated, a common symbol release effect is executed by enlarging and reducing the symbols as shown in (L4) to (L5). After that, the symbols are wobbled during the symbol wobbled period. The symbol wobbled period differs depending on the timing of the button operation. Thus, after the symbol wobbled period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the right, at the second operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing to the left, and at the third operation timing, the symbols may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a whiteout effect is inserted as a common effect from (J1) to (J18) afterwards, and an effect in which the symbols rotate, shrink, and then sway is executed. By doing this, regardless of the timing of the push button 31B operation, the symbols can be stopped cleanly by executing the common effect, and the series of effects can be displayed in an optimal manner.

(F2019-126)
(8) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and no dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part but are not subtitled (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player. Also, Figures 64 (b8), (b9), Figure 74 (e7), Figure 94 (i32), Figure 95 (i34), Figure 104 (n10), Figure 123 (r25), (r27), Figure 124 (r29 ), as shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, a frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that it lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

(F2019-127)
(9) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to a scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the movable body movement brightness data table to a brightness data table corresponding to a post-switching scene while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to the scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, the performance may be switched from the performance at the start of the reach to the performance of the SP first half reach by the operation of the reel. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel operation may be displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, the display may be gradually switched from the effect image corresponding to the reel operation to the screen corresponding to the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, the brightness data table may be switched from the brightness data table of the reel operation part to the brightness data table of the SP first half reach while the reel is rising. Also, a sound corresponding to the SP first half reach may be output while the reel is rising. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel operation is displayed on the premise that the reel is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to the initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the reel completes the return operation to the initial position. In addition, the sound effects and the brightness data table for the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the first half of the SP while the reel is rising, allowing the promotional part of the first half of the SP to be displayed optimally.

(F2019-128)
(10) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
The display means includes:
In the introductory part, a prompt is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the player performs the specific action, a cut-in is displayed.
In the introductory part, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means in response to the dialogue sound;
At the timing when the promotion display is performed in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in the specific area,
the luminance data table includes a luminance data table for cut-in display corresponding to the cut-in display, and a luminance data table for an introduction part corresponding to an introduction part,
The light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for cut-in display includes at least the same portions as the light emitting means for which luminance data is set in the luminance data table for the introduction part.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

(F2019-129)
(11) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to prompt a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not perform the promotion display that prompts the specific action, but displays a display that encourages success or failure;
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp lit in white, the effect appears as if the effect has stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance in which operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp so as to have a mode corresponding to the frame lamp, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing for deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by using different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is encouraged in the case of whether or not the decision is made.

(F2019-130)
(12) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part includes a first scene and a second scene after the first scene,
In the first scene, first video data is used,
In the second scene, second video data is used,
The progress speed of the production in the second scene is slower than that in the first scene,
The first video data is video data in which the movement of a specific character is expressed by a plurality of specific character images,
The second video data is video data in which the movement of the specific character is expressed by one specific character image and an effect image.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the production executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the production executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. It is executed using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

(F2019-131)
(13) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
There is a shielding display that makes the performance display invisible by going into a closed mode after a closing operation, and makes the performance display visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode,
The shielding display can be executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the shielding display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes smaller;
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the effect display increases as the area where the effect display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the shutter described above is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible, and when opened after closing, makes the image of the performance being performed visible. The shutter is also executed at a timing related to the teasing part, that is, before the start of the teasing part. When the shutter is closing, the screen brightness is lowered as the area in which the performance is visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter is opening, the screen brightness is increased as the area in which the performance is visible becomes wider. This makes the closing and opening of the shutter appear more realistic, making the flow of the performance look favorable. Note that, although the image of the shutter is used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, an image other than a shutter may be used, and a similar performance may be executed using a prop.

(F2019-132)
(14) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/failure notification and when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are outputted louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, in the inciting part, there is a scene in which the BGM of SP Reach is output, and the dialogue sound and the physical sound (also referred to as action sound) are output at the same timing. When the dialogue sound and the physical sound are output at the same timing, the dialogue sound is output at a louder volume than the physical sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. According to this, by outputting physical sounds as part of the performance, the reality of the performance is created, and when the dialogue sound and physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output louder, so that the contents of the performance can be conveyed to the player. It can be easily communicated. Therefore, as a result, the performance in the inciting part can be shown better.

(F2019-133)
(15) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay effect is executed among a plurality of types of replay effects, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the case of transition from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, there are a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first manner, a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second manner, and a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third manner,
The performance execution means performs a specific display that makes the first pattern difficult to see when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode and transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode and transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, and when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode and transitions from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, and displays the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance;
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time until a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent a sense of discomfort from occurring in the movement of the symbols, and it is possible to suitably present a series of performances.

(F2020-005)
(16) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocation part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed for the character's dialogue. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the first subtitles are displayed so that the first subtitle display period overlaps with the second subtitle display period that is displayed next. A fade effect is applied when the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap. A fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters with different states. According to this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the change in the subtitles is made easier to understand due to the fade effect, so that the switching of the subtitles can be made easier to understand.

(F2020-006)
(17) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not it will be controlled in the advantageous state, and an introduction part after the notification is made as to whether or not it will be controlled in the advantageous state. and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is in the advantageous state,
The notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or non-control. a second epilogue part in which it is announced that the control is not controlled in the advantageous state;
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is displayed to notify that the control is not controlled by the advantageous state,
After that, a switching display is performed,
After that, display the background,
After that, triggered by the symbol confirmation command, the symbol is stopped and displayed,
After that, with the fluctuation command as a trigger, the fluctuation display of the symbol starts,
The light emission control means includes:
In a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means for production using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
when the switching display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the switching display and controlling the light emitting means for production;
when the background display is performed, switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display and controlling the light emitting means for production;
When the stop display of the symbol is performed, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for stopping the fourth symbol, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the brightness data table corresponding to the background display is continued. to control the light emitting means for production,
When the fluctuating display of symbols is started, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for fourth symbol variation, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol is controlled, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continued. and is used to control the light emitting means for presentation.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching). Further, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to off upon receiving the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Start 1]
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , performs a display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the movable body movement brightness data table when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. , switching from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Output the corresponding sound.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance as the accessory moves. Furthermore, as the accessory falls, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed. Thereafter, while the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP. In addition, while the accessory is rising, the brightness data table of the accessory movement part (child table WD8 shown in FIG. 202 described later) to the brightness data table of SP second half reach A (child table WD9 shown in FIGS. 204 and 205 described later) is changed. ) The brightness data table is switched to Further, while the accessory is rising, a sound corresponding to the second half of the SP (for example, BGM of the second half of the SP) is output. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the second half of the SP while the accessory returns to its initial position, the inciting part of the second half of the SP can be suitably displayed.

[Start 2]
Before the movable body moves, a reduced design is displayed at a specific display position,
When the movable body moves, the movable body covers a specific display position,
In response to the movement of the movable body, an effect corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed in a layer that has priority over the display layer of the reduced-displayed pattern,
After the movable body starts retracting and is no longer located at the specific display position, the effect display is switched to a display corresponding to the performance after switching to a state in which a reduced pattern is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the performance switches from the SP first half reach A performance to the SP second half reach A performance as the accessory moves. Furthermore, before the accessory moves, a reduced "2" symbol is displayed at the lower left and right corners of the screen. When the accessory moves, the accessory falls so that the letter "P" among the characters on the accessory is located at a position that overlaps with the place where the reduced decorative pattern of "2" was displayed. do. Further, in accordance with the motion of the accessory falling, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed in a prioritized layer in front of the "2" symbol that is displayed in a reduced size. Then, after the accessory rises from the falling position and the "2" symbol does not overlap with the accessory, the effect image gradually becomes lighter, and the background and "2" symbol corresponding to reach A in the second half of the SP disappear. It is displayed faintly. According to this, it is possible to prevent an aesthetically unsightly display from being displayed due to the reduced decorative pattern being displayed during the action of the accessory. Furthermore, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is located at a position where it is superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the second half of the SP before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. Further, since the reduced decorative pattern is displayed during the ascending of the accessory, it is possible to switch the performance appropriately according to the action of the accessory.

[Start 3]
The movable body moves and effects are displayed before reaching a specific display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 171, the effect image is displayed before the accessory moves and reaches the lowest position of the fall. According to this, it is possible to quickly hide the reduced decorative pattern, and it is possible to change the suitable presentation including accessories.

[Start 4]
When the effect display is switched to the display of the developed production, the effect display is switched using an image related to the movable object.

Specifically, an image related to the prop may be displayed when switching from an effect image to an image of the performance that develops into the latter half. Specifically, in the scenes corresponding to FIG. 172 (h7) to (h10), when the prop rises, the letters "POWER II" and images of the main characters Yume Yume, Jam, and Nana may be displayed. In this way, by linking the performance change, it is possible to show a suitable change in performance involving the prop.

[Start 5]
There is a shielding display that makes the display invisible by going through a closing operation to a closed state, and makes the display visible by performing an opening operation after the closed state,
The occlusion display can be performed at a timing related to the introduction part,
When the blocking display performs a closing operation, the brightness of the effect display decreases as the area in which the effect display is visible becomes smaller,
When the shielding display performs an opening operation, the brightness of the performance display increases as the area in which the performance display is visible becomes larger.

Specifically, the above-mentioned shutter is an image that, when closed, makes the image of the effect being executed behind the camera invisible, and when it is closed and then opened, the image of the effect that is being executed becomes visible. Further, the shutter is executed at a timing related to the inciting part, that is, before the inciting part starts. When the shutter closes, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects are visible becomes narrower, and when the shutter opens, the screen brightness decreases as the area where the effects become visible becomes wider. becomes higher. According to this, by making the closing and opening of the shutter realistic, it is possible to suitably show the flow of the performance. In addition, although the image of the shutter was used to make the image of the performance being performed in the background invisible or visible, it could also be an image other than the shutter, and the same performance could be performed using a role model. It's okay.

[Start 6]
An image corresponding to the blocking display has a shape in which doors close from both ends of the screen in the center of the screen, or a shape in which doors close from one end of the screen to the other end.

Specifically, the shutter described above closes from the top and bottom edges of the screen toward the center of the screen. According to this, it is possible to suitably display an effect in which the screen brightness gradually changes. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from both ends of the screen toward the center, like a sliding door. Further, the shutter may be configured to close from the top end of the screen toward the bottom end of the screen.

[Start 7]
In the shielding display, the color of the edge between the facing doors that makes the production display invisible is expressed in black.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 described above, the image of the edge of the shutter is expressed in black. According to this, when the shutter is about to close as shown in FIG. 58 (a12), the boundary between the effect executed when the screen brightness is lowered and the edge of the shutter can be blurred, and the sense of discomfort can be eliminated. . Similarly, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated when the shutter starts to open as shown in FIG. 60 (a16).

[Start 8]
After the shielding display undergoes a closing operation and an opening operation, a display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed.
A display corresponding to the introduction part is displayed in the middle of the opening operation of the shielding display, and while the brightness of the display corresponding to the introduction part increases step by step, until the opening operation of the shielding display is completed. , the display corresponding to the introduction part does not progress, and the display corresponding to the introduction part starts to progress after the release operation of the shielding display is completed.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 60 and 61 above, after the shutter opens, the SP first half reach begins. Until the shutter is fully open, the SP first half reach effect does not begin, and the screen brightness gradually increases, and after the shutter is opened, the SP first half effect progresses. In this way, since the SP first half reach effect is an effect that players want to pay attention to, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction by having the effect executed before the shutter opens.

[Start 9]
When the operation of releasing the shield display is completed, the light emitting means is turned off,
After the release operation of the shielding display is completed and one frame worth of image is displayed, the display corresponding to the introduction part progresses and the light emitting means starts emitting light.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in the child table WD1 of the start part, the frame lamp is turned off when the shutter is fully open, so the timing when the shutter is fully opened is determined by the lighting state of the frame lamp. It can be communicated to players in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the inciting part of SP first half reach A and the inciting part of SP first half reach B, which are executed after the start part, are started with the shutter fully open and the frame lamp turned off, and correspond to each SP first half reach. The frame lamp starts lighting or blinking based on the brightness data table. In this way, after the shutter is fully open and the frame lamp is turned off, the frame lamp starts lighting up in accordance with the progress of the SP first half reach, so the player cannot tell that the SP first half reach has started. can be conveyed in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Start 10]
The effect display starts to darken before the closing operation of the shielding display is started, and the closing operation ends at the timing when the effect display completely darkens.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57 (a9) above, the screen brightness is first lowered before the shutter starts to close, and the shutter is fully closed in time for it to close. Here, if the screen brightness were lowered in time with the shutter closing, there is a risk that the screen will darken too quickly. Therefore, by starting to lower the screen brightness in advance, the screen will darken at an appropriate speed, making the series of effects look optimal.

[Start 11] (2019-1944)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The display means is capable of performing a shielding display in which the effect display is made invisible by changing to a closed mode through a closing operation, and is made visible by performing an opening operation after entering the closed mode. can be,
The occlusion display is executed at a timing related to the introduction part,
The light emitting control means controls the light emitting means using a brightness data table for shielding display when performing shielding display,
The brightness data table for the shielding display is configured so that the brightness data changes when the shielding display performs the closing operation, and the brightness data is configured so that the brightness data does not change during the period from when the shielding display is in the closed state until it performs the opening operation. It is configured.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters are closed, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters are opened, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 12]
The production display includes a display before the introduction part starts and a display during the introduction part,
While the display corresponding to the predetermined effect is being displayed in the start part, the shielding display performs a closing action, and then the shielding display performs a releasing action, thereby starting the introduction part,
There are multiple types of introduction parts, and it is impossible to recognize which introduction part will be executed until the operation of releasing the shielded display is completed.

Specifically, until the aforementioned shutter opens, the player does not know which SP first half reach will start. This allows the player to have expectations about which performance will be executed.

[Start 13]
The shielding display may be performed at a timing other than the transition to the introduction part.

Specifically, the shutter effect described above may be executed at a timing other than the timing of development into the first half of the SP. For example, it may be executed from the second re-fluctuation to the third re-fluctuation in a pseudo consecutive win. Also, when the shutter closes and then opens, an icon image (for example, a green hold image) may be displayed that suggests a change in the active hold, which is the hold display for that fluctuation, and the active hold may change in response to that icon image (for example, changing from blue to green). Also, the shutter effect may be executed at the timing of development from the first half of the SP reach to the second half of the SP reach. This can increase the interest of the shutter effect.

[Start 14]
The timing at which the brightness data is maintained is the timing when the closing operation of the shielding display ends, the timing when a predetermined period of time has passed after the closing operation of the shielding display ends, or the timing related to the closing operation of the shielding display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 193, in child table WD1 of the start part, during times ta1-ta12 before the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp lights up/blinks while changing color and brightness, such as background yellow, flashing red, flashing white, and then lighting up red, whereas during times ta13-ta18 after the shutters are completely closed, the brightness data is maintained so that the frame lamp lights up in red while maintaining a reduced brightness. This allows the lighting state of the frame lamp to liven up the presentation in the start part before the shutters are closed, and by maintaining the lighting state of the frame lamp when the shutters are closed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the presentation when the shutters are opened, and as a result, the presentation in the subsequent teasing part can be better viewed by the player.

[Start 15]
The period during which the brightness data is maintained is the period from when the shielding display becomes closed until the release action is taken, or the period from when the shielding display becomes closed until a prompting display is taken to encourage the player to take an action.

Specifically, in addition to the pattern described above where the shutter closes and then automatically opens, a pattern may be provided where the shutter closes and then a button image is displayed, and the shutter opens when the button is operated. This provides multiple types of shutter effects, which increases the interest of the shutter effects.

[Start 16]
At the timing when the blocking display becomes the closed state and the promotion display is performed, the maintained luminance data is switched to the changing luminance data, and after the promotion display is performed, the luminance data is switched back to the maintained luminance data.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIG. 58 and FIG. 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, a prompting display is displayed to prompt the player to perform an action (for example, pressing a button, placing a hand over an infrared sensor, etc.), and when the player's action corresponding to the prompting display is detected, a performance in which the shutter opens may be performed. Then, while such a shutter display is in a closed state, lamp control is performed based on a brightness data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) is maintained, while at the timing when the shutter display is in a closed state and the prompting display is performed, the brightness data table is switched to one in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 changes, and lamp control is performed based on the brightness data table, and after the prompting display is performed (while the prompting display is continuing), lamp control may again be performed based on a brightness data table in which the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 is maintained. Note that the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting state used again after the prompting display is performed may be the same as or different from the brightness data table for maintaining the lighting state used before the prompting display is performed. This keeps the game effect lamp 9 lit while the shutter display is in the closed state, making it easier for the player to focus on the next performance that will be performed after the shutter display is in the open state.

[Start 17]
The promotion display is a display including a button image and promotion text that prompts the player to take an action.
When a promotion character is displayed, a sound corresponding to the promotion character is output, and luminance data is incorporated such that the luminance data changes in association with the sound.

Specifically, in a performance using a shutter display as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, after the shutter is displayed in a closed state, the player's actions (for example, pressing a button, an infrared sensor A promotion display may be performed to encourage players to move their hands (such as holding their hands up), and when a movement of the player corresponding to the promotion display is detected, an effect such as opening a shutter may be performed. In the promotion display, a voice prompting the player to perform an action (for example, a sound saying "Press") is output, and characters prompting the player to perform a motion (for example, "Press") are displayed. good. Furthermore, lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 may be performed based on a brightness data table that changes the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 (for example, a frame lamp) in response to a sound that prompts a player's action. In this way, since the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes in response to the voice prompting the player's action, the player's motion changes depending on the sound prompting the player's motion and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. It is possible to emphasize the character display prompting the player to more effectively perform the action corresponding to the prompt display.

[Incitement 1]
The introduction part is
This is the part until the result of controlling the game to an advantageous state is notified.
The game includes scenes in which the display is updated as friendly characters and enemy characters fight, and scenes in which friendly characters take damage.
The display switching interval is faster than in the epilogue part.
There are more display changes than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, the above-mentioned inciting part, which incites the right or wrong, was updated as friendly characters and enemy characters alternately fight each other (for example, SP first half reach B, SP second half reach B, etc.) . In this kind of inciting part, there are scenes in which an ally character takes damage. Furthermore, in the production of such an inciting part, the image display switching interval is faster and the number of image display switching is greater than that of the epilogue part. According to this, the inciting part can be shown suitably by making the inciting part develop faster than the epilogue part.

[Incitement 2]
In the introductory part, first, the dialogue sound of an ally character is output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (b5) described above, in the inciting part, the ally character's dialogue occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogue are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in the inciting part.

[Incitement 3]
In the introductory part, the display duration of the first dialogue subtitle is set to be longer.

Specifically, the subtitle display of the ally character that is displayed first may be set to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display in other scenes of the inciting part. According to this, the ally character can be clearly recognized.

[Incitement 4]
There are scenes in which the dialogue sounds of friendly characters are output but the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 67 (b17) and the like, there are scenes where subtitles are not displayed when an ally character speaks a line. This allows the screen display to be more suitable than if subtitles were displayed for all lines, while still displaying the subtitles for the ally character that is displayed first.

[Instigation 5]
The first introduction part may expand to the second introduction part,
Ally characters play an active role in both the first and second introduction parts,
In the first introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.
In the second introduction part, the dialogue sound of the ally character is first output, and the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned inciting part, SP first half reach A and SP first half reach B as the first inciting part are executed at the timing of the first half, and SP as the second inciting part is executed at the timing of the second half. There was a second half reach A, a SP second half reach B, and a SP final reach. There are also scenes in which ally characters play an active role, whether in the first inciting part or in the second inciting part. Also, in any of the incitement parts, a line from an ally character occurs first, and subtitles corresponding to the line are displayed. According to this, it is possible to suitably recognize the ally character in any of the inciting parts.

[Instigation 6]
In the first introduction part, the first character plays an active role,
In the second introduction part, the second character plays an active role,
In the first introduction part, the first character's dialogue sound is first output, and dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sound are displayed,
In the second introduction part, the second character's dialogue sound is first output, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in the inciting part mentioned above, Yumu-chan's character plays an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the first half of SP, and Jam-chan and Nana-chan play an active role in the inciting part corresponding to reach B in the second half of SP. There were scenes where the characters played an active role. Then, in the first half of the SP Reach B, a line by Yumu-chan, the first ally character to play an active role, occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the line were displayed. Also, in the second half of the SP, Reach B, dialogues by the first ally characters Jam-chan and Nana-chan occurred, and subtitles corresponding to the dialogues were displayed. According to this, the ally character can be suitably recognized in any of the provocation parts. Note that the number of active characters may be one or two or more. Furthermore, the same character may play an active role in the first half and the second half.

[Incitement 7]
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed;
a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed;
The brightness data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and no dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is displayed is configured so that brightness data using an emission color corresponding to the character is switched in response to the action of the character.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, there are scenes in which characters utter lines in the provocative part but are not subtitled (for example, scenes r25, r27, r29, r31, r33, r35). ). In such specific scenes, sounds that are difficult to express with subtitles are output as dialogue, so subtitles are not displayed. However, even in such a specific scene, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) of the game effect lamp 9 is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. In this way, even in a scene where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Thereby, the performance corresponding to the character can be suitably executed, and the inciting part can be suitably shown to the player. Also, Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29 ), as shown in Figures 125 (r31), (r33), and 126 (r35), even if a character has dialogue but no subtitles, a frame lamp is displayed in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that it lights up/blinks. As a result, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed, it is possible to suitably express that the character is uttering lines by the lighting manner of the game effect lamp 9, and it is possible to suitably show the production of the inciting part to the player. can.

[Incitement 8]
In a scene in which a character appears, the light emitting means emits light in a color other than the color corresponding to the character.

Specifically, as shown in Figs. 168 to 170, in scenes where characters appear (for example, r24, r26, r28, r30, r32, r34), the game effect lamp 9 is controlled to light up in a color other than the color corresponding to the character in the previous scene. Specifically, before the scene (r24), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in yellow (r22) or red (r23), and then lights up in orange corresponding to the AD character. Also, before the scene (r26), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in orange (r25) or white (r25'), and then lights up in blue corresponding to the maid A character. Also, before the scene (r28), the game effect lamp 9 lights up/blinks in blue (r27) or white (r27'), and then lights up in Hawaiian blue corresponding to the maid B character. Also, before the scene (r30), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in Hawaiian blue (r29) or white (r29'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in pink corresponding to the character Nana-chan. Also, before the scene (r32), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on/flashed in pink (r31) or white (r31'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple corresponding to the character Jam-chan. Also, before the scene (r34), the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in purple (r33) or white (r33'), and then the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in green corresponding to the character Yume-Yume. In this way, before a character appears, control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in a color different from the color corresponding to the corresponding character, and then control is performed to turn on the game effect lamp 9 in the color corresponding to the character. Therefore, the lamp can be used to clearly show the player that the displayed character is changing and which character has changed, making it a suitable part of the incentive.

[Inciting 9]
The light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on one side of the screen, and the light emitting means emits light in a color corresponding to a character located on the other side of the screen.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 64 (b8), (b9), Fig. 74 (e7), Fig. 94 (i32), Fig. 95 (i34), Fig. 104 (n10), Fig. 123 (r25), (r27), Fig. 124 (r29), Fig. 125 (r31), (r33), and Fig. 126 (r35), even when a character is speaking but there are no subtitles, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights/blinks in the color corresponding to the character. This makes it possible to appropriately express that the character is speaking through the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9 even in scenes where there are no subtitles displayed, and allows the player to appropriately see the performance in the provocative part.

[Inciting 10] (2019-1930)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The introduction part is
a first scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the first character is output;
a second scene in which a first character and a second character are displayed, and a dialogue sound emitted by the second character is output;
The light emission control means includes:
In the first scene, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first scene,
In the second scene, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second scene,
In the brightness data table corresponding to the first scene, among the plurality of light emitting means, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character, and among the plurality of light emitting means, the second character is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character. When the luminance data in which the light-emitting means on the displayed side is set to a light-emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in response to the dialogue sound emitted by the first character, the first character among the plurality of light-emitting means is displayed. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed is changed, and the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is configured so as not to change,
In the brightness data table corresponding to the second scene, among the plurality of light emitting means, the light emitting means on the side where the first character is displayed is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character, and among the plurality of light emitting means, the second character is set to a luminescent color corresponding to the first character. When the luminance data in which the light-emitting means on the displayed side is set to a light-emitting color corresponding to the second character is switched in response to a dialogue sound emitted by the second character, the first character among the plurality of light-emitting means is displayed. The brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed is not changed, but the brightness of the light emitting means on the side where the second character is displayed among the plurality of light emitting means is changed.

Specifically, when a character appears, the brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character, and when the character utters lines, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamp lights up in the color corresponding to the character. The brightness data (RGB data in the grandchild table) is specified so that the frame lamp blinks in the color corresponding to the color. For example, in response to an effect where Yumu-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, and Bakuchu, who is located on the right side of the screen, confront each other, as shown in Figure 63 (b4), a green frame corresponding to Yumu-chan is created. Light up the left lamp, and light the right lamp in the frame in red, which corresponds to Bakuchu. At time tb5, the performance control CPU 120 creates a green frame corresponding to Yume-chan in response to the performance in which Yume-chan, who is located on the left side of the screen, utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b5). Make the left lamp blink. At time tb6, the production control CPU 120 displays a frame right lamp in red corresponding to Bakuchu in response to a production in which Bakuchu located on the right side of the screen utters lines as shown in FIG. 63 (b6). flash. As a result, in a scene where multiple characters uttering lines are displayed, which character is uttering lines can be appropriately expressed by lighting/blinking of the frame lamp, and the production in the inciting part can be suitably expressed in the game. can be shown to others.

[Incitement 11]
In a state in which the first character and the second character are displayed, dialogue subtitles are displayed in each of a scene in which the dialogue sound of the first character is output and a scene in which the dialogue sound of the second character is output, and the dialogue subtitles are displayed in a fixed font and at a fixed position.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 63 (b5) and (b6), there are scenes in which friendly and enemy characters are displayed and each character speaks lines. In such a situation, the subtitle display for the lines is of a fixed size and is displayed at a fixed display position. In this way, by not changing the display mode of the lines for each character, it is possible to reduce the opportunities for bugs and the like to occur.

[Incitement 12]
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds are outputted louder than the action sounds.

Specifically, in the titillation part, the background music for the SP reach is output, and there are scenes where dialogue sounds and physical sounds (also called operation sounds) are output at the same time they overlap. When dialogue sounds and physical sounds are output at the same time, the dialogue sounds are output at a louder volume than the physical sounds when output from speakers 8L, 8R. In this way, the realism of the presentation is brought out by outputting the physical sounds as part of the presentation, while the content of the presentation can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds at a louder volume when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. As a result, the presentation in the titillation part can be made to look better.

[Inciting 13]
Various sounds such as BGM, movement sounds, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are output in accordance with the production performed in the introduction part.
At the design stage, various sounds are output along with a display corresponding to the performance performed in the introduction part, and the volumes of the various sounds are adjusted.

Specifically, the work process when actually creating various effects in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, images for each effect corresponding to variable times such as SP reach are created in the pachinko gaming machine 1. To match this image, sound effects such as background music, physical sounds, onomatopoeia, sound effects, and dialogue sounds are added one by one using dedicated software. The completed image and sound are played, and the volume of the sound is then adjusted. In this series of work processes, the sound data is set so that, rather than outputting the sound with the same realism as the actual distance on the image, the reality is abandoned and a sound that ignores the actual distance is output, which is easier for the player to understand. This allows the series of effects to be presented in an optimal way.

[Incitement 14]
When the output of an action sound and a dialogue sound corresponding to one character overlap, the volume of the dialogue sound is adjusted so that the volume of the action sound is larger than the volume of the dialogue sound.

Specifically, when the character's physical sound and dialogue sound are outputted in a manner that overlaps with each other, the dialogue sound is adjusted and output so as to be heard louder than the physical sound. For example, when the physical sound and the dialogue sound are output in an overlapping manner, as shown in FIG. 166(B), the BGM of the SP reach is adjusted to be small in accordance with the output period of the dialogue sound. In this way, it is possible to make the content of the performance easier to convey to the players while creating a sense of reality.

[Incitement 15]
When the dialogue sound output of a first character, which is far away, overlaps with the action sound output of a second character, which is close, when viewed from the front of the screen, the volume is adjusted so that the dialogue sound volume is louder than the action sound volume.

Specifically, when the dialogue sound of a character that the player feels is far away overlaps with a physical sound that the player feels is close, the sound data is set so that the dialogue sound sounds louder than the physical sound. This discards realism and outputs sounds that ignore the actual sense of distance that is easily conveyed to the player, making it easier for the player to understand the content of the presentation.

[Instigation 16]
The volume of dialogue sound for which subtitles are not displayed differs between when the output of operation sound and dialogue sound overlaps and subtitles are not displayed, and when the output of operation sound and dialogue sound overlaps and subtitles are displayed. The volume is adjusted so that the volume of the dialogue sound used to display subtitles is louder than that of the subtitles.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 166(B) and (C), there is a difference between the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound has subtitles and the case where the dialogue sound that overlaps with the physical sound does not have subtitles. When there are subtitles, the sound is adjusted to be louder by lowering the volume of SP Reach's BGM. Dialogue sounds with subtitles are more related to the content of SP reach than dialogue sounds without subtitles. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the performance by outputting loud dialogue sounds with subtitles that are related to the content of the SP reach.

[Incitement 17] (2019-1933)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the introductory part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific luminance data table;
In a second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second upper table and a specific luminance data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp at a plurality of mutually different timings by performing lamp control based on the same grandchild table W3 at a plurality of mutually different timings in one child table used in the inciting part. While lighting the frame lamp in yellow, by controlling the lamp to vary the time for referring to the grandchild table W3 between a plurality of mutually different timings, it is possible to change the time for lighting the frame lamp in yellow. As a result, one child table WD9 can be used for lamp control by changing its reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, without having to prepare separate grandchild tables for each of a plurality of mutually different timings. While reducing the data capacity, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp lights up in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. As a result, it is possible to realize various effects (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 18] (2019-1934)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The light emission control means
In a first scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a first upper table and a specific luminance data table;
In a second scene in the introduction part, the light emitting means is controlled using a second upper table and a specific luminance data table;
The specific luminance data table used in the first scene in the introduction part and the specific luminance data table used in the second scene in the introduction part are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period that is shorter than the specific time period.

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the same grandchild table W4 at multiple different timings in one child table used in the promotion part, thereby flashing the frame lamp in white at multiple different timings, while varying the time for which the grandchild table W4 is referenced in the lamp control between the multiple different timings, making it possible to set the number of times the frame lamp flashes in white to two or three times. This makes it possible to vary the number of white flashes while reducing the data capacity used for lamp control by using the common grandchild table W4 but changing the reference time without preparing a separate grandchild table for each of the multiple different timings. As a result, it is possible to achieve a variety of performances (lamp expressions) using frame lamps while reducing data capacity.

[Incitement 19] (2019-1935)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
the first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period longer than the specific time period;
The second higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period longer than the specific time period.

Specifically, child table WD9 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach A, child table WD12 used in the promotion part of SP second half reach B, and child table WD15 used in the promotion part of SP final reach. , instead of preparing separate grandchild tables for each of multiple different timings, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W3, reducing the amount of data used for ramp control in multiple reach effects. At the same time, it is possible to vary the amount of time the frame lamp is lit in yellow, which corresponds to the background of SP Reach. Similarly, for the child table WD2 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach A and the child table WD5 used in the promotion part of SP first half reach B, different grandchild tables should be prepared at each of a plurality of mutually different timings. By changing the reference time while using the common grandchild table W3, the amount of data used for lamp control can be reduced, and the time to light the frame lamp in yellow corresponding to the background of SP reach can be changed. Good too.

[Incitement 20] (2019-1936)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
The upper table includes a first upper table and a second upper table,
The luminance data table includes a specific luminance data table,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
The light emission control means
In one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled by using a first higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
In one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the first notification performance and the specific luminance data table used in one scene of the introduction part in the second notification performance are a common luminance data table,
the specific luminance data table is configured with a plurality of luminance data, and configured so that the total time during which each of the plurality of luminance data is used is a specific time;
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a specific period of time,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table, and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a predetermined time period that is shorter than the specific time period.

[Incitement 21]
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In a specific scene, while a first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, a second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.

Specifically, in the provocative part, as shown in FIG. 178(A), there is a scene in which subtitles are displayed over the lines of a character. When subtitles are displayed, there is a period in which the display period of a first subtitle that is displayed first and the display period of a second subtitle that is displayed next are displayed so as to overlap. When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, a fade effect is applied. The fade effect causes a change in the transparency of the displayed characters to differ. With this, even when the subtitles are displayed so as to overlap, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the change in subtitles.

[Incitement 22]
In a provocative scene where multiple characters confront each other,
When a line sound of one character is output, a first subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed, and thereafter, when a line sound of the other character is output, a second subtitle corresponding to the line sound is displayed;
The second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 50% so as to overlap the portion where the first subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, and thereafter, when the second subtitle is displayed at a transparency of 0%, the display of the first subtitle is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178(A), in a scene where characters confront each other, a first subtitle corresponding to the lines of one character may be displayed, followed by a second subtitle corresponding to the lines of another character. In this case, the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 70% and overlaps the first subtitle displayed with a transparency of 0%. The first subtitle then fades out and the second subtitle fades in, displaying with a transparency of 0%. This makes it easy to tell when the subtitles are switching, due to the fade effect, even when the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other.

[Inciting 23]
The dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is
When the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so as to overlap, and at least one of them has a fade effect, they are not output,
Output when only the second subtitle is displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 179, the output timing of the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle "found" is such that the first subtitle and the second subtitle are displayed so that they overlap, and a fade effect is added. It is not output during the period. Then, the dialogue sound corresponding to the second subtitle is output from when the second subtitle is displayed with a transparency of 0%. According to this, the switching of subtitles is easy to understand due to the fade effect, and since the dialogue sound is output after the second subtitle is displayed, it is possible to easily understand the content of the performance visually and audibly.

[Inciting 24]
In an advantageous state, the music is output and the lyrics are displayed,
When switching from displaying the first subtitle to displaying the second subtitle in lyrics display, no fade effect is applied to the display of any subtitle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), during the jackpot round, a performance in which a character sings along with the music is executed. Then, subtitles (lyrics) are displayed as the song progresses. However, during the jackpot round, no fade effect is applied, even if the subtitles (lyrics) are displayed continuously. This is because, since the progression of the music can be understood from the rhythm while the music is playing, it is easy to understand the timing of the change in the subtitles (lyrics) even if the fade effect is not applied. Also, since the music during the jackpot round is a representative piece of content installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player can easily understand the lyrics to be displayed next even without the fade effect. This makes it possible to omit the task of applying the fade effect during the jackpot round, and makes it possible to show the series of performances clearly.

[Inciting 25]
In both the introduction part and the epilogue part, the character's dialogue sounds may overlap,
The proportion of dialogue sounds that overlap is higher in the introduction part than in the epilogue part.

Specifically, although not shown, there are cases where the timing of subtitle display overlaps even in epilogue parts. However, as shown in FIG. 180, there are many scenes in epilogue parts where the period between subtitle display is longer than in teasing parts. This is because the performance progresses quickly in teasing parts, but not as quickly in epilogue parts. As a result, teasing parts are more likely to be displayed with overlapping subtitle displays than epilogue parts. In such cases, by effectively applying a fade effect to the subtitle display, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity when switching subtitles.

[Incitement 26]
Even in certain scenes where the subtitles do not overlap,
A fade effect is applied when the subtitles are displayed or when the display of the subtitles disappears.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 180, a fade effect is applied to the subtitle display even in predetermined scenes in the portions (o3) to (o5) where the first subtitle and the second subtitle do not overlap. As for the fade effect, at least one of fade-in and fade-out may be applied. In the subtitle display created after the video is created, it is time-consuming to add a fade effect depending on whether the subtitle display overlaps or not. Therefore, by uniformly applying a fade effect to subtitle display, it is possible to prevent the workload from increasing.

[Incitement 27]
The display of the first subtitle without the fade effect and the display of the second subtitle may be switched.
It is possible to provide a blank period in which nothing is displayed between the display of the first subtitle and the display of the second subtitle, but this would create an unnatural feeling when long lines of dialogue or lines with a fast tempo are output, so such a blank period is not provided.

Specifically, FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining a comparative example of subtitle display. For example, as shown in Comparative Example 1 in FIG. 181(A), subtitles for similar lines such as "I found it" and "I found it" may be displayed consecutively. In such a case, if the subtitle display is switched without any fade effect or blank period, it will be difficult to understand the subtitle display switching. Furthermore, when displaying subtitles for long lines or for lines that progress quickly, an unnatural feeling may occur if the subtitles are switched without providing a blank period. In such a case, the sense of discomfort can be eliminated by adding a fade effect to the subtitle display. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 2 in FIG. 181(B), it is also possible to overlay "found" on the subtitle display of "found" and then display "found". In such a case, subtitle display becomes difficult to see by not adding a fade effect. Furthermore, as shown in Comparative Example 3 in FIG. 181(C), it is also possible to display the subtitle display of "I found it" and the subtitle display of "I found it" in two upper and lower rows. In such a case, the subtitle display reduces the area for displaying the effect, which impedes the effect in areas other than the area where the subtitle display is displayed. On the other hand, such a problem can be solved by adding a fade effect to subtitle display as in the present embodiment.

[Inciting cut-in 1]
The display means are
In the introduction part, a promotional display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action, and when the specific action is performed, a cut-in display is performed.
In the introduction part, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle is displayed in a specific area of the display means for the dialogue sound,
At the timing of the promotion display in the introduction part, dialogue subtitles are not displayed in a specific area,
The brightness data table includes a cut-in display brightness data table corresponding to the cut-in display and an introduction part brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
The light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the cut-in display brightness data table includes at least the same location as the light emitting means for which brightness data is set in the introduction part brightness data table.

Specifically, the brightness data of the lamp control in the cut-in effect and the button display for the cut-in effect (RGB data in the grandchild tables W4, W5, and W6) is the same as the lamp control in the inciting part of the SP final reach. Designed to work with spot frame lamps. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary lighting/blinking of lamps from being mixed in and spoiling the aesthetic appearance, and it is possible to provide a suitable performance in the inciting part.

[Provocative cut-in 2]
Dialogue subtitles are displayed in the scene before the button promotion is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 127 (r39) to 128 (r42) described above, at the timing when the cut-in display is executed, the subtitle display is displayed before the promotion display of the button image is displayed. . According to this, the button image can be continuously shown to the player who is watching the screen with attention to the subtitle display, so that the button image can be prevented from being overlooked, and the cut-in display can be suitably executed. Can be done.

[Inciting cut-in 3]
At the timing when the cut-in display ends, the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are not displayed, and after a period in which the dialogue sounds are not output, the dialogue sounds are output and the subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 128 (r41) to FIG. 130 (r47) described above, the design is such that there is no dialogue for a predetermined period after the cut-in display is completed. Then, after a predetermined period of time without dialogue has elapsed, a dialogue is uttered, and subtitles are displayed for the dialogue. According to this, the player can be made to concentrate on the performance during the period after the cut-in display, and a suitable cut-in display can be achieved.

[True or false 1]
In the success/failure reporting part,
The player is informed as to whether or not the game is controlled to be advantageous;
A promotional display is displayed to encourage the player to perform a specific action.
It is executed between the introduction part and the epilogue part,
The movable body moves after the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the scene where the decision was made was between the provocation part and the epilogue part. In the scene of determining whether or not the game is a jackpot, the player is notified of whether or not he or she has won the jackpot by operating a trigger as an operating means. In addition, in the scene of deciding whether to win or not, the accessory was moved after the trigger was operated in case of a jackpot. According to this, the interest of the performance is improved by creating a scene where appropriate decision is made using the operating means.

[True or false 2]
In the success/failure notification part that is executed after the introduction part,
By performing the introductory display of the promotion display while the development display is being performed before the promotion display is performed, the development display becomes invisible, and then the promotion display is performed while the development display is visible. .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r47) to 132 (r54) above, subtitles are displayed by the ally character before the image corresponding to the operating means is displayed, and then the subtitles corresponding to the operating means are displayed. Due to the screen, the performance that was being performed is no longer visible. Then, the performance that was executed after that can be recognized again together with the image of the operating means. According to this, it is possible to give an impact by displaying the introduction of the operation means over the entire screen, and to display the performance that was being executed properly at the timing when the operation means can be operated, so that the progress of the performance can be shown in a suitable manner. .

[True or False 3]
The deployment display is shown behind the introduction display.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 130 (r48) to 131 (r51) described above, introduction images (images (r49) to (r50)) for enabling the operation means are displayed. The production is also in progress. According to this, by allowing the performance to proceed in the background, it is possible to draw attention to the image (image (r51)) in which the operating means can be operated, and also to draw attention to the development of the performance.

[True or false 4]
The expansion display is performed while the promotion display is being performed.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned Figures 132 (r51) to 132 (r54), when a trigger image was displayed as a promotion display, the tail of the Bakuchu image moved slightly each time the image changed. In this way, the performance may be allowed to progress while the promotion display is displayed. Here, the progression of the performance may not be limited to the tail moving, but may also include scene changes or character movements. This makes it possible to draw attention to the development of the performance during the promotion display.

[5 correct or not]
When an unfolding display is performed while a promotion is in progress, it proceeds slower than it did before the promotion was in progress.

Specifically, the presentation that progresses while the prompting display is displayed progresses slower than the presentation that was being executed before the prompting display was displayed. This allows the player to focus on the prompting display, which is intended to cause the player to operate the operating means, and a balance can be achieved between the prompting display and the presentation's progress. Note that the presentation that progresses while the prompting display is displayed can be made to progress slower than the presentation that progresses while the introductory image is displayed. This allows a difference in the speed of presentation progress between when the prompting display is displayed and when the introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 6]
The dialogue before the introductory text is echoed.

Specifically, it is preferable to have an echo added to the lines that are spoken before the introductory image is displayed, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) above. This will get the players excited before the introductory image is displayed.

[True or False 7]
The introduction display is performed after terminating the output of the dialogue sound that was displayed during the development display before the promotion display is performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130 (r47) to FIG. 131 (r49) described above, the introduction image is displayed after the subtitle display before the introduction image is displayed is deleted. According to this, it is possible to prevent the display timings of the introduction image and the subtitle display from overlapping.

[True or false 8]
The introduction part consists of a predetermined period and a slow motion period after the predetermined period and before the success/failure notification.
During a predetermined period, the movement of the character is depicted using a plurality of image data,
During the slow motion period, an effect is added to one piece of image data to depict the movement of the character.

Specifically, the scene before the determination of the validity of (r48) in the provocation part is a slow motion period in which the movement of the video is slowed down. In addition, the production executed before (r48) depicts the character's movement from multiple image data, whereas the production executed in (r48) depicts the image of Bakuchu and the six allies. It is executed using images. Then, the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character are gradually enlarged and displayed over time to make it appear as if the characters are moving. Here, if a video is created using the same amount of image data during the slow motion period as during the non-slow motion periods, the amount of data will be small and the motion will be awkward. On the other hand, if a large amount of data is used to smooth the movement during the slow motion period, the capacity will become too large. Therefore, the data capacity can be reduced by reducing the number of images used in the slow motion period and by switching and enlarging the display to make it appear as if the character is moving. Note that the number of images used in the slow-motion period may be any number as long as it is smaller than in the periods other than the slow-motion period.

[True or False 9]
The game has an introductory part where friendly and enemy characters appear, and a conclusion part after the introductory part.
The introduction section has a set period of time during which scenes showing allies and enemies alternate.
When the prompting display is being displayed during a predetermined period, the player can move on to the conclusion part,
During a predetermined period of time, the speed at which the scenes displaying the ally and the scenes displaying the enemy alternate is gradually increased, and the promotion display is performed when the speed reaches its fastest;
Even in depictions in which scenes showing allies and scenes showing enemies alternate, each of the allies and enemies is reproduced using a single image data.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the image switching speed between the image of the friendly character and the image of the enemy character gradually becomes faster. According to this, a promotion display prompting the trigger operation will be displayed after the image switching speed becomes the fastest, so a scene will develop where the friendly character has an advantage, or the enemy character will have an advantage. It becomes possible to stimulate the development of the game, increasing interest. Furthermore, by alternately switching images, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that one image is used for each of the friendly character and the enemy character.

[True or false 10]
The above-mentioned predetermined period in which scenes in which allies are displayed and scenes in which enemies are displayed are alternately applied to scenes in which a reach effect develops from one reach effect to another reach effect.

Specifically, the slow motion period in (r48) may be performed at the timing when the SP first half reach develops into the SP second half reach, or into the SP final reach. This allows the performance to be performed appropriately even when developing from the SP first half reach.

[True or false 11]
The enemy character is depicted using a plurality of image data in order to change a part of the enemy character, but the image data of the enemy character itself is used and only the part is changed.

Specifically, in the slow motion period in (r48), at least one of the ally character and the enemy character may be configured using two or more images. For example, if it is an ally character, you can make it look like the character's hair and clothes are gradually moving by repeatedly using four images: image 1, image 2, image 3, image 4, image 1... good. According to this, by reusing the data of the character itself and changing only part of the data, it is possible to more faithfully represent the movement of the character while reducing the amount of work required to change the data.

[True or False 12]
During the slow motion periods, parts of the characters change.

Specifically, during the slow-motion period in (r48), when a character's hair or clothes are made to appear to move gradually from multiple images, the movement of the hair or clothes may be designed to appear to move at the same speed as during periods other than the slow-motion period. Here, if the number of images is increased to match the slow-motion movements in order to make the movements appear smoother during the slow-motion period, the capacity will increase. However, by speeding up the movements during the slow-motion period, the movements do not become awkward even if fewer images are used, and the movement can be more faithfully represented while reducing the data capacity.

[True or false 13]
In the period before moving from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the first notification performance,
The display means performs a promotion display to encourage a specific action by the player;
The sound output means continues to output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the first notification effect brightness data table,
In the period before the transition from the introduction part to the success/failure notification part in the second notification performance,
The display means does not display a promotion display that prompts a specific action, but displays a display that encourages correctness or disapproval.
The sound output means does not output sound,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using the second notification effect brightness data table,
The first notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data changes,
The second notification effect brightness data table is configured so that the brightness data does not change.

Specifically, in the SP reach effect where no operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in the win/fail branch, by muting the sound and keeping the frame lamp lit in white, the effect appears as if the effect has stopped. The performance can be shown to the player, and the win/fail branch (timing of decision) can be clearly communicated to the player. On the other hand, in the SP reach performance in which operation promotion is performed to encourage the player to perform an operation in a win/fail situation, a sound corresponding to the operation promotion and a sound (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and furthermore, the operation promotion By switching and using the grandchild table multiple times in order to control the frame lamp so as to have a mode corresponding to the frame lamp, it is possible to suitably produce the timing for deciding whether or not to make a decision based on the lighting mode of the frame lamp. In this way, the timing for deciding whether to decide whether to decide whether to decide whether or not to win can be suitably produced by using different sound control and lamp control depending on whether operation promotion is not performed or when operation is encouraged in the case of whether or not the decision is made.

[True or False 14]
When the promotion display is not performed, the display transitions in the order of a first display period consisting of a moving image, a second display period consisting of a still image, and a third display period consisting of a moving image that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from the aforementioned Fig. 95 (i36) to Fig. 96 (i39), the image in which the two characters Yume Yume-chan and Jam-chan are displayed is gradually enlarged, and at the timing of (i39), one image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time. After that, if there is a big win, the video of the hit epilogue part is played, and if there is a loss, the video of the loss epilogue part is played. During the period in which one image is displayed still for a predetermined period of time, one image can be reused, so that the data capacity can be reduced while favorably stirring up the scene of the win/loss decision. Note that during the period in which the image in which the two characters are displayed is gradually enlarged, more images (for example, 10 images) may be used as shown in Fig. 95 (i36) to Fig. 96 (i39).

[True or false 15]
The scenario for controlling the light emitting means using brightness data when no promotional display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period;
There is a third scenario corresponding to the third display period,
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which predetermined brightness data is maintained,
The third scenario is a scenario in which multiple pieces of brightness data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD9 in SP latter half Reach A, which is a reach without operation prompting, the frame lamp flashes in white based on grandchild table W7, and then lights up in white based on grandchild table W8. Specifically, in the win/loss branch in the teasing part of SP latter half Reach A where no operation prompting is performed, the brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W8 is designed to use "FDC" (white lighting), which is the last brightness data (RGB data) of grandchild table W7, so that the win/loss branch (decisive timing) can be communicated to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without increasing the data capacity used for lamp control too much.

[True or False 16]
When the promotion display is performed, the display transitions in the following order: a first display period in which an introductory display is performed before the promotion display is performed, a second display period consisting of moving images, and a third display period consisting of moving images that branches depending on whether the display is correct or not.

Specifically, from FIG. 131 (r49) to FIG. 132 (r54) described above, the display period of the introduction image is such that the images corresponding to the stick controller 31A (trigger) are gathered in the center of the screen. be. After that, there is a period in which a prompt to operate the trigger is displayed. During the display period of the promotion display, a plurality of images are gradually moved to make it appear as if the character is moving. Thereafter, by operating the trigger at a branching scene to determine whether the game is successful or not, if it is a jackpot, the video of the winning epilogue part will be played, and if it is a loss, the video of the losing epilogue part will be played. All of these periods are periods in which the video is dynamically displayed so that it appears to be moving. According to this, a series of performances can be executed in a dynamic flow, and a suitable flow of performances can be achieved.

[True or False 17]
A scenario for controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data when the promotion display is performed is as follows:
a first scenario corresponding to a first display period;
a second scenario corresponding to a second display period; and
a third scenario corresponding to a third display period;
The first scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched,
The second scenario is a scenario in which multiple luminance data are switched.
The third scenario is a scenario in which a plurality of luminance data are switched.

Specifically, in child table WD15 in the SP final reach, as shown in Figure 131 (r49) to Figure 132 (r54), sounds corresponding to operation promotion and sounds (BGM) corresponding to the reach are output, and the frame lamps change in sequence from flashing white to lit red to flashing red, etc., enhancing the presentation of operations to encourage the player at the winning/losing branch (decisive timing).

[True or false 18]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it is determined that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state, a display indicating that the vehicle will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed, and then a display corresponding to the normal background is displayed.

Specifically, the winning epilogue part and the losing epilogue part after the success/failure determination scenes shown in FIG. 133 (s1) to FIG. 136 (s10) and FIG. 137 (u1) to FIG. 138 (u4) described above will be explained. In the winning epilogue part, a video corresponding to the winning epilogue part is played after the performance of the character's action. Also, in the lose-lose epilogue part, the screen turns black after the effect corresponding to the lose-lose epilogue part, and then returns to the normal screen. According to this, since the flow is such that a plurality of images are switched after the scene where the decision is made, a suitable flow of presentation can be achieved.

[True or false 19] (2019-1937)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In the introduction part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the introduction part,
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part is set lower in luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 261, when the player moves to the miss epilogue part via the teasing part in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part is "FDC", while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". As a result, when the player loses in each of the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the frame lamp can be lit in white more dimly while maintaining the same color by utilizing the white lighting in the win/lose branch, so that the player can be appropriately notified that the player has lost. Also, when the player moves to the miss epilogue part via the teasing part in the SP final reach, the final brightness data (RGB data) in the teasing part includes "D00", while the initial brightness data (RGB data) in the miss epilogue part is "888" or "444". This allows the frame lamp to light up in white when the SP final reach is lost, which is dimmer than the red flashing that occurs during a win/loss branch, allowing the player to be appropriately notified that they have lost.

[Yes or No 20] (2019-1938)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance, and the first notification performance for notifying the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part for notifying the fact that the control will be made to the advantageous state,
The first notification performance for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
The second notification performance for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and an epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means by using a luminance data table configured with luminance data in accordance with time data set in a higher-level table;
the upper level table includes a first upper level table, a second upper level table, a third upper level table, and a fourth upper level table;
The luminance data table includes a luminance data table for a first notification performance, a luminance data table for a second notification performance, and a specific luminance data table,
The light emission control means
In an introduction part of a first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a first higher level table and a brightness data table for the first notification performance;
In an introduction part of a second notification performance for notifying that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a second higher level table and a second notification performance brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the first notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a third higher-level table and a specific brightness data table;
In an epilogue part of the second notification performance for notifying that the advantageous state is not being controlled, the light emitting means is controlled using a fourth higher level table and a specific brightness data table;
The specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the first notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved and the specific brightness data table used in the epilogue part in the second notification performance for notifying the user that the advantageous state will not be achieved are a common brightness data table.
The third higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a first time period,
The fourth higher level table is made up of storage destination data of the specific luminance data table and time data for using the specific luminance data table for a second time period different from the first time period.

Specifically, child table WD4 of SP first half reach A, child table WD7 of SP first half reach B, child table WD11 of SP second half reach A, and child table WD14 of SP second half reach B are also child tables of SP final reach. Similar to WD17, the frame lamp is lit in the lighting mode when a loss occurs based on the grandchild table W14. However, in the SP first half reach A, B and SP second half reach A, B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the frame lamp for 5800 msec based on the grandchild table W14, whereas in the SP final reach, it controls the frame lamp for 3900 msec. During this time, the frame lamp is controlled based on the grandchild table W14. In this way, while the grandchild table used for ramp control in the event of a loss is common among a plurality of different reaches, the time for performing ramp control with reference to the grandchild table can be made different. As a result, in the child table used in each of the different reaches, the reference time can be changed while using the common grandchild table W4 without having to prepare a grandchild table for use in case of a loss in each of the different reaches. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of data used for lamp control and to vary the length of time the frame lamp is lit depending on the lighting mode corresponding to the failure. As a result, it is possible to notify the player of a loss in a suitable manner for each of the plurality of reaches.

[True or false 21] (2019-1939)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state is as follows:
a first pattern including an introduction part in which it is reported whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state; and a first epilogue part in which it is reported that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
An introduction part until it is notified whether or not the control is to be in the advantageous state, a second epilogue part in which it is notified that the control is not in the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part that is executed after the second epilogue part and is executed in the advantageous state. a second pattern including a relief notification part in which it is notified that the control will be performed;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The light emission control means includes:
In a second epilogue part in the second pattern notification effect, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part,
In the relief notification part of the notification performance of the second pattern, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part;
The brightness data used first in the brightness data table corresponding to the relief notification part is set higher in brightness than the brightness data used last in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

[Loss 1]
As a flow from the success/failure notification part,
When it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state, an image of the situation where it has been determined that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state is displayed, and a decorative pattern notifies the user of the decision that the game will not be controlled into an advantageous state. When the epilogue part is executed,
After that, a switching display is performed, and the image is switched to an image corresponding to the background at the start of the reach.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 188, if the game is a loss after the determination of success or failure, a loss symbol is displayed during the blackout background in the loss epilogue part. After that, a switching image based on the eye-catching screen is displayed, and then the screen switches to the normal background at the start of the reach. According to this, by using the eye-catching screen, it is possible to suitably show the switching of the screen in the event of a loss.

[Loss 2]
In the epilogue part at the time of loss, the image when it has been determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state is displayed in blackout, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed in fade-in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the loss epilogue part, the background at the time of loss gradually blacks out, and the middle symbol gradually fades in. According to this, since the image at the time of a loss and the middle symbol are displayed in inverse proportion to each other due to the relationship between blackout and fade-in, the display at the time of a loss can be made to look suitable due to the relationship between the two.

[Loser 3] (2020-400)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
the display means displays a decorative pattern in the second epilogue part so as to become gradually clearer, and displays a display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part so as to become gradually darker, thereby displaying a notification that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
The number of stages by which the display in the story development corresponding to the second epilogue part is made darker is greater than the number of stages by which the decorative pattern is made clearer.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, in the losing epilogue part, the number of steps required to black out the background when losing from 100% to 0% transparency is greater than the number of steps required to fade in the center pattern from 100% to 0% transparency. Specifically, the background is blacked out in eight steps from (X11) to (X18), while the center pattern is faded in in six steps from (X12) to (X17). In this way, the image and center pattern when losing are displayed in inverse proportion to the relationship between the blackout and fade-in, and because the number of steps of the change in transparency are different, the relationship between the two makes the display when losing look favorable.

[Loss 4]
When it is determined that the game will not be controlled to an advantageous state, the image is blacked out before the center pattern of the decorative pattern is faded in.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 189, when a winning combination is lost, the background blacks out before the center pattern fades in. This allows the image and center pattern when a winning combination is lost to be displayed in inverse proportion to the blackout and fade-in relationship, and because the blackout is faster than the pattern fades in, the relationship between the two makes the display when a winning combination is lost look favorable.

[Loss 5]
When it is determined that the image will not be controlled to the advantageous state before blackout, the cut of the displayed image will change,
When it is determined that the image will not be controlled in an advantageous state for blackout, the cut of the displayed image does not change.

Specifically, the image displayed during a miss before the blackout changes, whereas the image displayed during the blackout remains unchanged. This allows the blackout to be viewed favorably by starting the blackout with an image that remains unchanged. Note that a change in image includes a change in the picture on the screen, a change in the angle of the image, and a change in the displayed scene itself. Furthermore, no change in the image includes the same still image, or even if it is a moving image, the angle of the image does not change, and even if there is movement, only a portion of the image moves very slightly.

[Loss 6]
The image when it is determined that it will not be controlled in an advantageous state blacks out, and the middle symbol of the decorative symbol fades in. As a result, the transmittance of the middle symbol becomes 0%, and the 1 required for blackout. The period in which the transmittance of each image is 0% is maintained for a predetermined period,
During a predetermined period, the pattern itself oscillates for at least two cycles,
The predetermined period is longer than the period during which the medium symbol image changes from a state of 100% transmittance to a state of 0% transmittance, and longer than a period during which switching display is performed.

Specifically, at the time of a loss, the background blacked out and the medium symbol faded in, resulting in a medium symbol with a transmittance of 0%, as shown in (X18) to (X20). A blacked-out background with a transmittance of 0% is displayed for a predetermined period of time. This predetermined period includes symbol fluctuation periods as shown in (X19) to (X20). The symbol shaking period may be such that the symbol oscillates repeatedly for at least two cycles, with one cycle being the period in which the middle symbol is moved from the center position to the upper position, the center position, the lower position, and the center position. The predetermined period including such a period may be set longer than the period during which the fade-in of the medium symbol changes from 100% transmittance to 0% transmittance. Further, the predetermined period may be set longer than the period during which the eye catch is displayed. According to this, in a display in which the background is blacked out with a transmittance of 0%, there is a predetermined period in which the middle symbol is displayed in a clear state, so that it is possible to suitably show that the player has lost.

[Lose 7]
The switching display is a display configured to include information regarding the gaming machine.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, on the eye-catching screen, information about the pachinko machine 1 includes the title "POWER FULII" and the main characters Yume-chan, Jam-chan, and Nana-chan. The image will be displayed. According to this, information about the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be accurately conveyed using the eye-catching image.

[Loser 8]
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of the game is notified, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the fact that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the result of the game is notified, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state after the result of the game is notified,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to an advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means includes:
in the second epilogue part, controlling a light-emitting means for effecting the performance by using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
When the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, thereby controlling the light-emitting means for the effect;
When the background display is performed, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display, and the light emitting means for the effect is controlled;
When the stop display of the pattern is performed, the luminance data table is switched to the luminance data table for the fourth pattern stop to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance;
When the variable display of the patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table for the fourth pattern variation to control the light emitting means for the fourth pattern, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background display is continuously used to control the light emitting means for the performance.

Specifically, the characteristic parts of the detailed explanatory diagram of the game effect lamp 9 at the time of losing will be explained. The production screen will be switched to the image of the loss after the performance of the success/fail decision. Thereafter, after a blackout display in which the losing display result is displayed, the screen is switched to an eye-catching screen. Furthermore, after that, a screen is displayed in which the symbols are fixed and stopped after switching to the normal screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table at the time of success/failure determination to the brightness data table at the time of loss. Thereafter, the display is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, after that, the table is switched to the background luminance data table at the start of the fluctuation. Here, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to a brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). Furthermore, the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table at the timing when the screen is switched to the normal screen. The special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from blinking to off upon reception of the symbol confirmation command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. Further, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from off to blinking upon reception of the next variation variation pattern command, but the background brightness data table is not switched even upon reception of the symbol confirmation command. According to this, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background when the eye-catching screen ends, and that brightness data table is continued until the next change, so the brightness data table corresponding to the reception of the symbol confirmation command There is no need to create a separate performance, and the performance by the lamp can be shown without any discomfort from the performance at the time of loss to the next change, and a series of performances can be suitably shown.

[Loss 9]
The brightness data table corresponding to the background at the start of reach is a loop that references brightness data until the change conditions are met.
In the introduction part, the brightness data corresponding to the background is not used, but the brightness data corresponding to the background is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52, when a specific change condition is met, such as when the game progresses to an SP reach, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach or other performance after the change, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table is performed. In this case, while the SP reach performance is being performed, in the background of the lamp control based on the SP reach brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. Also, when a specific change condition is met, such as when an error occurs, the lamp control based on the background brightness data table is switched to the error brightness data table corresponding to the error state, and thereafter, the lamp control based on the error brightness data table is performed. In this case, in the error state, in the background of the lamp control based on the error brightness data table, the switching of the brightness data in the background brightness data table continues without stopping as time passes. This makes the series of performances being performed look more suitable.

[Loser 10]
After being switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part, the luminance data table corresponding to the background is used even if a pattern determination command is received, and thereafter, when there is no reserved ball, the luminance data table corresponding to the background continues to be used even if a customer waiting command is received.

Specifically, after the brightness data table is switched to the background brightness data table when the eye-catching screen ends, the background brightness data table continues to be used even if there is no pending memory and a customer waiting demo designation command is received. This allows the same brightness data table to be used continuously after switching to the background brightness data table, so the lamp effects can be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and the series of effects can be displayed optimally.

[Loser 11]
When the pattern is confirmed, the light emitting means of the special pattern stops,
Upon receiving the symbol determination command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol changes from blinking to off.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 switches from flashing to off when a symbol determination command is received, which is the trigger for the effect of the symbol being determined and stopped. This makes it possible to clearly show the player the flow of the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 when it loses.

[Loss 12]
When the next change starts, the light emitting means of the special figure will blink,
By receiving the next variation command, the light emitting means for the fourth symbol switches from extinguished to blinking.

Specifically, the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50 is switched from extinguished to blinking upon reception of a variation pattern command for the next variation, which is a trigger for starting the next variation. According to this, regarding the special symbol variable display of the fourth symbol unit 50, the flow when losing can be clearly shown to the player.

[Loser 13] (2020-401)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
After that, the display of the pattern changes in response to the change command.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
when the background display is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the stop display of the symbols is performed, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is continuously used to control the light emitting means;
When the varying display of the patterns is started, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the varying display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the varying display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 190, the luminance data table at the time of loss is used from (X40) where six ally characters are disappointed to (X41) where the background image is blacked out. . The featured image is displayed after the background image is blacked out. A brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used from the switching period to the eye-catching screen (X42) to the symbol confirmation period (X45). Thereafter, when a variation pattern command for when there is suspension is received, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for the background. In other words, at the timing of switching to the eye-catching screen, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching), and that brightness data table is maintained during the symbol confirmation period, and at the timing of switching to the next variation, the brightness data table is switched to the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching). can be switched to the brightness data table. Further, in the symbol determination period, the final brightness data of the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is used. According to this, after switching to the background brightness data table, the final brightness data of the switching (eye-catching) brightness data table is maintained until the next fluctuation pattern command is received, so it is a loss. As a result, losses can be shown in an appropriate manner.

[Loser 14]
The final luminance data is off data, and the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part does not include luminance data for maintaining the light off.

Specifically, the final brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is data that is maintained when the light is turned off. The background brightness data table does not use data for keeping the lights off. According to this, the brightness data table for the background does not use brightness data for keeping the lights off, so the fact that the lights are off when the background is displayed is a characteristic of losing, so This can make it easier to recognize that

[Loser 15]
By receiving the customer waiting command, the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the customer waiting command.

Specifically, if there is no pending memory after the symbol is confirmed, the brightness data table for switching (for eye catching) is switched to the brightness data table for background by receiving a customer waiting designation command. According to this, when the customer waiting designation command is received, the brightness data table for the background is switched to, so that it is possible to easily recognize that there was a loss.

[Loser 16] (2020-402)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the user is informed of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part for notifying the user that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification performance for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled includes an introduction part until the fact that the advantageous state will be controlled is notified, and a second epilogue part for notifying the fact that the advantageous state will not be controlled,
The display means is
In the second epilogue part, a display is made to inform the player that the game is not controlled to the advantageous state;
After that, the display will be switched,
Then, display the background.
After that, the pattern is displayed in a stopped state when the pattern confirmation command is issued.
The light emission control means
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
when the display is switched, the luminance data table is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the display is switched;
switching the luminance data table to a luminance data table corresponding to the background display when the background display is performed, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the background display;
The luminance data used first in the luminance data table corresponding to the switch display is set to a higher luminance than the luminance data used last in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part.

Specifically, the first brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (for eye-catching) is higher than the final brightness data (off) in the brightness data table before displaying the eye-catching image (when the eye-catching image is lost). It has become. According to this, the game effect lamp 9 can be made to emit light at a higher brightness than before switching to the eye-catching screen, so that the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9 make it easier to recognize the change.

[Loser 17]
The initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the switching display is set to a higher luminance than the initial luminance data of the luminance data table corresponding to the background at the start of the introductory part.

Specifically, the initial brightness data in the brightness data table for switching (eye-catching) is brighter than the initial brightness data in the brightness data table (not including turning off) that corresponds to the background at the start of the change. This allows the game effect lamp 9 to be illuminated at a high brightness when switching to the eye-catching screen, making it easy to recognize the switch by the eye-catching screen and the game effect lamp 9.

[Role-player Action 1] (2019-1940)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
In a first epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be performed in the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be performed to the advantageous state, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 262 and Fig. 263, in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamps are smoothly lit in rainbow colors based on the grandchild table W1, and the RGB data switches at 30 msec intervals. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 261, in the case of a loss, the frame lamps are lit in dimmer white based on the grandchild table W14, and the RGB data switches at 250 msec intervals, which is longer than when there is a win. As a result, when there is a win, the lighting color of the frame lamps switches at shorter intervals than when there is a loss, so that it is possible to easily inform the player that there is a win by the lighting mode of the frame lamps. Furthermore, when there is a win, the lighting of the frame lamps is more emphasized than when there is a loss, while when there is a loss, the lighting of the frame lamps can be made more subdued than when there is a win, and as a result, it is possible to easily inform the player of a win or a loss by the contrasting lamp modes.

[Accessory action 2] (2019-1941)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part after the notification is made when the control is made to be in the advantageous state. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 263, in the epilogue part of the SP final reach, in the performance where the reel falls, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W20, and the frame lamp is lit so that the rainbow chromatic colors and the achromatic colors (RGB data of "333") alternate. This allows for a performance where the achromatic colors are occasionally inserted between the rainbow chromatic colors to emphasize the big win and congratulate the player. After that, in the performance where the ally character wins, the frame lamp is lamp-controlled based on the grandchild table W21, and the frame lamp is lit in smooth rainbow colors without achromatic colors, allowing for a performance where the player is calmly congratulated on the big win. As a result, the performance in the epilogue part of the SP final reach can be viewed favorably by the player.

[Epilogue 1]
The epilogue part is the blessing part after the decision to control the advantageous state is announced, and there is a scene where the enemy character is defeated, there is no scene where the ally character takes damage, and the number of display changes is the introduction part. There are fewer parts.

Specifically, the aforementioned winning epilogue part is a part that does not transition in the event of a miss, and is a part that contains scenes in which enemy characters are at a disadvantage and scenes in which ally characters are at an advantage. Also, in the winning epilogue part, the number of image display switches in the presentation is less than in the teasing part. This allows appropriate presentation to be executed in each part, and the flow of the series of presentations can be displayed in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 2]
In the epilogue part, the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for the lines of the character in the introduction part.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, the rate at which subtitles are displayed for the lines of characters in the epilogue part is higher than the rate at which subtitles are displayed for characters in the SP reach, which is the teasing part. By clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying. Furthermore, in a successful epilogue part, subtitles can enhance the feeling of celebration. Furthermore, since there are more screen changes in the teasing part than in the epilogue part, even if subtitles are displayed, the display time may be shorter, which prevents the auxiliary subtitle display from interfering with the performance, and the primary focus can be on conveying the performance through image changes. This allows for an optimal performance to be executed in the teasing part.

[Epilogue 3]
In the epilogue part, dialogue subtitles are always displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, subtitles are always displayed for the dialogue in the epilogue part. This makes it easy to see what the characters are saying in the epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 4]
In the introductory part, when the dialogue sound is output in the scene where the enemy character takes damage, the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
In the epilogue part, if dialogue sounds are output in a scene where an enemy character takes damage, dialogue subtitles are displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104 (n10) above, subtitles are not displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in the teasing part where the enemy character receives damage. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 110 (o1), subtitles are displayed for the lines of the enemy character in the scene in the winning epilogue part where the enemy character receives damage (the crab catching scene). In this way, subtitles that were not displayed in the teasing part are displayed in the winning epilogue part, emphasizing the sense of celebration.

[Epilogue 5]
There is a first introduction part and a second introduction part, and each has a different development and number of lines, but in the epilogue part, the ratio of dialogue subtitles to the character's dialogue sound output is different from that in the introduction part. This is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed relative to the character's dialogue sound output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175, there are a plurality of types of SP reaches, which are inciting parts, and each type has a different production development and a different number of lines. However, in any SP reach, the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters' lines in the epilogue part is higher than the proportion of subtitles displayed for characters in SP reach. According to this, by clearly displaying subtitles in the epilogue part no matter which SP reach is executed, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying. Also, in the winning epilogue part, subtitles can be used to create a feeling of blessing. Also, in the inciting part, there are more screen changes than in the epilogue part, so the primary purpose is to convey the effect through image switching, and the auxiliary subtitles can be displayed to prevent the effect from interfering with the effect. . Thereby, a suitable performance can be performed in the inciting part.

[Epilogue 6]
The dialogue subtitles that are finally displayed in the epilogue part are displayed longer than the dialogue subtitles with the same number of characters that are displayed in other scenes.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 134 (s5) to (s6) described above, the subtitle display displayed in the winning epilogue part is designed to be displayed for a longer period than the subtitle display displayed in the provocation part. ing. According to this, by displaying the subtitles in the final winning epilogue part for a long period of time, it is possible to immerse the player in the afterglow of the jackpot and emphasize the feeling of celebration. Note that when displaying subtitles, a subtitle with a large number of characters may be displayed for a longer time than a subtitle with a small number of characters. Even in such a case, if the same number of subtitles (for example, 5 characters) are displayed in the winning epilogue part and the provocation part, the subtitle display period will be longer for the winning epilogue part. It should be designed like this.

[Epilogue 7]
When the movable body is in the advanced position, the background display for the movable body is displayed,
The movable body moves according to an evacuation pattern in which the movable body retreats, and the background display for the movable body is switched to an epilogue display by the time the evacuation pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, an effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory object is displayed in accordance with the action of the accessory object falling. Thereafter, the accessory moves to the initial position according to a predetermined retreat pattern. While the accessory is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory to the screen corresponding to the epilogue part of the SP final reach. Here, the effect image corresponding to the action of the accessory is displayed on the premise that the accessory is in a position superimposed on the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the accessory returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the SP first half reach before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented.

[Epilogue 8]
The deformed member performs a storage operation and a return operation,
The timing of switching to the epilogue display is linked to the start timing of the return operation.

Specifically, it is assumed that the accessory performs an action to return to its initial position, and the timing at which the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue is the timing during the rise, which is related to the timing at which the return action starts. According to this, since the display is switched to the one corresponding to the epilogue at a timing related to the start of the return motion, the display of the effect image corresponding to the accessory motion ends before the accessory returns to the initial position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation where the effect image is displayed when the accessory returns to its initial position, and the aesthetic appearance of the performance is not spoiled. Note that the timing of switching to the display corresponding to the epilogue may be the same timing as the timing when the accessory starts to rise. Furthermore, the accessory may perform a rotating motion or a moving motion at the falling position.

[Epilogue 9]
During the return operation, the light emitting means of the movable body fades out and approaches extinguishing.

Specifically, when the accessory rises, the performance control CPU 120 adjusts the role based on the child table corresponding to the raising motion of the accessory on the accessory lamp 9A and the grandchild table specified by the child table. The brightness of the accessory lamp 9A is gradually lowered so that the object lamp 9A is gradually turned off. As a result, the lighting mode of the accessory lamp 9A does not make the player aware that the accessory is going up, while the lighting mode of the frame lamp allows the screen to indicate that the SP has reached reach A in the second half. This can draw the attention of players.

[Epilogue 10]
The change is suggested by BGM linked to the image corresponding to the epilogue,
BGM is output in conjunction with the start of epilogue display.

Specifically, the BGM corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part can be suggested by the BGM, allowing the epilogue part to start in an optimal manner.

[Epilogue 11]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, a sound effect indicating the change is output.

Specifically, the sound effect corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the accessory returning to its initial position and the display corresponding to the epilogue being started. According to this, the epilogue part can be suitably started by suggesting the start of the epilogue part with the sound effect.

[Epilogue 12]
In conjunction with the start of the epilogue display, background music and a sound effect indicating a change are output.

Specifically, background music and sound effects corresponding to the epilogue part may be output in conjunction with the return of the reel to its initial position and the start of the display corresponding to the epilogue. In this way, the start of the epilogue part is indicated by the background music and sound effects, allowing the epilogue part to start in an optimal manner.

[Epilogue 13]
In the epilogue display during the return movement of the movable body, no dialogue sound is output,
In the epilogue display after the movable body is retracted, a dialogue sound is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, in a situation where the accessory returns to its initial position and a display corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the dialogue sound is not output, and the dialogue sound is not output in the epilogue display after the accessory returns to the initial position. All you have to do is display subtitles while outputting. According to this, it is possible to avoid displaying the subtitles at a timing when the subtitles are difficult to see, and it is possible to suitably execute the epilogue part.

[Epilogue 14]
A dialogue sound is output when the moving object is retracted.
At the timing when the retraction of the movable body is completed, a dialogue sound is outputted, and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is displayed.

Specifically, when the props return to their initial positions, the dialogue sound is output in the epilogue display and subtitles are displayed. This allows the dialogue to be clearly recognized, and the epilogue part can be executed smoothly.

[Epilogue 15]
The display of the dialogue subtitles corresponding to the dialogue sounds output at the end of the epilogue part ends at the timing when the pattern output starts.

Specifically, as shown in the above-mentioned Figures 134 (s6) to 135 (s8), the final subtitle display for the final line in the winning epilogue part is designed to be erased before the pattern presentation is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the subtitle display from overlapping with the decorative pattern and from being mistaken for a message in the pattern presentation. This makes it possible to present the presentation in the winning epilogue part in an optimal way.

[Epilogue 17]
The video that was played during the epilogue becomes a still image when the symbols are finally displayed and the player recognizes the final completed symbols.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the symbol presentation is complete and the player is able to recognize the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol and the characters and other images displayed as the background are still images. This prevents the decorative symbol from becoming difficult to see because the background to the decorative symbol is a moving image.

[Epilogue 18]
The video that is played before the drawing of the symbols begins is taken as a still image.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) described above, the video that was being played in the winning epilogue part becomes a still image at a timing before the symbol appearance is executed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the symbols from becoming difficult to see from the timing of the start of symbol display.

[Epilogue 19]
Special effects are added while standing still.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135 (s7) above, the still image displayed in the winning epilogue part has a special aspect reminiscent of a comic strip. By adding a special effect to the still image, it is possible to emphasize that the image has stopped and to suggest that the scene has changed, making it a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 20] (2019-1931)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect display while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 173 to Fig. 174, the appearance of the performance is switched to the winning epilogue part by the movement of the reel from the scene before the winning or losing decision in the instigation part. Also, an effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed according to the action of the reel falling. After that, while the reel is rising, the display gradually switches from the effect image corresponding to the reel action to the screen corresponding to the winning epilogue part of the SP final reach. Also, while the reel is rising, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the reel action to the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part. Also, while the reel is rising, a sound corresponding to the winning epilogue part is output. Also, during the background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part displayed from (s3-5) to (s3-8) until the reel changes to the initial position, no dialogue sound is output. After that, in the state (s4) where the movement of the reel to the initial position is completed and the display of the effect image is finished, the dialogue sound is output and the subtitle display is displayed. Here, the effect image corresponding to the reel action is displayed on the assumption that the reel is in a position where it overlaps the screen. However, if the effect image is displayed until the reel returns to its initial position, the display will not look good. Therefore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the winning epilogue part before the reel completes its return to its initial position, the aesthetics of the display can be prevented from being marred. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the winning epilogue part while the reel is rising, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately. Furthermore, since the subtitles are displayed after the return to the initial position is completed, the winning epilogue part can be displayed appropriately.

[Epilogue 21] (2019-1932)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
In the introduction part, the first scene displays dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sounds uttered by the character,
In the epilogue part, a second scene in which a final dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to the final dialogue sound emitted by the character, and then, after the display of the final dialogue subtitle is finished, a decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area; There is,
A switching effect is not applied when the display of the final dialogue subtitles ends in the second scene, while a switching effect is applied when the display of the dialogue subtitles ends in the first scene.

[Epilogue 22]
When the pattern is displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, so that the effect does not interfere with the visibility of the small pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) described above, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed during the pattern presentation. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect image regarding the decorative symbols, and to make it possible to recognize that the small symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, making it possible to provide a suitable winning epilogue part.

[Epilogue 23]
When drawing out a pattern, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern are displayed.
The movement of the decorative pattern and the small pattern are synchronized at the timing when the pattern display of the decorative pattern ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, both the decorative and small patterns are displayed during the pattern presentation. Here, the movement of the decorative and small patterns may be synchronized at the timing when the presentation of the decorative patterns ends. Specifically, during the pattern swing period when the presentation of the decorative patterns ends and the patterns are swinging up and down, the small patterns may also swing up and down in the same manner as the decorative patterns. In this way, by synchronizing the movements of the decorative and small patterns, the flow of the presentation in the winning epilogue part can be made to look good.

[Epilogue 24]
When the symbols are drawn in the re-draw part, both the decorative symbols and the small symbols are displayed.
Although an effect is applied to the decorative pattern, the display layer of the small pattern is displayed with priority, so that the effect does not interfere with the visibility of the small pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, both decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed during the presentation of symbols in the re-lottery part. An effect image of saturated lines is added to the decorative pattern, but no effect image is added to the small pattern. Furthermore, the decorative pattern has a higher priority than the decorative pattern and the effect image and is displayed on the near side. According to this, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the effect image regarding the decorative pattern, while making it possible to recognize that the small pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

[Epilogue 25]
Before the re-drawing part, the small symbols are determined to be controlled in an advantageous state, and in conjunction with the transition to the re-drawing part, the small symbols change again.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 136 (s10) above, when the patterns are displayed, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may be displayed in a aligned state. Then, in conjunction with the transition to the re-selection part, both the decorative pattern and the small pattern may change again. This allows the decorative pattern and the small pattern to be synchronized for an optimal display.

[Epilogue 26] (2019-1942)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a higher-level table configured with storage destination data indicating a storage destination of a luminance data table and a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The epilogue part is,
A first scene in which a story development corresponding to an epilogue part is displayed;
A second scene in which the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means
in a first scene in the epilogue part, a first upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
in a second scene in the epilogue part, a second upper table is used to control the light emitting means;
in a first scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and at a specific timing, switching from the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part to a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emitting mode;
In a second scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for enlarged display, and at a timing related to the end of the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for changing the light emitting mode to a rainbow light emitting mode from the luminance data table for enlarged display;
the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the first scene in the epilogue part and the luminance data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode used in the second scene in the epilogue part are a common luminance data table,
The first higher-level table is composed of storage destination data of a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part and storage destination data of a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode,
The second higher-level table is made up of storage destination data for a luminance data table for enlarged display and storage destination data for a luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, by making the grandchild table used during the win notification presentation and the grandchild table used when displaying the winning symbol common, separate grandchild tables are prepared at each of multiple different timings. It is possible to reduce the amount of data used to control the lamps to turn them on in rainbow colors, and to enliven each performance by creating a sense of unity. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part can be shown better to the player by using the frame lamp while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 27] (2019-1943)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using an upper table made up of storage location data indicating a storage location of the brightness data table and a brightness data table made up of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The epilogue part includes a result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area and the result of the notification effect is notified.
The re-lottery part includes a re-lottery result notification scene in which the decoration pattern is enlarged using the center of the display area and the re-lottery result is announced.
The light emission control means includes:
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a first upper table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, controlling the light emitting means using a second upper table,
In the result notification scene in the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene, and at a timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative pattern, the luminance data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene is controlled. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for creating a rainbow light emission mode from the brightness data table,
In the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part, the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display of the re-lottery result notification scene, and the re-lottery is performed at a timing related to ending the enlarged display of the decorative symbol. Controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode from a brightness data table for enlarged display of the result notification scene;
The brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the result notification scene in the epilogue part and the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode used in the re-lottery result notification scene in the re-lottery part have a common brightness. is a data table,
The first upper table is composed of storage destination data of a brightness data table for enlarged display of a result notification scene, and storage destination data of a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
The second upper table is composed of storage location data of a luminance data table for enlarged display of re-lottery result notification scene and storage location data of a luminance data table for rainbow light emission mode.

Specifically, in the child tables WD21 and WD22 of the re-lottery part, the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery part is common to the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part. Then, grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Epilogue 28] (2020-399)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state is to be performed after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen). In relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the reduced pattern is erased and a pattern display effect is executed in which the reduced pattern is erased and enlarged using the center area of the screen. Further, the brightness data table is switched from the brightness data table corresponding to the winning epilogue part to the brightness data table corresponding to the symbol display in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image. According to this, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is positioned at the edge of the screen so that the image of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed, and the development of the image of the winning epilogue part is completed and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. Furthermore, by switching the brightness data table, it is possible to suitably show the change of scenes. In this way, the winning epilogue part can be shown suitably.

[Epilogue 29]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is being displayed, the decorative patterns are aligned and positioned at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images that make up the winning epilogue are displayed in sequence (when the winning epilogue video is playing), the decorative symbols are displayed aligned with "222" at the edge of the display area of the screen (the upper left corner of the screen). This allows the player to recognize that a big win has been displayed due to the reduced decorative symbols, even while the winning epilogue video is playing.

[Epilogue 30]
In the epilogue part,
While the image corresponding to the epilogue is displayed, the decorative pattern is positioned at the edge of the display area,
In relation to the timing at which the display of the image corresponding to the epilogue ends, the output of the displayed dialogue sound ends, the state in which the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area ends, and the decorative pattern is displayed. Enlarge the display using the center of the area.

Specifically, in the winning epilogue part, when the images constituting the winning epilogue are being displayed in sequence (the video of the winning epilogue is being played), the decorative pattern is placed at the edge of the display area of the screen. (at the top left corner of the screen). In addition, in relation to the timing when the screen becomes a still image and the epilogue video ends, the subtitle display that was displayed at (Y1) is erased, the reduced image at the upper left corner is erased, and the image at the center of the screen is erased. The decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the area. According to this, it is possible to prevent the subtitle display from being displayed overlapping with the decorative pattern, and to prevent the misunderstanding that some kind of message is being shown when the pattern is displayed, and to appropriately display the winning epilogue part. I can show you.

[Epilogue 31]
At the start of the introductory part, a decorative pattern is located at the edge of the display area.

Specifically, the decorative pattern may be moved to the upper left corner of the screen in a reach mode at the start of SP reach. According to this, by positioning it from the start of the SP reach, it is possible to avoid disturbing the development of the performance even during the SP reach, and it is possible to suitably show a series of performances.

[Re-lottery performance 1]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second symbol that displays the first symbol again in the second half part after displaying the first symbol in the first half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
Using the first symbol displayed in the epilogue part, execute the first re-lottery effect or the second re-lottery effect,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. In this way, the re-lottery effect will be started using the decorative symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the start of the re-lottery effect, the symbol forwarding effect will be executed using the symbols that were once temporarily stopped and displayed. , it is easy for the player to understand from which decorative symbol the re-lottery starts. As a result, the flow of a series of performances can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery performance 2]
Once the image corresponding to the background that temporarily stops the arrangement of decorative patterns is displayed, the light emitting means goes out, and when moving to the re-lottery screen, the light-emitting means emits light in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the re-lottery. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (tA6), when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped while the frame lamp is smoothly lit in rainbow colors in the winning epilogue part, the frame lamp goes out once before the re-draw performance is executed, and then lights up in a lighting mode corresponding to the re-draw performance, so that the player can be easily informed that the re-draw performance is about to begin by the lighting mode of the frame lamp.

[Re-selection effect 3]
When moving to the re-draw screen, the decoration pattern alignment is temporarily stopped,
When the display is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern alignment is displayed with a swaying effect, but the image corresponding to the background and the light emission mode of the light-emitting means are switched to those for re-drawing while the swaying display with the effect is maintained.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 142 (A5) described above, in the final state of the symbol presentation in the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbols are displayed in a swaying manner and an effect image of concentrated lines is added. Even when switching from that state to the background of the re-lottery effect as shown in (A6), the effect image with concentrated lines continues to be added. Further, the game effect lamp 9 is switched from smoothly lighting up in a rainbow manner to being turned off. In other words, from the appearance of the symbols to the re-lottery presentation, the pattern shaking and effects continue, and the background and lamps are designed to switch. According to this, it is possible to easily understand from which decorative pattern the re-lottery performance has started.

[Re-selection effect 4]
When the pattern feed begins, the decorative pattern that has been displayed since the epilogue shrinks,
The image is reduced and then the image begins to move.

Specifically, at the start of the symbol feeding performance in the re-lottery performance, the variation starts from the reduced state of the decorative symbols that have been displayed from the winning epilogue part. According to this, it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of effects without executing the process of changing to a different decorative pattern.

[Re-lottery performance 5]
The symbol feeding starts with the reduced size, and the reduced sizes of all other symbols become uniform.

Specifically, in the symbol feeding performance, the fluctuation is started by the reduced symbol, and the size of the symbol being fluctuated is a uniform reduced size. According to this, it is possible to make the appearance of the fluctuation during the symbol feeding performance smooth, and it is possible to clearly show the flow of a series of performances.

[Re-lottery performance 6]
While a plurality of types of decorative patterns are being fed in a reduced size, the transition is made in the following order: movement promotion display, movement acceptance, display of a decorative pattern slightly larger than the reduced size, and display of an enlarged decorative pattern.

Specifically, as shown in the flow shown in FIGS. 144 (A10) to 156 (A46) and FIGS. 157 (B1) to 158 (B5) described above, in the re-lottery performance, the symbols are moved by the reduced size decorative symbols. is executed, and a button operation promotion display is displayed. Then, when the player operates a button, a pattern display effect is executed in which the pattern is enlarged and displayed. In other words, the decorative pattern that is finally announced is displayed in an enlarged manner from the moment the pattern is put out. According to this, since the symbol is finally notified from the beginning of expansion, it is possible to clearly show the player what the final notified symbol is.

[Re-lottery performance 7]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to be in an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means are
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. , it is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect that displays the second symbol in the second half,
When it is determined that the control will be in the first advantageous state, a second re-lottery effect in which a replacement display is performed in the first half of the multiple types of re-lottery effects, and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half. is executable,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half until the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half to the display of the first symbol in the second half,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, in the re-lottery performance, the "2" symbol that was temporarily stopped and displayed before the re-lottery is enlarged, reduced, and shaken, and then the "2" symbol is displayed as it is. The re-lottery performance will be started using . At the start of the re-extraction performance, the "2" symbol is reduced, and the variation of the re-lottery performance is started from the reduced "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, a symbol feeding performance is executed in which the symbols are replaced by high-speed fluctuations starting from the "2" symbol. During the re-lottery performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then "2" again. ” A symbol feeding performance in which symbols are displayed is executed. In this way, a re-lottery performance is started using the ornamental symbols that were once displayed in a temporary stop, and after a plurality of types of variations in the ornamental symbols, the ornamental symbols that were initially displayed in a temporary halt are displayed again. According to this, the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown by the pattern advancing effect in which all decorative patterns are shown without displaying the final display result immediately. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 8]
The symbol feed according to a predetermined pattern is to send the temporarily stopped symbol to the next symbol in order, and after the last symbol is sent, return to the temporarily stopped symbol again, and then move to the next symbol in order. It is a performance that seems to send to
The predetermined pattern is a pattern that loops in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance during the re-draw performance, all the decorative symbols are sent in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1", and then all the decorative symbols are sent again in order: "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "1". In this way, the numbers of the decorative symbols are sent in order, which makes the flow of the series of performances look good.

[Re-draw performance 9]
While the patterns are being sent in a predetermined pattern, all the decorative patterns being sent are displayed with the same resolution as when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped.

Specifically, in the symbol forwarding performance during the re-draw performance, all symbols are displayed with the transparency of the symbol when it was temporarily stopped, and the transparency is increased during the change. Specifically, the symbols are switched as follows: "2" symbol with 0% transparency, "2" symbol with 50% transparency, "3" symbol with 0% transparency, "3" symbol with 50% transparency, "4" symbol with 0% transparency, and "4" symbol with 50% transparency. This allows all symbols to be displayed properly with low transparency during the symbol forwarding performance, so it is possible to know what symbol is being sent.

[Re-draw performance 10]
After the symbol transmission is started, the display time of each of the multiple types of decorative symbols is the same until a notification is made as to whether or not the symbol will be promoted.

Specifically, in the symbol sending performance in the re-lottery performance, all decorative symbols are sent in order of "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "1". However, each symbol is displayed for the same amount of time. According to this, all the symbols can be displayed for a certain period of time, and the flow of a series of effects can be clearly shown.

[Re-lottery performance 11]
The motion promotion display is performed during symbol feeding,
The motion promotion display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the symbol being fed.

Specifically, during the symbol forwarding performance, a promotion display formed from a button image and a time gauge is displayed. The position at which the promotion display is displayed is a position that does not overlap with the position at which the change in the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance is displayed. In this way, the promotion display does not overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol forwarding. Note that a portion of the promotion display may overlap with the decorative symbol during the symbol forwarding performance.

[Re-draw performance 12]
The action prompting display is started during the advancement of the symbols, that is, during the second loop of a predetermined pattern.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the promotion display is displayed at (A24) and (A25) after repeating twice the variation in which all decorative symbols are displayed during the symbol feeding effect. Begins. Since the promotion image is not displayed until the predetermined pattern of symbol feeding is repeated twice in this way, the player can be made to clearly recognize the pattern of pattern feeding.

[Re-lottery performance 13]
When symbol feeding starts from the symbol "1", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, the symbol "5",
When symbol feeding is started from the symbol "4", the timing at which the movement promotion display is performed is, for example, at the symbol "8".

Specifically, the symbols at the start of the re-lottery performance may be other than two symbols. Even in such a case, the timing at which the button image is displayed as an action promotion display is constant. For example, in the case of 2 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed is the timing at which 2 symbols are displayed again. Similarly, in the case of 5 symbols, the timing at which the movement promotion display is displayed may be the timing at which 5 symbols are displayed again. In other words, no matter which symbol is used to start the re-lottery performance, the number of symbols sent is the same. According to this, the control can be made constant, so that the processing load can be reduced.

[Re-draw performance 14]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-selection performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of re-selection performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the game is controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part.
When it is determined that the game will be controlled to the second advantageous state, a repeat display is performed in which the second symbol is repeatedly displayed after displaying the second symbol in the first half part, and a third re-selection performance is executed in which the second symbol is displayed again in the second half part;
The first re-selection effect, the second re-selection effect, and the third re-selection effect are configured to have the same duration,
The light emission control means includes:
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed after which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed, a pattern in which an even numbered symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is displayed and then an odd numbered symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is displayed. was set up. In addition to this, a pattern may be provided in which an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed after an odd numbered symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is displayed. In a performance in which symbols are sent from an odd numbered symbol to an odd numbered symbol, all the same odd numbered symbols may be sent at the time of symbol feeding. However, regardless of the pattern, the length of the performance during the symbol feeding period in the re-lottery performance may be designed to be the same. According to this, it is possible to provide a suitable re-lottery effect for any pattern without increasing the data capacity. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-draw performance 15]
The re-draw performance is displayed by combining the display data other than the decorative pattern with the display data of various decorative patterns, and reproducing each pattern of multiple types of re-draw performance.
By using common display data in each re-draw performance, the performance time is common between the respective re-draw performances, and only the type of symbols being sent and the symbols to be displayed in the symbol output are different in each re-draw performance.

Specifically, the lottery presentation uses the same data whether the pattern is to display an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an even number symbol (e.g., 2), an even number symbol (e.g., 2) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 3), or an odd number symbol (e.g., 7) followed by an odd number symbol (e.g., 7). In other words, the presentation data is the same, and the design changes the data related to the decorative symbols depending on the pattern. This eliminates the need for dedicated patterns, reducing the amount of data.

[Re-lottery performance 16]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the control is controlled to an advantageous state;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance consists of an introduction part until the propriety of controlling to an advantageous state is announced, a propriety notification part in which the propriety is notified, and a notification part that informs that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous condition after the propriety is notified. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when the
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The means of performing the performance is
When it is determined that the second advantageous state will be controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, the first re-lottery effect displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the second symbol in the second half part. is executable,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a second re-lottery effect that displays the first symbol in the first half part and then displays the first symbol again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a lottery performance,
Displaying the first symbol with the same or almost the same animation when displaying the first symbol once in the epilogue part and when displaying the first symbol again in the second half of the second re-lottery performance,
The light emission control means is
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for rainbow light emitting mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. control the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continue to control the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .

Specifically, the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 141 (A1) to 142 (A5) and the pattern placement in the portions of FIGS. 161 (C1) to 162 (C5) described above are executed using approximately the same video. be done. Specifically, the same image is used for the pattern display and effect image using the "2" pattern, and the pattern pattern is executed in such a manner that the background portions are different. According to this, since the images of the symbols appearing can be made substantially the same, it is possible to clearly show to the player that the symbols have not been promoted to the variable probability symbols. In addition, the image of the pattern part including the background may be made completely the same. In addition, when the winning symbol is temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part, after the frame lamp lights up smoothly in rainbow colors, the re-lottery effect is executed with the light turned off, and the symbol is displayed shaking. Based on the brightness data corresponding to the lottery performance (for example, RGB data in the grandchild table W25), the frame lamp blinks in red in a lighting manner different from the smooth rainbow color. This prevents the player from being misled into thinking that the winning symbol that was temporarily stopped in the winning epilogue part has been determined, depending on the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, the lighting of the rainbow color when the symbol "3" or "2" is displayed in a swaying manner continues during the subsequent period when the symbol is determined. In this way, during the short symbol determination period, the lamp control corresponding to the fanfare part is performed without preparing a special brightness data table for lamp control. There is no need to increase capacity excessively.

[Re-lottery performance 17]
The animation when displaying the first identification information includes an animation from when the symbol is displayed to when it is enlarged and reaches the first position.

Specifically, in the aforementioned pattern display performance, a series of effects is executed in which the pattern is first enlarged and then returned to normal size in the center of the screen. This allows the pattern display performance to be displayed optimally by enlarging and reducing the pattern.

[Re-lottery performance 18]
The display means refers to common display data when temporarily stopping the decorative pattern arrangement before the re-lottery is executed, and when notifying whether or not the decorative pattern arrangement will be promoted in the notification part,
By combining the common display data and display data of a plurality of types of decorative patterns, a display of a plurality of types of pattern placement is performed.

Specifically, in the pattern display performance described above, common pattern display data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance. Then, a series of pattern display performances may be executed using the common pattern display data and a combination of multiple decorative patterns. This makes it possible to reduce data capacity while still providing a good appearance for the pattern display performance. Furthermore, substantially the same data may be used for the data for the pattern display performance in the winning epilogue part and the data for the pattern display performance in the re-draw performance.

[Re-lottery performance 19]
In the event that you are not promoted in the re-lottery performance,
The light emitting mode in drawing out symbols is the same when the arrangement of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed and when notification is made that the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is not promoted in the re-lottery.

Specifically, the child table WD21 of the re-lottery part has the same lamp control as the child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 of the winning epilogue part when the symbol is finally determined after the re-lottery. Grandchild table W1 is used. As a result, there is no need to prepare separate grandchild tables for lighting in rainbow colors for the winning epilogue part and the re-drawing part, reducing the amount of data used for lamp control, and creating a sense of unity even when the parts (timings) are different. A certain performance can be shown to the player. As a result, the performance in the winning epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown better to the player while reducing the data capacity.

[Re-lottery performance 20]
In the event that you are promoted in the re-lottery performance,
The light emitting mode in drawing out the symbols is different between when the arrangement of decorative symbols temporarily stops before the re-lottery is executed and when the notification that the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is promoted in the re-lottery is carried out.
The light emitting mode in drawing out the symbols is more intense when notification that the arrangement of decorative symbols is promoted in the re-lottery is performed than when the arrangement of the ornamental symbols is temporarily stopped before the re-lottery is executed.

Specifically, in child table WD20 in the re-draw part, the frame lamps are lit in the same rainbow colors as child tables WD3, WD6, WD10, WD13, and WD16 in the winning epilogue part as part of the lamp control when the symbol is finally determined after the re-draw, but the rainbow lighting during times tB5 to tB9 when the symbol "2" is upgraded to a "3" through the re-draw is more intense than the smooth rainbow lighting when the symbol "2" temporarily stops in the winning epilogue part. This allows the player to be more effectively congratulated on the promotion of the winning symbol through the re-draw by the lighting of the frame lamps.

[Re-draw performance 21]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the latter half part, from when the first pattern is displayed again until a pattern determination period begins, a swaying display is performed in which the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the latter half part, from when the second pattern is displayed until a pattern determination period begins, a swinging display is performed in which the display mode of the second pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode so that the second pattern is displayed as if it is swinging;
The first mode is a mode in which the player can easily visually recognize the symbols compared to either the second mode or the third mode,
The means of performance execution are:
In the re-selection part, a display for prompting a player to take an action can be executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol will be in a second mode when a predetermined timing is reached after the performance corresponding to the first re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the second symbol so that the second symbol becomes a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the first re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the first re-lottery performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the second pattern is difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the second pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the second pattern is displayed stopped in the first mode while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the second pattern;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-draw performance, if the action is performed at a first timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol becomes a second mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-draw performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, if the action is executed at a second timing, the first symbol is displayed in a shaking display while maintaining a shaking speed of the shaking display of the first symbol so that the first symbol will be in a third mode at a predetermined timing after the performance corresponding to the second re-selection performance is executed;
When the action prompting display is being executed in the second re-selection performance, regardless of whether the action is performed at the first timing or the second timing, a display is performed in which the swaying display of the first pattern is made difficult to see from a predetermined timing, and then the first pattern is displayed again in a swaying display, and then, when a pattern determination period is reached, the first pattern is displayed stopped in a first manner while maintaining the swaying speed of the swaying display of the first pattern;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in (L1) to (L3) in FIG. 267, an action promotion display using a button image and a time gauge is displayed during symbol feeding in the re-lottery performance. When the player operates the push button 31B during the period in which the movement promotion display is displayed, the common symbol presentation effects shown in (L4) to (L6) are executed. No matter at which timing the push button 31B is operated, a common pattern display effect is performed by enlarging and reducing the pattern as shown in (L4) to (L5). Thereafter, the symbols are shaken during the symbol shake period. The shaking period of the symbol differs depending on the button operation timing. Therefore, after the symbol shaking period, for example, at the first operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing the right side, at the second operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing left, and at the third operation timing, the symbol will be in a position facing to the left. , the design may be in a position facing forward. However, regardless of the operation timing, a white-out effect is then interposed as a common effect from (J1) to (J18), and an effect in which the symbol swings after rotation and reduction of the symbol is performed. According to this, by performing a common effect regardless of when the push button 31B is operated, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be presented suitably.

[Re-draw performance 22]
When an operation is performed at a first timing of the effective period of the operation, after a notification of whether or not the player has been promoted is made, the decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly until a predetermined timing for the change arrives;
When an action is performed at a second timing earlier than the first timing of the valid period of the action, after notification of whether or not the action is to be promoted, a decorative pattern is displayed flickeringly by the amount by which the action was earlier than the first timing until a predetermined timing of the change arrives, and the time is absorbed.

Specifically, when the push button 31B is operated at the first timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted is executed, the decorative pattern is displayed swaying (FIG. 267 (L3) example without operation). When the push button 31B was operated at the second timing earlier than the first timing during the operation validity period, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the first timing after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed. (The operation in FIG. 267 (L2) is an example of the second timing). When the push button 31B was operated at the third timing earlier than the second timing during the valid operation period, after the notification of whether or not to be promoted was executed, the display of the decorative pattern shaking was earlier than the second timing. (example where the operation in FIG. 267 (L1) is the first timing). In this way, even if the push button 31B is operated at any timing, the duration of the performance can be absorbed by the shaking time of the symbols. By performing a common effect after that, the symbols can be stopped neatly, and a series of effects can be displayed suitably.

[Re-lottery performance 23]
The predetermined performance starts after the swaying decorative pattern is rotated while being enlarged while flashing in white.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, after a whiteout is executed as a common effect, a different effect from the previous pattern is performed in which the swaying decorative pattern is enlarged and rotated once. According to this, no matter what position the symbol is in when the symbol is shaken during shaku absorption, by performing a different style of presentation after the whiteout, the flow of the presentation until the symbol stops is changed. This can be done so that it does not make you feel uncomfortable.

[Re-draw performance 24]
The decorative pattern is displayed so as to sway around the first position as an axis,
The swaying display is such that the decorative patterns are positioned in the order of the first position, the second position, the third position, the second position, the first position, the fourth position, the fifth position, the fourth position, the first position, and the second position, and the predetermined performance is designed so that when the fixed period is reached, the decorative patterns are always swayed and displayed in the order of the second position, the first position, and so on.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 267, during the symbol shaking period, the symbol shakes backward from (J10) to (J12), and then shakes forward from (J13) to (J14), changing to the initial position. After that, the symbol shakes forward from (J15) to (J16), and then shakes backward from (J17) to (J18), changing to the initial position. This series of movements may be repeated multiple times. However, during the symbol determination period, the symbol is designed to always be in the initial position facing forward, as shown at (J18). This allows the symbol to be determined and stopped in a manner that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Re-lottery performance 25]
The starting point for causing the light emitting means to emit rainbow light during the second part is to cause the light emitting means to emit rainbow light at the start of a predetermined performance.

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 is designed to light up in rainbow colors at the whiteout timing (J1) in FIG. 267. The timing (J1) is a performance that is executed as a common performance regardless of the operation timing. By setting the point where such a common effect is performed as the starting point for changing the game effect lamp 9, the designer can easily determine the start timing. Note that the timing (J2) at which the common start display is started may be used as the start trigger instead of the timing (J1), and the start trigger may be any timing of the commonly executed performance.

[Re-draw performance 26]
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/fail notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed after the result/fail notification and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part.
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The means of performance execution are:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first re-draw performance is executed among a plurality of types of re-draw performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then a second symbol is displayed in a second half part;
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance can be executed among the multiple types of re-draw performance, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part and then the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
In the epilogue part, when the first pattern is displayed once, the display mode of the first pattern is changed to a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode, so that the first pattern is displayed as if it is swaying;
In the case of transition from the epilogue part to the re-selection part, there are a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in a first manner, a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in a second manner, and a time when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at a timing when the first symbol is displayed in the third manner.
The performance execution means performs a specific display that makes the first pattern difficult to see when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the first mode, when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the second mode, and when the epilogue part transitions to the re-selection part at the timing when the first pattern is displayed in the third mode, and displays the first pattern in a common display mode to execute the first re-selection performance or the second re-selection performance;
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the luminance data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or a luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the luminance data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection performance to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of a fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, when the image indicating the stick controller 31A and the time gauge are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, no matter which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, after that, It is also possible to provide a period of symbol fluctuation for absorbing the length in the time up to a predetermined timing when the re-lottery performance is executed (symbol fluctuation period from (K4)). Then, when the re-lottery effect is executed at a predetermined timing, a common effect with whiteout as shown in (K8) to (K17) may be executed. According to this, no matter at which timing the stick controller 31A is operated, the re-lottery effect is executed after the symbols are displayed in a shaking manner and then a common effect involving whiteout is executed, so that the re-lottery effect is executed at the start of the re-lottery. It is possible to prevent the movement of the symbols from causing a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to present a series of effects in a suitable manner.

[Re-lottery performance 27]
No matter which one of the multiple types of introduction parts wins, the re-lottery effect is the same.

Specifically, the time from when the whiteout screen appears until the re-draw effect is executed can be made the same for any of the multiple reaches. This can reduce the data size of the effect data.

[Re-draw performance 28]
The movement of the decorative pattern after the specific display is an extension of the movement of the decorative pattern that was once swaying before the specific display.

Specifically, the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen may be an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, if the movement of the design in front of the whiteout screen is a movement that swings from the front side to the back side by rotating the axis around the vertical direction of the design, the movement after the whiteout screen is It may be a movement in which the image is rotated clockwise around the vertical direction of the pattern while being enlarged. According to this, by displaying a whiteout in between movements that are extensions of the same axis rotation, it is possible to prevent the movement of the design from feeling strange, and to make a series of effects appear more suitable. be able to.

[Re-lottery performance 29]
The plurality of types of introduction parts include a predetermined introduction part that is a branch of notification as to whether or not the control is in an advantageous state and is not notified due to the operation of the operating means,
In the predetermined introduction part, there is no point where the scale shifts, so if it is determined that the predetermined introduction part will be controlled in an advantageous state, the temporary stop of the decorative symbols until the re-lottery effect is executed. There is no shake in the display, but the same re-lottery effect is performed as in the reach where the length is off.

Specifically, the plurality of SP reaches include those for which no promotion of operation such as button operation is reported at the branch when determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state. With such an SP reach, there is no difference in scale due to operation. However, even in such an SP reach, a re-lottery effect similar to the SP reach where a scale deviation occurs may be executed. According to this, it is possible to avoid causing a sense of discomfort even when there is only one re-lottery effect due to the common effect regardless of the presence or absence of a scale shift. In addition, data capacity can be reduced by using only one re-lottery effect.

[Re-lottery performance 30]
In the flow that goes to the re-lottery performance after the shaking display of the decorative symbols at the jackpot in the predetermined introduction part,
The timing of transition to the re-lottery performance is designed so that the movement is an extension of the decorative pattern after the specific display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 266, the timing is set so that the movement of the symbols after the white-out screen is an extension of the movement of the symbols before the white-out screen. For example, the movement of the symbol in front of the whiteout screen is any position in a series of movements in which the symbol moves from the right position (K3) to the front position (K5) to the left position (K6). It is designed to be. In other words, when one of the series of movements in which the symbol swings clockwise occurs, a whiteout is performed by the re-lottery effect, and then the symbol continues to enlarge and rotate clockwise. According to this, it is possible to prevent a feeling of discomfort from occurring in the movement of the symbols due to the series of clockwise movement of the symbols from the period of symbol fluctuation to the re-lottery performance.

<Explanation of terms>
The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described above. Below, some terms used in this specification will be explained.

"Variable display" (fluctuating display) includes the variable display of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), multiple types of normal symbols, and multiple types of decorative symbols.

The "changes" in the patterns include updating the display of multiple types of patterns, such as multiple types of special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern), multiple types of normal patterns, and multiple types of decorative patterns, scrolling the display of multiple types of patterns, transforming one or more patterns, enlarging/reducing one or more patterns, turning on/flashing/turning off lamps (fourth pattern unit 50, special pattern 1 variable display unit 53, special pattern 2 variable display unit 54, etc.), etc.

The "decorative symbols" include symbols that are variably displayed in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game.

"Reduced symbols" are symbols that are smaller than the decorative symbols when they are reduced in size. When the reduced symbols are displayed, a number symbol that is the same as the decorative symbol is displayed on the edge of the screen, but smaller than the decorative symbol.

The "small design" includes a design corresponding to the variable display of the decorative design that is displayed in a smaller size than the decorative design. The small designs are the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. The symbols corresponding to each of the ornamental symbols are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction.

"Confirmation of the pattern" includes the stopping of the fluctuations of the fourth pattern unit 50, the special pattern 1 variable display section 53, the special pattern 2 variable display section 54, the decorative patterns, etc., which had been changing, and the final determination of the pattern in that special pattern game. For example, this includes a state in which the fluctuations of the decorative patterns changing in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns changing in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns changing in the right decorative pattern display area 5R have all stopped.

In the "symbol confirmation period", the display result is fixed by stopping the fluctuations of the fourth symbol unit 50, special symbol 1 variable display section 53, special symbol 2 variable display section 54, decorative symbols, etc. Including period. For example, the decorative patterns that change in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns that change in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns that change in the right decorative pattern display area 5R stop and are displayed. Includes a state in which the results are displayed definitively.

"Reach" includes the situation where decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be displayed in a variable manner when the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed form part of a winning combination, and includes a situation where, for example, the decorative symbol "2" stops in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the decorative symbol "2" stops in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, but the decorative symbol display in the center decorative symbol display area 5C continues to be displayed in a variable manner.

"Lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is "0" (a value indicating the lowest brightness). In addition, "lights out" of the lighting means (light emitting means) refers to the brightness data corresponding to turning off the light, such as the value of the brightness data for lighting (light emission) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), such as "1" or "2". It may include a state where the value is close to "0". Note that a state where the value of the brightness data for lighting (lighting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is close to "0", such as "1" or "2", is the brightness data corresponding to turning off the lamp, as " It may also be included in "lights on" or "slightly off".

"Lighting" or "light emission" of the lighting means (light emitting means) is a state in which the value of the brightness data for lighting (light emitting) the lamp (lighting means, light emitting means) is higher than when the lamp is turned off, and the value of the brightness data is higher than when the lamp is turned off. This includes a state in which the value is greater than or equal to the luminance data value ("0") corresponding to "lights out" described above. "Lighting" includes constant lighting, in which the lamp is always on, wave lighting, in which multiple lamps are switched from off to on in sequence, and hazy lighting, in which the lamps are dimly lit while changing the brightness.

"Flashing" of the lighting means (light-emitting means) means that the lamp (lighting means, light-emitting means) is in a state other than "off", "almost off", or "on", and when the lamp is "on" and "off". This includes repeating the process over time. Furthermore, "blinking" of the lighting means (light emitting means) includes the lamp repeating "lighting up" and "substantially extinguishing" over time.

"Brightness" is a value indicating the brightness of a lamp (lighting means, light emitting means), and in this embodiment, brightness data is expressed in hexadecimal as data corresponding to brightness. For example, if the brightness data used to control a predetermined lamp is "0", the lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the lowest brightness (the lamp is darkest), and the predetermined lamp is controlled. When the brightness data used for this is "F", lamp control is performed so that the predetermined lamp has the highest brightness (the lamp is brightest). As mentioned above, the brightness data corresponds to the value of the current flowing through the lamp, and when the brightness data used to control a given lamp is "0", the current flowing through the given lamp is the smallest. , when the brightness data used to control a predetermined lamp is "F", the current flowing through the predetermined lamp becomes the largest. Note that the term "lamp" is not limited to LED (light emitting diode) lamps, but includes any type of lamp, such as EL (electroluminescence) lamps and incandescent lamps.

The "lighting color" or "emission color" of a lamp includes the color represented by the light emission of one or more light emitting elements included in the lamp. For example, if a lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three light emitting elements such as "R" (red), "G" (green), and "B" (blue), the three light emitting elements are adjusted by the LED driver based on the brightness data. The three light emitting elements emit light due to the current applied to one light emitting element, thereby lighting up the LEDs in various colors. Note that the "lighting color" of the lamp varies depending on the color of the light emitting element. For example, in the case of an LED consisting of only "W" (white) light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in white, although the brightness varies depending on the flowing current; In the case of an LED consisting of only red light emitting elements, the lamp lights up in red, although the brightness varies depending on the current flowing.

Among the lamp lighting colors, "rainbow colors" (seven colors) include colors made up of seven types of colors. For example, "rainbow colors" include red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and violet. Note that the "rainbow colors" are not limited to the above-mentioned colors, but may be composed of seven other colors. Even if the same "rainbow color" is used, the lighting mode is different between smooth lighting based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 225 and blinking based on the brightness data table (grandchild table) shown in Figure 256. In addition, the lighting mode using rainbow colors may differ depending on the set brightness data.

The "colors corresponding to characters" include colors predetermined for each character appearing in the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, there are colors set for each character, such as green for the character Yumu-chan, purple for Jam-chan, and red for Bakuchu.

"The light color corresponding to a character" is the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9, and includes colors that are predetermined for each character that appears in the effects of the pachinko game machine 1. For example, "the light color corresponding to a character" includes the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in green corresponding to the Yume Yume character, the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in purple corresponding to Jam-chan, and the lighting color (light emission color) of the game effect lamp 9 in red corresponding to Bakuchu.

The "line sounds" include sounds corresponding to the words that are output in synchronization with the timing at which the characters appearing in the pachinko game machine 1 utter the words. In the pachinko game machine 1, sounds (speech sounds) corresponding to words uttered by the characters are outputted in accordance with images of characters appearing in the performance.

"Serif subtitles" include characters corresponding to the serif sounds displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 when the serif sounds are output. Serif subtitles are also called subtitle display.

"Physical sounds" include physical sounds produced by the actions of objects such as characters and things that appear in the performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, physical sounds (physical sounds) that would be produced by the movements of objects such as characters and objects that appear in the performance are output in accordance with images of the objects.

"Onomatopoeia" includes pseudo sounds that express the actions of objects such as characters and things that appear in the performance. In the pachinko game machine 1, a pseudo sound (onomatopoeic sound) expressing the motion of the object is outputted in accordance with the image of an object such as a character or an object that appears in the performance.

The "character action" includes a performance in which a character appearing in the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 performs some kind of action. For example, this includes the action of Yumu-chan's character chasing Bakuchu's character.

The "re-lottery effect" is a temporary jackpot symbol that does not result in a variable probability jackpot in the variable display of decorative symbols (for example, an even number symbol such as a "2" symbol) that is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the normal jackpot symbol becomes a variable probability jackpot. It includes an effect that is executed before the symbol is determined in order to encourage whether or not the symbol will be promoted to a symbol (for example, an odd number symbol such as a "3" symbol).

"Replacement display" is an effect included in the "re-draw effect", and includes the display of an image in which a temporarily stopped decorative symbol is replaced by other symbols in sequence, causing the decorative symbols to change one after another. In this embodiment, "replacement display" includes a display in which the symbol "2" fluctuates at high speed and is replaced by other symbols in sequence, until the symbol "2" or "3" finally stops.

"Repeated display" refers to the repetition of the same display, and refers to the repetition of a display using the same animation. This is an effect included in the "re-lottery effect", and includes a display in which a decorative pattern that has been temporarily stopped is displayed multiple times with the same animation. As an example, "repeated display" includes a display in which the "7" pattern changes rapidly and is replaced by other patterns in sequence, until the "7" pattern finally stops.

The "shaking display" is to display a decorative pattern while shaking it, indicating that the fluctuation is not finished but is in progress.

A "stop display" is when the decorative pattern is displayed still and not moving, indicating that the fluctuation has ended.

"Swing speed" refers to the speed at which the decorative pattern moves from the first position to the second position while being displayed swinging.

The "first aspect of the design," the "second aspect of the design," and the "third aspect of the design" are aspects that indicate the position of the decorative design. For example, when displaying a decorative pattern swinging up and down, if the first aspect is the center position, the second aspect is the upper position, and the third aspect is the lower position. Further, when the decorative pattern is displayed swinging in the front-back direction, when the first mode is the front position, the second mode is the left-facing position, and the third mode is the right-facing position.

The "fanfare effect" is an effect that is executed at the start of a jackpot game state, and notifies the player that a jackpot game state has been reached.

"Advancing a movable body (prop)" refers to the action of the movable body moving from its initial position. The edge of the movable area within which the prop moves is the advancing position.

"Retreating" a movable object (accessory object) is an operation in which an accessory object as a movable object moves from an advanced position to an initial position. The initial position of the movable area in which the accessory moves is the retracted position.

"Effect display for movable body movement" is a display for enhancing the visual effect around the accessory on the screen as the accessory moves to the advanced position as a movable body. For example, an effect image is displayed to make the action of the accessory stand out in accordance with the action of the accessory when the reach develops in the latter half or when a jackpot is announced.

"Story development" refers to the progression of a story or a series of performances. That is, the story is continuously displayed to the player without interruption due to scene changes or the like.

"Part, scene" refers to the groups that make up the production, and parts are larger groups than scenes. Parts are divided by role.

"Scene change"
A scene change mainly refers to a change in display, particularly a change in the displayed background, characters, etc.

A "cut-in display" is an effect in which another image is displayed by interrupting the currently displayed image. The cut-in display can also indicate the likelihood of a jackpot by the color of the cut-in display. For example, if the cut-in display is red, the likelihood of a jackpot is higher than if it is green.

The "switching display (eye-catching display)" is a presentation that is displayed when the scene changes. In this embodiment, the eye-catching display is used when the scene changes from a state indicating a loss to a state of normal play. The eye-catching display has the role of making it easy to understand that the Super Reach has ended.

"Occupation display (shutter display)" means that the image display device 5 displays an image such as a shutter so as to cover the entire area displayed by the image display device 5, and the image that was displayed before the occlusion display is displayed. This is a display that shields the In the shielding display, the image may be shielded by displaying something other than the shutter.

"The luminance data is switched" means that the luminance data timer defined in the grandchild table becomes 0 and the next luminance data is used. By switching the luminance data, the light emitting mode of the lamp changes. By switching the light emission mode of the lamp, the player is given the impression that the storyline of the currently displayed scene has been updated.

"Brightness data does not switch" means that the timer for the brightness data defined in the grandchild table does not reach 0, and that brightness data continues to be used. By not switching brightness data, the light emission mode of the lamp remains constant. By keeping the light emission mode of the lamp constant, the player is given the impression that the story development of the currently displayed scene has stopped and is not being updated.

"Video data" is data for displaying a video including animation. The images displayed on the image display device 5 are switched at high speed by several tens of images per second to give the illusion of movement. The video data may be stored after being compressed.

"First video data" is video data that is created using many images in order to make a character move among the video data.

"Second video data" is video data that is created using a small number of images in order to make the character move among the video data.

"Specific character movement" refers to the movement that corresponds to a specific character among the multiple characters that appear in the performance.

"Blackout" is an effect that darkens (blacks out) by displaying a black image in the display area in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The blackout may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the blackout state.

“Whiteout” is an effect in which a white image is displayed in the display area (whiteout) in order to make the image displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 invisible. The whiteout may be configured such that the expectation level (reliability) for a jackpot varies depending on the duration of the white image being displayed.

"A specific display that is difficult to see" refers to an image displayed on the screen that hides the displayed decorative symbols from the player. For example, a white image is displayed across the entire screen (whiteout), making the decorative symbols invisible to the player.

"Fade effect" refers to fade-in and fade-out used in video technology. Fade-in means gradually changing from a state where a background image is displayed to a state where a specific image is visible. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where the room background is displayed, an image showing dialogue is gradually displayed. Gradually displaying means gradually decreasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying the dialogue image at 100% transparency, the transparency is decreased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and the dialogue image is displayed after 1 second. Moreover, fade-out means, in contrast to fade-in, gradually changing from a state where a specific image is visible superimposed on the background image to only the background image. In this embodiment, for example, from a state where an image showing dialogue is displayed on top of the room background, the image showing dialogue is gradually made invisible. Gradually making invisible means gradually increasing the transparency of the image showing dialogue. For example, after displaying a dialogue image with 0% transparency, the transparency is increased by 10% every 0.1 seconds, and after 1 second the dialogue image becomes invisible. The fade effect also includes a crossfade, which simultaneously fades in and fades out, swapping images.

<Description of invention using multiple configurations>
An invention that is equipped with the plurality of features described above and has a particularly synergistic effect will be described below. The plurality of feature points may be feature points within the same part or may be feature points in different parts.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (1)] (2020-297)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
Scenes in which the character's dialogue is output but the dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
a specific scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character and an action sound corresponding to the action of the character are output;
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
In the specific scene, the dialogue sounds uttered by the characters are outputted louder than the action sounds corresponding to the actions of the characters.
[Drawings] Figures 165-170, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introduction part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, resulting in a better appearance of the series of effects being executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (2)] (2020-298)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means includes:
In a specific scene in the introduction part, output the dialogue sounds made by the character and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, the sound corresponds to the scene after switching. Output sound.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 171, Figure 172
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the accessory completes the return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being impaired. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of the series of effects that will be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (3)] (2020-300)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means includes:
In a specific scene in the introduction part, output the dialogue sounds made by the character and the action sounds corresponding to the character's actions,
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
When the movable body advances to the second position, a sound for moving the movable body is output, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, a sound corresponding to an epilogue part is output. Output.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 173, Figure 174
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. Furthermore, by switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, it is possible to prevent the aesthetic appearance of the display from being impaired. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of the series of effects being executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (4)] (2020-301)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than the action sound corresponding to the character's action,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a first epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win is won, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so the lighting condition of the frame lamp changes the winning status. It is possible to convey information to players in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (5)] (2020-302)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the action of the character;
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
The luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are used in sequence.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to heighten the player's sense of elation until the result of the win is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced performance with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, a physical sound is output as part of the effect in the introduction part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sound louder when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap. Furthermore, the sound used to move the device to notify the player of a win is The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and then the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, which is used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds, is configured to use chromatic colors in sequence without any achromatic colors in between, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, so that the player is intuitively informed of a win through the flashing manner, and then the smooth manner gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic, making the flow from the win/loss notification to the epilogue look ideal, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances that are executed can be made to look better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (6)] (2020-303)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
There is a notification effect that notifies whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene where the character's dialogue sounds and action sounds corresponding to the character's actions are output.
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound emitted by the character is output louder than an action sound corresponding to the character's action, and the notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. , to make the production more realistic by outputting physical sound as part of the production, and to make it easier to convey the content of the production to the players by outputting the dialogue sound louder when dialogue sound and physical sound overlap. In addition, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than the introduction part, it is easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the blessings in the epilogue part can be easily understood. As a result, it becomes possible to show the flow of a series of performances in a better manner.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (7)] (2020-304)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the action of the character;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, 176, 177, 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced performance with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, in the introduction part, physical sounds are output as part of the effect to bring out the reality of the effect, and when dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap, the dialogue sounds are output loudly to make it easier for the player to understand the content of the effect. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when a re-draw effect is performed, all of the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect are displayed. By switching the display using this, it is possible to suitably arouse the player, and at a specific timing of the re-draw part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits rainbow light, and thereafter, even when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched. By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, it is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the pattern is stopped, and to prevent dissatisfaction of the player due to flickering caused by the switching of the light emission, and thus it is possible to suitably display the epilogue part and the re-draw part, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (8)] (2020-305)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the subsequent scene.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 172, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, by the time the character object completes the movement of returning to the initial position, the scene after switching can be changed. By switching to a corresponding background display, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed is smooth. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of performances that will be executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (9)] (2020-306)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Figs. 168-170, 173, 174, 213, 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is excited until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid presentation can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification performance, even in a scene in which subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sound in the introduction part, the performance can be emphasized by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel completes the return operation to the initial position, the beauty of the display can be prevented from being damaged. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed can be made to look smooth, and as a result, the flow of the executed series of performances can be made to look better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (10)] (2020-307)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a first epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 213, Figure 214, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when there is a win, the second epilogue part that is executed when there is a loss Since the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the epilogue part, it is possible to tell the player that he has won in an easy-to-understand manner by the lighting manner of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (11)] (2020-308)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 213, Figure 214, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.Furthermore, it is possible to emphasize the effect by changing the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9.Furthermore, it is possible to emphasize the effect by changing the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. The brightness data table is configured to alternately repeat chromatic colors and achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then there is no brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops. By using a configuration that uses chromatic colors sequentially without intervening colors, a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner intuitively conveys to the player that the player has won by using a flash mode, and after that, by using a smooth mode. By giving a feeling of congratulations without over-emphasizing it, it is possible to suitably show the flow from the success/failure notification to the epilogue, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances that will be executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (12)] (2020-309)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 175, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, even in scenes in the introduction part where subtitles are not displayed in response to the dialogue sounds, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, by designing the epilogue part to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles in response to the dialogue sounds compared to the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying and to enhance the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of effects being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (13)] (2020-310)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The introduction part is
A scene in which a character's dialogue sound is output and dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are displayed;
A scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed,
a luminance data table used in a scene in which a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output and a dialogue subtitle corresponding to the dialogue sound is not displayed is configured so that luminance data using a light emitting color corresponding to the character is switched in response to an action of the character;
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Figures 168-170, 176, 177, 182, 213, and 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result of the win is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, even in a scene in which subtitles are not displayed for the dialogue sounds in the introduction part, the presentation can be emphasized by the lighting state of the game effect lamp 9. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when a re-draw effect is performed, a replacement display is performed using all the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect, thereby encouraging the player to The brightness data table is switched to one that emits rainbow light at a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the pattern is enlarged and displayed), and thereafter, even when the pattern stops (the timing when the pattern determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched. By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, it is possible to prevent the light emission mode from switching during the short period when the pattern is stopped, which could result in a poor appearance, and to prevent flickering caused by the switching of light emission from causing dissatisfaction to the player. This makes it possible to make the epilogue part and re-draw part look good, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (14)] (2020-311)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body at a time of scene change when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body at a time of scene change while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the scene change;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body at scene changeover to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the scene change, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after the scene change;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body at scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
In the winning/losing notification part of the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state;
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when announcing whether the winning or losing is selected when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the effect display for moving the movable body when announcing whether the winning or losing is selected while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position,
The light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when notifying whether it is a hit or miss when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body when notifying whether it is a hit or miss to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when notifying whether it is a win or lose when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position.
[Drawings] Figures 171 to 174
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is encouraged to play until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid presentation can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch before the reel completes its return to the initial position during the series of flows in the notification effect. Also, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switch during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow in which the introduction part is executed can be made to look smooth, and further, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel completes its return to the initial position. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part while the reel is rising, the reel moves and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed can be made to look smooth, and as a result, the flow of the series of performances executed can be made to look better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (15)] (2020-312)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
In the introduction part, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying a scene change,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The light emission control means includes:
When the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for moving the movable body, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. , switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the switched scene, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the switched scene;
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a first epilogue part in the notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be carried out in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 261, 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win is won, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss. This can be clearly communicated to the player. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (16)] (2020-313)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. , terminates the effect display for moving the movable body when switching the scene, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for movable body movement during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and controls the light emission unit when the movable body advances from the second position. In the middle of retracting to the first position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body at the time of scene switching is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used. controlling the light emitting means;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body during scene switching when the movable body advances to the second position, and when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. to output the sound corresponding to the scene after switching,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is to be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means. , it is notified that the control will be in an advantageous state,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of notification of success/failure;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body at the time of notification of success or failure is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable object, which is used when moving the role object to notify the hit, is configured to alternate between chromatic colors and achromatic colors, so it can emit light in a flash mode. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, which is used in the epilogue part where the story develops, uses chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, thereby creating a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. By doing so, the player is intuitively informed that they have won using the flash mode, and then the smooth mode gives a feeling of congratulations without over-emphasizing it, making the flow from the win notification to the epilogue suitably visible. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (17)] (2020-314)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the winning/losing notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and ends the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and displays a display corresponding to the scene after the switching;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to a post-switching scene while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the post-switching scene;
the sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to a scene after switching while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, and 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is encouraged to win or lose until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid performance can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the scene after the switch before the reel completes its return to the initial position during the series of flows in the notification effect. In addition, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after the switch during the rise of the reel, so that the reel moves and the flow in which the introduction part is executed can be made to look smooth, and further, by designing the display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds to be higher in the epilogue part compared to the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part can be increased, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of effects executed look better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (18)] (2020-315)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 176, 177, 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. In addition, in the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery performance, by performing a replacement display using all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, the player At a specific timing in the re-drawing part (timing after the symbol is enlarged), it switches to a brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then at the timing when the symbol stops (when the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching the brightness data table even at the timing when the pattern is stopped, the light emission mode changes during the short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in a poor appearance. By preventing players from being dissatisfied with the flickering caused by switching the light emission, it is possible to present the epilogue part and the re-drawing part in a suitable manner, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be improved. It becomes possible to show it.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (19)] (2020-316)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
In the first epilogue part, it is reported that the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means to be controlled in an advantageous state,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Ending the effect display for body movement, displaying a display corresponding to the first epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, displaying dialogue subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part, and the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. 1 Output the sound corresponding to the epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In a second epilogue part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not performed in the advantageous state, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part that is executed when a win is won, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so the lighting condition of the frame lamp changes the winning status. It is possible to convey information to players in an easy-to-understand manner. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (20)] (2020-317)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Output the sound corresponding to the part.
[Drawings] Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the machine is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the game is stimulated to the point of notification of winning or losing, thereby increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of winning. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable object, which is used when moving the accessory to notify the hit, is configured to alternate between chromatic colors and achromatic colors, so that a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode can be created. After that, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors to create a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. By using the flash mode to intuitively notify the player that they have won, and then using the smooth mode to give a feeling of congratulations without over-emphasizing it, it is possible to show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue in an appropriate manner. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (21)] (2020-318)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. High [Drawing] Figures 173 to 175
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. In addition, by designing the epilogue part to display a higher ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds than the introduction part, it is easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the blessings in the epilogue part can be easily understood. As a result, it becomes possible to show the flow of a series of performances in a better manner.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (22)] (2020-319)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
A performance execution means,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the lottery will be held, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. [Drawings] Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. Furthermore, in the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery performance, all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance are replaced and displayed, making it easier for players. At a specific timing in the re-drawing part (timing after the pattern is enlarged), it switches to a brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then at the timing when the pattern stops (a pattern confirmation command is sent) By continuing to use the brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching the brightness data table even during timing), the light emission mode changes during the short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in a poor appearance. By preventing dissatisfaction to the players due to flickering caused by switching of light emission, the epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown favorably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better. becomes possible.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (23)] (2020-320)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
In the first epilogue part, it is reported that the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means to be controlled in an advantageous state,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In the first epilogue part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for movable body movement, and then from the brightness data table for movable body movement. switching to a brightness data table corresponding to a first epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color, are sequentially used. ,
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings], Figures 261 to 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the sense of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, so it is easier for the player to understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. In addition, the brightness data table for moving the movable object, which is used when moving the accessory to notify a hit, is configured to alternate between chromatic colors and achromatic colors, so it can be used as a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode. After that, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story develops is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, making it a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner. , by using a flash mode to intuitively notify the player that they have won, and then using a smooth mode to give a feeling of congratulations without over-emphasizing it, it is possible to suitably show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (24)] (2020-321)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data is set shorter than an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in a first epilogue part in the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part in the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines spoken by a character in the first epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines spoken by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Fig. 175, Fig. 261, Fig. 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs changes the color of the frame lamp at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that they have won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by emphasizing the lighting of the frame lamp in the first epilogue part more than when it is a loss, while making the lighting of the frame lamp in the second epilogue part more subdued than when it is a win, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and by designing the display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds to be higher in the epilogue part than in the introduction part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the characters are saying, and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part can be enhanced, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.As a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances that are executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (25)] (2020-322)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state, and a re-selection part executed after the first epilogue part;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data is set shorter than an average time from when one piece of luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until when it is switched to the next piece of luminance data;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
in a first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Fig. 176, Fig. 177, Fig. 182, Fig. 261, Fig. 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs changes the color of the frame lamp at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when a loss occurs, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made more subdued than when a win occurs, thereby making the epilogue part look good. Furthermore, in the re-draw part, when a re-draw performance is performed, all the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw performance are displayed in a swapped manner, thereby making it possible to suitably excite the player. At a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbows, and thereafter, even at the timing when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits light in rainbows is continued to be used, thereby preventing the appearance from becoming poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the symbols are stopped, and preventing the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the switching of the light emission. This makes it possible to make the epilogue part and the re-draw part look good, and as a result, it becomes possible to make the flow of the series of performances performed look better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (26)] (2020-323)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table used to move the movable objects is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, creating a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story unfolds. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, and by creating a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, it will be more accurate depending on the flash mode. By intuitively conveying this to the player, and then using a smooth manner to give a sense of congratulations without overemphasizing it, the flow from the notification of success to the epilogue can be shown in a favorable manner. By designing the dialogue subtitle display ratio to be higher than that of the dialogue part, it is possible to make it easier to understand what the character is saying, which increases the sense of celebration in the epilogue part, and as a result, , it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of performances to be executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (27)] (2020-324)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A display means;
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means
In the winning/losing notification part, when the movable body advances to the second position, the light emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for moving the movable body;
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The luminance data table for moving the movable body is configured so that the luminance data representing chromatic colors and the luminance data representing achromatic colors are used in sequence,
the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured so that luminance data representing a plurality of chromatic colors, including luminance data representing a first chromatic color and luminance data representing a second chromatic color, are sequentially used;
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
in a first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Fig. 176, Fig. 177, Fig. 182, Fig. 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with an announcement performance that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the announcement of whether or not the game has been won, and an epilogue part is provided after the announcement of a win to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a sharp presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of steps in the announcement performance, the brightness data table for moving the movable body used when moving the device to announce a win is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a flashing manner, and thereafter, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part where the story unfolds is configured to use chromatic colors in sequence without any achromatic colors in between, resulting in a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, thereby intuitively conveying to the player that it is a win through the flashing manner, and thereafter, the smooth manner gives a sense of celebration without being too emphatic. In this way, the flow from the winning/losing notification to the epilogue can be displayed favorably, and further, in the re-draw part, when the re-draw performance is performed, all the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw performance are displayed in a swapped manner, which favorably arouses the player. At a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), the brightness data table is switched to one that emits light in rainbows, and then, even at the timing when the symbols stop (the timing when the symbol determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits light in rainbows is continued to be used, which prevents the appearance from being poor due to the switching of the light emission mode during the short period when the symbols are stopped, and prevents the player from being dissatisfied due to flickering caused by the switching of the light emission. This makes it possible to favorably display the epilogue part and the re-draw part, and as a result, it becomes possible to better display the flow of the series of performances that are executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (28)] (2020-325)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by characters in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. high,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, a replacement display in which the first symbol is displayed in the first half part and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol is displayed. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figures 175 to 177, Figure 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Compared to the introductory part, by making the dialogue subtitle display ratio higher than that of the dialogue sound, it becomes easier to understand what the characters are saying, which increases the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. , In the re-lottery part, when performing the re-lottery performance, by performing a replacement display using all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, players can be suitably stimulated. At the specific timing of the re-drawing part (timing after the symbol is enlarged), it switches to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then also at the timing when the symbol stops (the timing when the symbol confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use a brightness data table that emits rainbow light without changing the brightness data table, the light emitting mode changes during a short period when the pattern is stopped, resulting in poor appearance or the light emitting switching. By preventing players from being dissatisfied due to flickering, the epilogue part and re-lottery part can be shown favorably, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects to be executed can be shown better. .

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (29)] (2020-403)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
In the introductory part, there is a first scene in which a character's dialogue sound and an action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the first scene, a speech sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to an action of the character;
In the introductory part, there is a second scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by the character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the second scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
A fade effect is applied at least either when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends or when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 165-167, Figures 178-181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, physical sounds are output as part of the effect in the introduction part to make the effect more realistic, and the content of the effect can be more easily conveyed to the player by outputting the dialogue sounds louder when the dialogue sounds and physical sounds overlap. Furthermore, even if subtitles are displayed so that they overlap, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see when the subtitles switch, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be better seen.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (30)] (2020-404)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
Scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, but the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed,
A specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound emitted by the character,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. ,
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figures 178 to 181, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9.Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed in an overlapping manner, the subtitles can change due to the fade effect. By making it easier to understand, the switching of subtitles can be made easier to understand, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances that are performed.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (31)] (2020-405)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied at least either when displaying the first serif subtitle ends or when displaying the second serif subtitle starts.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. In addition, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the change in subtitles, and as a result, the change in subtitles becomes easier to understand. It becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of performances.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (32)] (2020-406)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
A sound output means;
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/informative part in which the result is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed after the result/informative part is notified and when it is determined that the control to the advantageous state will be performed,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
In a win/loss notification part in the notification performance executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
the display means displays an effect for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, terminates the display of the effect for moving the movable body while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, displays a display corresponding to an epilogue part, and displays a dialogue subtitle for a dialogue sound uttered by a character after the movable body has retreated to the first position;
the light emission control means controls the light emitting means using a luminance data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position, switches from the luminance data table for moving the movable body to a luminance data table corresponding to an epilogue part, and controls the light emitting means using the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound corresponding to an epilogue part while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. [Drawings] Figs. 173, 174, 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided and a player is excited until the winning or losing is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the winning is notified, giving a feeling of celebration, so that a vivid performance can be provided with the excitement in the introduction part and the feeling of celebration in the epilogue part, and in the series of flows in the notification effect, the beauty of the display can be prevented by switching to a background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the reel completes its return movement to the initial position in the epilogue part. In addition, since the sound effect and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the rise of the reel, the reel moves and the flow in which the epilogue part is executed can be made to look smooth, and even if the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the change in the subtitles easy to understand, making the switching of the subtitles easy to understand, and as a result, the flow of the executed series of performances can be made to look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (33)] (2020-407)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which the game is notified of the game being controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect executed when it is determined that the game will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until the game is notified of whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a second epilogue part in which the game is not controlled to the advantageous state,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The light emission control means
controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to a common introduction part in both an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will be made to the advantageous state and an introduction part in a notification performance executed when it is determined that the control will not be made to the advantageous state;
in the first epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part;
in the second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data is set shorter than the average time from when one luminance data is used in the luminance data table corresponding to the second epilogue part until it is switched to the next luminance data.
[Drawings] Figures 178-181, 261, and 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, the first epilogue part that is executed when a win occurs changes the color of the frame lamp at shorter intervals than the second epilogue part that is executed when a loss occurs, so that the player can easily understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. Furthermore, by making the lighting of the frame lamp in the first epilogue part more emphasized than when it is a miss, while making the lighting of the frame lamp in the second epilogue part more subdued than when it is a hit, the epilogue part can be made to look good, and even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the changes in the subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances being performed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (34)] (2020-408)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene where the first dialogue subtitle is displayed for the first dialogue sound emitted by the character, and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed for the second dialogue sound emitted by the character.
In the specific scene, display of the second serif subtitle is started while the first serif subtitle is being displayed, and then the display of the first serif subtitle is finished and the second serif subtitle is displayed. It becomes a state where
A fade effect is applied to at least one of the time when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and the time when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts,
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] Figures 178 to 181, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table used to move the movable objects is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, creating a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story unfolds. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, and by creating a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, it will be more accurate depending on the flash mode. By intuitively conveying this to the player, and then giving the player a sense of congratulation without overemphasizing it in a smooth manner, it is possible to suitably show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue. Even when the subtitles are displayed, the fade effect makes it easier to understand the change in subtitles, making it easier to understand the change in subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to better show the flow of the series of performances being performed. It becomes possible.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (35)] (2020-409)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, a dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a dialogue subtitle is not displayed.
The number of lines spoken by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
A ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than a ratio of dialogue subtitles displayed for dialogue sounds uttered by a character in an introduction part of the first notification performance;
The rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the epilogue part of the second notification performance is higher than the rate at which dialogue subtitles are displayed for lines uttered by a character in the introduction part of the second notification performance.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figures 178 to 181
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype the player up until the result is announced, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of flows in the notification effect, the epilogue part is designed to have a higher display ratio of dialogue subtitles to dialogue sounds compared to the introduction part, making it easier to understand what the character is saying and enhancing the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Furthermore, even if the subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the changes in the subtitles, and as a result, the flow of the series of effects being executed can be better seen.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (36)] (2020-410)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance execution means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance for notifying whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, a result/failure notification part in which the result is notified, an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result/failure notification, and a re-selection part that is executed after the epilogue part,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The re-draw part includes a first half part and a second half part,
The performance execution means includes:
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the second advantageous state, a first replay performance can be executed, among a plurality of types of replay performances, in which a first symbol is displayed in a first half part, and then the first symbol is replaced with another symbol, and a second symbol is displayed in a second half part.
When it is determined that the replay is to be controlled to the first advantageous state, a second re-draw performance is executed among the plurality of types of re-draw performance, in which the replacement display is executed in a first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in a second half part;
The first re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the second symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The second re-selection effect is an effect in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols during the period from when the replacement display is started in the first half part to when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part,
The light emission control means
In an epilogue part, the light emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for achieving a rainbow light emitting mode;
In the re-drawing part, switching from the brightness data table for making the rainbow light-emitting mode to a brightness data table corresponding to a first re-drawing performance or a brightness data table corresponding to a second re-drawing performance, and controlling the light-emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-drawing performance or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-drawing performance;
At a specific timing in the latter half part, switching from the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-selection effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-selection effect to a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode, controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode, and controlling the light emitting means by continuing to use the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent pattern determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the luminance data table for achieving a rainbow light emission mode is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the luminance data table corresponding to the fanfare performance.
[Drawings] Figures 176 to 182
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to heighten the player's sense of elation until the result of the win/loss notification is announced, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is announced to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. During the series of flows in the notification effect, in the re-draw part, when the re-draw effect is performed, a switching display is performed using all of the symbols that can be replaced (promoted) by the re-draw effect, thereby suitably exciting the player, and at a specific timing in the re-draw part (the timing after the symbols are enlarged and displayed), a brightness data table that emits light in rainbow is displayed. Then, even when the pattern stops (when the pattern determination command is sent), the brightness data table is not switched, and the brightness data table that emits rainbow light continues to be used, thereby preventing the light emission mode from switching during the short period when the pattern is stopped, which could result in a poor appearance, or flickering caused by the light emission switching, which could dissatisfy the player, and making the epilogue part and re-lottery part look good.Furthermore, even when subtitles are displayed overlapping each other, the fade effect makes the changes in the subtitles easier to see, making it easier to see the switching of subtitles, and as a result, it is possible to make the flow of the series of performances being executed look better.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (37)] (2020-411)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
In the introduction part, there is a specific scene in which the character's dialogue sound and the action sound corresponding to the character's action are output,
In the specific scene, a dialogue sound uttered by a character is outputted louder than an action sound corresponding to the action of the character;
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 165 to 167, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game is controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result is notified, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. In the series of events in the notification effect, a physical sound is output as part of the effect in the introduction part to bring out the reality of the effect, and when the dialogue sound and the physical sound overlap, the dialogue sound is output. By outputting it in a large size, the contents of the presentation can be easily conveyed to the player, and further, by positioning the reduced pattern on the edge of the screen while the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the image of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed, and when the image of the winning epilogue part finishes being played and the pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the pattern display, the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be displayed in a favorable manner. As a result, the flow of the series of presentations being executed can be displayed better.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (38)] (2020-412)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The introduction part is
A scene where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and dialogue subtitles are displayed for the dialogue sound,
It consists of a scene in which the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output, and a dialogue subtitle for the dialogue sound is not displayed,
The brightness data table used in scenes where the dialogue sound emitted by the character is output and the dialogue subtitles for the dialogue sound are not displayed is configured so that the brightness data using the emitting color corresponding to the character changes in response to the character's action. The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figures 168 to 170, Figure 183, Figure 213, Figure 214
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Even in scenes where subtitles are not displayed for dialogue sounds, the effect can be emphasized by the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, and furthermore, when the video of the winning epilogue part is playing, the reduced symbols can be placed on the edge of the screen. By positioning it, it does not disturb the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part has finished developing and the symbol is displayed, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. However, by switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the appearance of the symbols, the jackpot symbols can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be suitably shown. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (39)] (2020-413)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
Up to the success/failure notification part, the movable body advances from the first position to the second position on the front side of the display means, thereby notifying the change of the scene,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. End the effect display for body movement, display the display corresponding to the scene after switching,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, the luminance data table for moving the movable body is switched to a luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching, and the luminance data table corresponding to the scene after switching is used to control the light emitting means. ,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the later scene,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figures 171, 172, 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, we can provide a well-rounded performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part, and in the sequence of the announcement performance, the characters are By switching to the background display corresponding to the scene after switching before the return operation to the initial position is completed, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, during the ascent of the accessory, the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the scene after switching, so the flow of the accessory moving and the introduction part being executed smoothly. Furthermore, when the image of the winning epilogue part is playing, by positioning the reduced symbol at the edge of the screen, it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the development of the image of the winning epilogue part ends. When drawing out symbols, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed in a continuous manner using the edges of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the display of symbols, thereby emphasizing the jackpot symbols and making it easier for players to see. The epilogue part can be shown suitably. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to symbol confirmation (40)] (2020-414)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
sound output means;
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body advances to the second position, and displays an effect for movable body movement when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. Finish displaying effects for body movement, display a display corresponding to the epilogue part, and after the movable body retreats to the first position, display subtitles for dialogue sounds emitted by the character,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and the light emission control means controls the light emission means when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position. While retracting to the position, switching from the brightness data table for moving the movable body to a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part, and controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
The sound output means outputs a sound for moving the movable body when the movable body advances to the second position, and outputs an epilogue sound while the movable body is retreating from the second position to the first position. Outputs the sound corresponding to the part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control.
[Drawings] Figure 173, Figure 174, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. By switching to the background display corresponding to the epilogue part before the accessory completes its return operation to the initial position, the aesthetic appearance of the display can be prevented. In addition, since the sound effects and the brightness data table of the game effect lamp 9 are switched to those corresponding to the epilogue part during the ascent of the accessory, the movement of the accessory and the execution of the epilogue part can be seen smoothly. In addition, when the image of the winning epilogue part is playing, by positioning the reduced symbol at the edge of the screen, the image of the winning epilogue part is not obstructed, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the decorative symbols are enlarged and displayed in a continuous manner using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen, and the brightness data table is also switched in conjunction with the display of the symbols, thereby emphasizing the jackpot symbols and showing them to the player. This allows the epilogue part to be shown appropriately. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (41)] (2020-415)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introduction part until it is notified whether or not the vehicle will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a first epilogue part in which it is announced that the
The notification effect that is executed when it is determined that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state includes an introductory part until it is announced whether or not the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, and a notification effect that the system will not be controlled to the advantageous state. and a second epilogue part in which the
The display means is
In the first epilogue part, a decorative pattern is displayed on the edge side of the display area, and a story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part ends,
Enlarging and displaying the decorative pattern using the center of the display area at a timing related to the end of the display in the story development corresponding to the first epilogue part,
The light emission control means includes:
In both the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state and the introduction part in the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control is not in the advantageous state. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to a common introduction part;
In the first epilogue part, when a story development corresponding to the first epilogue part is displayed, the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means, and then a decorative pattern is displayed. When an enlarged display is performed using the center of the area, the luminance data table corresponding to the first epilogue part is switched to the luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to display the light emitting means. control,
in a second epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part;
The average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the first epilogue part to the next brightness data is the average time from when brightness data 1 is used in the brightness data table corresponding to the second epilogue part. It is set shorter than the average time required to switch to the next brightness data.
[Drawings] Figure 183, Figure 261, Figure 262
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the sense of blessing in the epilogue part. In the first epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, the lighting color of the frame lamp changes at shorter intervals than in the second epilogue part that is executed when the player loses, so it is easier for the player to understand that he or she has won based on the lighting pattern of the frame lamp. I can tell you. Furthermore, in the first epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is emphasized more than when you lose, while in the second epilogue part, the lighting of the frame lamp is made calmer than when you win, making the epilogue part look more suitable. In addition, when the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is placed at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is released. When playing, the jackpot symbol is emphasized and shown to the player by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edges of the screen and the center of the screen, and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the display of the symbols. This allows the epilogue part to be shown appropriately. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (42)] (2020-416)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A movable body,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect includes an introduction part until it is announced whether the control is to be made into the advantageous state, a notification part where the judgment is made or not, and a part where the control is made to be in the advantageous state after the notification is made. and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the
In the success/failure notification part of the notification performance that is executed when it is determined that the control will be in the advantageous state, the movable body advances from the first position to a second position on the front side of the display means,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the success/failure reporting part, when the movable body advances to the second position, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for movable body movement;
In the epilogue part, when a story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is used to control the light emitting means, and then a decorative pattern is displayed using the center of the display area. When an enlarged display is performed, switching from a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and controlling the light emitting means using the luminance data table for enlarged display;
The brightness data table for moving the movable body is configured such that brightness data representing chromatic colors and brightness data representing achromatic colors are sequentially used,
The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is configured such that brightness data representing a plurality of chromatic colors including brightness data representing a first chromatic color and brightness data representing a second chromatic color are sequentially used.
[Drawings] Figure 183, Figure 263
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a sharp performance with the elation in the introduction part and the feeling of blessing in the epilogue part. The brightness data table used to move the movable objects is configured to alternate between chromatic and achromatic colors, creating a rainbow that emits light in a flash mode, and then the story unfolds. The brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part used in the epilogue part is configured to use chromatic colors sequentially without intervening achromatic colors, and by creating a rainbow that emits light in a smooth manner, it will be more accurate depending on the flash mode. By intuitively conveying this to the player, and then using a smooth manner to give a sense of blessing without overemphasizing it, it is possible to show the flow from the win/fail notification to the epilogue in a good manner, and furthermore, the winning epilogue part. When the image is flowing, the reduced symbol is placed at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part has finished developing and the symbols are released, it is placed at the edge of the screen. By enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the center of the screen and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the appearance of the symbols, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part ideal. can be shown. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (43)] (2020-417)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
It is possible to perform a notification effect to notify whether or not the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It consists of an epilogue part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. Control,
The notification performance includes a first notification performance and a second notification performance,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, dialogue sounds emitted by the characters are output,
In both the first notification performance and the second notification performance, there are times when dialogue subtitles are displayed in response to dialogue sounds emitted by the character, and times when dialogue subtitles are not displayed.
The number of lines uttered by the character is different between the first notification performance and the second notification performance,
The ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the epilogue part of the first notification performance is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character in the introduction part of the first notification performance. high,
In the epilogue part of the second notification performance, the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds emitted by the character is higher than the ratio of displaying dialogue subtitles to the dialogue sounds produced by the character in the introduction part of the second notification performance. expensive.
[Drawings] Figure 175, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. Compared to the introductory part, by making the dialogue subtitle display ratio higher than that of the dialogue sound, it becomes easier to understand what the characters are saying, which increases the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. , When the image of the winning epilogue part is flowing, the reduced symbol is placed at the edge of the screen so that it does not interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part has finished developing and the symbol is put out. , by enlarging and displaying the decorative symbols in a continuous manner using the edges of the screen and the center of the screen, and switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the display of the symbols, it is possible to emphasize the jackpot symbols and show them to the player; The epilogue part can be shown suitably. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP reach start to design confirmation (44)] (2020-418)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a display means;
A performance execution means,
multiple light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a brightness data table composed of brightness data,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a notification performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled;
The notification effect is executed in the introduction part until the propriety of being controlled to the advantageous state is notified, and after the notification of the propriety or not, and when it is determined that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous condition. It is composed of an epilogue part that is executed, and a re-lottery part that is executed after the epilogue part,
The display means is
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area, and the story development corresponding to the epilogue part is displayed.
After that, the display in the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to ending the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part,
When displaying the decorative pattern in an enlarged manner using the center of the display area, the luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a luminance data table for enlarged display, and the luminance data table for enlarged display is used to turn on the light emitting means. control,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state,
The re-lottery part includes the first half part and the second half part,
The performance execution means is
When it is determined to be controlled to the second advantageous state, among the multiple types of re-lottery effects, after displaying the first symbol in the first half part, a replacement display is performed in which the first symbol is replaced with another symbol. It is possible to execute the first re-lottery effect in which the second symbol is displayed in the second half,
When it is determined that the first advantageous state is controlled, a second part of the plurality of types of re-lottery effects in which the replacement display is performed in the first half part and the first symbol is displayed again in the second half part. It is possible to perform a re-lottery performance,
The first re-lottery performance is a performance in which all other symbols are used to perform the replacement display from the start of the replacement display in the first half part until the second symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The second re-lottery performance is a performance in which the replacement display is performed using all other symbols between the time when the replacement display is started in the first half part and the time when the first symbol is displayed in the second half part. can be,
The light emission control means includes:
In the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for a rainbow light emission mode,
In the re-lottery part, the brightness data table for the rainbow lighting mode is switched to the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect to correspond to the first re-lottery effect. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance or a brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery performance;
At a specific timing in the second half part, the brightness data table corresponding to the first re-lottery effect or the brightness data table corresponding to the second re-lottery effect is switched to the brightness data table for setting the rainbow light emission mode, and the rainbow light emission mode is set. controlling the light emitting means using a brightness data table for the rainbow light emitting mode, and continuously controlling the light emitting means using the brightness data table for achieving the rainbow light emission mode during the subsequent symbol determination period;
At a timing related to the start of the fanfare performance, the brightness data table for the rainbow light emission mode is switched to a brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table corresponding to the fanfare performance. .
[Drawings] Figure 176, Figure 177, Figure 182, Figure 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, an introductory part is provided and the excitement until the win/fail notification is provided, increasing the player's sense of exhilaration and notifying the player of a win. By providing an epilogue part after the event and giving a sense of blessing, it is possible to provide a well-balanced performance with the elation in the introduction part and the blessing in the epilogue part. When performing a re-lottery performance, by displaying all the symbols that may be replaced (promoted) by the re-lottery performance, it is possible to appropriately stimulate the players, and the re-lottery performance At the specific timing of the part (timing after the pattern is enlarged), switch to the brightness data table that emits rainbow light, and then also change the brightness data table when the pattern stops (timing when the pattern confirmation command is sent). By continuing to use a brightness data table that emits rainbow light without switching, the light emitting mode changes during a short period when the symbol is stopped, resulting in a poor appearance, and the flickering caused by switching the light emitting, making it difficult to play. The epilogue part and the re-lottery part can be shown appropriately by preventing dissatisfaction among the players, and furthermore, the reduced symbols can be positioned at the edge of the screen when the winning epilogue part video is being played. When the image of the winning epilogue part is finished and the symbol is displayed without disturbing the image of the winning epilogue part, the decorative symbol is enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge of the screen and the center of the screen. By switching the brightness data table in conjunction with the payout, the jackpot symbol can be emphasized and shown to the player, and the winning epilogue part can be suitably shown. As a result, it becomes possible to better show the flow of a series of effects to be executed.

[SP Reach Start ~ Pattern Confirmation (45)] (2020-419)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means;
A plurality of light emitting means;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission means,
the light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table configured with luminance data;
It is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is to be controlled,
The notification performance includes an introduction part until the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified, and an epilogue part that is executed when it is determined that the advantageous state will be controlled after the result of the control to the advantageous state is notified,
In the introductory part, there is a specific scene in which a first dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a first dialogue sound uttered by a character, and a second dialogue subtitle is displayed in response to a second dialogue sound uttered by the character;
In the specific scene, while the first dialogue subtitle is being displayed, the second dialogue subtitle is started to be displayed, and then the display of the first dialogue subtitle is ended and the second dialogue subtitle is displayed;
a fade effect is applied to at least one of when the display of the first dialogue subtitle ends and when the display of the second dialogue subtitle starts;
The display means includes:
In the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is displayed at the edge of the display area while displaying the story development corresponding to the epilogue part;
After that, the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part ends,
At a timing related to the end of the display of the story development corresponding to the epilogue part, the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area;
The light emission control means
in the epilogue part, controlling the light emitting means using a luminance data table corresponding to the epilogue part;
When the decorative pattern is enlarged and displayed using the center of the display area, the brightness data table corresponding to the epilogue part is switched to a brightness data table for enlarged display, and the light emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for enlarged display.
[Drawings] Figures 178 to 181, 183
[Effect] In a gaming machine equipped with a notification effect that notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, an introduction part is provided to hype up the player until the result of the win is notified, thereby increasing the player's sense of elation, and an epilogue part is provided after the win is notified to give a sense of celebration, thereby providing a well-balanced presentation with the sense of elation in the introduction part and the sense of celebration in the epilogue part. Even if subtitles are displayed overlapping each other in the series of events in the notification effect, the fade effect makes it easy to see the changes in the subtitles, making it easy to see when the subtitles change. Furthermore, when the image of the winning epilogue part is being played, the reduced patterns are positioned on the edge of the screen so as not to interfere with the image of the winning epilogue part, and when the image of the winning epilogue part is played out and the patterns are displayed, the decorative patterns are enlarged and displayed continuously using the edge and center of the screen, and the brightness data table is switched in conjunction with the pattern display, so that the big win pattern can be emphasized and shown to the player, making the winning epilogue part look good. As a result, it is possible to better visualize the flow of the series of effects being performed.

<Example of time-saving control without going through a hit>
Next, an example of executing time-saving control without going through a hit (a big hit, a small hit, etc.) as a time-saving state will be described.
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7A. In other words, the time-saving state may be controlled to not pass through a win (big win, small win, etc.).

(A2) In addition, the time-saving symbols described above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using random numbers dedicated to the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small win symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may also be used in conjunction with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor will there be a lottery to determine the number of time reductions.

(A5) In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing a time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value. The lottery probabilities of these time saving symbols are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) Also, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether you use a dedicated random number or another random number, It is acceptable to win a prize in the winning opening (the winning opening, the second starting winning opening).

(A7) In addition, for winning when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is conducted, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. Also, a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery of time-saving symbols is carried out using a structure, when the small winning symbol is used together with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) depends on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Avoid changing.

(A9) In addition, regarding winning when drawing time-saving symbols, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing. In this case, a specific jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

(A10) The timing of determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be performed after the determination of a jackpot. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is performed only in the low probability low base state. However, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already established, the number of times the time-saving symbol is reset or the lottery is not performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) Also, regarding the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time saving times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

(A12) Furthermore, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2.

(A13) Furthermore, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times saved may be given differently depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

(A14) In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) is executed, and the number of times is set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. good. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) Furthermore, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

(A18) In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in the game state in which the structure is operated (for example, the small winning state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a predetermined number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the gaming machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

(A20) In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated is updated.

(A21) In addition, the pattern determination time for the time-saving pattern may be set to a time different from the pattern determination time for the other patterns.

(Other time-saving control examples using time-saving symbols)
As other time saving control using time saving symbols, the following control may be executed.

(B1) In the normal state, game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern (special display result), and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the time-saving state (even if the time-saving pattern is displayed, game state switching control such as overwriting the time-saving state (such as the time-saving state occurring again) may not be performed). In addition, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the time-saving state (for example, for decorative patterns, a special pattern is displayed as the time-saving pattern in the normal state and a general losing pattern is displayed in the time-saving state). This allows suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is changed or not).

(B2) In a gaming machine that controls (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol displays a common time-saving symbol in the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol is in the normal state. Different symbols may be displayed as a display result depending on the time-saving state and the time-saving state (for example, in the normal state, the decorative design displays a special symbol corresponding to the time-saving symbol, but in the time-saving state, it displays a simple losing symbol, etc.). (e.g., not displaying the pattern corresponding to the pattern). This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display results of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and can suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B3) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), in the normal state, a presentation is executed that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern), but in the time-saving state, the presentation that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern) may not be executed. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the presentation in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In the gaming machine that controls (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative pattern (the time to maintain the display state after displaying the fixed surface result) is now different between the normal state and the time-saving state. May be controlled. This prevents the player from feeling a loss due to the display of decorative symbols in a time-saving state, and can suppress a decline in game interest.

(B5) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when switching to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when switching to time-saving control is not switched to), and during the time-saving state, right-hit play is performed in response to a right-hit notification (an indication instructing right-hit), until all variable displays based on the reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hit notification (an indication instructing left-hit). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing an effect depending on whether the state is switched or not).

(B6) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when transitioning to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when not transitioning to time-saving control), and during the time-saving state, right-hitting play is performed in response to a right-hitting notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hitting notification (a notification instructing left-hitting). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is transitioned or not).

(B7) Execute the left-handed hit notification in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation storage information stored when the time saving state ends. It's okay. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B8) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and when a win (small win, big win) occurs in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern through the presentation of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, when there is reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern and when there is no reserved memory information, it may be possible to execute a different effect after executing a common effect (for example, when the fourth of four remaining reserved memories has reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern, a common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time-saving state can be executed up to the variable display based on the third reserved memory information, and a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect can be executed with the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) An effect upon transition to the time saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reservation memory information stored when the time saving state ends, and a variable display based on the remaining reservation memory information. The notification mode of the right-hand hit notification that is executed in response to a win is different from the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when it is executed. You can do it like this. As a result, the performance changes depending on the gaming state, so it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining storage information stored when the time saving state ends (the display state is maintained after displaying the final surface result) The final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed may be the same. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining pending storage information stored when the time saving state ends, right-handed notification is not executed, and the variable display based on the remaining pending storage information is executed. When the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed on the display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. As a result, instructions on how to hit the ball are given in a suitable manner, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and making the game more interesting.

(B13) Based on the fact that a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving symbol is displayed with a special symbol in the normal state, game control is performed to shift from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state), and the variable display result is small. It is possible to perform a common specific performance (reach performance, preview performance) in the case of a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a winning pattern or jackpot pattern, and in the case of a time-saving pattern (special display result), and multiple The proportion of time-saving symbols (special display results) may vary depending on which common specific performance is executed among the types of common specific performances. Then, when the display result of the time-saving symbol is displayed in the variable display, the right hit notification may be executed during the initial period of the start of the next variable display. Thereby, it is possible to suitably control the performance according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific performance, the display result may be a winning symbol (specific display result) or a time-saving symbol (special display result). Thereby, variations in the performance results of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B15) The CPU 103 for game control uses a common fluctuation pattern in the case of a winning symbol (specific display result), the case of a time-saving symbol (special display result), and the case of a losing symbol (predetermined display result). Even if the production control CPU 120 receives a command specifying the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 can select a different production in the variable display depending on the type of symbol specification command that specifies the display result. may be made executable. As a result, variations in the effects of the variable display are enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(B16) After the common specific effect is executed, a special effect can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, there may be cases in which a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, and cases in which it is not executed (for example, multiple types of special effects may be executed). (For example, when performing a super reach performance that has a high expectation of winning, a special performance is not executed.) As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) Depending on the type of the common specific performance, the degree of expectation (ratio) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) when the special performance is executed may be different. As a result, the feeling of anticipation of winning is maintained without execution of a performance that only excessively stimulates the time-saving state, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

(B19) The expectation level (proportion) of a time-saving pattern (special display result) may be different depending on the presentation mode of a predetermined presentation different from the common specific presentation (for example, a presentation that displays an active display (a display that has moved from the display position of a pending display to another display position, and that performs a presentation that can suggest the expectation level of a win corresponding to the currently active variable display) that can change the display mode depending on the expectation level of a win)). This allows for an increased interest in the game since a presentation that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state is not executed and the expectation of a win is maintained.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached, an effect that indicates a winning symbol (specific display result) (such as a special jackpot with a higher play value than the time-saving state) may be executed after an effect that suggests the time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached (such as a time-saving suggestion effect). This increases the interest in the game because the expectation of a win is maintained without excessively emphasizing only the time-saving state.

(B21) The game control CPU 103 can control a time-saving state (special state) with a different number of time-saving times (duration of time-saving times) depending on the type of the multiple types of time-saving patterns (special display results) provided (for example, first time-saving pattern: 50 time-saving times, second time-saving pattern: 100 time-saving times, etc.), and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which the number of time-saving times (duration) granted when the time-saving pattern stops varies depending on the type of presentation executed (for example, the type of reach presentation, etc.). This allows the player's attention to be focused on the number of time-saving times that will follow depending on the type of presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B22) Controls the progress of the game by controlling the game to shift from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the fact that the variable display result (special display result) of the time-saving symbol is displayed with the special symbol in the normal state. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means), and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. The transmitted commands include a special command that can specify transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and the production control CPU 120 sends multiple types of commands including the special command. When received, based on the pre-reading of the pending memory information, it is specified that a variable display that can shift to a time-saving state (special state) will be executed. Execution may be restricted (not executed at all, only rarely executed, etc.). Thereby, performance control can be suitably executed according to the gaming state when the time-saving symbols (special display results) are displayed.

(B23) It is also possible to restrict the execution of a pre-reading preview performance for reserved memory information that occurs after reserved memory information that has been identified as a variable display that can transition (control) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) based on a pre-reading of the reserved memory information. In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to execute a performance of a common aspect as a pre-reading preview performance during the execution restriction of such a pre-reading preview performance. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state as the gaming state transitions.

(B24) In both cases where the variable display based on the reserved memory information for the pre-reading target is a variable display that displays a time-saving pattern (special display result) and a variable display that appears to display a time-saving pattern (special display result) but does not, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information may be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes.

(B25) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a performance whose expectation level is higher than a specific expectation level (for example, if the expectation level of the color of the pending display is blue < green < red, the prefetched preview performance is suspended) (such as not changing the display color to red). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(B26) The prefetched preview performance while the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restricted does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, if the expectation level of the pending display color is blue < green < red, the color of the pending display is set to red. etc.). Thereby, by restricting performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state from being executed as the gaming state changes, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times resulting in a predetermined display result, such as the number of variable display times of failure)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss) that have resulted in a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) has continued has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times). Note that, as the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss display result has continued has reached a special number.

(C1) After the first variable display by the first special symbol is performed and after the second variable display by the second special symbol is performed, the game can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable display result has become a specific display result, and the numerical information of the number of times the variable display has been executed that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small win display result that does not become a big win, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and when a special condition is established in which the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (the number of times it continues) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.) based on the numerical information, the game can be controlled to transition from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state). The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result has been achieved continues to be updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, making it easier for the player to be rescued by the time-saving state and increasing the player's motivation to play. This makes it possible to optimally realize rescue for players through time-saving states.

(C2) The special condition is established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (for example, 1000 times, etc.). You may also do so. Thereby, when display results that are unfavorable to the player continue, the player can be rescued by shifting to the time saving state (special state), so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when a variable display is executed even in a state other than the normal state (a high probability state, a time-saving state). This allows the player to be appropriately rescued when a series of display results that are unfavorable to the player are displayed.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied. Such an initialization condition may be established by being controlled to the advantageous state. Thereby, it is possible to suppress bailing out when there is no need to bail out the player, such as when the player is in an advantageous situation, and it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control for transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when the time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player is reached, and to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. This effectively makes it possible to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(C7) When a power outage occurs due to a power outage, etc., various data including the numerical information can be stored as a backup, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is met, the data stored in the backup can be stored. The data may be initialized, and the numerical information may be initialized when the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, the numerical information backed up at the time of power outage is initialized at the time of data initialization and does not remain, thereby suppressing disadvantages to the gaming parlor side.

(C8) The time-saving state (special state) for a period of more than the special number (for example, 1000 times or more) can be controlled based on the numerical information becoming the special number (for example, 1000 times or more), and during the time-saving state (special state), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number, and different effects can be executed in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in an extremely unfavorable state such as being controlled in the second time-saving state (special state), it is possible to change the appearance of the effects, such as shortening the variable display time in the second time-saving state more than in the first time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. It is also possible to execute similar effects in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state) without executing such effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly aware that they are in an extremely unfavorable state, such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(C9) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process related to variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and the special condition is satisfied when the value of the special figure process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value. A third process for controlling to a time saving state (special state) based on the above is executed. Also. It is possible to separate the game balls into the first route (left side gaming area) and the second route (right side game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit in the first route, and in the time saving state (special state), the game ball is hit in the second route. A game is played by hitting a game ball into a path. During execution of the third process, although the time saving state (special state) is not controlled, a notification to the effect that firing should be made to the second route (for example, a right-hand firing notification by a right-hand firing lamp, etc.) is made. You may also do so. Further, while the third process is being executed, a notification may be made to notify that the time saving state (special state) will be entered. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, by lighting the right-handed lamp by the CPU 103 for game control, it is possible to perform a presentation that notifies the firing direction earlier (before the actual time saving change starts) when actually transitioning to the time saving state (special state). becomes.

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is met, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. This gives priority to control to an advantageous state over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the result is not more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when variable display is started, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the numerical information becomes a specific value. After the variable display ends (the next variable starts, waiting for a customer), the time saving state (special state) is controlled, and when the updated numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to the special number, the special information (special number reached) flag) from the first numerical value to the second numerical value (flag set), and when controlling to the time saving state (special state), the special information concerned is changed from the second numerical value to the first numerical value (flag reset). It's okay. Thereby, by managing the special information, control for transitioning to the time saving state (special state) can be suitably executed.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 selects and determines a variation pattern of the variable display, and selects and decides a variation pattern of symbol confirmation time that is different between when the special information is the first information and when the second information is the special information. You can do it like this. Thereby, when the variable display of the special number of times is performed, it becomes possible to suitably perform the effect.

(C13) When the value of the special figure process flag is the first numerical value (0 to 2), the first process regarding variable display is executed, and when the value of the special figure process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, ), the second process related to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special pattern process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the special condition is established. A third process for controlling to the original time saving state (special state) is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute the performance based on the command. Then, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variation pattern) depending on whether the value of the special figure process flag is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when in the special state. . This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, game control becomes easier. Then, by changing the command according to the game state identified at that time, the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) can execute suitable performance control according to the game state.

(C14) When the special condition is established during the time-saving state (special state), the value of the special chart process flag may be set to a fourth value different from the first value, the second value, and the third value, so that the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex.

(C15) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) or whether the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time is executed than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game state). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C16) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the specific display result (winning symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above-mentioned special display result (variable number of display times). It may be possible to make it possible to execute the same effect when the condition) is satisfied and the time saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, the time saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is equal to or greater than the special number). (For example, the variation time is the same when the time is shortened and when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) As a result, new performance data and the like are not required, so the development cost does not increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time saving state (special state), there is a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol) being displayed, and a case where the time saving state (special state) is controlled based on the above special display result (time saving symbol), and a case where the above special condition (variable display number of times is It may be possible to perform a different effect depending on when the condition) is satisfied and the time-saving state (special state) is controlled (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display number is greater than or equal to the special number of times). (For example, when the time is shortened, the fluctuation time is shorter than when the time is shortened after the jackpot ends.) This makes it possible to perform a time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, and improves the interest in the game.

(C18) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute the same effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This does not require new effect data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C19) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 can send predetermined information (a RAM clear command at cold start, and a command notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time-saving state at hot start) to the presentation control CPU 120 based on the backed up data, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute suggestive presentations (such as a different early morning number roll, a different background image, or a presentation that suggests whether a 100-spin variation is far or close) regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on, based on receiving the predetermined information. This gives players a motivation to play early in the morning, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine while preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 may transmit specific information (a command capable of identifying information related to the time-saving state) to the presentation control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 may execute a special presentation (such as a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state count) in relation to the control to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. The specific information may include first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown presentation information) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, 127), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 spins) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). This can reduce the risk of the player unknowingly losing money by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and can also suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The presentation control CPU 120 can execute a suggestion presentation (for time-saving state suggestion presentation control) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state (special state) when a special condition is met, based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 300 times) that are less than the special number of times, and can execute a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 100 times) that are less than the first predetermined number are executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. This reduces the risk of the player unknowingly incurring losses by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances (such as different performances when transitioning to the time-saving state) when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for variable display count) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed and the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can know whether the backup-stored data has been initialized or not based on the difference in performance, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, it is possible to know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of elements for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(C23) It is possible to back up and store various data including the numerical information when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the game control CPU 103 can store the data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation when the power is turned on is satisfied. , the backup stored data can be initialized, and the production control CPU 120 sets the special condition (variable) after the backup stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed. When the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the conditions (conditions for the number of display times), and after the specific display result (winning symbol) is displayed after the backup stored data is initialized, the special state is Different performances are executed when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of conditions and after the time saving state (special state) is controlled (the performance after shifting to the time saving state is different, etc.). This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed on the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, since the player can determine whether or not the backup stored data has been initialized based on the different effects, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that allows the setting of the jackpot probability to be changed, the setting will not be changed. Since it is possible to grasp that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed, the number of factors for guessing the settings increases, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving pattern, a jackpot, or a miss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a winning prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a winning prize is won.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine (for example, a big bonus, The present invention is also applicable to slot machines that are equipped with one or more of regular bonuses, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonuses, etc.).

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, this also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

Other embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention are described below based on examples.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-0 is
The first identification information (e.g., the first special figure) or the second identification information (e.g., the second special figure) is displayed variably based on the establishment of the starting condition (e.g., starting prize winning), and the variable display specifies the A gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when displayed as a display result (e.g., jackpot),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on the variable display being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result as a special state. can be,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (for example, a time-saving acquisition chance effect) that suggests that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result,
As a suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, time saving acquisition chance effect A) that suggests that the variable display of the first identification information is displayed with a predetermined display result in a non-special state, and control from a special state to a non-special state. A second suggestion effect (for example, time-saving acquisition chance effect B) that suggests that the variable display of the second identification information will be displayed as a predetermined display result for a predetermined period after the second identification information is displayed can be executed;
The period from the start of the second suggestion effect until it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result is longer than the period from the start of the first suggestion effect until it is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result. short (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-80, the execution period T1 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance A is longer than the execution period T2 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a predetermined display result is displayed in a non-special state, the period from which the predetermined display result is controlled to the special state is lengthened, thereby suitably increasing the player's sense of expectation. In addition, if the predetermined display result is displayed during a period after the end of the special state where there is a risk of giving a negative impression due to the end of the special state, it is possible to return to the special state at a good tempo without executing the suggestive effect. Since it is possible to suitably dispel a player's sense of regret, the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
In a non-special state, when the variable display of the first identification information becomes a predetermined display result, the result display period from when the display result is displayed until the next variable display can start is longer than the result display period when the variable display of the second identification information becomes a predetermined display result in a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-35, when the variable display result of the variable display of the first special chart when the game state is in the normal state is a time-saving miss, the pattern determination period is 20 seconds or 81.4 seconds, whereas immediately after the time-saving state ends, that is, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special chart when the game state is in the normal state is a time-saving miss, the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds).
The game machine has a first path and a second path different from the first path as paths through which the game medium can flow;
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to launch the gaming medium to the second path (e.g., the right gaming area);
The means of performance execution are:
When the game is controlled to be in a special state, it is possible to execute a promotion effect that promotes the launch of the game medium to the second path (for example, a portion that displays an image of a right-hit notification on the image display device 5).
When the variable display of the first identification information becomes a predetermined display result, a promotion effect can be executed during the result display period (for example, as shown in Figs. 284-57, 284-63, and 284-64, when the variable display result of the variable display of the first special chart when the game state is in the normal state becomes a miss with time reduction, a portion that displays an image of a right hit notification on the image display device 5 during a period including the pattern determination period).
When the variable display of the second identification information becomes a predetermined display result in a predetermined period, the promotion effect is not executed during the result display period (for example, immediately after the time-saving state ends, that is, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special chart when the game state is in the normal state becomes a time-saving miss, the part where the entry effect including the display of the right-hit notification image is not executed because the pattern determination period is extremely short at 0.5 seconds).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by providing a long result display period during which no variable display is performed when transitioning from a non-special state to a special state after a specified display result, the player can be appropriately notified of the state change.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is,
The result display period when the variable display of the second identification information becomes a predetermined display result in a predetermined period is a period common to the result display period when the variable display of the second identification information becomes a display result different from the predetermined display result and is not controlled to an advantageous state in a predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-35, the pattern determination period when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special chart when the game state is immediately after the time-saving state ends (normal state) is a time-saving miss A or a time-saving miss B is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the pattern determination period when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special chart when the game state is immediately after the time-saving state ends (normal state)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably return to the special state without excessively extending the period from when a specified display result is displayed in a specified period to when the special state is controlled after the specified display result.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is,
The period from the start of the variable display in which the second identification information becomes a predetermined display result to the start of the second suggestive performance in a predetermined period is shorter than the period from the start of the variable display in which the first identification information becomes a predetermined display result to the execution of the first suggestive performance in a non-special state to the start of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-80, the period L3 from the start of the variable display to the timing when the time-saving winning chance performance starts when the time-saving winning miss A is won in the variable display based on the remaining reserve immediately after the time-saving state in the second special chart is set shorter than the period L1 from the start of the variable display to the timing when the time-saving winning chance performance starts when the time-saving winning miss A is won in the variable display of the first special chart).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably return to the special state without excessively prolonging the period until the second suggestive performance begins.

Type 1-4 gaming machines are
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestive performance (for example, a preview performance during variable display) that suggests that the control will be in an advantageous state;
It is better to perform a variable display in which the variable display of the second identification information becomes the predetermined display result in a predetermined period than to perform a variable display in which the variable display of the first identification information becomes the predetermined display result in a non-special state. There are few types of specific suggestion effects executed by the effect execution means (for example, as shown in Fig. 284-81, when the time-saving winning result A is won in the variable display of the remaining reservation in the time-saving state in the second special drawing, , the part where the number of performance patterns of the notice performance during the variable display that can be executed is smaller than when the winning time-saving A is won in the variable display of the first special symbol),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably return to the special state without excessively stirring up the specific suggestive effect.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of form 2-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A determining means (for example, CPU 103) capable of determining control to an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting shown in FIG. 284-19). the part that executes the processing),
a state control means capable of controlling a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving is applied or removed) is displayed,
A variable display pattern determined when a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in a non-special state is a variable display pattern determined when a display result is not displayed with a predetermined display result in a non-special state and is not controlled to an advantageous state. It consists of a variable display period that is different from the pattern (for example, the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is deviated from the time saving, the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is deviated) (The part that differs from the special figure fluctuation time in the case of),
The variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is such that the display result is not displayed with the predetermined display result in the non-special state in the special state after the advantageous state and is controlled to be in the advantageous state. It is composed of a common variable display period with at least one variable display pattern among the plurality of types of variable display patterns that are determined when the The special figure fluctuation time in this case is partially common to the special figure fluctuation time in the case where the variable display result of the second special figure in time saving state A is a failure),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when transitioning from a non-special state to a special state after a predetermined display result, which is more advantageous because the starting conditions are more easily satisfied than in a non-special state, a special feeling is enhanced by having a dedicated variable display pattern. In addition, there is not much change in the advantage when the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result in a situation where the special state is already controlled, so by making the variable display pattern common to other variable display patterns, Since the storage capacity of the hardware constituting the variable display pattern determining means can be reduced, the marketability of the gaming machine equipped with the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance,
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a variable display performance of performance identification information (for example, a portion where a variable display of decorative patterns can be performed in the image display device 5),
By setting the variable display performance of performance identification information to a predetermined reach mode, it is possible to execute a reach performance that suggests that the game is controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a portion where the reach performance can be displayed on the image display device 5),
Regarding the variable display of the variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state, the execution of the reach effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-21(C) In addition, in the case where the variable display result of the variable display of the first special figure when the gaming state is one of Time Saving State A, Time Saving State B, and Time Saving State C is a time saving result, the non-reach variation pattern The part where PA2-5 is selected and reach effect is not executed during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the reach effect is executed, there is a risk that the display result of the variable display will attract attention, so by restricting the execution of the reach effect, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the variable display was displayed as a predetermined display result. It can be made difficult.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is
As variable display patterns that can be determined when the special state is not controlled to an advantageous state after an advantageous state, there are multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the special symbol variation time is 50 seconds (50,000 ms) and the variable display pattern is variable. PA3-5 where the display result is a miss, PC3-3 where the special figure variation time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and the variable display result is a small hit, special figure variation time is 55 seconds (55000ms) and the variable display result is PC3-3), which will result in a loss of time saving.
The multiple types of variable display patterns include a first variable display pattern consisting of a first variable display period (for example, a variable pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is 55 seconds), and a second variable display pattern that is shorter than the first variable display period. At least a second variable display pattern configured by a display period (for example, a variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is 50 seconds),
The variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is configured with a variable display period common to the second variable display pattern (for example, as shown in a modified example). , when the variable display result of the second special figure is a loss when the gaming state is the time-saving state A1, and when the variable display result is a loss with the time-saving display, a common special figure fluctuation time (for example, 50 seconds)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by configuring the variable display period to be short, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result.

Type 2-3 gaming machines are
The result display period from when the display result is displayed until the next variable display can start is when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state, and when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state. (For example, as shown in Fig. 284-36, in time saving state A, the variable display pattern when the variable display result is A with time saving not included or B without time saving) The confirmation time is the part that is set to be the same as the variable display symbol confirmation time when the variable display result is a failure),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by preventing a situation in which the player focuses on the displayed results due to different result display periods, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to draw attention to the fact that the variable display is displayed as the predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 2-4 is,
A reserved memory means (for example, a special chart reserved memory unit 130SG151 shown in FIG. 284-12) capable of storing information related to variable display as reserved memory information is provided,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a hold notice effect (e.g., a hold display notice effect) that suggests that the hold storage means stores variable display hold storage information that results in a specific display result;
A reserved notice performance can be executed for reserved memory information related to a variable display that is not displayed in a specific display result and a predetermined display result, while a reserved notice performance is not executed for reserved memory information related to a variable display that is displayed in a predetermined display result (for example, as shown in Figs. 284-82(A), 284-82(B), and 284-82(C), a portion in which a reserved display notice performance can be executed when the variable display result is a miss and a jackpot, while a reserved display notice performance is not executed when the variable display result is a miss with time reduction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by preventing a situation in which the reserved memory information which becomes the predetermined display result becomes the target of the reserved preview performance and the player focuses on the predetermined display result, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the variable display is displayed as the predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 2-5 is,
The means of performance execution are:
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) is included,
Even when the pending memory information other than the pending memory information that is the subject of the hold notice performance is a variable display pending memory information displayed in a predetermined display result, the hold notice performance can be executed across a plurality of variable displays corresponding to a plurality of pending memory information including the variable display pending memory information displayed in the predetermined display result and the pending memory information that is the subject of the hold notice performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-84, a portion in which the hold display notice performance can be executed across a plurality of variable displays even when there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a miss with time reduction),
The hold notice performance is executed by a mode in which a similar or common display is continuously displayed on the display means across multiple variable displays (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-84, a portion in which a hold display based on a hold memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot across multiple variable displays is continuously displayed in any one of the performance patterns α, β, and γ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by drawing attention to the variable display that is the target of the hold notice performance, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-0 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
The advantageous state can be controlled to a first advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after an advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3) based on being controlled to an advantageous state, and it is also possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) based on being displayed as a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving miss) different from the specific display result when the variable display is displayed;
The effect execution means is capable of executing a first special notification effect (e.g., effect pattern D) and a second special notification effect (e.g., effect pattern E) having a higher probability of being controlled to the second advantageous state than the first special notification effect, as a special notification effect for notifying that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The execution rate of the second special notification effect is different between the special state after the advantageous state and the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-90 and FIG. 284-92 (B), in the time-saving state A1 to the time-saving state A3 and the time-saving state C2, the rate at which the variable display preview effect is executed in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E when the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is a jackpot B is different).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, for example, by making the execution rate of the second special notification effect relatively high in the special state after the advantageous state, the special feeling during consecutive wins can be enhanced, since the special state after the advantageous state is a state that is controlled after the advantageous state ends. On the other hand, by making the execution rate of the second special notification effect high during the special state after a specified display result, where the expectation of entering the advantageous state is heightened by being controlled to the special state without passing through the advantageous state, the player's expectations can be effectively increased and interest in the game can be improved, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
The performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of special notification performances (for example, a portion where a variable display notice performance can be executed in a performance pattern D and a performance pattern E),
When the special state is controlled after the advantageous state, there are more timings at which special notification effects can be executed than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, during the variable display in the time saving states A1 to A3). The execution start timing of the accurate performance pattern of the preview performance is 2, and the execution start timing of the accurate performance pattern of the preview performance during variable display in the time saving state C2 is 0),
There are more types of special notification effects that can be executed when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, the types of special notification effects that can be executed in the time saving states A1 to A3 The number of accurate performance patterns is 2, and the number of executable accurate performance patterns in time saving state C2 is 0),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after the advantageous state in which the player expects to win a series of games after the end of the advantageous state, the special notification effects are diversified, so it is possible to improve the interest during the series of games.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect at a first timing after the start of the variable display controlled to the advantageous state and at a second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-93, a portion capable of executing a notice effect during variable display from the first timing and the second timing with effect pattern D or effect pattern E);
The period during which the special state can be controlled after a predetermined display result is longer than the period during which the special state can be controlled after an advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state C2 can be controlled for 685 variable displays, while the time-saving state A1 can be controlled once, and the time-saving state A2 can be controlled for 7 variable displays).

When the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, the proportion of special notification effects executed at the first timing is higher than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, in the time saving state C2, A portion that increases the rate at which the variable display notice performance is executed in performance pattern D or performance pattern E at the first timing compared to time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special notification performance is likely to be executed at an early timing in the special state after the predetermined display result, which is controlled for a relatively long period of time, so it is possible to prevent a feeling of prolongation from occurring and suppress a decline in game interest. Can be done.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is,
As the special state after the predetermined display result, there are a first special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (e.g., one variable display) and a second special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a second period (e.g., 685 variable displays) that is longer than the first period.
When the game is controlled to a special state after the first predetermined display result, the special notification effect is executed at a lower rate than when the game is controlled to a special state after an advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state C1, the rate at which the variable display advance notice effect is executed in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E is set lower than in the time-saving state A).
When the game is controlled to a special state after the second predetermined display result, the special notification effect is executed at a higher rate than when the game is controlled to a special state after an advantageous state (for example, in the time-saving state C2, the rate at which the variable display advance notice effect is executed in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E is set higher than in the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution rate of the special notification effect is high in the special state after the second predetermined display result in which the controlled period is relatively long, so that a more interesting game can be played and interest can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 3-4 is,
As the special state after the predetermined display result, there are a first special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (e.g., one variable display) and a second special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a second period (e.g., 685 variable displays) that is longer than the first period.
The execution ratio of the second special notification effect is different between the special state after the first predetermined display result and the special state after the second predetermined display result (for example, the ratio of executing the variable display advance notice effect in the effect pattern E in the time-saving state C2 is higher than the ratio of executing the variable display advance notice effect in the effect pattern E in the time-saving state C1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, for example, by making the execution rate of the second special notification effect relatively high in the special state after the first predetermined display result, in which the period during which control to the special state is possible is short, it is possible to effectively increase the anticipation of being controlled to the second advantageous state during the special state after the first predetermined display result, while, for example, by making the execution rate relatively high in the special state after the second predetermined display result, in which the period during which control to the special state is possible is long, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a sense of dragging on caused by the fact that the special state after the second predetermined display result is not an advantageous state, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of form 4-0 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
The advantageous state can be controlled to a first advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
As a special state, when a specific condition based on a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied (e.g., the variable display count reaches 685 times), it is possible to control to a special state after a specific number of times is reached (e.g., time-saving state B), and based on the variable display being displayed as a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving), it is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2).
The effect execution means is capable of executing a first special notification effect (e.g., effect pattern D) and a second special notification effect (e.g., effect pattern E) having a higher probability of being controlled to the second advantageous state than the first special notification effect, as a special notification effect for notifying that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
The execution ratio of the second special notification effect is different between the special state after the specific number of times is reached and the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-91 and FIG. 284-92 (A), for the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C1, the execution ratio of the effect pattern E is different between the effect pattern D and the effect pattern E, which are the effect patterns of the preview effect during the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, for example, by making the execution rate of the second special notification effect relatively high in the special state after a predetermined display result, since the special state after a predetermined display result is a special state that is controlled by the variable display becoming a predetermined display result, by increasing the execution rate of the second special notification effect, the feeling of specialness when controlled to the special state after a predetermined display result can be enhanced.On the other hand, for example, by making the execution rate of the second special notification effect relatively high in the special state after a specific number of times is reached, since the special state after a specific number of times is a special state that is controlled by the variable display controlled to an advantageous state being executed a specific number of times, by increasing the execution rate of the second special notification effect, the feeling of specialness of being controlled to the advantageous state after a specific number of variable displays can be enhanced, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 4-1 is
The performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of special notification performances (for example, a portion capable of executing a variable display preview performance with performance pattern D and performance pattern E);
When the player is controlled to the special state after a predetermined display result, there are more timings at which the special notification effect can be executed than when the player is controlled to the special state after a specific number of times is reached (for example, there are two execution start timings for the winning performance pattern of the variable display advance notice effect in the time-saving state C1, and there is zero execution start timing for the winning performance pattern of the variable display advance notice effect in the time-saving state B).
When the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result, there are more types of special notification effects that can be executed than when the special state is controlled after a specific number of times is reached (for example, the number of executable winning performance patterns in the time-saving state C1 is 1, and the number of executable winning performance patterns in the time-saving state B is 0).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special state after a predetermined display result, where the expectation of entering an advantageous state is heightened by being controlled without passing through an advantageous state, the special notification presentation becomes more diverse, thereby increasing the interest in the special state after a predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 4-2 is
The effect execution means can execute the special notification effect at a first timing after the start of the variable display controlled to be advantageous and at a second timing after the first timing (for example, in FIG. 284-93 As shown in the figure, the part where the preview effect during variable display can be executed in the effect pattern D or the effect pattern E from the first timing and the second timing),
The period in which the special state can be controlled in the special state after reaching a specific number of times is longer than the special state after a predetermined display result (for example, in time-saving state B, time-saving control can be executed over 685 variable displays; , the time-saving state C1 is a part where time-saving control can be executed once),
The rate at which the special notification effect is executed at the first timing is higher when the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, in time saving state B , a part in which the rate at which the variable display notice performance is executed in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E at the first timing is made higher than in the time saving state C1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special notification performance is likely to be executed at an early timing in the special state where the controlled period is relatively long and the specific number of times reached is relatively long, so it is possible to prevent the feeling of prolongation from occurring and suppress a decline in gaming interest. can.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of form 5-0 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state as a special state, and can control the special state after a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) based on the variable display being displayed as a predetermined display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving) different from the specific display result,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and an announcement effect (e.g., a celebration effect) that announces that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The period during which the special state after the specific number of times is reached (for example, the time-saving state B) can be controlled to the special state is longer than the period during which the special state after the predetermined display result is reached (for example, the time-saving state B can execute the time-saving control over 685 variable displays, while the time-saving state C1 can execute the time-saving control over one display).
The execution patterns of the notification effects include at least a first execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a first timing without going through a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a portion in which a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second performance corresponding to a non-reach is executed during the variable display by executing a variable display in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of a non-reach jackpot), and a second execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a second timing after the first timing after going through a specific suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 50-second performance including a reach performance of the super reach δ is executed during the variable display by executing a variable display in PB3-3, which is a variable pattern of a super reach δ jackpot).
The means of performance execution are:
When the special state is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, the notification effect of the first execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate than when the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result (for example, as shown in Fig. 284-28 and Fig. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state B, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, and then a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second effect corresponding to a non-reach is executed during the variable display).
When the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result, the notification effect of the second execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate than when the special state is controlled after a specific number of times is reached (for example, as shown in Fig. 284-28 and Fig. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is a variable pattern of the Super Reach δ jackpot, and then a 50-second performance including the reach performance of the Super Reach δ is executed during the variable display, followed by a 15-second celebration performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the first execution pattern more likely to be executed during the special state after a specific number of times is reached, which is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest, and by making the second execution pattern more likely to be executed during the special state after a specified display result, in which the player's anticipation of reaching an advantageous state is heightened by being controlled to the special state without passing through an advantageous state, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation and improve the player's interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 5-1 is
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state A1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to an advantageous state,
The notification performance of the first execution pattern is executed at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after reaching a certain number of times than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, in FIG. 284-27 and As shown in Figure 284-28, when the variable display result is a jackpot in time saving state A, PB3-1 is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, PB3-2 is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern, and super reach δ is By executing the variable display in any of the variable patterns PB3-3, in the time saving state B, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach variable pattern compared to the entire time saving state A. (parts that are executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after the variable display has been executed for a specific number of times, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest by making it easier to select the first execution pattern. .

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1) that can be controlled in the special state over the first period (e.g., one variable display); There is also a special state (for example, time saving state C2) after the second predetermined display result that can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays);
The rate at which the notification effects of the first execution pattern are executed when the special state is controlled after the first predetermined display result is as follows: lower than the rate of execution;
The rate at which the notification effects of the first execution pattern are executed when the special state is controlled after the second predetermined display result is as follows: It is the same as the execution rate (for example, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state B, it is higher than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state C1) While the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern in proportion, the non-reach jackpot varies in the same proportion as when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state C2. The part where variable display is executed in pattern PB3-1),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first execution pattern is selected in the second predetermined post-display result special state in which the period in which the special state can be controlled is longer than in the first predetermined post-display result special state in which the period in which the special state can be controlled is short. By making it easier to play, it is possible to reduce the feeling of prolongation and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is
The state control means includes a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state of jackpot B) as the advantageous states. can be controlled to
The performance execution means is capable of executing a re-notification performance (for example, a promotion performance) that notifies that the control will be controlled to a second advantageous state after being notified that the first advantageous state will be controlled by the notification performance;
After reaching the specific number of times, it is better to be informed that the system will be controlled to the first advantageous state by the notification effect in the special state than after it is notified that it will be controlled to the first advantageous state by the notification effect in the non-special state. Also, there is a high rate of execution of the re-notification effect (for example, if the decorative symbols temporarily stop at an even number combination (when jackpot A is announced) during the variable display in the time saving state B, the variable display in the normal state When the decoration pattern temporarily stops with an even number of combinations (the part where the promotion effect is executed at a higher rate than when jackpot A is announced),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after reaching a specific number of times that is controlled after a specific number of variable displays are executed, even if it is announced that the control will be changed to the first advantageous state with a lower advantage, the re-notification will be Since there is a high possibility that the performance will be executed, it becomes possible to play the game with a sense of anticipation even after the notification performance is executed, so that the decrease in interest due to the notification that the control will be controlled to the first advantageous state can be avoided. It can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is
The state control means is
The advantageous state can be controlled into a first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state for jackpot A) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state for jackpot B). can be,
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state A1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3) based on being controlled to an advantageous state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a re-notification performance (for example, a promotion performance) that notifies that the vehicle will be controlled to the second advantageous state after being notified that the vehicle will be controlled to the first advantageous state by the notification performance;
After reaching a certain number of times, it was announced that the special state would be controlled to the first advantageous state by the notification performance. The rate at which the re-notification effect is executed is higher than that after (for example, if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in an even number combination during variable display in time-saving state B (when jackpot A is announced), in time-saving state A When the decorative symbols temporarily stop at an even number combination during the variable display of (the part where the jackpot B is re-announced), the promotion effect is executed at a higher rate than (the part where the jackpot B is re-announced),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special state after reaching a specific number of times that is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed, even if it is announced that the control will be changed to the first advantageous state with a lower advantage, the re-notification will be Since there is a high possibility that the performance will be executed, it is possible to play the game with a sense of anticipation even after the notification performance is executed, so that the decrease in interest due to the notification that the control will be in the first advantageous state can be avoided. It can be prevented.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of form 6-0 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., a special pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state as a special state, and can control the special state after a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) based on the variable display being displayed as a predetermined display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving) different from the specific display result,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and an announcement effect (e.g., a celebration effect) that announces that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The period during which the special state after the advantageous state can be controlled to the special state is longer than the period during which the special state after the predetermined display result can be controlled (for example, the time-saving state A3 can be controlled for 685 variable displays, whereas the time-saving state C1 can be controlled for one variable display).
The execution pattern of the notification effect includes at least a first execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a first timing without going through a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figs. 284-27 and 284-29, a variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of a non-reach jackpot, and a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second performance corresponding to a non-reach is executed during the variable display), and a second execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a second timing after the first timing after going through a specific suggestion effect (for example, a variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is a variable pattern of a super reach δ jackpot, and a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 50-second performance including a reach performance of the super reach δ is executed during the variable display).
The means of performance execution are:
When the game is controlled to a special state after an advantageous state, the game can execute the notification performance of the first execution pattern at a higher rate than when the game is controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result,
When the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result, the notification performance of the second execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate than when the special state is controlled after an advantageous state (for example, when the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state C1 is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is a variable pattern of a super reach δ jackpot, at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state A3, and when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state A3, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of a non-reach jackpot, at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the first execution pattern more likely to be executed during the special state after an advantageous state, when the period during which control to the special state is possible is long, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's interest, and by making the second execution pattern more likely to be executed during the special state after a specified display result, when the period during which control to the special state is possible is shorter than that of the special state after an advantageous state, it is possible to heighten the player's anticipation and improve interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 6-1 is
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The notification performance of the first execution pattern is executed at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after reaching the specific number of times than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, As shown in Figure 284-28, the rate is higher when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in time-saving state B than when the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in time-saving state A3. (The part where variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making it easier to execute the first execution pattern during a special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed, a decrease in interest due to the player's sense of delay is suppressed. can do.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is
As the special state after the predetermined display result, there are a first special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (e.g., one variable display) and a second special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a second period (e.g., 685 variable displays) that is longer than the first period.
The special state after the first predetermined display result has a shorter period during which it can be controlled to the special state than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state C1 can be controlled for one variable display, while the time-saving state A2 can be controlled for seven variable displays).
The special state after the second predetermined display result has a longer period during which it can be controlled to a special state than the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state C2 can execute time-saving control over 685 variable displays, while the time-saving state A2 can execute time-saving control over 7 variable displays).
The rate at which the notification performance of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after the first predetermined display result is lower than the rate at which the notification performance of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after the specific number of times is reached,
The rate at which the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after the second predetermined display result is higher than the rate at which the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figs. 284-27 and 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state A3, the rate at which the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of a non-reach jackpot, is higher than when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C1, and when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C2, the rate at which the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of a non-reach jackpot, is higher than when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state A2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special state after the second predetermined display result, which has a long period of time during which the special state is controlled, the first execution pattern is made more likely to be executed, thereby preventing a feeling of droopiness and suppressing a decline in the player's interest, and in the special state after the first predetermined display result, which has a short period of time during which the special state is controlled, the execution rate of the notification effect of the first execution pattern is made low, in other words, the execution rate of the notification effect of the second execution pattern is made relatively high, thereby executing a specific suggestion effect and effectively increasing the sense of anticipation of the gaming machine, thereby improving interest.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of form 7-0 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., a special pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the variable display to a special state (time-saving state C1, time-saving state C) after a predetermined display result based on the fact that the variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result as a special state,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (e.g., a reach effect) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and an announcement effect (e.g., a celebration effect) that announces that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state;
As the special state after the predetermined display result, there are a first special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (e.g., one variable display) and a second special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a second period (e.g., 685 variable displays) that is longer than the first period.
The execution patterns of the notification effects include at least a first execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a first timing without going through a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a portion in which a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second performance corresponding to a non-reach is executed during the variable display by executing a variable display only in PB3-1, which is a variable display pattern for a non-reach jackpot), and a second execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a second timing after the first timing after going through a specific suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 50-second performance including a reach performance of the super reach δ is executed during the variable display by executing a variable display in PB3-3, which is a variable display pattern for a super reach δ jackpot).
The means of performance execution are:
When the display is controlled to the special state after the second predetermined display result, the notification performance of the first execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate than when the display is controlled to the special state after the first predetermined display result,
When the special state is controlled after the first predetermined display result, the notification performance of the second execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate than when the special state is controlled after the second predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state C2 is a jackpot, the allocation for executing the variable display in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of a non-reach jackpot, is set higher than when the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state C1 is a jackpot, and when the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state C1 is a jackpot, the allocation for executing the variable display in PB3-3, which is a variable pattern of a super reach δ jackpot, is set higher than when the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state C2 is a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the first execution pattern more likely to be executed during the special state after the second predetermined display result, which has a longer period during which the special state can be controlled, it is possible to prevent a feeling of droopiness and suppress a decline in the player's interest.By making the second execution pattern more likely to be executed during the special state after the first predetermined display result, which has a shorter period during which the special state can be controlled than the special state after the second predetermined display result, it is possible to heighten the player's anticipation and improve their interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 7-1 is
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state A1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state as a special state,
When the special state is controlled after a predetermined display result, the rate at which the notification effect of the first execution pattern is executed is higher than when the special state is controlled after an advantageous state (for example, when the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state A3 is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, or PB3-2, which is a variable pattern for a normal reach jackpot, and a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second performance corresponding to a non-reach or a 20-second performance corresponding to a normal reach is executed during the variable display, while when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C2, the variable display is executed only in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, and a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second performance corresponding to a non-reach is executed during the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling from becoming excessively high, which would occur if the execution rate of the notification presentation of the first execution pattern becomes high during the special state after the advantageous state that is controlled after the advantageous state, resulting in excessive gaming value being awarded in a short period of time.

The gaming machine of form 7-2 is
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state A1, a time-saving state A2, a time-saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to an advantageous state,
The special state after an advantageous state has a longer controllable period than the special state after a predetermined display result (for example, in the time-saving state A3, time-saving control can be executed over 685 variable displays; , the time saving state C1 is a part where time saving control can be executed over one variable display),
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first execution pattern at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result;
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, Fig. 284- 27 and FIG. 284-29, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A3, PB3-1 is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern or PB3 is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern. By executing the variable display in -2, a 15-second blessing performance will be executed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance during the variable display. So, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, and the super reach is displayed during the variable display. The part where a 15 second blessing performance is performed after a 50 second performance including δ's reach performance is performed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suppress a decrease in player's interest by making it easier to execute the first execution pattern during the special state after the advantageous state where the period in which the special state can be controlled is long, and after the advantageous state. During the special state after the predetermined display result, in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is shorter than the special state, by making it easier to execute the second execution pattern, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation and improve the interest in the game. , it is possible to improve the marketability of a game machine equipped with a special state.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of form 8-0 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A determination means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of determining to control to an advantageous state;
A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 284-19) capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (e.g., variable patterns) having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) based on the variable display being displayed as a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving), and can control the special state to a special state after a specific number of times is reached (e.g., time-saving state B) when a specific condition based on the variable display not displaying a specific display result being executed a specific number of times is met (e.g., the number of variable displays reaches 685 times);
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that is neither the specific display result nor the specific display result is longer in the special state after the specific display result than in the special state after the specific number of times is reached (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C is longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state B).
The performance execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive performances (for example, a dialogue preview performance or a movable body preview performance as a variable display preview performance shown in a modified example) that suggest that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state;
There are more types of suggestive effects that can be executed when the special state after a predetermined display result is not controlled to an advantageous state than the special state after a specific number of times is reached (for example, as shown as a modified example, the number of pre-notification effects during variable display that can be executed during the variable display of the time-saving state C is greater than the number of pre-notification effects during variable display that can be executed during the variable display of the time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the special state after a specific number of times is reached, which is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed, reduces the stress of the player by increasing the number of variable displays per unit period through variable displays with a short variable display period, and in the special state after a specific display result, which can be entered at any time including during a non-special state by reaching a specific display result, by increasing the types of suggestive presentations in the variable display where no specific display result is displayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest when a specific display result is displayed multiple times before being controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 8-1 is
The variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern (e.g., an unsuccessful variation pattern) as a variable display pattern when not controlled to an advantageous state;
The effect execution means can execute multiple types of suggestive effects even when they are not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-47 and 284-48, in a variable display where the variable display result is a failure). (portion where preview effects can be executed during variable display),
The types of suggested effects that can be executed by the effect execution means when the specific variable display pattern is determined are those when the display is controlled to be in a special state after a predetermined display result, and when it is controlled to be in a special state after reaching a specific number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 284-52, the type of preview performance during variable display that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a failure (when the fluctuation pattern of failure is determined) is the part that is larger when controlled by time-saving state C than when controlled by time-saving state B),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the number of performance patterns can be increased without increasing the number of variable display patterns, so the storage capacity of the hardware constituting the variable display pattern determining means can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 8-2 is
The special state after the predetermined display result includes a first special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (e.g., one variable display), and a second special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a second period (e.g., 685 variable displays) that is longer than the first period and can be controlled to a special state over a number of variable displays that is greater than the denominator of the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., 685 variable displays).
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that is neither the specific display result nor the specific display result is longer in the special state after the first specific display result than in the special state after the specific number of times is reached (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the average special chart fluctuation time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C1 is longer than the average special chart fluctuation time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state B).
The difference between the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in either the specific display result or the specific display result in the special state after the second predetermined display result and the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in either the specific display result or the specific display result in the special state after the specific number of times is the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in either the specific display result or the specific display result in the special state after the second predetermined display result and the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined for the variable display that does not result in either the specific display result or the specific display result in the special state after the first predetermined display result. and the average variable display period of the variable display pattern to be determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C1 is set to be longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state B, and the difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C2 and the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state B is smaller than the difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C2 and the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C1).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to allow the player to play in a special state after a predetermined display result in which the period during which control can be exercised in the special state is long, without causing stress to the player.

The gaming machine of form 8-3 is
The variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that is common to a variable display pattern that can be determined when the special state is not controlled to an advantageous state after the second predetermined display result and when the special state is not controlled to be advantageous after reaching the specific number of times. (For example, as shown in Figures 284-28 and 284-29, in time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, the common fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a failure is that the non-reach is a failure. (The part where PA3-1, which is the fluctuation pattern of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display pattern can be shared in the special state after the second predetermined display result and the special state after reaching the specific number of times, so the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

[Mode 9]
The gaming machine of form 9-0 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., a special pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A determination means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of determining to control to an advantageous state;
A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 284-19 ) capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, variable patterns) having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state, and can control the special state after a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) based on the variable display being displayed as a predetermined display result (miss with time-saving) different from the specific display result,
The special state after the advantageous state includes a first special state after the advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state A1) and a second special state after the advantageous state that is more advantageous than the first special state after the advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3),
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern common to the variable display pattern that can be determined when the game is not controlled to be in an advantageous state in at least one state among the plurality of special states after a predetermined display result, when the game is not controlled to be in an advantageous state in a special state after a predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-27 and FIG. 284-29, when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state A3, it is possible to select a non-reach miss variation pattern PA3-1, a non-reach miss variation pattern PA3-2, a non-reach miss variation pattern PA3-3, and a normal reach miss variation pattern PA3-4, and when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C3, it is possible to select a non-reach miss variation pattern PA3-1 and a non-reach miss variation pattern PA3-10).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if there are multiple types of special states, the variable display pattern can be shared among different special states, so that the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 9-1 is
The special state after the predetermined display result includes a first special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (e.g., one variable display), and a second special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a second period (e.g., 685 variable displays) that is longer than the first period and can be controlled to a special state over a number of variable displays that is greater than the denominator of the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., 685 variable displays).
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern common to the variable display pattern that can be determined when the player is not controlled to be in an advantageous state in at least one state of the plurality of special states after the advantageous state when the player is not controlled to be in an advantageous state in the special state after the first predetermined display result (as shown in FIG. 284-27 and FIG. 284-29, when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state A1 and the time-saving state C1, the portion that can select PA3-5, which is a variable pattern of the super reach δ miss);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if there are a plurality of types of special states, the variable display pattern can be shared among different special states, so that the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is
The state control means is configured to enter a special state (for example, after reaching a specific number of times) when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. , can be controlled to short-time state B),
As the special state after the predetermined display result, a special state after the first predetermined display result (e.g., time saving state C1) that can be controlled in the special state over the first period (e.g., one variable display); can be controlled to a special state over a long second period (for example, 685 variable displays), and the number of variable displays is greater than the denominator of the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, 685 variable displays). There is a special state after a second predetermined display result (for example, a time saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a variable display);
The variable display pattern determining means, when not controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after the second predetermined display result, selects a variable display pattern common to a variable display pattern that can be determined when not controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after reaching a specific number of times. (For example, as shown in Figures 284-28 and 284-29, in time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, the common fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a failure is that the non-reach is a failure. (a part where PA3-1, which is a fluctuation pattern of
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if there are multiple types of special states, the variable display pattern can be shared among different special states, so the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is
The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state (e.g., time-saving state B) after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition based on the variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed being executed a specific number of times (e.g., the number of times of variable display reaches 685) is established,
The advantageous state can be controlled to a first advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state of jackpot B) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The variable display pattern determination means, when controlled to the second advantageous state, can determine a special variable display pattern that is a variable display pattern that is not determined when controlled to the first advantageous state (for example, as shown in the characteristic part 130SG-4, when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot, in the case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B, a part that can determine a special variable pattern different from the case where the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot A).
The special variable display pattern is common to the special state after the advantageous state, the special state after the predetermined display result, and the special state after the specific number of times is reached (for example, as shown in the feature part 130SG-4, the special variable pattern is a part that can be selected as a common jackpot variable pattern when the jackpot type is jackpot B in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the time-saving state C).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if there are a plurality of types of special states, the variable display pattern can be shared among different special states, so that the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 9-4 is
A production that can perform a common production after being controlled to an advantageous state in the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after an advantageous state, the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after a predetermined display result, and after being controlled to an advantageous state. (For example, as shown as a modified example, when the time-saving state A is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and when the time-saving state C is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the performance control CPU 120 executes these jackpot gaming (a part where a common performance can be performed as a state-based performance),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the performance after being controlled to an advantageous state can be shared by a plurality of types of special states, the capacity of performance data can be reduced.

The form 9-5 gaming machine is
Performance execution that allows different performances to be performed after being controlled to an advantageous state in the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after an advantageous state, the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after a predetermined display result, and the case of being controlled to an advantageous state during a special state after a prescribed display result. (For example, as shown in a modified example, when the time-saving state A is controlled to the jackpot gaming state and when the time-saving state C is controlled to the jackpot gaming state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the jackpot gaming state. (a part where different performances can be executed based on),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, after the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, it is possible to perform an appropriate performance according to the difference in special conditions, so that the game enjoyment after being controlled to be in an advantageous state can be improved.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-0 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., a special pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A determination means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of determining to control to an advantageous state;
A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 284-19 ) capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns (for example, variable patterns) having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control, as a special state, a special state after an advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3) based on being controlled to an advantageous state, and a special state after a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) based on the variable display being displayed as a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving),
The period during which the special state can be controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result is longer than the period during which the special state can be controlled to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state A1 performs time-saving control over one variable display, while the time-saving state C2 performs time-saving control over 685 variable displays),
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when the special state after the predetermined display result is not controlled to be a favorable state compared to the special state after the favorable state is shorter (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C2 is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state A3).
There are fewer types of variable display patterns that are determined when the special state after a predetermined display result is not controlled to be an advantageous state than the special state after an advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figs. 284-27 and 284-29, in the time-saving state C2, when the variable display result is a miss, two types of variable patterns, PA3-1 and PA3-10, can be selected, while in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state A3, when the variable display result is a miss, five types of variable patterns, PA3-1, PA3-2, PA3-3, PA3-4, and PA3-5, can be selected).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special state after a specified display result, which has a longer period during which it can be controlled to a special state than the special state after an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which expectations are excessively raised by a long average variable display period, creating a feeling of dragging on and reducing interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 10-1 is
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance is provided,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a variable display performance of performance identification information (e.g., decorative patterns), and is capable of executing a reach performance that suggests that the variable display performance of the performance identification information is controlled to an advantageous state by making the variable display performance of the performance identification information a predetermined reach mode (for example, a portion in which the reach performance is executed on the image display device 5 when the variable display is executed in a reach variation pattern);
In the variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed in the special state after a predetermined display result, the rate at which a reach effect is executed is lower than in the special state after an advantageous state (for example, as shown as a modified example, in the case where the variable display result is a miss, the time-saving state C2 has a lower rate at which a variable display is executed (the rate at which a reach effect is executed) in the variation pattern of a normal reach miss or a super reach miss than in the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game from being caused by excessively heightening expectations due to reach effects in the special state after a specified display result, which has a longer period during which it is possible to control the special state than the special state after an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 10-2 is
A production execution means (for example, , a production control CPU 120),
As an execution pattern of the notification effect, a first execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at the first timing without going through a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the control is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 284-27 and FIG. 284-29 As shown in , by executing a variable display in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display. is executed), and a second execution pattern that executes the notification effect at a second timing after the first timing after passing through the specific suggestion effect (for example, PB3-, which is a variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot) 3, the variable display is executed during the variable display, and after a 50-second performance including a super reach δ reach performance is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed.
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first execution pattern at a higher rate when controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result than when controlled to the special state after the advantageous state,
It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second execution pattern at a higher rate when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state than when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result (for example, Fig. 284-27 And as shown in Figure 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A1, the variable display will be executed at PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. Then, after a 50-second performance including the super reach δ reach performance is executed during the variable display, a 15-second blessing performance is executed, and in the time saving state C2, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot. By executing the variable display only in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, a 15-second blessing performance is executed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first execution pattern is made easier to execute during the special state after the predetermined display result, in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is longer than the special state after the advantageous state, thereby preventing the player from losing interest; During the special state after an advantageous state in which the period during which the special state can be controlled is shorter than the special state after a predetermined display result, the second execution pattern is made easier to execute, thereby increasing the player's expectation and improving the interest in the game. Can be done.

The gaming machine of form 10-3 is
The state control means can control the state to a special state (e.g., time-saving state B) after a specific number of times is reached when a specific condition based on the execution of a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed a specific number of times (e.g., the number of variable displays reaches 685) is established as the special state,
The special state after the predetermined display result includes a first special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1) that can be controlled to a special state over a first period (e.g., one variable display), and a second special state after the predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C2) that can be controlled to a special state over a second period (e.g., 685 variable displays) that is longer than the first period.
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a variable display pattern common to the variable display pattern that can be determined when the special state is not controlled to be in an advantageous state after the specific number of times is reached, when the special state is not controlled to be in an advantageous state after the second predetermined display result (for example, as shown in Figs. 284-28 and 284-29, in the time-shortening state B and the time-shortening state C2, a portion in which PA3-1, which is a non-missing variable pattern, can be selected as a common variable pattern when the variable display result is a miss).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the variable display pattern can be used in common for the special state after the second predetermined display result and the special state after the specific number of times is reached, so that the data capacity of the variable display pattern can be reduced.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-0 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A reserved memory means (for example, a special chart reserved memory unit 130SG151 shown in FIG. 284-12) capable of storing information related to variable display as reserved memory information;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (e.g., time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3) based on being controlled to the advantageous state as a special state, and can control the special state after a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) based on the variable display being displayed as a predetermined display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving) different from the specific display result,
The period during which the special state can be controlled after a predetermined display result is longer than the period during which the special state can be controlled after an advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state A1 can be controlled for one variable display, while the time-saving state C2 can be controlled for 685 variable displays).
The means of performance execution are:
A hold notice performance (e.g., a hold display notice performance) that suggests that hold memory information controlled to be in a favorable state is stored in the hold memory means can be executed in any one of a plurality of hold notice performance patterns (e.g., performance pattern α, performance pattern β, and performance pattern γ);
The reserved notice performance can be executed even when the reserved memory information controlled to be in a favorable state is not stored in the reserved memory means (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-82, a part in which the reserved display notice performance (preview notice) can be executed for the reserved memory whose variable display result is a miss);
The number of reserved notice performance patterns when the reserved memory information controlled to the advantageous state is not stored is smaller when the reserved memory information is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result than when the reserved memory information is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state;
The rate at which the hold notice performance is executed when the hold memory information controlled to the advantageous state is not stored is lower when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result than when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-82, the number of performance patterns executable as the hold display notice performance is smaller in the time-saving state C2 than in the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3, and the rate at which the hold display notice performance is executed when there is no hold memory that results in a jackpot is lower in the time-saving state C2 than in the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special state after a specified display result, which has a longer period during which control to the special state is possible than the special state after an advantageous state, the execution rate of the hold notice performance is relatively low and there are fewer performance patterns for the hold notice performance. This prevents the hold notice performance from raising expectations too much, which in turn reduces interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 11-1 is
The state control means can control the state to a special state (e.g., time-saving state B) after a specific number of times is reached when a specific condition based on the execution of a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed a specific number of times (e.g., the number of times of variable display reaches 685) is established as the special state,
The performance execution means is capable of executing the hold notice performance in a common hold notice performance pattern when controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result and when controlled to a special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-82(C), in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2 in the characteristic part 130SG-2, the hold display notice performance can be executed in both performance patterns β and γ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by sharing the hold notice performance pattern, the data capacity of the hold notice performance can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 11-2 is
The means of performing the performance is
including display means (for example, image display device 5),
Different background displays (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 284-55) can be displayed on the display means depending on when the special state is controlled after the advantageous state and when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result,
The plurality of types of suspension notice performance patterns include a specific suspension notice performance pattern (for example, a panel image of a panel display performance) that can be executed in common in the special condition after an advantageous state and the special state after a predetermined display result,
When executing a pending notice performance according to a specific pending notice performance pattern, the performance execution means prioritizes the specific display over the background display by using a display layer higher than the display layer of the background display, and displays a plurality of variables. (For example, as shown in Figures 284-88 and 284-89, when drawing these images, the number of reserved special figures, the number of reserved special figures, and the number of decorations The image of the first image data that has the highest display priority for images such as small symbols that correspond to the variable display of symbols, and the display priority of pre-read images such as panel display effects and pending display preview effects than the images of the first image data. The image of the second image data with the lowest display priority, the background image such as the first background image or the second background image is drawn as the image of the third image data with the lowest display priority, and the image of the first image data, the second image, etc. a part that creates an image to be displayed on the image display device 5 by combining the image of the data and the image of the third image data),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the same pending notice performance is performed, different impressions can be given visually depending on the combination with the background, so it is possible to suitably enhance the performance effect of the pending notice performance while reducing development costs. can.

The gaming machine of form 11-3 is
The multiple types of hold notice performance patterns include specific hold notice performance patterns (e.g., performance pattern β and performance pattern γ) that can be commonly executed in a special state after an advantageous state and a special state after a predetermined display result,
When a specific hold notice performance pattern is executed in a special state after a predetermined display result, the probability of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when a specific hold notice performance pattern is executed in a special state after an advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 284-82 (A) and 284-82 (C), in the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state C2, performance pattern β and performance pattern γ can be executed as the performance pattern of the hold display notice performance, but the probability of the hold display notice performance being controlled to a jackpot game state by executing performance pattern β or performance pattern γ (jackpot expectation rate) is higher in the time-saving state C2 than in the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by executing specific hold notice performance patterns in different special states, it is possible to reduce development costs by suppressing an increase in the number of hold notice performance patterns, and since the expectation of the specific hold notice performance pattern differs depending on the special state, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's sense of expectation during the special state after the specified display result.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A determining means (for example, CPU 103) capable of determining control to an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 in FIG. 19),
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and also displays a specific display result. When a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 sections) based on a specific number of executions of a variable display that is not displayed is satisfied, it is possible to control to a special state (time saving state B) after reaching a specific number of times,
The average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when the control is not controlled to an advantageous state is shorter in the special state after reaching a certain number of times than in the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, the time saving state (The part where the average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in time saving state B is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result is wrong in A),
The variable display pattern with the shortest variable display period among the variable display patterns determined when controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after reaching a specific number of times is determined when controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after the advantageous state. The variable display period is longer than the variable display pattern that has the shortest variable display period among the variable display patterns that The variation pattern is a part where the special symbol variation time is longer than the variation pattern with the shortest special symbol variation time among the variation patterns selectable in time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by preventing a sense of prolongation during the special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after a variable display that does not result in a specific display result for a specific number of times, it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest, and By increasing the feeling of blessing when an advantageous state is controlled during a special state, the interest in the game can be improved, and therefore the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12-1 is
The advantageous state can be controlled to a first advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state of jackpot A) and a second advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot game state of jackpot B) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The variable display pattern determination means, when controlled to the second advantageous state, can determine a special variable display pattern that is not determined when controlled to the first advantageous state, in common in the special state after the advantageous state and the special state after reaching a specific number of times (for example, as shown in the characteristic part 130SG-4, for the special variable pattern, when the jackpot type is jackpot B in the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, a part that can be selected as a common jackpot variable pattern).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by sharing the special variable display pattern among different special states, it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the variable display pattern.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) is provided that is capable of executing a specific performance (e.g., display of a stage image) during a specific period after the special state is controlled to a non-special state after an advantageous state, the specific period not being executed during the non-special state after the end of the specific period;
The performance execution means does not execute the specific performance during a specific period after the specific number of times is reached and the special state is controlled to a non-special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-55, after the time-saving state A ends, a special stage image is displayed on the image display device 5 over 10 variable displays, while after the time-saving state B ends, the special stage image is not displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the sense of specialness is enhanced by executing a dedicated specific presentation during a specific period following the end of the special state after the advantageous state, and during a specific period following the end of the special state after reaching a specific number of times, which is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed, a decrease in interest can be suppressed by increasing the disappointment of not being controlled into an advantageous state through the specific presentation.

The gaming machine of form 12-3 is
The present invention is provided with a presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific suggestion presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a notification presentation (e.g., a celebration presentation) that notifies the game player that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state,
The execution pattern of the notification effect includes at least a first execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a first timing without going through a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figs. 284-27 and 284-29, a variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of a non-reach jackpot, and a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second performance corresponding to a non-reach is executed during the variable display), and a second execution pattern in which the notification effect is executed at a second timing after the first timing after going through a specific suggestion effect (for example, a variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is a variable pattern of a super reach δ jackpot, and a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 50-second performance including a reach performance of the super reach δ is executed during the variable display).
The means of performance execution are:
When the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, the notification effect of the first execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate than when the special state is controlled after an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-28, when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state B, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, and then a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second effect corresponding to a non-reach is executed during the variable display).
When the game is controlled to the special state after the advantageous state, the notification effect of the second execution pattern can be executed at a higher rate than when the game is controlled to the special state after the specific number of times is reached (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-27 and FIG. 284-28, when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state A1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variable pattern of the Super Reach δ jackpot, and then a 50-second performance including the reach performance of the Super Reach δ is executed during the variable display, followed by a 15-second celebration performance).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during the special state after a specific number of times is reached, which is controlled after a specific number of variable displays have been executed, the first execution pattern is made more likely to be executed, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

[Form 13]
The state 13-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A determining means (for example, CPU 103) capable of determining control to an advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means (for example, the CPU 103 in FIG. 19),
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on being controlled to an advantageous state, and the variable display is different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on what is displayed as a predetermined display result (for example, time saving is not included),
When a variable display executed during a special state after an advantageous state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state A1, If the variable display result is off with time saving on and off during time saving state A2 and time saving state A3, and the type of time saving on and off is B, the time saving state C2 will change after time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3 are completed. controllable parts),
The variable display period when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is shorter than the variable display period when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result in the non-special state (for example, in FIG. -6 and Figure 284-27, in the normal state, if the variable display result of the first special figure is ``No with time saving'' and the type of ``No with time saving'' is ``No with time saving'', the special figure variation time is 53 seconds. While a certain variation pattern PA2-4 is selected, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time-saving state A2 and time-saving state A3 is a time-saving result, then the special figure variation time is PA3-6 of 2 seconds. , the part where either PA3-7 whose special figure variation time is 20 seconds, PA3-8 or PA3-9 whose special figure variation time is 50 seconds is selected),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably play the game in the special state after the advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort on the variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed, so that the game machine equipped with the special state has good marketability. can be increased.

The gaming machine of form 13-1 is
The state control means is
When a predetermined number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state after the advantageous state, the state is controlled to the non-special state (for example, a portion controlled to the normal state by executing one variable display in the time-saving state A1 without being controlled to the jackpot game state, seven variable displays in the time-saving state A22 without being controlled to the jackpot game state, and 685 variable displays in the time-saving state A3 without being controlled to the jackpot game state).
When a special number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to an advantageous state while being controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, the state is controlled to a non-special state (for example, a portion controlled to a normal state by executing one variable display in the time-saving state C1 without being controlled to a jackpot game state, and 685 variable displays in the time-saving state C2 without being controlled to a jackpot game state),
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed as a predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed during the special state after the advantageous state from the predetermined number is compared with the special number of times, and if the special number of times is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control the state to a special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state, while if the special number of times is less than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control the state to a non-special state after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the game state is any of the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B (when the value of the total time-saving number counter α and the second special chart time-saving number counter α are 1 or more), if the variable display result is a time-saving miss, the value of the second special chart time-saving number counter α at that time (time-saving state A1 , the remaining variable display number for which time-saving control can be executed in the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state B) is compared with a value (1 or 685) corresponding to the time-saving miss type, and if the value corresponding to the time-saving miss type is greater than the value of the second special time-saving count counter α, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) corresponding to the time-saving miss type at the end of the time-saving state (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B), while if the value corresponding to the time-saving miss type is less than the value of the second special time-saving count counter α, the game state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving miss type after the end of the time-saving state (either the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, or the time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a predetermined display result is displayed during a special state after an advantageous state, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the player will be controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result after the special state after the advantageous state ends, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 13-2 is
A variable display that is determined when the variable display is not controlled to an advantageous state in the special state after the predetermined display result, which is controlled after the end of the special state after the advantageous state by displaying the variable display with a predetermined display result during the special state after the advantageous state. The average variable display period of the pattern is shorter than the average variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when not controlled to the advantageous state in the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-51, in the time saving state C2 The average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state A is a failure is set shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time saving state A is a failure),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the period during which the special state is controlled by the special state after a predetermined display result becomes long, the variable display period can be switched to a short variation pattern in which the number of variable displays executed in a unit period increases. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to giving the player a feeling of delay.

The gaming machine of form 13-3 is
The variable display period of the variable display pattern determined when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state is common to the variable display period of at least one of the multiple types of variable display patterns determined when the display result is not displayed with a predetermined display result and is not controlled to the advantageous state in the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 284-6 and 284-27, in the variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state A3, the variable display can be executed with a common special chart variable time when the variable display result is a miss and when the variable display result is a miss with time-saving).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that would otherwise be caused when the variable display is displayed in a predetermined display result and the display is not controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 13-4 is
Equipped with a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific suggestive performance (for example, a preview performance during variable display) that suggests that the system will be controlled in an advantageous state,
The performance execution means are
As the specific suggestion performance, there is a first specific suggestion performance (for example, performance pattern A) and a second specific suggestion performance (for example, performance pattern B) that has a higher execution rate in a variable display that is controlled to be more advantageous than the first specific suggestion performance. ～Production pattern E) is possible,
When a variable display in which a predetermined display result is displayed in a special state after an advantageous state is executed, a higher percentage of the display result is displayed than when a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed in a special state after an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in Figure 284-90, if the variable display result is a failure with time saving in the time saving state A, it is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect.) (The part where the preview performance is executed in production pattern A at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the display result becomes a predetermined display result in a special state after an advantageous state, by making it easier to execute the first specific suggestion effect that has a low expectation that it will be controlled to be in an advantageous state, the advantageous state can be changed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the display result has been displayed as a predetermined display result without making him expect that he will be controlled.

[Form 14]
The state 14-0 gaming machine is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state)
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
The special state is a predetermined display result that can be controlled to a special state (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) after the advantageous state based on the fact that it has been controlled to an advantageous state, and the variable display is different from the specific display result. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on what is displayed (for example, time saving is on or off), and a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed can be executed a specific number of times. When a specific condition (for example, the number of variable display times reaches 685 volumes) based on the fact that the number of variable display times has been reached is established, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B) after reaching the specific number of times,
When a variable display executed during a special state after an advantageous state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, the time saving state A1, If the variable display result is OFF with time saving during time saving state A2 or time saving state A3, and the type of time saving is OFF with time saving is B, the time saving state C2 is changed after the end of time saving state A1, time saving state A2, or time saving state A3. controlled part),
When a variable display executed during a special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, a time saving state). When the variable display result during AB is OFF with time saving, and the type of change with time saving is OFF with time saving, the part is controlled to time saving state C2 after the end of time saving state B),
The performance execution means are
In the special state after a predetermined display result that is controlled by the end of the special state after the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a specific notification effect corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result,
In the special state after a predetermined display result that is controlled by the end of the special state after reaching a specific number of times, the execution of the specific notification effect corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-45, If the variable display result in time saving state A1 is ``Time saving on/off'' and the time saving on/off type is ``Time saving on/off B'' (when the start condition for time saving state C2 is met), the final variable display in time saving state A1 (second When the rush effect (rush effect B) is executed in the first variable display of the special map, and the variable display result is OFF with time saver during time saver state B, and the type of error with time saver is FAIL with time saver B. (If the start conditions for time saving state C2 are met), the part where the rush effect is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the control from the special state after the advantageous state where the consecutive winning state continues to the special state after the predetermined display result gives a sense of security to the player, so a specific notification effect is executed, but the variable that does not result in an advantageous state In a special state after reaching a certain number of times, which is controlled after the display has been executed a certain number of times, a specific notification effect is limited when controlling to a special state after a predetermined display result that reminds us that a variable display that does not become an advantageous state continues. Since the stress on the player can be reduced, the marketability of the game machine equipped with the special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 14-1 is
The state control means is
When a predetermined number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state after the advantageous state, the state is controlled to the non-special state (for example, a portion controlled to the normal state by executing one variable display in the time-saving state A1 without being controlled to the jackpot game state, seven variable displays in the time-saving state A22 without being controlled to the jackpot game state, and 685 variable displays in the time-saving state A3 without being controlled to the jackpot game state).
When a special number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to an advantageous state while being controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, the state is controlled to a non-special state (for example, a portion controlled to a normal state by executing one variable display in the time-saving state C1 without being controlled to a jackpot game state, and 685 variable displays in the time-saving state C2 without being controlled to a jackpot game state),
When the variable display is executed a prescribed number of times without being controlled to the advantageous state after being controlled to the special state after reaching a specific number of times, it can be controlled to the non-special state (for example, a portion controlled to the normal state by executing the variable display 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time-saving state B),
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed with a predetermined display result, the remaining number obtained by subtracting the number of times of the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state from the predetermined number is compared with the special number, and if the special number is greater than the remaining number, control can be made to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state;
When the variable display executed during the special state after the specific number of times is reached is displayed as a predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed in the special state after the specific number of times is reached from the specified number of times is compared with the special number of times, and if the special number of times is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control to the special state after the specific display result after the end of the special state after the specific number of times is reached (for example, when the game state is any of the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B (when the value of the total time-saving number counter α and the second special chart time-saving number counter α are 1 or more), if the variable display result is a time-saving miss, the value of the second special chart time-saving number counter α at that time (in the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B) a portion in which the remaining variable display number for which time-saving control can be executed by comparing the number of remaining variable display times for which time-saving control can be executed) with a value (1 or 685) corresponding to the type of time-saving miss, and if the value corresponding to the type of time-saving miss is greater than the value of the second special time-saving count counter α, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) corresponding to the type of time-saving miss at the end of the time-saving state being executed (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B), while if the value corresponding to the type of time-saving miss is less than the value of the second special time-saving count counter α, the game state is controlled to a normal state without being controlled to a time-saving state corresponding to the type of time-saving miss after the end of the time-saving state being executed (either the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, or the time-saving state B);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a predetermined display result is displayed during a special state after an advantageous state or during a special state after a specific number of times is reached, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the player will be controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after an advantageous state or the special state after a specific number of times is reached, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 14-2 is
The game machine has a first path (e.g., a left game area) and a second path (e.g., a right game area) different from the first path as a path through which the game medium can flow down,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to launch the game medium to the second path (for example, the time-saving state is a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area to enter the second start winning hole),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a promotion effect (e.g., a rush effect) that promotes the launch of the game medium into the second path,
In the case where a specific condition is satisfied in a non-special state and the state is controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached, a result display period from when the display result of the variable display in which the specific condition is satisfied is displayed to when the next variable display can be started is set as a special period, and a promotion performance is executed by the performance execution means during the special period.
In the case where a specific condition is satisfied in the special state after a predetermined display result and the state is controlled to the special state after the specific number of times is reached, the result display period from when the display result of the variable display for which the specific condition is satisfied is displayed until the next variable display can be started is set to a non-special period shorter than the special period, and the promotion effect is not executed by the effect execution means during the non-special period (for example, as shown in Figs. 284-35, 284-38, and 284-45, in the variable display in the normal state, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times (the start condition of the time-saving state B is satisfied), the pattern determination period is set to 81.4 seconds, so that the entry effect is executed during the pattern determination period, but when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times in the time-saving state C (the start condition of the time-saving state B is satisfied), the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, so that the entry effect is not executed during the pattern determination period, and the time-saving state C transitions to the time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the control is made from a non-special state to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the advantageous path changes, so by ensuring an interval by using a long result display period and performing a proper promotion performance, the player can be made to recognize the change in the advantageous path. Also, when the control is made from a special state after a predetermined display result to a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the advantageous path does not change, so by shortening the result display period and not performing the promotion performance, the transition to the special state after reaching a specific number of times can be made in an appropriate manner without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

The gaming machine of form 14-3 is
The game machine has a first path (e.g., a left game area) and a second path (e.g., a right game area) different from the first path as a path through which the game medium can flow down,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to launch the game medium to the second path (for example, the time-saving state is a game state in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area to enter the second start winning hole),
The performance execution means includes a display means (e.g., an image display device 5),
The display means is
When the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result, a specific promotion display (e.g., a right-hit promotion image) that promotes the launch of the game medium to the second path can be continuously displayed;
In the case where a specific condition is satisfied in the special state after a specific display result and the state is controlled to the special state after a specific number of times is reached, the specific promotion display that was continuously displayed in the special state after a specific display result can be taken over and displayed in the special state after a specific number of times is reached (for example, as shown as a modified example, in the case where the variable display number reaches 685 times in the time-saving state C and the start condition of the time-saving state B is satisfied, the right-hit promotion image displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 in the time-saving state C is continuously displayed in the time-saving state B as well).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the special state after a predetermined display result transitions to a special state after a specific number of times is reached, the player can easily recognize that he or she should continue firing along the second path.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A reservation storage means (for example, the special figure reservation storage section 130SG151 shown in FIG. 284-12) capable of storing information regarding variable display as reservation storage information;
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3) based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display is specified. It is possible to control to a special state (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the display result (for example, time saving is applied or removed) is displayed,
The means of performing the performance is
Regarding the pending memory stored in the pending storage means when controlled from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state, a predetermined pending notice effect indicating that the variable display is the pending memory is displayed with a predetermined display result. (for example, a pending display notice effect),
Regarding a pending memory in which a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state after an advantageous state, a special display after the advantageous state of a predetermined pending notice effect that suggests that the variable display is a pending memory that is displayed with a predetermined display result. (For example, as shown in a modified example, in the case where the suspended display preview performance can be executed even for the suspended display corresponding to the suspended memory in which the variable display result is time-saving, for example, As shown in FIG. 284-85 and FIG. 284-86, if there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is not included in the time saving among the maximum 4 pending memories stored at the end of the time saving, depending on the pending memory On the other hand, if a pending memory is derived in which the variable display result is not included in the time saving during the time saving state A, the pending display corresponding to the pending display is executed as a target. The part where the pending display preview effect is not executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the predetermined pending notice performance is not performed during the special state after an advantageous state where the starting condition is met frequently, and the special state after the advantageous state is an unfavorable situation where the starting condition is met with a low frequency. By performing a predetermined suspension notice effect when transitioning from a state to a non-special state, it is possible to give players a sense of tension and increase their interest in playing, thereby increasing the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states. can.

The gaming machine of form 15-1 is
The state control means, when a variable display executed during a special state after an advantageous state is displayed with a predetermined display result, can control the state to a special state after a predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the game state is any of the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state B (when the values of the total time-saving count counter α and the second special chart time-saving count counter α are 1 or more), if the variable display result becomes a time-saving miss, the state control means controls the variable display result to a time-saving miss according to the value of the second special chart time-saving count counter α at that time (the remaining number of variable displays for which time-saving control can be executed in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state B) and the type of time-saving miss according to the value of the second special chart time-saving count counter α at that time A portion in which, when the value corresponding to the time-saving miss type is greater than the value of the second special time-saving count counter α, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) corresponding to the time-saving miss type at the end of the time-saving state (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B), while when the value corresponding to the time-saving miss type is less than the value of the second special time-saving count counter α, the game state is controlled to a normal state without being controlled to a time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving miss type at the end of the time-saving state (either the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, or time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if a predetermined display result is displayed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the fact that control to a special state is not performed after the predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 15-2 is
The state control means is
When a predetermined number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to the advantageous state while being controlled to the special state after the advantageous state, the state is controlled to the non-special state (for example, a portion controlled to the normal state by executing one variable display in the time-saving state A1 without being controlled to the jackpot game state, seven variable displays in the time-saving state A22 without being controlled to the jackpot game state, and 685 variable displays in the time-saving state A3 without being controlled to the jackpot game state).
When a special number of variable displays are executed without being controlled to an advantageous state while being controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, the state is controlled to a non-special state (for example, a portion controlled to a normal state by executing one variable display in the time-saving state C1 without being controlled to a jackpot game state, and 685 variable displays in the time-saving state C2 without being controlled to a jackpot game state),
When the variable display executed during the special state after the advantageous state is displayed as a predetermined display result, the remaining number of times obtained by subtracting the number of variable displays executed during the special state after the advantageous state from the predetermined number is compared with the special number of times, and if the special number of times is greater than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control the state to a special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after the advantageous state, while if the special number of times is less than the remaining number of times, it is possible to control the state to a non-special state after the end of the special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the game state is any of the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B (when the value of the total time-saving number counter α and the second special chart time-saving number counter α are 1 or more), if the variable display result is a time-saving miss, the value of the second special chart time-saving number counter α at that time (time-saving state A1 , the remaining variable display number for which time-saving control can be executed in the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state B) is compared with a value (1 or 685) corresponding to the time-saving miss type, and if the value corresponding to the time-saving miss type is greater than the value of the second special time-saving count counter α, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) corresponding to the time-saving miss type at the end of the time-saving state (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B), while if the value corresponding to the time-saving miss type is less than the value of the second special time-saving count counter α, the game state is controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-saving state corresponding to the time-saving miss type after the end of the time-saving state (either the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, or the time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when a predetermined display result is displayed during a special state after an advantageous state, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the player will be controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result after the special state after the advantageous state ends, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 15-3 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display of first identification information (for example, first special figure) or second identification information (for example, second special figure) as a variable display,
The suspension storage means can store information regarding variable display of the first identification information as first suspension storage information, and can store information regarding variable display of the second identification information as second suspension storage information (for example, A part in which the reserved memory related to the variable display of the first special figure is stored as a reserved memory with a starting port buffer value of 1, and the reserved memory related to the variable display of the second special symbol is stored as a pending memory with a starting port buffer value of 2),
The performance execution means are
Regarding the second suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means when controlled from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a predetermined suspension notice performance (for example, time saving state A2, time saving state A3 , if the suspended memory occurred during the time-saving state B or time-saving state C2, it is possible to execute the suspended display preview performance for the suspended memory even if the variable display based on the suspended memory is executed in the normal state. part),
Regarding the first suspension storage information stored in the suspension storage means when controlled from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state, execution of the predetermined suspension notice effect is restricted (for example, FIG. 284-82(A) , as shown in FIG. 284-81(B) and FIG. 284-82(C), the part where the pending display preview performance is not executed in the case where the variable display result is a time-saving result in any state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by restricting the predetermined pending preview performance for the first pending storage information, the processing of the predetermined pending preview performance becomes complicated by determining whether the predetermined display result is obtained for the first pending storage information. It is possible to prevent this and simplify the performance control program.

The gaming machine of form 15-4 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special chart) or a second identification information (e.g., a second special chart) as a variable display,
The reserved memory means can store information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as first reserved memory information, and can store information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as second reserved memory information (for example, a portion that stores reserved memory regarding the variable display of the first special chart as a reserved memory with a start port buffer value of 1, and stores reserved memory regarding the variable display of the second special chart as a reserved memory with a start port buffer value of 2),
The means of performance execution are:
When the variable display of the first identification information is displayed as a predetermined display result in a non-special state, a first predetermined effect (e.g., a break-in effect A) that can notify that the state will be controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result is executed.
When the variable display of the second identification information is displayed as a predetermined display result in the special state, a presentation capable of informing that the special state will be entered after the predetermined display result is executed, and a second predetermined presentation (e.g., a break-in presentation B) different from the first predetermined presentation can be executed.
In either case, when the display result is displayed as a predetermined display result in the variable display corresponding to the second reserved memory information stored in the reserved memory means when the special state is controlled to the non-special state after the advantageous state, or when the display result is displayed as a predetermined display result in the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory information stored in the reserved memory means when the special state is controlled to the non-special state after the advantageous state, a common common predetermined performance that can notify that the special state will be controlled after the predetermined display result can be executed (for example, as shown as a modified example, in the normal state immediately after the time-saving state ends, when the variable display result based on the reserved memory generated during the time-saving state is a time-saving miss, whether the variable display is the variable display of the first special chart or the variable display of the second special chart, a part that can execute the entry performance B as a performance that notifies that the variable display will be controlled to the time-saving state C).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the rare situation where the display result in the variable display corresponding to the first pending memory information stored when the state is controlled from a special state to a non-special state after an advantageous state is displayed as a predetermined display result, by sharing the second pending memory information with a presentation that notifies the user that the state will be controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, the development labor for the presentation can be reduced and the volume of presentation data can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 15-5 is
The effect execution means, when controlled from the special state to the non-special state after the advantageous state, restricts the execution of the predetermined hold notice effect if the hold memory means stores hold memory information controlled to the advantageous state (for example, even if the hold display notice effect can be executed for the hold display corresponding to the hold memory whose variable display result is a miss with time reduction, if there is a hold memory whose variable display result is a jackpot among the maximum four hold memories stored at the end of the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the time-saving state C as shown in FIG. 284-87, and there is a hold memory whose variable display result is a miss with time reduction before the hold memory whose variable display result is a miss with time reduction, executes the hold display notice effect for the hold display corresponding to the hold memory whose variable display result is a miss with time reduction, while not executing the hold display notice effect for the hold display corresponding to the hold memory whose variable display result is a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the specified display result is reached just before control to an advantageous state, the period during which control to the special state occurs after the specified display result becomes significantly shorter, which may give the impression of a wasted draw. Therefore, by limiting the execution of the specified hold preview performance, the decrease in interest due to this feeling of a wasted draw can be suppressed.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-0 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
As a special state, it is possible to control to a special state after a predetermined display result (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) based on the variable display being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving), and it is also possible to control to a special state after a specific number of times is reached (e.g., time-saving state B) when a specific condition based on the variable display not displaying a specific display result being executed a specific number of times is met (e.g., the number of variable displays reaches 685 times);
When the variable display executed during the special state after reaching a specific number of times is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state after reaching the specific number of times (for example, when the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is a time-saving miss B in the time-saving state B, the part controlled to the time-saving state C2 after the time-saving state B ends).
The means of performance execution are:
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) is included,
When the device is controlled to a special state, a corresponding display indicating a period during which the device can be controlled to the special state (for example, a display of the remaining number of variable display times during which the device can execute time-saving control in the time-saving state) can be displayed on the display means;
When the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state after reaching a specific number of times, the corresponding display being displayed is not changed to a corresponding display indicating a period different from the period indicated by the corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-45, even if the variable display result in the time-saving state B is a time-saving miss, the remaining number of times display in the time-saving state B is not changed to a value that includes the remaining variable display number for which time-saving control can be executed in the time-saving state C controlled after the end of the time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the variable display becomes a predetermined display result during a special state after a specific number of times is reached and special states are overlapped, by changing the period indicated by the corresponding display during the special state after a specific number of times is reached, it is possible to prevent processing from becoming complicated and reduce the data capacity of the performance control program executed by the performance execution means.

The gaming machine of form 16-1 is
When a specific condition is satisfied during the special state after a specific display result, the special state after the specific display result is terminated and the special state after a specific number of times is reached can be controlled (for example, when the variable display number of times reaches 685 times in the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2, the part controlled from the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2 to the time-saving state B),
In either case where a specific condition is established during a non-special state or where a specific condition is established during a special state after a predetermined display result, when the special state is controlled after reaching a specific number of times, the display of the corresponding display is started (for example, when the variable display number reaches 685 times in the normal state, the display of the remaining number of times for time-saving play corresponding to the time-saving state B is started from the point of time when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B, and when the game state transitions from the time-saving state C to the time-saving state B, a shutter effect is executed in the image display device 5 to switch the display of the remaining number of times for time-saving play corresponding to the time-saving state C to the display of the remaining number of times for time-saving play corresponding to the time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the player can accurately recognize that a transition to a special state has occurred after reaching a specific number of times.

The gaming machine of form 16-2 is
The means of performance execution are:
When the display device is controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, a background image corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, the first background image or the second background image shown in FIG. 284-55) can be displayed on the display device;
When the special state is entered after the specific number of times is reached, a background image corresponding to the special state after the specific number of times is reached (for example, the first background image or the second background image shown in FIG. 284-55) can be displayed on the display means;
When a specific condition is satisfied during the special state after the predetermined display result and the special state is entered after the specific number of times is reached, a specific effect (e.g., a shutter effect) of concealing a background image that was displayed in the special state after the predetermined display result can be executed;
When the specific effect ends, the concealment is removed, and the background image corresponding to the special state becomes visible after the specific number of times is reached (for example, when the game state transitions from time-saving state C to time-saving state B, the shutter effect is executed to conceal the entire display area of the image display device 5 with a shutter image, and the background image corresponding to time-saving state C displayed on the image display device 5 is switched to the background image corresponding to time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the background image is concealed by the specific effect, so that it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity caused by a sudden change in the background image.

The gaming machine of form 16-3 is
The means of performing the performance is
When a predetermined display result is displayed during a non-special state and the control is changed to a special state after the predetermined display result, a corresponding display (for example, a display of the remaining number of time savings) is displayed on the display means,
In the case where a predetermined display result is displayed during a special state after reaching a specific number of times, and when the special state after reaching the specific number of times is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, display of the corresponding display is restricted. (For example, as shown in Figure 284-45, if the variable display result in time saving state B is ``Not with time saving'' and the type of ``Not with saving time'' is ``Not with saving time B'', the variable display result is ``Not with saving time''. After the end of the time-saving state, the time-saving state C2 is entered, but the remaining number of time-savings is not displayed in the time-saving state C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on when the predetermined display result is displayed in the special state after reaching a specific number of times, the period during which the predetermined display result is controlled to be in the special state may become extremely short, giving a sense of waste. Therefore, by restricting the display of corresponding displays, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the feeling of wastefulness.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-0 is
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
Based on the fact that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (e.g., with or without time saving), the variable display can be controlled to a special state (e.g., time saving state C1, time saving state C2) after the predetermined display result;
When a variable display executed during a special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state (for example, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, if the variable display result in time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2 is "with time saving on" and "off with time saving on" and the time saving on/off type is "with time saving on/off B", these time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, part that is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, and the time saving state C2),
The means of performing the performance is
In the pre-end period before the special state ends, it is possible to perform an end suggestion effect (for example, a time-saving end countdown) that suggests the end of the special state,
Even if a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state and is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the variable display ends in the pre-end period before the end of the special state. Suggestive effects can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-45, if the variable display result is B with time saving in the time saving state C and the time saving state C2 is newly controlled after the time saving state C, , the part where the time saving end countdown display is executed for the originally controlled time saving state C (time saving state C2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state in which the predetermined display result is displayed ends because the control becomes complicated if the execution mode of the termination suggestion effect is switched depending on whether or not the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state. Until now, by performing the end suggestion effect in the same way regardless of whether or not a predetermined display result is displayed, it is possible to prevent the control of the end suggestion effect from becoming complicated, thereby increasing the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state. Can be done.

The gaming machine of form 17-1 is
The means of performance execution are:
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) is included,
When the game machine is controlled to a special state, a corresponding display (e.g., a display of the remaining number of time-saving times) indicating a period during which the game machine can be controlled to the special state can be displayed on the display means;
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, even when the special state is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the corresponding display being displayed is not changed to a corresponding display indicating a period different from the period indicated by the corresponding display (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-45, with regard to the display of the remaining number of time-saving times, even if a new start condition for a time-saving state C is satisfied in the time-saving state being executed, the display of the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving state being executed is maintained (the display of the remaining number of time-saving times is not changed) until the control is made to the time-saving state C in which the start condition is satisfied again).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, there is no need to provide multiple counters as display counters for the corresponding display, which prevents the process of displaying the corresponding display from becoming complicated and reduces the data capacity of the performance control program executed by the performance execution means.

The gaming machine of form 17-2 is
The means of performing the performance is
Display means (for example, image display device 5
), including
When the special state is controlled, a corresponding display (for example, a display of the remaining number of time reductions) indicating a period during which the special state can be controlled can be displayed on the display means,
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, when the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the display of the corresponding display is restricted (for example, in Figure 284-45 As shown in , when the variable display result shows that the time saving is successful in the normal state, the remaining number of time saving is displayed on the image display device 5. However, when the time saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the time saving state B, the time saving state C2 is controlled. , a portion where the remaining number of time savings in the time saving state C2 is not displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, depending on when the variable display is displayed with the predetermined display result, the period during which the variable display is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result may become extremely short, giving a sense of waste. By restricting the display, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the feeling of wastefulness.

The gaming machine of form 17-3 is
The performance execution means (for example, the image display device 5)
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) is included,
When the game machine is controlled to a special state, a corresponding display (e.g., a display of the remaining number of time-saving times) indicating a period during which the game machine can be controlled to the special state can be displayed on the display means;
In the case where the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, when the special state ends and the state is controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, an end suggestion performance is executed in the special state after the predetermined display result, but the display of the corresponding display is restricted (for example, as shown as a modified example, in the case where the variable display result during any time-saving state is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B, the remaining number of times the time-saving is performed is not displayed in the time-saving state C2 based on the time-saving miss B, but the time-saving end countdown is executed).
The corresponding display continues for a longer period during the execution of the variable display 1 than the end suggestion performance (for example, as shown as a modified example, the display of the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed for a shorter period than the time-saving end countdown),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the display period of the end suggestion effect that notifies the end of the special state after a specified display result is short, even if the period controlled to the special state after a specified display result is short depending on when the specified display result is displayed in the special state, it is possible to appropriately notify the end timing of the special state after a specified display result while preventing an excessive feeling of wasting money.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-0 is
A variable display of identification information (for example, a special symbol) is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a starting prize), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (). A gaming machine that can be controlled to
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is
As the special state, the variable display can be controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result based on the fact that the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result,
When the variable display executed during the special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state,
The performance execution means are
including display means;
A special display regarding the granting of gaming value can be displayed on the display means when the special state ends,
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, even if the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state, the special display is displayed on the display means when the special state ends. can be displayed,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special display is displayed when the special state ends regardless of whether or not the predetermined display result was displayed during the special state, thereby preventing the control for displaying the special display from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to improve the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 18-1 is
The state control means can control the special state to a special state after the advantageous state based on the fact that the special state has been controlled to an advantageous state, and the specific condition is set based on the fact that a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed has been executed a specific number of times. When established, it can be controlled to a special state after reaching a certain number of times,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying a special display on the display means when the special state ends after the advantageous state, and limits the display of the special display when the special state ends after reaching a specific number of times.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the special state ends after reaching a certain number of times, it means that the special state has never been controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to being displayed.

The gaming machine of form 18-2 is
The means of performance execution are:
In a case where the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in a non-special state and is controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, when the special state ends after the predetermined display result, the display of the special display is restricted;
In the case where the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the special state after the advantageous state, and the special state after the predetermined display result is controlled after the end of the special state after the advantageous state, the special display can be displayed on the display means when the special state after the predetermined display result ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 284-45, in the case of the result presentation, in the normal state, the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B, and in the time-saving state C2 based on this, the result presentation is not performed when 685 variable displays are executed without being controlled to the jackpot game state, but in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state A3, the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B (when the time-saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state A3), the result presentation is performed when 685 variable displays are executed without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time-saving state C2).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the special state ends after the predetermined display result transitioned from a non-special state, the situation is one in which the advantageous state has never been controlled, so that it is possible to prevent interest from decreasing due to the display of the special display in such a situation. Also, when the special state ends after the predetermined display result transitioned from a special state after an advantageous state, the situation is one in which the advantageous state has been controlled at least once, so that it is possible to increase interest in the game by appealing to the game value granted by displaying the special display.

The gaming machine of form 18-3 is
The effect execution means executes the predetermined display result when the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result in the post-predetermined display result special state and is controlled again to the predetermined post-display result special state after the predetermined post-display result special state ends. When the special state ends after the display result, the display of the special display is restricted (for example, in the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, the variable display result is "Time saving" OFF and the "Time saving" Error type is "Time saving" Error B). (When the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 are controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3), the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot game state in the time saving state C2. Then, the result effect is executed, but if the variable display result is OFF with time saving in the normal state, time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2, and the time saving with OFF type is OFF with time saving, B (time saving state A1 , when the time saving state A2 and the time saving state A3 are controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the time saving state A3), the time saving state C2 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result in these time saving states is a failure with the time saving. (The part where the result display is not executed even if variable display is executed 685 times without any change)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, if the special state after the predetermined display result that has transitioned again from the special state after the predetermined display result ends, the situation may be such that it has never been controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent interest from decreasing due to the display.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-5>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
A state control means (e.g., CPU03) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means changes the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, can be controlled to state C2),
When a variable display executed during a special state is displayed with a predetermined display result, it is possible to control to the special state after the predetermined display result after the end of the special state (for example, if the variable display result is displayed in any time saving state) If the time saving is not applied and the type of time saving is not applied and the time saving is not applied and the type is B, the part that is controlled to the time saving state C2 after the end of the running time saving state),
The performance execution means are
Including production sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
After a predetermined display result, the predetermined background sound can be output by the effect sound output means when the special state is controlled (for example, when the time saving state C2 is controlled as shown in FIG. 285-3(A)) (a part where the production control CPU 120 outputs BGM from the speakers 8L and 8Rk based on any of the sound patterns R10, R20, and R30),
When a variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state, and the special state is controlled after the predetermined display result ends after the special state ends, the background sound being output can be changed to a specific background sound and output. (For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (A), if the variable display result is OFF with time saving in any time saving state and the type of FAIL with time saving is B, the corresponding time saving state After the BGM based on the sound pattern R10 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the BGM for the rushing performance B and the right-handed promotion performance F after the end of the BGM, the BGM based on the sound pattern R20 is output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of whether or not the predetermined display result is displayed during the special state, the specific background sound is output by being controlled to the special state after the predetermined display result, so the specific background sound is output. Since it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated, it is possible to improve the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 19-1 is
The means of performance execution are:
A variable display performance of the performance identification information can be executed (for example, a portion capable of executing a variable display of a decorative pattern),
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the variable display effect of the effect identification information is controlled to a predetermined reach state (for example, the CPU 103 selects one of the reach variation patterns shown in FIG. 284-6, and the effect control CPU 120 can execute the reach effect).
It is possible to output background sounds during a period when reach effects are not being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), a portion in which BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound pattern N10 during high-speed scrolling in the normal state).
When the variable display is displayed with a predetermined display result during a special state and the special state is controlled after the end of the special state, a specific sound different from the background sound is output, and then a specific background sound is output (for example, see FIG. 285-8).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the specific background sound is terminated after a specific sound different from the background sound is once output, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the transition to the special state after the predetermined display result.

The gaming machine of form 19-2 is
The means of performance execution are:
Light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901-904, 911-922, 923-934, board LEDs 951-956, 957-962, 963-968, 969-970, etc.),
In a special state after an advantageous state, it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit light using light-emitting control data corresponding to the special state after the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), a portion in which the light-emitting control of each LED is performed based on different brightness data tables for the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state A3).
In a special state after a predetermined display result, it is possible to cause the light-emitting means to emit light using light-emitting control data corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), a portion in which the light-emitting control of each LED is performed based on a luminance data table that differs between the time-saving state C1 and the time-saving state C2).
The first control data of the light emission control data corresponding to the special state after the predetermined display result is control data that does not cause the light emitting means to emit light (for example, luminance data "000" for turning off the light).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means does not emit light initially in the special state after the predetermined display result, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the transition to the special state after the predetermined display result.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-6>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the fulfillment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
a state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
As a special state, the state control means is configured to control the state after reaching a specific number of times when a specific condition (for example, the number of variable displays reaches 685 times) based on a specific number of executions of variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed is satisfied. Can be controlled to a special state (for example, time saving state B),
The performance execution means are
Production means (for example, image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, movable body 32, frame LEDs 901-904, 911-922, 923-934, board LEDs 951-956, 957-962, 963-968, 969-970, etc. ), including
In a specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, it is possible to execute a special effect in which the mode of the effect means is set to a special mode during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), During the variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot, it is possible to perform a rainbow effect in which the image display device 5 displays an image in a rainbow mode, each LED emits light in a rainbow mode, and a movable body effect in which the movable body 32 is operated. ),
In a variable arrival display in which a specific display result is not displayed for a specific number of times, a special effect in which the mode of the effect means is set to a special mode is not executed during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B)). As shown in the figure, there are variable displays where the variable display result is changed to time saving state (control is made to time saving state C1 or time saving state C2 after variable display), or when the variable display odd number reaches 685 times (time saving state B is changed after variable display). (portions where rainbow effect or movable object effect is not executed in variable display controlled),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable arrival display is not a variable display that results in a specific display result even though a specific condition is met, so by not performing a special effect that is a special mode in the variable arrival display, a specific display that results in a specific display result is Since it is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a variable display, it is possible to improve the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 20-1 is
The means of performance execution are:
A variable display performance of the performance identification information can be executed (for example, a portion capable of executing a variable display of a decorative pattern),
In the specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, it is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the variable display effect of the effect identification information is controlled to a favorable state by making it a predetermined reach mode (for example, the CPU 103 selects any one of the jackpot reach variation patterns shown in FIG. 284-6, whereby the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach effect).
It is possible to set the mode of the presentation means to a special mode during the period before the variable display becomes a reach mode, and it is also possible to set the mode of the presentation means to a special mode during the period after the variable display becomes a reach mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), in a variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a portion in which a rainbow presentation and a movable body presentation can be executed before and after the reach mode).
It is also possible to execute reach effects in the reach variable display (for example, as shown in Fig. 284-6, Fig. 284-26, Fig. 284-27, and Fig. 284-28, in the 685th variable display, it is possible to select the normal reach miss or the super reach miss variation pattern).
In neither the period before the reach state in the reached variable display nor the period after the reach state is reached, the mode of the performance means is a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times, the rainbow performance and the movable body performance are not executed before and after the reach during the 685th variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by executing a reach effect in the reached variable display, if there is a period before and after the display result becomes a reach state just like a specific variable display that becomes a specific display result, by not making it a special state in either period, it is possible to further prevent the reached variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display.

The gaming machine of form 20-2 is
The presentation means includes light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, panel LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) and display means (for example, an image display device). 5),
The performance execution means are
When it is a specific variable display, it is possible to set both the light emitting means and the display means in a special mode in the special effect (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (C), the variable display result If it becomes a jackpot, each LED is made to emit light in a rainbow manner as a rainbow effect, and a rainbow image is displayed on the image display device 5).
When it is a variable reach display, neither the light emitting means nor the display means is set in a special mode (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3(B), for the 685th variable display, the 685th (a portion in which each LED does not emit light in a rainbow mode and the image display device 5 does not display a rainbow image by not performing a rainbow effect before and after reaching during variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for a specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, a plurality of presentation means are used as special modes to excite the player, and for a variable arrival display that is controlled to a special state, any presentation means is By not using a special mode, it is possible to more reliably prevent the variable arrival display from being mistaken for a variable display that is a specific display result.

The gaming machine of form 20-3 is
The means of performance execution are:
During a special notification period (e.g., a period during which a symbol is determined for a variable jackpot display) when the player is controlled to a favorable state after the specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect indicating that the player is controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a portion displaying the message "FEVER" on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11)) can be executed.
During a specific notification period (e.g., a pattern determination period for the 685th variable display) when the display result of the reached variable display is displayed and then the special state is entered after the specific number of times is reached, a specific notification effect indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times is reached (e.g., a portion displaying the message "Entering BATTLE RUSH" on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10)) can be executed.
During a specific notification period, the mode of the performance means can be a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), during the pattern determination period of the 685th variable display, each LED is made to emit light in a rainbow mode as a rainbow performance, and a rainbow image is displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case of a specific variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect is executed to indicate that the state will be controlled to an advantageous state during the special notification period, and further, in the specific notification period after the reach variable display in which the state is controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached, a specific notification effect is executed to indicate that the state will be controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached. This makes it possible to prevent a mistaken identification of the specific notification period after the reach variable display and the special notification period after the specific variable display, and by making the mode of the presentation means a special mode, it is possible to increase the sense of excitement of being controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 20-4 is
The means of performance execution are:
During a special notification period (e.g., a period during which a symbol is determined for a variable jackpot display) when the player is controlled to a favorable state after the specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect indicating that the player is controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a portion displaying the message "FEVER" on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11)) can be executed.
During a specific notification period (e.g., a pattern determination period for the 685th variable display) when the display result of the reached variable display is displayed and then the special state is entered after the specific number of times is reached, a specific notification effect indicating that the special state will be entered after the specific number of times is reached (e.g., a portion displaying the message "Entering BATTLE RUSH" on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10)) can be executed.
During the specific notification period, the mode of the performance means is not a special mode (for example, as shown as a modified example, during the pattern determination period of the 685th variable display, the light emission of each LED in a rainbow mode as a rainbow performance and the display of a rainbow image on the image display device 5 are not performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case of a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect is executed to indicate that the state will be controlled to an advantageous state during the special notification period, and further, in the specific notification period after the reach variable display in which the state is controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached, a specific notification effect is executed to indicate that the state will be controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached, and the mode of the presentation means is not a special mode, so that it is possible to prevent confusion between the specific notification period after the reach variable display and the special notification period after the variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 20-5 is
The performance execution means can set the mode of the performance means to a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a special state after reaching a specified number of times controlled after the variable display (for example, , In the jackpot variable display during time saving state B, a rainbow-colored image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and various lamps may be lit in rainbow colors.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the mode of the effect means is set to the special mode in the variable display that provides a specific display result when controlled to a special state, thereby making it possible to excite the players and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 20-6 is
The presentation data for setting the presentation means in a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a special state sets the presentation means in a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a non-special state. This data is different from the performance data for , but the performance mode is the same for some parts (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (C), the rainbow performance in the normal state and the rainbow performance in the time saving state) (The part where the performance control CPU 120 uses the same brightness data table to cause each LED to emit light in the same light emission mode in the normal state and the time saving state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for example, the mode of presentation means that attracts relatively high attention to players is made different between the special state and the non-special state, while the mode of presentation means that attracts relatively low attention to players is kept the same. By doing so, it is possible to excite the players while suppressing an increase in the amount of performance data.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-0 is characterized by: <Characteristic part 130SG-6>
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the variable display to a special state (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on the fact that the variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving) different from the specific display result as a special state,
The means of performance execution are:
Including a performance means (for example, the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, the movable body 32, the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, and the board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.),
In a specific variable display in which the display result is a specific display result, a special effect can be executed in which the mode of the effect means is a special mode during the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), during a variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a rainbow effect in which an image in a rainbow mode is displayed on the image display device 5 or each LED is illuminated in a rainbow mode, or a movable body effect in which the movable body 32 is operated can be executed).
In a predetermined variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result, a special effect in which the mode of the performance means is a special mode is not executed during the predetermined variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), when the variable display result is a miss with time reduction (controlled to the time reduction state C1 or time reduction affection C2 after the variable display), a part in which a rainbow effect or a movable body effect is not executed during the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined variable display that is controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result is not a variable display that results in a specific display result, so by not executing a special performance that sets a special aspect in the predetermined variable display, it is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, thereby improving the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 21-1 is
The means of performance execution are:
A variable display performance of the performance identification information can be executed (for example, a portion capable of executing a variable display of a decorative pattern),
In the specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, it is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the variable display effect of the effect identification information is controlled to a favorable state by making it a predetermined reach mode (for example, the CPU 103 selects any one of the jackpot reach variation patterns shown in FIG. 284-6, whereby the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach effect).
It is possible to set the mode of the presentation means to a special mode during the period before the variable display becomes a reach mode, and it is also possible to set the mode of the presentation means to a special mode during the period after the variable display becomes a reach mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), in a variable display in which the variable display result is a jackpot, a portion in which a rainbow presentation and a movable body presentation can be executed before and after the reach mode).
It is also possible to execute reach effects in a predetermined variable display in which the display result is a predetermined display result (for example, FIG. 284-6 shows a part in which the variation pattern of Super Reach α or Super Reach δ can be selected when the variable display result is a time-saving miss).
In neither the period before the reach state in the predetermined variable display nor the period after the reach state is reached, the mode of the performance means is a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), in a variable display in which the variable display result is a miss with time reduction, a portion in which the rainbow performance and the movable body performance are not executed before and after the reach during the variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by executing a reach effect in a predetermined variable display, if there is a period before and after the display result becomes a reach state like a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, by not making it a special state in either period, it is possible to more reliably prevent the predetermined variable display from being mistaken for a variable display that results in a specific display result.

The gaming machine of form 21-2 is
The presentation means includes light emitting means (for example, frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, panel LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.) and display means (for example, an image display device). 5) and
The means of performing the performance is
When the display result is a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, it is possible to set both the light emitting means and the display means in a special mode in the special effect (for example, Fig. 285-3 (C) As shown in , if the variable display result is a jackpot, each LED is made to emit light in a rainbow manner as a rainbow effect, and a rainbow image is displayed on the image display device 5).
When the display result is a predetermined variable display that results in a predetermined display result, neither the light emitting means nor the display means is set as a special aspect (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), when the variable display result is Regarding the variable display that results in time saving and failure, by not performing the rainbow effect before reaching and after reaching during the variable display, each LED will emit light in a rainbow mode and the image display device 5 will display a rainbow image. (parts without),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, for a specific variable display where the display result is a specific display result, a plurality of presentation means are used as special modes to excite the player, and for a predetermined variable display that is controlled to a special state, any presentation means is By not using a special mode, it is possible to further prevent the predetermined variable display from being mistaken as a variable display resulting in a specific display result.

The gaming machine of form 21-3 is
The means of performing the performance is
During a special notification period (e.g., symbol confirmation period of jackpot variable display) when controlled to be in an advantageous state after a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect indicating that the control is to be in an advantageous state (for example, Fig. 285- 5 (Q11), the part that displays the message "FEVER" on the image display device 5) can be executed,
During a predetermined notification period (for example, a symbol confirmation period for a variable display with time saving) when the predetermined display result is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result is displayed, a notification that the predetermined display result will be controlled to a special state is given. 285-7 (S10), the part that displays the message "BATTLE RUSH" on the image display device 5),
During the predetermined notification period, it is possible to set the mode of the production means to a special mode (for example, as shown in a modified example, if the variable display result is a time-saving hit or miss, during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display, (a portion that enables each LED to emit light in a rainbow mode as a rainbow effect and display a rainbow image on the image display device 5);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the case of a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special announcement effect is executed that indicates that the control will be in an advantageous state during the special announcement period, and furthermore, after the predetermined display result, the control will be in a special state. During the predetermined notification period after the predetermined variable display, a predetermined notification effect indicating that the special state will be controlled after the predetermined display result is executed. It is possible to prevent the game from being mistakenly recognized as such, and by setting the mode of presentation means to be a special mode, it is possible to increase the excitement of being controlled to a special state after a predetermined display result, which increases the interest in the game. You can improve.

The gaming machine of form 21-4 is
The means of performance execution are:
During a special notification period (e.g., a period during which a symbol is determined for a variable jackpot display) when the player is controlled to a favorable state after the specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect indicating that the player is controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a portion displaying the message "FEVER" on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11)) can be executed.
During a predetermined notification period (e.g., a pattern determination period for a time-saving variable losing display) when a predetermined display result is displayed and then the special state is entered, a predetermined notification effect (e.g., a portion displaying a message "Enter BATTLE RUSH" on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10)) indicating that the special state will be entered after the predetermined display result can be executed.
During a predetermined notification period, the mode of the performance means is not a special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), during a pattern determination period of a time-saving variable losing display, light emission in a rainbow mode of each LED as a rainbow performance and display of a rainbow image on the image display device 5 are not performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case of a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, a special notification effect is executed to indicate that the state will be controlled to an advantageous state during the special notification period, and further, in the specified notification period after a specified variable display in which the state is controlled to a special state after a specified display result, a specified notification effect is executed to indicate that the state will be controlled to a special state after the specified display result, and the mode of the presentation means is not a special mode, so that it is possible to prevent confusion between the specified notification period after the specified variable display and the special notification period after the specific variable display, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 21-5 is
The performance execution means can set the mode of the performance means to a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a variable display during a special state after a predetermined display result controlled after a predetermined variable display (for example, in a jackpot variable display during the time-saving state B, a rainbow-colored image may be displayed on the image display device 5, or various lamps may be lit in rainbow colors).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the mode of the presentation means a special mode in the variable display which results in a specific display result when controlled to a special state, it is possible to excite the player and increase interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 21-6 is
The performance data for putting the performance means in a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a special state differs from the performance data for putting the performance means in a special mode in a variable display in which a specific display result is displayed in a non-special state, but some of the performance data are the same (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(C), for the rainbow performance in the normal state and the rainbow performance in the time-saving state, the performance control CPU 120 uses the same light emission control data to cause each LED to emit light in the same light emission mode in the normal state and the time-saving state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, for example, by making the manner of presentation means that attracts a relatively high level of attention from the player different between special and non-special states, while keeping the manner of presentation means that attracts a relatively low level of attention the same, it is possible to excite the player while suppressing an increase in the data capacity of the presentation data.

[Mode 22]
The gaming machine of the form 22-0 is characterized by the following:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the state to a special state (e.g., time-saving state B) after a specific number of times is reached when a specific condition based on the execution of a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed a specific number of times (e.g., the number of variable displays reaches 685) is established as the special state,
The means of performance execution are:
It is possible to execute a variable display performance of performance identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern);
In the specific variable display where the specific display result is displayed, it is possible to highlight the performance identification information before the display result is confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(E), in the variable display where the variable display result is a jackpot, the part where the stopped symbol action display is performed).
In the reaching variable display where the variable display without the specific display result reaches a specific number of times, the performance identification information is not highlighted before the display result is definitively displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(E), the part where the stopped pattern action display is not performed in the 685th variable display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the reached variable display that is controlled to a special state after a specific number of times is reached is not a specific variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, so by not highlighting the performance identification information before the display result is confirmed and displayed, it is possible to prevent confusion with the specific variable display, thereby improving the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 22-1 is
The means of performance execution are:
In the variable display performance of the performance identification information when the variable display becomes a specific display result, the same performance identification information can be displayed as a performance result of the variable display performance (for example, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, a portion where the decorative pattern can be displayed with the same numbers such as "111" or "222");
A specific effect (e.g., a reach effect) that can notify the user that the result of the effect during the variable display will lead to an advantageous state can be executed.
When the result of a specific effect is displayed, the effect identification information is enlarged and then reduced in a state where it is aligned, and is displayed at a predetermined position, and an effect display in which light moves can be executed for the effect identification information displayed at the predetermined position (for example, as shown in Fig. 285-3(E), Fig. 285-5, Fig. 285-9, a portion where a stopped pattern action display is performed when decorative patterns are displayed in a jackpot combination).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by changing the state of the performance identification information in a consistent manner, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state can be effectively heightened, thereby increasing the interest in a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form 22-2 is
The means of performing the performance is
In a variable display performance of performance identification information when the variable display does not result in a specific display result, it is possible to display a combination of non-identical performance identification information as the performance result of the variable display performance (for example, if the variable display result is incorrect or has a time reduction) If it is a mistake, use a combination of different numbers such as "234" as shown in Figure 285-6 (R4)),
During variable display, it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a reach performance) that can notify that the performance will be controlled in an advantageous state depending on the performance result,
When the performance result of a specific performance is shown, the combination of non-identical performance identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporarily stopped combination of non-identical performance identification information is not enlarged, reduced, or moved, and the non-identical performance identification information is not displayed. The effect display in which the light moves with respect to the identification information is also not executed (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (E) and Figure 285-6, the display stops when the decorative pattern is displayed in a combination of a miss or a combination of a time saver and a miss). (portions where no symbol action is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the combination of non-identical performance identification information remains temporarily stopped and does not change, it is possible to further prevent the user from mistaking the display for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 22-3 is
The means of performing the performance is
including a movable body (for example, movable body 32),
When the display result is a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, it is possible to execute a movable body effect that moves the movable body before the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B) (If the variable display result is a jackpot, the part where the movable body effect can be executed before and after the reach),
If the variable display result is not displayed and the variable display number reaches a specific number, the movable body is not operated before the display result is displayed (for example, as shown in U12-3 (B), In the 685th variable display, the part where the movable body effect is not executed before and after the reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further prevent a reaching variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state from being mistaken as a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state depending on the presence or absence of the movement of the movable body.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-0 has <characteristic part 130SG-7>
Variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbol) is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., starting winning), and when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., jackpot), it is advantageous for the player. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
A state control means (for example, CPU03) capable of controlling a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means changes the special state after the predetermined display result (for example, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, time saving state C1, can be controlled to state C2),
The means of performing the performance is
It is possible to perform a variable display performance of performance identification information (for example, a decorative pattern),
In a specific variable display in which a specific display result is displayed, it is possible to emphasize the presentation identification information before the display result is displayed as confirmed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(E), In the variable display where the variable display result is a jackpot, the part that displays the stop symbol action),
In a predetermined variable display in which a predetermined display result is displayed, the production identification information is not highlighted before the display result is confirmed (for example, as shown in Figure 285-3 (E), the variable display result is displayed in a time-saving manner). The part where the stop symbol action is not displayed in the variable display that is not attached),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the predetermined variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed is not the specific variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, the production identification information is not highlighted before the display result is displayed as confirmed. Since the display can be prevented from being mistaken for a specific variable display, the marketability of a game machine equipped with a special state can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 23-1 is
The means of performance execution are:
In the variable display performance of the performance identification information when the variable display becomes a specific display result, the same performance identification information can be displayed as a performance result of the variable display performance (for example, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, a portion where the decorative pattern can be displayed with the same numbers such as "111" or "222");
A specific effect (e.g., a reach effect) that can notify the user that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state during the variable display can be executed.
When the result of a specific effect is displayed, the effect identification information is enlarged and then reduced in a state where it is aligned, and is displayed at a predetermined position, and an effect display in which light moves can be executed for the effect identification information displayed at the predetermined position (for example, as shown in Fig. 285-3(E), Fig. 285-5, Fig. 285-9, a portion where a stopped pattern action display is performed when decorative patterns are displayed in a jackpot combination).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by changing the state of the performance identification information in a consistent manner, the expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state can be effectively heightened, thereby increasing the interest in a specific performance.

The gaming machine of form 23-2 is
The means of performance execution are:
In the variable display performance of the performance identification information when the variable display does not result in a specific display result, it is possible to display a combination of non-identical performance identification information as the performance result of the variable display performance (for example, when the variable display result is a miss or a miss with time reduction, as shown in FIG. 285-6 (R4), a combination of different numbers such as "234" can be displayed).
A specific effect (e.g., a reach effect) that can notify the user that the effect will be controlled to an advantageous state during the variable display can be executed.
When the result of a specific effect is displayed, a combination of non-identical effect identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporarily stopped combination of non-identical effect identification information is not enlarged, reduced, or moved, and an effect display in which light moves is not performed for the non-identical effect identification information (for example, as shown in Fig. 285-3(E) and Fig. 285-6, a portion in which a stopped pattern action display is not performed when a decorative pattern is displayed in a combination of a miss or a miss with time reduction).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a combination of non-identical performance identification information remains temporarily stopped and does not change, which makes it even more difficult to mistake it for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 23-3 is
The means of performance execution are:
A movable body (e.g., movable body 32) is included,
When the display result is a specific variable display that results in a specific display result, it is possible to execute a movable body performance that operates a movable body before the specific display result is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), when the variable display result is a jackpot, it is possible to execute a movable body performance before and after the reach);
When the display result is a predetermined variable display that results in a predetermined display result, the movable body is not operated before the display result is displayed (for example, as shown in U12-3(B), in a variable display with a time-saving miss, a part in which the movable body performance is not executed before and after the reach),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to further prevent a predetermined variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state, depending on whether or not the movable body is moving.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of the form 24-0 is characterized by the following:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., a special pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the state to a special state (e.g., time-saving state B) after a specific number of times is reached when a specific condition based on the execution of a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed a specific number of times (e.g., the number of variable displays reaches 685) is established as the special state,
The means of performance execution are:
The display means (e.g., the image display device 5) and the light emitting means (e.g., the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, the board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.),
During a special notification period (e.g., a fanfare effect period) when the game is controlled to an advantageous state after the specific display result is displayed, a special notification display indicating that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state and corresponding to the special notification period can be displayed on the display means (e.g., a portion of the image display device 5 that displays an image of a fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 285-5 ).
During a specific notification period (e.g., a pattern determination period) when a display result is displayed in a variable display where a specific display result is not displayed and then the display result is controlled to a special state after the specific number of times is reached, a specific notification display indicating that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached and corresponding to the specific notification period can be displayed on the display means (e.g., a portion of the image display device 5 that displays an image of the entry performance B),
During the special notice period, the light emitting means is illuminated using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notice period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), during the fanfare performance period, each LED is illuminated based on the brightness data tables WA1, WL1, WR1, EL1, ER1, LL1, and AT1).
During the specific notification period, the light emitting means is illuminated using specific light emission control data corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), during the period of the entry performance B, each LED is illuminated based on the brightness data tables WA3-7, WL3-7, WR3-7, EL3-7, ER3-7, LL3-7, and AT3-7).
Because the initial control data of the special light-emitting control data is different from the initial control data of the specific light-emitting control data, the initial light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means in the specific announcement period is different from the initial light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means in the specific announcement period (for example, as shown in Figures 285-28 (A) to (F), the first grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare performance part, the first grandchild table WA21 of the entry performance A part, and the first grandchild table WA31 of the entry performance B part are different, so that the initial light-emitting modes (brightness data) of various lamps are different between the fanfare performance period and the entry performance B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the reached variable display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state even though a specific condition is met, and therefore in the reached variable display, the state of the display means and the state of the light-emitting means are made different from the specific variable display, in particular, by making the initial control data different to make the initial light-emitting state different, it becomes clear that the light-emitting state of the light-emitting means is different, and therefore it is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 24-1 is
At least the light emission color data included in the control data of the special light emission control data is different from the control data of the specific light emission control data (see FIG. 285-28 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, at least the light emission color of the light-emitting means during the special notification period and the specific notification period is different, making it even clearer that the light-emitting manner of the light-emitting means is different, which makes it even more difficult to mistake it for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 24-2 is
The first control data of the special light-emitting control data is light-emitting control data,
The first control data of the specific light emission control data is non-light emission control data (for example, the first luminance data in the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare performance part is luminance data that specifies "light on", while the first luminance data in the grandchild table WA31 of the rush performance B (scene 1) part is luminance data that specifies "light off". See Figures 285-28 (A) and (C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the initial state of the light-emitting means during the special notification period and the specific notification period is light-emitting and non-light-emitting, making it even clearer that the light-emitting states of the light-emitting means are different, which makes it even more difficult to mistake it for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 24-3 is
The second control data after the first control data in the special light emission control data (for example, grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part, see Figure 285-28 (A)) is the light emission data of the first color (for example, red). but does not include emission data of a second color (e.g., reddish-purple) and a third color (e.g., yellow),
The second control data after the first control data in the specific light emission control data (for example, grandchild table WA31 of the rush effect B (scene 1) part, see FIG. 285-28(C)) is the second color (for example, control data that includes luminescence data of a reddish-purple color but does not include luminescence data of a first color (e.g., red) and a third color (e.g., yellow) (modified example);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the emitted light color of the light emitting means differs between the special notification period and the specific notification period, and it becomes much clearer that the light emission mode of the light emitting means is different, so that control is more reliably controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of the form 25-0 is characterized by the following:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., a special pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the variable display to a special state (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on the fact that the variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving) different from the specific display result as a special state,
The means of performance execution are:
The display means (e.g., the image display device 5) and the light emitting means (e.g., the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, the board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 to 968, 969 to 970, etc.),
During a special notification period (e.g., a fanfare effect period) when the game is controlled to an advantageous state after the specific display result is displayed, a special notification display indicating that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state and corresponding to the special notification period can be displayed on the display means (e.g., a portion of the image display device 5 that displays an image of a fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 285-5 ).
During a predetermined notification period (e.g., a pattern determination period) when the predetermined display result is displayed and then the special state is controlled, a predetermined notification display indicating that the predetermined display result will be controlled to a special state can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in Figs. 285-5 and 285-6, a portion of the image display device 5 that displays images of entry performance A and entry performance B).
During the special notice period, the light emitting means is illuminated using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notice period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), during the fanfare performance period, the LEDs are illuminated based on the brightness data tables WA1, WL1, WR1, EL1, ER1, LL1, and AT1).
During the predetermined notification period, the light emitting means is illuminated using the predetermined light emission control data corresponding to the predetermined notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), during the entry performance A, each LED is illuminated based on the control data B1, and during the entry performance B, each LED is illuminated based on the brightness data tables WA3-7, WL3-7, WR3-7, EL3-7, ER3-7, LL3-7, and AT3-7).
Because the initial control data of the special light-emitting control data is different from the initial control data of the predetermined light-emitting control data, the initial light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means in the specific notification period is different from the initial light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means in the predetermined notification period (for example, as shown in Figures 285-28 (A) to (F), the first grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare performance part, the first grandchild table WA21 of the entry performance A part, and the first grandchild table WA31 of the entry performance B part are different, so that the initial light-emitting modes (brightness data) of various lamps are different between the fanfare performance period and the entry performance B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined variable display which results in a predetermined display is controlled to a special state but is not a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state, and therefore in the predetermined variable display, the state of the display means and the state of the light-emitting means are different from the specific variable display, in particular, by making the initial control data different to make the initial light-emitting state different, it becomes clear that the light-emitting state of the light-emitting means is different, and therefore it is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 25-1 is
At least the emission color data included in the control data of the special emission control data is different from the control data of the predetermined emission control data (see FIG. 285-28);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, at least the emitted light color of the light emitting means is different between the special notification period and the predetermined notification period, and it becomes clearer that the light emitting manner of the light emitting means is different, so that the control is performed in an even more advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display.

The gaming machine of form 25-2 is
The first control data of the special light emission control data is light emission control data,
The first control data of the predetermined light emission control data is control data for non-light emission (for example, the first brightness data in the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part is brightness data that specifies "lighting up", The first luminance data of the grandchild table WA31 of the production B (scene 1) part is the luminance data that specifies "lights out" (see Figures 285-28 (A) and (C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the first mode of the light emitting means in the special notice period and the predetermined notice period is light emission and non-light emission, which makes it even clearer that the light emission modes of the light emitting means are different, which makes the situation even more advantageous. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled by the user.

The gaming machine of form 25-3 is
The second control data after the first control data in the special light emission control data (for example, grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part, see Figure 285-28 (A)) is the light emission data of the first color (for example, red). but does not include emission data of a second color (e.g., reddish-purple) and a third color (e.g., yellow),
The second control data following the first control data in the predetermined light emission control data (for example, the grandchild table WA31 of the rush effect B (scene 1) part, see FIG. 285-28(C)) is the third color (for example, control data that includes luminescence data of a first color (for example, red) and luminescence data of a second color (for example, red-purple);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the emitted light color of the light emitting means differs between the special notification period and the predetermined notification period, and it becomes much clearer that the light emission mode of the light emitting means is different, so that control is more reliably controlled to an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display.

[Mode 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-0 is characterized by: <Characteristic part 130SG-9>
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the state to a special state (e.g., time-saving state B) after a specific number of times is reached when a specific condition based on the execution of a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed a specific number of times (e.g., the number of variable displays reaches 685) is established as the special state,
The game machine has a first path (e.g., a left game area) and a second path (e.g., a right game area) different from the first path as a path through which the game medium can flow down,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to launch the game medium to the second path (for example, the time-saving state is a part in which the game ball is mainly launched toward the right game area),
The means of performance execution are:
As a performance means, the display means (e.g., the image display device 5) and the light emitting means (e.g., the attacca LEDs 991, 992, the attacca LED 993, and the attacca LED 994) are included,
During a special notification period when the special display result is displayed and then the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, during a pattern determination period when the variable display result is a jackpot), a special notification display (for example, a name display in the right-hit promotion performance A) corresponding to the special notification period, which indicates that the player is controlled to an advantageous state, can be displayed on the display means;
During a specific notification period (e.g., a pattern determination period when the variable display count reaches 685 times) when a display result is displayed in a variable display where a specific display result is not displayed and then the special state is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, a specific notification display (e.g., a name display in a right-hit promotion performance F) corresponding to the specific notification period can be displayed on the display means, the display indicating that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached;
During the special notification period, the light emitting means is illuminated using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4, in the right-hit promotion performance A, the light emission control of the attack LEDs 991, 992, the attack LED 993, and the attack LED 994 is performed using the control data S1).
During the specific notification period, the light emitting means is illuminated using specific light emission control data corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4, in the right-hit promotion performance F, the light emission control of the attacca LEDs 991 and 992, the attacca LED 993, and the attacca LED 994 is performed using the control data S1).
The control data constituting the special light emission control data includes first control data for performing a promotion notification to promote the launch of the game medium to the second path (for example, control data S1 for sequentially illuminating the LEDs corresponding to the right hit path in a rainbow color scheme in the right hit promotion performance A),
The control data constituting the specific light emission control data includes second control data for performing a promotion notification to promote the launch of the game medium to the second path (for example, control data S3 for sequentially emitting white light to the LEDs corresponding to the right hit path in the right hit promotion performance F),
The light emitting means includes special light emitting means (e.g., attacker LEDs 991, 992) provided in correspondence with a first state through which the game medium can enter in an advantageous state and a variable means capable of changing to a second state in which the game medium cannot easily enter due to the first state,
The first control data is control data for causing the special light-emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light-emitting means to emit light in an emphatic manner (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(C), in the right-hit promotion performance A, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are caused to emit light (blinking in rainbow colors), but in the right-hit promotion performance F, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are not caused to emit light. See FIGS. 285-34 to 36).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the reached variable display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state even though a specific condition is met, and therefore, in the reached variable display, by not making the variable means stand out by highlighting the special light-emitting means when notifying the second path, it is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a special state.

The gaming machine of form 26-1 is
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker LED 994) provided corresponding to a specific area (for example, the gate switch 21) that is advantageous for the player when the game medium enters in the special state,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner, but causes the specific light emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that causes the attacker LED 994 to emit light without causing the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to emit light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during the specific notification period after the variable arrival display, the specific light emitting means rather than the special light emitting means is emitted in an emphasized manner to make the specific area stand out, thereby controlling the situation to an advantageous state. Since it becomes clear that the specific variable display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the user from mistaking it as a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 26-2 is
The first control data is control data for causing the special light-emitting means to emit light in a special mode that is an emphasis mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(C), the part that causes the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to flash in rainbow colors),
The second control data is control data for causing the specific light-emitting means to emit light in an emphasis mode different from the special mode (for example, the part in which the attacker LED 994 is made to flash in white as shown in FIG. 285-4(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means is an emphasis mode that is different from the special mode, which is the emphasis mode of the special light emitting means, so that it becomes even clearer that it is not a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state, thereby making it even more difficult to mistake it for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 26-3 is
The light emitting means is
A special path light emitting means (for example, a board lamp, a movable lamp 9d, and an attacker LED 991, 992) consisting of a plurality of light emitting bodies provided corresponding to the path to the variable means;
A specific route light emitting means (for example, a panel lamp, a movable lamp 9d, an attacker LED 994), which is composed of a plurality of light emitters provided corresponding to the route to the specific area;
including;
The first control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATA1, ATV1) that causes the light emitters constituting the special route light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a special manner,
The second control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) that causes the light emitters constituting the specific route light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a mode different from the special mode (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) (Fig. 285-34~ 36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means indicating the route also differs between the specific notification period and the special notification period, so it becomes clearer that this is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state. , it is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 26-4 is
The means of performance execution are:
A sound effect output means (e.g., speakers 8L and 8R) is included;
During the special announcement period and the specific announcement period, a sound effect corresponding to each period can be output from the sound effect output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound effect in the right hit promotion effect A or the right hit promotion effect F),
The degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when the light-emitting elements constituting the special path light-emitting means are sequentially illuminated according to the first control data is greater than the degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when the light-emitting elements constituting the special path light-emitting means are sequentially illuminated according to the second control data (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(C), the part in which the effect sound output in right-hit promotion effect A is greater than the effect sound output in right-hit promotion effect F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the degree of emphasis of the effect sound differs between the specific notification period and the special notification period, making it even clearer that it is not a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state, thereby making it even more difficult to mistake it for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

[Mode 27]
The gaming machine of the form 27-0 is characterized by the following:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., special symbols) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the variable display to a special state (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on the fact that the variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result (e.g., a miss with time-saving) different from the specific display result as a special state,
The game machine has a first path (e.g., a left game area) and a second path (e.g., a right game area) different from the first path as a path through which the game medium can flow down,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to launch the game medium to the second path (for example, the time-saving state is a part in which the game ball is mainly launched toward the right game area),
The means of performance execution are:
As a performance means, the display means (e.g., the image display device 5) and the light emitting means (e.g., the attacca LEDs 991, 992, the attacca LED 993, and the attacca LED 994) are included,
During a special notification period when the special display result is displayed and then the player is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a pattern determination period when the variable display result is a jackpot), a special notification display indicating that the player is controlled to an advantageous state and corresponding to the special notification period (for example, a name display in the right-hit promotion performance A) can be displayed on the display means;
In the reaching variable display where the variable display where the specific display result is not displayed reaches a specific number of times (for example, a pattern determination period when the variable display number reaches 685 times), in the specific notification period when the display result is displayed and then the special state is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, a display indicating that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached and corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, an image of a right-hit promotion performance F) can be displayed on the display means;
During the special notification period, the light emitting means is illuminated using the special light emission control data corresponding to the special notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4, in the right-hit promotion performance A, the light emission control of the attack LEDs 991 and 992, the attack LED 993, and the attack LED 994 is performed using the control data S1).
During the specific notification period, the light emitting means is illuminated using specific light emission control data corresponding to the specific notification period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4, in the right-hit promotion performance F, the light emission control of the attacca LEDs 991 and 992, the attacca LED 993, and the attacca LED 994 is performed using the control data S1).
The control data constituting the special light emission control data includes first control data for performing a promotion notification to promote the launch of the game medium to the second path (for example, control data S1 for sequentially illuminating the LEDs corresponding to the right hit path in a rainbow color scheme in the right hit promotion performance A),
The control data constituting the specific light emission control data includes second control data for performing a promotion notification to promote the launch of the game medium to the second path (for example, control data S3 for sequentially emitting white light to the LEDs corresponding to the right hit path in the right hit promotion performance F),
The light emitting means includes special light emitting means (e.g., attacker LEDs 991, 992) provided in correspondence with a first state through which the game medium can enter in an advantageous state and a variable means capable of changing to a second state in which the game medium cannot easily enter due to the first state,
The first control data is control data for causing the special light-emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light-emitting means to emit light in an emphatic manner (for example, in the right-hit promotion performance A, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are caused to emit light (blinking in rainbow colors), but in the right-hit promotion performance F, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are not caused to emit light. See Figures 285-34 to 285-36).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the predetermined variable display which results in the predetermined display is controlled to a special state but is not a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, in the predetermined variable display, by not making the variable means stand out by highlighting the special light-emitting means when notifying the second path of the promotion, it is possible to prevent the predetermined variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine equipped with the special state.

The gaming machine of form 27-1 is
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker LED 994) provided corresponding to a specific area (for example, the gate switch 21) that is advantageous for the player when the game medium enters in the special state,
The second control data is control data that does not cause the special light emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner, but causes the specific light emitting means to emit light in an emphasizing manner (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that causes the attacker LED 994 to emit light without causing the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to emit light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, during a predetermined notification period after a predetermined variable display, the specific light emitting means rather than the special light emitting means is emitted in an emphasized manner to make a specific area stand out, thereby controlling the situation to an advantageous state. Since it becomes clear that the specific variable display is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state, it is possible to prevent the user from mistaking it as a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 27-2 is
The first control data is control data that causes the special light emitting means to emit light in a special mode that is an emphasis mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(C), a part that causes the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 to blink in rainbow colors). ,
The second control data is control data that causes the specific light emitting means to emit light in an emphasis mode different from the special mode (for example, a part that causes the attacker LED 994 to blink white as shown in FIG. 285-4(C)).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means is an emphasis mode different from the special mode that is the emphasis mode of the special light emitting means, so it becomes further clear that it is not a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 27-3 is
The light emitting means is
A special path light emitting means (for example, a board lamp, a movable lamp 9d, and an attacker LED 991, 992) consisting of a plurality of light emitting bodies provided corresponding to the path to the variable means;
A specific route light emitting means (for example, a board lamp, a movable lamp 9d, an attacker LED 994), which is composed of a plurality of light emitters provided corresponding to the route to the specific area;
including;
The first control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATA1, ATV1) that causes the light emitters constituting the special route light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a special manner,
The second control data is control data (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) that causes the light emitters constituting the specific path light emitting means to sequentially emit light in a mode different from the special mode (for example, grandchild tables LL1, EL1, ER1, ATF1) (Fig. 285-34~ 36),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means indicating the route also differs between the specific notification period and the special notification period, so it becomes clearer that this is not a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state. , it is possible to further prevent the display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 27-4 is
The means of performance execution are:
Including a performance sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L8R),
During the special announcement period and the specific announcement period, a sound effect (e.g., a right-hit sound effect) corresponding to each period can be output from the sound effect output means,
The degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when the light-emitting elements constituting the special path light-emitting means are sequentially illuminated according to the first control data is greater than the degree of emphasis of the effect sound output by the effect sound output means when the light-emitting elements constituting the special path light-emitting means are sequentially illuminated according to the second control data (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (D), the right-hit effect sound of right-hit promotion effect A is louder than the right-hit effect sound of right-hit promotion effect F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the degree of emphasis of the effect sound differs between the specific notification period and the special notification period, making it even clearer that it is not a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state, thereby making it even more difficult to mistake it for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state.

[Mode 28]
The gaming machine of the form 28-0 is characterized by the following:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., a special pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the state to a special state (e.g., time-saving state B) after a specific number of times is reached when a specific condition based on the execution of a variable display in which a specific display result is not displayed a specific number of times (e.g., the number of variable displays reaches 685) is established as the special state,
The game machine has a first path (e.g., a left game area) and a second path (e.g., a right game area) different from the first path as a path through which the game medium can flow down,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to launch the game medium to the second path (for example, the time-saving state is a part in which the game ball is mainly launched toward the right game area),
The means of performance execution are:
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) is included,
During a special notification period (e.g., a pattern determination period for a jackpot variable display) when the game is controlled to an advantageous state after a specific display result is displayed, a special notification display (e.g., a name display in a right-hit promotion performance A) corresponding to the special notification period can be displayed on the display means to indicate that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a promotion display (e.g., a promotion display in a right-hit promotion performance A) that promotes the launch of the game medium to the second path can be displayed after the special notification display is displayed;
During a specific notification period (for example, a pattern determination period when the variable display count reaches 685 times) when a display result is displayed in a variable display where a specific display result is not displayed and then the special state is controlled after the specific number of times is reached, a promotion display (for example, a promotion display in a right-hit promotion performance F) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium to the second path can be displayed on the display means, and a specific notification display that indicates that the special state will be controlled after the specific number of times is reached after the display of the promotion display and corresponds to the specific notification period can be displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (F) as a modified example, in the right-hit promotion performance F, a portion that displays a name display after the promotion display).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, not only do the notification displays differ between the special notification period after a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state and the specific notification period after a reached variable display where a specific condition is met but which is not controlled to an advantageous state, but the display order with the promotion display also differs, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the special notification period and the specific notification period. This prevents the reached variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 28-1 is
The performance execution means are
When displaying a promotion display during the special notice period, a character is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. (the part that displays the character),
When displaying a promotion display during a specific notification period, the character is not displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the presence or absence of characters displayed will be different between the special announcement period and the specific announcement period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special announcement period and the specific announcement period. It is possible to further prevent the arrival variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 28-2 is
The performance execution means is capable of displaying on the display means the promotion display during the special announcement period in a manner that emphasizes the promotion display more highly than the promotion display during the specific announcement period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (B) , in right-hit promotion performance A, the image display device 5 displays a right-hit promotion image (an image of the message "Right hit" and a right-pointing arrow) and a semicircular rainbow-colored arrow image, and in right-hit promotion performance F, the image display device 5 displays a right-hit promotion image (an image of the message "Aim here!!") as an image smaller in size than the right-hit promotion image in right-hit promotion performance A, and a semicircular white arrow image is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the degree of emphasis of the promotion display differs between the special notification period and the specific notification period, so that it is possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notification period and the specific notification period, and it is further possible to prevent the arrival variable display from being mistaken for the specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 28-3 is
The means of performance execution are:
During the special notification period, a special notification display that includes the name of the advantageous state but does not include an entry display (for example, the message image "FEVER" shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11)) can be displayed.
During the specific notification period, after reaching a specific number of times, a specific notification display including a name display of a special state and an entry display (for example, a message image of "BATTLE RUSH" and a message image of "Entry" shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10)) can be displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presence or absence of an entry display in the notification display differs between a special notification period and a specific notification period, so that it becomes possible to more clearly distinguish whether it is a special notification period or a specific notification period, and it is further possible to prevent the arrival variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 28-4 is
The means of performance execution are:
A special notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) can be executed to notify that the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
During the specific notification period, an explanatory display regarding the special notification performance can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), a part on the image display device 5 that displays a message image saying "If the movable body falls, it's a big win");
During the special notification period, the explanatory display regarding the special notification performance is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11), a portion on the image display device 5 that displays only the message image "FEVER");
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presence or absence of an explanatory display differs between the special notification period and the specific notification period, so that it becomes possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notification period and the specific notification period, and it is further possible to prevent the arrival variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

[Mode 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-0 is characterized by: <Characteristic part 130SG-10>
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display of identification information (e.g., a special pattern) based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., a start winning), and is controllable to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot),
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., a normal state) and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means can control the variable display to a special state (e.g., time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) after a predetermined display result based on the fact that the variable display is displayed as a predetermined display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result as a special state,
The game machine has a first path (e.g., a left game area) and a second path (e.g., a right game area) different from the first path as a path through which the game medium can flow down,
The special state is a state in which it is advantageous to launch the game medium to the second path (for example, the time-saving state is a part in which the game ball is mainly launched toward the right game area),
The means of performance execution are:
A display means (e.g., an image display device 5) is included,
During a special notification period when the game is controlled to an advantageous state after a specific display result is displayed (e.g., a pattern determination period when the variable display result is a jackpot), a special notification display (e.g., a name display in right-hit promotion performance A) corresponding to the special notification period can be displayed on the display means to indicate that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and a promotion display (e.g., a promotion display in right-hit promotion performance A) that promotes the launch of the game medium to the second path can be displayed after the special notification display is displayed;
During a predetermined notification period when a predetermined display result is displayed and then the game is controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result (for example, a pattern determination period when the variable display result is a miss with time reduction), a promotion display (for example, a promotion display in a right-hit promotion performance F) that promotes the release of the game medium to the second path can be displayed on the display means, and a predetermined notification display (for example, a name display in a right-hit promotion performance F) that indicates that the game will be controlled to a special state after the predetermined display result after the display of the promotion display and corresponds to the predetermined notification period can be displayed on the display means.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, not only are the notification displays different between the special notification period after a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state and the specified notification period after a specified variable display that is controlled to a special state but not controlled to an advantageous state, but the display order with the promotion display is also different, making it possible to clearly distinguish between a special notification period and a specified notification period. This prevents the specified variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with special states.

The gaming machine of form 29-1 is
The means of performance execution are:
When displaying a promotion display during a special notice period, a character is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(B), when right-hit promotion performance A is executed, a part displaying a character is displayed on the lower left of the image display device 5).
When displaying a promotion display during a specified notification period, the character is not displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (B), when right-hit promotion performance F is executed, the character is not displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, whether or not a character is displayed differs between the special announcement period and the specified announcement period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish whether it is a special announcement period or a specified announcement period, and further preventing the specified variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 29-2 is
The effect execution means can display the promotion display during the special notice period on the display means in a manner with a higher degree of emphasis than the promotion display during the predetermined notice period (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-4(B), In the promotion effect A, the image display device 5 displays a right-handed batting promotion image (a message of "right-handed batting" and an image of a right-pointing arrow) and a semicircular, rainbow-colored arrow image, and in the right-handed batting promotion production F, the image is displayed. In the device 5, the right-handed batting promotion image (the image with the message "Aim here!!") is displayed as an image smaller in size than the right-handed batting promoting image in the right-handed batting promotion performance A, and a semicircular white arrow is displayed. the part where the image is displayed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the degree of emphasis of the promotional display differs between the specific notice period and the special notice period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between the special notice period and the specific notice period, and It is possible to further prevent the variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 29-3 is
The means of performance execution are:
During the special notification period, a special notification display that includes the name of the advantageous state but does not include an entry display (for example, the message image "FEVER" shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11)) can be displayed.
During a predetermined notification period, a predetermined notification display including a name display of a special state and an entry display after a predetermined display result (for example, a message image of "BATTLE RUSH" and a message image of "Entry" shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10)) can be displayed.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presence or absence of an entry display of the notification display differs between a special notification period and a specified notification period, so that it becomes possible to more clearly distinguish whether it is a special notification period or a specified notification period, and it is further possible to prevent the specified variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of form 29-4 is
The means of performance execution are:
A special notification effect (for example, a fanfare effect) can be executed to notify that the game is controlled to an advantageous state,
During a predetermined notification period, an explanatory display regarding the special notification performance can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S10), a part on the image display device 5 that displays a message image saying "If the movable body falls, it's a big win");
During the special notification period, the explanatory display regarding the special notification performance is not displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11), a portion on the image display device 5 that displays only the message image "FEVER");
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presence or absence of an explanatory display differs between a special notification period and a specified notification period, making it possible to more clearly distinguish between a special notification period and a specific notification period, and further preventing the reached variable display from being mistaken for a specific variable display that is controlled to an advantageous state.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 274 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 276). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 274, three locations on the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 276), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 274). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 274) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 276).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 276).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (if a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 276. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 in the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 277, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 278. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 278, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to control the gate switch 21, first starting port switch 22A, and second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 279 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 278 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 277.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot", and if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the production control board 12. In the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the game state is also updated if the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 280 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 280(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 280(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, the above-mentioned hit determination values from 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the setting value of the variable special figure in the first special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 280(A).

As shown in FIG. 280(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the variable special figure in the second special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 280(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 281, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while the setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common winning judgment value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, if the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot determination value within the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is normal or time saving, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the setting value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value, which changes according to each set value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for time-saving misses regardless of the setting value when the game state is normal or time-saving. In other words, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the rate at which the variable display result is a time-saving miss is the same for all setting values, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling due to the setting value. Furthermore, for the time-saving misses to which a common judgment value is assigned for each setting value, the range is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that it is possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of the variable display result being a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are 6 from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 282. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and checking a predetermined operation.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 283 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 282 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 283, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol showing "- " may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 130SG)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 130SG of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 284-1 to 284-79.
(Where the form is written)

In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flowchart in this feature section 130SG, for example, the part written as "Step S1" is abbreviated as "S1", "Normal reach" is abbreviated as "N reach", "Super reach" is referred to as "SP reach", etc. ” is sometimes abbreviated as “. Further, in the characteristic section 130SG, "variation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, configurations that are similar to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic explanation or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the following, the front side of Fig. 284-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1.

Embodiment 1 of the characteristic section 130SG will be described below. As explained with reference to FIG. 280, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a jackpot display result set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different display ratios. It will be explained as a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/200, and the jackpot probability is not settable.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this characteristic part 130SG, instead of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, a lever body 631A and a chance button 631B are provided as operation means that can be operated by the player. Both the lever body 631A and the chance button 631B are connected to the push sensor 35B.

Figure 284-1 is a front view showing a pachinko game machine with a characteristic part 130SG. The pachinko game machine 1 with the characteristic part 130SG has three performance units: a first performance unit 130SG100 attached to the upper center position of an opening and closing door frame 50, which is attached to a game machine frame 3 to which a game board 2 on which a main board 11 and a performance control board 12 are mounted is detachably attached so as to be openable and closable; a second performance unit 130SG200 attached to the upper left side of the opening and closing door frame 50; and a third performance unit 130SG300 attached to the upper right side of the opening and closing door frame 50. The opening and closing door frame 50 includes a glass door frame 3a, and is a door frame that can open and close the entire front area of the game machine frame 3.

Further, in the center of the lower part of the opening/closing door frame 50, there is an operation unit 600 equipped with a chance button 631B at the upper part and a lever body 631A which can be pushed and pulled in the front and back directions by the player and is rotatably provided. In addition, a cross key constituting a selection button 130SG35 for making settings related to effects such as volume is provided on the upper plate.

The operation unit 600 is provided with a button sensor 635B (see FIG. 284-2) for detecting the player's operation (movement) on the chance button 631B, as well as detecting the forward and backward movement of the lever body 631A. A push/pull sensor 625Y consisting of a push sensor (not shown) and a pull sensor (not shown) is provided, and a protrusion position sensor 625C is provided to detect that the lever body 631A is in the protrusion position. . Further, the selection button 130SG35 has an up/down/left/right sensor 130SG36 (see Figure 284-2) consisting of an upper sensor, a lower sensor, a left sensor, and a right sensor that detect operations of the cross key of the selection button 130SG35 in the up/down/left/right directions. It is provided.

The detection signals of the origin position sensor and performance position sensor provided on the first performance unit 130SG100, second performance unit 130SG200, and third performance unit 130SG300, as well as the push/pull sensor 625Y, protruding position sensor 625C, and button sensor 635B of the operation unit 600 provided on the opening and closing door frame 50, and the up/down/left/right sensor 130SG36 of the selection button 130SG35 are converted into a single serial signal by a serial signal conversion circuit provided on the relay board (not shown) of each performance unit 130SG100-130SG300 and the opening and closing door frame 50, and input to the performance control CPU 120, so that the performance control CPU 120, which controls the performance, can grasp the detection status of each sensor.

The first performance unit 130SG100 is provided with an elevating body 130SG121 that is movable between the origin position and the performance position by a drive means (not shown) provided in the first performance unit 130SG100. In addition, the second production unit 130SG200 and the third production unit 130SG300 include a wing 130SG221 as a movable body (opening/closing body) that is attached to the opening/closing door frame 50 so as to be rotatable in the horizontal direction about a rotation axis facing in the vertical direction; 130SG321, and character panels 130SG400A to 130SG400D as movable bodies (rotating bodies) rotatably provided on the inner surfaces of the respective characters. Each production unit is provided with a drive motor for driving these movable bodies, an origin position sensor, a production position sensor, a frame LED, etc. for detecting whether the movable body is located at the origin position or production position. (See Figure 284-2).

Furthermore, even if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 685 times) in succession after the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 (when the RAM clearing process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, the next When a jackpot does not occur, the game may be controlled to a time saving state B (also referred to as a relief time saving state or relief time saving state) among a plurality of types of time saving states. This relief time reduction is provided to help players who have not won a jackpot despite playing games for a long period of time (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in games). , in this example, is a gaming state called "play time".

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 130SG, in addition to "big hit" and "loss", "small win" and "time-save loss" are provided as variable display results. Among these, when the variable display result becomes "small win", the opening control of the big winning opening is performed as a small winning game in the same way as the jackpot game, and after the small winning game ends, the game state immediately before the small winning is inherited.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-1 and 284-2, there are two count switches 130SG023 and 2nd count switch 130 on the downstream side of the first count switch in the big prize opening in the feature part 130SG. Two counting switches are provided. Among these, the first count switch 130SG023 is a count switch for paying out the prize ball by detecting the game ball entering the big prize opening, and the second count switch 130SG024 is for paying out the game ball during the small winning game. This is a count switch for controlling the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state by detecting (also called V winning).

If the variable display result is "time saving, loss", like "losing", the game will not be controlled to the jackpot gaming state after the variable display ends, but the time saving state (time saving state C1 or It is controlled to the time saving state C2).

As shown in FIG. 284-1, in this characteristic part 130SG, the play area is divided into a left play area on the left side of the center decorative frame that surrounds the image display device 5 disposed in approximately the center of the game board 2, and a right play area on the right side. A game ball that is hit weakly with the ball hitting control handle (left hit) flows down the left play area, and a game ball that is hit strongly with the ball hitting control handle (right hit) flows down the right play area.

As shown in FIG. 284-1, the winning ball device 6A is positioned below the image display device 5 so that game balls that flow down the left game area can win, and the variable winning ball device 6B, special variable winning ball device 7, and gate switch 21 are positioned to the right of the winning ball device 6A so that game balls that flow down the right game area can win and game balls that flow down the left game area cannot win.

Although details will be described later, the normal state of this feature section 130SG is a game state in which the game ball is mainly shot toward the left game area (a left hit is performed), and the time-saving state, big win game state, and small win game state of this feature section 130SG are game states in which the game ball is mainly shot toward the right game area (a right hit is performed). In other words, in the normal state, the variable display of the first special chart is mainly executed, and in the time-saving state, the variable display of the second special chart is mainly executed.

Next, we will provide an overview of how the game progresses on pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the pachinko game machine 1, after a normal pattern start condition for executing the variable display of a normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 20 is met, such as when a game ball is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 284-2, the variable display of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display device 20 is started based on the fact that a normal pattern start condition for starting the variable display of a normal pattern is met, such as when the variable display of the previous normal pattern has ended.

In this variable display of ordinary symbols, after a predetermined period of time, which is the variable display time of ordinary symbols, has elapsed after the fluctuation of ordinary symbols has started, a fixed ordinary symbol that becomes the variable display result of ordinary symbols is stopped and displayed (derived display). . At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol will be changed to "miss the regular symbol". Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming "normal symbol hit", the movable piece disposed on the right side of the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to advance and retreat with respect to the right game area. The game ball can enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable prize winning ball device 6B by rolling on the movable piece during the period when the movable piece advances to the right game area.

After the first starting condition is established due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 284-2, For example, based on the first start condition being satisfied due to the completion of the previous special symbol game or jackpot game state, variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. In addition, the second starting condition is established when the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 284-2. After that, the second special symbol display device 4B starts variable display of the special symbol based on the second start condition being satisfied, for example, due to the variable display of the previous special symbol or the end of the jackpot game state. .

In the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after starting the variable display of the special symbol, when the variable display time as the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the special symbol Deriving and displaying a fixed special symbol (variable display result) that results in a variable display result. At this time, if a specific special symbol (jackpot symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "jackpot" as a specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small win symbol) different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. If so, the predetermined display result will be a "small win", and if a predetermined special symbol (loss symbol with a time saver) different from these jackpot symbols and small win symbols is stopped and displayed, it will be a "loss with a time saver". Further, if a special symbol that is neither a jackpot symbol, a small win symbol, nor a losing symbol with time saving is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "loser" symbol.

After the variable display result of the special chart becomes "jackpot," the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is a specific game state in which a round (also called "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result of the special chart becomes "small jackpot," the game state is controlled to a small jackpot game state, which is a special game state different from the jackpot game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 130SG, as an example, the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" are the big win symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "2" and "4" are the small win symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "6" and "8" are the time-saving losing symbols, and the special symbol showing the "-" symbol is the losing symbol. In addition, the symbols such as the big win symbol, the small win symbol, the time-saving losing symbol, and the losing symbol in the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different special symbols from the symbols in the variable display of the special symbols by the second special symbol display device 4B, or the common special symbols in the variable display of both special symbols may be the big win symbol, the small win symbol, the time-saving losing symbol, and the losing symbol.

In addition, in this characteristic section 130SG, when the variable display result is a miss with time saving, two types of patterns can be displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B as a miss with time saving, and when the variable display result is a miss, one type of pattern can be displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B as a miss pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a miss with time saving and when it is a miss, the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B may both be able to display multiple types of patterns or only one type of pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the variable display result is a time saving hit or miss, there are more symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B than when the variable display result is a miss. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a failure, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol There may be many symbols that can be displayed on the display device 4B.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the variable display result is a time-saving hit or miss, "6" or "8" is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B as a time-saving hit or miss symbol. , when the variable display result is a loss, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B display a "-" as a loss symbol with a time saving symbol, which can be easily identified as a loss symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving and losing symbols are symbols that are difficult to distinguish from the player because they are at least partially similar (for example, the time-saving and losing symbols are the first and second symbols). While "8" is displayed as a 7-segment display on the special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, as a missed symbol, the 7-segment display on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is displayed. "A" may be displayed as the display.

Also, as mentioned above, if the time-saving losing symbol and the losing symbol are difficult for the player to distinguish from each other, the big win symbol and the small win symbol may be easily distinguished from the time-saving losing symbol and the losing symbol by, for example, reducing the number of segments that are lit up in common with the time-saving losing symbol and the losing symbol.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, an example has been given in which the time-saving losing pattern and the losing image that can be displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are patterns that are easy for the player to distinguish, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving losing pattern and the losing image on at least one of the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B may be similar patterns that are difficult for the player to distinguish.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, an example is given in which there are two types of time-saving losing symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B have different numbers of time-saving and missed symbols that can be displayed (for example, the number of time-saving and missed symbols that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is different). The number is made larger than the number of missed symbols with time saving that can be displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B, or the number of missed symbols with time saving that can be displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is increased in the second special symbol display device 4B. The number of time-saving symbols that can be displayed may be less than the number of symbols that can be displayed.

In addition, in this characteristic section 130SG, an example has been given of a form in which the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B can display only one type of losing pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of losing patterns that can be displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B may be different (for example, the number of losing patterns that can be displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A may be greater than the number of losing patterns that can be displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B, or the number of losing patterns that can be displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A may be less than the number of losing patterns that can be displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B).

After the jackpot pattern is displayed as a fixed special pattern in the variable display of the special chart, resulting in a "jackpot" as a specific display result, in the jackpot game state, the large prize opening door of the special variable prize ball device 7 opens the large prize opening until a predetermined upper limit time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or until a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been generated. This executes a round in which the special variable prize ball device 7 is in the first state (open state) that is advantageous to the player.

A round, which is the opening cycle of the large prize opening, can be repeated until the number of times it is executed reaches a predetermined upper limit (e.g., "3" or "10"). Note that even before the number of times the round is executed reaches the upper limit, execution of the round may be terminated if a predetermined condition is met (e.g., no game ball enters the large prize opening).

In addition, after the small win pattern is displayed as a fixed special pattern in the variable display of the special chart and a "small win" is obtained as a specific display result, the large win port door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened multiple times in the small win game state. The large win port door is opened multiple times until the total open time reaches a predetermined upper limit time (e.g., 1.8 seconds) or until a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10 balls) are generated. This puts the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state (open state) which is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, an example is shown in which the large prize opening door is opened multiple times in the small prize game state until the total opening time reaches a predetermined upper limit time (e.g., 1.8 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the large prize opening door in the small prize game state may be opened only once until the predetermined upper limit time has elapsed in the small prize game state.

When a game ball that has entered the large prize opening passes through the second count switch 130SG024 provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 during a small prize game state, a "big prize" occurs based on the game ball passing through the second count switch 130SG024 (V-entry big prize). In other words, the CPU 103 controls the game state to a big prize game state based on detecting the game ball passing through the second count switch 130SG024.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, the game ball which entered the big prize opening always passes through the second count switch 130SG024. In other words, when a game ball enters the jackpot in the small win game state, the winning game ball is always detected by the second count switch 130SG024, and after the small win game ends, the CPU 103 controls the jackpot game state. . In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the variable display result becomes a small win, the game ball enters the big winning hole during the small winning game, so that the game is always controlled to the jackpot game state after the small winning game ends. It looks like this.

When the game is controlled to a jackpot game state based on the passage of the game ball through the second count switch 130SG024, the special variable winning ball device 7 opens the large winning port until a predetermined upper limit time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or until a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10 balls) have been generated. This allows a round of play to be played with the special variable winning ball device 7 in the first state (open state), which is advantageous to the player.

The round game, which is the opening cycle of the big prize opening, can be executed repeatedly until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "9", etc.). Incidentally, even before the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit, the round game may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball does not enter the big winning hole).

In addition, after the jackpot game state in this feature section 130SG ends, a time saving state A (described later) in which time saving control (time saving control) is performed within a predetermined variable display number range (for example, 1 time, 7 times, 685 times) (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, or time saving state A3). By performing the time saving control, the variable display time (special figure variation time) in the variable display of the special figure is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal gaming state that is different from a specific gaming state such as a jackpot gaming state, and is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on). The same control is performed as in the state in which the The time saving control is such that after the end of the jackpot game state, a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot", and the game ball moves the second count switch 130SG024 in the small win game state. It is only necessary to terminate when one of the conditions of passing is satisfied first.

When the time saving control is performed, the variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is controlled to be shorter than in the normal state, The variable display time of the variable display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 (the variable display time of the ordinary symbol) is controlled to be shorter than in the normal state, and the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol each time is Control to improve the probability of "hit" compared to the normal state, and control time for controlling the advance and retreat of the movable piece in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit" compared to the normal state. The game ball makes it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting prize opening, such as control to make it longer than before and control to increase the number of advances and retreats than in the normal state, increasing the possibility that the second starting condition will be satisfied. As a result, control that is advantageous to the player is performed. In this way, the control that is advantageous for the player by making it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening due to the time saving control is also referred to as high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls (including all of them) may be performed in combination.

By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the game ball can win in the second starting winning hole is increased more than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and variable display of the special symbol can be executed frequently. Then, the time until the variable display result becomes a "big hit" or "small win" is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as the high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed. A gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state.

After the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1 (when a RAM clear process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (685 times in this example) in succession but the next jackpot does not occur, the machine is controlled to the previously described time-saving state B, and if the variable display result is "miss with time-saving", the machine is controlled to the previously described time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2. In these time-saving states B, C1, and C2, similar to the time-saving states A1, A2, and A3, the control is performed to make the variable display time (special symbol variable time) of the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B shorter than in the normal state, the control is performed to make the variable display time (normal symbol variable display time) of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 20 shorter than in the normal state, the control is performed to increase the probability that the variable display result of each variable display of the normal symbol will be a "normal symbol hit" compared to the normal state, the control is performed to make the control time for controlling the advance and retreat of the movable piece in the variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being a "normal symbol hit" longer than in the normal state, and the control is performed to increase the number of advances and retreats compared to the normal state, so that the game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning hole and the possibility of the second start condition being established is increased, which is advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-27, when the gaming state is in time-saving state A (either time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3), if the variable display result of the second special chart is a miss with time-saving, a form has been exemplified in which non-reach, normal reach, and super reach variation patterns (PA3-6, PA3-7, PA3-8, PA3-9) can be selected; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 284-52, when the gaming state is in time-saving state A (either time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3), if the variable display result of the second special chart is a miss with time-saving, only the non-reach variation pattern (PA3-6) can be selected. By doing this, if the variable display result of the second special chart in time-saving state A is a miss with time-saving, the reach effect is not executed, making it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the variable display result is a miss with time-saving.

In this modified example, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state A (either the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, or the time-saving state A3), if the variable display result of the second special chart is a miss with time-saving, only the non-reach variation pattern (PA3-6) can be selected, thereby preventing the reach presentation from being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming state is in the time-saving state A (either the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, or the time-saving state A3), if the variable display result of the second special chart is a miss with time-saving, the reach presentation may not be executed even if a normal reach or super reach variation pattern is selected, or a normal reach or super reach variation pattern may be selected at a lower rate than feature portion 130SG. In other words, limiting the execution of reach effects includes preventing the selection of normal reach or super reach variation patterns, not executing normal reach or super reach reach effects during variable display even if a normal reach or super reach variation pattern is selected, and selecting normal reach or super reach variation patterns at a lower rate than characteristic portion 130SG.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the variable display result in the variable display of the second special figure is a jackpot, the jackpot type is exemplified as a form in which only jackpot B can be won, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, when the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the variable display of the second special drawing, multiple types of jackpots (for example, jackpot A and jackpot B as shown in Figure 284-53 (A)) are selected as the jackpot type. It may be possible to win.

In addition, in this way, when the variable display result in the variable display of the second special chart is a jackpot, if jackpot A and jackpot B are the jackpot types that can be won, the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot A and when the jackpot type is jackpot B may be different, as shown in Fig. 284-54 (B) to Fig. 284-54 (D). In particular, the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot A is common to the time-saving state A (time-saving state A3 after jackpot B in this modified example), time-saving state B, and time-saving state C (time-saving state C2 in this modified example), and the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot B is common to the time-saving state A (time-saving state A3 after jackpot B in this modified example), time-saving state B, and time-saving state C (time-saving state C2 in this modified example), it is possible to easily see which of jackpot A and jackpot B has been won in the variation pattern even if the game state is different, and the data capacity of the variation pattern can be reduced.

In addition, in this modification, the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot A is a part of time saving state A (time saving state A3 after jackpot B), a part of time saving state B, and a part of time saving state C (time saving state A3 after jackpot B). In addition, the fluctuation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot B is set as common in state C2), and a part of time saving state A (time saving state A3 after jackpot B), a part of time saving state B, and a part of time saving state C. (Time-saving state C2) is illustrated as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot A is applied to all time-saving states A and time-saving state. B and time saving state C may be made common, and the variation pattern selected when the jackpot type is jackpot B may be common to all time saving states A, time saving state B, and time saving state C.

Here, the image display device 5 in the main feature section 130SG will be explained. As shown in FIG. 284-1 and FIG. 284-55 (A), in the image display device 5 in the present feature section 130SG, there is a pending prize at the lower left of the image display device 5 where the starting prize has been won but the variable display has not been executed yet. A pending memory display area 130SG005D that can display a pending display corresponding to the storage is provided, and an active display area 130SG005D is provided at the lower center of the image display device 5 to display a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display. A display area 130SG013 is provided. Further, in the upper left part of the image display device 5, there is provided a display area 5SL for displaying small symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol pending memory number, the second special symbol pending memory number, and the decorative symbol. The small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Fig. 284-55(A) to Fig. 284-55(D), the image display device 5 in this feature unit 130SG displays different images depending on the game state. For example, as shown in Fig. 284-55(A), for the variable display of the second special chart after the time-saving state A (variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special chart that occurred but was not consumed during the time-saving state) and for the normal state other than the 10 variable displays after the variable display of these second special charts, an image of a daytime city (first background image) is displayed as the background image of the image display device 5. Also, for the 10 variable displays after the variable display of the second special chart after the time-saving state A (variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special chart that occurred but was not consumed during the time-saving state), as shown in Fig. 284-55(B), a background image (dedicated stage image) different from the first background image described above is displayed in the image display device 5, even though it is in the normal state. As described above, the special stage image is a background image that is limited to 10 variable displays after the variable display of the second special chart after time-saving state A (variable display based on reserved memory of the second special chart that was generated but not consumed during the time-saving state), and is not displayed after the end of time-saving state B or time-saving state C.

As shown in Figures 284-55(A) and 284-55(B), in the normal state, the right side of the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling display 130SG202, which indicates the number of times the ceiling has been reached (the number of times remaining until the end of the 685 variable displays from the end of the RAM clear or the end of the previous big win game).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-55 (C), the image display device 5 in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1 (FINAL BATTLE described later) supports variable display of each second special figure as a panel effect described later. 5 panel images (panel image No. 1 according to the variable display of the second special figure being executed, and panels “No. 2” to “No. 5” according to the pending memory of the second special figure) images) can be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 284-55(D), in the image display device 5 in the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2 (BATTLE RUSH to be described later), the background image of the image display device 5 is An image of the city at night (second background image) is displayed.

FIG. 284-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 130SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 284-3 is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 284-3, command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable display time) of decorative symbols and the like that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in Figure 284-4 (A), the result of determining whether the variable display result is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit" (predetermined result) ) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be used when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 284-4(A), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small win" and the small win type is "small win B." Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "missing with time saving" and the type of "missing with time saving" is "missing with time saving A." Command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result designation command that notifies the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "Failed with time saving" and the type of failure with time saving is "Failed with time saving B."

Command 8FXXH is a pattern determination command that specifies the stopping (determination) of the variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. The pattern determination command is also a performance control command that specifies the pattern determination period until the start of the next variable display. In the pattern determination command, different EXT data is set depending on the pattern determination period, for example.

As shown in FIG. 284-4(B), as a specific example, command 8F00H is a first symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is the first symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds). , Command 8F01H is a second symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is the second symbol confirmation period (6 seconds), and command 8F02H is the second symbol confirmation period that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is the third symbol confirmation period (20 seconds). This is a third symbol confirmation command that specifies something, and command 8F03H is a fourth symbol confirmation command that specifies that the symbol confirmation period is the fourth symbol confirmation period (81.4 seconds).

Command 91XXH is a command to specify the number of ceiling time reductions at power recovery, and is a performance control command that converts the value of the ceiling variable display counter to a hexadecimal number when the power is restored and specifies it. With the command to specify the number of ceiling time reductions at power recovery, different EXT data is set according to each digit (first, second, third digit) of the value (three-digit value) of the ceiling variable display counter when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 284-4 (C), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 284-4 (C), commands 9100H to 910FH are commands specifying the ceiling time reduction count 1 during recovery, which specify the first digit of the value of the ceiling variable display counter. Commands 9110H to 911FH are commands specifying the ceiling time reduction count 2 during recovery, which specify the second digit of the value of the ceiling variable display counter. Commands 9130H to 913FH are commands specifying the ceiling time reduction count 3 during recovery, which specify the third digit of the value of the ceiling variable display counter.

Command 94XXH is a ceiling time-saving count designation command, which is a performance control command that designates the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until the ceiling time-saving state (time-saving state B) is reached. With the ceiling time-saving count designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 284-4 (D), different EXT data is set according to the remaining number of variable display times (126 times or less) until the ceiling time-saving state is reached.

For example, as shown in FIG. 284-4 (D), command 9400H is a ceiling time-saving count A specification command that specifies that the ceiling time-saving count has been reached. Command 9401H is a ceiling time-saving count B specification command that specifies that 1 to 125 times remain until the ceiling time-saving count is reached. Command 947EH is a ceiling time-saving count C specification command that specifies that 126 times remain until the ceiling time-saving count is reached. Command 947FH is a ceiling time-saving count D specification command that specifies that 127 or more times remain until the ceiling time-saving count is reached.

Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example.

As shown in FIG. 284-4(E), as a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state). Command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in one variable display of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A (high base state, time-saving state A1). Command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in a maximum of 685 variable displays of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot B (high base state, time-saving state A3). Command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed in a maximum of seven variable displays of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C (high base state, time-saving state A2). Command 9504H is a fifth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state A3) in which time-saving control is performed in a maximum of 685 variable displays of the second special chart after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot D. Command 9505H is a sixth game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state B) in which time-saving control is performed in a maximum of 685 variable displays of the second special chart after the jackpot game of any jackpot or after the pachinko game machine 1 is cold started, due to the execution of 685 variable displays. Command 9506H is a seventh game state designation command corresponding to a game state (high base state, time-saving state C1) in which time-saving control is performed in one variable display of the second special chart because the variable display result is "miss with time-saving" and the time-saving miss type is "miss with time-saving A". Command 9507H is an eighth game state designation command that corresponds to a game state (high base state, time-saving state C2) in which time-saving control is performed in the variable display of the second special chart up to 685 times because the variable display result is "miss with time-saving" and the type of miss with time-saving is "miss with time-saving B."

Command A0XXH is a start of win command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a presentation image indicating the start of a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a big win game state or a small win game state. Command A3XXH is an end of win command that specifies the display of a presentation image at the end of a big win game state or a small win game state.

In the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination, for example by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win game state or small win game state (for example, "1" to "10").

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the pending memory display area 130SG005D etc. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to display the special figure pending memory number in a specifiable manner in the pending memory display area 130SG005D etc. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that designates the winning determination result at the time of starting winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category designation command that specifies the variable category of the winning determination result at the time of starting winning.

Command D100H is a V winning notification designation command that notifies that a V winning has been won, that is, the game ball has passed through the second count switch 130SG024 and the second count switch 130SG024 has been turned on. Command D2XXH is a remaining second special symbol time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining time saving control number of times of the second special symbol in the time saving state. The command D3XX is a prize ball number notification command for notifying the number of prize balls generated (awarded) when the game ball enters the winning hole.

FIG. 284-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 284-5, in this feature section 130SG, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the hit type, and the random number MR2 for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data representing each of a numerical value MR3, a random numerical value MR4 for determining the normal map display result, a random numerical value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4, and a random numerical value MR6 for determining the type of failure with time saving are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR6 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of games are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Figure 284-6 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 130SG. In this feature section 130SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big win", the variable display result is a "small win", and the variable display result is a "miss with time reduction". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). In addition, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the miss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss with time reduction" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also called a "non-reach time-reduction miss fluctuation pattern"), and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss with time reduction" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach fluctuation pattern (also called a "reach time-reduction miss fluctuation pattern").

Of these variation patterns, for the jackpot variation pattern, after the same special chart variation time as the miss variation pattern, an additional 15 seconds of special chart display time is set up to execute a congratulatory performance to celebrate the fact that the variable display result is a jackpot.

Here, regarding the jackpot fluctuation pattern and the loss fluctuation pattern in this feature section 130SG, the period until the variable display result is announced is configured in common, and the length of the period until the variable display result is announced. This prevents the player from recognizing in advance whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern in this feature section 130SG, an example is shown in which a 15-second special symbol fluctuation time is additionally provided for executing a blessing performance after the same special symbol fluctuation time as the losing fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special figure variation time for executing the blessing effect provided in the jackpot variation pattern is not limited to 15 seconds, but may be different depending on the game state. For example, for jackpot fluctuation patterns selected in the normal state, time-saving state A1, and time-saving state C1, an additional 15 seconds of special symbol fluctuation time is provided to execute the blessing effect, but it is mainly used in the time-saving state during consecutive winnings. In the jackpot variation pattern selected in the time saving state A2 and time saving state A3, a special symbol variation time shorter than 15 seconds may be additionally provided as a special symbol variation time for executing the blessing performance. Furthermore, for time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, which may not have gone through the first hit, an additional 15 seconds of special symbol fluctuation time is provided to execute the blessing effect, making it variable for the player. It is also possible to clearly notify that the display result is a jackpot to increase the interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 284-6(A) and 284-6(B), this feature section 130SG has multiple different variation patterns pre-prepared according to the special symbols that perform the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 284-6(A), the variation patterns of the first special symbol include the jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern, which include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach performance such as super reach α, super reach β, and super reach γ is executed, and a non-reach variation pattern in which no reach performance is executed. Note that, although this feature section 130SG has only one normal reach variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, similar to the super reach. Also, four or more super reach variation patterns may be provided for the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, in the super reach α fluctuation pattern in the first special symbol, there is a time saving acquisition chance effect that suggests that after the reach effect of super reach α, the variable display result will be a time saving result (a time saving result A). It also includes the variation patterns to be executed. In other words, the variation patterns for executing the reach performance and the time-saving acquisition chance performance of Super Reach α include a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a failure, and a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a failure in the time-saving acquisition. Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern of the first special symbol also includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a loss with a time saver (a loss B with a time saver).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 284-6(B), the variation patterns of the second special symbol in this feature section 130SG include big win variation patterns, small win variation patterns, and miss variation patterns, which are non-reach variation patterns and reach variation patterns (normal reach variation patterns in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach δ variation patterns in which the reach performance of a super reach δ is executed) that have special symbol variation times different from those of the first special symbol. Note that each of the non-reach, normal reach, and super reach δ variation patterns of the second special symbol also includes a variation pattern in which the variable display result is a miss with time reduction.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these types are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area, thereby executing various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables shown in FIG. 284-7 and the like, which are prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table (see FIG. 284-20 to FIG. 284-25) that stores a plurality of variation patterns that are the variation modes of each pattern in a variable display such as a special pattern or a normal pattern.

The judgment tables stored in the ROM 101 include, for example, a display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 284-7 (A), a display result judgment table 2 shown in FIG. 284-7 (B), a big win type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 284-7 (C), a big win type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 284-7 (D), a small win type judgment table (for the small win type judgment table) shown in FIG. 284-7 (E), a time-saving miss type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 284-7 (F), a time-saving miss type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 284-7 (G), as well as various first special symbol variation pattern judgment tables (see FIG. 284-20, FIG. 284-21), various second special symbol variation pattern judgment tables (see FIG. 284-22 to FIG. 284-25), and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table (not shown).

Figures 284-7 (A) and 284-7 (B) are explanatory diagrams showing display result judgment table 1 and display result judgment table 2. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit judgment value to be compared with MR1 is set. Display result judgment table 1 has set therein a judgment value for a big hit, a judgment value for a small hit, and a judgment value for a miss with time reduction for a case in which the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that specifies the special symbol that executes the variable display and that is set by the CPU 103 when normal special symbol processing is executed) is 1 (first), in other words, when the first special symbol is the target for variable display. In the display result judgment table 2, when the variable display special symbol designation buffer (a value that the CPU 103 sets when executing the normal special symbol processing as a value that designates the special symbol that executes the variable display) is 2 (second), that is, when the second special symbol is the target for variable display, the judgment value for a big win, the judgment value for a small win, and the judgment value for a miss with time reduction are set.

As shown in FIG. 284-7(A), when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is set to 1, a judgment value corresponding to a big win and a judgment value corresponding to a miss with time reduction are set, but a judgment value corresponding to a small win is not set. Therefore, when the first special pattern is the target of variable display, a big win and a miss with time reduction are considered to be winnable, but a small win will not occur. Furthermore, when the variable display special pattern designation buffer is set to 1, the probability of winning a big win is approximately 1/200, and the probability of winning a miss with time reduction is approximately 1/329.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-7 (B), when the variable display special figure designation buffer is the second, the judgment value corresponding to the jackpot, the judgment value corresponding to the time-saving hit or loss, and the judgment value corresponding to the small hit. A judgment value has been set. In addition, when the variable display special designation buffer is the second, the probability of winning a jackpot is approximately 1/200, the probability of winning a loss with a time saving is 1/100, and the probability of winning a small hit is approximately 1/7. It is.

In other words, the CPU 103 determines that when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the first (when the special symbol that performs variable display is the first special symbol), the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in Figure 284-7 (A). If it matches any of the hit determination values shown in Figure 284-7(A), it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B), and the value of MR1 corresponds to the time-saving hit or loss shown in Figure 284-7(A). If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the variable display result is a loss with a time saver (a loss with a time saver A or a loss with a time saver B). In addition, the CPU 103 determines that when the variable display special symbol designation buffer is the second (when the special symbol that performs variable display is the second special symbol), the value of MR1 corresponds to the jackpot shown in FIG. 284-7 (B). If it matches any of the hit determination values shown in Figure 284-7 (B), it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B), and the value of MR1 corresponds to the time-saving hit or loss shown in Figure 284-7 (B). If it matches the hit judgment value, it is decided that the variable display result will be a loss with a time saver (a loss with a time saver or a loss with a time saver B), and the value of MR1 will be a small win as shown in Figure 284-7 (B). If it matches any of the corresponding hit determination values, it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit.

The "probabilities" shown in Fig. 284-7(A) and Fig. 284-7(B) indicate the probability (ratio) of a big win, the probability (ratio) of a small win, and the probability (ratio) of a miss with time reduction. In addition, deciding whether to make a big win means deciding whether to control to a big win game state, but also means deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a big win pattern. In addition, deciding whether to make a small win means deciding whether to control to a small win game state, but also means deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B a small win pattern. Similarly, deciding whether to make a miss with time reduction means deciding whether to control to one of the time reduction states (time reduction state C1 or time reduction state C2), but also means deciding whether to make the stopped pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B a miss with time reduction.

In this feature section 130SG, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result as either a jackpot, a small win, or a loss with a time saving, using the display result determination table shown in FIGS. 284-7(A) and 284-7(B). However, a jackpot judgment table, a small hit judgment table, and a time-saving loss judgment table are provided separately, and the judgment of jackpot is determined based on the first special, regardless of the variable display special symbol designation buffer. A common table is used for the variable display of symbols and the variable display of the second special symbol, and the judgment of small hits and time-savers is determined separately according to the variable display special symbol designation buffer. This may be done using a table.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the variable display special chart designation buffer is the first, no judgment value other than the judgment value corresponding to a big win is set as a judgment value corresponding to a small win, meaning that a small win cannot be won, but it is also possible to set some of the judgment values other than the judgment value corresponding to a big win as judgment values corresponding to a small win, so that a small win can be won.

FIG. 284-7(C) and FIG. 284-7(D) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 284-7 (C), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 284-7 (D), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table is used to determine the jackpot type to jackpot A or jackpot B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is the referenced table. In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-7(C) and (D), two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, are provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol). On the other hand, only one type of jackpot, jackpot B, is provided in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol). In other words, the jackpot that occurs when a variable display of the first special symbol is performed is one of two types of jackpots, jackpot A and jackpot B, while when a variable display of the second special symbol is performed. The only jackpot that occurs is jackpot B.

FIG. 284-7(E) is an explanatory diagram showing the small hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table changes the type of small hit to small hit A or small hit B based on the random number (MR2) for determining the hit type when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a small win symbol. This is the table that is referenced to determine the In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, if the game ball passes the second count switch 130SG024 during a small winning game of small winning A, that is, if a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game with the jackpot type of jackpot C is executed. If the game ball passes through the second count switch 130SG024 during a small winning game of small winning B, that is, when a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot game with the jackpot type of jackpot D is executed. It is now possible to do so. In other words, these jackpot C and jackpot D are not the jackpot type determined by the random number MR2 for determining the winning type extracted at the time of starting winning, but are played during the game of either small winning A or small winning B. This is the jackpot type determined by passing through the second count switch 130SG024.

Figures 284-7(F) and 284-7(G) are explanatory diagrams showing a time-saving miss type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a time-saving miss type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 284-7(F) is a table for determining the time-saving miss type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning slot (i.e., when the first special symbol is variably displayed). Also, Figure 284-7(G) is a table for determining the time-saving miss type using reserved memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning slot (i.e., when the second special symbol is variably displayed).

When it is determined that the variable display result is to be a time saving or losing symbol, the time saving or losing type determination table changes the type of time saving or losing based on the random number (MR6) for determining the type of time saving or losing. This is a table that is referred to to determine whether it is a failure A or a failure B with a time saving. In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-7 (F) and (G), the time-saving and losing type determination table (for the first special symbol) includes the time-saving and missing A and the time-saving and missing B. While two types of time-saving on/off are provided, only one type of time-saving on/off, ie, time-saving on/off B, is provided in the time-saving/off-off type determination table (for the second special symbol). In other words, the time-saving loss that occurs when the first special symbol is variablely displayed is one of the two types of time-saving loss A and time-saving loss B, while the second special symbol As for the time saving error that occurs when variable display is performed, only the time saving error B occurs.

Here, to explain the jackpot type in this feature section 130SG using FIG. 284-8(A), in this feature section 130SG, the jackpot type is jackpot A in which time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state. ~Jackpot D is set.

Among these jackpots A to jackpot D, jackpot A is a jackpot in which rounds are repeatedly executed three times (so-called three rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, the special pattern will be played once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. The time saving control is executed in the time saving state A1 until the figure game is executed.

The jackpot B is a jackpot that changes the jackpot entry port to the second state, which is advantageous to the player, 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) and is repeated. After the jackpot game state of the jackpot B ends, the time-saving control is executed as the time-saving state A3 until a maximum of 685 special game games are executed for the variable display of the second special pattern, or until a maximum of 689 special game games are executed in total for the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern (effectively 685 games when the control to the time-saving state B is performed because the total number of times the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern reaches 685).

Jackpot C is a jackpot in which nine rounds (so-called nine rounds) of changing the jackpot into a second state advantageous to the player are repeated. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot C, until the special pattern game is executed up to 7 times with the variable display of the second special symbol, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol The time saving control is executed in the time saving state A2 until the special figure game is executed a maximum of 11 times in total for the variable display.

Jackpot D is a jackpot that is repeatedly executed nine times (so-called nine rounds) in which the jackpot is changed to a second state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the end of the jackpot game state of jackpot D, until the special pattern game is executed a maximum of 685 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, or the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A maximum of 689 times in total (actually 685 times if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol reaches 685 times in total and is controlled to time saving state B) Time saving control is executed in time saving state A3 until the special figure game is executed.

In addition, in each time saving state, as the probability of "normal pattern winning" increases, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, that is, the second starting winning becomes easier. This makes it easier to execute the variable display of the second special symbol, making it easier for small hits to occur than in the normal state. Therefore, in the time saving state and the variable display of the second special symbol up to four times immediately after the end of the time saving state, there are cases where a jackpot occurs as a result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and cases where the game ball hits a small hit during the game. Since a jackpot may occur by winning a V prize in a game, a so-called consecutive game state occurs in which a jackpot game state tends to occur continuously.

In addition, in the time-saving state A1 after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to one, so the second special The variable display result is a jackpot or small hit by either variable display of the symbol or variable display of the second special symbol based on up to four reserved memories that occur during the variable display of the second special symbol at one time. The ratio (the sum of the ratio at which a jackpot or small hit occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol five times in total and the ratio at which a jackpot occurs when the game ball wins a V prize) is set to about 54%.

In addition, in the time-saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot C, the number of special symbol games in which the time-saving control targeting the second special symbol is executed is set to seven, so the second special symbol The variable display result will be a jackpot or a small hit with either the variable display of the 2nd special symbol or the variable display of the 2nd special symbol based on up to 4 reserved memories that occur during the variable display of the 7th second special symbol. The percentage (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small wins occurring in the variable display of the second special symbol 11 times in total and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball wins V) is set to about 83%.

In addition, in the time-saving state A3 after the end of jackpot play on jackpot B or jackpot D, the number of special games in which time-saving control for the second special symbol is executed is set to 685 times, so the percentage of variable display results that will be a jackpot or small jackpot in either of the 685 times of variable display of the second special symbol and the maximum of four variable displays of the second special symbol based on reserved memories that occur during the 685 times of variable display of the second special symbol (the sum of the percentage of jackpots or small jackpots occurring in the total of 685 times of variable display of the second special symbol and the percentage of jackpots occurring when the game ball enters the V) is set to almost 100%.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, four types of jackpots are provided, jackpot A to jackpot D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be five or more types of jackpots, or there may be three or less types of jackpots.

Further, to explain the types of time saving on/off in this feature section 130SG using FIG. 284-8(B), in this feature section 130SG, time saving on/off A and time saving on/off B are set as time saving on/off types. ing.

In the case of a miss with time reduction A, the time reduction control is executed in the time reduction state C1 until the special game is executed once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol.

Time-saving failure A is performed once for the variable display of the second special symbol, and until the special symbol game is executed up to five times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Time saving control is executed as the time saving state C1.

Time-saving failure B can be performed up to 685 times for the variable display of the second special symbol, and up to 689 times for the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol). When the variable display count of the display and the second special symbol reaches 685 times in total and the time saving state B is controlled, the time saving control is executed as the time saving state C2 until the special symbol game (actually 685 times) is executed. .

In other words, as shown in FIG. 284-9(A), in this feature section 130SG, there are provided time saving states A1, A2, and A3, which are controlled after the end of the jackpot game, as time saving states. The time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 are ended by being controlled to a jackpot game state or by performing a variable display of the number of times according to each time saving state.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, a time-saving state B is provided that is controlled when the number of variable displays of the first and second special symbols reaches 685 times after the RAM is cleared or the end of a jackpot game, and the time-saving state B ends when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state or 685 variable displays are executed. Note that if 685 variable displays are executed in the time-saving state B and the game state is controlled from the time-saving state B to the normal state, the game will not be controlled to a new jackpot game state or to the time-saving state B again until the RAM is cleared.

In addition, in this characteristic section 130SG, there are provided time-saving states: time-saving state C1, which is controlled when the variable display result is a miss with time-saving and the type of miss with time-saving is miss with time-saving A; and time-saving state C2, which is controlled when the variable display result is a miss with time-saving and the type of miss with time-saving is miss with time-saving B. These time-saving states C1 and C2 end when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, when the total number of variable displays of the first special pattern and the second special pattern reaches 685 (the start condition of time-saving state B is met), or when the number of variable displays corresponding to each time-saving state is executed.

As shown in FIG. 284-9(B), details will be described later, but when the gaming state is the normal state, the start condition for the time saving state B (from the RAM clear or after the end of the jackpot game, the first special symbol 685 variable displays have been executed with the second special symbol), the time saving control of time saving state B is executed from the next variable display, and the variable display result is time saving A. In this case, the time saving control in the time saving state C1 is executed from the next variable display, and when the variable display result is B with time saving, the time saving control in the time saving state C2 is executed from the next variable display.

In addition, when the game state is either the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, or the time-saving state A3, if the start condition for the time-saving state B (685 variable displays of the first special pattern and the second special pattern have been executed since the RAM was cleared or the end of the jackpot game) is met, the time-saving control of the time-saving state B is executed from the next variable display, and if the variable display result is a miss with time-saving A or a miss with time-saving B, while maintaining the controlled time-saving state (either the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, or the time-saving state A3), the operation of a counter for managing the remaining number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed in the time-saving state C1 and the time-saving state C2 (the total time-saving count counter α and the second special pattern time-saving count counter α described later) is started separately from the counter for managing the remaining number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, or the time-saving state A3 (the total time-saving count counter α and the second special pattern time-saving count counter α described later). Then, when the time-saving state (either time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3) controlled by the execution of the variable display ends (when the value of the total time-saving count counter α or the second special time-saving count counter α becomes 0), if the total time-saving count counter β and the second special time-saving count counter β are still operating, the time-saving control in the time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2 is started instead of the time-saving state that has ended (either time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3).

In addition, in this feature unit 130SG, when the start condition of a time-saving state is satisfied while any of the time-saving states is being executed, the operation of the counter corresponding to the time-saving state whose start condition is satisfied is started (the counter corresponding to the time-saving state whose start condition is satisfied is set to a value corresponding to that time-saving state) and this is sometimes referred to as "overlapping time-saving states" or simply "overlapping".

When the game state is the time-saving state B, if the variable display result is a time-saving miss A or a time-saving miss B, while maintaining the controlled time-saving state (time-saving state B), counters (total time-saving count counter β and second special time-saving count counter β described later) for managing the remaining variable display count for performing time-saving control in the time-saving state C1 and the time-saving state C2 are started to operate, separately from counters (total time-saving count counter α and second special time-saving count counter α described later) for managing the remaining variable display count for performing time-saving control in the time-saving state C1 and the time-saving state C2. When the time-saving state (time-saving state B) controlled by the execution of the variable display ends (when the value of the total time-saving count counter α or the second special time-saving count counter α becomes 0), if the total time-saving count counter β and the second special time-saving count counter β are still operating, the time-saving control in the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2 is started instead of the ended time-saving state (time-saving state B).

Also, when the gaming state is time saving state C1, the start condition for time saving state B (variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has been executed 685 times after RAM clearing or the end of the jackpot game) If this is true, the switching from the time saving state C1 to the time saving state B is executed, and if the variable display result is A with time saving or B without time saving, the time saving control in the time saving state C1 or C2 is executed. The time saving state is set by setting a value corresponding to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 to a counter for managing the remaining number of variable display times (total time saving number counter β and second special symbol time saving number counter β described later). Overlap.

In addition, when the game state is the time-saving state C2, if the start condition of the time-saving state B (the first special symbol and the second special symbol have been displayed 685 times after the RAM is cleared or the end of the jackpot game) is met, switching from the time-saving state C2 to the time-saving state B is executed, and if the variable display result is a time-saving miss A, the value set in the second special symbol time-saving count counter β at that time is compared with the value of "1 time", which is the time-saving count of the second special symbol in the time-saving state C1, and the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter β which is the larger value in the comparison is set to the second special symbol time-saving count counter β. Furthermore, if the variable display result is a time-saving miss B, the value set in the second special symbol time-saving count counter β at that time is compared with the value of "685 times", which is the time-saving count of the second special symbol in the time-saving state C2, and the value "685", which is the larger value in the comparison, is set to the second special symbol time-saving count counter β. In other words, the second special time-saving counter β is reset to "685."

As described above, in the normal state, the first special symbol is mainly variable displayed, and in each time-saving state, the second special symbol is variable displayed, so that the game state basically transitions as shown in FIG. 284-10. Furthermore, if we consider the case where, even in the time-saving state, the first special symbol is variable displayed instead of the second special symbol, and the variable display result is time-saving miss A or time-saving miss B, the game state transitions as shown in FIG. 284-11.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 284-2 may be a backup RAM in which part or all of it is backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will not be saved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply is no longer able to supply power). Ru. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, ie, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the power outage, etc., based on the data, when the power is restored after a power outage, etc. occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 130SG150 as shown in FIG. It is being The game control data holding area 130SG150 shown in FIG. It includes a setting section 130SG154 and a game control buffer setting section 130SG155.

The special figure reservation storage unit 130SG151 stores a special figure game that has not yet been started although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. (Special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) and the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and winning the starting prize. The pending data of the special figure game (special figure game using the second special figure in the second special figure display device 4B) which has occurred but has not yet been started (second starting winning) is stored in order of winning.

As an example, the special chart reserve memory unit 130SG151 associates the reserved number with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and stores the start port buffer value, the random number value MR1 for determining the variable display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), the random number value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, as reserved data, until the number of reserved data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "8"). The number of reserved data stored in response to winning in the first start winning port and the number of reserved data stored in response to winning in the second start winning port are each up to four.

The reserved data thus stored in the special chart reserved memory unit 130SG151 indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart or a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display results (special chart display results) in these special chart games.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a separate reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. Furthermore, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port are stored in a separate reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number, one of the variable display based on the first reserved information and the variable display based on the second reserved memory information may be executed in priority over the variable display based on the other reserved information.

The normal figure reservation storage section 130SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure reservation storage unit 130SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores the general figure display results extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for determination is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 130SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 130SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 130SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 130SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 130SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 130SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 130SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

Random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR4 and MR6, are stored in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 130SG154 as random count values, and are stored in accordance with the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 130SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 284-2 stores not only performance control programs but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting multiple judgment tables prepared so that the performance control CPU 120 can make various judgments, decisions, and settings, and pattern data constituting various performance control patterns.

As an example, the ROM 121 stores a presentation control pattern table that stores multiple types of presentation control patterns that the presentation control CPU 120 uses to control presentation operations by various presentation devices (e.g., the image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, presentation model, etc.). The presentation control patterns correspond to various presentation operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and are composed of data indicating the control content. The presentation control pattern table may store, for example, a presentation control pattern for when a special chart is displayed variably, a preview presentation control pattern, various presentation control patterns, etc.

The special pattern variable display performance control pattern corresponds to multiple types of variation patterns, and corresponds to the period from when the special pattern starts changing in the special pattern game until the finalized special pattern that becomes the special pattern display result is derived and displayed. From data indicating the control contents of various performance operations, such as variable display operation of decorative symbols, reach performance, re-lottery performance, etc., or various performance display operations that do not involve variable display of decorative symbols. It is configured. The preview performance control pattern is composed of, for example, data indicating the control content of the performance operation that is the preview performance that is executed in response to a plurality of preview patterns prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1.

The control patterns for controlling the presentation of special charts during variable display may include, for example, multiple types of reach presentation control patterns in which the presentation manner in each reach presentation is different for each variation pattern that executes the reach presentation.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 has an area for storing various data used to control performance operations, for example a performance control data holding area 130SG190 as shown in Figure 284-13(A). The performance control data holding area 130SG190 shown in Figure 284-13(A) has a performance control flag setting unit 130SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 130SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 130SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 130SG194.

The production control flag setting section 130SG191 includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 130SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 130SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 130SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 130SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 130SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 130SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 130SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature unit 130SG, data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A as shown in FIG. 284-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 130SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1" to "8") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory (for example, "8"), and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "0") corresponding to the first special pattern being variably displayed. When a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, three commands, namely, a start port winning designation command (first start port winning designation command or second start port winning designation command), a pattern designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area of the start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A has a storage area (entry) reserved for associating these start winning designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory count notification commands, and storing them separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the decorative pattern change stop process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the startup winning reception command buffer 130SG194A of this feature section 130SG, a pending display flag value indicating the display mode of pending display or active display is set in the prefetch notice setting process (FIG. 284-42) to be described later. , and a panel display flag value indicating the pattern (panel pattern) of the variable display compatible panel and the second special figure hold memory compatible panel to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the time saving state A1 and time saving state C1. A storage area is reserved for each buffer number.

When a start win occurs, the performance control CPU 120 stores commands in the start win reception command buffer 130SG194A, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number). When a start win occurs, the start win designation command through the pending memory count notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the ends of the buffer numbers corresponding to the pending memories, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 130SG194A shown in FIG. 284-13(B) are deleted from the entry (buffer number "0") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that has just ended, and the contents stored in the entry (entry corresponding to buffer number "1") corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished in the storage state shown in FIG. 284-13(B), each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "1" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the reserved memory that is variably displayed at that time.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the performance control CPU 120 executes the command analysis process (S75), it determines whether or not it has received a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, or a pending memory number notification command. If these commands have been received, these commands are stored at the top of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 130SG194A as pending memory for each special pattern.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 130SG will be explained. FIG. 284-14 is a flowchart showing the game control main process shown in FIG. 277.

In the game control main processing in the feature section 130SG, when the CPU 103 executes the processing in step S7, the CPU 103 specifies the value of a variable display counter (described later) from the recovered information, and performs recovery according to the value of the specified variable display counter. A ceiling time reduction number designation command and a ceiling time reduction number designation command are transmitted (step 130SGS007a, step 130SGS007b), and the process advances to step S10. In addition, when the CPU 103 executes the process of step S9, it sets the value of the variable ceiling display counter to 685, and transmits a command for specifying the number of times the ceiling time is shortened during recovery according to the value (685) of the variable ceiling display counter. (step 130SGS009a, step 130SGS009b), and the process proceeds to step S10.

Figure 284-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process in this feature unit 130SG. In the special symbol process in this feature unit 130SG, the normal special symbol process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special symbol process, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first or second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special symbol process, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", a "small hit", or a "miss with time reduction", and the big hit type in the case of a "big hit", the small hit type in the case of a "small hit", and the miss type in the case of a "miss with time reduction" are determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special symbol processing, a fixed special symbol (either a big win symbol, a small win symbol, a time-saving losing symbol, or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special symbol processing ends. In addition, this feature unit 130SG stores the winning order of the game balls into the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole, and the start conditions of the special symbol game are established in the winning order (also called winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern as one of several types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result should be "big hit", "small hit", "miss with time reduction", or "miss". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2", and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change has reached the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "miss" or "miss with time saving", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is a "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 130SGS023. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The jackpot release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the jackpot opening in the open state has reached the set upper limit number of executions, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of executions has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open process of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open process includes a process of measuring the time that has elapsed since the large win opening was opened, a process of determining whether it is time to return the large win opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the first count switch 130SGS023, and a process of determining whether game balls have been detected by the second count switch 130SGS024. When the large win opening is returned to the closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open process ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the performance operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, if a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SGS024 when the small win game state ends, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "4" and the small win process ends. Also, if a game ball is not detected by the second count switch 130SGS024 when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0" and the small win end process ends.

FIG. 284-16 is a flowchart showing the starting winning determination process (S101) shown in FIG. 284-15. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not (130SGS101). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is on (130SGS101; Y), the number of reserved first special symbols, which is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (130SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending memory number by reading the first pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first pending memory counter provided in the game control counter setting section 130SG154, for example. When the first special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value in 130SGS102 (130SGS102;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 130SG155 is set to "1" (130SGS103) .

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in 130SGS101 (130SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbol reservation memories has reached the upper limit value in 130SGS102 (130SGS102; Y), the variable winning ball device 6B Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the player, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on (130SGS104). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is on (130SGS104; Y), the number of second special symbols pending memory, which is the number of pending memories of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, is set to the predetermined upper limit ( For example, it is determined whether the upper limit storage number is "4" (130SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 130SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value in 130SGS105 (130SGS105;N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 130SG155 is set to "2" (130SGS106) .

After executing either of the processes of 130SGS103 and 130SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (130SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (130SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 130SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the processing of 130SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number MR1 for determining the winning type from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting section 130SG154. 130SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way and the start opening buffer value are stored by being set as reservation information at the head of the free entry in the special figure reservation storage section (130SGS110).

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the hit type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a “big hit” or “small hit”. is used to determine the jackpot type/small win type when the variable display result is a "big hit" or "small win". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. The random number value MR6 for determining the type of time saving and losing is used to determine the type of time saving and losing when the variable display result of special symbols and decorative symbols is "time saving and losing". By executing the process of 130SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display result and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 130SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (130SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 277 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of 130SGS111, the CPU 103 executes a winning random value determination process (130SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending memory number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. (130SGS113). The reservation storage number notification command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 277 after the special symbol process process is completed. be done.

After executing the process of 130SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (130SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (Y in 130SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (130SGS115), and then the process of 2390SGS104 is started. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 130SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (130SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. This ensures that the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball.

FIG. 284-40(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed by the 130SGS 112 of FIG. 284-39 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 130SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (S110 in FIGS. 279 and 284-15) is performed to display special symbol display results (variable display results of special symbols). It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state as a "jackpot", whether to control to the small winning gaming state as a "small hit", and whether to control to any time saving state as a "time saving hit". It will be done. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (FIG. 279, S111 in FIG. 284-15, FIG. 284-19), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value determination process of S112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole). Accordingly, it is determined whether or not it is determined that a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol with time saving are derived and displayed as the special symbol display result. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting prize opening starts, in other words, at the start of the variable display, it is possible to determine whether or not to make a jackpot or to make a small win. Before it is determined whether or not it is a loss with a time saver, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "big hit", "small hit", or "a loss with a time saver", and based on this judgment result. Based on this, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes a pre-read preview such as a panel display performance or a pending preview performance, as will be described later.

In the prize winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 284-17, the CPU 103 first specifies whether the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state (step 130SGS121). Then, it is determined whether the set starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS122a). If the starting port buffer value is 1, select the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 284-7(A) and proceed to step 130SGS123a (step 130SGS122b); The display result determination table 2 shown in 284-7(B) is selected and the process proceeds to step 130SGS123a (step 130SGS122c).

In step 130SGS123a, the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 extracted in step 130SGS109 with the selected display result judgment table, and judges whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the judgment range for a big win. If the random number value MR1 is outside the judgment range for a big win, it judges whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the judgment range for a small win (step 130SGS123b). If the random number value MR1 is outside the judgment range for a small win, it further judges whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the judgment range for a miss with time reduction (step 130SGS123c).

When the random number value MR1 is within the time-save attachment/loss determination range, a symbol designation command transmission setting is performed in accordance with the time-saving attachment/loss (step 130SGS124). Then, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS125a). If the starting opening buffer value is 1, select the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. If there is, select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table L shown in FIG. 284-24(D) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS125c).

In step 130SGS123c, if the random number value MR1 is outside the time saving judgment value range, that is, if the variable display result is a failure, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command according to the failure (step 130SGS126a). Then, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS126b). When the starting opening buffer value is 1, if the gaming state is normal, select the first special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 284-20 (A), and if the gaming state is either time saving state. If so, select the first special symbol variation pattern determination table G and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS126c).

In addition, if the starting opening buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 284-22 (A), the gaming state is the time saving state When the state is A2 or the time-saving state A3, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. Select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 284-24(A) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS126d).

In addition, in step 130SGS123b, if the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination value range, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of a symbol designation command corresponding to a small win (step 130SGS127). Then, if the game state is time-saving state A1 or time-saving state C1, it selects the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 284-22 (C), if the game state is time-saving state A2 or time-saving state A3, it selects the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 284-23 (C), if the game state is normal state, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, it selects the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table K shown in FIG. 284-24 (C), and proceeds to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS128).

Further, in step 130SGS123a, if the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination value range, the CPU 103 makes settings for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the jackpot (step 130SGS129). Then, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is 1 (step 130SGS130a). When the starting opening buffer value is 1, when the gaming state is the normal state, the first special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 284-20 (C), and the gaming state is either the time saving state. If so, select the first special symbol variation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 284-21(B) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (130SGS130b).

In addition, if the starting opening buffer value is 2, if the gaming state is the normal state, the second special symbol variation shown in FIG. 284-22 (B) if the gaming state is the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1. Pattern determination table B, when the gaming state is time saving state A2 or time saving state A3, second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 284-23(B), gaming state is normal state, time saving state B, time saving If it is in any of the states C2, select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table J shown in FIG. 284-24(B) and proceed to step 130SGS131 (step 130SGS130c).

In step 130SGS131, the CPU 103 compares the selected fluctuation pattern determination table with the random number value MR3 extracted in step 130SGS109, and determines the fluctuation category from non-reach, super reach, or other (normal reach). Then, it sets up the sending of a fluctuation category designation command (one of those shown in FIG. 284-17 (B)) according to the determination result, and ends the winning random number value determination process (step 130SGS132).

The commands set for transmission in steps 130SGS124, 130SGS126a, 130SGS127, 130SGS129, and 130SGS132 are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

Figure 284-18 is a flow chart showing the normal special symbol processing (step S110) shown in Figure 284-15. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether there is a reserved memory in the special symbol reservation memory unit 130SGS151 (step 130SGS541). If there is no reserved memory in the special symbol reservation memory unit 130SGS151, a demo display setting is performed and the normal special symbol processing is terminated (step 130SGS572). Also, if there is a reserved memory in the special symbol reservation memory unit 130SGS151, the start port buffer value, random number values MR1 to MR3, and MR6 are read and identified from the reserved number "1" in the special symbol reservation memory unit 130SGS151 (step 130SGS542). In addition, the values of the number of reserved special drawings to be variably displayed and the total number of reserved special drawings are decremented by 1, and the contents stored in the reserved special drawing memory unit 130SGS151 are shifted (step 130SGS543).

Further, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value specified in step 130SGS542 is 1 (step 130SGS554a). When the starting opening buffer value is 1, the variable display special figure designation buffer value is set to 1 (step 130SGS544b), and when the starting opening buffer value is 2, when the starting opening buffer value is 2, The variable display special figure designation buffer value is set to 2 (step 130SGS544c).

Next, a display result determination table is set according to the variable display special figure designation buffer value (step 130SGS555). Then, the random number MR1 read out in step 130SGS542 is compared with the display result determination table set in step 130SGS555, and it is determined whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range (step 130SGS556). If the value of the random number MR1 is outside the range of the jackpot, it is further determined whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of the small win (step 130SGS557). If the value of the random number MR1 is within the small win range, that is, if the variable display result is a small win, a small win flag is set (step 130SGS588). Then, the small hit type determination table (see FIG. 284-7 (E)) is selected (step 130SGS588a), and the selected small hit type determination table is compared with the random number value MR2 read out in step 130SGS542. The type is determined (step 130SGS588b). Then, a small win type buffer value corresponding to the determined small win type is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS564 (step 130SGS588c).

Further, when the value of the random number MR1 is outside the range of a small hit, it is further determined whether the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of a time saving winning or losing (step 130SGS559). If the value of the random number MR1 is outside the range of time savings, that is, if the variable display result is a failure, the process proceeds to step 130SGS564, and if the value of the random number MR1 is within the range of time savings, that is, When the variable display result indicates that the time saving has been applied or not, a time saving application or failure flag is set (step 130SGS560). Then, select the time-save and miss type determination table (see Figures 284-7 (F) and 284-7 (G)) corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer, and use the selected time-save and miss type determination table and step By comparing the random number value MR6 read at step 130SGS542, the type of failure with time saving is determined (step 130SGS562). Then, a buffer value for the failure type with time saving is set according to the determined failure type with time saving, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS564 (step 130SGS563).

Further, if the value of the random number MR1 is within the jackpot range in step 130SGS556, that is, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a jackpot flag is set (step 130SGS566). Then, the jackpot type determination table (see Figures 284-7(C) and 284-7(D)) corresponding to the variable display special figure designation buffer is selected (step 130SGS567), and the selected jackpot type determination table and step The type of jackpot is determined by comparing it with the random number MR1 read out at step 130SGS542 (step 130SGS568). Then, a jackpot type buffer value is set according to the determined jackpot type, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS570 (step 130SGS569).

In step 130SGS564, the CPU 103 determines whether the ceiling reached flag has been set, indicating that the RAM has already been cleared or that 685 variable displays have been executed since the end of the previous big win game, causing control to be placed in time-saving state B. If the ceiling reached flag has been set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS570. If the ceiling reached flag has not been set, the value of the ceiling variable display counter is decremented by 1 (step 130SGS565), and a ceiling time-saving count designation command corresponding to the value of the ceiling variable display counter is sent, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS570 (step 130SGS565a).

Incidentally, the ceiling time reduction number designation command set to be transmitted in step 130SGS565a is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

In step 130SGS570, the CPU 103 determines the confirmed special symbol according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the variable pattern setting process, and the normal special symbol processing is terminated (step 130SGS571).

Figure 284-19 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step S111) shown in Figure 284-15. In the variable pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special chart (step 130SGS131). Whether the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the first special chart may be judged, for example, by whether the variable display special chart designation buffer value is 1. If it is the variable display of the first special chart, a variable pattern determination table is selected from the variable pattern determination tables shown in Figures 284-20 and 284-21 according to the variable display result, game status, and number of reserved memories, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS135 (step 130SGS132).

For example, if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special charts is two or less, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 284-20 (A) is selected; if the variable display result is a miss, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special charts is three or more, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in FIG. 284-20 (B) is selected; if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is normal, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. 284-20 (C) is selected; the variable display result is a miss with time reduction and the type of miss with time reduction is miss with time reduction A; If the game state is normal, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 284-20 (D) is selected; if the variable display result is a miss with time reduction and the type of miss with time reduction is miss with time reduction B, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special charts is two or less, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in FIG. 284-20 (E) is selected; if the variable display result is a miss with time reduction and the type of miss with time reduction is miss with time reduction B, the game state is normal, and the number of reserved first special charts is three or more, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table F shown in FIG. 284-20 (F) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is any of time-saving state A to time-saving state C, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in FIG. 284-21 (A) is selected, if the variable display result is a jackpot and the game state is any of time-saving state A to time-saving state C, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 284-21 (B) is selected, and if the variable display result is a miss with time-saving and the game state is any of time-saving state A to time-saving state C, the first special chart fluctuation pattern determination table I shown in FIG. 284-21 (C) is selected.

In addition, if the variable display executed in step 130SGS131 is the variable display of the second special chart, it is determined whether any of the time-saving flags are set, that is, whether the game is controlled to any of the time-saving states A to C (step 130SGS133a). If none of the time-saving flags are set, that is, if the game state is the normal state, the process proceeds to step 130SGS134a, and if any of the time-saving flags are set, the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter for counting the number of times the second special chart is variable displayed in the time-saving state is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS134a (step 130SGS133b).

In step 130SGS134a, the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern determination table according to the variable display result, the gaming state, the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter (the variable display number of the second special symbol in the time-saving state), etc. -25 is selected from the variation pattern determination table, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS134b (step 130SGS134a).

For example, if the variable display result is wrong and the gaming state is time saving state A1 or time saving state C1, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table A shown in FIG. 284-22 (A), and the variable display result is a jackpot, If the gaming state is time saving state A1 or time saving state C1, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table B shown in Fig. 284-22(B), the variable display result is a small hit, and the gaming state is time saving state A1 or time saving state C1. If the time saving state C1 is selected, select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table C shown in FIG. Select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table D shown in FIG. 284-22(D).

Also, if the variable display result is off and the gaming state is any of the 1st to 7th and 12th to 685th times of time saving state A3 or time saving state A2 after jackpot B, time saving state A3 after jackpot D, Figure 284-23 Select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table E shown in (A), the variable display result is jackpot, the gaming state is time saving state A3 or time saving state A2 after jackpot B, time saving state A3 after jackpot D 1~ If it is the 7th time or any of the 12th to 685th times, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table F shown in Figure 284-23 (B), the variable display result will be a small hit, and the gaming state will be after the jackpot B. If it is time saving state A3 or time saving state A2, or the 1st to 7th time or 12th to 685th time of time saving state A3 after jackpot D, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table G shown in Figure 284-23(C) If the variable display result shows time saving or not, and the gaming state is either time saving state A3 or time saving state A2 after jackpot B, time saving state A3 after jackpot D, 1st to 7th or 12th to 685th. Select the second special symbol variation pattern determination table H shown in FIG. 284-23(D).

In addition, the variable display result is wrong, the gaming state is normal, the 8th to 10th variable display is in time saving state A3 after jackpot D, time saving is lost in time saving state B, time saving state C2, winning notification non-execution flag is not set, and 2 If it is any of the variable displays after the first time, select the second special pattern variation determination table I shown in Figure 284-24(A), the variable display result is a jackpot, the gaming state is normal, and after the jackpot D. If it is the 8th to 10th variable display in time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, select the second special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table J shown in Figure 284-24 (B), and select variable display. If the result is a small hit, the gaming state is normal, the 8th to 10th variable display in time-saving state A3 after jackpot D, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, the game state shown in FIG. 284-24(C) is displayed. 2. Select variable pattern determination table K for special symbols, the variable display result is time saving, the game state is either the 8th to 10th variable display in time saving state A3 after jackpot D, time saving state B, or time saving state C2. If so, select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table L shown in Figure 284-24 (D), and if the variable display result is ``Time-saving'' or ``No'' and the gaming state is normal, then the table shown in Figure 284-24 (E) is selected. Select the second special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table M shown in FIG. If either is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern determination table N shown in FIG. 284-24(F) is selected.

The non-execution flag for winning notification of failure with time saving means that when the variable display result in any of time saving state A or time saving state B becomes ``losing with time saving B'', the time saving state under execution is This is a flag that is set to notify that after the end of the game, the time-saving state C2 will be controlled again due to the winning of "Time-saving winning B".

Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state A3 after the big win D, the second special chart variable pattern determination table O shown in FIG. 284-25 (A) is selected, if the variable display result is a big win and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state A3 after the big win D, the second special chart variable pattern determination table P shown in FIG. 284-25 (B) is selected, if the variable display result is a small win and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state A3 after the big win D, the second special chart variable pattern determination table Q shown in FIG. 284-25 (C) is selected, and if the variable display result is a miss with time saving and the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state A3 after the big win D, the second special chart variable pattern determination table R shown in FIG. 284-25 (D) is selected.

As shown in FIGS. 284-23 to 284-25, whether the time saving state A3 is after jackpot B or after jackpot D can be determined from the gaming state designation command stored in the jackpot end process described later. (See step 130SGS340 in FIG. 284-41).

After executing step 130SGS134a, the CPU 103 clears the time-saving winning notification non-execution flag if it is set, and proceeds to step 130SGS135 (step 130SGS134b).

In step 130SGS135, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern by comparing the variation pattern determination table selected in step 130SGS132 or step 130SGS134b with the random number value MR3 read in step 130SGS542 of the special symbol normal processing. Then, settings are made to start variable display of the special symbol (step 130SGS136), and settings are made to send various commands for starting variable display, such as a variation pattern designation command and a variable display result designation command according to the determined variation pattern ( Step 130SGS137), a variable display time timer is set according to the fluctuation pattern (Step 130SGS138). Finally, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process, and the variation pattern setting process is ended (step 130SGS139). The various commands set for transmission in step 130SGS137 are transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

As mentioned above, regarding the variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in Figure 284-26, when the gaming state is the normal state, if the variable display result is "miss", the special symbol variation time is 12000ms. Non-reach is off (PA1-1), special figure variation time is 5000ms, shortened non-reach is off (PA1-2), special figure variation time is 20000ms, normal reach is off (PA2-1), special figure variation time is off Super reach α with 43000ms is off (PA2-2), super reach β with special figure variation time of 53000ms is off (PA2-3), and super reach α with special figure variation time of 53000ms is in the middle (PA2-4). If the variable display result is "Jackpot", normal reach jackpot (PB1-1) with special figure variation time of 20000+15000ms, super reach α jackpot (PB1-2) with special figure variation time of 43000+15000ms. , determine the fluctuation pattern from among the Super Reach β jackpots (PB1-3) where the special figure fluctuation time is 53000 + 15000ms, and if the variable display result is "Long time", Super Reach α whose special figure fluctuation time is 55000ms. Variable from among the following: non-reach time saving with a special figure variation time of 12000 ms (PA2-7), and non-reach time saving with a special figure variation time of 5000 ms (PA2-8). Decide on a pattern.

In addition, for the miss variation pattern in the variable display in the normal control state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 284-20 and 284-21, so that the non-reach variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β variation patterns are the least likely to be determined. On the other hand, for the jackpot variation pattern in the variable display in the normal control state of the first special symbol, the allocation of the random number value MR3 is set as shown in Figures 284-20 and 284-21, so that the super reach β variation pattern is most likely to be determined, and the super reach α and normal reach variation patterns are the least likely to be determined. For this reason, in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state, when the variable display is executed in the non-reach variation pattern, the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is the lowest, and the normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β variation patterns are the most likely to be determined. In other words, the shorter the special chart change time, the lower the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot, and the longer the special chart change time, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot.

In addition, if the gaming state is in any of the time saving states, as shown in Figure 284-26, if the variable display result is "miss", the special symbol fluctuation time is 500 ms and the non-reach is off (PA1-3 ), and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", it is decided to be the variation pattern of Super Reach γ Jackpot (PB1-4) where the special figure variation time is 50000 + 15000ms, and the variable display result is "With time saving". If it is a "miss", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach time shortened/miss (PA2-5) with a special figure variation time of 500 ms.

Regarding the variable display of the second special symbol, as shown in Figure 284-27 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state, if the variable display result is "miss", the special symbol variation time is The fluctuation pattern of non-reach jackpot (PA3-1) with 2000ms is decided, and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) with special symbol fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000ms is decided. However, if the variable display result is "Small hit", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with special figure fluctuation time of 2000ms, and if the variable display result is "Lose with short time" , the special figure fluctuation time is determined to be a fluctuation pattern of non-reach time shortening and losing (PA3-9) with a special figure fluctuation time of 50000 ms.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-27(B), when the game state is the time-saving state A1, if the variable display result is "miss", the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach δ Miss (PA3-5) with a special chart fluctuation time of 50,000 ms, if the variable display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach δ Jackpot (PB3-3) with a special chart fluctuation time of 50,000 + 15,000 ms, if the variable display result is "small hit", the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach δ Small Hit (PC3-3) with a special chart fluctuation time of 50,000 + 15,000 ms, if the variable display result is "miss with time-saving", the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach δ Miss with time-saving (PA3-8) with a special chart fluctuation time of 50,000 ms.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-27(C), when the gaming state is the time saving state A3 after jackpot B, if the variable display result is "miss", the special figure fluctuation time is 2000 ms. If the fluctuation pattern is determined to be out of reach (PA3-1) and the variable display result is "jackpot", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) with special symbol fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000ms, and the variable display is If the result is "Small hit", the fluctuation pattern of non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with special pattern fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000 ms is decided, and if the variable display result is "Low with short time", special pattern fluctuation A variation pattern of non-reach time reduction and failure (PA3-6) with a time of 2000 ms is determined.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-27(D), when the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display in the time-saving state A2, if the variable display result is a "miss", the variation pattern is determined from a non-reach miss (PA3-2) with a special chart fluctuation time of 7000 ms and a normal reach miss (PA3-4) with a special chart fluctuation time of 20000 ms; if the variable display result is a "jackpot", the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach big win (PB3-2) with a special chart fluctuation time of 20000+15000 ms; if the variable display result is a "small win", the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach small win (PC3-2) with a special chart fluctuation time of 20000+15000 ms; and if the variable display result is a "miss with time-saving", the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss with time-saving (PA3-7) with a special chart fluctuation time of 20000 ms.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-27(E), when the game state is the time-saving state A3 after a jackpot D, when the game state is the 1st to 7th variable display in the time-saving state A3, if the variable display result is a "miss", a variable pattern is determined from a non-reach miss (PA3-2) in which the special chart fluctuation time is 7000 ms and a normal reach miss (PA3-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is 20000 ms. If the variable display result is a "jackpot", the special chart The fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach big win (PB3-2) with a fluctuation time of 20000 + 15000 ms, and if the variable display result is a "small win," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach small win (PC3-2) with a special chart fluctuation time of 20000 + 15000 ms, and if the variable display result is a "miss with time reduction," the fluctuation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss with time reduction (PA3-7) with a special chart fluctuation time of 20000 ms.

In addition, when the gaming state is the 8th to 10th variable display in time saving state A3, if the variable display result is "miss", the variation pattern of non-reach miss (PA3-1) where the special figure variation time is 2000 ms If the variable display result is a "big hit", the special symbol variation time is determined to be a non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) variation pattern of 2000+15000ms, and if the variable display result is a "small hit", If the fluctuation pattern of a non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with a special figure fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000ms is decided, and the variable display result is "Lose with a time saver", a non-reach short hit with a special figure change time of 2000ms is selected. (PA3-6) is determined as the fluctuation pattern.

In addition, when the game state is the 11th variable display in the time-saving state A3, if the variable display result is a "miss," the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss (PA3-3) with a special chart fluctuation time of 15,000 ms, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach jackpot (PB3-2) with a special chart fluctuation time of 20,000 + 15,000 ms, if the variable display result is a "small hit," the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach small hit (PC3-2) with a special chart fluctuation time of 20,000 + 15,000 ms, if the variable display result is a "miss with time-saving," the variation pattern is determined to be a normal reach miss with time-saving (PA3-7) with a special chart fluctuation time of 20,000 ms.

Then, when the gaming state is the 12th to 685th variable display in the time saving state A3, if the variable display result is "miss", the special figure is called a non-reach miss (PA3-2) with a special figure variation time of 7000 ms. The fluctuation pattern is determined from the normal reach miss (PA3-4) where the fluctuation time is 20000ms, and if the variable display result is "Jackpot", the fluctuation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB3-2) where the special symbol fluctuation time is 20000 + 15000ms. If the variable display result is "Small hit", the fluctuation pattern is determined to normal reach small hit (PC3-2) with special figure fluctuation time of 20,000 + 15,000ms, and even if the variable display result is "Short hit". For example, the variation pattern is determined to be normal reach time shortened and missed (PA3-7) where the special figure variation time is 20000 ms.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-28, when the game state is the time-saving state B, if the variable display result is "miss", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss (PA3-1) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2000 ms, if the variable display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2000+15000 ms, if the variable display result is "small hit", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2000+15000 ms, if the variable display result is "miss with time-saving", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss with time-saving (PA3-6) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2000 ms.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-29(A), when the game state is the time-saving state C1, if the variable display result is "miss", the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach δ Miss (PA3-5) with a special chart fluctuation time of 50,000 ms, if the variable display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach δ Jackpot (PB3-3) with a special chart fluctuation time of 50,000 + 15,000 ms, if the variable display result is "small hit", the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach δ Small Hit (PC3-3) with a special chart fluctuation time of 50,000 + 15,000 ms, if the variable display result is "miss with time-saving", the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach δ Miss with time-saving (PA3-8) with a special chart fluctuation time of 50,000 ms.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-29(B), when the game state is the time-saving state C2, if the time-saving miss winning notification unexecuted flag is set, or if it is the first variable display of the time-saving state C2, if the variable display result is a "miss", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss (PA3-10) with a special chart fluctuation time of 30,000 ms, if the variable display result is a "jackpot", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach big win (PB3-1) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2,000 + 15,000 ms, if the variable display result is a "small win", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach small win (PC3-1) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2,000 + 15,000 ms, if the variable display result is a "time-saving miss", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach time-saving miss (PA3-6) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2,000 ms.

In addition, when the game state is the 2nd to 685th variable display in the time-saving state C2, if the variable display result is "miss", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss (PA3-1) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2000 ms, if the variable display result is "jackpot", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach jackpot (PB3-1) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000 ms, if the variable display result is "small hit", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach small hit (PC3-1) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2000 + 15000 ms, if the variable display result is "miss with time-saving", the variation pattern is determined to be a non-reach miss with time-saving (PA3-6) with a special chart fluctuation time of 2000 ms.

Next, the average variable display time of the second special pattern when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, time-saving state C1, and time-saving state C2 in this feature part 130SG will be explained based on Figures 284-30 to 284-32.

First, in the case where the variable display result is off in the time saving state A1, only PA3-5 where the special figure variation time is 50000 ms is determined (see Figure 284-22 (A) and Figure 284-27 (B)) ) Therefore, the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is off in the time saving state A1 is 50000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30(A).

In addition, regarding the case where the variable display result is blurred in time saving state A2, PA3-2 with special figure variation time of 7000ms has a ratio of 100/997, and PA3-4 with special figure variation time of 20000ms has a ratio of 897/ Since each variable pattern is determined at a rate of 997 (see Figure 284-23 (A) and Figure 284-27 (D)), the average variable display of the second special figure in which the variable display result is off in time saving state A2. The time is 18696.08825 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30(B).

In addition, when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state A3 after the big win B, PA3-2 with a special chart fluctuation time of 7000 ms is determined as the fluctuation pattern at a rate of 100/997, and PA3-4 with a special chart fluctuation time of 20000 ms is determined as the fluctuation pattern at a rate of 897/997 (see Figures 284-23 (A) and 284-27 (C)). Therefore, the average variable display time of the second special chart where the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state A2 is 18696.08825 ms according to the formula shown in Figure 284-30 (C).

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is off for the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D, for the 1st to 7th variable display and the 12th to 685th variable display, PA3-2 whose special figure variation time is 7000ms is Since PA3-4 with a ratio of 100/997 and a special figure fluctuation time of 20000ms is determined as a fluctuation pattern at a ratio of 897/997 (see Figure 284-23 (A) and Figure 284-27 (E)) , the average variable display time of the second special symbols of the 1st to 7th times and the 12th to 685th times in which the variable display result is a loss in the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D is 18696. It becomes 08825ms. Furthermore, for the 5th to 8th variable displays, only PA3-6 with a special figure variation time of 2000 ms is determined as a variation pattern (see Figure 284-24 (A) and Figure 284-27 (E)), In the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D, the average variable display time of the 8th to 10th second special symbols in which the variable display result is a loss is 2000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (D). Then, for the 11th variable display, only PA3-3 with a special figure variation time of 15000ms is determined as a variation pattern (see Figure 284-25 (A) and Figure 284-27 (E)), so it is a jackpot. In the time saving state A3 after D, the average variable display time of the 11th second special figure in which the variable display result is off is 15000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (D). From the above, the average variable display time of the second special symbol in which the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state A3 after the jackpot D is 18617.57093 ms.

Then, based on the values calculated in Figure 284-30 (C) and Figure 284-30 (D), the average variable display time of the second special chart when the variable display result is a miss in the entire time-saving state A3 is calculated as 18656.82959 ms using the formula shown in Figure 284-30 (E).

From the above, the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is off in the time saving state A1 to time saving state A3 is 22904.91502 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-30 (F).

In addition, the average variable display time of the second special figure when the variable display result is a loss in the time-saving state A3 calculated in Figure 284-30 (D) is the case where the variable display result is a loss in the time-saving state A3. This is the value when the time saving state A3 ends after the variable display is executed 685 times without winning in any of the winning states and without being controlled by the time saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variable display result is changed in time saving state A3 in consideration of the case where a jackpot, small win, or time saving win is won during time saving state A3, or the case where time saving state B is controlled during time saving state A3. You may calculate the average variable display time of the second special figure in the case where it becomes.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is incorrect in time saving state B, only PA3-1 with a special figure variation time of 2000 ms is determined (see Figure 284-24 (A) and Figure 284-28). In the time saving state B, the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is off is 2000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-31.

In addition, when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C1, only PA3-5, whose special chart variable time is 50,000 ms, is determined (see Fig. 284-22 (A) and Fig. 284-29 (A)), so the average variable display time of the second special chart, whose variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C1, is 50,000 ms according to the formula shown in Fig. 284-32 (A).

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is off in the time saving state C2, only PA3-10 with a special figure variation time of 30000 ms is determined as the variation pattern for the first variable display (Figure 284-24 ( F) and Figure 284-29 (B)), the average variable display time of the second special figure for the first time in which the variable display result is off in time saving state C2 is 30000 ms according to the formula shown in Figure 284-32 (B). Become. Then, for the 2nd to 685th variable display, only PA3-1 with a special figure variation time of 2000 ms is determined as the variation pattern (see Figure 284-24 (A) and Figure 284-29 (B)), In time saving state C2, the average variable display time of the 2nd to 685th special symbols in which the variable display result is off is 2000 ms according to the formula shown in FIG. 284-32(B). From the above, the average variable display time of the second special figure in which the variable display result is off in the time saving state C2 is 2040.875912 ms.

Then, based on the values calculated in Fig. 284-32(A) and Fig. 284-32(B), the average variable display time of the second special chart when the variable display results are a miss in the time-saving state C1 and the time-saving state C2 as a whole is calculated as 20620.43795 ms using the formula shown in Fig. 284-32(C).

As shown in Figs. 284-30 to 284-32, in this characteristic part 130SG, when comparing the time-saving state B with the entire time-saving state C, the average variable display time of the variable display of the second special chart where the variable display result is a miss is set longer in the time-saving state C than in the time-saving state B. Also, when comparing the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C1, the average variable display time of the variable display of the second special chart where the variable display result is a miss is set longer in the time-saving state C1 than in the time-saving state B. Furthermore, when comparing the entire time-saving state A with the time-saving state C2, the average variable display time of the variable display of the second special chart where the variable display result is a miss is set longer in the time-saving state A than in the time-saving state C2.

284-33 and 284-34 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. 284-15. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a symbol determination period timer, which will be described later, is in operation (step 130SGS201). If the symbol confirmation period is not in operation, the stop symbol of the special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B (step 130SGS202), and the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation command is performed ( Step 130SGS203). The symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the jackpot flag is set (step 130SGS204). If the jackpot flag is set, if any of the time-saving flags are set, the time-saving flag is cleared (step 130SGS205), and the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is cleared (step 130SGS206). Furthermore, depending on the type of jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the transmission setting of the hit start 1 designation command or the hit start 2 designation command, and sets the transmission setting of the game state designation command indicating that the game state is normal, and proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS207, step 130SGS208). The hit start designation command and the game state designation command are transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

Furthermore, if the symbol determination period timer is operating in step 130SGS201, the CPU 103 subtracts the value of the symbol determination period timer by 1 (step 130SGS209), and determines whether or not the symbol determination period timer has timed out ( Step 130SGS210). If the symbol confirmation period timer has not timed out, the special symbol stop processing is finished, and if the symbol confirmation period timer has timed out, it is further derived and displayed to determine whether the stop symbol is a missed symbol or a missed symbol with a short time reduction. It is determined whether or not (step 130SGS211). If the derived and displayed stop symbol is a missed symbol or a time-save missed symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing, and the special symbol stop processing is ended (step 130SGS212). If the derived and displayed stop symbol is not a winning symbol or a short-time winning symbol, it is determined whether the derived and displayed stopped symbol is a jackpot symbol (step 130SGS213). If the derived and displayed stop symbol is a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing, the special symbol stop process is completed (step 130SGS214), and the derived and displayed symbol is If the current stop symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit release pre-process and the special symbol stop process is ended (step 130SGS215).

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set in step 130SGS204, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time saving counter α is 1 or more (step 130SGS216). In addition, the total time saving number counter α is the sum of the maximum time saving control number of the first special symbol and the maximum time saving control number of the second special symbol in the time saving state A and time saving state B ("5", "11", " 689) is the counter to be set.

When the value of the total time saving number counter α is 1 or more, the value of the total time saving number counter α is decremented by 1 (step 130SGS217). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether the finished variable display is the variable display of the first special figure (step 130SGS218). If the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 1, the process advances to step 130SGS220, and if the variable display special figure designation buffer value is 2 (if the finished variable display is the variable display of the second special figure), the process proceeds to step 130SGS220. 2. The value of the special figure time saving number counter α is decremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 130SGS220 (step 130SGS219). In addition, the second special symbol time saving number counter α is set to the maximum time saving control number (any one of "1", "7", and "685") of the second special symbol in time saving state A and time saving state B. It is a counter.

In step 130SGS220, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time-saving counter β is equal to or greater than 1 (step 130SGS220). The total time-saving counter β is set to the sum of the maximum time-saving control count for the first special symbol and the maximum time-saving control count for the second special symbol in time-saving state C (either "5" or "689").

If the value of the total time-saving counter β is 1 or more, the value of the total time-saving counter β is decremented by 1 (step 130SGS221). Furthermore, it is determined whether the variable display special pattern designation buffer value is 1, that is, whether the completed variable display is the variable display of the first special pattern (step 130SGS222). If the variable display special pattern designation buffer value is 1, the process proceeds to step 130SGS224. If the variable display special pattern designation buffer value is 2 (if the completed variable display is the variable display of the second special pattern), the value of the second special pattern time-saving counter β is decremented by 1 and the process proceeds to step 130SGS224 (step 130SGS223). The second special pattern time-saving counter β is a counter in which the maximum time-saving control count ("1" or "685") of the second special pattern is set in the time-saving state C.

In step 130SGS224, the CPU 103 determines whether any of the time-saving A flags (the time-saving A1 flag indicating the time-saving state A1, the time-saving A2 flag indicating the time-saving state A2, or the time-saving A3 flag indicating the time-saving state A3) are set. If any of the time-saving A flags are not set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS230. If any of the time-saving A flags are not set, the process further determines whether the value of the total time-saving count counter α or the second special time-saving count counter α has become 0, that is, whether the variable display of the maximum time-saving control count has ended in the controlled time-saving state (step 130SGS225). If the values of the total time-saving counter α and the second special time-saving counter α are not 0, proceed to step 130SGS230. If the values of the total time-saving counter α or the second special time-saving counter α are 0, clear the set time-saving A flag (step 130SGS226), and clear the values of the total time-saving counter α and the second special time-saving counter α (step 130SGS227).

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the total time reduction counter β is 1 or more (step 130SGS228). If the value of the total time saving number counter β is not 1 or more, the process advances to step 130SGS230, and if the value of the total time saving number counter β is 1 or more, the time saving C2 flag indicating that the time saving state C2 is set is set and the process proceeds to step 130. The process advances to 130SGS230 (step 130SGS229).

In step 130SGS230, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving B flag indicating the time saving state B is set. If the time saving B flag is not set, the process advances to step 130SGS236, and if the time saving B flag is set, it is further checked whether the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special symbol time saving number counter is 0. Determination is made (step 130SGS231). If the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special symbol time saving number counter α are not 0, the process advances to step 130SGS236, and if the value of the total time saving number counter α or the second special symbol time saving number counter α is 0, the time saving number counter α is 0. The B flag is cleared (step 130SGS232), and the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special symbol time saving number counter α are cleared (step 130SGS233).

The CPU 103 also determines whether the value of the total time-saving counter β is 1 or greater (step 130SGS234). If the value of the total time-saving counter β is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step 130SGS236. If the value of the total time-saving counter β is 1 or greater, the process sets a time-saving C2 flag indicating that the time-saving state is C2, and proceeds to step 130SGS236 (step 130SGS235).

In step 130SGS236, the CPU 103 judges whether any of the time-saving C flags (time-saving C1 flag indicating time-saving state C1 or time-saving C2 flag indicating time-saving state C2) is set. If none of the time-saving C flags are set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS240. If any of the time-saving C flags are set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS237 to judge whether the value of the total time-saving counter β or the second special time-saving counter β is 0. If the value of the total time-saving counter β and the second special time-saving counter β is not 0, the process proceeds to step 130SGS240. If the value of the total time-saving counter β or the second special time-saving counter β is 0, the process clears the set time-saving C flag (step 130SGS238), clears the value of the total time-saving counter β and the second special time-saving counter β, and proceeds to step 130SGS240 (step 130SGS239).

In step 130SGS240, the CPU 103 determines whether the small hit flag is set. If the small win flag is set, transmission settings are made for a win start 3 designation command or a win 4 start designation command depending on the small win type, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242. In addition, the winning start 3 designation command and the winning 4 start designation command are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CP 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

If the small hit flag has not been set, the CPU 103 has already cleared the RAM or set the ceiling reached flag indicating that variable display has been executed 685 times since the end of the previous jackpot game and the time saving state B has been controlled. It is determined whether or not there is one (step 130SGS251a). If the ceiling reached flag is set, the process advances to step 130SGS258, and if the ceiling reached flag is not set, the value of the ceiling variable display counter is 0, that is, the finished variable display is cleared from RAM or the previous one. It is determined whether the variable display is 685 times since the end of the jackpot game (step 130SGS251b). If the value of the variable ceiling display counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 130SGS258, and if the value of the variable ceiling display counter is 0, the ceiling reached flag and time saving B flag are set (step 130SGS251c, step 130SGS252). Further, the total time saving number counter is set to "689" and the second special symbol time saving number counter α is set to "685", and the process proceeds to step 130SGS255 (step 130SGS253, step 130SGS254).

In step 130SGS255, the CPU 103 determines whether any time-saving C flag is set. If none of the time-saving C flags are set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS242. If any of the time-saving C flags are set, the process clears the set time-saving C flag and clears the values of the total time-saving count counter β and the second special time-saving count counter β (steps 130SGS256, 130SGS257a). Furthermore, the value of the time-saving state variable display count counter is set to "0" and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS257b).

In step 130SGS258, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag has been set. If the time saving addition/off flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS242, and if the time saving addition/off flag is set, the time saving addition/off type is specified (step 130SGS259), and the specified time saving addition/off type is set. It is determined whether the deviation is A (step 130SGS260).

When the specified time saving attachment/missing type is time saving attachment/missing A, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the second special symbol time saving number counter β is 1 or more. If the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is 1 or more, the process advances to step 130SGS242, and if the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is not 1 or more, either the time saving A flag or the time saving B It is determined whether the flag is set (step 130SGS262a). If either the time saving A flag or the time saving B flag is set, the process advances to step 130SGS263, and if neither the time saving A flag nor the time saving B flag is set, the time saving C1 flag is set and the time saving state variable The display count counter is set to "0" and the process proceeds to step 130SGS263 (step 130SGS262b, step 130SGS262c).

In step 130SGS263, the CPU 103 sets the total time-saving counter β to "5". Furthermore, the CPU 103 sets the second special time-saving counter to "1" and proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS264).

On the other hand, if the identified type of loss with time reduction is loss with time reduction B in step 130SGS260, the CPU 103 judges whether the game state is normal or not (step 130SGS265). If the game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step 130SGS267. If the game state is normal, the process further judges whether the variable display special chart designation buffer value is 2 or not, that is, whether the variable display that has ended is the variable display of the second special chart or not (step 130SGS266). If the variable display special chart designation buffer value is 1, the process proceeds to step 130SGS267. If the variable display special chart designation buffer value is 2, the process proceeds to step 130SGS268.

In step 130SGS267, the CPU 103 determines whether any of the time-saving A flags or time-saving B flags are set. If any of the time-saving A flags or time-saving B flags are set, the process proceeds to step 130SGS268. In step 130SGS268, the time-saving losing win notification not yet executed flag is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS272.

Also, if neither the time-saving A flag nor the time-saving B flag is set in step 130SGS268, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving C2 flag has already been set (step 130SGS269). If the time-saving C2 flag has not already been set, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving C2 flag (step 130SGS270), sets the time-saving state variable display count counter to "0", and proceeds to step 130SGS272.

In step 130SGS272, the CPU 103 sets the second special symbol time saving counter β to "685". Further, the total time reduction counter β is set to "689" and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242 (step 130SGS273).

If the time saving C2 flag has already been set in step 130SGS269, the CPU 103 compares the value set in the second special figure time saving counter with "685" (step 130SGS274), and sets the second special figure time saving number. It is determined whether the value set in the counter is 685 or less (step 130SGS275). If the value set in the second special figure time saving number counter is not 685 or less, proceed to step 130SGS242, and if the value set in the second special figure time saving number counter is 685 or less, step 130SGS271, 130SGS272 , 130SGS273 are executed and the process proceeds to step 130SGS242.

Then, in step 130SGS242, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the situation in the symbol determination period timer, and sets the transmission of a symbol determination period designation command corresponding to the set value. Furthermore, it sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state, and ends the special symbol stop processing (step 130SGS243).

The symbol confirmation period designation command and the game state designation command are transmitted to the production control board 12 by the CPU 103 executing the command control process shown in FIG. 278.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. If the variable display result shows that the time saving is not included (when the value of the special figure time saving number counter α is 1 or more), the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β are displayed according to the type of the time saving not being included. When the value of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α becomes 0, a value of 1 or more is set in the total time saving number counter β and the second special figure time saving number counter β. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, and the time saving state C2 based on the fact that the game state is If the variable display result shows that the time saving is not included in any of the states B (when the values of the total time saving number counter α and the second special figure time saving number counter α are 1 or more), the time saving number is not included. The value of the second special figure time-saving number counter α (remaining variable display number of times when time-saving control can be executed in time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, and time-saving state B) and the value (1 or 685), and if the value corresponding to the type of failure with time saving is larger than the value of the second special symbol time saving number counter α, the time saving state in progress (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, at the end of the time-saving state B), the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2) according to the type of time-saving addition/loss, while the value corresponding to the time-saving/loss type is set to the second characteristic. If the value is less than the value of the time saving counter α, after the current time saving state (any of the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, or time saving state B) ends, the time saving state will change to the time saving state according to the type of time saving. It may be controlled to the normal state without any control. As a result, if the variable display result shows time saving in any of the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, and time saving state B, the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3 , time-saving state B can be followed by time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, making it possible to draw the attention of the player to whether or not the time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2 is controlled, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

Figures 284-35 to 284-38 are diagrams showing the pattern determination period according to each situation. In processing step 130SGS242, the CPU 103 sets the pattern determination period timer to a value corresponding to the pattern determination period for each situation shown in Figures 284-35 to 284-38.

In this feature unit 130SG, as shown in Fig. 284-35 to Fig. 284-38, four types of pattern determination periods are set as the pattern determination period: 0.5 seconds, 6 seconds, 20 seconds, and 81.4 seconds. In particular, in some cases, such as when the variable display result is a miss with time reduction or when the variable display result is a miss and the 685th variable display, the pattern determination period is 6 seconds, 20 seconds, or 81.4 seconds, so that it is possible to execute a start effect for controlling the corresponding time-saving state during these pattern determination periods. On the other hand, in some cases, when the variable display result is a miss with time reduction, the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds, so that it is impossible to execute a start effect for controlling the corresponding time-saving state during these pattern determination periods. In addition, 0.5 seconds, which is the shortest of these multiple pattern determination periods, is set as a time that is sufficient for the player to visually recognize the stopped decorative pattern, and is set as a time that minimizes stress caused by the next variable display not being executed (or the performance not progressing).

Figure 284-39 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S119 of Figure 284-15 as the processing during the small win opening. In the processing during the small win opening, the CPU 103 first decrements the value of the opening time timer by 1 (130SGS281). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the opening time timer has timed out (130SGS282).

If the opening time timer has timed out, the process moves to 130SGS293. If the opening time timer has not timed out, the process determines whether or not it is time to open the large prize opening (130SGS283). If it is time to open the large prize opening, the CPU 103 controls the large prize opening to an open state by driving the solenoid 130SG083 (130SGS284). Then, the process sets the transmission of the large prize opening open command according to the round (130SGS285), and moves to 130SGS286. The large prize opening open command set for transmission in 130SGS285 is transmitted to the performance control board 12 by the command control process described above. If it is not time to open the large prize opening, the process moves to 130SGS286 without passing through 130SGS284 and 130SGS285.

At 130SGS286, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to close the big prize opening (130SGS286). When it is the closing timing of the big winning opening, the CPU 103 controls the big winning opening to be closed by driving the solenoid 130SG083 (130SGS287). Then, the transmission setting of the specified command after opening the big winning hole according to the round is performed (130SGS288), and the process moves to 130SGS289. Incidentally, the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open, which has been set to be transmitted in 130SGS288, is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. If it is not the closing timing of the big prize opening, the process moves to 130SGS289 without passing through 130SGS287 and 130SGS288.

In 130SGS289, the CPU 103 judges whether the second count switch 130SG024 is on or not (130SGS289). If the second count switch 130SG024 is not on, the small win open process is terminated, and if the second count switch 130SG024 is on, the CPU 103 judges whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 130SG024 has already been turned on, i.e., that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 130SG024, has been set (130SGS290). If the V winning flag is set, the small win open process is terminated, and if the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 sets the V winning flag (130SGS291).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the production control board 12 (130SGS292). Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Then, in 130SGS293, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "10" (130SGS293), which is the value corresponding to the small win end process (S120), and ends the small win open process.

Figure 284-40 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed by 130SGS120 in Figure 284-15 as small hit end processing. In the small hit end processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the small hit end display timer is operating or not (130SGS301). If the small hit end display timer is not operating (130SGS301; N), the small hit flag is cleared (130SGS302) and a hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit is set to the performance control board 12 (130SGS303). The hit end designation command is sent to the performance control board 12 in the command control processing described above. Then, the small hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end display time (130SGS304), and the small hit end processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the small win end display timer is operating, the value of the small win end display timer is decremented by 1 (130SGS305). Then, it is determined whether the small win end display time has elapsed, that is, whether the small win end display timer has timed out (130SGS306). If the small win end display time has not elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the second count switch 130SG024 has been turned on (130SGS307). If the second count switch 130SG024 has not been turned on, the small win end process is terminated, and if the second count switch 130SG024 has been turned on, it is determined whether the V winning flag, which indicates that the second count switch 130SG024 has already been turned on, that is, that the game ball has passed through the second count switch 130SG024, has been set (130SGS308). If the V prize flag is set, the small win end process ends, and if the V prize flag is not set, the V prize flag is set (130SGS309).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the V winning notification command to the production control board 12 (130SGS310), and ends the small winning ending process. Incidentally, the V winning prize notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above.

Further, when the small winning end display time has elapsed in 130SGS306, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the V winning flag is set (130SGS311). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the V winning flag and sets the jackpot flag (130SGS312, 130SGS313). Then, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type from "jackpot C" and "jackpot D" based on the small win type in which the V winning occurred (130SGS314). As for the jackpot type, as shown in Figure 284-7 (E), if the small hit type in which the V winning occurred is "small hit A", the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot C", and the corresponding If the small win type in which the V winning occurred is "small win B," the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot D." Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 130SG155 (130SGS315), the determined jackpot type is set. Remember.

In addition, the time saving flag and the time saving state variable display count counter are cleared (step 130SGS316, step 130SGS317), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) ( 130SGS318), the small hit end process is ended.

In other words, in this feature section 130SG, the game ball passes through the second count switch 130SG024 not only during the small win game, but also during the period until the small win end display time has elapsed after the small win game ends. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the big win hole just before the small win game ends, the game ball passes through the second count switch 130SG024, and the big win game is executed after the small win end processing is completed.

In addition, if the V winning flag is not set in 130SGS311, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" (130SGS319), which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110), and the small hit is Finish the termination process.

FIG. 284-41 is a flowchart of the jackpot ending process shown in FIG. 284-15. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot end display timer is in operation (step 103SGS321). If the jackpot end display timer is not in operation, the jackpot flag is cleared (step 130SGS322a), and settings are made to send a jackpot end designation command according to the jackpot type (step 130SGS322b). Incidentally, the jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. In addition, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer, and the jackpot end processing is ended (step 130SGS322c). .

In addition, if the jackpot end display timer is operating in step 130SGS321, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 130SGS323), and it is determined whether the jackpot end display timer has timed out (step 130SGS324). If the jackpot end display timer has not timed out, the jackpot end process is terminated, and if the jackpot end display timer has timed out, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A (step 130SGS325). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot A, the second special chart time-saving counter α is set to "1" and the total time-saving counter α is set to "5" (steps 130SGS326, 130SGS327). Then, the time-saving A1 flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state A1 is being controlled, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS339 (step 130SGS327a).

Further, if the jackpot type of the jackpot is not jackpot A, it is determined whether the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot D (step 130SGS328). If the jackpot type of the jackpot is jackpot B or jackpot D, the second special figure time saving number counter α is set to “685” and the total time saving number counter α is set to “689” (step 130SGS329, step 130SGS330). Then, the time saving A3 flag indicating that the time saving state A3 is controlled is set, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS339 (step 130SGS330a).

If the type of the jackpot is not jackpot B or jackpot D, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot C, and the second special chart time-saving count counter α is set to "7" and the total time-saving count counter α is set to "11" (steps 130SGS335 and 130SGS336). Then, the time-saving A2 flag is set to indicate that the jackpot is in the time-saving state A2, and the process proceeds to step 130SGS339 (step 130SGS336a).

In step 130SGS339, the CPU 103 clears the ceiling reached flag if it has been set. Then, the ceiling variable display counter is set to "685" (step 130SGS339a), and the transmission setting of the gaming state designation command according to the executed jackpot type is performed (step 130SGS339b). Incidentally, the game state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 12 in the command control process described above. Further, the gaming state specifying command for which transmission settings have been made is stored (step 130SGS340), and the time-saving state variable display count counter is set to "0", thereby terminating the jackpot termination process.

FIG. 284-42 is a flowchart showing the production control process processing in the feature section 130SG. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 284-42, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read notice setting process in the feature unit 130SG, based on the production control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, in the normal state, time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2, As a pre-reading notice, there is a pending display notice effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the display mode of the pending display, and one variable display of the second special symbol in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1 and the second one immediately after that. 2 Panel images are displayed on the image display device 5 for four variable displays of special symbols, and the panel effect suggests that the variable display results will be a jackpot at different ratios depending on the display mode of these panel images. is now executable. In addition, when it is decided to execute the pending display notice performance, a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the pending display is set as a pending display flag value corresponding to the pending memory of the performance target in the start winning reception command buffer 130SGS194A. , when it is decided to execute the panel display effect, by setting a value corresponding to the determined display mode of the panel display as the panel display flag value corresponding to the reserved memory of the effect target in the start winning reception command buffer 130SGS194A. , it is sufficient to start displaying these pending displays and panel displays (see FIG. 284-14(B)).

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance also executes a result performance execution process (step 130SGS162). In the result performance execution process, for example, the number of jackpot games that have occurred since the first hit and the number of prize balls paid out are counted, and when the last variable display in the time-saving state (time-saving state A1 and time-saving state C1 are four variable displays immediately after the time-saving state ends) ends and the normal state is controlled (during the pattern determination period), a process is performed to execute a result performance that displays the number of jackpot games that have occurred and the number of prize balls paid out on the image display device 5. Note that in this feature unit 130SG, when controlled in the time-saving state A3, there are exceptional cases where the result performance is executed from the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display of the second special chart to the eleventh variable display.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 executes a rush performance execution process (step 130SGS162). In the entry performance execution process, for example, the time saving state A (any of the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3) is controlled from the ending performance of the jackpot game to the first variable display after the jackpot game. Or, the time saving state was controlled to the time saving state B during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display for the 685th time after clearing the RAM or the previous jackpot game, and the time saving state during the symbol confirmation period of the variable display where the variable display result was "time saving with loss" A rush effect is executed to notify that the control is set to C (time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2).

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes the processes of steps S170 to S172 in the same manner as in FIG. 284. The special symbol hit waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol hit waiting process, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stops the variable display of the decorative symbol for the symbol fixing period indicated by the symbol fixing command based on the reception of a command (one of the first symbol fixing command, the second symbol fixing command, the third symbol fixing command, and the fourth symbol fixing command) that specifies the stop display of the fixed decorative symbol received in the variable display during performance process. At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a performance (entry performance or result performance shown in FIG. 284-44) according to the variable display result, the number of variable displays, and the transition of the game state. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a start performance not only in the special symbol hit waiting process but also during some variable displays (during the execution of the variable display during performance process).

The CPU 120 for controlling the presentation judges whether or not a presentation control command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11 at the end of the pattern determination period. Then, when a presentation control command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "6", which corresponds to the presentation processing during a small win. In addition, if a command for starting a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it judges that the display result in the special chart game was a "miss" and updates the value of the presentation process flag to the initial value "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the waiting process for the special chart hit is terminated.

The small hit production process in step 130SGS176 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "6". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "7" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "7". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of the small win game state, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

FIG. 284-43 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process shown in FIGS. 284 and 284-42. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display start command reception flag is set, that is, whether the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command has been received. Determination is made (step 130SGS601). When the variable display start command reception flag is set, the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "1" to "8" of the special figure hold memory in the start winning reception command buffer 130SG194A are transferred to the buffer. The number is shifted upward by one number (step 130SGS602). Note that the contents of buffer number "0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so they are erased. Furthermore, if the variable display start command reception flag is not set, the variable display start setting process ends. After executing step 130SGS602, the production control CPU 120 reads out the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 130SGS605), and selects the stop symbol of the decorative pattern according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area. is determined (step 130SGS606).

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects executes a process for displaying the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling on the image display device 5 (step 130SGS607), which is the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling, which is the number of times remaining until the variable display number reaches 685 times after the RAM is cleared or after the end of the previous big win game, a process for displaying the remaining number of times to be played in the time-saving state (remaining number of times to be played in the time-saving state) on the image display device 5 (step 130SGS608), a process for displaying a countdown of the remaining number of times until the time-saving control ends (also called a countdown effect or a time-saving end countdown) on the image display device 5 when the remaining number of times to be played in the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number, and a process for determining a notice effect during variable display to execute a notice effect during variable display that suggests that the variable display result will be a big win during the variable display (step 130SGS610).

Thereafter, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variable pattern, gaming state, and variable display result (step 130SGS611), and starts a process timer (step 130SGS612).

In addition, each process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). ing.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as described later, an example is shown in which the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed on the image display device 5 in the time-saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to any of the time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C2, and the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to a power outage or the like during the variable display, the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may not be resumed during the variable display even if the power is restored, and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may be resumed at the start of the next variable display (the timing when the value of the time-saving counter is updated). Also, even if the power supply is stopped when the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to any of the time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C2 but there is no reserved memory and the variable display is not being executed (in a customer waiting state), the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may not be resumed even if the power is restored, and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times may be resumed at the start of the next variable display or from the variable display after the value of the time-saving counter is updated.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (130SGS613). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the fluctuation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the fluctuation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (130SGS614). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (130SGS615). In addition, the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative pattern on the center left to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (S172) (130SGS616).

In the variable display performance process, the values of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are each reduced by 1. Then, control of the presentation device is executed according to the value of the process timer, variable display of the decorative pattern is realized as described above according to the value of the variable display control timer, and decorative pattern is controlled according to the value of the variable display time timer. What is necessary is to stop the variable display of and set the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (S173).

By executing the processing included in the performance control process processing by the performance control CPU 120 as described above, in the time saving state in the characteristic section 130SG, as shown in FIG. BATTLE performance, BATTLE RUSH performance, result performance A, and result performance B can be executed. Among these performances, rush performance A is a performance that is executed when time saving control is started, and is a performance that notifies the start of time saving state A1 and time saving state C1, and rush performance B is a performance that is executed when time saving control is started. This is a performance that is executed when the time saving state is started, and is a performance that notifies the start of the time saving state A2, the time saving state A3, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C2.

The FINAL BATTLE presentation is a presentation executed during the variable display of time-saving state A1 and time-saving state C1, and the subsequent variable display of the second special chart up to four times in the normal state, and is a presentation that notifies players that an ally character (a character displayed in the panel display presentation) displayed on the panel will battle an enemy character, and by winning, will acquire a BATTLE RUSH (the game will be controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state based on the variable display of the second special chart, and will be controlled to a time-saving state A2 or a time-saving state A3 after the big win game ends).

The BATTLE RUSH production is a production executed in the variable display of Time Saving State A2, Time Saving State A3, Time Saving State B, and Time Saving State C2, in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a battle, and a movable object falls during the variable display. (the ally character wins), BATTLE RUSH continues (by being controlled to the jackpot game state or small win game state based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving state A2 or time saving state A3 is established after the jackpot game ends) This is a performance that informs people that the event will be controlled by the government.

Result presentation A is a presentation that is executed when the variable display of the second special chart is completed up to four times after the time-saving control ends in time-saving state A1 and time-saving state C1, and is a presentation that notifies the end of time-saving state A1 or time-saving state C1 (FINAL BATTLE) by displaying on the image display device 5 the number of jackpots and the number of winning balls obtained from the first hit to the end of the time-saving state.

Result effect B is an effect that is executed when the time-saving control ends in time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2, and is an effect that notifies the end of time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C2 (BATTLE RUSH) by displaying the number of jackpots and the number of winning balls obtained from the first hit to the end of the time-saving state on the image display device 5. Exceptionally, result effect B may be executed during the 11th variable display of the second special chart in time-saving state A3.

Of these effects, the presence or absence and timing of execution of the entry effect A and entry effect B differ depending on the timing when the variable display result becomes a time-saving miss, the RAM is cleared, or the number of variable displays since the previous variable display reaches 685. For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45(A), in the normal state, when the RAM is cleared or the number of variable displays since the previous variable display reaches 685 (the start condition of the time-saving state B is met), entry effect B is executed during the pattern determination period of the ceiling time-saving variable display (the 685th variable display); when the variable display result becomes a time-saving miss A (the start condition of the time-saving state C1 is met), entry effect A is executed during the pattern determination period of the time-saving miss A winning variable display; and when the variable display result becomes a time-saving miss B (the start condition of the time-saving state C2 is met), entry effect B is executed during the pattern determination period of the time-saving miss B winning variable display.

In addition, in the time saving state A1, if the variable display result becomes a time saving result A (the start condition of the time saving state C1 is satisfied), the rush effect is not executed and the variable display result becomes a time saving result B. If (the start condition for the time saving state C2 is satisfied), the entry effect B is executed during the variable display in the time saving state A1.

In addition, in the time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C2, if the variable display result becomes time-saving miss A or time-saving miss B (the start conditions for time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2 are met), the entry performance will not be executed in any case.

In time-saving state C1, when the RAM is cleared or the number of variable displays from the previous variable display reaches 685 (the start condition for time-saving state B is met), the ceiling time-saving variable display (variable display in time-saving state C1 In addition, if rush performance B is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the 685th variable display), and the variable display result is B with a time saver (starting condition for time saver state C2 is met), a B win with a time saver is executed. Run-in effect B is executed during variable display of the display (variable display of time saving state C1). Incidentally, when the variable display result is A with or without time saving (the start condition of the time saving state C1 is satisfied), the rush effect is not executed.

Furthermore, with respect to result performance A and result performance B, whether or not to execute them and the execution timing thereof differ depending on the target time saving state. For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45 (D), when the target is time-saving state A1 or time-saving state C1, result effect A is changed to the fourth variable of the second special figure immediately after time-saving state A1 or time-saving state C1. If it is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the display and the time saving state A2 is targeted, the result performance B is executed during the symbol confirmation period of the final variable display (variable display of the 7th second special symbol). In addition, for time-saving state A3 and time-saving state B after jackpot B, neither result performance A nor result performance B is executed, and for time-saving state A3 after jackpot D, the second special figure in time-saving state A3 is executed. Result performance B is executed from the symbol confirmation period of the 7th variable display to the 11th variable display, and in the symbol confirmation period of the final variable display (685th variable display of the second special symbol), result production A is executed. Neither result performance B nor result performance B is executed.

As described above, the variable display in the feature section 130SG can display the remaining number of time savings and count down the end of time savings. The time saving remaining number display and time saving end countdown are generally displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 284-46. For example, regarding the time-saving end countdown, in the final 10 variable displays in the time-saving state, a number corresponding to the number of variable displays is displayed on the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) from the start timing of the variable display. be done. In addition, regarding the remaining number of times of time saving, display on the image display device 5 is started from the first variable display start timing when the time saving state is controlled. Further, the numerical value displayed as the remaining number of times of time saving (a value corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays) is updated at the timing when each variable display is started. The example shown in FIG. 284-46 is a display of the time saving end countdown and the remaining number of time saving times for time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2, but for time saving state A2, a variable display indicating that time saving control is executed is displayed. Since the number of times is 7, the time saving state end countdown and the display of the remaining time saving number are started from the start timing of the first variable display.

Here, the display of the remaining number of times the time-saving feature is available and the countdown to the end of the time-saving feature will vary depending on the start status of the relevant time-saving feature and how it is displayed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 284-45(B), in the time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied when the gaming state is the normal state, the normal time saving remaining amount is displayed on the image display device 5. Displays the number of times. In addition, regarding the time saving state C1 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, the remaining number of time saving times in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3 at the time when the start condition is satisfied is The display is maintained without changing from the display to the display of the number of time reductions corresponding to the time reduction state C1.

In addition, for time-saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied in time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3, the display of the remaining number of times of time-saving is maintained without being changed from the display corresponding to time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3. Then, when time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3 ends and control is entered into time-saving state C2, the display of the remaining number of times of time-saving is hidden without being changed to the display of the remaining number of times of time-saving corresponding to time-saving state C2.

Further, for the time saving state C1 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time reductions in the time saving state B at the time when the start condition is satisfied is changed to the display of the number of time reductions corresponding to the time saving state C1. Maintain display without any problems.

Furthermore, in the time saving state C2 where the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time saving times is maintained without changing from the display corresponding to the time saving state B. Then, when the time saving state B ends and the time saving state C2 is controlled, the display of the remaining time saving number is not changed to the display of the remaining time saving number corresponding to the time saving state C2, but is hidden.

In addition, for the time saving state B in which the start condition is satisfied in the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2, first, the shutter is pressed in the display area of the image display device 5 where the remaining number of time saving times according to the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is displayed. By displaying the image, a shutter effect is executed to temporarily make the image displayed in the display area invisible or difficult to see. Then, when the shutter image is hidden due to being controlled to the time saving state B, the display of the remaining number of time savings is switched to the display of the remaining number of time savings corresponding to the time saving state B.

In addition, for the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied, the display of the remaining number of times for time-saving is maintained without changing from the display of the remaining number of times for time-saving issuance corresponding to the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2 being executed (the first time-saving state shown in FIG. 284-45(B)) to the display of the remaining number of times for time-saving issuance corresponding to the time-saving state C1 in which the start condition is satisfied (the second time-saving state shown in FIG. 284-45(B)).

In addition, for the time-saving state C2 in which the start condition is satisfied in the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2, first, the display of the remaining number of times of time-saving corresponding to the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2 as the first time-saving state is maintained without changing it to the display of the remaining number of times of time-saving corresponding to the time-saving state C2 as the second time-saving state. Then, after the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2 as the first time-saving state ends, the display of the remaining number of times of time-saving corresponding to the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2 as the first time-saving state is hidden without changing it to the display of the remaining number of times of time-saving corresponding to the time-saving state C2 as the second time-saving state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-45(C), in the time-saving state A1 and the time-saving state C1, the countdown effect (time-saving end countdown) is not displayed on the image display device 5 regardless of whether the start conditions of either of the time-saving states are satisfied during the time-saving state A1 or the time-saving state C1.

In addition, in the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state C2, if the start conditions of any of the time-saving states are not satisfied during the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state C2, or if the start conditions of the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C1, and the time-saving state C2 are satisfied, the image display device 5 displays a countdown effect (time-saving end countdown) in the final 10 variable displays for the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state C2 that are being executed. Note that, if the start conditions of the time-saving state B are satisfied while the countdown effect (time-saving end countdown) is already being displayed on the image display device 5 in the final 10 variable displays for the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state C2, the display of the countdown effect (time-saving end countdown) is interrupted after the variable display in which the start conditions of the time-saving state B are satisfied.

In addition, in the time-saving state B, if the start conditions for any time-saving state are not satisfied during the time-saving state B, and when the start conditions for the time-saving state C1 and time-saving state C2 are satisfied, the time-saving state B is targeted. In the final 10 variable displays, a countdown effect (time saving end countdown) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-43, in the variable display start setting process in the feature section 130SG, by executing the variable display preview performance determination process (step 130SGS610), the variable display preview performance is started during the variable display. It is executable. In addition, in the variable display preview performance determination process, when the gaming state is in the normal state, only the variable display of the first special figure is targeted, and whether or not the variable display preview performance is executed and the performance pattern of the variable display preview performance are determined. If the game state is in any of the time-saving states, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the preview performance during the variable display and the performance pattern of the preview performance during the variable display only for the variable display of the second special figure. It is possible.

The execution determination ratio of the variable display notice performance and the determination ratio of each performance pattern in the normal state vary depending on the variable pattern and jackpot type, as shown in FIG. 284-47. Here, as shown in FIG. 284-47, in the normal state, the performance pattern of the preview performance during variable display can be determined from among the five performance patterns of performance pattern A to performance pattern E.

Regarding the execution decision rate of the variable display preview performance and the decision rate of each performance pattern, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot (expected jackpot) is set to be the lowest when it is decided not to execute the variable display preview performance. When it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance with performance pattern A, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot (expected jackpot) is set to be higher than when it is decided not to execute the variable display preview performance. When it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance with performance pattern B, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot (expected jackpot) is set to be higher than when it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance with performance pattern A. When it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance with performance pattern C, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot (expected jackpot) is set to be higher than when it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance with performance pattern B. When it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance with performance pattern D or performance pattern E, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot (expected jackpot) is set to be higher than when it is decided to execute the variable display preview performance with performance pattern C.

Here, if we pay attention to performance pattern D and performance pattern E, performance pattern D is a performance pattern that can be determined only when the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot A, and performance pattern E is a performance pattern that can be determined only when the variable display result is jackpot A. This is a performance pattern that can be determined only when there is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B.

In other words, when the preview effect during variable display is executed in effect pattern D or effect pattern E, the variable display result will always be a jackpot (the expected jackpot probability is 100%). And effect pattern D is an effect pattern that notifies that the jackpot type is jackpot A, and effect pattern E is an effect pattern that notifies that the jackpot type is jackpot B.

On the other hand, when the game state is in any of the time-saving states (and the variable display of the second special chart), as shown in FIG. 284-48, the variable display preview performance is determined not to be executed regardless of the variable display pattern or the variable display result, except that when the variable pattern is PA3-10, which is not a reach miss, the variable display preview performance is determined to be executed in performance pattern A 100% of the time.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 284-49 and 284-50 (A) to 284-50 (F), the effect pattern A is a effect pattern in which the image of the character A is displayed on the image display device 5 during variable display. The effect pattern B is a effect pattern in which the image of character B is displayed next to the image of character A on the image display device 5 during variable display, and the effect pattern C is a effect pattern in which the image of character B is displayed on the image display device 5 during variable display. This is a production pattern in which an image of character A, an image of character B, and an image of character C are displayed in order, and production pattern D is a production pattern in which an image of character A, an image of character B, and an image of character C are displayed on the image display device 5 during variable display. , character D is displayed in order, and in the production pattern E, the image of character A, the image of character B, the image of character C, the image of character D, and the image of character E are displayed in order on the image display device 5 during variable display. This is the performance pattern that is displayed. In particular, as shown in FIG. 284-50(F), the effect pattern E is also an effect pattern in which a rainbow-colored (rainbow style) background image is displayed as the background image of the character E.

As described above, in this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-51(A), the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time-saving state A1 is a miss is 50,000 ms, the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time-saving state A2 is a miss is 18,696.08825 ms, the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time-saving state A3 is a miss is 18,656.82959 ms, and the average variable display time when the variable display result in the entire time-saving state A is a miss is 22,904.91502 ms.

The average variable display time when the variable display result in time-saving state B is a miss is 2000 ms. The average variable display time when the variable display result in time-saving state C1 is a miss is 50000 ms, the average variable display time when the variable display result in time-saving state C2 is a miss is 2040.875912 ms, and the average variable display time when the variable display result in the entire time-saving state C is a miss is 26020.43795 ms.

And, as shown in FIG. 284-52, in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, the time-saving state B, the time-saving state C1, and the time-saving state C2, the preview performance during variable display can be executed only when the fluctuation pattern is PA3-10. In other words, among these time-saving states, the only time-saving state in which the preview performance during variable display can be executed is the time-saving state C2 in which the variable display can be executed in the fluctuation pattern PA3-10, and the only performance pattern of the preview performance during variable display that can be executed in the fluctuation pattern PA3-10 is the performance pattern A.

Next, the flow of the presentation in the variable display in this feature section 130SG will be explained. First, as shown in FIG. 284-56, when the game state is normal, the progress of the variable display of the first special chart starts the reach presentation of the super reach presentation, and a predetermined period of time has passed, and as part of the reach presentation, an operation prompting image that prompts the player to operate the second push button 3631B is displayed on the image display device 5 (X1 to X5). At this time, if the variable display result is a jackpot, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, a movable body presentation in which the movable body 32 falls is executed as part of the reach presentation, and then the decorative symbols are displayed stopped in a combination that indicates a jackpot (X6 to X10). After that, the image display device 5 displays a notification image informing the player that the variable display result is a jackpot, and then displays a right hit notification informing the player that the jackpot game state is a state in which the game balls are shot toward the right game area to enter the jackpot hole, and a round performance during the round game is displayed (X11 to X13).

If the jackpot game is a jackpot game of jackpot A, as shown in FIGS. 284-57 and 284-58, when the jackpot game ends, a rush effect indicating that the jackpot ending effect is controlled to the time-saving state A1. A is executed. During the execution of the rush effect A, if there is a hold memory of the first special figure, variable display based on the hold memory of the first special figure will be executed in an extremely short special figure fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). be done. In addition to being controlled to the time-saving state A1, as the entry performance A, the time-saving state A1 launches the game ball toward the right gaming area for the player, so that the game ball enters the second starting prize opening. A right hit notification is executed to notify that the player has won a prize and is in a state where the variable display of the second special figure is executed (A1 to A4).

When the player hits the game ball toward the right game area according to the entry effect A, the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, and variable display of the second special symbol is started. At this time, the image display device 5 displays a panel image corresponding to the variable display of the second special figure as a panel effect. Then, when the game ball enters the second starting winning hole by the player continuing to hit the game ball toward the right gaming area, the image display device 5 displays a panel corresponding to each pending memory of the second special symbol as a panel effect. Additional images will be displayed. Incidentally, a maximum of five of these panel images are displayed (A5 to A7) based on the variable display of the second special figure being executed and the maximum number of reserved storage numbers ("4") of the second special figure.

When one variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A1 ends, the game state is controlled from the time-saving state A1 to the normal state, and the variable display corresponding to the first reserved memory of the second special symbol begins. In this variable display, when the decorative symbols stop in a reach combination, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B (A8 to A10).

At this time, if the variable display result is a small hit, the player operates the chance button 631B, or when the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, after the movable body effect in which the movable body 32 falls is executed. Decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in combinations that indicate a small hit. After that, an image ("Aim for V!" is displayed on the image display device 5) instructing the player to cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball by launching the game ball toward the right game area. images) are displayed (B1 to B3).

When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024 by the player hitting the game ball toward the right game area during a small winning game according to the image, the second count switch is activated in the image display device 5. After an image notifying that the 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small winning game, that is, a V winning has occurred, is displayed, an image indicating that the jackpot game will be controlled (the "FEVER" image) is displayed. will be displayed (B4 to B5).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a miss, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss. After that, in the variable display corresponding to the second to fourth reserved memories of the second special chart, the remaining number of variable displays of the second special chart is notified on the image display device 5, and then an image similar to the first reserved memory of the second special chart is displayed (B6 to B8).

If all the variable displays corresponding to the hold memory of the second special figure are off, the second special figure is held on the image display device 5 during the symbol confirmation period of the last variable display of the second special figure. An image (an image displaying "FINAL BATTLE END...") indicating that all variable displays according to the memory have been completed is displayed. Thereafter, the variable display of the first special figure is executed 10 times while the dedicated stage image is being displayed on the image display device 5. Furthermore, while the dedicated stage image is displayed, an image instructing the player to launch the game ball toward the left gaming area is also displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). (B9-B12).

In either of the time-saving states, the player shoots the game ball into the right game area, causing the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, and the variable display of the second special chart is mainly executed. After the big win game via the small win of the second special chart ends, the game is controlled to time-saving state A2 or time-saving state A3.

When the time saving state A2 is controlled after the end of the jackpot game, that is, when the variable display result is a small win and the small win type is small win A, first, as shown in Figure 284-59, the second special figure is As a variable display, decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in combinations indicating small wins. After that, an image ("Aim for V!" is displayed on the image display device 5) instructing the player to cause the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball by launching the game ball toward the right game area. image) is displayed. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 130SG024 by the player hitting the game ball toward the right game area during a small winning game according to the image, the second count switch is activated in the image display device 5. After an image notifying that the 130SG024 has detected a game ball during a small winning game, that is, a V winning has occurred, is displayed, an image indicating that the jackpot game will be controlled (the "FEVER" image) is displayed. are displayed (C1 to C4).

Next, when the jackpot game via the small win ends, an image corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game is displayed on the image display device 5 as an ending effect. Then, after the rush effect B in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes depending on the number of times the time saving state has been controlled, the first variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2 is performed. Begins. In the time-saving state A2, variable display of decorative symbols is executed while a background image of a night city (second background image) is being displayed on the image display device 5 (C5 to C8).

If seven variable displays (seven variable displays of the second special chart) end without the variable display result being a big win, a small win, or a miss with time-saving in the time-saving state A2, a result presentation starts during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display. The result presentation displays a value according to the number of times the game has been controlled to a big win game state since the first win or any time-saving state, or the total number of winning balls obtained. If there is a reserved memory of the second special chart at the start of the result presentation, a maximum of four variable displays of the second special chart are executed in an extremely short special chart change time (0.5 seconds) according to the reserved memory (remaining reserved memory) of the remaining second special charts (C9 to C11).

If none of the variable displays according to the remaining reserved memory result in a big win, small win, or a miss with time reduction, the image display device 5 starts displaying a stage background image, and also displays an image for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area. After this, the stage background image is displayed on the image display device 5 until 10 variable displays are completed (C12 to C14).

In addition, when the time-saving state A3 is entered after the end of the jackpot game via a small win, that is, when the time-saving state A3 is entered after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot D, first, as in the case of being controlled to the time-saving state A2, the display of a combination of decorative symbols indicating a small win, the display of an image displaying "Aim for the V!" on the image display device 5, the display of an image notifying the occurrence of a V winning during the small win game, the display of an image indicating that the game is being controlled to a jackpot game (the "FEVER" image), the display of an image according to the number of winning balls won in the jackpot game, the entry performance B in which a part of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is different depending on the number of times the game has already been controlled to the time-saving state, and the display of seven variable decorative symbols while the second background image is displayed are executed (C1 to C9 in Fig. 284-59)

Here, as shown in Figure 284-60, the variable display result is neither a jackpot, a small hit, nor a time-saving loss, and the seventh decorative pattern is variablely displayed (7th variable display of the second special symbol). When the period ends, the result effect is started during the symbol determination period of the seventh variable display. As the result performance, a value is displayed according to the number of times the game is controlled to the jackpot game state after being controlled to the first hit or any time-saving state, and the total number of prize balls won. Further, during the execution period of the result presentation, variable display of decorative symbols (variable display of the second special symbol) is performed three times in an extremely short special symbol variation time (0.5 seconds). If the variable display result does not become a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss with a time saver in the variable display of the decorative symbol three times (the 8th to 10th variable display), the variable display of the decorative symbol (11 variable display) is executed (D1 to D3).

If the variable display result in the 11th variable display is not a big win, a small win, or a miss with time saving, the movable body 32 falls and an illuminating effect image corresponding to the fall of the movable body 32 is displayed on the image display device 5. After the movable body 32 falls, when the movable body 32 returns to the standby position before it fell (the upper position of the image display device 5), the image displayed on the image display device 5 is dimmed (displayed in black). After the dimming ends, an image indicating that the time saving state has not yet ended is displayed on the image display device 5 (D4 to D6).

Furthermore, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the second push button 3631B ends, a V stock effect is executed on the image display device 5 to notify that the number of time-saving controls in the time-saving state is 685, in other words, that the variable display result during the time-saving state will essentially be a big win or a small win. Thereafter, when the V stock effect ends with the end of the 11th variable display, the 12th and subsequent variable displays are started while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5 (D7 to D9). In particular, as shown in FIG. 284-60 (D2) to FIG. 284-60 (D8), in the result presentation during time-saving state A3 and the V stock presentation, unlike the result presentation corresponding to time-saving state A2, the right-hit notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time-saving control will continue even after the result presentation ends. Note that the right-hit notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is resumed from the start timing of the 12th variable display.

In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display special figure is the first special figure, if the variable display result is ``Loss with Time Saving'' and the ``Loss with Time Saving'' type is ``Loss with Time Saving A'', the decorative pattern will not come off. After the combination shown is stopped and displayed, a rush effect A similar to A2 to A4 in FIG. 284-57 is executed during the symbol stop period.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 284-61, when the gaming state is the normal state and the variable display result is the first special figure, the variable display result is ``Lost with time saving'' and ``Loss with time saving'' type is ``Loss with time saving A''. If so, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss, and then the entry effect B is executed. As the rush effect B at this time, the image displayed on the image display device 5 is displayed in black (displayed in black). After the blackout display is completed, the image of a predetermined character is displayed on the image display device 5, and then a whiteout (white display) is performed, and the blackout display is performed again (E1 to E6).

After the blackout display ends, the image of the specified character is displayed again on the image display device 5, followed by an operation prompting image that encourages the player to operate the chance button 631B. At this time, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the second push button 3631B ends, a V stock presentation is executed on the image display device 5 to notify that the game state has been controlled to the time-saving state B, that is, the number of time-saving controls has reached 685, and therefore the variable display result during the time-saving state will effectively be a big win or a small win (E7 to E9).

Thereafter, the game player will be notified that the image display device 5 has been controlled to the time saving state B and that the movable body 32 falls during the variable display in the time saving state B and that the variable display result will be a jackpot. After an image instructing the player is displayed, an image instructing the player to put the game ball into the second starting prize opening by launching the game ball toward the right gaming area on the image display device 5. (An image that says "Aim here!") is displayed. Then, when the pattern confirmation period ends, the decorative pattern can be changed in accordance with the variable display of the second special pattern while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5 ("BATTLE RUSH" which is time saving state B). Display starts (E10 to E12).

Next, a case will be described in which the value of the ceiling variable display counter becomes 0 when the gaming state is the normal state, that is, the variable display is executed 685 times since the RAM is cleared or the previous jackpot game ends. As shown in FIG. 284-62, in the normal state, a ceiling reaching remaining number of times display 130SG202 is displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Here, when the value of the variable ceiling display counter is one of 101 to 685, the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached display 130SG202 is displayed in the first mode. Furthermore, when the value of the variable ceiling display counter is between 11 and 100, the remaining number of times the ceiling has been reached display 130SG202 is displayed in the second mode, which is larger in vertical and horizontal size than the first mode (F1, F2 ).

In addition, if the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120) does not receive the ceiling time reduction number designation command properly when the power is restored, or if the performance control board 12 receives the ceiling time reduction number designation command properly when the power is restored but then a momentary power outage or the like occurs and the performance control CPU 120 is unable to recognize the current value of the ceiling variable display counter, the display of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling may be restricted. In this case, only the number of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling may be hidden, or the entire interface (image display device 5 in the case of this feature unit 130SG) on which the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is displayed may be hidden. In addition, if the display of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is restricted in this way, the display of the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling may be resumed when the ceiling time reduction number designation command is received properly.

When the value of the ceiling variable display counter becomes 10 as a result of the variable display being executed, a display indicating that the remaining 10 variable displays will be executed and the game will be controlled to time-saving state B (display of "10 displays until BATTLE RUSH") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) from the start of the variable display (RAM clear or the 674th variable display since the end of the previous big win game). After that, every time a new variable display is started, a display indicating the remaining number of variable displays until the game will be controlled to time-saving state B (display of "9 displays until BATTLE RUSH", ... "0 displays until BATTLE RUSH") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 for a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second) from the start of the variable display (F3 to F6).

When the variable display (RAM clear or the 685th variable display since the end of the previous big win game) is started and the value of the ceiling variable display counter finally becomes 0, if the variable display result of the variable display is not a big win, a small win, or a miss with time reduction, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a miss (F7 to F9), and then the entry performance B shown in FIG. 284-61 is executed, and then the variable display of the decorative symbols according to the variable display of the second special symbol is started while the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 (E2 to E12 shown in FIG. 284-61).

Next, a case will be described in which the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure is a time saving win or loss when the gaming state is the normal state. First, as shown in FIG. 284-63 and FIG. 284-73, when the time-save and miss type is time-save and miss A, the decorative pattern once shows a miss as a reach effect result of super reach α on the image display device 5. When the combination is displayed (oscillating display), a time-saving acquisition chance effect is executed that suggests that the variable display result is ``loss with time saving'' and the type of ``loss with time saving'' is ``loss A'' with time saving. G1-G5).

As the time-saving winning chance performance, an operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5 to encourage the operation of the second push button 3631B. At this time, if the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the type of the time-saving miss is time-saving miss A, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period of the chance button 631B ends, the movable body 32 falls and a notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 indicating that the time-saving miss A has been won (G5 to G8). Then, when the variable display ends and the time-saving C1 flag is set, the entry performance A ((A2) to (A4)) shown in FIG. 284-57 starts from the pattern determination period of the variable display. Note that during the execution of the entry performance, if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol is executed in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds). Then, after the entry performance A ends, the same variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable display of the second special pattern once as in the time-saving state A1 is executed, followed by the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the variable display of the second special pattern four times after control is returned to the normal state (see Figure 284-57).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, when the player operates the chance button 631B or the operation acceptance period for the chance button 631B ends, an effect image in which the decorative pattern appears to crack is displayed on the image display device 5, and then the decorative pattern is displayed as if it had stopped (G9, G10).

Also, as shown in Fig. 284-64 and Fig. 284-73, when the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped non-reach miss combination on the image display device 5. Then, during the pattern determination period of the variable display, the entry performance B and V stock performance shown in Fig. 284-61 are executed. After that, an image is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player that the time-saving state C2 has been entered and that the movable body 32 will fall during the variable display in the time-saving state C2, thereby informing the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot. Then, an image is displayed on the image display device 5 instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole (an image displaying "Aim here!"). Then, when the pattern determination period ends, the image display device 5 starts to display the decorative pattern in response to the variable display of the second special pattern while the second background image is displayed (time-saving state C2, "BATTLE RUSH") (H2 to H12).

Next, a case will be described in which when the game state is the time saving state A1, the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure is ``not with the time saving'' and ``not with the time saving''. As shown in FIG. 284-74, if there is a hold memory of the first special figure during the execution of rush performance A after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot A, the first special figure will be played up to four times based on the hold memory of these first special figures. The variable display of the special figure is executed, but in any of these up to four variable displays of the first special figure, the variable display result is ``with time saving'' and ``missing'', and the type of ``with time saving'' is ``missing with time saving''. (Loss A wins), the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β are set with the numerical values corresponding to the time saving winning number A, but the time saving C1 flag is not set. Become. In this state, when the variable display of the second special figure in the time-saving state A1 is executed once, the value of the second special figure time-saving number counter α that was set at the end of the jackpot game and the winning of the time-saving prize A, The gaming state is controlled from the time saving state A1 to the normal state when the set value of the second special figure time saving number counter β both becomes 0. Thereafter, as in the normal state after the time saving state A1, variable display of the second special figure is executed up to four times (see FIG. 284-58).

Also, as shown in Fig. 284-65 and Fig. 284-74, when the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B in any of the maximum four variable displays of the first special chart (time-saving miss B is won), the total time-saving count counter β and the second special chart time-saving count counter β are set to values corresponding to the time-saving miss B, but the time-saving C2 flag is not set (I1, I2). In this state, when the variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state A1 is started, the entry effect B and V stock effect shown in Fig. 284-61 are executed in the variable display. After that, the image display device 5 displays an image instructing the player that the time-saving state C2 has been entered, and that the drop of the movable body 32 during the variable display in the time-saving state C2 will notify the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot. The image display device 5 then displays an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole (an image displaying "Aim here!"). Then, when the pattern determination period ends, the image display device 5 starts to display the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the variable display of the second special pattern with the second background image displayed (the time-saving state C2, "BATTLE RUSH") (I3 to I12).

Next, a case will be described where the variable display result of the first special chart is a time-saving miss when the game state is the time-saving state A2. As shown in FIG. 284-75, for example, when the variable display of the second special chart is already being executed in the time-saving state A2, if a game ball mistakenly enters the first start winning hole and the variable display result of the variable display based on the start winning becomes a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type becomes time-saving miss A (time-saving miss A is won), the total time-saving count counter β and the second special chart time-saving count counter β are set to values corresponding to time-saving miss B, but the time-saving C1 flag is not set. In this state, when the variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state A2 is executed once, the value of the second special chart time-saving count counter α set at the end of the big win game and the value of the second special chart time-saving count counter β set by winning the time-saving miss A are both decremented by 1, and the value of the second special chart time-saving count counter β becomes 0. Therefore, the time-saving C1 flag is not set and the time-saving state A2 (the state in which the time-saving A2 flag is set) continues. In other words, if the time-saving miss A is won in the variable display of the first special chart in the time-saving state A2, the game proceeds while being controlled in the time-saving state A2, and is not controlled to the time-saving state C1 even after the time-saving state A2 ends.

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 284-66 and Fig. 284-75, when the variable display of the second special chart is already being executed in the time-saving state A2, if a game ball mistakenly enters the first start winning hole and the variable display result based on the start winning is a time-saving miss and the type of miss with time-saving is time-saving miss B (time-saving miss B is won), the total time-saving count counter β and the second special chart time-saving count counter β are set to values corresponding to the time-saving miss B, but the time-saving C1 flag is not set. In this state, if neither a big win, a small win, nor a time-saving miss is won and seven variable displays are executed without being controlled by the time-saving state B, the time-saving A2 flag is cleared at the timing when the seventh variable display stops, and the time-saving C2 flag is newly set based on the fact that the value of the second special chart time-saving count counter β has not yet become 0.

In addition, during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display in the time-saving state A2 and at the beginning of the eighth variable display, a result effect B is executed. As the result effect B, from the timing when the eighth variable display starts, a shooting star image (shooting star effect) is displayed as an effect to notify that the time-saving miss B has been won during the time-saving state A2 (J1 to J3). After the result effect B ends, a V stock effect is executed in the image display device 5, and the eighth variable display (the first variable display in the time-saving state C2) ends. Thereafter, as in the time-saving state A2, as the time-saving state C2, a variable display of a decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart is executed in a state in which the second background image is displayed in the image display device 5 (J4 to J8). In particular, as shown in FIG. 284-66 (J2) to FIG. 284-66 (J3), when the variable display result during the time-saving state A2 is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B, the right-hit notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden during the result presentation to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time-saving state C2 will be entered after the time-saving state A2 ends. Note that, unlike the result presentation corresponding to the time-saving state A2, the right-hit notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is temporarily hidden in order to prevent the player from recognizing in advance that the time-saving control will continue even after the result presentation ends, in the result presentation during the time-saving state A2 to the V stock presentation. Note that the right-hit notification image in the upper right part of the image display device 5 is resumed from the start timing of the first variable display of the time-saving state C2.

Next, a case will be described in which the game state is the time-saving state A1 and the variable display result in the variable display of the second special chart is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B (when time-saving miss B is won). As shown in Fig. 284-67 and Fig. 284-76, if there is a reserved memory of the first special chart during the execution of the entry performance A after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot A, the variable display of the first special chart is executed up to four times based on the reserved memory of the first special chart. Then, after the entry performance A and the variable display of the first special chart end, the variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state A1 is executed. If the variable display result in the variable display of the second special chart is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B (when time-saving miss B is won), a panel performance is executed in the variable display in the same way as when the variable display result is a miss (K1, K2). Then, after the panel performance is executed, immediately after the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a miss as a display result of the variable display, the entry performance B and V stock performance shown in FIG. 284-64 are executed (K3 to K7, H3 to H10). After the entry performance B and V stock performance end and the variable display in the time-saving state A1 ends, the time-saving A1 flag is cleared and the time-saving C2 flag is set, thereby controlling to the time-saving state C2. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols according to the variable display of the second special chart is executed while the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, a case will be described in which the variable display result based on the reserved memory of the second special chart that occurred in the time-saving state A1 (maximum four variable displays of the second special chart immediately after the time-saving state A1 (normal state)) is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B (when time-saving miss B is won). First, as shown in FIG. 284-76, if there is a reserved memory of the first special chart during the execution of the entry performance A after the end of the jackpot game of the jackpot A, the variable display of the first special chart is executed up to four times based on the reserved memory of the first special chart. Then, after the entry performance A and the variable display of the first special chart end, the variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state A1 is executed. If the variable display result in the variable display of the second special chart is a miss, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a miss on the image display device 5, and the variable display ends. At this time, the time-saving A1 flag is cleared, and the game state is controlled to the normal state. Then, if the time-saving miss B is won in any of the maximum four variable displays of the second special chart in the game state, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a miss, just like the variable display of the second special chart immediately after the normal time-saving state A1, and immediately after that, the entry performance B and V stock performance shown in FIG. 284-64 are executed (H3 to H10). After the entry performance B and V stock performance end and the variable display in the normal state ends, the time-saving state C2 is controlled by setting a new time-saving C2 flag. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols according to the variable display of the second special chart is executed while the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Next, we will explain the case where the game state is the time-saving state A2, the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B (when time-saving miss B is won). As shown in Figures 284-68 and 284-77, when a time-saving miss B is won in any of the variable displays during the time-saving state A2, the total time-saving count counter β and the second special time-saving count counter β are set to values corresponding to the time-saving miss B, but the time-saving C2 flag is not set.

In this state, each time the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A2 is executed, the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter α, which was set when the time-saving state A2 was controlled, and the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter β, which was set when the time-saving miss B was won, are both decremented by 1. Therefore, the time-saving C2 flag is not set, and the time-saving state A2 (the state in which the time-saving A2 flag is set) continues. In other words, if the time-saving miss B is won in the variable display of the time-saving state A2, the game proceeds while still being controlled in the time-saving state A2.

The variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A2 is executed up to seven times without winning any of the jackpot, small hit, or time-saving win, and is not controlled by the time-saving state B, that is, the second special symbol When the time saving A2 flag is cleared due to the value of the figure time saving number counter α becoming 0, the time saving C2 flag is set based on the fact that the value of the second special figure time saving number counter β is still 1 or more (time saving (controlled to state C2).

Then, in the symbol confirmation period of the seventh variable display in the time saving state A2 and at the beginning of the first variable display in the time saving state C2, the result effect B is executed. As the result performance B, from the timing when the first variable display in the time saving state C2 is started, a shooting star image (shooting star performance) is displayed as a performance to notify that the winner B with time saving has been won during the time saving state B. is displayed (L1 to L3). After the result performance B ends, the V stock performance is executed on the image display device 5, and the first variable display in the time saving state C2 ends. Thereafter, as a time-saving state C2, variable display of decorative patterns corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a state where the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5 as in the time-saving state B (L4 ~L8).

Next, we will explain the case where the variable display based on the reserved memory of the second special chart that occurred during the seventh variable display in the time-saving state A2 (maximum four variable displays of the second special chart immediately after the time-saving state A2 (normal state)) results in a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B (when time-saving miss B is won).

First, as shown in Figures 284-69 and 284-77, the variable display of the second special symbol in time-saving state A2 does not result in a jackpot, small hit, or time-saving loss, and also in time-saving state B. It is executed up to 7 times without being controlled, that is, when the value of the second special figure time saving number counter α becomes 0, the time saving A2 flag is cleared (the gaming state is controlled to the normal state). Then, the result performance B is executed from the start timing of the symbol determination period of the variable display. During execution of the result effect B, if there is a pending memory of the second special symbol, variable display based on the pending memory of the second special symbol will be executed in an extremely short special symbol fluctuation time (0.5 seconds). (M1, M2).

Here, if a time-saving miss B is won in any of the variable displays of the second special chart during the execution of the result performance B, a shooting star image (shooting star performance) is displayed from the timing when the variable display starts as a performance to notify that a time-saving miss B has been won. After the result performance B ends, a V stock performance is executed on the image display device 5, and the variable display in the normal state ends. After that, as in the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state C2 due to the time-saving C2 flag being set, and the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart is executed (M3 to M8).

Next, when the game state is time saving state A2, if the variable display result in the variable display of the second special symbol is ``lost with time saving'' and the type of ``lost with time saving'' is ``win with time saving'' (B is the winner with time saving). This section explains the following cases. As shown in FIGS. 284-70 and 284-78, if you win B with time saving in any of the variable displays in time saving state A2, time saving will be applied to the total time saving number counter β and the second special symbol time saving number counter β. Although the numerical value corresponding to the hit/miss B is set, the time saving C2 flag is not set.

In this state, each time the variable display of the second special symbol in the time-saving state A2 is executed, the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter α, which was set when the time-saving state A2 was controlled, and the value of the second special symbol time-saving count counter β, which was set when the time-saving miss B was won, are both decremented by 1. Therefore, the time-saving C2 flag is not set, and the time-saving state A2 (the state in which the time-saving A2 flag is set) continues. In other words, if the time-saving miss B is won in the variable display of the time-saving state A2, the game proceeds while still being controlled in the time-saving state A2.

When the variable display of the second special chart in time-saving state A2 is executed up to seven times without winning either a big win, a small win, or a miss with time-saving and without being controlled to time-saving state B, in other words, when the time-saving A2 flag is cleared because the value of the second special chart time-saving count counter α becomes 0, the time-saving C2 flag is set (controlled to time-saving state C2) based on the value of the second special chart time-saving count counter β still being 1 or more.

Then, during the pattern determination period of the seventh variable display in the time-saving state A2, no performance is performed, and a new variable display in the time-saving state C2 is started. In other words, in the image display device 5, the second background image is displayed in the same state as in the time-saving state A2, and the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart is executed (N1, N2).

Next, immediately after the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state C1, the RAM is cleared in the variable display of the first special figure before the variable display of the second special figure, or the number of variable displays from the previous jackpot game is 685 times. A case will be described in which the time reduction state B is controlled as a result of reaching the time limit. First, as shown in FIGS. 284-71 and 284-78, similar to the case where the time-saving winning loss A is won, the image display device 5 displays a combination in which the decorative symbol once shows a loss as a result of the reach effect of super reach α. After this is displayed (swinging display), time-saving acquisition and chance-to-gain effects are executed. Then, as a result of the time-saving acquisition chance performance, the falling of the movable body 32 and the display of a notification image showing the winning of the time-saving win A on the image display device 5 (O1 to O8).

When the variable display ends and the time-saving C1 flag is set, the time-saving state C1 is set. Then, during the pattern determination period, the entry performance A ((A2) to (A4)) shown in FIG. 284-57 is started. Here, during the execution of the entry performance, if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol is executed in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds). However, when the start condition of the time-saving state B is established due to RAM clearing or the number of variable displays since the previous big win game reaching 685 in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol, the time-saving C1 flag is cleared and the time-saving B flag is set at the timing when the variable display for which the start condition of the time-saving state B is established ends. In other words, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B instead of the time-saving state C1 (O9, O10).

Thereafter, the entry performance B and the V stock performance are executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display in which the start condition of the time saving state B is satisfied. Then, when the pattern confirmation period ends, the decorative pattern can be changed according to the variable display of the second special pattern while the second background image is being displayed on the image display device 5 ("BATTLE RUSH" which is the time saving state C2). Display starts (H3 to H11 in Figure 284-64).

Next, we will explain the case where the game state is controlled to time-saving state C2 immediately after being controlled to time-saving state B due to RAM clearing in the variable display of the first special chart or the number of variable displays since the previous jackpot game reaching 685 times before the variable display of the second special chart. First, as shown in Figures 284-72 and 284-79, when the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B, the decorative patterns are displayed in a non-reach miss combination on the image display device 5, and the game state is controlled from the normal state to time-saving state C2. Then, during the pattern determination period of the variable display, the entry performance B and V stock performance shown in Figure 284-61 are executed. After that, the image display device 5 displays an image instructing the player that the game has been controlled to the time-saving state C2, and that the movable body 32 will fall during the variable display in the time-saving state C2, thereby informing the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot. Then, the image display device 5 displays an image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole (an image displaying "Aim here!") (P1-P10).

Here, during the execution of the entry performance, if there is a reserved memory of the first special symbol, the variable display based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol is executed in an extremely short special symbol change time (0.5 seconds), but if the start condition of the time-saving state B is established in any of the variable displays based on the reserved memory of the first special symbol due to RAM clearing or the number of variable displays since the previous big win game reaching 685 times, the time-saving C2 flag is cleared and the time-saving B flag is set at the timing when the variable display for which the start condition of the time-saving state B is established ends. In other words, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B instead of the time-saving state C2. Then, when the pattern determination period ends, the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the variable display of the second special symbol begins (in a state in which the second background image is displayed on the image display device 5) (P11).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. In this case, the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds or 81.4 seconds, whereas the variable display result is the variable display of the second special symbol immediately after the end of the time saving state, that is, when the gaming state is in the normal state. The symbol confirmation period in the case of a short-time hit or miss is 0.5 seconds. In addition, as shown in Figure 284-57, Figure 284-63, and Figure 284-64, when the variable display result of the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state is a time-saving hit or miss. , the right hit notification image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the period including the symbol confirmation period, but immediately after the time saving state ends, that is, in the variable display of the second special symbol when the gaming state is the normal state. If the variable display result is a time-save hit or miss, the entry performance including the display of the right-handed hit notification image is not executed because the symbol confirmation period is extremely short, 0.5 seconds. For this reason, by setting a long symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds or 81.4 seconds in the case where the variable display result of the first special symbol is a time-saving error when the gaming state is the normal state, the game Therefore, it is possible to suitably notify the player of the switching of the gaming state. Furthermore, when the gaming state is the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, and the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a time saving result, the symbol confirmation period is set as short as 0.5 seconds. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest due to excessive switching of gaming states.

In this characteristic section 130SG, when the variable display result of the variable display of the first special chart when the game state is in the normal state is a time-saving miss, a form in which a right-hit notification image can be displayed on the image display device 5 during the period including the pattern determination period has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the game state is controlled to the normal state from any time-saving state, the image display device 5 may display a left-hit notification image that notifies the player to shoot the game ball toward the left game area. In addition, immediately after the game state is controlled from any time-saving state to the normal state, the variable display result may be a big hit, a small hit, or a time-saving miss depending on the variable display based on the reserved memory stored at that time (the player may continue to shoot the game ball toward the right game area), so it is desirable to display the left-hit notification image on the image display device 5 after all the variable displays based on the reserved memory generated in the time-saving state have ended.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-35, when the game state is immediately after the time-saving state ends (normal state) and the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a time-saving miss A or a time-saving miss B, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the pattern determination period when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a miss when the game state is immediately after the time-saving state ends (normal state). Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display of the second special symbol when the game state is immediately after the time-saving state ends (normal state) is a time-saving miss A or a time-saving miss B, the time-saving state can be suitably returned to without excessively extending the period from when the variable display result is displayed to when the variable display of the time-saving state C1 or the time-saving state C2 begins.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-6, FIG. 284-26, and FIG. 284-27, the special symbol fluctuation time when the variable display result of the first special symbol in the normal state is a time-saving hit or miss. is partly the same as the special symbol variation time when the variable display result of the first special symbol in the normal state is a failure, and when the variable display result of the second special symbol in the time saving state A is a success in the time saving condition. Although the special figure variation time has been exemplified in a form that is partially common to the special figure variation time when the variable display result of the second special figure in time saving state A is off, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, the special figure variation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is a time-saving error is the special figure variation time when the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is an error. On the other hand, the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the second special figure in time-saving state A is a time-saving error is the special figure fluctuation time when the variable display result of the second special figure in time-saving state A is a failure. It may be partially common to the variable time. By doing this, if the variable display result is a time-saving result in the normal state (when controlled to time-saving state C), the variable display is executed using a variation pattern that has a dedicated special figure variation time. This can increase the special feeling, and when the variable display result is again changed to the time saving state in a situation where the time saving state C is already controlled, the advantage for the player does not change much, so it is different from other fluctuation patterns. By executing a variable display using a variation pattern having a common special figure variation time, the storage capacity of the ROM 101 in the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, making it possible to reduce the storage capacity of the ROM 101 in the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with a time saving mode. You can increase your sexuality.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-21(C), when the game state is time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C, in the variable display of the first special chart, if the variable display result is a time-saving miss, the non-reach variable pattern PA2-5 is selected, that is, the reach performance is not executed during the variable display. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the variable display result is a time-saving miss.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, in the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C is a time saving result or a loss. , the non-reach variation pattern PA2-5 is selected, that is, the reach effect is not executed during variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , when the game state is one of Time Saving State A, Time Saving State B, and Time Saving State C and the variable display result of the first special figure is a time saving result, the rate is lower than in the normal state. By determining the reach variation pattern in the variable display, it may be possible to execute the reach effect, or even if the reach variation pattern is determined at the same rate as in the normal state, effects other than the reach effect may be executed during the variable display. You may. In other words, to limit the execution of the reach effect, it is necessary to not select a reach variation pattern, to be able to select a reach variation pattern at a lower rate than the normal state, and to be able to display a variable display when a reach variation pattern is selected. This includes performing a performance different from the reach performance.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, regarding the case where the variable display result in the variable display of the first special figure when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C is a time saving result, Although the embodiment of restricting the execution of the reach effect has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the gaming state is any one of the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the time saving state C. Restricts the execution of the reach effect when the variable display result of the second special symbol when the gaming state is one of Time Saving State A, Time Saving State B, and Time Saving State C is a time saving result. You may.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-22, when the variable display result of the second special figure is other than the jackpot when the gaming state is the time saving state A1, the special figure fluctuation PA3-5 where the time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and the variable display result is a miss, PC3-3 where the special figure variation time is 50 seconds (50000ms) and the variable display result is a small hit, special figure variation time is 55 seconds (55000 ms), and the variable display result is time-saving and the result is off.The PC3-3 is provided, and when the gaming state is time-saving state A1, the variable display result is off in the variable display of the second special figure. Although the example shows a form in which the special symbol fluctuation time is the same for cases where the variable display result is a small hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game state is the time saving state A1. A common special figure variation time (for example, 50 seconds) may be used in a case where the variable display result is a failure in the variable display of the second special figure in a certain case and a case where the variable display result is a failure with a time reduction. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the variable display result of the second special figure is a time saving result in the time saving state A1.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-36, in the time saving state A, the symbol confirmation time of the variable display when the variable display result is a loss with time saving A or a loss with time saving B is the same as the symbol confirmation time when the variable display result is a loss. Since it is set to be the same as the symbol confirmation time of the variable display, it prevents the situation where the player focuses on the variable display result due to the difference in symbol confirmation time, and the variable display result is reduced in time. can make it difficult to attract attention.

In addition, in this characteristic section 130SG, in the time-saving state A, the variable display pattern determination time when the variable display result is a time-saving miss A or a time-saving miss B is exemplified as being set to be the same as the variable display pattern determination time when the variable display result is a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state A, the variable display pattern determination time when the variable display result is a time-saving miss A or a time-saving miss B may be set to be the same as the variable display pattern determination time when the variable display result is a small win.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-28 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state B is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, and a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second performance corresponding to a non-reach is executed during the variable display, but if the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variable pattern for a super reach δ jackpot, and a 50-second performance including a reach performance of super reach δ is executed during the variable display, and a 15-second celebration effect is executed. For this reason, in the time-saving state B, if the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, making it possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest due to excessive execution of effects with long execution periods, such as reach effects, during the variable display, and in the time-saving state C1, if the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is a variable pattern for a super reach δ jackpot, increasing the player's anticipation and improving their interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with a time-saving state.

Also, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-28, when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time saving state A, PB3-1 is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, and PB3 is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern. -2, variable display is executed in either PB3-3, which is a variation pattern of super reach δ. In other words, in time-saving state B, the proportion of variable display executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach variation pattern, is high compared to the entire time-saving state A. It is possible to suppress a decline in player's interest due to excessive execution of performances with long execution periods.

Also, as shown in Fig. 284-28 and Fig. 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state C1 is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variable pattern of the Super Reach δ jackpot, and a 50-second performance including the reach performance of the Super Reach δ is executed during the variable display, followed by a 15-second celebration performance. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C2, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is the variable pattern of the non-reach jackpot, and a 15-second celebration performance is executed during the variable display, followed by a 2-second performance corresponding to a non-reach. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state B is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for non-reach jackpots, at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C1, while the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for non-reach jackpots, at the same rate as when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C2. Therefore, in the time-saving state C2, where the maximum number of variable displays that perform time-saving control is 685, the variable display (the performance during the variable display corresponding to non-reach and the celebration performance) is easier to execute in a shorter period than in the time-saving state C1, where the number of variable displays that perform time-saving control is only 1, thereby reducing the feeling of dragging and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display result in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, By executing the display, a 50-second performance including a reach performance of super reach δ is performed during the variable display, and then a 15-second blessing performance is performed. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state A3, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, or PB3-2, which is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern. As a result, a 15-second blessing performance is executed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance is performed during variable display. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C1, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot occurs at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state A3. Variable display is executed at PB3-3. In addition, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state A3, the fluctuation pattern of non-reach jackpots will occur at a higher rate than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state C1. Variable display is executed at PB3-1. Therefore, in time-saving state A3, where the maximum number of variable displays for time-saving control is 685, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, thereby suppressing a decline in player interest. In the time-saving state C1, where the number of variable displays for time-saving control is 1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variable pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, increasing the player's expectations. Since it is possible to improve the interest in the game, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving mode can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-28, if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot in time saving state B, the variable display is displayed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern. By executing this, a 15-second blessing performance is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed for 2 seconds during the variable display. On the other hand, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state A3, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, or PB3-2, which is a normal reach jackpot variation pattern. As a result, a 15-second blessing performance is executed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance is performed during variable display. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state B, the non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is higher than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state A3. Since the variable display is executed at PB3-1, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest due to the player's sense of procrastination in the time saving state B.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A3, PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, or a normal reach jackpot. By executing a variable display in the variable pattern PB3-2, a 15-second blessing display is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance during the variable display. is executed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, so that the super reach δ is changed during the variable display. After a 50-second performance including a reach performance is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C2, the variable display is executed only on PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, for 2 seconds during the variable display. After the performance corresponding to the non-reach is performed, a 15-second blessing performance is performed.

In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state A3, it is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern PB3 than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C1. -1, the rate of execution of variable display is high, and when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state C2, the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time-saving state A2. The rate at which variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, is set higher than in the case. Therefore, in time saving state C2, where the maximum number of variable displays for executing time saving control is 685, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for non-reach jackpots, thereby preventing the game from feeling delayed. In time-saving state C1, in which the number of variable displays in which time-saving control is executed is one, variable display is not executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, in other words, relative In addition, by increasing the rate at which the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, the reach effect of the super reach δ is executed and the expectation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is effectively increased. This can increase interest.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state C1, the variable display is executed at PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot. Thus, after a 50-second performance including a reach performance of the super reach δ is performed during variable display, a 15-second blessing performance is performed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state C2, the variable display is executed only in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, so that there is a 2-second non-stop during the variable display. After the performance corresponding to the reach is performed, a 15 second blessing performance is performed. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C2, it is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern PB3 than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C1. -1, the quota for which the variable display is executed is set high, and if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C1, the variable display result of the second special figure in the time-saving state C2 is higher. The allocation for which the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, is set higher than when the jackpot occurs. Therefore, in time saving state C2 where the maximum number of variable displays for executing time saving control is 685, variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, to prevent the player from feeling like it has been delayed. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest, and in the time-saving state C1 where the number of variable displays for executing time-saving control is one, the variable display is executed in a variable pattern of super reach δ jackpot, thereby increasing the player's expectations. Since it is possible to enhance the feeling of playing the game and improve the interest in the game, the marketability of the Pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving mode can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state A3, PB3-1, which is a variation pattern of a non-reach jackpot, or a normal reach jackpot. By executing a variable display in the variable pattern PB3-2, a 15-second blessing display is performed after a 2-second non-reach performance or a 20-second normal reach performance during the variable display. is executed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state C2, the variable display is executed only in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, so that there is a 2-second non-stop during the variable display. After the performance corresponding to the reach is performed, a 15 second blessing performance is performed. For this reason, in time-saving state A3, the rate at which variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpots, increases, giving excessive gaming value in a short period of time, resulting in excessive gambling. This can prevent the price from becoming too high.

Also, as shown in Fig. 284-27 and Fig. 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special chart in the time-saving state A3 is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern for a non-reach jackpot, or PB3-2, which is a variable pattern for a normal reach jackpot, so that a 15-second celebration effect is executed after a 2-second performance corresponding to a non-reach or a 20-second performance corresponding to a normal reach is executed during the variable display. If the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot in the time-saving state C1, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is a variable pattern for a super reach δ jackpot, so that a 50-second performance including a reach performance of super reach δ is executed during the variable display, and a 15-second celebration effect is executed. For this reason, in time-saving state A3, where the variable display count in which time-saving control is executed is a maximum of 685 times, variable display is likely to be executed in PB3-1, which is a variable display pattern for a non-reach jackpot, making it possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest. In time-saving state C1, where the variable display count in which time-saving control is executed is once, variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is a variable display pattern for a super reach delta jackpot, increasing the player's anticipation and improving their interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with a time-saving state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state C1 is longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state B. The difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is off in time saving state C2 and the average variable display time when the variable display result is off in time saving state B is set as follows: Since it is set smaller than the difference between the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure and the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in the time saving state C1, the period during which time saving control can be executed. In the time-saving state C2 where the time is relatively long, the player can play the game without stressing the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, a common variation pattern when the variable display result is out of reach is PA3, which is a non-reach out of reach variation pattern. -1 can be selected. In other words, since the fluctuation pattern is shared between the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, the data capacity of the fluctuation pattern can be reduced. Note that this feature section 130SG exemplifies a form in which some of the variation patterns when the variable display results are off in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 can be selected in common. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, all the variation patterns may be selectable in common when the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as a variable display preview performance suggesting that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state during the variable display, a so-called step-up performance in which the displayed character changes step by step has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a variable display preview performance, multiple types of performances (for example, a dialogue preview performance suggesting the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by the displayed dialogue, a movable body preview performance suggesting the rate at which the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by the operating mode of the movable body 32, etc.) may be executed. In this way, when multiple types of performances are executable as a variable display preview performance, the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state C is set longer than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state B, as in this characteristic part 130SG (see FIG. 284-51), and the number of variable display preview performances that can be executed during the variable display in the time-saving state C may be set to be greater than the number of variable display preview performances that can be executed during the variable display in the time-saving state B. In this way, the time-saving state B reduces the stress of the player by increasing the number of variable displays per unit period through variable displays with short variable display times, and in the time-saving state C, by increasing the number of advance notice performances during variable display that can be executed when the variable display result is a miss, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest when the variable display result is a miss with time saving multiple times before being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the time-saving state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-52, the types of variable display notice performances that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a failure (when the fluctuation pattern of failure is determined) are time saving. Since there are more times when the state is controlled in state C than when it is controlled in time saving state B, the number of variable display performance patterns can be increased without increasing the number of variable patterns. storage capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in Fig. 284-7, Fig. 284-44, Fig. 284-57, Fig. 284-63, Fig. 284-64, Fig. 284-67, Fig. 284-68, when the variable display result of the first special chart is a miss with time reduction, it is possible to execute an entry effect A as an effect to notify that the game will be controlled to the time reduction state C1, and when the variable display result of the second special chart is a miss with time reduction, it is possible to execute an entry effect B as an effect to notify that the game will be controlled to the time reduction state C2. In other words, when the variable display result of the first special chart is a miss with time reduction, an entry effect B is executed as an effect to notify that the game will be controlled to the time reduction state C2. In the case where the result is a time-saving miss and the case where the variable display result of the second special chart is a time-saving miss, different entry effects can be executed as an effect to notify that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the variable display result of the first special chart is a time-saving miss and the case where the variable display result of the second special chart is a time-saving miss, a common entry effect can be executed as an effect to notify that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state C, depending on the situation. For example, when the variable display result of the first special chart in the normal state except immediately after the time-saving state ends is a time-saving miss, entry effect A can be executed as an effect to notify that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state C1, and when the variable display result of the second special chart in either time-saving state is a time-saving miss, entry effect B is executed as an effect to notify that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state B. Then, in the normal state immediately after the time-saving state ends, if the variable display result based on the reserved memory that occurred during the time-saving state is a time-saving miss, whether the variable display is the first special chart variable display or the second special chart variable display, entry performance B may be executed as a performance to notify that the time-saving state C will be controlled. In this way, in the rare situation where the variable display result is a time-saving miss in the variable display corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory that was stored immediately after the time-saving state ends, the entry performance B is shared with the performance to notify that the second special chart reserved memory will be controlled to the time-saving state C (entry performance B is executed), which can reduce the development man-hours for the performance and also reduce the capacity of the performance data.

In addition, in this modification, in the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state, if the variable display result based on the pending memory that occurred during the time saving state is a time saving result, the variable display is changed to the first special figure. Although we have exemplified the form in which the rush effect B is executed as an effect to notify that the time saving state C is controlled regardless of whether the variable display or the variable display of the second special symbol is used, the normal state immediately after the end of the time saving state is If the variable display result based on the reserved memory that occurred during the time-saving state is a time-saving result, the time-saving display will be applied regardless of whether the variable display is the variable display of the first special figure or the variable display of the second special figure. As a performance to notify that the state is controlled to state C, a performance different from rush performance A and rush performance B may be performed. In other words, the common predetermined performance in the present invention may be rush performance B that corresponds to the second predetermined performance, rush performance A that corresponds to the first predetermined performance, or rush performance B that corresponds to the second predetermined performance. may be performed differently.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, when the variable display result is off in the time saving state A3, PA3-1 is a non-reaching out-of-reach variation pattern, and PA3 is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern. -2, it is possible to select PA3-3, which is a variation pattern for non-reach, and PA3-4, which is a variation pattern for normal reach. It is possible to select PA3-1, which is a variable pattern, and PA3-10, which is a non-reach variable pattern. In other words, in the time-saving state A3 and the time-saving state C2, when the variable display result is out of reach, PA3-1, which is a non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern, can be selected in common. Therefore, even if multiple types of time-saving states are provided, the fluctuation pattern can be shared among different time-saving states, which reduces the data capacity of the fluctuation patterns, and improves the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the time-saving state. be able to.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 284-27 and 284-29, when the variable display results are out of place in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state C1, PA3-5, which is a variation pattern in which the super reach δ is out, is selected. If the variable display results are different between time-saving state A1 and time-saving state C1, select PA3-5 as a common variation pattern, so that even if there are multiple types of time-saving states, the variation pattern can be shared between different time-saving states. Therefore, the data capacity of the fluctuation pattern can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-28 and 284-29, in time-saving state B and time-saving state C2, a common fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is out of reach is PA3, which is a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern. -1 can be selected. In other words, since the fluctuation pattern is shared between the time saving state B and the time saving state C2, the data capacity of the fluctuation pattern can be reduced. Note that this feature section 130SG exemplifies a form in which some of the variation patterns when the variable display results are off in the time saving state B and the time saving state C2 can be selected in common. The present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, all the variation patterns may be selectable in common when the variable display result is a failure.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or time-saving state C is controlled to the jackpot game state, the CPU for controlling the presentation 120 executes a presentation (such as a round presentation) based on the jackpot game state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the state is controlled to the jackpot game state from two or more time-saving states (for example, when the state is controlled to the jackpot game state from time-saving state A and when the state is controlled to the jackpot game state from time-saving state C), the CPU for controlling the presentation 120 may be able to execute a common presentation as a presentation based on these jackpot game states. In this way, the presentation after the state is controlled to the jackpot game state can be shared across multiple types of time-saving states, thereby reducing the capacity of the presentation data.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, when the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C are controlled to the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (round performance, etc.) based on the corresponding jackpot game state. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to control from two or more time saving states to a jackpot gaming state (for example, when controlling from a time saving state A to a jackpot gaming state). In the case of controlling from the time saving state C to the jackpot gaming state), the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute different performances as performances based on these jackpot gaming states. By doing so, after the jackpot game state is controlled, an appropriate performance can be executed according to the difference in the time saving state, so that the game interest after the jackpot game state is controlled can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-27, 284-29, and 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result is incorrect in time saving state C2 is as follows: time saving state A1, time saving state A2, time saving state This is shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result is a failure in A3. Furthermore, in the time saving state C2, if the variable display result is off, two types of variation patterns, PA3-1 and PA3-10, can be selected, while in the time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3. If the variable display result is a failure, five types of variation patterns can be selected: PA3-1, PA3-2, PA3-3, PA3-4, and PA3-5. Therefore, in the time-saving state C2, it is possible to prevent a situation where expectations are excessively heightened due to the long average variable display time, creating a feeling of delay and reducing the interest in the game, and pachinko games equipped with the time-saving state can be prevented. The marketability of the machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-29, if the variable display result of the second special symbol becomes a jackpot in the time saving state A1, the variable display result in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, By executing the display, a 50-second performance including a reach performance of super reach δ is performed during the variable display, and then a 15-second blessing performance is performed. If the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in time saving state C2, the variable display is executed only in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, so that there is a 2-second non-stop during the variable display. After the performance corresponding to the reach is performed, a 15 second blessing performance is performed. In other words, when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state C2, it is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern PB3 than when the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state A1. -1, the variable display result is set high, and if the variable display result of the second special figure becomes a jackpot in the time-saving state A1, the variable display result of the second special figure in the time-saving state C2 is higher. The allocation for which the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the variation pattern of the super reach δ jackpot, is set higher than when the jackpot occurs. Therefore, in time saving state C2 where the maximum number of variable displays for executing time saving control is 685, variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a variable pattern of non-reach jackpot, to prevent the player from feeling like it has been delayed. It is possible to suppress a decline in interest, and in time-saving state A1 where the number of variable displays for executing time-saving control is one, variable displays are executed in a variable pattern of super reach δ jackpot, thereby increasing player's expectations. It is possible to increase the feeling of playing the game and improve the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-28 and FIG. 284-29, in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern PA3-1 can be selected as a common fluctuation pattern when the variable display result is a miss. In other words, since the fluctuation pattern is common in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, the data capacity of the fluctuation pattern can be reduced. Note that, in this characteristic part 130SG, an example is shown in which some fluctuation patterns can be commonly selected when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all fluctuation patterns can be commonly selected when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIGS. 284-6 and 284-29, in the time saving state C2, variable display can be executed in a non-reach variation pattern, while normal reach and super reach Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this example, and the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to perform variable display with the variation pattern of normal reach or super reach even in the time saving state C2. Good too. In particular, when the variable display result is off, the rate at which variable display is executed in the variable pattern of normal reach or super reach is higher in time-saving state C2 than in time-saving state A (the rate at which reach effects are executed). ) may be set low. By doing this, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest due to excessively high expectations due to the reach effect in the time saving state C2, where the period during which time saving control can be executed is longer than in the time saving state A1 and the time saving state A2. .

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-27 and 284-28, if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot in time saving state B, the variable display is displayed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern. By executing this, a 15-second blessing performance will be performed after a 2-second non-reach performance is performed during the variable display, but in the time-saving state A1, the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the variable display is executed in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach δ jackpot, and after the 50 second performance including the reach effect of the Super Reach δ is executed during the variable display, the 15 A second-long blessing performance is performed. Therefore, in time-saving state B, if the variable display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the variable display is executed in PB3-1, which is a non-reach jackpot variation pattern, so that the reach effect is displayed during the variable display. It is possible to suppress the decrease in player's interest due to excessive execution of performances with long execution periods such as By executing a variable display in PB3-3, which is the fluctuation pattern of the δ jackpot, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players and improve their enjoyment of the game, which improves the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the time-saving mode. can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 284-55, after the time-saving state A ends, the dedicated stage image is displayed on the image display device 5 for 10 variable displays, whereas after the time-saving state B or C ends, the dedicated stage image is not displayed on the image display device 5. For this reason, the special feeling can be enhanced by displaying the dedicated stage image on the image display device 5 in the variable display of the second special chart after the time-saving state A (variable display based on reserved memory of the second special chart that was generated but not consumed during the time-saving state) and in the 10 variable displays after the variable display of these second special charts, and as for the variable display after the time-saving state B ends, the display of the dedicated stage image can suppress a decrease in interest due to the disappointment of not being controlled to a jackpot game state during the time-saving state B being heightened by the display of the special stage image.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, as shown in Figures 284-6, 284-27, and 284-51, the length of the special chart fluctuation time in which the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state B is set to be less than the length of the special chart fluctuation time in which the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the fluctuation pattern with the shortest special chart fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns selectable in time-saving state B may have a longer special chart fluctuation time than the fluctuation pattern with the shortest special chart fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns selectable in time-saving state A. In this way, if the length of the special chart change time in which the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B is set to be longer than the length of the special chart change time in which the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A, the average special chart change time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state B is set shorter than the average special chart change time when the variable display result is a miss in the time-saving state A, as with this feature unit 130SG, to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by preventing delays during the time-saving state B, and to increase interest in the game by increasing the sense of celebration when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state during the time-saving state B, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with a time-saving state.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 284-6 and 284-27, in the normal state, if the variable display result of the first special figure is Error with time saver and the type of Error with time saver is Error A with time saver, the special figure fluctuation time While the variation pattern PA2-4 in which is 53 seconds is selected, if the variable display result of the second special figure in time saving state A2 and time saving state A3 is ``with time saving'', then the special figure variation time is 2 seconds. One of PA3-6, PA3-7 with special figure variation time of 20 seconds, PA3-8 and PA3-9 with special figure variation time of 50 seconds is selected, that is, time saving state A1, time saving state A2, if the variable display result of the second special figure in the time-saving state A3 is ``missing with time saving'', the variable display result of the first special figure in the normal state is ``missing with time saving'' and the type of ``missing with time saving'' is ``missing with time saving''. The special figure fluctuation time is set shorter than the case. For this reason, it is possible to suitably play games in the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, and time-saving state A3 without giving the player a sense of discomfort in the variable display where the variable display result is either time-saving or not. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

Also, as shown in Fig. 284-68 and Fig. 284-77, in the time-saving state A (in the example shown in Fig. 284-68 and Fig. 284-77, in the time-saving state A2), if the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B, the time-saving state C2 is controlled after the time-saving state A ends. Note that, as shown in Fig. 284-51, the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time-saving state C2 is a miss is set shorter than the average variable display time when the variable display result in the time-saving state A is a miss. Therefore, when the variable display result in the time-saving state A is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B, and the period controlled to the time-saving state becomes longer, the variable pattern is switched so that the number of variable displays executed in the unit period is increased, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player in the game due to the player feeling drawn out.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-6 and 284-27, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, if the variable display result is a failure, the special figure fluctuation time is 50 seconds. If the variation pattern PA3-5 that misses the reach δ is selected, and the variable display result is a miss with a time saver, the variation pattern PA3-8 of the super reach δ with a time saver with a special figure variation time of 50 seconds is selected. . In addition, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A2, if the variable display result is an error, the variation pattern PA3-4 of the normal reach with a special figure variation time of 20 seconds can be selected. If the variable display result shows that the winning time is short, then the normal reach time shorting and losing variation pattern PA3-7 in which the special figure fluctuation time is 20 seconds is selected. In the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A3, when the variable display result is out of reach, the special figure change time is 2 seconds and the non-reach out of reach variation pattern PA3-1 and the special figure change time are Variation pattern PA3-4 with a normal reach of 20 seconds can be selected, and if the variable display result is a loss with a time reduction, a variation with a non-reach time reduction of 2 seconds is selected. Pattern PA3-6 and normal reach time shortening variation pattern PA3-7, which has a special figure variation time of 20 seconds, can be selected. In other words, in the variable display of the second special figure in time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, and time-saving state A3, the variable display result is variable at the same special figure fluctuation time in cases where the variable display result is a loss and when it is a loss with time-saving. Display can now be performed. Therefore, in the variable display of the second special figure in the time saving state A1, the time saving state A2, and the time saving state A3, when the variable display result is a time saving result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by not being controlled to the time saving state C2. Can be done.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, in the variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state A3, an example is given in which the special chart change time of some of the variable displays is common between the case where the variable display result is a miss and the case where the variable display result is a miss with time-saving, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in the variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state A3, the special chart change time of some of the variable displays may be common between the case where the variable display result is a miss and the case where the variable display result is a miss with time-saving.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 284-45, if the variable display result is ``ON/OFF with time saving'' during time saving state A1 and the type of ``ON/OFF with time saving'' is ``ON/OFF with time saving B'' (when the start conditions for time saving state C2 are met). , while executing the rush effect (rush effect B) in the final variable display of the time saving state A1 (the first variable display of the second special figure), the variable display result during the time saving state B is deviated from the time saving display and the time saving display is not included. When the failure type is time saving and failure B (when the start condition of time saving state C2 is satisfied), the rush effect is not executed. In other words, the player feels safe when controlling from the time-saving state A1 to the time-saving state C2, where the continuous winning state continues, and executes the rush effect, but in the time-saving state B, the game is not controlled to the jackpot game state 685 times. In the time saving state C2, which is controlled after the variable display is executed, the stress given to the player is further reduced by restricting the execution of the rush effect that reminds the player that the variable display will continue without being controlled by the jackpot game state. Since it is possible to reduce this, it is possible to improve the marketability in a time-saving state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, if the variable display result becomes ``With time saving on/off'' during time saving state B and the type of failure with time saving on/off becomes ``With time saving on/off B'' (when the start conditions for time saving state C2 are met), the entry effect is Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if the variable display result is OFF with time saving during time saving state B, and the type of failure with time saving is OFF with time saving, the present invention is not limited to this. , the rush effect may be executed at a lower rate than in the case where the variable display result is OFF with time saving during time saving state A or time saving state C, and the type of change with time saving is OFF with time saving is B. The variable display result may be executed in a smaller display area than in the case where the variable display result is "Time saving" and "No" and the "Time saving" and "No" type is "Time saving" and "B". The entry effect may be executed in a shorter period than when the display result is ``FAIL'' with time saving and the type of ``FAIL'' with time saving is B. In other words, restricting the execution of the rush effect includes reducing the frequency of execution of the rush effect, reducing the range in which the image of the rush effect is displayed, and shortening the execution period of the rush effect. ing.

In addition, as shown in Figures 284-35, 284-38, and 284-45, in the variable display in the normal state, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 (the start condition for time saving state B is satisfied), By setting the symbol confirmation period to 81.4 seconds, the rush effect is executed during the symbol confirmation period, but when the number of variable displays reaches 685 in time saving state C (the start condition of time saving state B is satisfied) By setting the symbol confirmation period to 0.5 seconds, the time saving state C is shifted to the time saving state B without executing the rush effect during the symbol confirmation period. For this reason, when the control is changed from the normal state to the time saving state B, the path that is advantageous for the player (whether to hit the game ball toward the left gaming area or the right gaming area) changes, ensuring a long pattern determination period. By performing a rush effect, it is possible to make the player aware of a change in the route that will be advantageous to the player. Also, when controlled from time-saving state C to time-saving state B, the path that is advantageous for the player does not change (the player continues to hit the game ball toward the right gaming area), so the symbol confirmation period is shortened and the rush effect is executed. By not doing so, it is possible to suitably shift to the time saving state B without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

As shown in Fig. 284-56 to 11-72, in game states such as the big win game state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C in which the player shoots the game ball toward the right game area, a right-hit promotion image with "right hit" written along with an arrow is displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5, but the present invention is not limited to this. The right-hit promotion image may be continuously displayed when moving from a specific time-saving state to another time-saving state, when moving from a time-saving state to a big win game state or a small win game state, or when moving from a big win game state or a small win game state to a time-saving state. In particular, when the variable display count reaches 685 times in time-saving state C and the start condition of time-saving state B is established, the right-hit promotion image displayed in the upper right part of the image display device 5 in time-saving state C is continuously displayed in time-saving state B, making it easier for the player to recognize that the state in which the player should continue shooting the game level into the right game area can be continued.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-9, if the variable display result in time-saving state C is a miss with time-saving, it is possible to control it back to time-saving state C after the currently running time-saving state C ends, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to not being controlled back to time-saving state C even if the variable display result in time-saving state C is a miss with time-saving.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-45, in this characteristic part 130SG, the remaining variable display number of times (time-saving remaining number display) at which time-saving control can be executed in the time-saving state can be displayed on the image display device 5, but even if the variable display result in the time-saving state B is a time-saving or non-time-saving, the remaining number display in the time-saving state B is not changed to a value that includes the remaining variable display number at which time-saving control can be executed in the time-saving state C controlled after the time-saving state B ends (it is not changed from the time-saving remaining number display in the time-saving state B). This makes it possible to prevent processing from becoming complicated by changing the time-saving remaining number display in the middle of the time-saving state B when the variable display result in the time-saving state B is a time-saving or non-time-saving, and reduces the data capacity of the performance control program executed by the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, in this feature section 130SG, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 in time saving state C, the gaming state shifts (changes) from time saving state C to time saving state B. It has become. Here, if the variable display number reaches 685 in the normal state, the display of the remaining time saving number corresponding to the time saving state B will start from the time when the time saving state B is controlled, and the gaming state will change from the time saving state C. When transitioning to time saving state B, the image display device 5 performs a shutter effect to switch the display of the remaining number of time savings corresponding to time saving state C to the display of the remaining number of time saving corresponding to time saving state B. This allows the player to accurately recognize that the state has changed to state B.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the game state transitions from time-saving state C to time-saving state B, a shutter effect is executed to temporarily conceal the display of the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to time-saving state C with a shutter image, and the display of the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to time-saving state C is switched to the display of the remaining number of time-saving times corresponding to time-saving state B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the game state transitions from time-saving state C to time-saving state B, a shutter effect may be executed to conceal the entire display area of the image display device 5 with a shutter image, and the background image corresponding to time-saving state C displayed on the image display device 5 may be switched to the background image corresponding to time-saving state B. In this way, the background image is temporarily concealed by the shutter effect, and the discomfort caused by the sudden change from the background image corresponding to time-saving state C to the background image corresponding to time-saving state B can be prevented.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-45, when the variable display result is a time-saving miss in the normal state, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of time-saving times, but when the time-saving state C2 is entered after the time-saving state B ends, the image display device 5 does not display the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving state C2. In particular, in this feature part 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-45, when the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is a time-saving miss B in any time-saving state, the time-saving state C2 is entered after the time-saving state in which the variable display result is a time-saving miss ends, but the remaining number of time-saving times is not displayed in the time-saving state C2. In other words, when the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed in the time-saving state B, the period during which the time-saving control is executed after the time-saving state C2 is controlled to be extremely short depending on the time when the remaining number of time-saving times is displayed, which may give a sense of wasted play, so by not displaying the remaining number of time-saving times in the time-saving state C2, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the sense of wasted play.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG, when the time-saving state C2 is entered after the end of the time-saving state B, the image display device 5 does not display the remaining number of times for the time-saving state C2. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the time-saving state C2 is entered after the end of the time-saving state B, the image display device 5 may display the remaining number of times for the time-saving state C2 for a shorter period than the time-saving state B, or may display the remaining number of times for the time-saving state C2 in an area smaller than the time-saving state B. In other words, limiting the display of the remaining number of times for the time-saving state includes not displaying the remaining number of times for the time-saving state, narrowing the display range of the remaining number of times for the time-saving state, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-45, when the variable display result becomes time saving ON/OFF B during time saving state C and the time saving state C2 is newly controlled after time saving state C, the time saving state that was originally controlled A time saving end countdown display is executed for C (time saving state C2). In other words, in this feature section 130SG, if the execution mode of the time saving end countdown is switched depending on whether or not the variable display result shows the time saving result during the time saving state C, the control becomes complicated, so the original time saving state C ends. Until now, by performing the time-saving end countdown in the same way regardless of whether or not the variable display result was a time-saving result, it was possible to prevent the control of the time-saving end countdown from becoming complicated. The marketability of item 1 can be improved.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-45, regarding the display of the remaining number of time savings, even if the start condition for a new time saver state C is met in the current time saver state, the time saver state C is displayed again when the start condition is met. By maintaining the display of the remaining number of time savings according to the current time saving status until it is controlled (the display of the remaining number of time savings does not change), multiple time saving counters can be used as counters for displaying the remaining number of time savings. Since it is not necessary to provide the time saving remaining number of times, it is possible to prevent the processing for displaying the remaining number of time reductions from becoming complicated, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity of the performance control program executed by the performance control CPU 120.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-46, a display period for the time-saving end countdown is shorter than the display period for the remaining number of times that time-saving has been performed is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display period for the remaining number of times that time-saving has been performed may be shorter than the time-saving end countdown. In addition, in the case of a display period for the remaining number of times that time-saving has been performed being shorter than the time-saving end countdown, if the variable display result during any of the time-saving states is a time-saving miss and the type of the time-saving miss is a time-saving miss B, the remaining number of times that time-saving has been performed may not be displayed in the time-saving state C2 based on the time-saving miss B, while the time-saving end countdown may be executed. By doing this, even if the period controlled by the time-saving state C2 is short, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the end timing of the time-saving state C2 while preventing the player from feeling that he has been overly wasted.

As shown in FIG. 284-45, in regard to the time-saving end countdown, if the variable display result in the time-saving state C2 is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B (when the time-saving state C2 is further controlled after the end of the time-saving state C2), the time-saving end countdown is executed for the time-saving state C2 in which the variable display result is a time-saving miss. Therefore, regardless of whether the variable display result in the time-saving state C2 is a time-saving miss or not, the time-saving end countdown is displayed on the image display device 5 when the time-saving state C2 ends. This prevents the control of displaying the time-saving end countdown from becoming complicated, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with a time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 284-45, the result effects are executed when the time-saving state A1 and the time-saving state A2 end, but are not executed when the time-saving state B ends. In other words, when 685 variable displays are executed in the time-saving state B without the variable display result being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the result effects being executed in a situation where the game has never been controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Note that this feature section 130SG exemplifies a mode in which the result presentation is executed when the time saving state A1 and the time saving state A2 end, but the result presentation is not performed when the time saving state B ends. The invention is not limited to this, and when the time saving state B ends, the result performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the time saving state A1 or the time saving state A2 ends, or the result performance may be executed at a lower rate when the time saving state A1 or the time saving state A2 ends. The result performance may be performed in a smaller display area than when the time saving state A2 ends, or the result performance may be performed in a shorter period than when the time saving state A1 or the time saving state A2 ends. In other words, restricting the execution of result effects includes lowering the execution rate of result effects, reducing the display area for displaying images of result effects, and shortening the execution period of result effects. ing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-45, with regard to the result presentation, if in the normal state the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B, and 685 variable displays are executed in the time-saving state C2 without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the result presentation is not executed, but if in the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3 the variable display result is a time-saving miss and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B (when controlled to the time-saving state C2 after the end of the time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, or time-saving state A3), the result presentation is executed when 685 variable displays are executed in the time-saving state C2 without being controlled to the jackpot game state. In other words, when the variable display result is a time-saving miss in the normal state and the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B, the time-saving state C2 ends (when 685 variable displays are executed without being controlled to the jackpot game state), the game is never controlled to the jackpot game state, so it is possible to prevent a decrease in game interest due to the execution of the result presentation in such a situation. Also, when the variable display result is a time-saving miss in the time-saving state A1, the time-saving state A2, and the time-saving state C2 ends because the time-saving miss type is time-saving miss B (when 685 variable displays are executed without being controlled to the jackpot game state), the game is controlled to the jackpot game state at least once, so the result presentation can be executed to appeal to the number of prize balls awarded, thereby increasing game interest.

In addition, as described above, when the variable display result is OFF with time saving in time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3, and the type of change with time saving is OFF is B (time saving state A1, time saving state A2, In the case where the time-saving state C2 is controlled after the end of the state A3), when the variable display is executed 685 times in the time-saving state C2 without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the result performance is executed, but in the normal state, When the variable display result is OFF with time saving in time saving state B, time saving state C1, and time saving state C2, and the type of change in time saving is OFF with time saving, the time saving state is set to OFF after time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state A3 ends. Regarding the case where the variable display is controlled by C2), even if the variable display is executed 685 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the time saving state C2 based on the fact that the variable display result in these time saving states is a time saving result or a loss. Result performance is not executed. That is, in the case where the time saving states C2 overlap, the result performance is not executed even if the overlapping time saving states C2 end. For this reason, if the variable display result in the normal state turns out to be a time saving result, and in the time saving state C2, the variable display result becomes a time saving result (if the time saving states C2 overlap), the overlapping time saving state When C2 ends, the game may be in a state where it has never been controlled to a jackpot game state, so it is possible to prevent interest from decreasing due to execution of the result performance in such a situation.

In addition, in the present feature section 130SG, when the time-saving states C2 overlap, the result presentation is not executed when the overlapping time-saving states C2 end, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the time saving states C2 overlap, when the overlapping time saving states C2 end, the result performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the other time saving states end, or the other time saving states end. The result effect may be executed in a smaller display area than the current time, or the result effect may be executed in a shorter period than when another time saving state ends. In other words, restricting the execution of the result effect when the overlapping time saving state C2 ends includes executing the result effect at a lower rate than when the other time saving state ends, and restricting the execution of the result effect when the overlapping time saving state C2 ends. This includes executing the result effect in a smaller display area than the actual time, executing the result effect in a shorter period than when another time-saving state ends, etc.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Characteristic portion 130SG-1)
For example, the feature unit 130SG has been exemplified as a form in which the time-saving chance presentation can be executed only in the variable display of the first special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 284-80 as feature unit 130SG-1, the time-saving chance presentation may be executed in both the variable display of the first special chart and the variable display of the second special chart. In this way, when the time-saving acquisition chance presentation can be executed in both the variable display of the first special chart and the variable display of the second special chart, by making PA2-4 and PA2-6, which are the variable patterns for executing the time-saving acquisition chance presentation, executable in the variable display of the first special chart and the second special chart, the variable display can be executed in the aforementioned variable patterns PA2-4 and PA2-6 in the variable display of the first special chart and the variable display other than the remaining reserve immediately after the time-saving state in the second special chart (variable display of the second special chart in the time-saving state), and the variable display can be executed in the variable patterns other than the aforementioned PA2-4 and PA2-6 in the variable display of the remaining reserve immediately after the time-saving state in the second special chart (variable display of the second special chart immediately after being controlled to the normal state).

Furthermore, when executing the variable display of the first special figure in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6, and when executing the variable display of the second special figure in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6. , the start timing of the reach performance of each super reach is the same time, while the reach performance of the super reach differs in the performance period and at least a part of the content (super reach α- shown in Figure 284-80). 1 reach performance and super reach α-2 reach performance), and perform the time-saving acquisition chance performance with different performance periods and at least a part of the content (time-saving acquisition chance performance A shown in Figure 284-80). All you have to do is execute the time-saving acquisition chance presentation B).

Here, as shown in FIG. 284-80, the execution period of the reach performance of the Super Reach α-1 when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the variable pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 is set to be shorter than the execution period of the reach performance of the Super Reach α-2 when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variable pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 (the period from the start of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance of the Super Reach α-1 (the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to a losing combination) is set to L1, The period from the start of the reach effect of Super Reach α-2 to the end of the reach effect (the timing when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to a losing combination) is L2, and the relationship is L2>L1), and the execution period T1 of the time-saving acquisition chance effect A when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 is longer than the execution period T2 of the time-saving acquisition chance effect B when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6 (execution period of the time-saving acquisition chance effect: T1>T2). In other words, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6, the period from the start of the time-saving acquisition chance effect to the end of the time-saving acquisition chance effect and the end of the variable display (until the time-saving C1 flag is set) is set shorter than when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the variation pattern of PA2-4 or PA2-6.

In addition, in the variable display of the remaining reserved immediately after the time-saving state in the second special chart (the variable display of the second special chart immediately after being controlled to the normal state), by executing the time-saving acquisition chance performance B as a time-saving acquisition chance performance, if the period from the start of the variable display to the timing when the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped in a losing combination (the start timing of the time-saving acquisition chance performance) is L3, the period L3 from the start of the variable display to the timing when the time-saving acquisition chance performance starts when a time-saving losing combination A is won in the variable display based on the remaining reserved immediately after the time-saving state in the second special chart is set shorter than the period L1 from the start of the variable display to the timing when the time-saving acquisition chance performance starts when a time-saving losing combination A is won in the variable display of the first special chart.

In this way, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal state, the execution period of the time-saving chance presentation is relatively long T1, which can favorably increase the player's anticipation of being controlled into the time-saving state C1, and during the period when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable display due to remaining reserves) is executed up to four times immediately after the time-saving state ends, which may give a negative impression due to the end of the time-saving state, the execution period of the time-saving chance presentation is T2, which is shorter than T1, so that if a time-saving miss A is won, the time-saving state is returned to at a good pace, which can favorably dispel the player's disappointment, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with a time-saving state.

In addition, when the execution period T1 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance A is compared with the execution period X of the variable display preview performance, the execution period T1 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance A is set longer than the execution period X of the variable display preview performance (T1>X); and further, when the execution period T2 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance B is compared with the execution period Y of the variable display preview performance and the execution period Z of the variable display preview performance, the execution period Y of the variable display preview performance and the execution period Z of the variable display preview performance are set shorter than the execution period T2 of the time-saving acquisition chance performance B (Y>T2, Z>T2). In other words, since the time-saving acquisition chance presentation A suggests a transition to the time-saving state C1 in the normal state, even if it encourages the player to transition to the time-saving state C1 for a long period of time, it causes little stress to the player. However, if the player is already in one of the time-saving states, it is more advantageous for the player to be controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state than to transition to the time-saving state C1. Therefore, if the time-saving acquisition chance presentation B encourages the player to transition to the time-saving state C1 for a long period of time, it may actually reduce interest. Therefore, the time-saving acquisition chance presentation Bwo is executed for a shorter period than the variable display advance notice presentation.

Furthermore, during the period in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed up to four times immediately after the time-saving state (variable display due to remaining reservations), in the variable display in which the winner A with the time-saving is won, the time-saving display will be performed from the start of the variable display. The period L3 from the start timing of the winning chance performance B is the period L1 from the start of the variable display to the start timing A of the time saving chance performance in the case where time-saving winning chance A is won in the variable display of the first special symbol, and Period L2 from the start of the variable display to the start timing of the time-saving acquisition chance production B when the time-saving winning winning A is won in variable displays other than the variable display of the second special figure up to four times immediately after the time-saving state in the second special figure. By setting it shorter than , it is possible to suitably return to the time saving state without excessively prolonging the period until the start of the time saving acquisition chance performance B.

Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is a miss, the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach when the variable display of the first special chart is executed in the variable pattern of PA2-6 is defined as the variable display preview performance executable period X during which the variable display preview performance can be executed, the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach when the variable display of the second special chart (variable display other than the variable display of the remaining reserve in the second special chart) is executed in the variable pattern of PA2-6 is defined as the variable display preview performance executable period Y during which the variable display preview performance can be executed, and the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach when the variable display of the remaining reserve in the time-saving state in the second special chart is executed is defined as the variable display preview performance executable period Z during which the variable display preview performance can be executed, as shown in FIG. 284-81. The performance patterns executable as the variable display preview performance in these variable display preview performance executable period X, variable display preview performance executable period Y, and variable display preview performance executable period Z may be different.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 284-81, the number of performance patterns of the variable display preview performance that can be executed during the variable display preview performance executable period Z is made smaller than the number of performance patterns of the variable display preview performance that can be executed during the variable display preview performance executable period X. In other words, when a time-saving miss A is won in the variable display of the remaining reserved in the time-saving state in the second special chart, the number of performance patterns of the variable display preview performance that can be executed may be made smaller than when a time-saving miss A is won in the variable display of the first special chart. By doing this, when a time-saving miss A is won in the variable display of the remaining reserved in the time-saving state in the second special chart, it is possible to return to the time-saving state in an appropriate manner without excessive excitement due to the variable display preview performance.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 284-81, this feature section 130SG exemplifies a form in which, when a time-saving miss A is won in the variable display of the remaining reserved in the time-saving state of the second special chart, the number of performance patterns of the variable display preview performance that can be executed is smaller than when a time-saving miss A is won in the variable display of the first special chart, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a time-saving miss A is won in the variable display of the remaining reserved in the time-saving state of the second special chart, the variable display preview performance may be made unexecutable. In other words, in this feature section, "there are fewer types of specific suggestion performances that are executed" includes the fact that the variable display preview performance is not executed in any performance pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG-1, a form was exemplified in which the time-saving acquisition chance performance B can be executed with both the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is not limited to this, but in the case where the variable display of the second special figure is executed, in the time saving states where the number of times of time saving control is relatively small, such as time saving state A1, time saving state A2, and time saving state C1, time saving acquisition chance effect B is used. However, in time-saving states where the number of times of time-saving control is large, such as time-saving state A3 and time-saving state C2 (time-saving states in which the jackpot game state is controlled with an extremely high probability), time-saving acquisition chance production B may be restricted. good. In addition, if a variable pattern in which the time-saving acquisition chance performance B is executed in the time-saving state A3 and time-saving state C2 is selected, the special reach performance and variable display preview performance will continue until the end of the original time-saving acquisition chance performance B. may be executed.

As described above, when a variable pattern in which the time-saving acquisition chance performance B is executed in the time-saving state A3 or the time-saving state C2 is selected, and a dedicated reach performance or variable display preview performance is executed until the end of the original time-saving acquisition chance performance B, as shown in FIG. 284-80, the execution period (T2) of the original time-saving acquisition chance performance B is shorter than the execution period (T1) of the time-saving acquisition chance performance A, so that even if the dedicated reach performance or variable display preview performance is executed, the discomfort felt by the player due to the time-saving acquisition chance performance B not being executed is kept to a minimum, and it is possible to suitably adjust the duration of the variable display.

In the above example, the time-saving acquisition chance presentation B is not executed in the time-saving state A3 and the time-saving state C2, but when a variation pattern in which the time-saving acquisition chance presentation B is executed is selected in the time-saving state A3 and the time-saving state C2, a dedicated presentation is executed to minimize the sense of discomfort felt by the player while adjusting the scale of the variable display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the time-saving state A3 and the time-saving state C2, the variation pattern in which the time-saving acquisition chance presentation B is executed may not be selected in the first place.

(Characteristic part 130SG-2)
In addition, in the feature section 130SG, a mode has been exemplified in which it is possible to execute a pending display notice effect, and in the prefetch notice setting process (S161), it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect and the effect pattern. Regarding the execution or non-execution of the pending display notice effect and the effect pattern, the characteristic part 130SG-2 is determined in the proportions shown in Figures 284-82 (A), 284-82 (B), and 284-82 (C). All you have to do is decide. In addition, in the hold display preview performance, the performance pattern α is a performance pattern that displays the hold display in blue, the performance pattern β is a performance pattern that displays the hold display in green, and the performance pattern γ is a performance pattern that displays the hold display in red. This is the performance pattern displayed in .

In the examples shown in Fig. 284-82 (A), Fig. 284-82 (B), and Fig. 284-82 (C), as a tendency, when the variable display result is a miss, the non-execution rate of the reserved display preview performance (white display of the reserved display) is the highest, the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern α is lower than the non-execution rate of the reserved display preview performance, the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern β is lower than the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern α, and the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern γ is set lower than the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern β. Also, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the non-execution rate of the reserved display preview performance (white display of the reserved display) is the lowest, the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern α is higher than the non-execution rate of the reserved display preview performance, the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern β is higher than the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern α, and the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern γ is set higher than the execution rate of the reserved display preview performance in the performance pattern β.

Here, in the examples shown in FIGS. 284-82(A), 284-82(B), and 284-82(C), there is a pending display notice effect when the variable display result is a loss and when it is a jackpot. On the other hand, if the variable display result shows that the time will be shortened, then the pending display notice effect will not be executed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the pending display corresponding to the variable display in which the variable display result is time-saving or not always to be displayed in white (the pending display notice effect is not executed), that is, the variable display result By displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display in which the time saver has been applied or missed in a color such as blue, green, red, etc., the player is prevented from focusing on the fact that the time saver has been applied or not. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to the fact that the special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in an incorrect combination.

As shown in FIG. 284-82(B), the hold display preview performance targeted at the second special chart in the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3 can be executed in three performance patterns, namely, performance pattern α, performance pattern β, and performance pattern γ, and when the variable display result is a non-reach miss, the hold display preview performance is executed in performance pattern α with a 5% probability, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, the hold display preview performance is executed in performance pattern α with a 20% probability, and when the variable display result is a super reach miss, the hold display preview performance is executed in performance pattern α with a 30% probability, the hold display preview performance is executed in performance pattern β with a 20% probability, and the hold display preview performance is executed in performance pattern γ with a 10% probability.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 284-82(C), the hold display notice performance for the second special figure in the time saving state C2 is held in two performance patterns, performance pattern β and performance pattern γ. It is possible to execute the display preview effect, and if the variable display result is out of reach or normal reach, execution of the preview effect is not decided, and if the variable display result is out of super reach, the display is on hold. The performance pattern β of the preview performance is determined at 10%, and the performance pattern γ of the suspended display preview performance is determined at 5%.

In other words, the number of performance patterns that can be executed as the hold display notice performance is fewer in the time-saving state C2 than in the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3, and the rate at which the hold display notice performance is executed when there is no hold memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot is lower in the time-saving state C2 than in the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3. For this reason, in the time-saving state C2 of this characteristic part 130SG-2, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in playing due to an excessive increase in anticipation caused by the hold display notice performance, and it is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with a time-saving state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 284-82(C), in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2 in this characteristic part 130SG-2, the hold display preview performance can be executed in both performance patterns β and γ. In particular, in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, the hold display preview performance can be executed in the same proportions of performance patterns β and γ, which reduces the data capacity required for the hold display preview performance.

As shown in Fig. 284-82(A) and Fig. 284-82(C), in the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, and the time-saving state C2, the presentation pattern β and the presentation pattern γ can be executed as the presentation pattern of the reserved display notice presentation, but the rate at which the reserved display notice presentation is controlled to the jackpot game state by executing the presentation pattern β or the presentation pattern γ (the jackpot expectation rate) is set higher in the time-saving state C2 than in the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3. In this way, in this characteristic part 130SG-2, by being able to commonly execute some of the presentation patterns of the reserved display notice presentation in different time-saving states, it is possible to reduce the development cost of the pachinko game machine 1 by suppressing the increase in the number of presentation patterns of the reserved display notice presentation, and by having the jackpot expectation rate of the presentation pattern β and the presentation pattern γ higher in the time-saving state C2 than in the time-saving state A2 and the time-saving state A3, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's expectation for the reserved display notice presentation during the time-saving state C2.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-82 (A), Figure 284-82 (B), and Figure 284-82 (C), the hold-up that occurred during the time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C2 If it is a memory, even if the variable display based on the suspended memory is executed in the normal state, it is possible to execute the suspended display preview performance for the suspended memory, and the variable display result can be displayed in a short time in either state. The pending display notice performance will not be executed in case of failure. Therefore, as shown in Figure 284-83, regarding the hold display based on the maximum of four hold memories stored immediately after the end of the time saving state, either the first special figure hold memory or the second special figure hold memory is displayed. Even if there is, the variable display is executed during the execution of the result performance without executing the pending display notice performance, and the shooting star performance or the V stock performance is executed based on the fact that the variable display result is a time saving result.

In addition, as described above, in this feature section 130SG-2, the pending display preview performance is not executed for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result is a time-saving change. After holding memory where the variable display result is a time-saving hit or miss, there may be a hold memory where the variable display result is a jackpot. In this case, while the pending display based on the pending memory in which the variable display result becomes a jackpot over multiple variable displays is continuously displayed in any of production pattern α, production pattern β, and production pattern γ. After the variable display of the time-saving error is executed, the reach effect of super reach α and the time-saving acquisition chance effect are executed without the variable display of the jackpot being executed, and the variable display stops, the gaming state changes to the time-saving state C1. It will be controlled. Therefore, in this feature section 130SG-2, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pending display of the jackpot behind it, rather than the pending display of the time-saver winning or losing, so that the combination of special symbols and decorative symbols indicating the time-saving winning or losing is possible. It is possible to make it difficult to draw attention to what is displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG, as a pending display preview performance, the target pending display is displayed in a common display mode (any of performance pattern α, performance pattern β, and performance pattern γ) over multiple variable displays. Although the display form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a hold display preview performance, at least a part of the display form of the target hold display is displayed in a plurality of variable displays. It may be allowed to change. Furthermore, the rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may vary depending on the change pattern of the display mode of the pending display that is the target of the pending display preview performance.

Further, in the feature section 130SG-2, a mode is exemplified in which the pending display preview effect is not executed for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result is time-saving, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to perform a pending display preview effect also for a pending display corresponding to a pending memory in which the variable display result is a time saving result.

In this way, in the case where it is possible to execute a pending display preview performance even for a pending display corresponding to a pending memory in which the variable display result is a time saving result, for example, as shown in FIGS. 284-85 and 284-86, , If there is a hold memory in which the variable display result is not included in the time saver among the maximum 4 hold memories stored at the end of time saving, it is possible to execute a hold display preview performance for the hold display corresponding to the hold memory. On the other hand, when a suspension memory is derived in which the variable display result is a time saving result or a failure during the time saving state A, the suspension display preview effect may not be executed for the suspension display corresponding to the suspension memory. By doing this, the variable display immediately after the end of the time saving state can give the player a sense of tension and improve the enjoyment of the game, thereby increasing the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 equipped with the time saving state. Can be done.

Furthermore, even if it is possible to execute a pending display notice performance for a pending display corresponding to a pending memory in which the variable display result is a time saving result, as shown in FIG. 284-87, the time saving state B. Among the maximum 4 pending memories stored at the end of time saving state C, there is a pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot, and the variable display result is time saved before the pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot. If there is a pending memory that results in a loss, a pending display preview effect is executed for the pending display that corresponds to the pending memory that results in a time-saving variable display result and a loss, while a pending memory that results in a variable display result that becomes a jackpot. The hold display preview effect may not be executed for the corresponding hold display.

By doing this, if there is a reserved memory in which the variable display result is a miss with time reduction A before a reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot among the reserved memories (second special chart reserved memories) stored at the end of time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and time-saving state C, the game will be controlled to time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2 before being controlled to the jackpot game state, and even if the variable display result is a jackpot in the first variable display in time-saving state C1 or time-saving state C2, the reserved display preview performance is not executed for the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot, thereby reducing the feeling of wasting money due to the period controlled to time-saving state C becoming significantly shorter.

In addition, in this feature section 130SG-2, there is a pending memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot among the maximum of 4 pending memories stored at the end of time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C, and , If there is a pending memory where the variable display result is a time-saving loss before the jackpot holding memory, a pending display preview performance is performed for the pending display corresponding to the variable display result that is a time-saving loss. While executing the above, the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. Among the maximum 4 pending memories stored at the end of time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C, there is a pending memory whose variable display result is a jackpot, and before the pending memory where the variable display result is a jackpot. If there is a pending memory in which the variable display result results in a time saving result, a pending display notice effect is executed for the pending display corresponding to the pending memory in which the variable display result results in a time saving result, while the variable display result is A pending display preview performance targeting a pending display corresponding to a pending memory that becomes a jackpot is executed at a lower rate than when there is a pending memory that results in a variable display result that is a time-saving loss before the pending memory that becomes a jackpot. Alternatively, the variable display result may be executed in a production pattern rather than when the target is a suspended display according to a suspended memory in which the time-saving result is a failure.

In other words, when there is a reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot among the maximum of four reserved memories stored at the end of the time-saving state C, and there is a reserved memory in which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving before the reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot before the reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot, the form of limiting the execution of the reserved display notice performance includes not executing the reserved display notice performance targeted at the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot, making it possible to execute the reserved display notice performance targeted at the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot at a lower rate than when there is no reserved memory in which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving before the reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot, and making it possible to execute the reserved display notice performance targeted at the reserved display corresponding to the reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot with fewer performance patterns than when there is no reserved memory in which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving before the reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot before the reserved memory in which the variable display result is a jackpot.

In addition, the present feature section 130SG-2 exemplifies a form in which a pending display preview performance can be executed even for a pending display corresponding to a pending memory in which the variable display result is a time saving result, but the present invention is not limited to this. This is not limited to, but if there are multiple suspended memories in which the variable display results are time-saving or not, the first of the multiple suspended memories in which the variable display results are time-saving or not is stored. It is also possible to perform the hold display preview effect only on the hold memory where the variable display is performed, and not to execute the hold display preview effect on other hold memories. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of wasted play due to the variable display result showing the time saving result again after the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state C.

In addition, in the feature section 130SG-2, in the image display device 5, the first special figure pending memory number, the second special figure pending memory number, small symbols corresponding to the variable display of decorative patterns, panel display effects, and pending display notices. This example shows a form in which prefetched images for effects, background images such as a first background image, a second background image, etc. are displayed. For example, as shown in Figures 284-88 and 284-89, these images may be When doing so, images of the first image data with the highest display priority, panel display effects, images such as small patterns corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure reservation memory number, the second special figure reservation memory number, and the variable display of decorative symbols are displayed. Prefetched images such as pre-fetched images and pending display preview effects are images of second image data that have a lower display priority than images of first image data, and background images such as the first background image and second background image have the lowest display priority. The image displayed on the image display device 5 may be created by drawing as an image of the third image data and combining the image of the first image data, the image of the second image data, and the image of the third image data. . By doing this, even if a common look-ahead notice is executed in the time-saving state A1 and time-saving state C2, it is possible to give a visually different impression depending on the background image, so the development cost of the pachinko game machine 1 can be reduced. After reducing the amount, it is possible to create a sound that suitably enhances the presentation effect of the pre-read notice.

(Characteristic part 130SG-3)
In addition, in the feature section 130SG, as shown in FIG. 284-48, the execution rate of the variable display notice performance in the variable display of the second special symbol is made common in all time saving states, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 284-90 to 284-92 as the characteristic part 130SG-3, the execution rate of the preview effect during the variable display in the variable display of the second special figure is set to the time saving state A1. ~The time saving state A3, the time saving state B, the time saving state C1, and the time saving state C2 may be different from each other.

As shown in Figure 284-90 and Figure 284-92 (B), in time saving state A1 to time saving state A3 and time saving state C2, the variable display notice when the variable display result is jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B The rate at which the performance is performed in the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E is different. In particular, in time-saving states A1 to A3, the rate at which the variable display notice performance is executed in performance pattern E is set higher than in time-saving state A1 to time-saving state A3. By executing the preview performance during the variable display in the performance pattern E, it is possible to enhance the special feeling when playing consecutive games, and it is possible to enhance the marketability of the gaming machine equipped with the time-saving state.

In addition, for the variable display preview performance when the variable display result is a jackpot and the jackpot type is jackpot B, it is possible to set the rate at which the variable display preview performance is executed in performance pattern E higher in time-saving state C2 than in time-saving state A1 to time-saving state A3. In this case, by executing the variable display preview performance in performance pattern E during time-saving state C2, it is possible to effectively heighten the player's sense of expectation and increase interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of gaming machines equipped with time-saving states.

In addition, as shown in Figure 284-90, when the variable display result in time saving state A is a failure to save time, the variable display preview effect is displayed at a higher rate than when the variable display result is negative in time saving state A. It is designed to be executed in production pattern A. For this reason, by executing some kind of variable display preview performance, the player is not made to expect that the special symbols will be displayed in a time-saving combination, and the variable display preview performance is in production pattern A. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that special symbols and decorative symbols are displayed in a combination of time-saving hits and misses without making the players expect that the game will be controlled into a jackpot gaming state by being executed. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 284-91 and 284-92 (A), for the time saving state B and the time saving state C1, among the performance patterns D and E, which are the performance patterns of the preview performance during variable display, The execution rate of production pattern E is different. In particular, in this feature section 130SG-2, since the execution rate of the effect pattern E is set higher in the time saving state B than in the time saving state C1, the jackpot gaming state is controlled during the time saving state B. It is possible to enhance the special feeling of the pachinko game machine 1, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the time saving mode can be enhanced.

It is also possible to set the execution rate of the performance pattern E higher in the time-saving state C1 than in the time-saving state B, but in this case, it is possible to increase the special feeling when the time-saving state C1 is controlled. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 284-90 to 284-92, in the time-saving state A, both the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E, which are the performance patterns of the preview performance during variable display, can be executed, and in the time-saving state B. In this case, both the performance pattern D and the performance pattern E, which are the performance patterns for the preview performance during variable display, cannot be executed, and in the time saving state C1, the performance pattern D and the performance pattern, which are the performance patterns for the preview performance during variable display, cannot be executed. Of E, only performance pattern E is executable, and in the time saving state C2, both performance pattern D and performance pattern E, which are performance patterns of the preview performance during variable display, are unexecutable.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284-93(A), in this feature section 130SG-3, the execution start timing of the variable display notice effect for each variation pattern is a first timing and a timing later than the first timing. A certain second timing is provided, and the execution start timing of the variable display notice effect in each time saving state is determined at the rate shown in FIG. 284-93(B).

As a result, as shown in FIG. 284-93(C), there are two execution start timings for the winning performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) of the variable display preview performance in the time-saving states A1 to A3, and the number of executable winning performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) is two. Also, there are two execution start timings for the winning performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) of the variable display preview performance in the time-saving state C1, and the number of executable winning performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) is one. And, there are zero execution start timings for the winning performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) of the variable display preview performance in the time-saving state B and the time-saving state C2, and the number of executable winning performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) is zero.

In this way, in the time saving state A1 to time saving state A3, the number of possible performance patterns (performance pattern D and performance pattern E) of the variable display notice performance that can be executed and the execution start timing of the corresponding probability performance pattern are higher than in the time saving state C2. By increasing the number of players, the variable display notice performance in the time-saving states A1 to A3 becomes more diverse, so that it is possible to improve the entertainment during consecutive viewings in these time-saving states A1 to A3.

In addition, the time-saving state C1 is a time-saving state because the number of execution patterns (performance pattern D and production pattern E) of the variable display notice performance that can be executed and the execution start timing of the corresponding probability performance pattern are greater than the time-saving state B. Since the preview performance during the variable display in C1 is diversified, the interest in the time saving state C1 can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG-3, as shown in FIG. 284-93, an example is given in which the variable display preview performance cannot be executed in the time-saving state C2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display preview performance may be executed in the time-saving state C2. In particular, if the variable display preview performance is executable in the time-saving state C2, the rate at which the variable display preview performance is executed in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E (winning performance pattern) at the first timing in the time-saving state C2 may be set higher than in the time-saving state A. In this way, in the time-saving state C2, where the controlled period is relatively long, the variable display preview performance is likely to be executed in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E from an early timing (first timing), preventing the game from becoming tedious and suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

As described above, when the variable display preview performance can be executed in the time-saving state C2, the ratio of execution of the variable display preview performance in performance pattern D or performance pattern E (winning performance pattern) can be set higher in the time-saving state C2 than in the time-saving state A, and the ratio of execution of the variable display preview performance in performance pattern D or performance pattern E (winning performance pattern) can be set lower in the time-saving state C1 than in the time-saving state A (execution ratio of winning performance pattern: time-saving state C2>time-saving state A>time-saving state C1). In this way, in the time-saving state C2, where the controlled period is relatively long, the ratio of execution of the variable display preview performance in performance pattern D or performance pattern E is high, which adds variety to the game and improves the interest in the game. Furthermore, by making the rate at which the variable display preview performance is executed in performance pattern E in time-saving state C2 higher than the rate at which the variable display preview performance is executed in performance pattern E in time-saving state C1, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the delay caused by not being controlled to a jackpot game state in time-saving state C2, thereby improving the marketability of pachinko game machine 1 equipped with a time-saving state.

As an example of this modified example, the proportion of variable display preview effects executed in presentation pattern E in time-saving state C2 is higher than the proportion of variable display preview effects executed in presentation pattern E in time-saving state C1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the proportion of variable display preview effects executed in presentation pattern D or presentation pattern E in time-saving state C1 may be higher than the proportion of variable display preview effects executed in presentation pattern D or presentation pattern E in time-saving state C2. By doing this, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state of jackpot B during time-saving state C1, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with a time-saving state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 130SG-3, as shown in FIG. 284-93, an example is shown in which the variable display preview performance cannot be executed in the time-saving state B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display preview performance may be executed in the time-saving state B as well. In particular, if the variable display preview performance is executable in the time-saving state B, the rate at which the variable display preview performance is executed in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E (winning performance pattern) at the first timing in the time-saving state B may be set higher than in the time-saving state C1. In this way, in the time-saving state B, where the controlled period is relatively long, the variable display preview performance is likely to be executed in the performance pattern D or the performance pattern E from an early timing (first timing), preventing the game from becoming drawn out and suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

(Characteristic portion 130SG-4)
Furthermore, in the feature section 130SG, when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot, an example has been given of a form in which only jackpot B is determined as the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 284-94 (A) and 284-94 (B) as feature section 130SG-4, it may be possible to determine jackpot A and jackpot B as the jackpot types both when the variable display result of the first special chart is a jackpot and when the variable display result of the second special chart is a jackpot.

In this way, when it is possible to determine jackpot A and jackpot B as the jackpot types both when the variable display result of the first special drawing becomes a jackpot and when the variable display result of the second special drawing becomes a jackpot. As shown in Figures 284-94(C) and 284-94(D), if the jackpot type is jackpot A, the decorative symbols are arranged in an even number combination (for example, " 222'', ``444'', ``666'', ``888''), and as part of the blessing performance until the end timing of the variable display, the promotion suggestion performance and jackpot that suggest that the jackpot type is jackpot B. It may also be possible to execute a jackpot type notification effect to notify which type is jackpot A or jackpot B. On the other hand, if the hit type is jackpot B, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at an even number combination (for example, "222", "444", "666", "888") at the end timing of the reach effect. , As part of the blessing performance until the end timing of the variable display, a promotion suggestion performance that suggests that the jackpot type is jackpot B and a jackpot type notification display that informs whether the jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. While making it executable, at the end timing of the reach effect, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at odd number combinations (for example, "111", "333", "555", "777") until the end timing of the variable display. A blessing performance that does not include the aforementioned promotion suggestion performance and jackpot type notification performance may be performed.

In this way, when the combination of decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped at the end of the reach effect and the execution or non-execution of the promotion suggestion effect and the jackpot type notification effect are varied depending on the type of jackpot, the ratio of even number alignment and odd number alignment, which are the temporary stopping mode of the decorative symbols, may be varied depending on the game state and the type of jackpot, as shown in FIG. 284-94 (E). Furthermore, when the temporary stopping mode of the decorative symbols is determined to be an even number alignment (when it is determined to execute the promotion suggestion effect and the jackpot notification effect as part of the celebration effect), the presentation patterns X and Y, which are the presentation patterns of the promotion suggestion effect, may be determined in different ratios depending on the type of jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 284-96, the performance pattern X of the promotion suggestion performance displays a repeated-hit promotion image that instructs the player to repeatedly hit the chance button 631B on the image display device 5, and This is an effect in which the jackpot type is repeatedly switched between jackpot A (display of "3R" on the image display device 5) and jackpot B (display of "10R" on the image display device 5) in response to repeated hits of the button 631B. On the other hand, the performance pattern Y of the promotion suggestion performance displays a continuous hit promotion image on the image display device 5 that instructs the player to press and hold the chance button 631B, and in response to the long press of the chance button 631B by the player. This is an effect in which the jackpot type repeatedly switches between jackpot A (display of "3R" on the image display device 5) and jackpot B (display of "10R" on the image display device 5).

Here, when the temporary stop mode of the decorative symbols is determined at the ratio shown in Fig. 284-94 (E), as shown in Fig. 284-95, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in an even-numbered combination (when the jackpot type is announced as jackpot A), a promotion suggestion effect is further executed and jackpot B is announced as the jackpot type announcement effect (the jackpot type is announced again as jackpot B, also called promotion), and the ratio (promotion ratio) is set to be lowest in the normal state, and to increase in the order of time-saving state A1 to time-saving state A3, time-saving state B, time-saving state C1 to time-saving state C2 (promotion ratio: time-saving state C (time-saving state C1, time-saving state C2) > time-saving state B > time-saving state A (time-saving state A1, time-saving state A2, time-saving state A3) > normal state).

As described above, when comparing the normal game state with the time-saving state B, when the decorative symbols provisionally stop in an even-numbered combination during the variable display of the time-saving state B (when a jackpot A is announced), the promotion effect is executed (when a jackpot B is announced again) at a higher rate than when the decorative symbols provisionally stop in an even-numbered combination during the variable display of the normal state (when a jackpot A is announced). In other words, even if the decorative symbols provisionally stop in an even-numbered combination during the variable display in the time-saving state B (when a jackpot A is announced), there is a higher possibility that a jackpot B will be announced again as a jackpot type announcement effect than in the normal state, so that the player can play with a sense of expectation even after the decorative symbols provisionally stop in an even-numbered combination during the variable display, and a decrease in interest due to the decorative symbols provisionally stopping in an even-numbered combination can be prevented.

Furthermore, when comparing the gaming state in the time-saving state A and the case in the time-saving state B, it is found that when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in an even number combination during the variable display of the time-saving state B (when the jackpot A is announced) ), the promotion effect is executed at a higher rate than when the decorative symbols temporarily stop when the combination of even numbers occurs during the variable display of time saving state A (when jackpot A is announced) (jackpot B is re-announced). ). In other words, in time-saving state B, even if the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during variable display with an even number combination (jackpot A is notified), jackpot B may be notified again as a jackpot type notification effect rather than time-saving state A. Because of the high degree of stability, the player can play the game with a sense of anticipation even after the player temporarily stops with an even number of decorative symbols during the variable display, and even if the player temporarily stops with an even number of decorative symbols. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to

In addition, in this feature section 130SG-4, when the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot, the jackpot type can be determined from jackpot A and jackpot B, which has a larger number of rounds than the jackpot A. Although the example has been given, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result of the second special figure is a jackpot and the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot B, the jackpot type is determined to be jackpot A. It may also be possible to determine a special variation pattern different from the case. Further, the special fluctuation pattern may be selectable as a common jackpot fluctuation pattern when the jackpot type becomes jackpot B in time saving state A, time saving state B, and time saving state C. By doing so, even if a plurality of types of time-saving states are provided, the variation pattern can be shared among different time-saving states, so the data capacity of the variation pattern can be reduced.

In addition, in the characteristic section 130SG, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times in the time-saving state A or time-saving state C, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B from the end of the 685th variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the number of variable displays reaches 685 times in the time-saving state A or time-saving state C, the game state may be controlled to the time-saving state B after the end of the active time-saving state (time-saving state A or time-saving state C). By doing so, it is possible to unify the control when the start condition of another time-saving state (second time-saving state) is satisfied during one time-saving state (first time-saving state), thereby reducing the control load on the CPU 103.

In addition, in the characteristic part 130SG, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times in the normal state (when the start condition of time-saving state B is met) or when the variable display result is a time-saving miss (when the start condition of time-saving state C is met), the game state is controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C from the end timing of the variable display, that is, the start timing of the pattern determination period (see Fig. 284-33, Fig. 284-34). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the number of variable displays reaches 685 times in the normal state (when the start condition of time-saving state B is met) or when the variable display result is a time-saving miss (when the start condition of time-saving state C is met), the game state may be controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C at the end timing of the pattern determination period of the variable display.

Furthermore, as in the feature section 130SG, if the number of variable displays reaches 685 in the normal state (the start condition for time-saving state B is satisfied), or if the variable display result is not successful in time-saving state (in time-saving state C), Regarding the form in which the gaming state is controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C from the end timing of these variable displays when the start condition is satisfied, From the control timing), a right-handed hitting promotion image may be started to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5, with an arrow and the words "right-handed hitting" written thereon. By doing this, the timing when the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state B or the time-saving state C and the timing at which the display of the right-hand hitting promotion image starts can be made to match, so that the game ball is directed to the right gaming area for the player. Launch can be facilitated in a more accurate period.

(Characteristic portion 130SG-5 to 10)
As shown in Fig. 285-1, a plurality of frame LEDs are provided as frame lamps 9b on wings 130SG221, 130SG321 provided on the left and right sides of the opening/closing door frame 50. In more detail, as shown in Fig. 285-1(A), a plurality of frame LEDs 901 are vertically arranged in a row at the upper left front edge of the left wing 130SG221, and a plurality of frame LEDs 902 are vertically arranged in a row at the lower left front edge. In addition, a plurality of frame LEDs 903 are vertically arranged in a row at the upper right front edge of the right wing 130SG321, and a plurality of frame LEDs 904 are vertically arranged in a row at the lower right front edge.

Also, as shown in FIG. 285-1(B), character panels 130SG400A-130SG400D are provided on the inner surfaces of the left and right wings 130SG221, 130SG321, on which characters appearing in various performances are displayed, and multiple frame LEDs are provided around them as frame lamps 9b. In more detail, multiple frame LEDs 911-916 are provided around the upper left character panel 130SG400A, multiple frame LEDs 917-922 are provided around the lower left character panel 130SG400B, multiple frame LEDs 923-928 are provided around the upper right character panel 130SG400C, and multiple frame LEDs 929-934 are provided around the lower right character panel 130SG400D. These frame LEDs may be provided in locations other than those mentioned above.

As shown in FIG. 285-2(A), the game board 2 is formed with an opening 2c for making the image display device 5 visible, and a plurality of board LEDs are provided around the opening 2c. It is being Specifically, board LEDs 951 to 956 are provided on the upper left side of the game board 2, board LEDs 957 to 962 are provided on the lower left side, board LEDs 963 to 968 are provided on the upper right side, and board LEDs 963 to 968 are provided on the lower right side. is equipped with board LEDs 969 and 970. The left board LEDs 951 to 962 are arranged on the first downstream path of the game ball provided on the left side of the opening 2c, and the right board LEDs 963 to 970 are arranged on the second downstream path of the game ball provided on the right side of the opening 2c. has been done. Note that these panel LEDs may be provided at locations other than those mentioned above.

Moveable body 32, which is located above opening 2c of game board 2, is provided with multiple movable body LEDs as movable body lamps 9d. In detail, movable body LEDs 981-986 are arranged in positions corresponding to the logo "XXX" displayed on the front of movable body 32, and movable body LEDs 987 and 988 are arranged in positions corresponding to the logo "XXX" displayed on the front of movable body 32. These movable body LEDs may be provided in locations other than those mentioned above.

In this way, the upper left panel LEDs 951 to 956 and the lower left panel LEDs 957 to 962 are arranged along the first flow path, and the upper right panel LEDs 963 to 968, the movable body LEDs 981 to 986, and the lower right panel LEDs 969 to 970. It is arranged along the second downstream path.

Further, the special variable winning ball device 7 provided at the lower right of the opening 2c of the game board 2 is provided with a plurality of attacker LEDs as an attacker lamp 9c. Specifically, a plurality of attacker LEDs 991 are provided above the big winning opening door 7A, and a plurality of attacking LEDs 992 are provided in the area corresponding to the big winning opening (so-called "attacker") below the big winning opening door 7A. An attacker LED 993 is provided near the second count switch 130SG024, and a plurality of attacker LEDs 994 are provided near the second starting opening switch 22B (variable winning ball device 6B) and below the gate switch 21. It is provided. In other words, the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are used as attacker LEDs that can emit light in the area corresponding to the big winning opening, and the attacker LED 993 is used as an attacker LED that can emit light in the area that corresponds to the second count switch 130SG024 (so-called V area). , the attacker LED 994 is an attacker LED that can emit light in the vicinity of the second starting port switch 22B and the area corresponding to the gate switch 21 (so-called "Public Electricity"), and is used for right-handed hitting promotion performance A and right-handed hitting promotion to be described later. In each of the effect V and the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, target areas can be individually illuminated. Note that these attacker LEDs may be provided at locations other than those mentioned above.

As shown in FIG. 285-2(B), the frame LEDs 901 to 904 as the frame lamp 9b are based on the luminance data described in the column of the luminance data table "WAXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later. The frame LEDs 911 to 922 emit light based on the luminance data written in the column of the luminance data table "WLXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later, and the frame LEDs 923 to 934 emit light based on the luminance data described below. Light is emitted based on the brightness data written in the "WRXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) column of the brightness data table.

In addition, the panel LEDs 951 to 962 emit light based on the luminance data described in the column of the luminance data table "ELXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later, and the panel LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on the luminance data described later. Light is emitted based on the luminance data written in the column of the table "ERXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character).

Furthermore, the movable LEDs 981 to 988 as the movable lamp 9d emit light based on luminance data written in a column of a luminance data table "LLXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later. Further, the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 as the attacker lamps 9c emit light based on brightness data written in a column of a brightness data table "ATXX" ("X" is any alphanumeric character) described later.

<Presentation modes in various game states>
Next, the sound patterns of the BGM (background sound) in each of the normal state, jackpot game state, time-saving state A1, C1, time-saving state A2, A3, B, C2, the brightness data table and main light emission colors of various lamps (frame LEDs 901-904, 911-934, board LEDs 951-970, movable body LEDs 981-988, attacca LEDs 991-994) will be explained based on Figure 285-3 (A).

In this feature section, the BGM output from the speakers 8L and 8R and each LED (frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 922, 923 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 956, 957 to 962, 963 ~968, 969~970) are different in their light emission modes.

For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(A), when the game state is normal, during the period of variable display (high-speed scrolling) of decorative symbols, the presentation control CPU 120 outputs BGM from the speakers 8L, 8R based on sound pattern N10, and illuminates the frame LEDs 901-904, 911-934, board LEDs 951-970, movable body LEDs 981-988, and attacca LEDs 991-994 based on a brightness data table for variable display (not shown). During the execution period of reach presentation, BGM is output based on sound pattern N20, and illuminates the frame LEDs 901-904, 911-934, board LEDs 951-970, movable body LEDs 981-988, and attacca LEDs 991-994 based on a brightness data table for reach presentation (not shown). During the notification performance period, background music is output based on sound pattern N30, and the frame LEDs 901-904, 911-934, board LEDs 951-970, movable body LEDs 981-988, and attacker LEDs 991-994 are controlled to emit light based on a brightness data table (not shown) for the notification performance.

In addition, when the gaming state is the jackpot gaming state, during the fanfare performance execution period (fanfare performance part), BGM is output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern F10, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904 are set to the brightness data table WA1, Frame LEDs 911 to 934 are brightness data tables WL1 and WR1, board LEDs 951 to 962 are brightness data tables EL1, board LEDs 963 to 970 are brightness data tables ER1, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 are brightness data tables LL1, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are brightness data Light is emitted based on table AT1. During the execution period of the right-handed driving promotion effect A, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F10, frame LEDs 901 to 904 are displayed in the brightness data table WAA, frame LEDs 911 to 934 are displayed in the brightness data tables WLA and WRA, and board LEDs 951 to 962 are displayed in the brightness data table WAA. Light is emitted based on the table ELA, the panel LEDs 963 to 970 in the luminance data table ERA, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 in the luminance data table LLA, and the attack LEDs 991 to 994 in the luminance data table ATA. During the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F10, frame LEDs 901 to 904 are set to brightness data table WAV, frame LEDs 911 to 934 are set to brightness data tables WLV and WRV, and panel LEDs 951 to 962 are set to brightness data table WAV. Light is emitted based on the table ELV, the panel LEDs 963 to 970 in the luminance data table ERV, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 in the luminance data table LLV, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 in the luminance data table ATV. During the execution period of the in-round effect, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F20, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness for the in-round effect. Light is emitted based on a data table (not shown). During the execution period of the ending effect, BGM is output based on the sound pattern F30, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness data table for the ending effect. (not shown).

In addition, when the gaming state is either the time saving state A1 or the time saving state C1 (during "FINAL BATTLE"), during the execution period of rush performance A (rush performance A part), the BGM is transmitted from the speaker 8L based on the sound pattern B10. , 8R, frame LEDs 901 to 904 to luminance data table WA2, frame LEDs 911 to 934 to luminance data table WL2, WR2, panel LEDs 951 to 962 to luminance data table EL2, panel LEDs 963 to 970 to luminance data table ER2, movable body The LEDs 981 to 988 emit light based on the brightness data table LL2, and the attacker LEDs 991 to 994 emit light based on the brightness data table AT2. During the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B10, the frame LEDs 901 to 904 are set to the brightness data table WAF, the frame LEDs 911 to 934 are set to the brightness data tables WLF and WRF, and the board LEDs 951 to 962 are set to the brightness data table WAF. Light is emitted based on table ELF, panel LEDs 963 to 970 in luminance data table ERF, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 in luminance data table LLF, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 in luminance data table ATF. During the execution period of the short time production, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B20, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness for the FINAL BATTLE production. Light is emitted based on a data table (not shown). During the execution period of result performance A, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B30, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness level for result performance A. Light emission control is performed based on a data table (not shown).

Also, when the gaming state is in any of the time saving state A2, time saving state A3, time saving state B, and time saving state C2 (during "BATTLE RUSH"), during the execution period of rush performance B (rush performance B part), the BGM is Output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound pattern R10, frame LEDs 901 to 904 to brightness data table WA3 to 7, frame LEDs 911 to 934 to brightness data table WL3 to 7, WR3 to 7, panel LEDs 951 to 962 to brightness data table EL3 to 7, board LEDs 963 to 970 emit light based on brightness data tables ER3 to 7, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 to brightness data tables LL3 to 7, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 to emit light based on brightness data tables AT3 to AT7. During the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, BGM is output based on the sound pattern B10, the frame LEDs 901 to 904 are set to the brightness data table WAF, the frame LEDs 911 to 934 are set to the brightness data tables WLF and WRF, and the board LEDs 951 to 962 are set to the brightness data table WAF. Light is emitted based on table ELF, panel LEDs 963 to 970 in luminance data table ERF, movable body LEDs 981 to 988 in luminance data table LLF, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 in luminance data table ATF. During the execution period of the short time production, BGM is output based on the sound pattern R20, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness for the BATTLE RUSH production. Light is emitted based on a data table (not shown). During the execution period of result performance B, BGM is output based on the sound pattern R30, and the frame LEDs 901 to 904, 911 to 934, board LEDs 951 to 970, movable body LEDs 981 to 988, and attacker LEDs 991 to 994 are set to the brightness level for result performance B. Light emission control is performed based on a data table (not shown).

In addition, in this characteristic section, if the variable display result is a big win or a miss with time-saving, or if the number of variable displays reaches 685 (when the conditions for starting time-saving state B are met), based on the winning of the big win or a miss with time-saving, or the establishment of the conditions for starting time-saving state B, it is possible to execute a rainbow effect in which each LED (frame LEDs 901-904, 911-922, 923-934 and panel LEDs 951-956, 957-962, 963-968, 969-970) lights up in a rainbow (rainbow-colored) pattern, a rainbow image (rainbow-colored image) is displayed on the image display device 5, and a movable body effect that operates the movable body 32.

For example, as shown in FIG. 285-3(B), when the variable display result becomes a jackpot (jackpot winning), the performance control CPU 120 controls the reach before the reach during the variable display where the variable display result becomes the jackpot. After that, while the rainbow performance and the movable body performance can be performed at each timing when control of the jackpot game state is started, the rainbow performance and the movable body performance are not performed during the pattern determination period.

In addition, when the number of variable displays reaches 685 (ceiling reaching fluctuation), the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the rainbow effect and the moving object effect at each timing before and after the 685th variable display, but executes the rainbow effect and the moving object effect during the pattern determination period and when control of time-saving state B starts. In other words, in this feature, during the variable display when the number of variable displays is 685, that is, during the variable display when the start condition of time-saving state B is met, the rainbow effect and the moving object effect are not executed.

In addition, when the variable display result is a miss with time reduction and the type of miss with time reduction is miss with time reduction A, the performance control CPU 120 is configured not to execute the rainbow performance and the movable body performance at each timing before the reach during the variable display where the variable display result is a miss with time reduction, after the reach, during the pattern determination period, and at the start of control of the time reduction state C1.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result is ``loss with time saving'' and the type of ``loss with time saving'' is ``loss with time saving'', the performance control CPU 120 performs the following: While the rainbow effect and the movable object effect are not performed at each timing, the rainbow effect and the movable object effect are performed at the timing when control is started in the time saving state C2. In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part is a time saving result (when the time saving state C1 or the time saving state C2 is controlled after the variable display), the rainbow effect and the movable body effect during the variable display and the symbol confirmation period. is no longer executed.

In particular, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance mode of the rainbow effect differs depending on the gaming state in which the variable display is executed. For example, as shown in the left diagram of FIGS. 285-3(C) and 285-3(D), the rainbow effect when the gaming state is the normal state is a step-up effect (see FIG. 284-50) with five stages. When the image of character E, which is the eye image, is displayed, a rainbow-like image (background image) is also displayed. This is a performance that lights up the lights. On the other hand, as shown in the right figures of Figures 285-3 (C) and 285-3 (D), the rainbow effect when the gaming state is in the time saving state is an effect that is executed together with the rush effect B during the symbol confirmation period. In this case, the image display device 5 displays an image different from the rainbow mode (non-rainbow mode image), and as in the case where the image of the character E, which is the fifth stage image, is displayed as a step-up effect, each LED is This is an effect that causes the light to emit light in a rainbow pattern.

In other words, as shown in FIGS. 285-3(C) and 285-3(D), in the rainbow effect executed in the normal state and the rainbow effect executed in the time saving state, the image is displayed on the image display device 5. While the display brightness data tables used to cause each LED to emit light are different, the light emission brightness data table used to cause each LED to emit light is common.

In addition, in the variable display in this characteristic part, as shown in FIGS. 285-9(A) to 285-9(E), when stopping the decorative symbols, the performance control CPU 120 displays these decorative symbols normally. It is now possible to perform a stop pattern action display in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed after it has been enlarged once from the size of the image, then returned to the normal size (reduced), and the reduced pattern is displayed in a glowing manner (flash display). However, whether or not the performance control CPU 120 performs the stop symbol action display depends on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a loss with a time saver, and whether the number of variable displays has reached 685 ( It differs depending on whether the start condition for time saving state B is satisfied or not.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (E) and FIGS. 285-9 (A) to 285-9 (E), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 performs a stop symbol action. The display is executed, but if the variable display result is a time saving result or the variable display number reaches 685 (the start condition of the time saving state B is satisfied), the performance control CPU 120 executes the stop symbol action display. do not. Although not particularly shown, even if the variable display result is a failure, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the stop symbol action display.

In this feature, as shown in FIG. 285-4(A), three types of right-hit promotion effects (promotion displays) can be executed: right-hit promotion effect A, right-hit promotion effect V, and right-hit promotion effect F.

The right-hit promotion effect A is an effect that is executed during the execution period of the fanfare effect based on the variable display of the jackpot when the variable display result of the first special chart is a jackpot, and is an effect that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to make the game ball enter the big prize hole. In addition, in the right-hit promotion effect A, the light emission control of each attack LED (attack LED 991, 992, attack LED 994, attack LED 993) is executed based on the brightness data tables WAA, WLA, WRA, ELA, ERA, LLA, ATA.

The right-hand hitting promotion performance V is a performance that is executed when the variable display result is a small hit, during the execution period of the fanfare performance based on the variable display that resulted in the small hit, and is This is an effect that prompts the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball (generate a V winning prize) by launching the game ball toward the game area. In addition, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, light emission control of each attacker LED (attacker LED 991, 992, attacker LED 994, attacker LED 993) is executed based on the brightness data tables WAV, WLV, WRV, ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV. It has become so.

The right-hit promotion effect F is an effect that is executed during the execution period of the entry effect (entry effect A or entry effect B) corresponding to the controlled time-saving state when the game is controlled to one of the time-saving states, and is an effect that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right game area to have the gate switch 21 detect the game ball (to establish the start condition for the normal pattern). In addition, in the right-hit promotion effect F, the light emission control of each attack LED (attack LED 991, 992, attack LED 994, attack LED 993) is executed based on the brightness data tables WAF, WLF, WRF, ELF, ERF, LLF, ATF.

More precisely, as shown in FIG. 285-4(B), as the promotion display of the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, a character image is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the image display device 5, and a character image is displayed at the lower left of the display area of the image display device 5. In the lower right corner, there is an image of the special variable winning ball device 7, and in the center of the image display device 5, there is a right-handed shot that prompts the player to hit the game ball into the big winning hole by hitting the game ball toward the right gaming area. Promotional images (message "Right-handed" and images of right-pointing arrows), semicircular arrow images convex upward from the left to the right at the top of the image display device 5 are displayed in a rainbow color scheme (rainbow colors) be done.

In addition, in the image display device 5, these character images, the image of the special variable winning ball device 7, the right-handed hitting promotion image, and the upward semicircular arrow image are displayed as background images from the center of the image display device 5. An effect image in which a plurality of radial straight lines spread out toward the edge of 5 is displayed. Furthermore, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, in the image of the special variable winning ball device 7, the parts corresponding to the arrangement positions of the attacker LEDs 991 and 992 are more noticeable than the parts corresponding to the arrangement positions of the attacker LEDs 993 and 994. It is highlighted by displaying it in a color scheme or with high brightness.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, the sound of "right-handed hitting" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed playing effect sound to encourage the player to place the game ball into the grand prize opening. be done.

As a promotion display for the right-handed hitting promotion performance V, an image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, and an image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is displayed at the center of the image display device 5 toward the right gaming area for the player. Right hitting promotion image (image with message “Aim for V!!”) that prompts the second count switch 130SG024 to detect the game ball (generate a V winning prize) by launching the game ball, the upper part of the image display device 5 , a semicircular arrow image convex upward from left to right is displayed in white. In addition, in the right-handed hitting promotion performance V, the right-handed hitting promotion image is displayed in the same size as the right-handed hitting promotion image displayed in the right-handed hitting promotion performance A.

Furthermore, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, the part of the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 that corresponds to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 993 is more noticeable than the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 991, 992 or the attacker LED 994. It is highlighted by displaying it in a color scheme or with high brightness.

In addition, during the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, the voice "Aim for V" will be heard from speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed acting effect urging the player to place the game ball into the grand prize opening. Output.

The promotion display for right-hit promotion effect F includes an image of the special variable winning ball device 7 in the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5, a right-hit promotion image (an image with the message "Aim here!!") in the center of the image display device 5 that prompts the player to shoot a game ball toward the right game area to have the second count switch 130SG024 detect the game ball (to generate a V win), and a semicircular arrow image that protrudes upward from left to right and is displayed in white in the upper part of the image display device 5. Note that in right-hit promotion effect F, the right-hit promotion image is displayed in a smaller size than the right-hit promotion image displayed in right-hit promotion effect A and right-hit promotion effect V (size of right-hit promotion image: right-hit promotion effect A = right-hit promotion effect V > right-hit promotion effect F).

Furthermore, in the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, the part of the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 that corresponds to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 994 is more noticeable than the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 991, 992 or the attacker LED 993. It is highlighted by displaying it in a color scheme or with high brightness.

In addition, during the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, the voice "Aim for V" will be heard from speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed playing effect sound to encourage the player to place the game ball into the grand prize opening. Output.

Now, looking at the lighting state of each attacca LED during the execution of the right-hit promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (C), during the execution period of the right-hit promotion effect A, lighting control is executed based on the brightness data tables WAA, WLA, WRA, ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA, so that the parts of the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 that correspond to the positions of the attacca LEDs 991 and 992 are highlighted more than the parts that correspond to the positions of the attacca LEDs 993 and 994, and accordingly the attacca LEDs 991 and 992 flash in a rainbow color scheme (rainbow colors), while the attacca LEDs 993 and 994 remain off.

In addition, during the execution period of the right-handed hitting promotion effect V, the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 is Among them, the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LED 993 is highlighted more than the part corresponding to the arrangement position of the attacker LEDs 991, 992 and the attacker LED 994, and the attacker LED 993 blinks in white. , the attacker LEDs 991 and 992, and the attacker LED 994 remain off.

During the execution period of the right-hit promotion performance F, light emission control is executed based on the brightness data tables WAF, WLF, WRF, ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF, so that the part of the image of the special variable winning ball device 7 that corresponds to the position of the attacca LED 994 is highlighted by being displayed in a more conspicuous color scheme and with a higher brightness than the parts that correspond to the positions of the attacca LEDs 991, 992 and attacca LED 993, and accordingly, the attacca LED 994 flashes in white, while the attacca LEDs 991, 992, and attacca LED 993 remain off.

In addition, while right-handed hitting promotion performance A is being executed, the LEDs corresponding to the right-handed hitting path are sequentially illuminated in a rainbow color scheme, and for right-handed hitting promotion performance V and right-handed hitting promotion performance F, The LEDs corresponding to the right-handed hitting path are sequentially emitted in white.

Also, if we pay attention to the right-handed playing effect sound, as shown in Figure 285-4 (D), the speakers 8L and 8R are played at the same volume during execution of right-handed hitting promotion effect A and during execution of right-handed hitting promotion effect V. A right-handed performance sound is output. On the other hand, while the right-handed player promotion effect F is being executed, the right-handed player effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a lower volume than during the execution of the right-handed person promotion effect A and the right-handed player promotion effect V ( Volume of right-handed hitting performance sound: Right-handed hitting promotion performance A = Right-handed hitting promotion performance V > Right-handed hitting promotion performance F).

As described above, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (E), in the right-handed hitting promotion effect A, the character image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the right-handed hitting promotion image has the same size as the right-handed hitting promotion effect V. In addition, this is an effect that is displayed in a larger size than the right-handed hitting promotion effect F. In addition, the right-handed driving promotion performance A includes the promotion display shown in (B) after displaying the name on the image display device 5 (displaying a message image of "FEVER" indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled). A promotion display of right-handed hitting promotion effect A) is displayed. In addition, when a name is displayed on the image display device 5 in the right-handed driving promotion effect A, a message image other than the name display is not displayed (for example, below the message image of "FEVER" which is the name display). Message images such as "entering" (entering display) and message images indicating conditions for the variable display result to become a jackpot (jackpot explanation display) are not displayed.

As shown in FIG. 285-4(E), the right-hit promotion effect V is an effect in which no character image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the right-hit promotion image is displayed at the same size as the right-hit promotion effect A and at a larger size than the right-hit promotion effect F. In addition, the right-hit promotion effect V displays the promotion display shown in FIG. 285-4(B) (promotion display for the right-hit promotion effect V) after displaying the name on the image display device 5 (displaying the message image "FEVER" indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state). Note that when the name display is performed on the image display device 5 in the right-hit promotion effect V, no message images other than the name display are displayed (for example, no message image such as "enter" (enter display) or a message image showing the conditions for the variable display result to be a jackpot (jackpot explanation display) is displayed below the message image of the name display "FEVER").

As shown in FIG. 285-4(E), the right-hit promotion effect F is an effect in which the character image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the right-hit promotion image is displayed in a smaller size than the right-hit promotion effect A and the right-hit promotion effect F. In addition, the right-hit promotion effect F is displayed as a name display on the image display device 5 (display of a message image of "FINAL BATTLE" corresponding to the time-saving state A1 or the time-saving state C1, or a message image of "BATTLE RUSH" corresponding to the time-saving state A2, the time-saving state A3, the time-saving state B, or the time-saving state C2), and then the promotion display shown in FIG. 285-4(B) (promotion display of the right-hit promotion effect F) is displayed. Note that, when the name display is performed on the image display device 5 in the right-hit promotion effect F, in addition to the message image other than the name display, a message image of "enter" (enter display) and a message image (jackpot explanation display) indicating the conditions for the variable display result to be a jackpot (in the case of this characteristic part, if the movable body 32 falls during the variable display, a jackpot will be displayed).

Regarding each of the right-handed hitting promotion effects shown in this feature section, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (E), after the name display is executed on the image display device 5, the promotion display corresponding to each right-handed hitting promotion effect is performed. (See Figure 285-4 (B)) is shown as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For at least one of the right-handed hitting promotion performances, the name display may be displayed on the image display device 5 after the promotion display corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 285-4 (F), in the right-handed hitting promotion effect F, after a promotion display corresponding to the right-handed playing promotion effect F is displayed on the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting promotion effect F is displayed. While the name display corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance A and the right-handed hitting promotion performance V, the name display corresponding to each right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 as in this feature section. After the game is played, a promotion display corresponding to each right-handed hitting promotion effect may be displayed.

In addition, in this feature part, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), when the number of variable displays reaches 685, the rainbow mode of each LED as a rainbow effect is displayed during the symbol confirmation period of the 685th variable display. Although the embodiment of emitting light and displaying a rainbow image on the image display device 5 (executing a rainbow effect) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pattern determination period of the 685th variable display is shown as an example. In this case, each LED may not emit light in a rainbow manner as a rainbow effect, and the rainbow image may not be displayed on the image display device 5 (the rainbow effect may not be executed).

In addition, in this feature part, as shown in FIG. 285-3 (B), if the variable display result is a time saving result, the rainbow mode of each LED as a rainbow effect is displayed during the symbol determination period of the variable display. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the rainbow image is not displayed on the image display device 5 and the rainbow image is not displayed (the rainbow effect is not executed), the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result may be time-saving or not. In this case, during the pattern determination period of the variable display, each LED may emit light in a rainbow manner as a rainbow effect and a rainbow image may be displayed on the image display device 5 (the rainbow effect may be executed).

Next, FIG. 285-5 is a diagram showing the performance mode from the jackpot fluctuation to the rush performance A via the jackpot, and FIG. 285-6 is a diagram showing the performance mode of the winning fluctuation and ceiling reaching fluctuation in the time-saving loss B. FIG. 285-7 is a diagram showing the performance mode of the rush performance B, and FIG. 285-8 is a diagram showing the performance mode when the winning B with time saving is won during the time saving state A1.

In these Figures 285-5 to 285-8, the extended commands generated corresponding to each performance part and performance scene, the BGM (sound patterns) output as background sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the display mode of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 9b are shown. Note that the performance mode in Figure 285-8 corresponds to the performance mode in Figure 284-65.

In Figure 285-5, the production scenes (Q11) (Q12) correspond to the fanfare production part, the production scene (Q13) corresponds to the in-round production part, and the production scenes (Q14) to (Q16) onwards are rush production A. Applies to part-time. In addition, in FIG. 285-7, the production scenes (S2) to (S11) correspond to the rush production part B, and the production scenes (S12) and after correspond to the BATTLE RUSH production part. In addition, in Figure 285-8, the production scenes (T1) to (T3) correspond to the rush production part A, the production scenes (T4) to (T12) correspond to the rush production part B, and the production scenes (T13) onwards corresponds to the BATTLE RUSH production part. Note that the display mode displayed in each production scene is just an example, and a plurality of images not shown are actually displayed.

<Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)>
FIG. 285-10 is a diagram for explaining the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 lights/blinks/turns off one or more lamps (LEDs) among the plurality of lamps (LEDs) included in the game effect lamp 9. The luminance data for the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver) is output to the LED driver (also referred to as a lamp driver). In addition, below, the control of lighting/flashing/lights out performed by the performance control CPU 120 on lamps such as LEDs will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing through each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 to be controlled by the lamp in order to turn on/blink/extinguish the lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

To explain more specifically, the ROM 121 and RAM 122 of the performance control board 12 store brightness data tables in which brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9 is stored. The brightness data tables include an error brightness data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach brightness data table used in each part during the SP reach (such as the instigation part, winning epilogue part, losing epilogue part, and role operation part), and a background brightness data table.

Furthermore, the background brightness data table includes a normal background brightness data table used in a low probability low base state (normal state), a fanfare background brightness data table used in a fanfare state in which a fanfare effect is executed, a jackpot background brightness data table used during a round in a jackpot game state, an ending background brightness data table used in an ending state in which an ending effect is executed to notify the end of the jackpot game state, and a time-saving background brightness data table used in a low probability high base state (time-saving state).

The above-mentioned background brightness data tables are used without overlapping, and one of the background brightness data tables is used depending on which of multiple game states the game is controlled to, such as normal state, fanfare state, jackpot game state, ending state, and time-saving state. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background brightness data tables for each game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data based on that background brightness data table to the LED driver. This causes each game effect lamp 9 to be lamp-controlled depending on the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority is set for each of the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-10, the error brightness data table, the SP reach brightness data table, and the background brightness data table have the highest priority when used.

For example, when outputting brightness data based on the normal background brightness data table in the normal state and SP reach develops, the production control CPU 120 outputs the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach as the normal background. The brightness data is output to the LED driver based on the SP reach brightness data table. As a result, when the game effect lamp 9 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the brightness data table for normal background and it develops into SP reach, the mode corresponding to SP reach is based on the brightness data table for SP reach. The game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled. In addition, during the period when the brightness data based on the brightness data table for SP reach is output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for background is not normally output to the LED driver, but after the end of SP reach, the brightness data is normally output to the LED driver. When the state returns to normal, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the background is output to the LED driver, and when it becomes a jackpot and enters the fanfare state, the brightness data based on the brightness data table for the fanfare background is output to the LED driver. Output.

More specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the game state being controlled, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background brightness data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the game progresses to an SP reach, etc., the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach is used preferentially over the background brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the lamp control time using the background brightness data table. In other words, even while the performance control CPU 120 is lamp controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach brightness data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table, but since the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table, the brightness data contained in the background brightness data table is not output to the LED driver. After the SP reach ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the luminance data contained in the background luminance data table to the LED driver again, starting from the continuation of the luminance data that was being updated.

Also, for example, when an error occurs while outputting brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table during an SP Reach, the performance control CPU 120 uses the error brightness data table corresponding to the error in preference to the SP Reach brightness data table, and outputs brightness data based on the error brightness data table to the LED driver. As a result, when an error occurs while the game effect lamp 9 is being lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the SP Reach based on the SP Reach brightness data table, the game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error brightness data table. Note that during the period when the brightness data based on the error brightness data table is being output to the LED driver, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is not output to the LED driver, but when the error is released and the game state returns to the SP Reach state, the brightness data based on the SP Reach brightness data table is output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the production control CPU 120 uses a timer to measure the lamp control time corresponding to the SP reach that is being controlled, and uses the SP reach brightness data table corresponding to the SP reach to control the brightness of the LED driver. Data is output, but when an error occurs, the error brightness data table corresponding to the error is used preferentially over the SP reach brightness data table to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement of the lamp control using the SP reach brightness data table. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table even while controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the error brightness data table, but the SP reach The brightness data included in the brightness data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error brightness data table, so the brightness data contained in the SP reach brightness data table should not be output to the LED driver. It has become. After the error is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting the brightness data included in the SP reach brightness data table to the LED driver again from the continuation of the brightness data that has been updated.

<Lighting mode of game effect lamp>
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is lamp-controlled by outputting brightness data to the LED driver by the effect control CPU 120 as described above. In this embodiment, terms related to the lighting of each game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp 9b, board lamp, movable lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c, are "unlit,""almostunlit,""lit," and "blinking." etc. Further, as described above, the mode of each game effect lamp 9 by "lighting" and "blinking" is also referred to as "lighting mode".

The term "off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and has a brightness of 0. The term "almost off" includes a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but has a very low brightness (for example, the brightness "1" described below).

For example, when the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the brightness data of frame lamp 9b and the like is "000", the frame lamp is "off". Also, when the brightness data (RGB data) of the frame lamp is "111", the frame lamp lights up in white with extremely low brightness (see Figure 285-19). In this embodiment, the state of the frame lamp when the RGB data is "111" is sometimes referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

When the W (white) data defined as the brightness data of the movable lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, etc. is "0", the movable lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c are "turned off". Further, when the brightness data (data of W) of the movable lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c is "1", the movable lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c are lit at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of the movable lamp 9d and the attacker lamp 9c in which the data of W is "1" may be referred to as "substantially off" for convenience.

The term "lighting" includes a constant lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is always on, a wave lighting state in which the multiple lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are switched from off to on in sequence, and a hazy lighting state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing brightness. Specifically, "lighting" includes lighting of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is any of "2" to "F." The brightness data is hexadecimal data that can be specified from "0" to "F," with "0" being no brightness, "1" being the lowest brightness, and "F" being the highest brightness.

The term "blinking" refers to a mode in which the game effect lamps 9 are in a state other than "turning off" or "on" as described above, and the brightness of each lamp when lit is a first brightness and a second brightness higher than the first brightness. This includes an aspect in which the mode is alternately switched between. For example, "blinking" includes repeating lighting and turning off or almost turning off, and specifically, "blinking" includes cases where the brightness data is one of "2" to "F", This includes switching between cases where the brightness data is "0" and "1" over time. As described above, in this embodiment, the lighting mode of the lamp is hazy lighting, but the hazy lighting is a state in which the game effect lamp 9 is dimly lit while changing the brightness. , and blinking differ from each other in that each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 repeats lighting and turning off or almost turning off.

<Explanation about the game effect lamp>
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figs. 285-11 to 285-36.

[About lamp control of game effect lamps using brightness data table]
The performance control CPU 120 uses a brightness data table stored in the ROM 121 or the RAM 122 to turn on/blink/extinguish one or more of the plurality of lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by lamp control.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that is decremented by one for each frame (33 ms) of the image to be displayed. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start a display corresponding to each part (for example, various displays (reach display, etc.) in each part such as a fanfare performance part and an instigation part), the display control unit 123 performs display control of the image display device 5 based on image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121 or RAM 122. The display control unit 123 sets an extension command (for example, an extension command DXXX (where "X" is any alphanumeric character)) corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5 according to the display control being performed by itself, and transmits the extension command to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 specifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) for which display control is performed by the display control unit 123 based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123.

For example, FIG. 285-11 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 285-11, when the display control unit 123 performs display control in a fanfare performance part, it sends an extension command (BC02) for specifying the fanfare performance part to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the fanfare performance part based on the extension command received from the display control unit 123.

In the parent table, information is stored that specifies the lamps (lighting points) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, information that specifies the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp, and information that specifies the child table that is referenced during lamp control for each lamp (designated address of the child table). Note that in the parent table, only the lamps that are the subject of lamp control are designated, and lamps that are not the subject of lamp control are not designated. For example, in the parent table shown in FIG. 285-13(A) described later, the frame lamp 9b, the board lamp, the movable body lamp 9d, and the attacca lamp 9c are designated as the subjects of lamp control, and 600,000 ms is designated as the maximum time that lamp control is performed for each lamp. In the parent table shown in FIG. 285-13(A), child tables WA1, WL1, and WR1 are designated for the frame lamp 9b, child tables EL1 and ER2 are designated for the board lamp, child table LL1 is designated for the movable body lamp 9d, and child table AT1 is designated for the attacca lamp 9c.

As shown in FIG. 285-11, in the parent table for the fanfare performance part, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is specified as the maximum time for lamp control to be performed on the frame lamp 9b, and the performance control CPU 120 In order to time this 600000ms (10 minutes), the counter is decremented by 1 every 10ms. That is, the performance control CPU 120 has timed 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter subtraction process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control using the child table specified by the parent table until a maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes) is counted. In the parent table for the fanfare production part, WA1/WL1/WR1 are designated as child tables.

The child table specifies information that specifies the lamp (lighting location) that is the target of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the grandchild table that is referred to at each time when lamp control is performed. information (designated address of grandchild table) is stored. For example, in the child table for the frame lamp shown in FIG. 285-13(B), which will be described later, grandchild tables (WA11-17/WL11-17/WR11-17, etc.) are referenced for each time such as ta1-ta15. is specified.

As shown in FIG. 285-11, in the child tables WA1/WL1/WR1 for the fanfare performance part, 800, 200, 130... ms are specified as the times ta1 to ta15 during which lamp control is performed on the frame lamp 9b, and the performance control CPU 120 counts 800, 200, 130... ms by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and performs lamp control using the grandchild tables specified by each of the child tables WA1/WL1/WR1 until the count reaches 800, 200, 130... ms. For example, in the child table WA1 for the fanfare performance part, RA11 and WA11 to 17 are specified as grandchild tables.

The grandchild table stores information specifying the lamps (illuminated locations) that are the subject of lamp control among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, and the brightness data used at each time when the lamp control is performed. For example, grandchild tables RA11 to RA13 corresponding to time ta1 store brightness data corresponding to RGB used every 40 ms.

The value of the brightness data corresponds to the current value output to the lamp that is the target of the lamp control. For example, a frame lamp is composed of LEDs consisting of three elements, "R", "G", and "B", and the brightness data for each element corresponds to the current value output to each element. Specifically, the brightness data has 16 current values from 0 to F, and when the brightness data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (for example, 0), and when the brightness data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when brightness data of "A" is output to the "R" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "A" flows through the "R" element, when brightness data of "1" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "1" flows through the "G" element, and when brightness data of "F" is output to the "G" element, a current corresponding to the brightness data of "F" flows through the "G" element.

The frame lamp 9b can emit light in various colors by causing currents corresponding to luminance data to flow through each RGB element. Further, the frame lamp 9b can be lit in a color corresponding to each effect or character by emitting light based on brightness data. For example, in a fanfare performance, data "F00" is outputted from an LED lamp to an LED as luminance data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in red. In rush effect A, data "F0F" is outputted from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in reddish-purple color. In rush performance B, data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED as brightness data, and a current corresponding to the data flows, causing the LED to light up in yellow.

As shown in FIG. 285-11, for example, in the grandchild table WA11 corresponding to time ta2, "FFF" and "444" are specified as the brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp, alternating at 30 ms intervals. The performance control CPU 120 counts up the time specified by the child table, 200 ms, by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver at 30 ms intervals based on the grandchild table WA11 until the count reaches 200 ms. Then, based on the received brightness data, the LED driver passes a current corresponding to the brightness data through the specified LED. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the performance control CPU 120 has timers corresponding to each of the parent table, child table, and grandchild table, and performs lamp control based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while decrementing the timers at regular intervals (e.g., 10 ms intervals).

Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table, and when it has completed outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still remains, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, if the timer value corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0 while the performance control CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, it sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This switches the grandchild table, and lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table after the switch.

The timer management of the child table by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 285-12 is a diagram for explaining an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of a child table. As shown in Figure 285-12, in the child table for the fanfare performance part, 200 ms is specified as the time ta2 for lamp control for the frame lamp 9b, and WA11, WL11, and WR11 are specified as the grandchild tables. In the grandchild table WA11, "FFF" and "444" are specified alternately at 30 ms intervals as the brightness data (RGB data) for each lamp. For ease of explanation, the data "FFF" in the first 30 ms will be referred to as data 1, and the data "444" in the next 30 ms will be referred to as data 2.

The performance control CPU 120 counts the 200 ms specified by the child table WA1 by subtracting 1 from the counter every 10 ms, and outputs the brightness data of data 1 and data 2 to the LED driver at 30 ms intervals based on the grandchild table WA11 until the count reaches 200 ms. If the count has not yet reached 200 ms after outputting data 1 through data 2, the brightness data is again output to the LED driver starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 200 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting the brightness data based on the grandchild table WA11 at that point, and starts outputting the brightness data based on the next grandchild table W12 specified by the child table. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 loops the output of the brightness data until the time specified by the child table has elapsed.

As shown in the parent table shown in Figure 285-13 (A), which will be described later, child data is specified for 600,000 ms (10 minutes), and the 10-minute data in such a parent table is used for troubleshooting purposes. Responsible for That is, the production control CPU 120 performs lamp control by switching the parent table based on the production control command from the CPU 103, but if some problem occurs while the lamp control is being performed based on a certain parent table, the production control Even if the CPU 120 does not receive a production control command from the CPU 103, lamp control is performed based on the same parent table for 10 minutes, which prevents different lamp control from being performed one after another after a problem occurs. can do.

In addition, as in the child table shown in Figure 285-13 (B), which will be described later, grandchild data is specified for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the last specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a child table is , when the value of the timer corresponding to the child table becomes 0, the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified point of the child table due to the timer of the parent table remaining. Responsible for

In addition, as in the grandchild table shown in Figure 285-17, which will be described later, luminance data is specified for 600000ms (10 minutes) at the final specified location, and the 10-minute data in such a grandchild table is When the value of the timer corresponding to becomes 0, the timer of the child table still remains, which plays the role of preventing ramp control from being performed again from the first specified location of the grandchild table.

In this way, by specifying 10-minute brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, the lamp is maintained at a fixed light emission, which prevents problems with the lamp lighting changing continuously. Furthermore, by specifying brightness data spanning 600,000 ms (10 minutes) at the end of the grandchild table specified at the end of the child table, problems with the lamp lighting changing continuously can be more effectively prevented.

As mentioned above, the brightness data table is composed of a parent table, a child table, and a grandchild table, but in the brightness data table used in each part explained below, the parent table, child table, and grandchild table Among them, only characteristic tables are shown and other tables may be omitted.

[Brightness data table used in the fanfare part]
Fig. 285-13(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the fanfare production part. As shown in Fig. 285-13(A), the parent table in the brightness data table used in the fanfare production part stores information specifying 600000 ms (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WA1, WL1, WR1, EL1, ER1, LL1, AT1) to be referenced when lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 285-13 (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamp 9b in a brightness data table used in the fanfare production part. As shown in Figure 285-13 (B), in child tables WA1, WL1, and WR1 of frame lamp 9b, the time of the fanfare production part for frame lamp 9b is subdivided and grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period are specified. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and their description is omitted.

For example, at times ta1, ta13, and ta15, grandchild tables RA11, RA12, and RA13 are specified. As shown in Figures 285-14 (A) to (C), in grandchild tables RA11, RA12, and RA13, data of various brightnesses corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 30 ms intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables RA11, RA12, and RA13, causing each of the frame lamps 9b to smoothly light up in the rainbow colors (also called rainbow colors) corresponding to a confirmed win.

At times ta2, ta4, ta6, ta8, and ta10, grandchild tables WA11, WL11, and WR11 are specified. Grandchild tables WA11, WL11, and WR11 correspond to grandchild table WA11 for the frame lamp in the white blinking (white flash) brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 285-15(A), in grandchild table WA11, "FFF" and "444" are specified alternately at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. The performance control CPU 120 causes frame lamp 9b to blink in white by performing lamp control based on grandchild table WA11. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 causes frame lamp 9b to blink in white three times at time ta2 by performing lamp control over 200 ms (30 ms x 6) based on grandchild table WA11.

At times ta3, ta5, and ta7, grandchild tables WA13-15, WL13-15, and WR13-15 are specified. As shown in Figures 285-15(C) to (E), grandchild tables WA13-15 specify various brightness data in the range of similar colors of green "0F0" at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables WA13-15, WL13-15, and WR13-15, thereby lighting up frame lamp 9b in a green-based color.

At times ta9, ta11, ta12, and ta14, grandchild tables WA12, 16, 17, WL12, 16, 17, and WR12, 16, 17 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-15(B), (F), and (G), the grandchild tables WA12, 16, and 17 output red color at 30 ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. Various brightness data in a range of colors similar to "F00" are specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables WA12, 16, 17, WL12, 16, 17, WR12, 16, 17, thereby lighting the frame lamp 9b in a red color.

In this way, in the child tables WA1, WL1, and WR1 of the fanfare production part, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b lights up/blinks while changing its color to greenish or redish colors with white blinking in between. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 285-5 (Q11), it is possible to create a fanfare performance to celebrate the start of the jackpot game state.

[Brightness data table used in the entry performance part A]
Fig. 285-16(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the entry performance part A. As shown in Fig. 285-16(A), the parent table in the brightness data table used in the entry performance part A stores information specifying 600000 ms (10 minutes) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WA2, WL2, WR2, EL2, ER2, LL2, AT2) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 285-16 (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used in the entry performance A part. As shown in Figure 285-16 (B), in the child tables WA2, WL2, and WR2 of frame lamp 9b, the time of the entry performance A part is subdivided for frame lamp 9b, and grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period are specified. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and their description is omitted.

For example, at times tb1 and tb2, grandchild tables WA21, WL21, and WR21 are specified. As shown in Figures 285-17 (A) to (C), in grandchild tables WA21, WL21, and WR21, brightness data corresponding to "000" (off) is specified at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. For the second brightness data, brightness data corresponding to "F0F" is specified. The performance control CPU 120 basically turns off frame lamp 9b (momentarily lights up reddish purple based on the second brightness data) by controlling the lamps based on grandchild tables WA21, WL21, and WR21.

During times tb3 to tb24 (excluding tb10, tb19, and tb22), grandchild tables WA22 to 2A, WL22 to 2A, and WR22 to 2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, WR26, 28, and 29) is specified. Grandchild tables WA22 to 2A, WL22 to 2A, and WR22 to 2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29) are the grandchild tables shown in Figures 285-17 (D) to (I). As in the tables WA22, 23, WL22, 23, and WR22, 23, "F0F" and "000" are specified at 30 ms intervals as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. The production control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA22 to 2A, WL22 to 2A, and WR22 to 2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, WR26, 28, and 29). The lamp 9b blinks in reddish-purple color. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 120 controls the grandchild tables WA22 to 2A, WL22 to 2A, and WR22 to 2A (excluding WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, WR26, 28, 29) at each time tb3 to tb24. ) for a predetermined period of ms (30 ms×n times), the frame lamp 9b is blinked in reddish-purple a predetermined number of times.

At times tb10, tb19, and tb22, grandchild tables WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29 are specified. Grandchild tables WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29 specify various brightness data in the range of similar colors of reddish purple flashing "0F0", such as white-purple or purple-white flashing at 30 ms intervals, as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables WA26, 28, 29, WL26, 28, 29, and WR26, 28, 29, to light up frame lamp 9b in a reddish purple color.

In this way, in the child tables WA2, WL2, and WR2 of the entry performance A part, the frame lamp 9b turns off until a predetermined time has passed from the start, and then the brightness data switches so that it basically lights up/flashes in a reddish-purple color, so as shown in Figure 285-5 (Q14) to (Q16), it is possible to liven up the entry performance A, which notifies the start (entry) of the control of the time-saving state A1, C1 (FINAL BATTLE performance).

[Brightness data table used in rush performance B (scene 1) part]
Fig. 285-18(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 1) part. As shown in Fig. 285-18(A), in the parent table in the brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 1) part, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is stored as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child table (WA3, WL3, WR3, EL3, ER3, LL3, AT3) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 285-18(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 1) part. As shown in FIG. 285-18(B), in the child tables WA3, WL3, and WR3 of the frame lamp 9b, a grandchild table to be referred to in the rush effect B (scene 1) part is specified for the frame lamp 9b. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time tc1, grandchild tables WA31, WL31, and WR31 are specified. As shown in FIGS. 285-19(A) to (C), in the grandchild tables WA31, WL31, and WR31, "000" ( Luminance data corresponding to (lights off) is specified. Note that for the second luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "FF0" is designated, and for the third to fifth luminance data, luminance data corresponding to "FFF" or "666" is designated. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA31, WL31, and WR31 to basically turn off the frame lamp 9b (instantly turns on in yellow based on the second brightness data).

In this way, in the child tables WA3, WL3, and WR3 of the entry performance B (scene 1) part, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b is basically turned off from the start, so that entry performance B, which notifies the start (entry) of the control of the time-saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 (BATTLE RUSH performance) can be enhanced, as shown in Figure 285-7 (S2) and (S6).

[Brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 2) part]
Fig. 285-20(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 2) part. As shown in Fig. 285-20(A), in the parent table in the brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 2) part, 600000 ms (10 minutes) is stored as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and information specifying the child table (WA4, WL4, WR4, EL4, ER4, LL4, AT4) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 is stored.

FIG. 285-20(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 2) part. As shown in FIG. 285-20(B), the child tables WA4, WL4, and WR4 of the frame lamp 9b subdivide the time of the rush performance B part for the frame lamp 9b, and subdivide the time of the rush performance B part, and the grandchildren referenced in each time period. A table is specified. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time td1, since no grandchild tables are specified, the performance control CPU 120 basically turns off the frame lamp 9b.

During times td2 to td11, grandchild tables WA41A to 41J, WL41A to 41J, and WR41A to 41J are designated. The grandchild tables WA41A to 41J, WL41A to 41J, and WR41A to 41J are used for each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b, like the grandchild tables WL41A, 41B, WR41A, and 41B shown in FIGS. As the RGB data to be output, yellowish colors (low brightness) such as "ECA" and "000" are specified at 30 ms intervals (some 40 ms). The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables WA41A to 41J, WL41A to 41J, and WR41A to 41J, thereby lighting the frame lamp 9b in a yellowish color (low brightness). In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for a predetermined period of ms (30 ms x n times) based on the grandchild tables WA41A to 41J, WL41A to 41J, and WR41A to 41J at each time td2 to td11. The frame lamp 9b is turned on in a yellowish color (low brightness).

In this way, in the child tables WA4, WL4, and WR4 of the rush effect part B (scene 2), the frame lamp 9b is turned off until a predetermined time has elapsed from the start, and then is basically changed to a yellowish color (low light). Since the brightness data switches to turn on/flash at the brightness), the control (BATTLE RUSH effect) of time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 is controlled as shown in Figure 285-7 (S3) and (S4). It is possible to enliven the entry performance B that notifies the user that the entry is about to start (entering).

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 3) part]
FIG. 285-22(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 3) part. As shown in FIG. 285-22(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the rush performance B (scene 3) part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 ms (10 minutes) and information specifying child tables (WA5, WL5, WR5, EL5, ER5, LL5, AT5) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

Figure 285-22 (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 3) part. As shown in Figure 285-22 (B), in the child tables WA5, WL5, and WR5 of frame lamp 9b, the time of the entry performance B part is subdivided for frame lamp 9b, and grandchild tables to be referenced in each time period are specified. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and their description is omitted.

For example, at time te1, only the grandchild table WA52 is specified. As shown in FIG. 285-23(A), in the grandchild table WA52, brightness data corresponding to a yellowish color (low brightness), such as "FC0," is specified at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild table WA52, causing the frame lamp 9b to basically light up in a yellowish color (low brightness).

At times te2 to te6, grandchild tables WA52, WL51A to 51C, and WR51A to 51C are specified. As shown in FIG. 285-23(A), in grandchild table WA52, yellow-based colors (low brightness) such as "600" and "000" are specified at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. Also, as shown in FIG. 285-23(B) to (F), in grandchild tables WL51A to 51C and WR51A to 51C, low brightness red, green, and blue such as "600", "006", and "060" are specified at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables WA52, WL51A-51C, and WR51A-51C to light the frame LEDs 901-904 of the frame lamp 9b in a yellowish color (low brightness) and light the frame LEDs 911-934 in red, green, and blue (low brightness).

In this way, in the child tables WA5, WL5, and WR5 of the entry performance B part (scene 3), the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b lights up mainly in low-brightness yellow, with low-brightness red, green, and blue, so that the entry performance B, which notifies the start (entry) of the control of the time-saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 (BATTLE RUSH performance) can be enhanced, as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S5).

[Brightness data table used in rush performance B (scene 4) part]
Fig. 285-24(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 4) part. As shown in Fig. 285-24(A), the parent table in the brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 4) part stores information specifying 5000 ms (5 seconds) as the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9, and child tables (WA6, WL6, WR6, EL6, ER6, LL6, AT6) to be referenced during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 285-24(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for the frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 4) part. As shown in FIG. 285-24(B), in the child tables WA6, WL6, and WR6 of the frame lamp 9b, a grandchild table to be referred to in the rush effect B (scene 4) part is specified for the frame lamp 9b. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time tf1, only the grandchild tables WA61 and WL61 are specified. As shown in Figures 285-25 (A) and (B), in the grandchild tables WA61 and WL61, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) and brightness data corresponding to "000" (off) are alternately specified at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame lamp 9b. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA61 and WL61, causing each of the frame lamps 9b to flash in the rainbow colors (also called rainbow colors) corresponding to a confirmed win.

In this way, in child tables WA6, WL6, and WR6 of entry performance part B (scene 4), the brightness data is switched so that frame lamp 9b flashes in rainbow colors, so as shown in FIG. 285-7 (S9), it is possible to enhance the performance of "V STOCK," that is, the notification that there is a jackpot reserved memory.

[Brightness data table used in rush effect B (scene 5) part]
FIG. 285-26(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush effect B (scene 5) part. As shown in FIG. 285-26(A), in the parent table in the brightness data table used for the rush performance B (scene 5) part, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600,000 ms (10 minutes) and information specifying child tables (WA7, WL7, WR7, EL7, ER7, LL7, AT7) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9 are stored.

Figure 285-26 (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table for frame lamp 9b in the brightness data table used in the entry performance B (scene 5) part. As shown in Figure 285-26 (B), in child tables WA7, WL7, and WR7 of frame lamp 9b, grandchild tables referenced in the entry performance B (scene 5) part are specified for frame lamp 9b. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child table, and other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and their description is omitted.

For example, at time tg1, grandchild tables WA71, WL71, and WR71 are specified. As shown in FIG. 285-27(A), in grandchild table WA71, brightness data corresponding to "000" (off) is specified at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data to be output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. For the fifth and subsequent brightness data, brightness data corresponding to "FF0", "770", "000", etc. are specified. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables WA71-74, causing frame lamp 9b to basically light up in yellow.

At times tg2 to tg4, grandchild tables WA71 to 74, WL71 to 74, and WR71 to 74 are specified. As shown in Figures 285-27 (B) to (D), grandchild tables WA72 to 74 specify brightness data corresponding to "FF0", "440", "310", etc. at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data output to each lamp included in frame lamp 9b. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on grandchild tables WA71 to 74, causing frame lamp 9b to basically light up/blink in a yellowish color.

In this way, in the child tables WA7, WL7, and WR7 of the rush effect B (scene 5) part, the brightness data is switched so that the frame lamp 9b is basically lit in a yellowish color, so as shown in FIG. As shown in 7 (S10), it is possible to enhance the rush effect B that notifies that the control (BATTLE RUSH effect) of the time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2 is started (entering).

[Comparison of lamp control between fanfare effect, entry effect A, and entry effect B]
285-28(A) to (G) are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamp control between the fanfare effect, the break-in effect A, and the break-in effect B. In the following, the lamp control of the frame LEDs 901 to 904 in the frame lamp 9b is explained as an example, and the explanation of the lamp control of the frame LEDs 911 to 934 is omitted, but the lamp control may be the same as that of the frame LEDs 901 to 904.

First, using FIGS. 285-28(A) to 285-28(C), the first and second luminance data in the first grandchild table (first grandchild table) of each performance part are compared.

As shown in FIG. 285-28(A), at the start of the fanfare performance part, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table RA11. In the grandchild table RA11, "F06", "F08", "F0A", and "F0C" (red-based colors) are specified at 40 ms as the first RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901-904, and "F00" (red) is specified at 40 ms as the second RGB data. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table RA11, and lights up the frame lamp 9b in a red-based color in response to the start of the fanfare performance that notifies the start of control of the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 285-28(B), at the start of the entry performance A part, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table WA21. In the grandchild table WA21, the first RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901-904 is specified as "000" (off) at 20 ms, and the second RGB data is specified as "F0F" (magenta) at 20 ms. By performing lamp control based on the grandchild table WA21, the performance control CPU 120 first turns off the frame lamp 9b and then lights it up in magenta, the main color of entry performance A, in response to the start of entry performance A, which notifies the start of control of the time-saving states A1 and C1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-28(C), at the start of the rush performance part B, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild table WA31. In the grandchild table WA31, "000" (lights off) is specified as the first RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904 in 20 ms, and "000" (lights off) is specified as the second RGB data in 10 ms. FF0” (yellow) is specified. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table WA31 to control the frame lamp 9b in response to the start of the rush performance B that notifies the start of the control of the time saving states A2, A3, B, and C2. is first turned off, then turned on in yellow, which is the main color of rush effect B.

In this way, the variable display in which the time saving state B is reached, or the variable display in which the display result is the winning time saving state A or B, is not a variable display controlled to a jackpot gaming state, so the aspect of the image display device 5 and By changing the mode of the frame lamp 9b in a different manner from the jackpot variable display, in particular, by changing the initial luminance data and making the initial light emission mode different, it becomes clear that the light emission mode of the frame lamp 9b is different. Since it is possible to prevent the display from being mistaken for a jackpot variable display controlled by a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to improve the marketability of a gaming machine equipped with a time-saving state.

Next, using FIGS. 285-28 (D) to (F), the main colors in the first and next grandchild tables (first and second grandchild tables) of each production part are compared.

As shown in FIG. 285-28 (D), at the start of the fanfare performance part, lamp control is first performed based on the first grandchild table RA11. In the grandchild table RA11, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901-904. Next, lamp control is performed based on the second grandchild table WA11. In the grandchild table WA11, brightness data corresponding to white flashing is specified as the RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901-904. In this way, at the start of the fanfare performance part, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables RA11 and WA11, thereby lighting up the frame lamp 9b in a red-based color including the primary color red (first color).

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-28(E), at the start of the rush effect part A, lamp control is first performed based on the first grandchild table WA21. In the grandchild table WA21, luminance data corresponding to turning off is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. Next, in the rush effect part A, lamp control is performed based on the second grandchild table WA22. In the grandchild table WA22, luminance data corresponding to a reddish-purple color is specified as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA21 and WA22 at the start of the rush performance A part, so that after first extinguishing the frame lamp 9b, the main color reddish-purple (the first Lights up in reddish-purple colors including 2 colors).

Further, as shown in FIG. 285-28(F), at the start of the rush performance B (scene 1) part, lamp control is first performed based on the first grandchild table WA31. In the grandchild table WA31, luminance data corresponding to turning off is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. Next, in the rush performance B (scene 2) part, lamp control is performed based on the second grandchild table WA41. In the grandchild table WA41, luminance data corresponding to yellow-based colors is specified as RGB data output to each lamp included in the frame LEDs 901 to 904. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild tables WA31 and WA41 at the start of the rush performance B part (scene 1, scene 2), so that after first extinguishing the frame lamp 9b, the main It is lit in a yellow-based color including yellow (third color).

Here, similar colors will be explained based on FIGS. 285-29. Colors have three attributes: hue (tint), value (brightness, brightness), and saturation (vividness). A combination of colors that have the same tone (hue group with the same brightness, lightness (brightness) and saturation (vividness)) and are adjacent in terms of hue (adjacent colors); 2. A combination of different tones but the same hue; 3. Includes combinations of colors that differ only in brightness or saturation.

To explain an example of "1. Combinations of adjacent colors (adjacent colors) with the same tone (hue group with the same lightness (brightness, luminance) and saturation (vividness))" above with reference to Figures 285-29 (A) and (B), if the three primary colors of light, red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F], are arranged at angular intervals of 120 degrees on a hue wheel with a given number of colors (24 colors in this case), each of the three colors will be dissimilar to one another. Colors with a hue difference within an angle range of 30 to 60 degrees on this hue wheel are "similar colors," and combinations are not limited to adjacent colors that are adjacent to each other on the hue wheel.

For example, if red (R) is the base color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side and 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side (total 60 degrees) are similar to red (R), if green (G) is the base color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees to the reddish purple (M) side and 30 degrees to the yellow (Y) side (total 60 degrees) are similar to green (G), and if blue (B) is the base color, colors that fall within a range of 30 degrees to the light blue (C) side and 30 degrees to the reddish purple (M) side (total 60 degrees) are similar to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the hue wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, combinations of colors that have a hue difference within the range of 30 to 60 degrees on the hue wheel can be considered "similar colors".

Furthermore, it is preferable that similar colors include combinations of colors that are included in warm colors, such as red and yellow, which are chromatic colors that give a warm feeling, and cool colors, such as blue and purple, which are chromatic colors that give a cold feeling, as well as combinations of colors that are included in neutral colors, which are chromatic colors that are intermediate between warm and cool colors, such as green and purple.

In this embodiment, as explained in Figures 285-28 (A) to (C), the initial luminance data of the fanfare performance part is data corresponding to "lighting", while the initial luminance data of the entry performance A part and entry performance B part is data corresponding to "lighting out", so that the initial luminance data are different; however, if the initial luminance data of the fanfare performance part, entry performance A part and entry performance B part are all "lighting", it is sufficient that each luminance data has a different color code. In this case, it is preferable that the initial luminance data of the fanfare performance part, entry performance A part and entry performance B part have different color codes, but that each is a color that does not belong to the above-mentioned "similar colors".

In addition, the second luminance data of the fanfare performance part is the primary color red "F00", the second luminance data of the entry performance A part is the primary color magenta "F0F", and the second luminance data of the entry performance B part is the primary color yellow "0FF". As shown in Figure 285-29 (B), each color is a color that does not belong to the "similar color" of other colors, making it possible to clearly show the difference between the jackpot game state and the time-saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, as explained in FIGS. 285-28 (A) to (C), the first brightness of the first grandchild table of each of the fanfare performance part, rush performance A part, and rush performance B part Although the data and the second brightness data are different from each other, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the luminance data of the first and second luminance data are the same, as explained in FIGS. It is sufficient that at least the main color of the first grandchild table of the first child table and the main color of the second grandchild table of the first child table are different.

In addition, the main colors for the fanfare part, the entry A part, and the entry B part were red (F00), reddish purple (F0F), and yellow (0FF), respectively, but these could be changed to any color that does not belong to a similar color family.

Further, the second control data following the first control data in the grandchild table RA11 of the fanfare production part includes light emission data of the first color (for example, red), but also includes the light emission data of the second color (for example, reddish-purple) and the third color. The control data does not include light emission data of a color (for example, yellow), and the second control data after the first control data in the grandchild table WA31 of the rush effect B (scene 1) part is the control data that does not include light emission data of a third color (for example, yellow). Although the control data includes light emission data for a yellow color but does not include light emission data for a first color (e.g. red) and a second color (e.g. reddish-purple), the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the first entry effect for entering the time saving state B and the second entry effect for entering the time saving states C1 and C2 can be executed separately, the first entry effect in the first entry effect may be executed separately. The second control data following the luminance data includes luminescence data of a second color (e.g., magenta), but also includes luminescence data of a first color (e.g., red) and a third color (e.g., yellow). The second control data after the first brightness data in the second rush performance includes light emission data of the first color (for example, red), but the second color (for example, reddish-purple) and the third Control data that does not include color (for example, yellow) light emission data may be used.

The "main color" may be a specific color or color family that has the longest illumination time among all the brightness data specified in the brightness data table used to control the frame lamp 9b during each of the fanfare performance part, the entry performance A part, and the entry performance B part (performance period).

As shown in Figure 285-28 (G), the "main color" of the fanfare production part is red "F00", the "main color" of the rush production part A is red-purple "F0F", and the rush production part B part The "main color" is yellow "0FF", but not only the one with the longest emitting time with the luminance data corresponding to these color codes, but also the one with the longest emitting time with similar colors of the predetermined luminance data It suffices if the brightness data is longer than similar colors.

Specifically, in the fanfare production part, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "red color" is 40%, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "yellow color" is 10%, and the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "green color" is 40%. The percentage is 25%, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "red-purple color" is 5%, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "blue-based color" is 5%, and the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "light blue color" is 5%. , the percentage of time that the light is emitted in a "white color" is 10%. Therefore, the "red-based colors" that emit light at 40% of the time are considered to be the "main colors."

In part A of the rush effect, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "red color" is 5%, the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "yellow color" is 5%, and the percentage of time that the light is emitted in "green color" is 20%. , 40% of the time it emits light in "reddish-purple color," 20% of the time it emits in "blue color," 5% of the time it emits light in "light blue color," and 5% of the time it emits light in "white color." The percentage of time that the light is emitted by "color" is said to be 5%. Therefore, the "reddish-purple color", which has the highest luminescence time of 40%, is considered the "main color".

During the entry performance part B, the percentage of time that it emits light in "reddish colors" is 20%, the percentage of time that it emits light in "yellowish colors" is 40%, the percentage of time that it emits light in "greenish colors" is 20%, the percentage of time that it emits light in "purple-red colors" is 5%, the percentage of time that it emits light in "blueish colors" is 5%, the percentage of time that it emits light in "light blue colors" is 5%, and the percentage of time that it emits light in "whiteish colors" is 5%. Therefore, "yellowish colors," which emit light the most at 40%, are considered to be the "main color."

In addition, in the above example, the color that is illuminated the most for the majority of the time in each performance part is designated as the "primary color," but the present invention is not limited to this, and the color that corresponds to the color code that is specified the most in the brightness data table in each performance part may be designated as the "primary color."

In addition, in FIG. 285-28, the lamp control of the frame LEDs 901-904 in the frame lamp 9b in each of the fanfare performance part, entry performance A, and entry performance B has been explained, but the other frame LEDs 911-934, board lamp, and movable body lamp 9d may also be controlled in the same way as the frame LEDs 901-904 in each of the fanfare performance part, entry performance A, and entry performance B, or different lamp control may be performed.

[Brightness data table used in right-handed hitting promotion effect part A]
FIG. 285-30(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the right-handed hitting promotion effect part A. As shown in FIG. 285-30(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the right-handed driving promotion effect part A, the maximum time for lamp control to be performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 2000 ms (2 seconds). and information specifying child tables (WAA, WLA, WRA, ELA, ERA, LLA, ATA) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 285-30(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of child tables for the board lamp, the movable lamp 9d, and the attacker lamp 9c in the brightness data table used in the right-handed driving promotion effect part A. As shown in FIG. 285-30(B), in the child tables ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA of the board lamp, movable lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c, the grandchild table referred to in the right-handed hitting promotion effect part A is specified. ing. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time th1, grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, LLA1, and ATA1 are specified. As shown in Figures 285-31 (A) to (C), in the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, brightness data corresponding to various colors such as "F00," "0F0," and "00F" are specified at 20 ms intervals as RGB data to be output to each lamp included in the board lamp and movable body lamp 9d. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, thereby lighting up the board lamp and movable body lamp 9d in multiple colors.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 285-31(D), in the grandchild table ATA1, various RGB data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are output at 30 ms intervals to the attacker LED 991 included in the attacker lamp 9c. Brightness data is specified, and as W data output to the attacker LEDs 992 to 994, brightness data corresponding to "0" (light off) is specified at 30 ms intervals. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table ATA1 to light only the attacker LED 991 in rainbow colors.

In this way, in the child tables ELA, ERA, LLA, and ATA of the right-hit promotion performance part A, the brightness data is switched so that the board lamp and movable body lamp 9d are lit in multiple colors in the direction of movement of the game ball along the second flow path of the game ball, and in the attacca lamp 9c, only the attacca LED 991 corresponding to the large prize opening is lit in rainbow colors, so that as shown in Figure 285-5 (Q12), with the start of control of the jackpot game state, the winning area (large prize opening) that the player is aiming for by playing with a right hit can be appropriately notified.

[Brightness data table used in right-handed hitting promotion production V part]
FIG. 285-32(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the V part of the right-handed driving promotion effect. As shown in FIG. 285-32 (A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the V part of the right-handed driving promotion effect, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 2000 ms (2 seconds). and information specifying child tables (WAV, WLV, WRV, ELV, ERV, LLV, ATV) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

FIG. 285-32(B) is a diagram for explaining an example of child tables for the board lamp, the movable lamp 9d, and the attacker lamp 9c in the brightness data table used in the right-handed driving promotion performance V part. As shown in FIG. 285-32(B), in the child tables ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV of the board lamp, movable lamp 9d, and attacker lamp 9c, the grandchild table referred to in the right-handed driving promotion performance V part is specified. ing. In this embodiment, only particularly characteristic grandchild tables are described as child tables, and other grandchild tables are shown as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time ti1, grandchild tables ELV1, ERV1, LLV1, and ATV1 are specified. The grandchild tables ELV1, ERV1, and LLV1 are almost the same as the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1, so their description will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 285-32(C), in the grandchild table ATV1, various brightness levels corresponding to "000" (lights out) are output at 30 ms intervals as RGB data output to the attacker LED 991 included in the attacker lamp 9c. Data is specified, and as the W data output to the attacker LEDs 992 and 994, luminance data corresponding to "0" (lights out) is specified at 30 ms intervals, while as the W data output to the attacker LED 993, Luminance data corresponding to "F" (white) and "0" (light off) is specified at 30 ms intervals. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the grandchild table ATV1 to cause only the attacker LED 993 to blink in white.

In this way, in the child tables ELV, ERV, LLV, and ATV of the right-handed promoting performance V part, the board lamp and the movable lamp 9d are oriented in the direction of movement of the game ball so as to follow the second downstream path of the game ball. 285-58 (B3) As shown in FIG. 2, with the start of control of the small winning game state, it is possible to suitably notify the winning area (V winning hole) that the player aims at by playing the right-handed game.

[Brightness data table used in right-handed hitting promotion effect part F]
FIG. 285-33(A) is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the brightness data table used for the right-handed hitting promotion effect F part. As shown in FIG. 285-33(A), in the parent table of the brightness data table used for the right-handed driving promotion effect part F, the maximum time for which lamp control is performed for each game effect lamp 9 is 600000 ms (10 minutes). and information specifying child tables (WAF, WLF, WRF, ELF, ERF, LLF, ATF) that are referred to during lamp control for each game effect lamp 9.

Figure 285-33 (B) is a diagram for explaining an example of child tables for the board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, and attacca lamp 9c in the brightness data table used in the right-hit promotion performance F part. As shown in Figure 285-33 (B), the child tables ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF of the board lamp, movable body lamp 9d, and attacca lamp 9c specify grandchild tables referenced in the right-hit promotion performance F part. Note that in this embodiment, only particularly distinctive grandchild tables are described in the child tables, and other grandchild tables are indicated as "not shown" and their explanations are omitted.

For example, at time tj1, grandchild tables ELF1, ERF1, LLF1, and ATF1 are specified. The grandchild tables ELF1, ERF1, and LLF1 are omitted because they are almost the same as the grandchild tables ELA1, ERA1, and LLA1. As shown in FIG. 285-33(C), in the grandchild table ATF1, various brightness data corresponding to "000" (off) are specified at 30 ms intervals as the RGB data output to the attacca LED 991 included in the attacca lamp 9c, and brightness data corresponding to "0" (off) is specified at 30 ms intervals as the W data output to the attacca LEDs 992-993, while brightness data corresponding to "F" (white) and "0" (off) are alternately specified at 30 ms intervals as the W data output to the attacca LED 994. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamp based on the grandchild table ATF1 to make only the attacca LED 994 flash in white.

In this way, in the child tables ELF, ERF, LLF, and ATF of the F part to promote right-handed hitting, the board lamp and the movable lamp 9d are oriented in the direction of movement of the game ball so as to follow the second downstream path of the game ball. 285-5 (Q16 ), with the start of the time-saving state control, it is possible to suitably notify the winning area (second starting winning opening and gate) that the player is aiming for in the right-handed game.

[Comparison of lamp control between right-handed hitting promotion performance A, right-handed hitting promotion performance V, and right-handed hitting promotion performance F]
285-34 to 285-36 are diagrams for explaining a comparison of lamp control of right-handed hitting promotion performance A, right-handed hitting promotion performance V, and right-handed hitting promotion performance F. In the following, the lamp control of the panel lamp and the movable lamp 9d will be explained as an example, and the description of the lamp control of the frame lamp 9b will be omitted. It may also be control.

As shown in FIGS. 285-34 (A) to (D), in the right-handed hitting promotion performances A, V, and F, the user must perform a right-handed hitting operation aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 (attacker) on the image display device 5. An image (for example, an arrow image Z101 and an attacker image Z102) that prompts the player to win is displayed, and the board lamp and the movable lamp 9d are sequentially turned on along the second downstream route, and the attacker moves to the winning area. Lamp control is performed to blink the corresponding lamp.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285-35, lamp control is performed based on the grandchild tables LLA1, ELA1, and ERA1 (see FIG. 285-31) used in the right-handed driving promotion effect part A. When the grandchild table corresponding to the body lamp 9d is arranged so as to correspond to the layout of each lamp on the game board 2, from the left side to the right side, the lower left board LEDs 957 to 962, the upper left board LEDs 951 to 956, and the movable body LED 981 ~988, upper right panel LEDs 963 to 968, and lower right panel LEDs 969 to 970.

As shown in FIG. 285-35, at time tk1, brightness data "000" (off) for all lamps is specified, but at time tk2, lighting data for LEDs 951 to 953 on the upper left panel is specified, and the time At tk3, the lighting data of the upper left panel LEDs 954 to 956 and the movable body LEDs 981, 982, 987, and 988 are specified, at time tk4, the lighting data of the movable body LEDs 983 and 984 is specified, and at time tk6, the lighting data of the movable body LEDs 985, 986 lighting data is specified, at time tk8, lighting data for upper right panel LEDs 963 to 965 is specified, at time tk9, lighting data for upper right panel LEDs 966 to 965 is specified, and at time tk13, lighting data for upper right panel LEDs 966 to 965 is specified, and at time tk13, lighting data for upper right panel LEDs 966 to 965 is specified. Lighting data for LEDs 969 and 970 is specified. Note that the LEDs 957 to 962 on the lower left panel are arranged on the first downstream path and are not targeted, so turn-off data is specified.

Therefore, at times tk1 and 2, the upper left board LEDs 951 to 953 and 954 to 956 light up in that order (see FIG. 285-34(A)), at times tk3 to 7, the movable body LEDs 981 to 988 light up in that order (see FIG. 285-34(B)), at times tk8 to 12, the upper right board LEDs 963 to 968 light up in that order (see FIG. 285-34(C)), and at times tk13 onwards, the lower right board LEDs 969 and 970 light up in that order (see FIG. 285-34(D)). In this way, in the right hit promotion performances A, V, and F, various lamps light up in accordance with the changes in the arrow image Z101 that extends in accordance with the movement of the game ball flowing down the second flow path.

In addition, the brightness data of the lower left board LEDs 957-962, the upper left board LEDs 951-956, the movable body LEDs 981-988, the upper right board LEDs 963-968, and the lower right board LEDs 969-970 is specified to light up in seven colors (rainbow) in right hit promotion performance A and right hit promotion performance V, but in right hit promotion performance F, brightness data that lights up in a single color other than seven colors (rainbow) (for example, white, red, green, blue, etc.) may be specified.

Also, as shown in FIG. 285-36(A), in the grandchild table ATA1 of the attacca lamp 9c in the right-hit promotion performance A, brightness data corresponding to lighting and turning off is alternately specified as data output to the attacca LEDs 991, 992 arranged in the large prize opening that is the target of winning, and brightness data corresponding to turning off is alternately specified as data output to the other attacca LEDs 993-994, so that lamp control is performed to flash the lamp corresponding to the large prize opening area that is the target of winning in the attacca.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 285-36 (B), in the grandchild table ATV1 of the attacker lamp 9c in the right-handed driving promotion performance V, the light is lit as data output to the attacker LED 993 arranged in the big winning opening that is the winning target. The brightness data corresponding to the lights out are specified alternately, and the brightness data corresponding to the lights out are alternately specified as the data output to the other attacker LEDs 991 to 992, 994, so the attacker is eligible for winnings. Lamp control is performed to blink the lamp corresponding to the V area.

Also, as shown in FIG. 285-36 (C), in the grandchild table ATF1 of the attacca lamp 9c in the right-hit promotion performance F, brightness data corresponding to lighting and turning off is alternately specified as data output to the attacca LED 994 located in the second start winning port that is the target of winning, and brightness data corresponding to turning off is alternately specified as data output to the other attacca LEDs 991-993, so lamp control is performed to flash the lamp corresponding to the normal power area that is the target of winning in the attacca.

In addition, although the feature section 130SG exemplifies a form in which the present invention is applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine.

Further embodiments for implementing the gaming machine of the present invention are described below based on examples.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Fig. 286 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by being shot from a predetermined ball shooting device.

A first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. In the example shown in FIG. 286, they are provided on the right side of the game area. The first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B can each variably display special patterns as multiple types of special identification information. Special patterns are also called "special patterns." The variable display of special patterns is also called "special pattern game." Both the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are configured using 7-segment LEDs or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a display of multiple types of special symbols that can be changed. For other symbols such as performance symbols, small symbols, and normal symbols, "variable display" also means a display of multiple types of symbols that can be changed. Performance symbols are also called decorative symbols or ornamental symbols. Variable display is also called variable display, or simply "change." Changes include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, and deforming, enlarging, or reducing one or more symbols. Changes may include a mode of displaying a certain symbol in a flashing manner. In the variable display of special symbols and normal symbols, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variable display of performance symbols, multiple types of performance symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more performance symbols are deformed, enlarged, or reduced. In the variable display of any symbol, a specified symbol is displayed as a stop display as a display result at the end. Stop display is also called derived display, or simply derived. The symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in a variable display is also called the final stop symbol or the final symbol. The final stop symbol in a special symbol game is also called the final special symbol. The display result of the variable display includes the display result of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display result. The display result of the special symbol is also called the special symbol display result. The execution time of the variable display includes the special symbol change time, which is the change time of the special symbol, and is also called the variable display time.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol". The special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". A special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game." A special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game." The number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2, a normal symbol display 20 is provided. In the example shown in FIG. 286, it is provided on the left side of the game area. The normal symbol display 20 can perform variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are also called "normal symbols". The variable display of normal symbols is also called "normal symbol game". The normal symbol display 20 is configured using 7-segment LEDs and the like. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which some or all of the multiple LEDs are lit, or a pattern in which all of the multiple LEDs are turned off. The final stop symbol in the normal symbol game is also called a confirmed normal symbol. The display result of the normal symbol is also called a normal symbol display result. The execution time during which the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol game is also called a normal symbol fluctuation time.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 may be configured using any of the following devices, for example: an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (electro luminescence), a projector, and a screen. Alternatively, the image display device 5 may be configured using a mechanism capable of forming any image. The image display device 5 is capable of displaying various types of performance images. Furthermore, the image display device 5 is not limited to performance images, and can display any control-related image, such as an inspection image or a setting image.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, variable display of production symbols is performed in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. The production pattern is a display pattern that shows numbers, etc., and is a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern and the normal pattern. On the screen of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 286, "left", "middle", and "right" effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are provided, and the first special figure game or the second special figure game In synchronization with the game, the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner by, for example, being scrolled up and down or updated. The special symbol game and the variable display of the production symbols that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display. The synchronization of variable display may be such that the timing at which the variation of the symbol starts and the timing at which the variation ends and the symbol is finally stopped and displayed are common timings for different types of symbols. . The final stop symbol in the variable display of performance symbols is also referred to as a determined performance symbol, a determined decorative symbol, or a determined decorative symbol. Since the variable display of the production symbols is synchronized with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, the variable display time of the production symbols is the same as the special symbol variation time.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending and an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed may be provided. The pending display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding to the variable display. The display area for displaying the pending display is also referred to as a pending display area. The display area for displaying the active display is also referred to as an active display area. The number of pending variable displays is also referred to as the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories. Above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B shown in FIG. 286, a first pending display device 25A and a second pending display device 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display device 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of LEDs that are lit. The second reserved display 25B displays the second reserved memory number by the number of lit LEDs. A regular pattern reserved display 25C, which is composed of multiple LEDs, is provided above the regular pattern display 20 shown in FIG. 286. The regular pattern reserved display 25C displays the regular pattern reserved memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The regular pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number corresponding to the regular pattern game.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number of winning balls, for example three, are paid out, and the first starting condition for executing the first special symbol game can be satisfied. The variable prize winning ball device 6B forms a second starting prize opening that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a normal electric accessory solenoid 81 shown in FIG. 287 as a normal electric accessory. The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in the vertical position, thereby causing the second start. The winning opening is in a closed state in which game balls do not enter. The fact that the variable prize winning ball device 6B is in the closed state is also said to be that the second starting prize opening is in the closed state. The variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole by moving the movable wing pieces to the tilting position when the normal electric accessory solenoid 81 is in the on state. The fact that the variable prize winning ball device 6B is in the open state is also said to be that the second starting prize opening is in the open state. When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number of winning balls, for example three, are paid out, and the second starting condition for executing the second special symbol game can be satisfied. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

The entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A is also called the first start winning. The entry of a game ball into the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is also called the second start winning. The game ball that enters the first start winning hole is detected by the first start winning hole switch 21A shown in FIG. 287. The game ball that enters the second start winning hole is detected by the second start winning hole switch 21B shown in FIG. 287. Based on the occurrence of the first start winning, the first reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the first special symbol game can be executed by the first special symbol display device 4A to variably display the special symbol. Based on the occurrence of the second start winning, the second reserved memory number can be added and updated, and the second special symbol game can be executed by the second special symbol display device 4B to variably display the special symbol.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In the example shown in FIG. 286, general winning openings 10 are provided in two locations at the lower left of the game area. When a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of prize balls, for example 10, are paid out.

In the game area formed by the game board 2, a first route and a second route are provided as downstream routes for the game balls to flow down. The first path is mainly provided in an area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The second path is mainly provided in an area on the right side of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front. The left side area of the image display device 5 is also referred to as a left side gaming area or a left gaming area. The right area of the image display device 5 is also referred to as a right side gaming area or a right gaming area. The left side game area and the right side game area may be separated by, for example, the end face of the image display device 5 in the game area, the arrangement of game nails, or the like. Shooting the game ball toward the left side game area in order to cause the game ball to flow down the first path is also called left-handed hitting. Shooting the game ball toward the right side game area in order to cause the game ball to flow down the second path is also called right-handed hitting. The first route is also referred to as a left-handed batting route. The second route is also referred to as a right-handed batting route. The first route and the second route may be configured as different routes, or may be partially shared routes.

A game ball is ejected from the ball launcher and driven into a game area in response to an operation of a ball operation handle provided on the ball launcher. When the game ball hit in the game area is guided to the left side game area and flows down the first path, it is guided along the array of game nails, for example, and is guided to the second path in the right side game area. Impossible or difficult to guide. When the game ball hit in the game area is guided to the right side game area and flows down the second path, it is guided along the arrangement of the game nails, for example, so that it does not flow to the first path in the left side game area. Impossible or difficult to guide.

The winning ball device 6A is provided on a first path in the left-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the first path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B is provided on a second path in the right-side play area, allowing game balls flowing down the second path to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B may also allow game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area to enter. The variable winning ball device 6B may be positioned so that game balls flowing down the second path in the right-side play area have an easier time entering than game balls flowing down the first path in the left-side play area.

A passage gate 41 and a special variable winning ball device 50 are provided on the second route in the right side gaming area. The passage gate 41 forms a passage area through which game balls can pass. The game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 287. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, it becomes possible to add and update the number of normal reserved memories, and it becomes possible to perform variable display of normal symbols by the normal symbol display 20 as a normal symbol game.

The special variable winning ball device 50 is a special electric device that forms a large winning port that can be changed between a closed state and an open state by a large winning port solenoid 82. The upper part of the special variable winning ball device 50 is formed with a guide passage with a passage width in the front and rear direction that allows the game ball to pass through. This guide path slopes downward from the right side to the left side, and walls are provided on the front and back sides of the extended passage. In the center of the guide passage, a role entrance that serves as the large winning port is formed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a movable member 52 that can move in the front and rear directions is provided as a large winning port opening and closing member at a position where the large winning port can be opened and closed. In the special variable winning ball device 50, a fixed member 53 that forms a fixed passage is provided in the part of the guide passage where the large winning port is not formed.

The movable member 52 is driven by the big prize opening solenoid 82, and can move forward and backward to open and close the accessory entrance which becomes the big prize opening. In the special variable winning ball device 50, the game ball that enters the inside from the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23. Inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a V winning area 51, which is a specific area, is provided as a winning area through which game balls can pass. Further, inside the special variable winning ball device 50, a normal area different from the V winning area 51 is provided. A plate-shaped distribution member that can switch the V winning area 51 between an open state and a closed state is provided above the V winning area 51 as a V winning opening opening/closing member. The distribution member is driven by the specific area solenoid 83 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning area 51. A game ball can pass through the V winning area 51 when it is in an open state, and a game ball cannot pass through it when it is in a closed state. The game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 is detected by the specific area switch 24. The game ball that does not pass through the V winning area 51 passes through the normal area. The game balls that have passed through the V winning area 51 and the gaming balls that have passed through the normal area without passing through the V winning area 51 are both detected by the ejection port switch 26 and then released outside the special variable winning ball device 50. is discharged to.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the direction and speed of the game balls, and numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an outlet is provided for game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes. Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 for lighting up the game effects are provided around the periphery of the game area. The game effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs. A movable body 32 that operates according to the effects is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a ball-striking operation handle that is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward the gaming area using a ball-striking device. The batting operation handle is also referred to as an operation knob. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, there is a batting ball that holds game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine so as to be able to be supplied to the batting ball firing device. A feeding tray is provided. The batted ball supply tray is also called an upper tray. A prize ball storage tray is provided below the upper tray, in which prize balls dispensed when the upper tray is full flow down and are stored. The prize ball storage tray is also called the lower tray.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided. The stick controller 31A can be held and tilted by the player, and is provided with a trigger button that can be pushed or pulled by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A shown in FIG. 287. The push button 31B can be pressed by the player. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B shown in FIG. 287. In the pachinko game machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push buttons 31B are used as detection means for detecting actions such as operations by the player, but detection means other than these may be used.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being executed, the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately, so the normal game based on the passage is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number, for example, "4". In the normal game, when a specific normal symbol, such as a normal winning symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal winning". On the other hand, when a normal symbol other than the normal winning symbol, such as a normal losing symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol is "normal losing". In the case of "normal winning", an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period. At this time, the second starting winning port is opened.

When a game ball passes through and enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game can be started by the first special pattern display device 4A. When a game ball passes through and enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game can be started by the second special pattern display device 4B. Note that, during the period when the special pattern game is being executed or during the period when the game ball enters the start winning hole and a start winning occurs, the special pattern game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately, so the special pattern game based on the start winning is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number, for example, "4". In the special pattern game, when a specific special pattern such as a jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern becomes "jackpot". In contrast, when a predetermined special pattern, such as a small win pattern, that is different from a big win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern is "small win". Also, when a special pattern, such as a miss pattern, that is different from a big win pattern or a small win pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern is "miss". Furthermore, when a special pattern, such as a time-saving pattern, that is different from a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern, is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special pattern, the display result of the special pattern may be "time-saving". The special pattern may not include a time-saving pattern. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include "time-saving".

In the special pattern game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined manner. The open state at this time is until the timing when a predetermined period elapses, such as 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds, or the timing when the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number, whichever is earlier. Continued. The predetermined period in which the big winning hole can be controlled to be open is the upper limit period during which the big winning hole can be opened in one round, and is also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the jackpot opening is open in the jackpot game state is called a round or a round game. In the jackpot game state, such rounds can be repeated until a predetermined upper limit number of times is reached, such as 15 times or 2 times. In the jackpot game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it becomes to the player.

When the display result of the special pattern is a "jackpot", it includes multiple jackpot types. For example, the opening mode of the jackpot entry port, such as the number of rounds and the maximum opening period, and the game state after the end of the jackpot game state, such as the normal state, time-saving state, or probability change state, are set to multiple different types, and a jackpot type is specified corresponding to each setting. The multiple jackpot types may include some or all of the jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, jackpot types that allow few prize balls to be obtained, or jackpot types that allow almost no prize balls to be obtained, or may include jackpot types with the same number of prize balls that can be obtained. Controlling to a jackpot game state based on the display result of the special pattern being a "jackpot" is also called a pattern jackpot, a jackpot with a special pattern, a variable display jackpot, or a direct hit jackpot.

In the special pattern game, after the display result of the special pattern becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state. In the small winning game state, the large winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball device 50 can be opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning game state, the big winning opening may be opened in the same manner as the jackpot gaming state in some jackpot types. It is sufficient that the big prize openings can be opened in the same manner by sharing the number of openings and the opening period. Alternatively, in the small winning gaming state, the big winning opening may be opened in a different opening manner from that in the jackpot gaming state. Similar to the jackpot type, a plurality of small hit types may be included even when the display result of the special symbol is a "small hit." The jackpot type and the small hit type are also collectively referred to as the hit type. The operation of opening and closing the big prize opening in the small winning game state is also referred to as the starting operation. When in the small winning game state, the accessory entrance which becomes the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 50 is opened, and when the game ball passes through the V winning area 51 and is detected by the specific area switch 24, The conditions for generating a jackpot are established, and it becomes possible to control the jackpot game state. The fact that the game ball is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the occurrence of a V winning by passing through the V winning area 51 in the small winning gaming state is also referred to as a jackpot via small winning.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, the gaming state can be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state in accordance with the jackpot type. Further, in the special figure game, after the display result of the special symbol becomes "time saving", the gaming state is not controlled to the jackpot gaming state but is controlled to the time saving state. The time saving state is a gaming state in which the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is more easily executed than in the normal state. A game state in which the second special figure game is more likely to be executed than in the normal state is a game state in which the game ball is more likely to pass through and enter the second starting prize opening than in the normal state. The control of whether or not the game ball can easily pass through the second starting prize opening is also referred to as base control. Base control in the normal state is also referred to as normal base control or low base control. The base control in the time saving state includes high base control. In addition to high base control, the time saving state may include medium base control. The medium base control is a base control in which the game ball is easier to pass through the second starting prize opening than the low base control, but it is more difficult for the game ball to pass through the second starting winning opening than the high base control. The gaming state in which the medium base control is performed is also referred to as the medium base state. The gaming state in which high base control is performed is also referred to as a high base state. High base control is also referred to as high open control.

In the normal state, the medium base state, and the high base state, it is possible for the time-saving pattern to be displayed as a stopped result of the display of the special pattern. However, in the medium base state and the high base state, even if the time-saving pattern is displayed as a stopped result of the display of the special pattern, base control based on the time-saving pattern is not performed, and new control to transition to the medium base state or the high base state is not initiated. In the time-saving state, it is possible to perform time-saving control that shortens the average variable display time more than in the normal state. For this reason, the time-saving state is also called the time-shortening state.

The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols, especially the second special symbol, is improved, so it is included in special states that are advantageous for the player and are different from the jackpot gaming state. When the gaming state is in a variable probability state, in addition to time saving control, variable probability control is possible in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. As a result, the probability variable state is also referred to as the probability variable state. In addition to improving the variation efficiency of the special symbols, the variable probability state is a state in which a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is included in special states that are advantageous for the player and are different from the jackpot gaming state. The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the predetermined end conditions is satisfied first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times or the control to the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called a number-of-time cut. The time-saving state where the number of times is cut is also referred to as the time-saving state where the number of times is cut. The number-cut definite variable state is also called the number-cut definite variable.

The normal game state is a game state that is not included in advantageous states such as a big win game state that is advantageous to the player, predetermined states such as a small win game state, or special states such as a time-saving state or a probability change state. The normal state is a game state in which the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal win" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot" are controlled to be the same as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1. The initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 is the control state after the initial setting process is performed without performing the specified recovery process after the power is turned on, such as when a system reset is performed.

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state. Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not include a variable probability state as a gaming state.

After the small win game state ends, there are cases where the game state is controlled to a big win game state based on the occurrence of a V win, and cases where a V win does not occur and the game state before the small win game state remains unchanged. However, when the display result of the special game becomes a "small win" and a specified number of special games are played in the number cutoff, the control of the time-saving state and the probability change state may end and the game state may return to the normal state. Note that the pachinko game machine 1 may not include a small win game state as a game state. In other words, the display result of the special pattern may not include a "small win".

When a time-saving condition based on the number of times the variable display is executed is established, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state. Such a time-saving state is also called a rescue time-saving state. The time-saving condition may be a condition that can be established when, after the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, after a jackpot occurs, or after the display result of the special game becomes "time-saving," control to a new jackpot game state or time-saving state is not performed even if a specific number of variable displays are executed.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game. These effects include effects that notify the progress of the game and effects that liven up the game. These effects include displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, outputting sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, vibrating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B, or a combination of some or all of these, and may be executed using any effect device.

The effects that can be executed in accordance with the progress of the game include variable display of the effect patterns. In response to the start of the first special game or the second special game, the variable display of the effect patterns is started in the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" provided on the screen of the image display device 5. When the determined special pattern that is the display result in the first special game or the second special game is stopped and displayed, the determined effect pattern that is the display result is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the effect patterns. The determined effect pattern is composed of a combination of three effect patterns corresponding to the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the effect patterns, the display mode in the variable display of the effect patterns may become a reach mode. The reach mode is a mode in which the effect patterns that have stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute part of a jackpot combination and the fluctuation of the effect patterns that have not yet stopped continues. When the display pattern of the variable display of the performance symbols becomes a reach pattern, it is said that a reach has been achieved.

When the variable display of the performance pattern becomes a reach state, a reach performance can be executed. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute multiple types of reach performance so that the rate at which the display result of the variable display becomes a "jackpot" varies when the performance state differs. The rate of a "jackpot" corresponding to the performance state is also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate. Reach performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach. In addition, it may include a short reach and a long reach, which has a longer execution time than a short reach, corresponding to the execution time of the reach performance.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed performance pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is displayed as a display result of the performance pattern on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same performance pattern, such as a performance pattern showing the number "7", is displayed stopped on a predetermined effective line in the performance pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd-numbered performance patterns, such as a performance pattern showing the number "7", may be displayed stopped. In the case of a "non-probability jackpot" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even-numbered performance patterns, such as a performance pattern showing the number "6", may be displayed stopped. A "non-probability jackpot" is also called a "normal jackpot". In this case, the odd-numbered performance patterns are also called probability jackpot patterns. The even-numbered performance patterns are also called non-probability jackpot patterns or normal patterns. After a non-variable symbol is in reach mode, an advancement effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "variable jackpot."

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", confirmed performance symbols forming a predetermined small win combination are stopped and displayed as the display result of the performance symbols on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, in the "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same production symbols, such as production symbols indicating numbers other than "7", are aligned and a predetermined effective line is displayed. It may be displayed stopped above. A common confirmed performance pattern may be stopped and displayed when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit" and a "small win."

When the display result of the special figure game is "lose", the display result may not be displayed in a reach mode in the variable display of performance symbols, but may be stopped and displayed. In this case, as a display result of the performance symbols, the confirmed performance symbols of the non-reach combination are stopped and displayed. A display result in which the fixed effect pattern of a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without becoming a reach mode is also referred to as a non-reach loss. When the display result of the special figure game is "lose", the variable display of the effect symbols becomes a ready-to-win mode, and the display result may be stopped and displayed after the ready-to-reach effect is executed. In this case, as a display result of the performance symbols, the confirmed performance symbols of the ready-to-win combinations that are not the jackpot combination or the small win combination are stopped and displayed. The display result in which the fixed effect design of the reach combination is stopped and displayed after reaching the reach mode is also referred to as reach loss.

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include variable display-compatible displays such as reserved displays and active displays. In addition, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability can be executed while the effect pattern is variable displayed. The preview effect may include a variable preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability corresponding to the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability corresponding to the variable display before execution whose execution is on hold. The look-ahead preview effect may be capable of executing a change effect that changes the display mode of a variable display-compatible display such as reserved displays and active displays to a mode different from normal.

On the screen of the image display device 5, it may be possible to temporarily stop the performance symbols during the variable display of the performance symbols, and then resume the variable display, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive performance in which one variable display appears as multiple variable displays. The pseudo consecutive performance may be set so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the number of times the variable display is resumed after the performance symbols are temporarily stopped is large than when the number of times is small. In the variable display of the performance symbols, there may be cases where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed before the reach state is reached and cases where the pseudo consecutive performance is executed after the reach state is reached. In addition, in the variable display of the performance symbols, it may be possible to execute the pseudo consecutive performance at multiple times.

During control of the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot performance can be executed to notify the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the number of rounds and an advancement performance that suggests or notifies the player that the advantage of the jackpot gaming state is improving. During control of the small jackpot gaming state, a small jackpot performance can be executed to notify the player of a small jackpot gaming state. By executing a common performance during control of the jackpot gaming state and during control of the small jackpot gaming state, it may be possible to make it impossible or difficult for the player to recognize whether the current gaming state is a jackpot gaming state or a small jackpot gaming state.

In a non-play state where a special game or the like is not being played and no game is progressing, a demonstration effect image can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. A demonstration effect image is also called a demo image. The display of a demo image is also called a demo display. The effect produced by the demo display is also called a customer waiting demo effect.

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, a power supply board 17, etc. as shown in FIG. 287, for example. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a firing control board.

The main board 11 is a main side control board, and has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The progress of the game is the execution of various games and game states, such as the execution of special drawing games with pending management, the execution of regular drawing games with pending management, jackpot gaming states, small winning gaming states, time saving states, variable probability states, etc. including migration. The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, and a solenoid circuit 111.

The game control microcomputer 100 provided on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and can be configured to include a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105. The ROM 101, the RAM 102, and a part or all of the random number circuit 104 may be configured to be external to the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured to be built into the game control microcomputer 100. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The various switches for game ball detection include, for example, a gate switch 21, start port switches such as a first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B, a count switch 23, a specific area switch 24, and an outlet switch 26. The detection signal indicates that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered. The solenoid circuit 111 can supply a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to the normal electric role solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, and the specific area solenoid 83. The solenoid drive signal may be any signal that turns on each solenoid.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the ROM 101 is a non-volatile storage device that stores computer programs and data used for game control. The data stored in the ROM 101 includes table data constituting tables used for variation patterns, performance control commands, and various other settings, judgments, and decisions. The RAM 102 is a temporary storage device that provides a stack for saving work areas and data used for game control. The RAM 102 may be a backup RAM that stores the contents of a part or all of the memory area so that they can be restored within a specified period even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The RAM 102 is also called RWM (Read/Write Memory). The work area of the RAM 102 includes a memory area that can store various data used for game control, such as a counter, a timer, a buffer, and a storage area for various codes and numerical values. The CPU 103 can control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 by executing a process corresponding to the program stored in the ROM 101. The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used when controlling the progress of a game. The random numbers used when controlling the progress of a game are also called game random numbers. Some or all of the game random numbers may be updated by hardware using a dedicated circuit, or may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the CPU 103. The I/O 105 includes an input port to which various signals are input, and an output port to which various signals are output. The various signals input to the input port of the I/O 105 may include detection signals from various switches transmitted via the switch circuit 110. The various signals output from the output port of I/O 105 may include signals for controlling the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reserve display device 25A, the second reserve display device 25B, the normal reserve display device 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals for driving the normal electric role solenoid 81, the big prize opening solenoid 82, the specific area solenoid 83, etc.

The main board 11 outputs, by the game control microcomputer 100, a performance control command according to the progress of the game to the performance control board 12 as part of the operation for controlling the progress of the game. The performance control command is a command that specifies or notifies the progress of the game. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The production control commands include commands that specify various decision results on the main board 11, such as display results of special drawing games, winning types, and fluctuation patterns; Any command may be used as long as it includes a command that specifies the gaming situation, such as the occurrence of an error, the number of pending memories, and the gaming status, and a command that specifies the occurrence of an error.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and has a function of receiving production control commands and controlling production based on the received production control commands. The effects that can be controlled by the effect control board 12 are various effects according to the progress of the game, such as driving the movable body 32, and also include various types of notifications such as error notifications and power failure recovery notifications. The production control board 12 includes a production control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for controlling the execution of the effect together with the display control unit 123. This process is a process for realizing various functions of the effect control board 12, and includes determining the effect to be executed. The performance control CPU 120 uses various data stored in the ROM 121, such as data on various tables, and also uses the RAM 122 as a main memory. The performance control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B. The detection signal here is a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected, and may be any signal that appropriately indicates the content of the operation.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and controls the execution of mainly display-related effects based on instructions to execute effects from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 also supplies a sound designation signal to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14. The sound designation signal designates the sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp signal designates the on/off state of the game effect lamp 9. The supply of the sound designation signal and the lamp signal enables sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the turning on or off of the game effect lamp 9 in synchronization with the display of the effect image. The display control unit 123 may be capable of supplying a signal for operating the movable body 32 to a motor or solenoid of the movable body 32, or to a driver circuit that drives the movable body 32. A driver board for driving the movable body 32 may be provided separately from the performance control board 12.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers used when controlling the execution of various effects. The random numbers used to control the execution of the performance are also referred to as performance random numbers. The random number for presentation may be updated by software such as a computer program executed by the presentation control CPU 120. The I/O 125 includes, for example, an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals. The input port of the I/O 125 may include an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the controller sensor unit 35A and an input terminal for a detection signal supplied from the push sensor 35B. The output port of the I/O 125 is an output terminal for a video signal supplied to the image display device 5, an output terminal for a sound designation signal supplied to the audio control board 13, and an output terminal for a lamp signal supplied to the lamp control board 14. It is sufficient if it includes an output terminal.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal from the display control unit 123, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal to the speaker. Output from 8L and 8R. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on a lamp signal from the display control unit 123, and operates the game effect lamp in a manner specified by the lamp signal. Turn 9 on or off. In this way, the audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the lighting and extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9 can be controlled based on the signal from the display control section 123. Note that the control of the movable body 32, such as the supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, the control of audio output and lighting and extinguishing of lamps, and the supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, are partially performed by the performance control CPU 120. Or all of them may be executed. Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. As in the configuration example shown in FIG. 287, a plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function, or unlike the configuration example shown in FIG. 287, one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions. good.

The power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, DC 12V or DC 5V, etc.). The pachinko game machine 1 can switch between starting and ending the power supply by operating the power switch 91. The switch circuit 110 of the main board 11 takes in a reset signal, a power off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value continues for the power-off reference time or longer. The clear signal is turned on, for example, in response to pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing.

Figure 288 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. When the game control main process shown in Figure 288 is started, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). As a result, other processes will not be executed until interrupts are permitted. Next, the built-in device register is set (step S902). In setting the built-in device register, for example, a built-in device register setting table is used to store the built-in device register setting value at the specified built-in device address. The built-in device register may be, for example, a PTC (Programmable Timer Counter) as a timer counter that is a timer circuit, a random number circuit 104, an input port of the I/O 105, a serial communication circuit, an RWM access control circuit, or the like, provided in correspondence with various circuits and electronic components. In addition, the stack pointer may be initially set, an interrupt vector may be set, and so on.

Next, the RWM check process (step S903) is executed to determine whether or not a predetermined recovery condition is satisfied (step S904). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal corresponding to the operation of the clear switch 92 is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the storage contents in the RAM 102 as the backup RAM are normal. When the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, for example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S904 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in the RAM 102 as the backup RAM for game control. The RWM check process in step S903 includes a checksum calculation process, and the checksum data obtained as a result of the process is compared with the storage data in the checksum buffer, and if the two data match, it is determined that the storage contents in the RAM 102 are normal. In step S904, it is determined whether the recovery conditions can be met based on the results of checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and data errors, etc., performed by the RWM check process in step S903.

If the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S904; Yes), settings for recovery are performed. The settings for recovery include designation of a backup command transmission table (step S905) and designation of a backup setting table (step S906). The command transmission table at the time of backup includes table data for transmitting to the production control board 12 a power failure recovery designation command that designates that restoration using backup data has been performed. The backup setting table includes table data used to initialize the work area when recovery is performed using backup data. To specify a table, a value corresponding to the start address of the table stored in the ROM 101 is stored in a general-purpose pointer or a table pointer. The same applies to other tables.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S904; No), the initialization setting is performed. The initialization setting includes the RWM initial setting process (step S907), the designation of the initialization command transmission table (step S908), and the designation of the initialization setting table (step S909). The RWM initial setting process includes a process of initializing the work area by storing clear data in a predetermined area that becomes the work area in the RAM 102. The initialization command transmission table includes table data for transmitting a power-on designation command that designates that the initial setting has been performed at the time of power-on to the performance control board 12. The initialization setting table includes table data used for the initial setting of the work area when the initial setting has been performed at the time of power-on. For example, the initialization setting table includes table data for setting the count value of the specific count counter to the specific count initial value. The initialization setting table also includes table data for setting the storage value of the specific count command buffer to the specific count command upper limit value. The specific number of times is the number of times the variable display is executed, which is the time-saving condition that transitions the gaming state from the normal state to the time-saving state when a period of time continues in which the gaming state is not controlled to a jackpot gaming state or a time-saving state.

Then, command set processing (step S9010) and data set processing (step S9011) are executed. The command set processing includes a process for sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12 by storing command data specified in the command transmission table in the serial communication data register. The data set processing includes a process for storing a specified value at an address indicated by the table data using a data setting table specified by a pointer, and a process for clearing the memory contents of the address indicated by the table data.

Then, after executing the wait process (step S9012), a specific number of times command sending process (step S9013) is executed. The wait process waits until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, thereby ensuring that sub-boards such as the performance control board 12 can be started. The specific number of times command process is a process for sending a performance control command that specifies the count value of the specific number of times counter to the performance control board 12 when the power is turned on. The specific number of times counter is provided at a predetermined address in RAM 102, and it is sufficient that it is capable of counting the remaining number of times until the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the specific number corresponding to the time-saving condition.

Following the specific number of times command transmission process in step S9013, interrupt initial settings (step S9014) are performed, and the PTC counter output value is set so that a regular timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time, for example, 4 milliseconds. , enters loop processing. In this loop process, interrupt prohibition (step S9015), initial value determination random number update process (step S9016), and interrupt enable (step S9017) are repeatedly executed. Thereafter, each time an interrupt request signal is sent from the PTC to the CPU 103, the CPU 103 becomes able to execute timer interrupt processing. This allows the CPU 103 to execute timer interrupt processing at predetermined intervals of, for example, 4 milliseconds.

Figure 289 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. The CPU 103 can execute the game control timer interrupt process by receiving an interrupt request signal from the PTC and accepting the interrupt request. The game control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 289 (A) includes a power cut process (step S9021), a switch process (step S9022), a main side error process (step S9023), a game random number update process (step S9024), a special symbol process process (step S9025), a normal symbol process process (step S9026), an information output process (step S9027), a prize ball process (step S9028), and a main side display control process (step S9029).

The power-off process in step S9021 includes a process of checking a power-off signal transmitted from the power supply board 17 to determine whether a power-off has occurred. When a power outage occurs, checksum calculation processing is executed, checksum data is set in the checksum buffer, and then settings at the time of power outage, such as prohibition of RWM access, are performed. The switch processing in step S9022 determines whether or not detection signals are received from various switches input via the switch circuit 110, such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. It includes processing to determine. The reception result of the detection signal is set in the switch-on buffer. The main error processing in step S9023 includes processing for diagnosing an abnormality in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The game random number update process in step S9024 includes a process of updating at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side using software.

FIG. 289(B) shows an example of random numbers for gaming. The random numbers for gaming include a random number MR1 for determining special symbols, a random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol, a random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2, a random number MR4 for selecting a variation pattern type, and a random number MR5 for determining a variation pattern. , a random number MR6 for normal symbol hit determination, and a random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6. The random number MR1 for special symbol determination is used when determining the display result of the special symbol, such as whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be a "big hit" or not, and whether or not the display result of the special symbol should be a "small hit". used for. The random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol selects multiple confirmed special symbols, such as a jackpot symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "jackpot" or a small win symbol when the display result of a special symbol is a "small win." Used when selecting from special designs. The random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2 is used to create the initial value of the random number MR2. The random number MR4 for selecting the variation pattern type is used for selecting the variation pattern type of the special symbol. The random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to determine the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern type. The random number MR6 for normal symbol hit determination is used when determining the display result of the normal symbol, which is whether or not the display result of the normal symbol is to be a "normal symbol hit". The random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6 is used to create the initial value of the random number MR6. The random number MR3 for determining the initial value of MR2 and the random number MR7 for determining the initial value of MR6 are used not only in the gaming random number update process of step S24 but also in the random number update process for initial value determination of step S9016 shown in FIG. It is good if it can be updated.

The variation pattern is a variation pattern that is a pattern to be used in the current variable display from among one or more variation patterns included in the variation pattern type selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for variation pattern type selection. It is determined using the value of a random number MR5 for determination. The variation pattern specifies various variable setting items including the special figure variation time which is the execution time of the special figure game, the mode of variable display of the effect symbols, and the effect contents during the variable display of the effect symbols. The special figure variation time also becomes the execution time in the variable display of the effect design. The mode of variable display of the performance symbols includes the presence or absence of reach. The performance contents during the variable display of the performance symbols include the type of reach performance and the like. The variable pattern is also referred to as a variable display pattern. The variation pattern type is a group that includes one or more variation patterns that are classified in advance based on, for example, the production mode during variable display of production symbols.

The special symbol process processing in step S9025 shown in FIG. 289 (A) includes processing related to the variable display of special symbols and the game state, such as the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and the small win game state, and control of the game state. The normal symbol process processing in step S9026 includes processing related to the variable display of normal symbols and the state control of the second start winning port, such as the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal hit". The information output processing in step S9027 sets the information output signal. The information output signal is a signal corresponding to information such as big win information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1. The big win information indicates the number of big wins, etc. The start information indicates the number of start wins, etc. The probability fluctuation information indicates the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc. The prize ball processing in step S9028 includes a prize ball command output counter addition process and a prize ball control process. The prize ball command output counter addition process uses a prize ball number table to determine whether the switch is on, and when on is detected, updates the prize ball command output counter and the winning information output counter. The prize ball control process selects a process corresponding to the prize ball process code and controls the prize balls based on the detection of the game ball so that they can be paid out. The main side display control process in step S9029 includes a display setting for the first special pattern and a display setting for the second special pattern. The display setting for the first special pattern is a setting for controlling the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A so that it can be updated by executing the special pattern control process. The display setting for the second special pattern is a setting for controlling the display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B so that it can be updated by executing the special pattern control process.

290(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S9025 shown in FIG. 289(A) as the special symbol process. In the special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning judgment process (step S101). The start winning judgment process includes a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the reserved memory number. When the occurrence of a start winning is detected, if the reserved memory number is less than the upper limit value, a random number value used to determine the display result, the winning type, the variation pattern, etc. is extracted. The extracted random number value is stored as the reserved information. In addition, a process of predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After updating the storage of the reserved information and the reserved memory number, a command setting is performed to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. With such a command setting, the performance control command at the time of the start winning is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 reads out the special figure process code stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (step S102). The special pattern process code can be updated to any of 00[H] to 0B[H], and is also referred to as the special pattern process code. [H] indicates a hexadecimal number. The CPU 103 selects and executes the process corresponding to the read value of the special figure process code (step S103). This makes it possible to control the progress of the game regarding the variable display of special symbols.

FIG. 290(B) shows an example of a process that can be executed in response to the special symbol process code in the special symbol process process. Special pattern process processing is a special pattern normal process whose special pattern process code corresponds to 00[H] and a special pattern process code which corresponds to 01[H] as executable processing corresponding to the special pattern process code. Special symbol fluctuation processing, special symbol stop processing that corresponds to the special symbol process code 02 [H], small hit pre-opening processing that corresponds to the special symbol process code 03 [H], and special symbol process code that corresponds to 04 [H]. Processing during opening of a small hit corresponding to [H], processing after opening of a small winning corresponding to a special figure process code of 05[H], and processing of waiting for a small winning ejected ball corresponding to a special figure process code of 06[H]. , Special figure process code corresponds to 07[H], small winning end process, special figure process code corresponds to 08[H], big prize opening pre-opening process, special figure process code corresponds to 09[H] It includes a process during the opening of the big winning hole, a process after opening the big winning hole whose special drawing process code corresponds to 0A[H], and a jackpot end process whose special drawing process code corresponds to 0B[H]. .

The normal special symbol processing includes a process capable of determining whether to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of stored reserved information. The normal special symbol processing includes a process capable of determining whether the display result of the special symbol is a "big win" or a "small win", and further whether it is a "time reduction" or not, based on the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol. The normal special symbol processing includes a process for determining the confirmed special symbol to be displayed in a stopped state in the variable display of the special symbol in response to the determination of the display result. The normal special symbol processing includes a process for determining the variable pattern. Thus, in the normal special symbol processing, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, various determinations and determinations (pre-determinations) regarding the variable display are made before the display result is derived and displayed, and the special symbol process code is updated to 01 [H].

The CPU 103 reads various tables from the ROM 101 and refers to them when making various judgments and decisions based on random values. The same applies to other judgments and decisions using random numbers on the main board 11. Even when random numbers are not used, necessary tables may be read out from the ROM 101 and referred to to perform various judgments, decisions, settings, etc. The performance control board 12 may read various tables from the ROM 121, refer to them, and perform various judgments, decisions, settings, etc.

In the normal special symbol processing, the special symbol 2 priority consumption control may be performed, in which the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed in priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol. Alternatively, in the normal special symbol processing, the winning order consumption control may be performed, in which the conditions for starting the special symbol game are established in accordance with the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning port and the second start winning port.

In the special symbol fluctuation process, the time elapsed since the special symbol started to fluctuate in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is measured, and the special symbol fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed. It includes a process of determining whether or not. When the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the finalized special symbol is set, the counts of various counters are updated, and the special symbol process code is updated to 02[H]. The special symbol stop process measures the elapsed time after the special symbol stops changing on the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and calculates the symbol stop time set in the special symbol variation process. This includes processing for determining whether or not the period has elapsed. When the symbol stop time has elapsed, the special pattern process code is updated and various settings are performed in accordance with the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "Jackpot", the special figure process code is updated to 08[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the special figure process code is updated to 03[H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving" or "losing", the special figure process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H]. Further, when the display result of the variable display is "jackpot", settings corresponding to the start of the jackpot game state are performed. When the display result of the variable display is "small win", settings corresponding to the start of the small win game state are performed. When the display result of the variable display is "time saving", settings are made to control the gaming state to the time saving state.

The small win pre-opening process performs settings to open the large prize opening in the small win game state based on the display result of the variable display being "small win", and updates the special chart process code to 04 [H]. The small win opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the large prize opening was opened in the small win game state and determining whether the small win opening time has elapsed. If the small win opening time has elapsed, the special chart process code is updated to 05 [H] along with settings to close the large prize opening. The small win post-opening process performs a prize winning detection for the large prize opening in the small win game state, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, updates the special chart process code to 06 [H]. The small win discharge ball waiting process includes a process of setting a large prize opening discharge ball error, determining whether the V prize area 51 has passed, and determining whether the discharge of the large prize opening has been completed. When it is determined that the large prize opening has been discharged, the special prize process code is updated to 07 [H] along with the settings before the small prize ends. The small prize end process includes a process for determining whether or not the V prize area 51 has been passed using the specific area passing flag. When a game ball has passed through the V prize area 51, the specific area passing flag is set to a designated value 01 [H] corresponding to the on state. When the specific area passing flag is on, the special prize process code is updated to 08 [H] along with the start of the large prize. When the specific area flag is off, the special prize process code is cleared along with the end of the small prize and updated to the initial value 00 [H].

The pre-opening process of the large prize opening performs settings for controlling the large prize opening to an open state, such as updating the large prize opening count counter and settings for when the large prize opening is opened, including the operation settings of the large prize opening, and updates the special chart process code to 09 [H]. The process during the opening of the large prize opening measures the elapsed time since the large prize opening was opened in the jackpot game state, detects the winning of the large prize opening, and updates the special chart process code to 0A [H] along with settings for closing the large prize opening when the maximum number of winning balls in the large prize opening is reached or when the opening time for the jackpot has elapsed. The post-opening process of the large prize opening includes a process for determining the end of the time after the large prize opening is opened after setting the large prize opening discharge ball mismatch error, and determining the count value of the large prize opening count counter when it is determined that the opening has ended. If the count value of the large prize opening count counter is less than the maximum number of opening times of the large prize opening, the special chart process code is updated to 08 [H] to control so that the next round can be started. When the count value of the large prize opening counter is the maximum large prize opening opening count, the special chart process code is updated to 0B [H] along with the settings at the end of the opening, including the setting of the jackpot end presentation time. The jackpot end process includes a process to determine whether the jackpot end presentation time has elapsed. When the jackpot end presentation time has elapsed, the special chart process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H] along with the jackpot end settings, including the game state setting at the end of the jackpot.

The special pattern normal processing of the special pattern process includes a special pattern big win judgment process and a special pattern small win judgment process. The special pattern normal processing may also include a special pattern time-saving judgment process. In these judgment processes, a special pattern judgment value check is performed using the value of the special pattern judgment random number MR1 read from the special pattern judgment buffer to see which judgment range the value is included in. For example, if the value of the special pattern judgment random number MR1 is included in the big win judgment range, the special pattern big win judgment process judges that the display result of the special pattern is a "big win". Also, if the value of the special pattern judgment random number MR1 is included in the small win judgment range, the special pattern small win judgment process judges that the display result of the special pattern is a "small win". If the value of the special pattern judgment random number MR1 is included in the time-saving judgment range, the special pattern time-saving judgment process may judge that the display result of the special pattern is a "time-saving".

Figure 291 shows an example of determining the special symbol display result, which is the display result of the special symbol. The start hole winning designation value is set to "1" in the case of a first start winning caused by a game ball entering the first start winning hole, and is set to "2" in the case of a second start winning caused by a game ball entering the second start winning hole. That is, when the start hole winning designation value is "1", a first special symbol game is executed, which is a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, when the start hole winning designation value is "2", a second special symbol game is executed, which is a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol big win judgment process, the special symbol small win judgment process, and the special symbol time-saving judgment process, the MR1 judgment value is set to be compared with the value of the random number MR1 so that the special symbol display result is determined to be either a "big win", a "small win", a "time-saving", or a "miss" depending on whether the start-port winning designation value is "1" or "2". The MR1 judgment value assigned to the special symbol display result of "big win" is also called the big win judgment value. The MR1 judgment value assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win" is also called the small win judgment value. The MR1 judgment value assigned to the special symbol display result of "time-saving" is also called the time-saving judgment value. The big win probability based on the setting of the big win judgment value indicates the proportion of big wins due to the special symbol game. The small win probability based on the setting of the small win judgment value indicates the proportion of small wins due to the special symbol game. The time-saving probability based on the setting of the time-saving judgment value indicates the proportion of base control that can be changed by the special symbol game.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the production control board 12 receives power supply voltage from the power supply board 17 or the like, the production control CPU 120 is activated and executes production control main processing.

FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the production control main processing executed by the production control CPU 120 in the production control board 12. When starting the production control main process shown in FIG. 292, the production control CPU 120 first executes an initialization process (step S71). The initialization process includes clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting a register for a timer circuit mounted on the production control board 12. At this time, initial operation control processing (step S72) is executed. The initial operation control process includes control for performing initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position, and control for performing predetermined operation confirmation. Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined period of time, such as 2 milliseconds, elapses, based on register settings for the timer circuit, for example. If the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), step S73 is repeated and the process waits.

If the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing (step S75) is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the command analysis process is performed based on the read production control commands. Includes processing such as corresponding settings and controls. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received or the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. , and turns on the reception flag provided in the RAM 122. When the production control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process, the performance control process (step S76) is executed. The performance control process includes control of various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. The control contents of the performance operation using the various performance devices are judged, determined, and set based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11. Following the performance control process, the performance random number update process (step S77) is executed. The performance random number update process updates at least a part of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 293 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 shown in Figure 292 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead performance setting process (step S151). The look-ahead performance setting process includes, for example, processing such as judgment, decision, and setting regarding the execution of a look-ahead preview performance based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. It also includes processing for displaying a hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the pre-read effect setting process, the effect control CPU 120 reads out the effect process code stored in a predetermined address of the RAM 122 (step S152). The production process code can be updated and set to any of 00[H] to 0A[H], and is also referred to as the production control process code. The production control CPU 120 selects and executes a process corresponding to the read value of the production process code (step S153). This makes it possible to control the performance including variable display of performance symbols.

FIG. 293(B) shows an example of processing that can be executed in response to the production process code in the production control process. The production control process process includes a variation pattern command waiting process whose production process code corresponds to 00[H] and a production pattern whose production process code corresponds to 01[H] as executable processes corresponding to the production process code. Fluctuation start processing, production pattern fluctuation process whose production process code corresponds to 02[H], production pattern fluctuation stop processing whose production process code corresponds to 03[H], and production process code corresponding to 04[H]. The corresponding small win display process, the small win opening process whose production process code corresponds to 05[H], the small win end production process whose production process code corresponds to 06[H], and the production process code 07[H]. jackpot display processing corresponding to [H], in-round processing corresponding to the production process code 08 [H], post-round processing corresponding to the production process code 09 [H], and production process code 0A [H] This includes a jackpot end performance process corresponding to the above.

The waiting process for receiving a variation pattern command includes a process capable of determining whether or not a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 has been received. For example, the presence or absence of reception can be determined by whether or not a variation pattern designation command reception flag set in the command analysis process is on. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has been received, the performance process code is updated to 01 [H]. If it is determined that a variation pattern designation command has not been received, control of the demo display is performed. The performance pattern change start process includes a process for controlling so that a variation time performance corresponding to a special game is started. For example, in response to the received variation pattern command, a performance pattern for a variation time performance is selected, the timing value of a performance process timer that measures the performance execution time is started to be updated, and the performance process code is updated to 02 [H]. The performance pattern change process includes a process for controlling the switching timing of each performance element that constitutes the performance pattern, and a process for determining whether or not the performance execution time has elapsed based on the timing value of the performance process timer. When it is determined that the performance execution time has elapsed, the performance process code is updated to 03 [H]. The performance pattern change stop process includes a process for controlling the end of the performance during change based on the establishment of the end condition of the performance during change, such as the elapse of the performance execution time or the reception of a performance pattern determination command, and for controlling the display of the performance result corresponding to the determined special pattern. Then, the performance process code is updated and various settings are made according to the display result of the variable display. For example, when the display result of the variable display is "big hit", the performance process code is updated to 07 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "small hit", the performance process code is updated to 04 [H]. When the display result of the variable display is "time reduction" or "miss", the performance process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00 [H].

The small win display process includes a setting process for performing a small win fanfare effect when a small win occurs. The small win fanfare performance includes a small win display in which a performance image notifying the occurrence of a small win is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the small win fanfare performance time elapses. When the small win fanfare performance time has elapsed, the small win fanfare performance is controlled to end, and the performance process code is updated to 05[H]. The small win opening process performs settings for performing a small win opening performance in response to the opening of the large winning opening in the small win game state, and updates the performance process code to 06[H]. The small win end effect process includes a process of controlling the image display device 5 to display an effect image that notifies the end of the small win game state on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, in the small winning game state, when a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 24 and it is determined that a V winning has occurred, execution control of a V winning presentation that notifies the occurrence of a V winning is performed. When a V winning occurs in the small winning game state, the performance process code is updated to 07[H]. If a V win does not occur in the small winning game state, the performance process code is cleared and updated to the initial value 00[H].

The jackpot display process includes a setting process for performing a fanfare effect when a jackpot occurs. The fanfare effect includes a jackpot display in which an effect image that notifies the occurrence of a jackpot is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and can be executed until the fanfare effect time has elapsed. When the fanfare effect time has elapsed, the effect process code is updated to 08 [H] along with the end control of the fanfare effect. The round processing includes display settings during the round in the jackpot game state. When the round end condition is met, if it is not the end of the final round, the effect process code is updated to 09 [H], and if it is the end of the final round, the effect process code is updated to 0A [H]. The round post-processing includes display settings between rounds in the jackpot game state. Then, when the round start condition is met, the effect process code is updated to 08 [H]. The jackpot end effect includes a process for controlling the display of an effect image that notifies the end of the jackpot game state on the screen of the image display device 5 so that it can be displayed. After that, when the time to announce the end of the jackpot has elapsed, the presentation process code is cleared and updated to its initial value, 00 [H].

(Variation example of basic explanation)
The pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to the configuration, function, processing, and operation described in the basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not need to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiments, but may include some of the technical features described in the above embodiments so that at least one problem in the conventional technology can be solved. It may also have the following configuration. In the above embodiments, when a matter that is a subordinate concept is described, an invention of a generic concept using cognate matters or similar matters, or an invention of a generic concept using common properties is the claimed invention. , and may include some of the structures and characteristics described in the above embodiments so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, or an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be a gaming machine.

What is displayed during the variable display of special symbols may be, for example, only one type of symbol, such as a symbol indicating "-", and a variable display may be performed in which this symbol is repeatedly displayed and turned off. One type of symbol may be displayed during the variable display, and this symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped. For example, the display result may be a non-display state in which no symbol indicating "-" is displayed and no special symbol is displayed.

The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to change the probability of winning a jackpot or the ball payout rate in response to a plurality of set values. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the probability of winning a jackpot or the ball payout rate may be changed by using a different jackpot determination value for each set value. As a specific example, the set value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning a jackpot. In this case, if 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage is in stages. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. The probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. During execution of the variable display, a setting suggestion performance that suggests the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate may be executed. The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. The setting suggestion performance may suggest the probability of a jackpot through any performance, and may also be able to give a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

The invention related to gaming machines is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but can be applied to slot machines as appropriate. In the slot machine, medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the operation of a control lever by the player, and the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of a stop button by the player. Sometimes, when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a game can be executed in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. In a slot machine, an advantageous state advantageous to a player may include one or more of so-called bonuses such as a big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ.

The programs and data for implementing various controls, including the progress of the game and the execution of the performance, may be distributed and provided to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, or may be distributed and provided by being installed in advance in a storage device of the computer device. In addition, the machine may be provided with a communication processing unit that can be connected to an external device on a network via a communication line, etc., and may distribute and provide the programs and data by downloading them from the external device. The execution form of the game and performance may also be executable by mounting a removable recording medium, or may be executable by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via a communication line, etc. in an internal memory, or may be executable directly using the hardware resources of an external device on a network connected via a communication line, etc., or may be executable by exchanging data with another computer device, etc., via a network.

When comparing various percentages, such as processing and data determination ratios, performance execution ratios, etc., expressions such as "high", "low", and "different" mean that one is "0%" or "100%". It may also include being. For example, regarding one decision result or execution content, it may include a case where there is no decision or execution at a rate of 0%, or a case where there is always a decision or execution at a rate of 100%.

(Description of Characteristic Part 22AK)
Fig. 294-1 is an address map of the memory area in the game control microcomputer 100. As shown in Fig. 294-1, the memory area in the game control microcomputer 100 includes a memory area from address 0000[H] to address 2FFF[H] assigned to the ROM 101, and a memory area from address F000[H] to address F3FF[H] assigned to the RAM 102.

The memory areas of the ROM 101 include a game program area (addresses 0000[H] to 0BD5[H]) where game programs related to game control are stored, and a game data area (address 1000[H]) where game data used in the game programs are stored. H] to 1B7C[H]), a non-gaming program area (addresses 2000[H] to 250F[H]) where non-gaming programs related to various controls different from gaming control are stored, and a non-gaming program area (addresses 2000[H] to 250F[H]) used for non-gaming programs. Non-gaming data area (2510[H] to 25A1[H]) where gaming data is stored, unused area, etc. (addresses 0BD6[H] to 0FFF[H], 1B7D[H] to 1FFF[H], 25A2) [H] to 2FFF[H]).

The memory area of RAM 102 includes a game work area (addresses F000[H] to F0DE[H]) used as a work area related to game control, a game stack area (addresses F1EC[H] to F1FF[H]) where game programs save data, a non-game work area (addresses F300[H] to F331[H]) used as a work area related to various controls other than game control, a non-game stack area (addresses F3F2[H] to F3FF[H]) where non-game programs save data, and unused areas (addresses F0DF[H] to F1EB[H], F200[H] to F2FF[H], F332[H] to F3F1[H]).

Figure 294-2 shows an example of the configuration of a performance control command sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte being MODE data indicating the type of command, and the second byte being EXT data indicating the specific content of the command. MODE data and EXT data are collectively referred to as command data. The first bit of MODE data is always set to a bit value of "1", and the first bit of EXT data is always set to a bit value of "0". This makes it possible to clearly and easily distinguish whether the data received by the performance control board 12 is the first or second byte of the performance control command.

Command 80XX[H] is a variation pattern designation command that designates a variation pattern. In the command data, XX[H] indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is arbitrarily set in accordance with the content specified by the production control command. The variation pattern designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with the specified content of the variation pattern. Command 8CXX[H] is an effect design designation command that designates the display result of the variable display. The production symbol designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with the stored value of the production symbol information buffer. The performance symbol information buffer stores a value indicating the type of performance symbol to be stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display. Command 8D01[H] is a first fluctuation start designation command that designates the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. Command 8D02[H] is a second fluctuation start designation command that designates the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern designation command, the production symbol designation command, the first fluctuation start designation command, and the second fluctuation start designation command are included in the fluctuation start time command transmitted in response to the start of the variable display. However, the first fluctuation start designation command and the second fluctuation start designation command correspond to the case where the execution of the first special pattern game is started and the case where the execution of the second special pattern game is started. One is sent and the other is not.

Command 8FXX[H] is an effect pattern confirmation command that specifies a stop display that becomes the final display of the effect pattern. Different EXT data can be set for the production symbol confirmation command in response to a plurality of types of symbol stop settings. Command 9002[H] is a power-on designation command that designates RWM initialization at power-on. Command 91XX[H] is a first specific number specification command that specifies the count value of the specific number counter when the power is turned on. The first specific number designation command can set different EXT data corresponding to the count value of the specific number counter. Command 9202[H] is a power failure recovery designation command that designates RWM backup recovery when the power is turned on. Command 94XX[H] is a second specific number of times designation command that designates the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer during game control. The second specific number of times designation command can set different EXT data in accordance with the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer. Command 95XX[H] is a background color designation command that designates the display color of the background screen. The background color designation command can set different EXT data depending on the display color of the background screen. Command 9F03[H] is a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies demonstration display in a non-gaming state where gaming is stopped.

Command A0XX[H] is a jackpot start designation command that is sent in response to the start of a jackpot game, which is a game in a jackpot game state, and can specify a fanfare display. The jackpot start designation command can be set to different EXT data in response to the fanfare display settings, etc. Command A1XX[H] is a jackpot end designation command that is sent in response to the end of a jackpot game, and can specify a jackpot end display. The jackpot end designation command can be set to different EXT data in response to the jackpot end display settings, etc. Command A6XX[H] is a small jackpot start designation command that is sent in response to the start of a small jackpot game, which is a game in a small jackpot game state, and can specify a small jackpot fanfare display. The small jackpot start designation command can be set to different EXT data in response to the small jackpot fanfare display settings, etc. Command A7XX[H] is a small jackpot end designation command that is sent in response to the end of a small jackpot game, and can specify a small jackpot end display. The small win end specification command can set different EXT data depending on the small win end display settings, etc.

Command AE00[H] is a specific area passing command that is sent in response to the game ball passing through the V winning area 51, which is a specific area provided inside the special variable winning ball device 50, and can specify a V winning display. Command C0XX[H] is a first effect memory information specification command that can specify a first reserved memory number as the first effect memory information number. The first effect memory information specification command can set different EXT data corresponding to the first reserved memory number. Command C1XX[H] is a second effect memory information specification command that can specify a second reserved memory number as the second effect memory information number. The second effect memory information specification command can set different EXT data corresponding to the second reserved memory number.

FIG. 294-3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of RWM initial setting processing. For example, in step S7 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, the RWM initial setting process as shown in FIG. 294-3 is executed based on the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. In the RWM initial setting process shown in FIG. 294-3, the CPU 103 sets the transfer source address to F000[H] (step AKS011), sets the transfer destination address to F001[H] (step AKS012), and sets the transfer destination address to F001[H] (step AKS012). is set to 02FF[H] (step AKS013). Then, after storing the clear data in the transfer source address (step AKS014), a block transfer instruction is executed (step AKS015).

The address F000 [H] set in step AKS011 is the first address assigned to the RAM 102, and its memory area is included in the game work area shown in FIG. 294-1. The address F001 [H] set in step AKS012 is the next address of the address F000 [H] set as the transfer source address, and enables writing of data showing the same value to a memory area with consecutive addresses. The transfer count 02FF [H] set in step AKS013 corresponds to the size of the memory area including the game work area and game stack area shown in FIG. 294-1. Therefore, after storing the clear data in step AKS014, the block transfer command is executed in step AKS015, and the clear data is written to the memory area including the game work area and game stack area, thereby initializing the memory area. Such initialization of the memory area by the RWM initial setting process is also called initial setting when the power is turned on.

FIG. 294-4 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command set processing. When a command set process is executed, a value corresponding to the start address of the command transmission table is stored in the pointer in the calling process. A pointer used in command set processing holds an address value that is a table read position in the command transmission table. The pointer used in the command set processing may be configured using, for example, the HL register included in the general-purpose registers among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. The HL register is a pair register that is a combination of the H register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register, and the L register, which is an 8-bit register also included in the general-purpose register, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. , 16-bit length calculations, etc., or as a pointer to specify the address of a memory area.

In the command set process, the CPU 103 first sets the table head data to the processing number (step AKS021). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the B register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. In command set processing, a value corresponding to the number of processing is stored in the B register. Next, it is determined whether the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" (step AKS022). The work area reference bit here may be any leading bit in the 1-byte table data read in step AKS021.

Corresponding to step AKS022, if the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1" and not "0" (step AKS022; No), for example, by changing the value stored in the B register, the number of processes is set to "1". ” (step AKS023). If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" (step AKS022; Yes), the table read position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer (step AKS024).

Thereafter, data for the upper byte of the command is read (step AKS025). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the A register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1" in step AKS022, the process proceeds to step AKS025 without executing step AKS024, so that the data at the beginning of the table is read as data for the command upper byte. Subsequently, the read data in step AKS025 is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS026). The serial communication circuit included in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register and transmits and outputs it to the production control board 12 using a serial communication method. Therefore, by steps AKS025 and AKS026, MODE data, which is the upper byte of the command, can be transmitted toward the production control board 12.

After step AKS026, the stored value of the pointer is updated by adding 1 to it, thereby updating the table read position (step AKS027). Then, the data for the command low byte is read (step AKS028). The data for the command low byte is made up of 8 bits, including a leading bit that is the work area reference bit, and 7 data bits other than the work area reference bit. Next, it is determined whether the bit value of the work area reference bit is "0" (step AKS029).

In response to step AKS029, if the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1" and not "0" (step AKS029; No), the command extension data address table is specified (step AKS030). For example, the address of the command transmission table is saved in a DE register included in a general-purpose register, and then a value corresponding to the top address of the command extension data address table is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. Then, the command extension data is read (step AKS031). At this time, the data in which the bit value in the work area reference bit is cleared to "0" indicates an offset value that specifies the read position in the command extension data address table. The table data of the read position obtained by adding the offset value to the top address of the command extension data address table is set as the lower byte of the command lower byte read address. In addition, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, the Q register included in the special register stores F0 [H] corresponding to the upper byte of the address assigned to the game work area. By making the value stored in this special register the upper byte of the command lower byte read address, the data obtained from the command lower byte read address is stored in the A register as command extension data to be used for the command lower byte to be sent.

If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0" corresponding to step AKS029 (step AKS029; Yes), or after step AKS031, the read data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS032). If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "0", the command lower byte data read in step AKS028 is used as the lower byte of the command to be transmitted and stored in the serial communication data register. If the bit value in the work area reference bit is "1", the command extension data read in step AKS031 is used as the lower byte of the command to be transmitted and is stored in the serial communication data register. Thereby, the EXT data, which is the lower byte of the command, can be transmitted toward the production control board 12.

Next, the number of processes is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS033). At this time, it is determined whether the updated number of processes has become "0" (step AKS034). If the number of processes is other than "0" in response to step AKS034 (step AKS034; No), the process proceeds to step AKS024, and control is performed to enable the transmission of a performance control command using the next table data, etc. On the other hand, if the number of processes is "0" (step AKS034; Yes), the command set process is terminated.

Figure 294-5 shows an example of the configuration of a command transmission table. Of these, Figure 294-5 (A) is command transmission table AKT01 when the number of transmitted commands is "2" or more. Figure 294-5 (B) is command transmission table AKT02 when the number of transmitted commands is "1". In command transmission table AKT01, the number of processes is specified by the table data at the table start address. In contrast, command transmission table AKT02 does not include table data specifying the number of processes. Whether or not the command transmission table includes table data specifying the number of processes can be determined from the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table data at the table start address.

In the command transmission table AKT01 shown in Figure 294-5 (A) when the number of transmission commands is "2" or more, the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table data of the table start address is set to "0". . On the other hand, in the command transmission table AKT02 when the number of transmission commands shown in Figure 294-5 (B) is "1", the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table data of the table start address is set to "1". has been done. In step AKS022 of the command set process shown in FIG. 294-4, it is determined whether the bit value of the work area reference bit is "0" using the table head data read in step AKS021. Then, if the bit value of the work area reference bit is "1" and not "0", the processing number is overwritten to "1" in step AKS023. As a result, when the number of commands to be sent is "1", the number of processing can be set to "1" in command set processing without the command sending table including table data specifying the number of processing, so the data in the command sending table can be set to "1". Capacity can be reduced.

In addition, in the command transmission table, it is possible to specify whether or not the table data serving as the command lower byte data refers to the command extended data address table by the bit value of the work area reference bit. For example, when referring to the command extended data address table to read out the command extended data serving as the command lower byte, the bit value of the work area reference bit in the command lower byte data is set to "1". In the command transmission table AKT01 shown in Figure 294-5(A), the bit value of the work area reference bit in the data for the second command lower byte is set to "1", so the command extension data address table is referred to. Command extension data for setting the command lower byte will be read. On the other hand, when using the command lower byte data as it is as the lower byte of a command to be sent without referring to the command extension data address table, the bit value of the work area reference bit in the command lower byte data is set to "0". It is set. In the command transmission table AKT01 shown in Figure 294-5(A), the bit value of the work area reference bit in the data for the first command lower byte is set to "0", so the command extension data address table is not referenced. In this case, the data for the lower byte of the command is used as is as the lower byte of the command. When referring to the command extended data address table, by using the bit values other than the work area reference bit in the command lower byte data as an offset value to the start address of the command extended data address table, reading in the command extended data address table can be performed. You can specify the location. In this way, whether or not to refer to the command extended data address table is made different depending on whether the bit value of the work area reference bit included in the command lower byte data is "0" or "1". This makes it possible to flexibly use a variety of data to set the command lower byte to be transmitted while preventing the data capacity of the command transmission table from increasing.

FIG. 294-6 shows a configuration example of the command extension data address table AKT11. The command extended data address table is composed of table data indicating a plurality of reference data lower addresses, such as reference data lower addresses ADU01 to ADU05 for command transmission. In step AKS031 of the command set process shown in FIG. 294-4, the read position in the command extended data address table AKT11 is specified using the command lower byte data read out in step AKS028. The table data read from the read position constitutes the lower byte at the read address of the command extension data. For example, the table data indicating the lower addresses ADU01 to ADU05 of the command transmission reference data can all constitute the lower byte of the read address of the command extension data. The command extension data thus obtained is stored in the serial communication data register in step AKS032 of the command set processing. Thereby, the command extension data can be transmitted to the effect control board 12 as EXT data which is the command lower byte.

Figure 294-7 is a flowchart showing an example of data set processing. When data set processing is executed, a value corresponding to the first address of the data setting table is stored in a pointer in the calling process. The pointer used in data set processing holds an address value that is the table read position in the data setting table. The pointer used in data set processing may be configured using, for example, an HL register included in the general-purpose registers among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103.

In data set processing, the CPU 103 first sets the table top data to the number of processes (step AKS041). For example, the table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the B register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103. In data set processing, a value corresponding to the number of processes is stored in the B register. Next, it is determined whether the number of processes is "0" (step AKS042).

Corresponding to step AKS042, if the number of processes is other than "0" (step AKS042; No), the setting destination address and setting data are read (step AKS043). For example, the E register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose registers among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, uses the table data read from the next address of the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer as the lower byte of the setting destination address. Store in. Further, table data read from an address corresponding to a value 2 greater than the value stored in the pointer is stored in the A register as setting data. Thereafter, the table read position is updated by adding 2 to the value stored in the pointer (step AKS044). The CPU 103 may be able to execute the processing corresponding to steps AKS043 and AKS044 using an INLD instruction prepared as one instruction with a 2-byte configuration.

After step AKS044, the setting data is stored in the setting destination address (step AKS045). For example, among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, the D register, which is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register, stores F0 [H] corresponding to the upper byte of the address assigned to the game work area. Then, by storing the stored data in the A register in the data setting address obtained from the stored value in the DE register, data setting of the setting destination address becomes possible. At this time, the number of processes is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS046), and it is determined whether the updated number of processes has become "0" (step AKS047). If the number of processes is other than "0" in response to step AKS047 (step AKS047; No), the process returns to step AKS043, and control is performed to enable data setting using the next table data, etc.

If the number of processes is "0" corresponding to either step AKS042 or AKS047 (step AKS042; Yes, step AKS047; Yes), the table read position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer. (Step AKS048). Then, the read position data is set to the number of processes (step AKS049). For example, table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the B register. Next, it is determined whether the number of processes is "0" (step AKS050). If the number of processes is "0" corresponding to step AKS050 (step AKS050; Yes), the data set process is ended.

Corresponding to step AKS050, if the number of processes is other than "0" (step AKS050; No), the table read position is updated by adding 1 to the stored value of the pointer (step AKS051). Then, the lower byte of the work address is read (step AKS052). For example, table data read from the address corresponding to the stored value of the pointer is stored in the E register as the lower byte of the work address. Thereafter, the data of the work address is cleared (step AKS053). For example, data at the work address can be cleared by clearing the storage area of the work address obtained from the value stored in the DE register. At this time, the number of processes is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS054), and it is determined whether the updated number of processes has become "0" (step AKS055). Corresponding to step AKS055, if the number of processes is other than "0" (step AKS055; No), the process returns to step AKS051, and control is performed to enable data clearing using the next table data or the like. If the number of processes is "0" corresponding to step AKS055 (step AKS055; Yes), the data set process is ended.

Figure 294-8 is a flow chart showing an example of a specific number of command transmission process. For example, in step S13 of the game control main process shown in Figure 288, the CPU 103 executes a specific number of command transmission process as shown in Figure 294-8 based on a program read from the ROM 101. The specific number of command transmission process shown in Figure 294-8 is a process for transmitting a first specific number designation command regarding the number of times remaining until the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number corresponding to the time-saving condition when the power is turned on. A specific number counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102. The specific number counter can store 2-byte data indicating a count value, and counts the number of times remaining until the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number in a specific manner. The count value of the specific number counter is numerical information that can be updated based on the execution of the variable display.

In the specific count command transmission process, the CPU 103 first sets the first specific count designation command upper byte (step AKS061). For example, 91 [H] is stored in the A register as the command type data that is the upper byte of the first specific count designation command. The specific count counter lower byte is also read (step AKS062). At this time, the upper 4 bits of the lower byte of the read specific count counter are stored in the B register, and the lower 4 bits are stored in the C register, so that the count value indicated in hexadecimal is stored in a different register for each digit. The C register, like the B register, is an 8-bit register included in the general-purpose register among the built-in registers provided in the CPU 103, and can be combined with the B register to form the BC register as a pair register. Thus, in step AKS062, the counter data read from the read address of the specific count counter lower byte is stored in the BC register. Next, the upper byte of the first specific count designation command is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS063). Then, the first transmission data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS064). The first transmission data may be, for example, data stored in the C register.

After step AKS064, the second transmission data is set (step AKS065). Here, for example, in the data stored in the B register, the bit value of bit number "4" among bit numbers "0" to "7" is set to "1" as the specific number command identification bit position. Then, the upper byte of the first specific number designation command is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS066). After that, the second transmission data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS067). Note that step AKS066 may be performed first, followed by step AKS065.

Then, the upper byte of the specific count counter is read (step AKS068). At this time, the counter data read from the read address of the upper byte of the specific count counter is stored in the C register. The upper byte of the specific count counter may be one-byte counter data. Next, the third transmission data is set (step AKS069). Here, for example, in the data stored in the C register, the bit value of bit number "5" among bit numbers "0" to "7" is set to "1" as the specific count command identification bit position. Then, the upper byte of the first specific count designation command is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS070). After that, the third transmission data is stored in the serial communication data register (step AKS071). Note that step AKS070 may be performed first, and step AKS069 may be performed later.

In this way, in the specific number of command transmission processing, the CPU 103 creates each of the first transmission data, second transmission data, and third transmission data along with the command type data that is the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command. Each time, it is stored in the serial communication data register. For example, in the specific number of times command transmission process, after storing the upper byte of the first specific number of times designation command in the serial communication data register in step AKS063, the first transmission data is stored in step AKS064, and then in step AKS066. After storing the upper byte of the first specific number designation command in step AKS067, storing the upper byte of the first specific number designation command in step AKS070, the second transmission data is stored in step AKS071. 3 Store the transmission data. The serial communication circuit included in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register and transmits and outputs it to the production control board 12 using a serial communication method. In this way, in the specific number of times command transmission process, each time the data used to transmit the first specific number of times designation command is created, it is stored in the serial communication data register and transmitted to the production control board 12, thereby allowing the first number of times designation command to be transmitted. 1. It is possible to stably transmit the specified number of times designation command. Therefore, the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including a time-saving state can be improved.

The specific number of times command transmission process is executed in step S13 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, so that the first specific number of times designation command can be transmitted whether the recovery condition is met or not met in step S4. This makes it easier to design the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has multiple states including a time-saving state.

Figure 294-9 shows an example of the configuration of the first specific number designation command. The first specific number designation command is sent by the specific number command sending process when the power is turned on, and is the first command related to the number of times remaining until the specific number. The number of times remaining until the specific number is indicated by the count value of the specific number counter at a specified address in RAM 102. The count value of the specific number counter uses 2-byte data to indicate the number of times remaining until the specific number, with 02AD[H] as the upper limit. For example, the initialization setting table specified by step S9 of the game control main process shown in Figure 288 includes table data for setting 02AD[H] corresponding to the specific number initial value as the counter initial value in the specific number counter.

In steps AKS063 and AKS064 of the specific number command transmission process, the first specific number designation command of the first set AKC01 shown in FIG. 294-9 (A) is transmitted. The first specific number designation command of the first set AKC01 includes command type data and first transmission data. The command type data of the first specific number designation command is one byte of first control data indicating that the command type is the first specific number designation command, and indicates 91 [H] as the MODE data of the first specific number designation command. The first transmission data indicates the value at the 1 [H] place as the first digit of the count value of the specific number counter, and becomes one byte of second control data related to the count value. In the first transmission data, among the bit numbers "0" to "7" assigned from the least significant bit to the most significant bit, the bit values of bit numbers "4" and "5" are both set to "0", making it possible to identify that it is the first specific number designation command of the first set AKC01.

In steps AKS066 and AKS067 of the specific number command transmission process, the first specific number designation command of the second set AKC02 shown in FIG. 294-9 (B) is transmitted. The first specific number designation command of the second set AKC02 includes command type data and second transmission data. The command type data indicates 91 [H] as in the case of the first set AKC01. The second transmission data indicates the value in the tens [H] place as the second digit of the count value of the specific number counter, and is one byte of second control data related to the count value. In the second transmission data, among the bit numbers "0" to "7" assigned in the same way as the first transmission data, the bit value of bit number "4" is set to "1" and the bit value of bit number "5" is set to "0", making it possible to identify it as the first specific number designation command of the second set AKC02.

In steps AKS070 and AKS071 of the specific number of times command transmission process, the first specific number of times designation command of the third set AKC03 shown in FIG. 294-9(C) is transmitted. The first specific number of times designation command of the third set AKC03 includes command type data and third transmission data. The command type data indicates 91[H] similarly to the first set AKC01 and the second set AKC02. The third transmission data indicates a value in the 100 [H] digit as the third digit of the count value of the specific number of times counter, and becomes 1-byte second control data regarding the count value. In the third transmission data, among bit numbers "0" to "7" assigned in the same way as the first transmission data and the second transmission data, the bit value at bit number "4" is set to "0", and the bit By setting the bit value of the number "5" to "1", it is possible to identify that the command is the first specific number designation command of the third set AKC03.

In this way, the first specific number designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as a total of 6 bytes of performance control command, with the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03 each consisting of 2 bytes. In addition, the first specific number command is configured by a predetermined number of command data, such as a total of 3 sets from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03, which are combinations of command type data, which is the first control data, and any of the first transmission data to the third transmission data, which is the second control data set corresponding to the count value of the specific number counter. Then, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 creates the first specific number designation command by executing the specific number command transmission process as shown in FIG. 294-8 in step S13 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288.

In the gaming control main process shown in FIG. 288, after executing the RWM check process in step S3, it is determined in step S4 whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied, so that the stored information in the RAM 102 serving as the backup RAM is normal. It is possible to execute a determination process for determining whether or not the above is true. Then, if the recovery condition is satisfied in step S4 and the determination result of the determination process is normal, the RWM initialization process of step S7 is not executed. As a result, the information stored in the RAM 102 is not changed from before the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so the count value of the specific number of times counter is also stored in the RAM 102 from before the power is turned on. In this case, the specific number of times command processing in step S13 is executed based on the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information stored in the RAM 102. On the other hand, if the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S4 and the determination result from the determination process is not normal, the RWM initial setting process in step S7 is executed, and then the initialization setting table specified in step S9 is With reference to this, the data set process in step S11 is executed. As a result, the stored information in the RAM 102 is initialized when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and the count value of the specific number of times counter is set to 02AD[H] as the counter initial value corresponding to the specific number of times initial value. In this way, when the determination result of the determination process is not normal, the specific number of times command process in step S13 is executed based on the counter initial value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information corresponding to the set specific number of times initial value. If the recovery condition is satisfied in step S4 of the game control main process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is hot-started based on the backup information stored in the RAM 102. If the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S4 of the game control main process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold-started based on the stored information in the RAM 102 initialized by the RWM initial setting process or the like in step S7. In the game control main process, the specific number of times command process in step S13 can be executed whether the judgment result in the judgment process in step S4 is normal or not, so it can be executed both in the case of a hot start and in the case of a cold start. Also, a first specific number designation command can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 when the power is turned on so that the remaining number of times up to the specific number can be specified. Therefore, the design of the pachinko game machine 1 becomes easy, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states can be improved.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, after interrupts are disabled in step S1, a specific number of command transmission process in step S13 is executed, and then interrupts are enabled in step S17, so that timer interrupts etc. Other processing based on this becomes executable. Therefore, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute other processes while executing the specific number of times command transmission process in step S13. This makes it possible to prevent the count value of the specific number counter from being updated when the control for transmitting the first specific number of times designation command is performed. A command specifying a specific number of times can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 under stable conditions when the power is turned on, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has multiple states including a time-saving state is enhanced. be able to.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, after the wait process in step S12 is executed, the specific number of times command transmission process in step S13 is executed. Therefore, the specific number of times command processing is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Furthermore, before executing the wait process in step S12, the command set process in step S10 is executed. The command set process in step S10 is performed based on the backup command transmission table specified in step S5 or the initial With reference to the production command transmission table, the production control command corresponding to the judgment result of the judgment process can be transmitted. In this way, the command set process in step S10 is controlled so that the effect control command corresponding to the determination result in the determination process can be transmitted before the predetermined period of time due to the wait process in step S12 has elapsed. The specific number of times command transmission process in step S13 is such that the first specific number of times designation command is sent to the main board 11 when the power is turned on so that the remaining number of times until the specific number of times can be specified in both the hot start and the cold start. It is controlled so that it can be transmitted from to the production control board 12. At this time, if the production control command that becomes the backup command, the production control command that serves as the initialization command, and the first specific number of times designation command are sent without interruption, the production control board 12 side will not function properly. may not be able to receive production control commands. Therefore, before making it possible to transmit the first specific number of times designation command through the specific number of times command transmission process in step S13, the wait process in step S12 is executed to enable reception preparation on the production control board 12 side. , each performance control command can be reliably transmitted and received, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including a time-saving state can be improved.

Figure 294-10 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. In normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the total reserved memory number is "0" (step AKS101). For example, it determines whether the count value of the start port winning buffer memory counter is "0". The start port winning buffer memory counter is a counter that counts the number of start port winning designated values stored in the start port winning buffer, and the count value indicates the total reserved memory number.

When the total reserved memory number is other than "0" in response to step AKS101 (step AKS101; No), the total reserved memory number is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS102). Also, the memory contents of the start port winning buffer are shifted (step AKS103). When the reserved memory number is updated based on the occurrence of a start winning by the start winning determination process in step S101 of the special pattern process process shown in FIG. 290 (A), the start port winning buffer stores data indicating the start winning designation value in the storage area of the buffer number corresponding to the total reserved memory number. The start port winning designation value is a value indicating whether the first start winning or the second start winning has occurred, and "1" is set corresponding to the first start winning, and "2" is set corresponding to the second start winning. In step AKS103, for example, the address of the start port winning buffer with buffer number "0" is set as the destination address, the address of the start port winning buffer with buffer number "1" is set as the source address, the number of transfers is set to "8", and a block transfer command is executed. This shifts the memory contents of each storage area in the consecutive addresses of RAM 102 to which buffer numbers "0" to "8" of the start port winning buffer are assigned, by transferring them one address at a time to the previous address. After that, the start port winning buffer with buffer number "8" is cleared, and the memory contents are initialized.

Following step AKS103, the second special symbol determination control table is specified (step AKS104). For example, a value corresponding to the top address of the second special symbol determination control table is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. Then, it is determined whether the start port winning designation value is "1" (step AKS105). For example, the start port winning designation value stored in the start port winning buffer with buffer number "0" is read, and it is determined whether the value is "1". If the start port winning designation value is "1" (step AKS105; Yes), the first special symbol determination control table is re-specified (step AKS106). For example, the value corresponding to the top address of the first special symbol determination control table is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer, thereby overwriting the pointer value. In this way, in the normal special symbol processing, after the second special symbol determination control table is specified in step AKS104, if the start-gate winning designation value is "1" in step AKS105, the first special symbol determination control table is re-set by overwriting in step AKS106. This allows the program capacity of the storage command used for table setting to be reduced when the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, when the second special symbol determination control table is used more frequently than the first special symbol determination control table, the processing by the branch command is simplified, making it easier to check at the design stage, and improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Corresponding to step AKS105, if the starting opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" (step AKS105; No), or after step AKS106, special symbol determination processing (step AKS107) and fluctuation pattern setting processing ( After executing step AKS108), the special symbol normal processing is ended.

If the total reserved memory count is "0" corresponding to step AKS101 (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on or not (step AKS109). The demo display flag is a flag that indicates that a demonstration display is being executed. If the demo display flag is on (step AKS109; Yes), the normal processing of the special symbol ends.

If the demo display flag is off in response to step AKS109 (step AKS109; No), the demo display flag is set to on (step AKS110), and after specifying the standby command transmission table (step AKS111), After executing the command set process (step AKS112), the special symbol normal process ends.

Figure 294-10 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the standby command transmission table AKT15. The standby command transmission table AKT15 includes data indicating the number of processes as the table top data. In the standby command transmission table AKT15, it is sufficient that "3" is specified as the number of processes. In addition to the table top data indicating the number of processes, the standby command transmission table AKT15 includes table data for transmitting the second specific number of times designation command, the background color designation command, and the customer waiting demo command. The performance control command that is controlled to be transmittable using the standby command transmission table AKT15 is also called a standby command. In the standby command transmission table AKT15, the table data for transmitting the second specific number of times designation command includes command type data that designates 94 [H] of the MODE data as the upper byte of the second specific number of times designation command, and lower byte data for acquiring the reference data lower address corresponding to the specific number of times command buffer in the command extension data address table AKT11. The lower byte data here includes a work area reference bit with a bit value of "1" and a bit other than the work area reference bit that indicates a specific number of command buffer offset values.

The specific number of times command buffer is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102. The stored value of the specific number of times command buffer becomes 7F[H] when the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is "127" or more, and indicates the remaining number of times when the number of remaining times until the specific number of times is less than "127". It becomes a hexadecimal number. For example, the initialization setting table specified in step S9 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288 is a table for setting 7F[H] corresponding to the upper limit value as the buffer initial value in the specific number of times command buffer. Contains data. In this way, the second specific number of times designation command includes the command type data that is the first control data, and the specific number of times command data that is the second control data that is set corresponding to the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer. It consists of a set of combined command data.

In the standby command transmission table AKT15, the table data for transmitting the background color designation command includes command type data that specifies 95 [H] of the MODE data as the upper byte of the background color designation command, and lower byte data for acquiring the lower address of the reference data corresponding to the special symbol state designation buffer in the command extension data address table AKT11. The lower byte data here includes a work area reference bit with a bit value of "1" and a bit indicating the special symbol state designation buffer offset value other than the work area reference bit. The special symbol state designation buffer is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of RAM 102, and a value indicating the state display of the special symbol is stored. For example, when the game state is in the normal state, the storage value of the special symbol state designation buffer is set to either 00 [H] or 03 [H], and when the game state is in the time-saving state, the storage value of the special symbol state designation buffer is set to 02 [H]. When the game state is normal, if the time-saving state based on the end of the big win game state ends, the special symbol state designation buffer is set to 03 [H] during the special period corresponding to the number of times the special symbol game has been executed. When the game state is otherwise normal, the special symbol state designation buffer is set to 00 [H].

In the standby command transmission table AKT15, the table data for sending the customer waiting demo command is command type data that specifies 9F[H] of the MODE data as the upper byte of the customer waiting demo command, and the lower byte of the customer waiting demo command. It includes command lower byte data specifying 03[H] of EXT data. The command lower byte data here includes the work area reference bit with a bit value of "0" and is data indicating 03[H], which is the lower byte of the customer waiting demo command.

In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 294-10(A), whether or not pending memory information is stored is determined in step AKS101 by determining whether or not the total number of pending memories is "0". It is possible to execute the pending storage determination process. The pending storage information includes, for example, data indicating the values of gaming random numbers including the random number MR1 for special symbol determination, and can be stored in a special symbol buffer provided at a predetermined address in the gaming work area of the RAM 102. . If it is determined in step AKS101 of the special symbol normal processing that no pending memory information is stored because the total number of pending memories is "0", refer to the standby command transmission table specified in step AKS111. However, by the command set process in step AKS112, the production control command that is the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command is transmitted. At this time, in the command set process of step AKS112, the value stored in the specified number of times command buffer is read, and the upper byte and lower byte of the second specified number of times specified command are sequentially stored in the serial communication data register. , controls to enable transmission of the second specific number of times designation command. The serial communication circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads out the data stored in the serial communication data register and transmits and outputs a second specific number of times designation command to the production control board 12. In this way, when it is determined in the pending storage determination process that the pending storage information is not stored, the second specific number of times designation command is controlled to be transmittable using the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer, which is the stored information. Ru. In this way, when it is determined that the pending storage information is not stored based on step AKS101 as the pending storage determination process of the special symbol normal process, the command set process of step AKS112 is executed to specify the second specific number of times. Since the command is controlled so that the command can be transmitted, when the special figure game is not started because the pending memory information is not stored, the second specific number designation command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. can be sent to. As a result, by controlling the second specific number of times designation command that is transmitted in response to the execution of variable display in a special figure game, etc. to be stably transmitted, a pachinko game machine that is equipped with multiple states including a time-saving state It is possible to improve the marketability of item 1.

The production control command transmitted using the standby command transmission table AKT15 shown in FIG. 294-10(B) includes a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies a demonstration display in a non-gaming state where the game is stopped. . If it is determined that no pending memory information is stored because the total number of pending memories is "0" in step AKS101 of the special symbol normal processing, refer to the standby command transmission table specified in step AKS111. Then, by the command set processing in step AKS112, the customer waiting demonstration command is controlled to be transmitted together with the second specific number of times designation command. In this way, when it is determined that the pending memory information is not stored in the pending memory determination process, the second specific number of times designation command using the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer, which is the stored information, is sent to the customer regarding the non-gaming state. Controls the waiting demo command so that it can be sent. In this way, by transmitting the second specific number of times designation command and the customer waiting demonstration command at the same time, it becomes easier to design the processing and control related to the production control command on the production control board 12 side, including the time saving state. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states can be improved.

Figure 294-11 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS107 of Figure 294-10 (A) as the special symbol determination process. In the special symbol determination process, the CPU 103 specifies the special symbol buffer shift control table (step AKS201). For example, a value corresponding to the top address of the special symbol buffer shift control table is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. The special symbol buffer shift control table is a control table used when shifting the memory contents of the special symbol buffer to which a predetermined address is assigned in the game work area of the RAM 102. When the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is updated based on the occurrence of a start winning by the start winning determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process process shown in Figure 290 (A), the special symbol buffer stores data indicating the values of the extracted various random numbers in the storage area of the buffer number corresponding to the updated first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number. The special symbol buffer is prepared corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In step AKS201, different special symbol buffer shift control tables are specified for the second special symbol determination control table specified in step AKS104 shown in FIG. 294-10(A) and the first special symbol determination control table specified in step AKS106. For example, when the start hole winning designation value corresponds to "1" and the first special symbol game is executed, the first special symbol buffer shift control table is specified. In contrast, when the start hole winning designation value corresponds to "2" and the second special symbol game is executed, the second special symbol buffer shift control table is specified.

After step AKS201, a special symbol buffer shift process is executed (step AKS202). Then, the value of the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol is read (step AKS203). Next, a special symbol big win determination (step AKS204), a special symbol small win determination (step AKS205), and special symbol information setting (step AKS206) are performed. In this embodiment, the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is determined to be either a "big win", "small win", or "miss", and is not determined to be "time reduction".

The special symbol jackpot determination in step AKS204 compares the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out in step AKS203 with the jackpot determination value to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot". If the special symbol jackpot determination determines that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", the jackpot designated value 01 [H] is set in the hit flag. The special symbol small hit determination in step AKS205 compares the value of the random number MR1 for special symbol determination read out in step AKS203 with the small hit determination value to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "small hit". If the special symbol small hit determination determines that the special symbol display result is a "small hit", the small hit designated value 02 [H] is set in the hit flag.

The special symbol information setting in step AKS206 includes the setting of the jackpot symbol when the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the special symbol display result when the special symbol is a "small hit" regarding the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This includes the setting of a small winning symbol when the result is a "hit" and the setting of a losing symbol when the special figure display result is a "losing". The data indicating the confirmed special symbol is stored and stored in the special symbol buffer. The special symbol buffer is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, and is processed by the second special symbol determination control table specified in step AKS104 or step AKS106 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 294-10(A). By referring to the specified first special symbol determination control table, it is possible to specify the address of the special symbol buffer corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Further, in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is a "jackpot", a jackpot symbol designation value can be set by sorting using the value of the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol. Further, in the special symbol information setting in step AKS206, when the specific display result is "small win", a small win symbol designation value can be set by sorting using the value of the random number MR2 for selecting a winning symbol. In addition, the special symbol information setting in step AKS206 includes a pre-fluctuation start command transmission setting for transmitting a background color designation command. Following step AKS206, after specifying the post-judgment work setting table (step AKS207) and executing data set processing (step AKS208), the special symbol determination process ends.

Figure 294-12 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS202 of Figure 294-11 as the special symbol buffer shift process. In the special symbol buffer shift process, the CPU 103 sets the transfer source, transfer destination, and transfer count (step AKS301). For example, the address of the special symbol buffer with buffer number "1" is set as the transfer source address, and the address of the special symbol buffer with buffer number "0" is set as the transfer destination address, and the multiplication value of "4" corresponding to the upper limit of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number and the buffer size of each special symbol buffer is set as the transfer count. Then, a block transfer command is executed (step AKS302). As a result, the memory contents of each storage area to which the buffer numbers "0" to "4" of the special symbol buffer in consecutive addresses of the RAM 102 are assigned may be shifted by transferring them one by one to the storage area corresponding to the previous buffer number. In addition, the count value of the start port winning memory counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS303), and the final buffer in the special pattern buffer, which is assigned buffer number "4", is cleared (step AKS304).

After step AKS304, a specific number of times designation command transmission table is designated (step AKS305), and then a command set process (step AKS306) is executed. This controls the second specific number of times designation command to be transmittable in response to the start of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game. Next, a performance memory information designation command transmission table is designated (step AKS307), and then a command set process (step AKS308) is executed, and then the special symbol buffer shift process ends. The special symbol buffer shift process includes steps AKS305 and AKS306 for controlling the second specific number of times designation command to be transmittable in response to the execution of a variable display of a special symbol or the like in the special symbol game.

Figure 294-12 (B) shows an example of the configuration of the specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21. The specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21 does not include data indicating the number of processes as the table top data. When the second specific number of times designation command is transmitted using the specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21, the number of transmitted commands becomes "1", so the number of processes is set to "1" in the command set processing of step AKS306, corresponding to the bit value of the work area reference bit in the table top data being "1". The table top data of the specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21 is command type data that specifies 94 [H] of MODE data as the upper byte of the second specific number of times designation command. In addition, the table data corresponding to the next address of the table top data in the specific number of times designation command transmission table AKT21 is data for the lower byte for acquiring the reference data lower address corresponding to the specific number of times command buffer in the command extension data address table AKT11. This lower byte data includes a work area reference bit with a bit value of "1", and a bit indicating 12 [H], which is the command buffer offset value a specific number of times due to factors other than the work area reference bit. As a result, the lower byte data indicates 92 [H], which is the sum of the offset value of 12 [H] and 80 [H], which corresponds to the work area reference bit with a bit value of "1".

Figure 294-12 (C) shows an example of the configuration of the second specific number designation command AKC11. The second specific number designation command includes command type data and specific number command data. The command type data of the second specific number designation command is 1 byte of first control data indicating that the command type is the second specific number designation command, and indicates 94 [H] as the MODE data of the second specific number designation command. The specific number command data is 1 byte of second control data that can be set corresponding to the storage value of the specific number command buffer. The specific number command data has a bit value of "0" for the first bit, and the remaining 7 bits can be used to specify a storage value of the specific number command buffer from 00 [H] to 7F [H]. In this way, the specific number command data has a minimum value of 00 [H] and a maximum value of 7F [H]. The second specific number designation command is a performance control command of 2 bytes.

In the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12(A), the specific number of times designation command transmission table specified in step AKS305 is referenced, and the second specific number of times designation command is transmitted by the command set process in step AKS306. The special symbol buffer shift process is included in the special symbol determination process executed in step AKS107 when the total reserved memory number is determined to be other than "0" in step AKS101 in the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 294-10(A), and data indicating the value of a gaming random number that becomes reserved memory information is stored. In this case, the special symbol buffer stores data indicating the values of various random numbers included in the reserved memory information, such as data indicating the random number MR1 for special symbol determination. In the special symbol determination process shown in FIG. 294-11, the special symbol buffer shift process is executed in step AKS202 to shift the memory contents of the special symbol buffer. In this special symbol buffer shift process, the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer is read in the command set process of step AKS306, and the upper byte and the lower byte of the second specific number of times designation command are sequentially stored in the serial communication data register, thereby controlling the second specific number of times designation command to be transmittable. The serial communication circuit provided in the game control microcomputer 100 sequentially reads the stored data of the serial communication data register and transmits and outputs the second specific number of times designation command to the performance control board 12. In this way, in the special symbol buffer shift process, the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer, which is the stored information, is used to control the second specific number of times designation command to be transmittable. In this way, when the special symbol determination process of the special symbol normal process is executed, the command set process is executed in the special symbol buffer shift process to control the second specific number of times designation command to be transmittable, so that at the timing when the special symbol in the special symbol game starts to fluctuate, the second specific number of times designation command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times can be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. This clarifies the relationship between the special game that is started and the number of times remaining until a specific number of times, facilitating the design and control of the number of times remaining until a specific number of times, and improves the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 that has multiple states including a time-saving state.

Figure 294-13 shows an example of designation value determination. Of these, Figure 294-13 (A) is a designation example AKD01 when the special chart display result is "jackpot". Figure 294-13 (B) is a designation example AKD02 when the special chart display result is "small hit". In the special chart determination process shown in Figure 294-11, in the special chart information setting of step AKS206, when the special chart display result is "jackpot", the jackpot chart is set using the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning chart. For example, when the winning flag is set to 01 [H] to indicate the jackpot designated value, data indicating the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning chart is stored in the special chart buffer, and a jackpot state setting table corresponding to the case where the starting gate winning designated value is "1" and the case where it is "2" is specified. Then, the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning symbol is compared with the distribution judgment value indicated by the table data of the specified table for setting the winning state, and the designated value for the winning symbol is determined by the determination ratio indicated in the determination example AKD01. The designated value for the winning symbol is stored in the winning symbol judgment buffer. In addition, in the special symbol information setting of step AKS206, when the special symbol display result is "small win", the small win symbol is set using the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning symbol. For example, when the winning flag is set to 02 [H] to indicate the small win designated value, data indicating the value obtained by adding 64 [H] to the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning symbol is stored in the special symbol buffer, and a table for setting the small win state corresponding to the case where the starting hole winning designated value is "1" and the case where it is "2" is specified. Next, the value of the random number MR2 for selecting the winning symbol is compared with the allocation judgment value indicated by the table data of the specified small win state setting table, and the small win symbol designation value is determined by the determination ratio shown in the determination example AKD02. The small win symbol designation value is stored in the small win symbol determination buffer. In addition, in the special symbol information setting of step AKS206, if the special symbol display result is "miss", F1 [H], which is the miss symbol pattern designation value, is stored in the special symbol buffer.

Figure 294-14 shows an example of setting the number of times the large prize opening is to be performed. Of these, Figure 294-14 (A) is a setting example AKE01 when the special chart display result is a "big win". Figure 294-14 (B) is a setting example AKE02 when the special chart display result is a "small win". In the special pattern determination process shown in Figure 294-11, in the special pattern information setting of step AKS206, when the special chart display result is a "big win", the maximum number of times the large prize opening is to be performed is set using the big win pattern designation value. For example, when the hit flag is set to 01 [H] to indicate the big win designation value, the large prize opening maximum number of times table corresponding to the special chart display result being a "big win" is designated. The large prize opening maximum number of times table corresponding to the special chart display result being a "big win" includes table data that associates the big win pattern designation value with the maximum number of times the large prize opening is to be performed. By referring to such a maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened, the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened corresponding to the designated value of the large prize pattern is determined. The data indicating the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened determined at this time is stored in the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened buffer. In addition, when the special chart display result is a "small win", the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened can be set using the designated value of the small prize pattern. For example, by referring to the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened table corresponding to the special chart display result of a "small win", the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened corresponding to the designated value of the small prize pattern is determined. The data indicating the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened determined at this time is stored in the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened buffer. In addition, when the special chart display result is a "small win", the maximum number of times the large prize opening is opened may be determined when a V win occurs due to the game ball passing through the V winning area 51 in the small win game state.

FIG. 294-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS108 of FIG. 294-10(A) as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS221). For example, if the value of the hit flag is read out and the read value is 01 [H], which is the designated jackpot value, it may be determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot". When the special figure display result is "jackpot" (step AKS221; Yes), the jackpot symbol designation value is read (step AKS222). The jackpot design designation value is the designation value of the jackpot design that is set when the special symbol display result is "jackpot", and is stored in the production design buffer. Further, the performance state selection designation value is read out (step AKS223). The performance state selection designation value is a value stored in the performance state selection buffer, and is set to one of 00[H] to 0E[H]. After step AKS223, a jackpot time fluctuation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS224). The jackpot variation pattern type selection table is a table for selecting the variation pattern type when the special symbol display result is "jackpot", and includes the jackpot symbol designation value read out in step AKS222 and the effect read out in step AKS223. It is sufficient if it is possible to specify different tables corresponding to the state selection specification value.

If the special chart display result is not a "big win" in response to step AKS221 (step AKS221; No), it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "small win" (step AKS225). For example, the value of the win flag is read, and if the read value is 02 [H], which is the small win designation value, it is determined that the special chart display result is a "small win". If the special chart display result is a "small win" (step AKS225; Yes), the small win pattern designation value is read (step AKS226). The small win pattern designation value is the designation value of the small win pattern set when the special chart display result is a "small win", and is stored in the performance pattern buffer. In addition, the performance state selection designation value is read (step AKS227). After that, the small win time variation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS228). The small win fluctuation pattern type selection table is a table for selecting the fluctuation pattern type when the special chart display result is a "small win," and it is sufficient if it is possible to specify a different table in response to the small win pattern designation value read in step AKS226 and the presentation state selection designation value read in step AKS227.

Corresponding to step AKS225, if the special figure display result is not a "small win" (step AKS225; No), for example, the starting opening winning designation value is read from the starting opening winning buffer with buffer number "0" (step AKS229). Further, the performance state selection designation value is read out (step AKS230). Thereafter, a loss variation pattern type selection table is specified (step AKS231). The loss variation pattern type selection table is a table for selecting the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is "loss", and includes the starting opening winning designation value read out in step AKS229 and the value read out in step AKS230. It is sufficient if it is possible to specify different tables corresponding to the production state selection specification value. Furthermore, the losing time variation pattern type selection table is the first pending storage number when the starting opening winning designation value is "1" or the second holding storage number when the starting opening winning designation value is "2". It may be possible to specify different tables corresponding to .

After steps AKS224, AKS228, and AKS231, the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern is read (step AKS232). The data indicating the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern may be stored in the buffer for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special pattern buffer. Next, the type of fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the random number MR4 for selecting the type of fluctuation pattern (step AKS233). Next, the fluctuation pattern determination table is specified (step AKS234). In step AKS234, it is sufficient that a different fluctuation pattern determination table can be specified corresponding to the type of fluctuation pattern selected in step AKS233. Then, the value of the random number MR5 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern is read (step AKS235). The data indicating the value of the random number MR5 for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be stored in the buffer for determining the type of fluctuation pattern included in the storage area to which the buffer number "0" is assigned in the special pattern buffer. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of random number MR5 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step AKS236).

Following step AKS236, a variable command transmission table is designated (step AKS237), and command set processing (step AKS238) is executed. The variation command transmission table includes table data for transmitting an effect control command at the time of the start of variation in response to the start of variation of the special symbols in the special symbol game. For example, the variable command transmission table specified corresponding to the first special figure game includes, in addition to table head data indicating the number of processing, a production symbol designation command, a first fluctuation start designation command, and a fluctuation pattern designation command. , contains table data for sending. On the other hand, the variable command transmission table specified corresponding to the second special figure game includes, in addition to the table head data specifying the number of processing, the production symbol designation command, the second fluctuation start designation command, and the fluctuation pattern. Contains the specified command and table data for sending.

After step AKS238, a special symbol fluctuation time table is specified (step AKS239), and the special symbol fluctuation time is set (step AKS240). The special symbol fluctuation time table contains table data for setting time data indicating variable display times such as special symbol fluctuation times in accordance with the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern. In step AKS240, the special symbol fluctuation time table specified in step AKS239 is referenced and a time data expansion process is executed, whereby time data corresponding to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern is stored in the HL register. The time data obtained in this manner can be set as the timer initial value in the special symbol process timer as the fluctuation time data.

Then, the work setting table after the change pattern is set is specified (step AKS241), data set processing is executed (step AKS242), and the change pattern setting processing is terminated. The work setting table after the change pattern is set includes table data for updating the special pattern process code to 01 [H], which is a value corresponding to the special pattern change processing. The work setting table after the change pattern is set also includes table data for updating the stored value of the special pattern change display buffer to 01 [H]. The special pattern change display buffer stores a value specifying the display pattern during the change of the first special pattern or the second special pattern, and includes a first special pattern change display buffer corresponding to the first special pattern, and a second special pattern change display buffer corresponding to the second special pattern. In the data set processing of step AKS242, the post-variation pattern setting work setting table specified in step AKS241 is referenced, and when the first special symbol game is started, the stored value of the first special symbol variation display buffer is updated to 01 [H], and when the second special symbol game is started, the stored value of the second special symbol variation display buffer is updated to 01 [H]. Furthermore, the post-variation pattern setting work setting table includes table data for clearing the random number value buffer in which the random numbers used for determining the variation pattern are stored, and initializing the stored values.

FIG. 294-16 shows a variation pattern determination example AKD11 when the special figure display result is a "jackpot". In the variation pattern determination example AKD11, the determinable pattern type and the determinable pattern are set differently depending on the combination of the performance state selection designated value and the jackpot symbol designated value. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" in step AKS221, the jackpot symbol designation value read out in step AKS222 and the jackpot symbol designation value read in step AKS223 are In step AKS233, a variable pattern type is selected and determined from among the determinable pattern types, and in step AKS236, a variable pattern is determined from among the determinable patterns, corresponding to the performance state selection designation value read out. For example, the jackpot variation pattern type selection table specified by step AKS224 is a variation pattern type selection table that indicates the distribution judgment value for each determinable pattern type in response to the combination of the jackpot symbol specification value and the performance state selection specification value. The table may be one selected from a plurality of tables prepared in advance. Further, the variation pattern determination table specified in step AKS234 is a plurality of pre-prepared variation pattern determination tables indicating the distribution determination values for each determinable pattern, corresponding to the selection result of the variation pattern type in step AKS233. Any one selected from among them is sufficient.

Figure 294-17 shows a variation pattern determination example AKD12 when the special chart display result is a "small hit." In the variation pattern determination example AKD12, different determinable pattern types and determinable patterns are set in response to the combination of the presentation state selection designated value and the small hit pattern designated value. In the variation pattern setting process shown in Figure 294-15, when the special chart display result is determined to be a "small hit" in step AKS225, a variation pattern type is selected and determined from among the determinable pattern types in step AKS233 in response to the small hit pattern designated value read in step AKS226 and the presentation state selection designated value read in step AKS227, and a variation pattern is determined from among the determinable patterns in step AKS236. For example, the small win time fluctuation pattern type selection table specified by step AKS228 may be a fluctuation pattern type selection table that indicates the allocation judgment value for each determinable pattern type in response to the combination of the small win symbol designation value and the performance state selection designation value, and is selected from a plurality of tables prepared in advance. Also, the fluctuation pattern determination table specified by step AKS234 may be a fluctuation pattern determination table that indicates the allocation judgment value for each determinable pattern in response to the selection result of the fluctuation pattern type by step AKS233, and is selected from a plurality of tables prepared in advance.

Figure 294-18 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. In the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS121). In this special symbol process timer, the fluctuation time data corresponding to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern is set as the timer initial value in step AKS240 of the fluctuation pattern setting processing shown in Figure 294-15. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS121; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS122), and the special symbol variation processing ends.

If the time value of the special symbol process timer is "0" in response to step AKS121 (step AKS121; Yes), the special symbol process code is updated to 02[H], which is the value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing. (Step AKS123). Further, after executing the special symbol stop time setting process (step AKS124), the counter subtraction process (step AKS125) is executed, and then the special symbol variation process ends.

Figure 294-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS124 of Figure 294-18 as the special symbol stop time setting process. In the special symbol stop time setting process, the CPU 103 first performs the symbol stop time setting SZA1 (step AKS251). For example, a value corresponding to the top address of the symbol stop time data selection table corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. Then, it is determined whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS252). For example, when the hit flag is set to 01 [H], indicating a jackpot designated value, it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot". When the special symbol display result is not a "jackpot" (step AKS252; No), it is determined whether the performance designated value after the hit is 00 [H] (step AKS253). Data indicating the post-win performance designation value is stored in a post-win performance designation buffer provided at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102, and is set to one of 00 [H], 01 [H], 03 [H], 05 [H], 08 [H], or 09 [H]. When the power is turned on, if the recovery condition is not met in step S4 of the game control main processing shown in FIG. 288, the RWM initial setting processing in step S7 is executed, clearing the game work area including the post-win performance designation buffer, and the post-win performance designation value is set to 00 [H].

Corresponding to step AKS253, if the after-win performance designation value is not 00 [H] (step AKS253; No), it is determined whether the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reach determination value or not (step AKS254). In step AKS254, data indicating the count value of the specific number of times counter is stored in the DE register. Thereafter, when the value stored in the DE register is updated by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the updated value becomes "0". In this way, the reaching determination value of the specific number of times counter is 0000 [H], which corresponds to "0", but in step AKS254, instead of updating the counted value of the specific number of times counter itself, data indicating that counted value is updated. is stored in a storage area such as a DE register that is different from the specific number of times counter, and the stored value is updated by subtracting 1 to determine whether or not the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value. The count value of the specific number of times counter itself can be updated in the counter subtraction process.

When the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reaching judgment value in response to step AKS254 (step AKS254; Yes), the pattern stop time setting SZA3 is re-set by overwriting (step AKS255). For example, the value corresponding to the top address of the pattern stop time data selection table corresponding to the pattern stop time setting SZA3 is overwritten and stored in the HL register serving as a pointer. The count value of the specific number counter is set to 02AD [H] as the counter initial value corresponding to the specific number initial value when the power is turned on or when the jackpot game state ends. After that, when the special chart game is executed and the special chart display result is not "jackpot", the count value of the specific number counter is updated by subtracting 1. Then, when the count value of the specific number counter becomes 0000 [H], it is determined in step AKS254 that the reaching judgment value has been reached. Therefore, the rate at which it is determined that the specific condition for the count value of the specific number counter to reach the reaching judgment value has been established is sufficiently lower than the rate at which it is determined that such a specific condition has not been established. Therefore, in the special symbol stop time setting process, the symbol stop time setting SZA1 is performed in step AKS251, and then in step AKS254, when the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reaching judgment value, the symbol stop time setting SZA3 is reset by overwriting in step AKS255. As a result, when the setting frequency of the symbol stop time setting SZA1 is higher than the setting frequency of the symbol stop time setting SZA3, the program capacity of the storage command used for table setting, etc. can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved. Also, when the setting frequency of the symbol stop time setting SZA1 is higher than the setting frequency of the symbol stop time setting SZA3, the processing by the branch command can be simplified, making it easier to check at the design stage, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

If the count value of the specific number counter does not reach the reaching judgment value in response to step AKS254 (step AKS254; No), it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "small hit" (step AKS256). For example, if the hit flag is set to 02 [H] to indicate a small hit designated value, the special chart display result is determined to be a "small hit". If the special chart display result is not a "small hit" (step AKS256; No), it is determined whether the count value of the first time-saving counter reaches the end judgment value (step AKS257). In step AKS257, data indicating the count value of the first time-saving counter is stored in the DE register. After that, when the stored value of the DE register is updated by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the updated value becomes "0". In this way, the end judgment value of the first time-saving counter is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0", but in step AKS257, instead of updating the count value of the first time-saving counter itself, data indicating the count value is stored in a storage area such as a DE register different from the first time-saving counter, and the stored value is updated by subtracting 1 to judge whether the count value of the first time-saving counter reaches the end judgment value. The first time-saving counter is provided at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102, stores 2-byte data, and can count the total number of first special game and second special game that can be executed in the time-saving state by counting down the remaining number. The count value of the first time-saving counter itself can be updated in the counter subtraction process.

Corresponding to step AKS257, if the count value of the first time saving counter does not reach the end determination value (step AKS257; No), it is determined whether the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS258) . At this time, if the starting opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" (step AKS258; No), it is determined whether the count value of the second time saving counter reaches the end determination value (step AKS259) . In step AKS259, data indicating the count value of the second time saving counter is stored in the DE register. Thereafter, when the value stored in the DE register is updated by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the updated value becomes "0". In this way, the end determination value of the second time saving counter is 0000 [H], which corresponds to "0", but in step AKS259, the counted value of the second time saving counter is not updated, but the counted value is By storing the data shown in a storage area such as a DE register different from the second time saving counter and updating the stored value by subtracting 1, it is determined whether the counted value of the second time saving counter reaches the end judgment value. . The second time-saving counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102, stores 2-byte data, and can count the number of times the second special symbol game can be played in the time-saving state by counting down the remaining number of times. . The count value of the second time saving counter itself can be updated in the counter subtraction process.

When the count value of the first time saving counter reaches the end judgment value in response to step AKS257 (step AKS257; Yes), or when the count value of the second time saving counter reaches the end judgment value in response to step AKS259 ( Step AKS259; Yes), the symbol stop setting SZA2 is reset by overwriting setting (Step AKS260). For example, the value corresponding to the start address of the symbol stop data selection table corresponding to the symbol stop setting SZA2 is overwritten and stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. The count value of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter is set to the initial value of the counter corresponding to the number of changes during the time saving at the end of the jackpot game state. Thereafter, when the special figure game is executed in the time-saving state, the count value of at least one of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter is updated by subtracting one. Then, when the count value of the first time saving counter reaches 0000 [H], it is determined in step AKS257 that the end determination value has been reached. Further, when the count value of the second time saving counter reaches 0000 [H], it is determined in step AKS259 that the end determination value has been reached. Therefore, the rate at which it is determined that the specific condition in which the count value of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter reaches the end judgment value is satisfied is sufficiently higher than the rate at which such specific condition is determined not to be satisfied. The proportion is low. Therefore, in the special symbol stop time setting process, after performing the symbol stop time setting SZA1 in step AKS251, if the count value of the first time saving counter reaches the end judgment value in step AKS257, or if the count value of the second time saving counter reaches the end judgment value in step AKS259, When the count value reaches the end judgment value, in step AKS260, the symbol stop setting SZA2 is reset by overwriting setting. As a result, when the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA1 is higher than the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA2, the program capacity of storage commands used for table setting etc. can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. Can be done. In addition, when the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA1 is higher than the setting frequency of the symbol stop setting SZA2, processing by branch commands is simplified and confirmation at the design stage becomes easier, and the product of pachinko game machine 1 You can increase your sexuality.

If the special figure display result is a "jackpot" in response to step AKS252 (step AKS252; Yes), and if the designated value for effect after winning is 00[H] in response to step AKS253 (step AKS253; Yes) , If the special figure display result is "small win" corresponding to step AKS256 (step AKS256; Yes), if the starting opening winning designation value is "1" corresponding to step AKS258 (step AKS258; Yes) Or, if the count value of the second time saving counter does not reach the end judgment value in response to step AKS259 (step AKS259; No), command set processing is performed (step AKS261) based on the symbol stop setting SZA1 in step AKS251. , and the data set process (step AKS262) are executed, and the special symbol stop time setting process ends. After step AKS255, a command set process (step AKS261) and a data set process (step AKS262) are executed based on the symbol stop time setting SZA3, and the special symbol stop time setting process ends. After step AKS260, a command set process (step AKS261) and a data set process (step AKS262) are executed based on the symbol stop time setting SZA2, and the special symbol stop time setting process ends.

FIG. 294-20 shows a setting example AKE11 when the symbol is stopped. In the special symbol stop time setting process, by executing the command set process in step AKS261 based on any of the symbol stop time settings SZA1 to SZA3, it is possible to send a production symbol confirmation command with different EXT data as the lower byte. Control. In addition, in the special symbol stop time setting process, a different timer initial value can be set for the special symbol process timer by executing the data set process in step AKS262 based on any of the symbol stop time settings SZA1 to SZA3. control. For example, the special symbol process timer is set to 007D[H] as the timer initial value in the case of the symbol stop setting SZA1, and 05DC[H] is set as the timer initial value in the case of the symbol stop setting SZA2. When the time setting is SZA3, 4F7E[H] is set as the timer initial value. The special symbol process timer to which these timer initial values have been set is updated by one subtraction each time a timer interrupt of the game control microcomputer 100 occurs in the special symbol stop processing until the time value reaches "0". Ru.

A timer interrupt of the game control microcomputer 100 occurs, for example, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds. As a result, in the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA1, the symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game is set to 007D[H] x 4 = 500 milliseconds. be done. The symbol stop time of the symbol stop time setting SZA1 is the normal stop time. In addition, in the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA2, the symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game is set to 05DC[H] x 4 = 6000 milliseconds. Ru. In the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA3, the symbol stop time for stopping and displaying the special symbol after the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game is set to 4F7E[H]×4=81400 milliseconds. The symbol stop time of the symbol stop time setting SZA3 is a specific stop time different from the normal stop time. The symbol stop time setting SZA3 is a setting performed in step AKS255 when the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value in step AKS254 of the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19. . When the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value, a time-saving condition based on the number of executions of the special figure game is established, and the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the time-saving state. At this time, corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3, a specific stop time different from the normal stop time is set as the stop time after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed.

The lower byte of the effect symbol determination command is set to 00 [H] in the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA1, set to 01 [H] in the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA2, and set to 02 [H] in the case of the symbol stop time setting SZA3. When the special symbol variable time during which the variable display of the special symbol is executed in the special symbol game has elapsed, the command set process of step AKS261 controls the effect symbol determination command to be transmittable, and the symbol stop time can be specified on the effect control board 12 side in response to the lower byte. For example, it can be specified that the symbol stop time is a specific stop time different from the normal stop time in response to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. In the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control corresponding to receiving the effect symbol determination command with the lower byte set to 02 [H], thereby enabling the execution of a notification effect that notifies that the time-saving state will be controlled based on the specific stop time.

FIG. 294-21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step AKS125 of FIG. 294-18 as the counter subtraction process. In the counter subtraction process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the special figure display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS271). For example, when 01[H] is set in the hit flag to indicate a designated jackpot value, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot". If the special figure display result is not a "jackpot" (step AKS271; No), it is determined whether the count value of the specific number of times counter has reached the reach determination value (step AKS272). In step AKS272, if the count value of the specific number of times counter is already "0", it is determined that the count value has not reached the attainment determination value. On the other hand, if the count value of the specific number of times counter is other than "0", it is determined whether the count value becomes "0" after being updated by one. If the updated count value is other than "0", it is determined that the reaching determination value has not been reached. If the updated count value is "0", it is determined that the reaching determination value has been reached. In step AKS272, the value corresponding to the address of the specific number of times counter is stored in the HL register serving as a pointer, and by updating the stored value at that address by subtracting 1, the counted value of the specific number of times counter itself can be updated. In this way, the count value of the specific number of times counter can be updated by counter subtraction processing based on execution of variable display. Corresponding to step AKS272, when the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the arrival judgment value (step AKS272; Yes), the work setting table at the time of arrival is specified (step AKS273), and data set processing (step AKS274) is executed. do.

The determination in step AKS272 is not performed when the special figure display result is a "jackpot". The determination in step AKS272 includes a process of updating the count value by subtracting 1 from the count value of the specific number of times counter if it is not yet "0". The count value of the specific number of times counter becomes numerical information that can be updated in step AKS272 based on execution of variable display. In step AKS271, based on the variable display of special symbols in the executed special symbol game, an advantageous determination is made as to whether or not the special symbol display result should be controlled to a jackpot game state as an advantageous state corresponding to a "jackpot". . In response to the special figure display result being a "jackpot", if the judgment result of such an advantageous judgment is a judgment to control to an advantageous state, the count value of the specific number of times counter, which becomes numerical information, will be updated. Don't do it. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the advantageous judgment is that the control is not controlled to an advantageous state, it is judged that the reaching judgment value has been reached by updating the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information. In this case, the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times. In this way, when the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, for example, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is updated by subtracting 1 to "0" based on the execution of the special figure game, steps AKS273 and AKS274 are executed. , data setting processing including controlling the gaming state to a time saving state is performed.

In step AKS272, the special symbol stop time setting shown in FIG. 294-19 is set when the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, such as updating the count value of the specific number of times counter by 1 and updating it to "0". In the process, since it is determined in step AKS254 that the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching determination value, the command set process in step AKS261 is executed based on the symbol stop setting SZA3 in step AKS255. At this time, by sending the production symbol confirmation command corresponding to the symbol stop setting SZA3 shown in FIG. , it is possible to specify that the time saving state is to be controlled. Further, when the numerical information reaches a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, the fact that the time saving state is controlled can also be specified by transmitting a background color designation command or a second specific number of times designation command.

If the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as an advantageous state corresponding to "jackpot" and the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, is updated, the special figure is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Even though it is a figure game, there is a risk that an effect corresponding to the start of the time saving state may be executed due to updating of the numerical information. On the other hand, in the counter subtraction process, when the special figure display result in step AKS271 is a "jackpot", the determination in step AKS272 is not performed. As a result, when the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot game state as an advantageous state corresponding to "jackpot", the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, is not updated, so it corresponds to the start of the time saving state. It is possible to improve the game interest by making it possible to appropriately execute performances, and to enhance the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states including a time-saving state.

On the other hand, the determination in step AKS272 can be made when the special figure display result is a "small hit". Then, when it is determined that the reached determination value has been reached by updating the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times. At this time, in steps AKS273 and AKS274, data setting processing including controlling the gaming state to a time saving state is performed. Therefore, in a special figure game where the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, reaches the reaching judgment value, when the special figure display result becomes "small win", a V win must occur in the small win game state. For example, after the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state. Alternatively, if a V win occurs in this small winning gaming state, the time saving state is set based on the end of the special drawing game, and then the jackpot gaming state is controlled, so the time saving state It is treated as a jackpot.

If the special figure display result is a "jackpot" in response to step AKS271 (step AKS271; Yes), or if the count value of the specific number of times counter does not reach the reach determination value in response to step AKS272 (step AKS272; No) , or after executing the data set process in step AKS274, the specific number of times command data is set to the specific number of times command upper limit value (step AKS275). The specific number of times command data is data for creating second control data that becomes the lower byte of the second specific number of times designation command in the counter subtraction process, and is stored in a storage area for data creation such as the A register, for example. The specific number command upper limit value is the maximum value of the specific number command data that can be specified by the lower byte of the second specific number designation command, and indicates, for example, 7F[H]. In step AKS275, for example, 2-byte data is read from the address of the specific number counter stored in the HL register serving as a pointer, stored in the DE register, and then 7F[H] is stored in the A register.

After step AKS275, it is determined whether the count value of the specific count counter is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step AKS276). For example, if the count value of the specific count counter is greater than 007F [H], it is determined that the count value is greater than the upper limit judgment value. If the count value of the specific count counter is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value and is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step AKS276; No), the lower byte of the count value of the specific count counter is overwritten and set again as the specific count command data (step AKS277). For example, the specific count command data is reset by overwriting and storing the value that is the lower byte stored in the E register among the count values of the specific count counter stored in the DE register in the A register. When the power is turned on or when the jackpot game state ends, the count value of the specific count counter is set to 02AD [H] as the counter initial value corresponding to the specific count initial value. After that, when the special chart game is executed and the special chart display result is not "jackpot", the count value of the specific count counter is updated by subtracting 1. Then, after the count value of the specific number counter becomes 007F [H], it is determined in step AKS276 that the value is not greater than the upper limit judgment value. Therefore, the rate at which the count value of the specific number counter is determined to be not greater than the upper limit judgment value is sufficiently lower than the rate at which the count value of the specific number counter is determined to be greater than the upper limit judgment value. Therefore, in the counter subtraction process, the specific number command data is set to the specific number command upper limit value in step AKS275, and then, if the count value of the specific number counter is not greater than the upper limit judgment value in step AKS276, the lower byte of the count value of the specific number counter is re-set as the specific number command data by overwriting in step AKS277. As a result, if the setting frequency of the specific number command upper limit value as the specific number command data is higher than the setting frequency of the lower byte of the count value of the specific number counter, the program capacity of the storage instruction used for setting the specific number command data can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. In addition, when the frequency of setting the specific count command upper limit value as the specific count command data is higher than the frequency of setting the lower byte in the count value of the specific count counter, the processing by the branch command is simplified, making it easier to check at the design stage and improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1.

Corresponding to step AKS276, if the count value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step AKS276; Yes), or after step AKS277, the specific number of times command data is stored in the specific number of times command buffer (step AKS278). The specific number of times command upper limit value set in the specific number of times command data in step AKS275 is 7F[H], which corresponds to the upper limit determination value used for the determination in step AKS276. The upper limit determination value used in the determination in step AKS276 becomes determination information that is compared with the count value of the specific number of times counter. If the count value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit judgment value, the specific number of times command upper limit value 7F[H] set in step S275 is stored in the specific number of times command buffer in step AKS278. . In addition, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to the upper limit judgment value, in step AKS277, 7F[H], which is the same as the specific number of times command upper limit value, is added to the specific number of times command data as the lower byte of the counted value of the specific number of times counter. It is reset and then stored in the command buffer a specific number of times in step AKS278. In this way, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value, data indicating 7F[H], which is equal to the upper limit determination value and serves as determination information, is stored in the specific number of times command buffer. The value stored in the specific number of times command buffer is read out when executing the command set process in step AKS308 of the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12(A), and is Used as command data for a specific number of times. Therefore, in step AKS278, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit judgment value, the specified number of times command data, which becomes the second control data of the second specific number designation command, corresponds to the upper limit judgment value, which becomes the judgment information. 7F[H] to be stored in the command buffer a specific number of times.

When the lower byte of the count value of the specific count counter is set as the specific count command data in step AKS277, the specific count command data is stored in the specific count command buffer in step AKS278, so that the same value as the lower byte of the count value of the specific count counter is stored in the specific count command buffer. The count value of the specific count counter becomes numerical information that can be updated by step AKS272 based on the execution of variable display. The stored value of the specific count command buffer is read out when the command set process is executed in step AKS308 of the special pattern buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12 (A), and is used as the specific count command data in the second specific count designation command. Therefore, in step AKS278, when the count value of the specific count counter is less than the upper limit judgment value, the same value as the lower byte of the count value of the specific count counter, which becomes numerical information, is stored in the specific count command buffer as the specific count command data, which becomes the second control data of the second specific count designation command. This prevents an increase in data volume for the second specific number designation command sent in response to the execution of the variable display, and improves the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which has multiple states including a time-saving state.

In this way, the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer becomes 7F[H] when the count value of the specific number of times counter is 007F[H] or more and the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is "127" or more. In addition, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is less than 007F[H] and the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is less than "127", the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer is a value indicating the remaining number of times. Become. However, the specific number of times command buffer can store 1 byte data, and when the counted value of the specific number of times counter is not larger than the upper limit judgment value, the specific number of times command buffer indicates the lower byte of the counted value of the specific number of times counter. is stored. The second specific number of times designation command is one set that combines command type data that is first control data and specific number of times command data that is second control data that is set corresponding to the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer. The command data becomes a 2-byte production control command. Then, in the counter subtraction process for updating the count value of the specific number of times counter, specific number of times command data that is second control data of the second specific number of times designation command is created. In this way, the second specific number of times designation command sent in response to the execution of the variable display can have a 2-byte configuration, which prevents an increase in data capacity and allows multiple states including the time-saving state. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with this can be improved.

In steps AKS111 and AKS112 of the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 294-10(A), and steps AKS305 and AKS306 shown in FIG. 294-12(A), using the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer, Control is performed so that the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted. In these cases, the value stored in the specific number of times command buffer can be read and set as the specific number of times command data in the second specific number of times designation command. The stored value of the specific number of times command buffer is stored in a storage area separate from the counted value of the specific number of times counter, and can be updated based on the counted value of the specific number of times counter. Can be used as command data. Therefore, when sending the second specific number of times designation command, there is no need to make a judgment regarding the count value of the specific number of times counter, so the processing load when sending the second specific number of times designation command is reduced, including the time saving state. The marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having a plurality of states can be improved. In particular, when the count value of the specific number of times counter is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value, the stored value of the specific number of times command buffer becomes 7F[H]. Therefore, when transmitting the second specific number of times designation command, even if it is determined in step AKS276 whether the counted value of the specific number of times counter is larger than the upper limit determination value, it is determined that it is a larger value. The period during which the value is determined is likely to be longer than the period when the value is determined not to be large. There is little practical benefit in creating the specific number of times command data when transmitting the second specific number of times designation command even if the processing load for such a determination is increased. Therefore, by creating specific number command data in the counter subtraction process and storing it in the specific number command buffer, the processing load when transmitting the second specific number designation command can be reduced, and multiple It is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having the following conditions.

After step AKS278, the first time-saving counter is designated (step AKS279), and time-saving subtraction processing (step AKS280) is executed. In step AKS279, for example, a value corresponding to the address of the first time saving counter is stored in the HL register which serves as a pointer. Subsequently, it is determined whether the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS281). At this time, if the starting opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" (step AKS281; No), the second time saving counter is designated (step AKS282) and the time saving subtraction process (step AKS283) is executed. Next, it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS284). Then, when the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS284; Yes), the third time saving counter is designated (step AKS285) and the time saving subtraction process (step AKS286) is executed.

If the start-gate winning designation value is "1" in response to step AKS281 (step AKS281; Yes), if the special chart display result is not "small win" in response to step AKS284 (step AKS284; No), or after the time-saving subtraction process of step AKS286 is executed, the variable counter after the first win is designated (step AKS287). The variable counter after the first win is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of RAM 102. When the big win game state ends, the variable counter after the first win is set to a counter initial value corresponding to the special chart game that can be executed in the time-saving state. In step AKS287, for example, a value corresponding to the address of the variable counter after the first win is stored in the HL register that serves as a pointer. Next, the performance selection table after the first win is designated (step AKS288). Then, it is determined whether the game state designation code is 00 [H] or not (step AKS289). The game state designation code is 1-byte data indicating whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not, and is set to 00 [H] when the game state is not in a time-saving state, and is set to 01 [H] when the game state is in a time-saving state. In step AKS289, for example, a time-saving check process may be executed to read the value of the time-saving function flag, and if the value is 01 [H], which is the time-saving activation designation value, a determination may be made in the same manner as when the game state designation code is not 00 [H].

If the gaming state designation code is 00 [H] in response to step AKS289 (step AKS289; Yes), a variable counter after the second winning is designated (step AKS290). The after-second winning variation counter is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of the RAM 102. For the second post-win variation counter, when the jackpot game state ends, a counter initial value corresponding to a special number of special symbol games that can be executed after the end of the time saving state is set. In step AKS290, for example, a value corresponding to the address of the fluctuation counter after the second winning is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer. Subsequently, the effect selection table after the second winning is specified (step AKS291). Thereafter, it is determined whether the counted value of the post-win fluctuation counter specified in step AKS287 or step AKS290 is 00[H] corresponding to "0" (step AKS292). At this time, if the count value of the after-win fluctuation counter is 00 [H] (step AKS292; Yes), the counter subtraction process ends.

Corresponding to step AKS292, if the count value of the post-win fluctuation counter is other than 00 [H] (step AKS292; No), it is determined whether or not time saving control is in progress (step AKS293). In step AKS293, for example, a time-saving check process is executed, and if the time-saving function flag is set to 01 [H], which is the designated value for time-saving operation, it is determined that time-saving control is being performed. In addition, in step AKS293, for example, when the gaming state designation code is 01 [H] and not 00 [H], it may be determined that the time saving control is in progress. Then, when the time saving control is in progress (step AKS293; Yes), it is determined whether the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS294). At this time, if the starting opening winning designation value is "1" (step AKS294; Yes), the counter subtraction process ends.

If the time saving control is not in progress in response to step AKS293 (step AKS293; No), or if the starting opening winning designation value is "2" and not "1" in response to step AKS294 (step AKS294; No), the win is won. After completion, the variable counter subtraction process (step AKS295) is executed, and the counter subtraction process is ended. The post-win variation counter subtraction process in step AKS295 includes processing for updating the counted value of the post-win variation counter specified in step AKS287 or step AKS290 by subtracting 1. Thereafter, the post-win performance designation value is read from the post-win performance designation buffer. Then, referring to the after-win performance selection table specified in step AKS288 or step AKS291, the performance setting table corresponding to the after-win performance designation value is selected. The performance setting table includes table data indicating a counter determination value, a special symbol state designation code, and a performance state selection designation value. In the post-win variation counter subtraction process of step AKS295, the count value of the post-win variation counter is compared with the counter judgment value shown in the effect setting table, and if the two match, the counter judgment value is associated with the count value. The special symbol state designation code and production state selection designation value are set. The special symbol status designation code is a value indicating the status of the special symbol, and is set to one of 00[H] to 03[H]. The presentation state selection designation value is stored in the presentation state selection buffer and is used to determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 294-15.

In the counter subtraction process, when the judgment of step AKS272 is made, the count value of the specific number counter can be updated, and specific number command data is created by steps AKS275 to AKS277. The specific number command data created at this time is stored in the specific number command buffer by step AKS278, and in steps AKS111 and AKS112 of the normal processing of the special symbol shown in FIG. 294-10 (A) and steps AKS305 and AKS306 shown in FIG. 294-12 (A), it becomes possible to transmit a second specific number designation command using the stored value of the specific number command buffer. Since the second specific number designation command is transmitted in response to the start of the special symbol game, it is considered that the count value of the specific number counter is also updated in response to the start of the special symbol game. However, at the start of the special symbol game, many judgments, settings, selections and decisions are required, such as a special symbol big hit judgment, a special symbol small hit judgment, special symbol information setting, selection of the variation pattern type and determination of the variation pattern, which tends to increase the processing burden. Therefore, the count value of the specific number counter is controlled so that it can be updated by the counter subtraction process included in the special symbol variation process when the display result in the special symbol game is stopped. This prevents an increase in the processing burden at the start of the special symbol game, and improves the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, by controlling the count value of the specific number counter so that it can be updated by the counter subtraction process, together with other counters such as the time-saving counter and the post-win variation counter, an increase in the design burden can be prevented, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be improved.

In the counter subtraction process, the count value of the specific number counter can be updated when the judgment of step AKS272 is made, and the count value of the time-saving counter can be updated when the time-saving subtraction process of steps AKS280, AKS283, and AKS285 is executed. In contrast, in the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, the count values of the specific number counter and the time-saving counter themselves are not updated. This clearly separates the process of setting the symbol stop time from the process of updating the count values of various counters, making it easier to design the pachinko gaming machine 1, and improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has multiple states including the time-saving state. Note that in the process of setting the symbol stop time such as the special symbol stop time setting process, the count values of the specific number counter and the time-saving counter themselves may be updated, or the symbol stop time may be set in the process of updating the count values of various counters such as the counter subtraction process.

Figure 294-22 shows an example of data setting at arrival AKE21. In the counter decrement process shown in Figure 294-21, after specifying the work setting table at arrival in step AKS273, data setting process in step AKS274 is executed to set data when the count value of the specific count counter reaches the arrival judgment value. This data setting includes various settings such as the data setting example at arrival AKE21. In the reaching data setting example AKE21, the game state designation code is set to 01 [H], the special pattern state designation code is set to 02 [H], the performance state selection designation value is set to 0C [H], the time-saving function flag is set to 01 [H], the counter initial value of the first time-saving counter is set to 02AD [H], the counter initial value of the second time-saving counter is set to 0000 [H], the counter initial value of the third time-saving counter is set to 0001 [H], the specific number of times reached designation value is set to 01 [H], and the specific number of times command buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to 00 [H]. Here, by setting the time-saving function flag to 01 [H], the game state is controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state. Also, by setting 02AD [H] as the counter initial value of the first time-saving counter, the total number of times of the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game reaches "625" is set as the end condition of the time-saving state. Since the counter initial value of the second time-saving counter is set to 0000 [H], the end condition of the time-saving state is not established based only on the number of times the second special symbol game is played. By setting the counter initial value of the third time-saving counter to 0001 [H], the end condition of the time-saving state is set to the number of times the special symbol game in which the special symbol display result is a "small win" is "1". By setting 01 [H] as the specific number of times designation value, it becomes possible to specify that the time-saving state is based on the number of times the special symbol game has been played reaching a specific number. The specific number of times designation value is set in a specific number of times arrival flag provided at a specified address in the game work area of RAM 102.

Figure 294-23 is a flow chart showing an example of time-saving subtraction processing. In the counter subtraction processing shown in Figure 294-21, the time-saving subtraction processing can be executed in steps AKS280, AKS283, and AKS286. In the time-saving subtraction processing, it is determined whether the count value of the time-saving counter specified by the counter subtraction processing is "0" or not (step AKS321). For example, in the time-saving subtraction processing of step AKS280, it is determined whether the count value of the first time-saving counter specified by step AKS279 is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0". In the time-saving subtraction processing of step AKS283, it is determined whether the count value of the second time-saving counter specified by step AKS282 is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0". In the time-saving subtraction processing of step AKS286, it is determined whether the count value of the third time-saving counter specified by step AKS285 is 0000 [H] corresponding to "0". Then, if the count value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step AKS321; Yes), the time-saving subtraction process ends.

Corresponding to step AKS321, if the count value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step AKS321; No), the count value of the specified time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS322), and then the count value of the time-saving counter is updated. It is determined whether or not has become "0" (step AKS323). Here, if the count value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step AKS323; No), the time saving subtraction process ends. On the other hand, if the count value of the time saving counter becomes "0" in response to step AKS323 (step AKS323; Yes), the work setting table at the end of the first time saving is specified (step AKS324), and data set processing is performed. (Step AKS325) is executed.

Following the data set process in step AKS325, it is determined whether the specific number of times reaching flag is on (step AKS326). For example, when the specific number of times specification flag is set to 01 [H] to indicate the specified number of times reached specified value, it may be determined that the specified number of times reached flag is on. If the specific number of times reaching flag is off (step AKS326; No), the time saving subtraction process ends. On the other hand, if the specific number of times attainment flag is on (step AKS326; Yes), the work setting table at the end of the second time saving is specified (step AKS327), and after executing the data set processing (step AKS328), The time saving subtraction process ends.

FIG. 294-24 shows the settings to be cleared in the time saving subtraction process. Of these, FIG. 294-24(A) shows the AKE31 to be cleared at the end of the first time saving by steps AKS324 and AKS325 of the time saving subtraction process. FIG. 294-24(B) shows the AKE32 to be cleared at the end of the second time saving by steps AKS327 and AKS328 of the time saving subtraction process. In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, the data set process in step AKS325, which is executed after specifying the work setting table at the end of the first time saving in step AKS324, is performed when the count value of the time saving counter reaches "0". Contains data clear processing in case of Through this data clearing process, various data included in the AKE 31 to be cleared at the end of the first time saving are cleared, and each data is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". In addition, in the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, the data set process in step AKS328, which is executed after specifying the second time saving end work setting table in step AKS327, is added to the data set process in step AKS325. This includes data clearing processing when the specified number of times reaching flag is on. Through this data clearing process, various data included in the AKE 32 to be cleared at the end of the second time saving are cleared, and each data is initialized to a value corresponding to "0".

The AKE31 to be cleared at the end of the first time-saving includes a time-saving function flag, a first time-saving counter, a second time-saving counter, a third time-saving counter, a game state designation code, and a fluctuation counter after the end of the first win. In the data set process of step AKS325, these storage areas are cleared, and the respective stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". The AKE32 to be cleared at the end of the second time-saving includes a special pattern state designation code and a performance state selection designation value. In the data set process of step AKS328, these storage areas are cleared, and the respective stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". The data set process of step AKS328 is executed in addition to the data set process of step AKS325 in response to the case where the specific number of times reached flag is on. The AKE32 to be cleared at the end of the second time-saving includes a performance state selection designation value, so for example, the performance state selection buffer is cleared, and its stored value is initialized to 00 [H] corresponding to "0". When the presentation state selection designation value is 00 [H], it is the same value as when the RWM initial setting process of step S7 is executed when the power is turned on. Therefore, when the time-saving state based on the number of times the special game has been executed reaches a specific number of times ends, the presentation state selection designation value becomes the same setting as the initial setting after the power is turned on, and the determination of the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process is also determined using the selection data common to the initial setting after the power is turned on.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the first time-saving counter is specified in step AKS279, and the time-saving subtraction process is executed in step AKS280. In the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS280, if the count value of the first time-saving counter is not "0" in step AKS321, the count value of the first time-saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in step AKS322, and if the updated count value is "0" in step AKS323, data set process in step AKS325 based on the specification in step AKS324 is executed. As a result, the time-saving function flag, first time-saving counter, second time-saving counter, third time-saving counter, etc. included in AKE31 to be cleared when the first time-saving ends are cleared, thereby ending the time-saving state. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS279 and AKS280 can be executed whether the starting hole winning judgment value is "1" or "2". Therefore, the first time-saving counter can count the total number of first special chart games and second special chart games that can be executed in the time-saving state by counting down the remaining number. Also, in the time-saving subtraction process of step AKS280, the judgment by step AKS323 is a first time-saving end judgment process that judges whether the first condition that the total number of first special chart games and second special chart games in the time-saving state becomes the first number is established.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the second time-saving counter is specified in step AKS282, and the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS283 is executed. In the time saving subtraction process in step AKS283, if the count value of the second time saving counter is not "0" in step AKS321, the count value of the second time saving counter is updated by subtracting 1 in step AKS322, and after the update in step AKS323. If the count value is "0", the data set process of step AKS325 based on the specification of step AKS324 is executed. As a result, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, etc. included in the AKE 31 to be cleared at the end of the first time saving are cleared, thereby ending the time saving state. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS282 and AKS283 can be executed when the starting opening winning designation value is "2" in step AKS281, and the starting opening winning designation value is "1". It is not executed in this case. Therefore, the second time-saving counter can count the number of times the second special symbol game can be played in the time-saving state by counting down the remaining number of times. In addition, in the time saving subtraction process in step AKS283, the determination in step AKS323 is to determine whether or not the second condition that the number of times of the second special symbol game during the time saving state has reached the second number is satisfied. This is a judgment process. In the counter subtraction process, the determination in step AKS281 is a variable display determination that determines whether or not the variable display of the second special figure in the second special figure game has been executed in response to the starting opening winning designation value being "2". It will be processed.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS281 to AKS283 are executed after steps AKS279 and AKS280. In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" in step AKS323, step AKS325 is executed based on the work setting table at the end of the first time saving specified in step AKS324. By executing the data set process, the time-saving function flag, the first time-saving counter, the second time-saving counter, the third time-saving counter, etc. are cleared regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the time saving subtraction process in step AKS280, after the first condition is met and the setting is made to end the time saving state, in the time saving subtraction process in step AKS283, the second time saving counter has already been cleared and set to "0". Since it has been initialized to the corresponding value, the count value of the time-saving counter is determined to be "0" in step AKS321, and the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS283 ends without performing the determination in step AKS323. In this way, the first time-saving end determination process is executed to determine whether the first condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the second time-saving end determination process is performed to determine whether the second condition is satisfied. No judgment is made. On the other hand, since the determination in step AKS281 is performed after the time saving subtraction process in step AKS280 is executed, the variable display determination process is executed even when the second time saving end determination process is not executed. Note that when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied by the first time saving end determination process, not only is the second time saving end determination process determining whether or not the second condition is satisfied, but also the second condition is determined by the variable display determination process. The determination as to whether or not the variable display of the special figure has been executed may also not be performed.

The first condition for ending the time saving state can be satisfied by the total number of times of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, so the first time saving counter is decremented and updated each time the special figure game is executed, and the first condition is satisfied. The presence or absence of is determined. Furthermore, since there can be many combinations of the number of executions of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, it is easy to realize the execution regardless of the progress of the game. On the other hand, the second condition for ending the time saving state is accompanied by a variable display determination process that determines whether or not the second special symbol game has been executed. Therefore, the first condition is determined by the first time-saving end determination process first, and when it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the second condition is not determined by the second time-saving end determination process. Therefore, the processing load related to the control of the time-saving state can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having a plurality of states including the time-saving state can be improved.

In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS281 to AKS283 are executed after steps AKS279 and AKS280. In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" in step AKS323, step AKS325 is executed based on the work setting table at the end of the first time saving specified in step AKS324. By executing the data set process, the time-saving function flag, the first time-saving counter, the second time-saving counter, the third time-saving counter, etc. are cleared regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS280, a count value update process is performed to update the count value of the first time-saving counter, and after the first condition is satisfied and a setting is made to end the time-saving state, the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS283 is performed. In the subtraction process, the second time-saving counter has already been cleared and initialized to a value corresponding to "0", so the count value of the time-saving counter is determined to be "0" in step AKS321, and the count value of the time-saving counter is The time-saving subtraction processing in step AKS283 ends without proceeding to step AKS322, which updates by subtracting 1 by 1. In this way, a count value update process is performed to update the count value of the first time-saving counter, and when the first condition is satisfied, a process related to ending the time-saving state is performed, and a count value of the second time-saving counter is updated. Does not perform numerical update processing.

The first condition for ending the time-saving state can be met by the total number of times the first special game and the second special game have been played, so the first time-saving counter is decremented and updated each time a special game is played, and it is determined whether or not the condition has been met. In addition, since there are many possible combinations of the number of times the first special game and the second special game have been played, the condition is likely to be met regardless of the progress of the game. Therefore, by first performing a count value update process that updates the count value of the first time-saving counter, and not performing a count value update process that updates the count value of the second time-saving counter if it is determined that the first condition has been met, the processing burden related to the control of the time-saving state can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that has multiple states including the time-saving state can be improved.

In the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, when the count value of the time saving counter is "0" in step AKS323, step AKS325 is executed based on the work setting table at the end of the first time saving specified in step AKS324. By executing the data set process, the time-saving function flag, the first time-saving counter, the second time-saving counter, the third time-saving counter, etc. are cleared regardless of whether the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the time saving subtraction process in step AKS280 includes a count value subtraction process of updating the count value of the first time saving counter by one. When the updated count value is "0" by this count value subtraction process, the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. Data set processing in step AKS325 is executed based on the specification in step AKS324. Further, in the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, the time saving subtraction process in step AKS283 includes a count value subtraction process of updating the count value of the second time saving counter by one. When the updated count value is "0" by this count value subtraction process, the time saving subtraction process shown in FIG. Data set processing in step AKS325 is executed based on the specification in step AKS324. Therefore, in both the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied, the count values of the first time-saving counter and the second time-saving counter are initialized in the process related to the end of the time-saving state. be done. As a result, if one of the first or second conditions for ending the time-saving state is met, the problem that may occur due to the count value of the time-saving counter corresponding to the other condition remaining is eliminated. By preventing this, it is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1, which has a plurality of states including a time-saving state.

FIG. 294-25 shows an example of effect settings AKE41 after winning. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, in the after-win fluctuation counter subtraction process in step AKS295, the after-win performance selection table specified in step AKS288 or step AKS291 is referred to, and the after-win performance specified value is set. Select the corresponding production setting table. For example, if step AKS291 is not executed after step AKS288, the effect selection table after the first winning specified in step AKS288 is referred to, and one of effect setting tables AKT31 to AKT34 is selected according to the specified value of effect after the winning. Select. On the other hand, when step AKS291 is executed after step AKS288, the effect selection table after the second winning specified by step AKS291 is referred to, and the effect setting table AKT41, AKT42 is set according to the specified value of effect after the winning. Choose one.

In this example of post-win performance setting AKE41, the post-win performance selection table is referenced, and if the post-win performance designation value is 03 [H], the performance setting table AKT31 is selected. Also, the post-win performance selection table is referenced, and if the post-win performance designation value is 05 [H], the performance setting table AKT32 is selected. Also, the post-win performance selection table is referenced, and if the post-win performance designation value is 08 [H], the performance setting table AKT33 is selected. Also, the post-win performance selection table is referenced, and if the post-win performance designation value is 09 [H], the performance setting table AKT34 is selected. Also, in the post-win performance setting example AKE41, the post-win performance selection table is referenced, and if the post-win performance designation value is 01 [H], the performance setting table AKT41 is selected. In the example of the effect setting after the end of the win AKE41 in FIG. 294-25, the effect selection table after the end of the second win is referenced, and if the effect designation value after the end of the win is 03 [H], 05 [H], 08 [H], or 09 [H], the effect setting table AKT42 is selected.

FIG. 294-26 shows an example of the configuration of the effect setting table. Of these, FIG. 294-26 (A1) shows the effect setting table AKT31, FIG. 294-26 (A2) shows the effect setting table AKT32, FIG. 294-26 (A3) shows the effect setting table AKT33, and FIG. -26 (A4) indicates the effect setting table AKT34. Further, FIG. 294-26 (B1) shows the effect setting table AKT41, and FIG. 294-26 (B2) shows the effect setting table AKT42. Each performance setting table includes table data for setting a special symbol state designation code and a performance state selection designation value in association with the counter determination value.

For example, in the effect setting table AKT31 shown in FIG. 294-26 (A1), the special symbol state designation code is set to 02 [H] in response to the counter judgment value of 05 [H], and the effect state selection designation value is set to 02 [H]. Corresponding to the table data for setting to 05[H] and the counter judgment value of 02[H], set the special symbol state designation code to 02[H], and set the performance state selection designation value to 06[H]. In order to set the special symbol state designation code to 02 [H] and the performance state selection designation value to 07 [H] in response to the table data and counter judgment value 00 [H]. Contains table data and. In the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, after updating the count value of the first post-win variation counter specified in step AKS287 by 1 in the post-win variation counter subtraction process of step AKS295, the updated value is If the count value and the counter judgment value indicated by the selected production setting table AKT31 match, for example, 05[H], the special symbol state designation code is set to 02[H] corresponding to the counter judgment value. and set the performance state selection designation value to 05[H]. The same applies when the variable counter after the second winning is specified in step AKS290, when another effect setting table is set in the variable counter subtraction process after the winning ends in step AKS295, or when it matches another counter judgment value. , In response to the matched counter determination value, a special symbol state designation code and a performance state selection designation value are set. As a result, the production state selection specified value can be set during the time saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and during the period after the time saving state ends until the number of times the special figure game is executed reaches the special number. This makes it possible to select and determine different fluctuation patterns.

Figure 294-27 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS141). The special symbol process timer here is a timer initial value set corresponding to one of the symbol stop time settings SZA1 to SZA3 in the special symbol stop time setting processing shown in Figure 294-19. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS141; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS142), and the special symbol change processing ends. This causes the process to wait until the symbol stop time corresponding to one of the symbol stop time settings SZA1 to SZA3 has elapsed.

If the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS141 (step AKS141; Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS143). If the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" (step AKS143; Yes), the jackpot start setting process (step AKS144) is executed, and then the special symbol stop process ends.

Corresponding to step AKS143, if the special figure display result is not a "big hit" (step AKS143; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is a "small hit" (step AKS145). If the special figure display result is "small hit" (step AKS145; Yes), read out the small hit symbol designation value (step AKS146), specify the small hit start command transmission table (step AKS147), and start the small hit. After specifying the previous work setting table (step AKS148), command set processing (step AKS149) and data set processing (step AKS150) are executed, and then the special symbol stop processing ends.

Corresponding to step AKS145, if the special figure display result is not a "small hit" (step AKS145; No), specify the work setting table after the loss is stopped (step AKS151), and execute the data set process (step AKS152). From this point on, the special symbol stop processing ends.

Figure 294-28 shows examples of data setting and settings clearing targets in special symbol stop processing. Of these, Figure 294-28 (A) corresponds to the case where the special symbol display result is a "small win", and is a data setting example AKE51 before the start of a small win by steps AKS148 and AKS150 of the special symbol stop processing. Figure 294-28 (B) corresponds to the case where the special symbol display result is a "miss", and is a setting clear target AKE52 after the miss stop by steps AKS151 and AKS152 of the special symbol stop processing. In the special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 294-27, the data set processing of step AKS150 executed after specifying the work setting table before the start of a small win by step AKS148 performs data setting when a special symbol game with a special symbol display result of "small win" is executed and a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result. This data setting includes various settings such as AKE51, an example of data setting before the start of a small win. In addition, in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 294-27, the data set processing of step AKS152, which is executed after step AKS151 specifies the work setting table after a miss stop, includes a data clearing process when a special symbol game with a "miss" special symbol display result is executed and a confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result. This data clearing process clears various data included in AKE52, which is the setting clear target after a miss stop, and each is initialized to a value corresponding to "0".

In the data setting example AKE51 before starting the small hit, set the special symbol process code to 03 [H], set the stored value of the jackpot occurrence history buffer to 01 [H], and set the accessory solenoid control code to 01 [H]. setting, clearing the winning flag and initializing the stored value to 00[H], clearing the illegal winning notification invalidation timer and initializing the stored value to 0000[H]. Here, by setting the special symbol process code to 03 [H], it becomes possible to select and execute the small hit release pre-process in the special symbol process process in response to the occurrence of the next timer interrupt. Furthermore, by setting the stored value of the jackpot occurrence history buffer to 01[H], it is stored in a way that allows identification of a jackpot via a small hit. By setting the accessory solenoid control code to 01 [H], the accessory solenoid, such as the specific area solenoid 83, is controlled to be drivable according to a predetermined drive control pattern in the small winning game state. In addition, a timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time before small hit release may be set in the special symbol process timer. The fraudulent winning notification invalidation timer stores a timer value corresponding to the time to invalidate the detection of fraudulent winnings in the small winning termination process.

The AKE52 to be cleared after a loss stop includes a special symbol process code, a demonstration display flag, and a starting opening winning designation value. In the data set process of step AKS152, these storage areas are cleared and their respective stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". AKE52, which is the target for setting clearing after a loss stops, includes a special symbol process code, so by clearing this and initializing it to 00 [H], a special symbol will be displayed in the special symbol process in response to the next timer interrupt occurrence. Normal processing can be selected and executed. Further, by clearing the demo display flag, control is performed so that the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted when the total number of pending memories is "0". Furthermore, in response to the end of the special figure game, the starting opening winning designation value that can identify whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game is cleared and 00 [H] corresponding to "0" is cleared. ] is initialized to

FIG. 294-29(A) is a flowchart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step AKS144 of FIG. 294-27 as the jackpot start setting process. In the jackpot start setting process, a timer initial value serving as a fanfare performance initial value is set in a special symbol process timer (step AKS401). The fanfare performance initial value is a timer initial value corresponding to the fanfare performance standby time for waiting in accordance with the execution of the fanfare performance in the big winning opening pre-opening process selected by the special symbol process process. In the grand prize opening pre-opening process, the fanfare performance standby time elapses by decrementing and updating the timer value of the special symbol process timer to which the fanfare performance initial value has been set by 1 every time a timer interrupt occurs until the timer value reaches "0". Wait until

Following step AKS401, a fanfare command transmission table is specified (step AKS402), a work setting table is specified before the initial opening of the jackpot opening (step AKS403), and command set processing (step AKS404) and data set processing (step AKS405) are executed, after which the jackpot start setting process ends.

FIG. 294-29(B) shows the AKE53 that is subject to clearing the settings before opening the big prize opening for the first time. In the jackpot start setting process, the data set process in step AKS405, which is executed after specifying the work setting table before the first opening of the big winning opening in step AKS403, includes data clearing process when controlling to the jackpot gaming state. Through this data clearing process, various data included in the AKE 53 to be cleared for settings before opening of the grand prize opening for the first time are cleared, and each data is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". The AKE53 that is subject to clearing the settings before opening the big prize opening for the first time is the winning flag, the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, the third time saving counter, the number of fluctuations after the first winning ends counter, and the number of fluctuations after the end of the second winning. It includes a counter, a specific area passage flag, a performance designation buffer after winning, a specific number of times counter, and a specific number of times reached flag. Among these, when the time saving function flag, the first time saving counter, the second time saving counter, and the third time saving counter are cleared, the control for changing the gaming state to the time saving state ends. Further, by clearing the specific number of times counter and the specific number of times reaching flag, the control for shifting to the time saving state based on the number of executions of the special figure game ends.

Figure 294-30 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of small win end processing. In small win end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS161). The special symbol process timer here is a timer initial value set in the small win discharge ball waiting processing selected by the special symbol process processing, which corresponds to the small win end time. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS161; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS162), and processing ends.

When the time count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" corresponding to step AKS161 (step AKS161; Yes), it is determined whether the specific area passing flag is on (step AKS163). The specific area passing flag is provided at a predetermined address in the game work area of RAM 102. The specific area passing flag is in the off state when 00 [H], which is a specified value for no specific area passing, is set, and when a game ball that has passed through the V winning area 51 is detected in a small win game state, the specific area passing specified value 01 [H] is set, and the flag is in the on state. When the specific area passing flag is on (step AKS163; Yes), the jackpot start setting process (step AKS164) is executed, and then the small win end process is terminated. The jackpot start setting process executed in step AKS164 may be a process common to step AKS144 of the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 294-27. In this way, the same jackpot start setting process as when the special chart display result is a "jackpot" can be executed even when a V win occurs during a small jackpot game state, preventing an increase in program capacity and improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1.

If the specific area passing flag is off in response to step AKS163 (step AKS163; No), the work setting table is specified after the small win is completed (step AKS165), data set processing is executed (step AKS166), and processing ends. The work setting table after the small win is completed may include table data for clearing the special pattern process code, demo display flag, variable command designation buffer, small win pattern determination buffer, large win port winning number counter, large win port opening count counter, big win occurrence history buffer, big win pattern determination buffer, start port winning buffer with buffer number "0", and winning number counter during role play.

FIG. 294-30(B) shows the AKE 54 whose settings are to be cleared after the small win ends. In the small win end process, the data set process in step AKS166, which is executed after specifying the work setting table after the small win ends in step AKS165, is a data clear process when the small win game state ends without a V winning. Contains. Through this data clearing process, various data included in the AKE 54 to be cleared after the small win is cleared, and each data is initialized to a value corresponding to "0". The AKE54 that is subject to clearing the settings after the small hit is a special symbol process code, demo display flag, variable command designation buffer, small winning symbol designation value, big prize opening counter, number of times the big winning opening is opened counter, jackpot occurrence history buffer, jackpot It includes a symbol designation value and a starting opening winning prize designation value. In the data set process of step AKS166, these storage areas are cleared and their respective stored values are initialized to values corresponding to "0". AKE54, whose settings are to be cleared after the small hit, includes a special symbol process code, so by clearing this and initializing it to 00[H], a special symbol will be activated in the special symbol process process in response to the next timer interrupt occurrence. You can select and execute symbol normal processing. Further, by clearing the demo display flag, control is performed so that the standby command including the second specific number of times designation command can be transmitted when the total number of pending memories is "0". Furthermore, in response to the end of the special figure game, the starting opening winning designation value that can identify whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game is cleared and 00 [H] corresponding to "0" is cleared. ] is initialized to

Figure 294-31 is a flow chart showing an example of jackpot end processing. In jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 first determines whether the count value of the special symbol process timer is "0" or not (step AKS181). The special symbol process timer here is set to a timer initial value corresponding to the final jackpot presentation time in the post-opening processing of the jackpot opening selected by the special symbol process processing. If the count value of the special symbol process timer is other than "0" (step AKS181; No), the count value of the special symbol process timer is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS182), and the processing ends. This causes the CPU 103 to wait until the final jackpot presentation time has elapsed.

When the time count value of the special pattern process timer is "0" in response to step AKS181 (step AKS181; Yes), the first jackpot end state setting table is specified (step AKS183), and the small jackpot pattern designation value is read (step AKS184). The small jackpot pattern designation value is the stored value of the small jackpot pattern determination buffer. Also, it is determined whether or not it is a small jackpot via jackpot (step AKS185). For example, the stored value of the jackpot occurrence history buffer is read, and if the read value is 01 [H], it is determined that it is a small jackpot via jackpot. If it is not a small jackpot via jackpot (step AKS185; No), the second jackpot end state setting table is re-specified (step AKS186), and the jackpot pattern designation value is read (step AKS187). The jackpot pattern designation value is the stored value of the jackpot pattern determination buffer. In step AKS186, for example, a value corresponding to the top address of the second jackpot end state setting table is stored in the HL register, which serves as a pointer, to overwrite the value of the pointer. In this way, in the jackpot end process, the first jackpot end state setting table is specified in step AKS183, and then in step AKS185, if the jackpot is not a small jackpot via jackpot, the second jackpot end state setting table is re-specified by overwriting in step AKS186. In this way, when the first jackpot end state setting table is used more frequently than the second jackpot end state setting table, the program capacity of the storage command used for table setting can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved. In addition, when the first jackpot end state setting table is used more frequently than the second jackpot end state setting table, the process by the branch command can be simplified, making it easier to check at the design stage, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

If it is a jackpot via a small jackpot in response to step AKS185 (step AKS185; Yes), or after step AKS187, the state at the end of the jackpot is set (step AKS188). The state at the end of the jackpot includes settings for controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game state to a time-saving state or the like based on the execution results of steps AKS183 to AKS187. Then, a work setting table at the end of the jackpot is specified (step AKS189), data set processing is executed (step AKS190), and processing ends.

FIG. 294-32 shows an example of setting the state at the end of the jackpot. Of these, FIG. 294-32(A) is an example of the first jackpot end state setting example AKE61 based on steps AKS183 and AKS184 of the jackpot end process. FIG. 294-32(B) is a second jackpot end state setting example AKE62 based on steps AKS186 and AKS187 of the jackpot end process. In the jackpot end process, in the jackpot end state setting in step AKS188, the jackpot end state setting type is set by referring to the jackpot end state setting table specified in step AKS183 or step AKS185. For example, when step AKS185 is not executed after step AKS183, the first jackpot end state setting table specified in step AKS183 is referred to, and the jackpot end state is set in accordance with the small hit symbol designation value read out in step AKS184. Select one of the types SX2, SX3, SX5, and SX8. On the other hand, when step AKS185 is executed after step AKS183, the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot specified in step AKS185 is referred to, and the specified value is specified from the gaming state specification code along with the jackpot design specification value read out in step AKS186. One of the jackpot end state setting types SX1 to XS4, SX6, and SX7 is selected depending on the presence or absence of time saving control.

In the first jackpot end state setting example AKE61, if the small win pattern designated value is 00 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX8 is selected, if the small win pattern designated value is 01 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX3 is selected, if the small win pattern designated value is 02 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX5 is selected, and if the small win pattern designated value is any of 03 [H] to 06 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX2 is selected. Also, in the second jackpot end state setting example AKE62, when there is no time-saving control, if the jackpot pattern designated value is 00 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX6 is selected, if the jackpot pattern designated value is either 01 [H] or 02 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX1 is selected, if the jackpot pattern designated value is either 03 [H], 04 [H], 07 [H] to 09 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX2 is selected, if the jackpot pattern designated value is 05 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX3 is selected, and if the jackpot pattern designated value is 06 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX4 is selected. In the second jackpot end state setting example AKE62, when time-saving control is enabled, if the jackpot pattern designation value is 00 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX6 is selected, if the jackpot pattern designation value is either 01 [H] or 02 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX7 is selected, if the jackpot pattern designation value is either 03 [H], 04 [H], 07 [H] to 09 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX2 is selected, if the jackpot pattern designation value is 05 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX3 is selected, and if the jackpot pattern designation value is 06 [H], then jackpot end state setting type SX4 is selected.

FIG. 294-33 shows the setting contents corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type. In the jackpot end state setting in step AKS188 of the jackpot end process, based on the selection results of the jackpot end state setting types SX1 to SX8, the game state designation code, special symbol state designation code, performance state selection designation value, first hit The initial value of the fluctuation counter after the end, the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the end of the second win, the production specified value after the end of the win, the time-saving function flag, the initial value of the first time-saving counter, the initial value of the second time-saving counter, and the initial value of the third time-saving counter. Set. Here, except for the jackpot end state setting type SX8, the gaming state designation code is set to 01[H], thereby indicating that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is a time saving state. Correspondingly, the time-saving function flag is set to 01 [H], and the first time-saving counter initial value, the second time-saving counter initial value, and the third time-saving counter initial value are set to values other than 0000 [H]. be done. In addition, by setting the performance state selection designation value to a value other than 00 [H], in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the fluctuation pattern type is and fluctuation patterns can be determined. When the production specified value after winning is set to a value other than 00 [H], and based on the settings of the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the first winning and the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the second winning, In the shown counter subtraction process, it becomes possible to execute the variable counter subtraction process after the winning in step AKS295 is completed, and the special symbol status designation code and performance are changed depending on the number of executions of the special symbol game and whether or not it is in a time saving state. The state selection specification value can be updated.

In this way, in the state setting at the end of the jackpot, the performance state selection designated value and the performance designation value after the end of the hit are set to a value other than 00 [H], and the initial value of the fluctuation counter after the first hit and the end of the second hit are set. Based on the setting of the post-variation counter initial value, a variation pattern can be determined by selecting a variation pattern determination table different from the initial setting after power-on. The table data constituting the variable pattern determination table that can be selected in accordance with the initial setting after power-on is also referred to as normal pattern selection data. The table data constituting the fluctuation pattern determination table that is different from the initial setting after power-on is also referred to as special pattern selection data.

In the example of the after-win performance setting AKE41 shown in FIG. 294-25, either of the performance setting tables AKT41 and AKT42 can be set in accordance with the after-win performance selection table. The after-win performance selection table can be set in a normal state after the end of the time-saving state that can be controlled based on the end of the big win game state, during a predetermined period until the number of times the special game is executed reaches the special number. The time-saving state that can be controlled based on the end of the big win game state is also called the first time-saving state. In the normal state after the end of such a first time-saving state, if the performance setting table AKT41 is set, the performance state selection designation value can be set to 01 [H]. Also, in the normal state after the end of the first time-saving state, if the performance setting table AKT42 is set, the performance state selection designation value can be set to 02 [H].

In the time-saving subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-23, if the count value of the time-saving counter is determined to be "0" in step AKS323 and the specific number of times reached flag is determined to be on in step AKS326, the data set process in step AKS328 is executed based on the second time-saving end work setting table specified in step AKS327. At this time, the second time-saving end clear target AKE32 shown in FIG. 294-24 (B) includes a performance state selection designated value, so the value is cleared and initialized to 00 [H] corresponding to "0". Such a setting is performed when the time-saving state that can be controlled based on the count value of the specific number of times counter reaching the reached judgment value ends. The time-saving state that can be controlled based on the count value of the specific number of times counter, which is numerical information, reaching the reached judgment value, is also called the second time-saving state. In the normal state after such a second time-saving state ends, the performance state selection designated value is set to 00 [H], which is the same as the initial setting when the power is turned on.

In the example of the variation pattern determination AKD11 at the time of the big win shown in FIG. 294-16, the determinable patterns are different when the performance state selection designated value is 00 [H] and when it is 01 [H] or 02 [H]. For example, the determinable patterns when the performance state selection designated value is 01 [H] include the variation pattern PB57 and the variation pattern PB67. In contrast, the determinable patterns when the performance state selection designated value is 00 [H] include the variation pattern PB67 but do not include the variation pattern PB57. In addition, the determinable patterns when the performance state selection designated value is 02 [H] include the variation pattern PB57 and the variation pattern PB68. On the other hand, the determinable patterns when the performance state selection designated value is 00 [H] do not include either the variation pattern PB57 or the variation pattern PB68. In the initial setting after the power is turned on, since the performance state selection designated value is 00 [H], the variation pattern that can be selected using the normal pattern selection data is the determinable pattern corresponding to the performance state selection designated value of 00 [H]. In the normal state after the first time-saving state is ended, when the performance state selection designation value is 01 [H] or 02 [H], a variation pattern is selected using special pattern selection data different from the normal pattern selection data. In the normal state after the second time-saving state is ended, the performance state selection designation value becomes 00 [H], so a variation pattern is selected using the normal pattern selection data. Then, the determinable patterns, which are variation patterns selectable using the normal pattern selection data, are set so as not to include a part or all of the determinable patterns, which are variation patterns selectable using the special pattern selection data. In this way, in the normal state after the first time-saving state based on the jackpot game state is ended, a unique performance is made executable using the special pattern selection data, while in the normal state after the second time-saving state based on the number of times the special game is executed is ended, the normal pattern selection data common to the initial setting after the power is turned on is used to restrict the unique performance from being executed. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game by suppressing the execution of excessive effects when the second time-saving state based on the number of times the special game has been played ends, thereby improving the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 that has multiple states including the time-saving state.

The variation patterns selectable using the special pattern selection data may include only variation patterns that are not selectable using the normal pattern selection data, or may include at least one variation pattern that is not selectable using the normal pattern selection data. In the variation pattern determination example AKD12 at the time of a small win shown in FIG. 294-17, only the variation pattern PB68 is different when the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H] and when it is 01 [H] or 02 [H]. That is, the variation pattern PB68 is a determinable pattern when the performance state selection designation value is 02 [H] and the small win pattern designation value is within the range of 01 [H] to 06 [H]. In contrast, when the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H], the variation pattern PB68 is not included in the determinable pattern even if the small win pattern designation value is any of 00 to 06 [H]. Fluctuation pattern PB67 and fluctuation pattern PB84 are included in the determinable patterns when the performance state selection designation value is 00 [H], 01 [H], or 02 [H]. In this way, the determinable patterns, which are fluctuation patterns selectable using special pattern selection data, may be set to include some or all of the determinable patterns, which are fluctuation patterns selectable using normal pattern selection data.

Figure 294-34 shows a data setting example AKE71 at the end of a jackpot. In the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 294-31, after the jackpot end work setting table is specified by step AKS189, the data set processing of step AKS190 is executed to set the final data when the jackpot game state ends. This data setting includes various settings such as the data setting example AKE71 at the end of a jackpot. In the data setting example AKE71 at the end of a jackpot, 02AD [H] is set as the initial value of the specific number of times counter, and the storage value of the specific number of times command buffer is set to 7F [H]. In addition, in the data setting example AKE71 at the end of a jackpot, the special pattern process code, demo display flag, variable command designation buffer, large prize opening number maximum value buffer, jackpot occurrence history buffer, and start prize opening designation value are cleared to initialize each stored value to a value corresponding to "0". Here, by setting the specific number counter initial value to 02AD [H], the total number of the first special number game and the second special number game reaches the specific number of "625" as a time-saving condition based on the number of times the special number game is executed after the end of the big win game state. By setting the storage value of the specific number command buffer to 7F [H], specific number command data is created as the second control data of the second specific number designation command corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times until the specific number is "127" or more. By clearing the special pattern process code and initializing it to 00 [H], it becomes possible to select and execute the special pattern normal process in the special pattern process process in response to the next timer interruption occurrence. In addition, by clearing the demo display flag, when the total reserved memory number is "0", it is controlled so that a standby command including the second specific number designation command can be transmitted. Furthermore, in response to the end of the big win game state, the start port winning designation value that can specify whether it is the first special number game or the second special number game is cleared and initialized to 00 [H] corresponding to "0".

The maximum number of times the large prize opening is performed during a jackpot game state and the number of times the special game can be played during the time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends can be set differently depending on the small prize symbol designation value and the jackpot symbol designation value. For example, in the example AKE01 of the number of times the large prize opening is performed when the special symbol display result shown in FIG. 294-14(A) is "jackpot", if the jackpot symbol designation value is 01 [H], 02 [H], or 09 [H], the maximum number of times the large prize opening is performed is set to 03 [H], and if the jackpot symbol designation value is 00 [H], or any of 03 [H] to 06 [H], the maximum number of times the large prize opening is performed is set to 0A [H]. In addition, in the example AKE02 of setting the number of times the large prize opening is performed when the special symbol display result shown in FIG. 294-14(B) is a "small win", if the small win symbol designation value is either 00 [H] or 06 [H], the maximum number of times the large prize opening is performed is set to 03 [H], and if the small win symbol designation value is either 01 [H] to 03 [H], the maximum number of times the large prize opening is performed is set to 0A [H]. Among the multiple types of jackpot game states with different maximum numbers of times the large prize opening is performed, the jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is performed is set to a relatively small value, such as the jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the large prize opening is performed is set to 03 [H], is regarded as the first advantageous state. In contrast, among the multiple types of jackpot game states with different maximum values of the number of times the jackpot openings are opened, a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the jackpot openings are opened is set to a relatively large value, such as a jackpot game state in which the maximum number of times the jackpot openings are opened is set to 0A [H], is set to the second advantageous state. The display result of the special pattern in the special pattern game when controlled to the first advantageous state is also called the first advantageous result. The display result of the special pattern in the special pattern game when controlled to the second advantageous state is also called the second advantageous result. In other words, when the display result of the variable display is the first advantageous result, it is possible to control the jackpot game state to the first advantageous state among the jackpot game states as advantageous states. When the display result of the variable display is the second advantageous result, it is possible to control the jackpot game state to the second advantageous state among the jackpot game states as advantageous states.

In the second jackpot end state setting example AKE62 shown in FIG. 294-32(B), the jackpot end state setting type SX6 is set when the jackpot symbol specified value is 00[H] without time saving control. is selected and the jackpot symbol specified value is either 01 [H] or 02 [H], the state setting type SX1 at jackpot end is selected, and the jackpot ends if the jackpot symbol specification value is 05 [H]. When the time state setting type SX3 is selected and the jackpot symbol designation value is 06 [H], the jackpot end state setting type SX4 is set. In the jackpot end state setting type SX1, the first time saving counter initial value is 0006 [H], and the second time saving counter initial value is 0001 [H]. For the jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6, the first time saving counter initial value and the second time saving counter initial value are 02AD[H]. The time-saving states that can be controlled based on the end of the jackpot gaming state are multiple types of time-saving states with different settings of the first time-saving counter initial value and the second time-saving counter initial value, and are the time-saving states corresponding to the state setting type SX1 at the end of the jackpot. state, and time-saving states corresponding to jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6. The time-saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type SX1 is a special game that can be executed because the first time-saving counter initial value is 0006 [H] and the second time-saving counter initial value is 0001 [H]. The first special state occurs in which the number of times is relatively small. In the time-saving states corresponding to the jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6, the first time-saving counter initial value and the second time-saving counter initial value are 02AD[H], so the number of executable special figure games is reduced. The second special state is relatively common. The special symbols whose jackpot symbol designation values are 01[H] and 02[H] are included in the first advantageous result, and can be controlled to the first advantageous state when the result is the display result of the special symbol game. Special symbols whose jackpot symbol designation values are 00[H], 05[H], and 06[H] are included in the second advantageous result, and are controlled to the second advantageous state when they become the display result of the special symbol game. It is possible. When the first advantageous state ends, the time saving state that becomes the first special state of the time saving states can be controlled to the time saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type SX1. When the second advantageous state ends, the time saving state that becomes the second special state among the time saving states can be controlled to the time saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6.

In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 294-31, for example, in step AKS186, the state setting table at the end of the second jackpot is specified, and after reading out the jackpot symbol designation value in step AKS187, at the end of the jackpot in step AKS188. By setting the state, it is possible to set the time saving state corresponding to the jackpot end state setting types SX1 to SX8. For example, when the first advantageous state ends in response to the specified jackpot symbol values of 01 [H] and 02 [H], the state at the end of the jackpot is set as the first special state by setting the state at the end of the jackpot in step AKS188. Settings regarding the time saving state corresponding to type SX1 are possible. When the second advantageous state ends in response to the specified jackpot symbol value of 00 [H], 05 [H], or 06 [H], the jackpot ends as a second special state according to the jackpot end state setting in step AKS188. Settings related to time saving states corresponding to time state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6 are possible. After that, in the data set process of step AKS190, based on the jackpot end work setting table specified in step AKS189, the initial value of the specific number of times counter is set to 02AD[, regardless of the jackpot end state setting type SX1 to SX8. H]. Therefore, the first advantageous state ends when the specified jackpot symbol value is 01[H], 02[H], and when the specified jackpot symbol value is 00[H], 05[H], 06[H]. Correspondingly, when the second advantageous state ends, a common specific number counter initial value is set as the initial value of the numerical information updated using the specific number counter by the data set processing in step AKS190. . In this way, in the jackpot end state setting in step AKS188, settings regarding time saving states corresponding to different types, such as the case of jackpot end state setting type SX1 and the case of jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6, are made. After that, in the data set process of step AKS190, settings related to numerical information common to a plurality of types are performed, so that the program capacity can be reduced and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

FIG. 294-35 is a flowchart showing an example of the production side counter update process. On the side of the performance control board 12, the performance control CPU 120 can update the count values of various counters used to control the performance by executing the performance side counter update process. The production-side counter update process is executed, for example, in the production control process process in step S76 each time it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 of the production control main process shown in FIG. Any processing is fine. The counters used to control the performance include a suggested performance counter and a counter for displaying the number of times, and both may be provided at a predetermined address in the performance work area of the RAM 122. The suggestion effect counter is used to control a suggestion effect that suggests that the time saving state is controlled based on the number of times remaining up to a specific number of times. Further, the suggestion effect counter is also used to control a countdown effect that counts down and notifies the remaining number of times until the time saving state is controlled. The number-of-times display counter is used to control the display of a suggestion indicating the number of times remaining up to a specific number of times on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the performance counter update process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is power-on (step AKS501). For example, if a power-on command or a power outage recovery command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it can be determined that power is on. If it is power-on (step AKS501; Yes), the power-on response flag is set to the on state (step AKS502), and it is determined whether or not a first specific number of times command has been received (step AKS503). Since the first specific number of times command is sent in response to power-on, unless there is some abnormality, if it is determined in step AKS501 that power is on, it is determined in step AKS503 that it has been received.

In response to step AKS503, when the first specific number designation command is received (step AKS503; Yes), specific number command data is acquired (step AKS504). For example, for the first specific number designation command from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03, the first transmission data, the second transmission data, and the third transmission data, which are the lower bytes, are acquired in sequence and stored in a specific number command data buffer or the like provided at a predetermined address in RAM 122. At this time, the acquired data is set to the suggested performance counter (step AKS505). For example, the three-digit specific number designation value obtained by combining the lower four bits of the first transmission data to the third transmission data is stored in the suggested performance counter to set the counter initial value of the suggested performance counter. In this way, the suggested performance counter can set a counter initial value indicating the remaining number of times up to the specific number based on the first specific number designation command.

If the power is not turned on in response to step AKS501 (step AKS501; No), if the first specific number of times designation command is not received in response to step AKS503 (step AKS503; No), or after step AKS505, it is determined whether or not the variable display has started (step AKS506). For example, if either the first variable start designation command or the second variable start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it may be determined that the variable display has started. If the variable display has started (step AKS506; Yes), it is determined whether or not the power-on compatible flag is on (step AKS507). If the power-on compatible flag is off (step AKS507; No), it is determined whether or not the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is "0" (step AKS508). If the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is not "0" (step AKS508; No), the counter for displaying the number of times is updated by subtracting 1 (step AKS509). The count display counter is not updated by step AKS509 when the power-on flag is on. Therefore, the count value of the count display counter is not updated during a predetermined period after the power is turned on in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the corresponding indication of the number of times remaining up to a specific number is displayed in a special manner that makes it difficult to recognize the number of times remaining up to the specific number.

If the power-on support flag is on in response to step AKS507 (step AKS507; Yes), if the count value of the number display counter is "0" in response to step AKS508 (step AKS508; Yes), or After step AKS509, it is determined whether a second specific number of times designation command has been received (step AKS510). Note that the second specific number of times designation command can be sent when the variable display of special symbols in the special pattern game starts, so various processes based on the determination of whether or not the second specific number of times designation command has been received are variable. It may be executed at the beginning of the display. When the second specific number of times designation command is received (step AKS510; Yes), specific number of times command data is acquired (step AKS511). For example, in the configuration example AKC11 of the second specific number of times designation command, the specific number of times command data of the lower byte serving as the second control data may be acquired and stored in a specific number of times command data buffer or the like. At this time, it is determined whether the acquired data indicates 7F[H] (step AKS512). When the acquired data indicates a value other than 7F[H] (step AKS512; No), the suggestion effect counter is updated with the acquired data (step AKS513).

If the second specific number of times designation command is not received in response to step AKS510 (step AKS510; No), or if the acquired data is 7F[H] in response to step AKS512 (step AKS512; Yes), the suggestion It is determined whether the count value of the performance counter is "0" (step AKS514). If the count value of the suggestion effect counter is other than "0" (step AKS514; No), the count value of the suggestion effect counter is decremented by 1 (step AKS515), and then the count value after the update is "0". It is determined whether there is one (step AKS516). Then, if the updated count value is "0" (step AKS516; Yes), a reaching effect flag is set (step AKS517).

If the variable display has not started in response to step AKS506 (step AKS506; No), if the count value of the suggested performance counter is "0" in response to step AKS514 (step AKS514; Yes), if the updated count value is not "0" in response to step AKS516 (step AKS516; No), or following either step AKS513 or AKS517, it is determined whether the jackpot has ended (step AKS518). For example, if a jackpot end designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, it may be determined that the jackpot has ended. If the jackpot has not ended (step AKS518; No), the performance counter update process ends.

If the jackpot has ended in response to step AKS518 (step AKS518; Yes), it is determined whether the power-on support flag is on (step AKS519). At this time, if the power-on support flag is on (step AKS519; Yes), the power-on support flag is cleared (step AKS520).

If the power-on flag is off in response to step AKS519 (step AKS519; No), or after step AKS520, the number display counter is set to 02AD[H] (step AKS521), and the suggested performance counter is set to 02AD[H] (step AKS522), after which the performance counter update process ends.

In such a production-side counter update process, when it is determined in step AKS503 that the first specific number designation command has been received, the specific number command data acquired in step AKS504 is set in the suggested production counter in step AKS505. . The suggested performance counter is provided at a predetermined address in the performance work area of the RAM 122, and stores the remaining number of times until the specified number of times based on the first specified number of times designation command. In addition, in the production side counter update process, when it is determined in step AKS510 that the second specific number designation command has been received, specific number command data is acquired in step AKS511, and in step AKS512, the acquired data is set to 7F[H]. Determine whether or not it indicates. Then, when the acquired data indicates 7F[H], in step AKS515, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is updated by subtracting 1 without being based on the acquired data. On the other hand, if the obtained data does not indicate 7F[H], in step AKS513, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is updated with the obtained data. The specific number command data, which is the second control data in the second specific number designation command, becomes judgment information used for comparison judgment with the count value of the specific number counter when 7F[H] is indicated, and other than 7F[H]. In the case where it is indicated, it becomes numerical information indicating the count value of the specific number of times counter. As a result, when the second specific number of times designation command is sent and the judgment information is sent as the specific number of times command data which is the second control data, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is changed to the second specific number of times designation command. When numerical information is sent as the specific number of times command data that is the second control data without updating based on the reception result, the count value of the suggestion effect counter is updated based on the reception result of the second specific number of times designation command. . Therefore, the count value of the suggestion effect counter can be updated and managed based on the latest reliable information without preparing a separate storage area, so that appropriate effects can be executed while preventing an increase in data capacity. , it is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 that has a plurality of states including a time-saving state.

The second specific number of times designation command whose reception is determined in step AKS510 of the production side counter update process is included in the standby command by steps AKS111 and AKS112 of the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 294-10(A). There are cases where the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. 294-12(A) is transmitted in response to the start of the special symbol game by steps AKS305 and AKS306 of the special symbol buffer shift process. Each time these second specific number of times designation commands are received, specific number of times command data may be stored in a predetermined storage area by overwriting. In response to the fact that the second specific number of times designation command is included in the standby command and sent, it is possible to execute a standby suggestion effect corresponding to the remaining number of times until the specified number of times during a period when a demonstration display is executed, etc. It's okay. In addition, the second specific number of times designation command is included in the standby command and is sent in response to the start of the special figure game, so the second specific number of times designation command can be sent normally at either timing. If the second specified number of times designation command is successfully received at the other timing when the second specified number of times designation command is not received at the other timing, the effect can be executed based on the normally received second specific number of times designation command.

Figure 294-36 is a flow chart showing an example of the number suggestion control process. The performance control CPU 120 only needs to be able to execute the number suggestion control process when, for example, in the performance pattern process process of step S76 shown in Figures 292 and 293 (A), the performance pattern change start process is executed in response to the performance process code corresponding to 01 [H]. In the number suggestion control process, it is determined whether or not variable display has started (step AKS531), and if variable display has not started (step AKS531; No), the process ends. If the performance pattern change start process includes the number suggestion control process, the process can be executed when variable display starts, and therefore the determination in step S531 is not necessary.

If the variable display starts in response to step AKS531 (step AKS531; Yes), it is determined whether or not time saving control is being performed (step AKS532), and if time saving control is being performed (step AKS532; Yes), processing is performed. end. In this embodiment, the performance that controls the execution is a performance that suggests that the time saving state is controlled. Therefore, if the time saving control is in progress, it is not necessary to perform the performance, and the process can be ended as is.

Corresponding to step AKS532, if time saving control is not in progress (step AKS532; No), it is determined whether the power-on support flag is on (step AKS533). If the power-on support flag is on (step AKS533; Yes), the process table for displaying an unknown number of times is selected (step AKS534). The process table for displaying an unknown number of times is an effect control process table for controlling the suggestion display on the screen of the image display device 5 in a special manner that makes it difficult to recognize the remaining number of times until the specified number of times. The power-on response flag is set to the on state when the power is turned on, and is cleared and turned off when the jackpot ends. Therefore, the suggestion display on the screen of the image display device 5 is controlled in a special manner so that it is difficult to recognize the remaining number of times until the specified number of times during the period from when the power is turned on until the end of the jackpot game state.

Next to step AKS534, it is determined whether the count value of the suggestion effect counter has reached a predetermined execution determination value corresponding to the suggestion effect (step AKS535). The execution determination value may be a setting value related to the number of executions of the special figure game, such as a value such that the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is a multiple of "100". If the count value of the suggestion production counter is not the execution determination value (step AKS535; No), the number of suggestion control processing ends. When the count value of the suggestion production counter is the execution determination value (step AKS535; Yes), the process table for suggestion production is selected (step AKS536), and the number of suggestion control processing ends. The process table for suggestion production is a production control process table for executing a suggestion production that suggests the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times while variable display of production symbols is being executed. When the process table for suggestion effect is selected in step AKS536, in the effect pattern variation process of the effect control process process, the suggestion effect is controlled to be executable.

If the power-on flag is off in response to step AKS533 (step AKS533; No), it is determined whether the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is "0" (step AKS537). If the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is not "0" (step AKS537; No), a process table for displaying the number of times is selected (step AKS538). The process table for displaying the number of times is a performance control process table for controlling the suggestive display on the screen of the image display device 5 to a notification mode that makes it easy to recognize the number of times remaining up to a specific number. Therefore, if the power-on flag is off in step AKS533, if the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is other than "0" in step AKS537, the suggestive display is controlled to be possible in a notification mode that makes it easy to recognize the number of times remaining up to a specific number. If the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is "0" in step AKS537, the process does not proceed to step AKS538, so the suggestive display is not executed.

If the count value of the counter for displaying the number of times is "0" in response to step AKS537 (step AKS537; Yes), or after step AKS538, it is determined whether the count value of the suggestive performance counter is within the countdown range (step AKS539). The countdown range may be set in advance as a range of count values that allows the execution of a countdown performance, such as a range from "0" to "10". If the count value of the suggestive performance counter is not within the countdown range (step AKS539; No), the number suggestion control process ends. On the other hand, if the count value of the suggestive performance counter is within the countdown range (step AKS539; Yes), a process table for countdown performance is selected (step AKS540). The process table for countdown performance is a performance control process table for executing a countdown performance as a predetermined performance that notifies the remaining number of times up to a specific number while the variable display of the performance pattern is being executed. When a process table for countdown effects is selected by step AKS540, the effect control process process controls the countdown effect so that it can be executed during the effect pattern change process.

After step AKS540, it is determined whether the arrival time performance flag is on (step AKS541). The arrival time performance flag is set to the on state when the count value of the suggestion performance counter becomes "0" by step AKS517 of the performance side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35. If the arrival time performance flag is off (step AKS541; No), the number of times suggestion control process ends. On the other hand, if the arrival time performance flag is on (step AKS541; Yes), a process table for time-saving entry performance is selected (step AKS542), the arrival time performance flag is cleared (step AKS543), and the number of times suggestion control process ends. The time-saving entry performance process table is a performance control process table for executing a time-saving entry performance as a notification performance that notifies that a specific number of times has been reached and that the time-saving state is controlled as a rescue time-saving state during the period in which the determined performance pattern, which is the display result in the variable display of the performance pattern, is stopped and displayed. When a process table for the time-saving entry effect is selected by step AKS543, the effect control process processing controls the time-saving entry effect so that it can be executed in the effect pattern change processing or effect pattern change stop processing.

Figure 294-37 shows an example of control of the number of times display that serves as a suggestive display. Of these, Figure 294-37 (A) is a control example AKF01 when the power-on flag is off. Figure 294-37 (B) is a control example AKF02 when the power-on flag is on. In addition to the small symbol display area 5K, a number display section 5Z is provided on the screen of the image display device 5, and a performance image in the number of times display can be displayed as a suggestive display showing the number of times remaining up to a specific number.

In the number suggestion control process shown in FIG. 294-36, it is determined in step AKS533 that the power-on support flag is off, and in step AKS537 it is determined that the count value of the number display counter is not "0". In this case, the process table for displaying the number of notifications is selected in step AKS538. In the production-side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35, for example, after the initial count value 02AD[H] is set in step AKS521 based on the end of the jackpot in step AKS518, the counter for displaying the number of times is set to step AKS506. Based on the start of variable display in step AKS509, the count value is updated by subtracting 1. As a result, during the period after the end of the advantageous jackpot game state until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a specific number, as in the control example AKF01, the notification mode is set such that it is easy to recognize the remaining number of times until the specific number of times. The number of times displayed as a suggestion can be displayed in the number of times display section 5Z.

In the number suggestion control process shown in FIG. 294-36, if it is determined in step AKS533 that the power-on support flag is on, the process table for displaying an unknown number of times is selected in step AKS534. The power-on support flag is set in step AKS502 and turned on when it is determined in step AKS501 that the power is turned on in the production-side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35. Thereafter, based on the fact that the jackpot has been completed in step AKS518, the power-on corresponding flag is cleared in step AKS520 and turns off. As a result, after the power is turned on, as in control example AKF02, a special mode is displayed that suggests a special mode in which it is difficult to recognize the remaining number of times until the specified number of times, which is different from the state after the end of the advantageous jackpot game state. The number of times can be displayed on the number of times display section 5Z.

FIG. 294-38 shows an example of execution of a suggestion effect, a countdown effect, and a time-saving rush effect. In the number of suggestion control processing shown in FIG. 294-36, after the process table for displaying an unknown number of times is selected in step AKS534, in step AKS535, based on the count value of the suggestion effect counter being the execution determination value, step The AKS 536 selects the process table for suggestion effect. The process table for displaying an unknown number of times corresponds to a number of times display that is a special mode of suggestive display in which it is difficult to recognize the remaining number of times until a specific number of times. The execution determination value in step AKS535 may be a multiple of "100", for example. Thereby, when the suggestion display is in a special mode, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times. In the production-side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35, based on the reception of the first specific number designation command in step AKS503, the specific number command data acquired in step AKS504 is set in the suggested production counter in step AKS505. After that, the count value can be updated at the end of the variable display by step AKS515 or the like. Thereby, the suggestion effect is executed based on the first specific number of times designation command. FIG. 294-38(A) is an example of execution AKG01 of the suggestion effect when the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is "200". Further, FIG. 294-38(B) is an example of execution AKG02 of the suggestion effect corresponding to when the remaining number of times up to the specific number of times is "100". In these cases, the number display unit 5Z displays a number display that is a special mode of suggestion that makes it difficult to specify the remaining number of times until the specified number of times, as in control example AKF02 shown in FIG. 294-37(B). be exposed. In this way, in addition to displaying the number of special modes, it is possible to perform a suggestion effect that suggests the remaining number of times until the specified number of times, so it is possible to improve the game interest until the jackpot game state after turning on the power, and to play multiple games including the time-saving state. It is possible to improve the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 having the following conditions.

In the number suggestion control process shown in FIG. 294-36, if the count value of the suggestive performance counter is within the countdown range in step AKS539, a countdown performance process table is selected in step AKS540. The countdown performance process table may be prepared in a plurality of types of performance control tables so that the remaining number of times up to the specific number can be notified in accordance with the count value of the suggestive performance counter. In step AKS540, a countdown performance process table corresponding to the count value of the suggestive performance counter may be selected. In the performance side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35, based on the reception of the second specific number designation command in step AKS510, it is determined in step AKS512 whether the specific number command data acquired in step AKS511 indicates 7F [H]. The countdown range may be, for example, a range from "0" to "10", in which the specific number command data acquired from the second specific number designation command is not 7F [H]. In this case, the suggestive performance counter is updated by the specific number command data acquired from the second specific number designation command in step AKS513. Therefore, the countdown performance that is the predetermined performance is controlled to be executable based on the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, being transmitted as the second control data of the second specific number designation command. FIG. 294-38(C) is an execution example AKG03 of a countdown performance corresponding to the count value of the suggestive performance counter being "10". FIG. 294-38(D) is an execution example AKG04 of a countdown performance corresponding to the count value of the suggestive performance counter being "9". FIG. 294-38(E) is an execution example AKG05 of a countdown performance corresponding to the count value of the suggestive performance counter being "1". FIG. 294-38(F) is an execution example AKG06 of a countdown performance corresponding to the count value of the suggestive performance counter being "0". In this way, a countdown effect, which is a predetermined effect, can be executed based on the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, transmitted by the second specific number designation command, so that the appropriate effect can increase the interest in playing and improve the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1, which has multiple states including a time-saving state.

In the number of times display control process shown in FIG. 294-36, when the arrival effect flag is on in step AKS541, the time-saving entry process table is selected in step AKS542. The process table for time-saving entry performance is used to control the time-saving entry performance to be executable during a period in which the final performance symbol that is the display result in the variable display of performance symbols is stopped and displayed. The arrival effect flag is set and turned on when the count value of the suggested effect counter becomes "0" in step AKS517 of the effect side counter update process shown in FIG. 294-35. Since the suggestion performance counter counts the remaining number of times until the specified number of times, when the count value becomes ``0'', it is controlled to a time saving state based on the execution of the special figure game a specified number of times. In the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, based on the count value of the specific number of times counter being the reaching determination value in step AKS254, the specific stop corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3 in step AKS255 is determined. The time is set. The time-saving rush performance as a notification performance when the specific number of times is reached is executable controlled based on the specific stop time corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. FIG. 294-38 (G) is an execution example AKG07 at the start of the time-saving rush effect. FIG. 294-38 (H) is an example of execution AKG08 after the start of the time-saving rush effect.

In addition to such a time-saving entry effect, or instead of a time-saving entry effect, during the execution of a special game that has reached a specific number of times, a notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state based on a specific command may be controlled to be executable. The specific command is a performance control command that can specify that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state when the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, reaches a specific value of "0", and a background color designation command or a second specific number designation command can be used. When it is determined to execute a notification effect at the start of a special game based on a background color designation command or a second specific number designation command, a notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state is controlled to be executable, for example, by displaying a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. As a specific example, the image display for displaying the number of times that is a suggestive display in the number display unit 5Z may be controlled to be a flashing display. Alternatively, a display indicating the remaining number of times up to a specific number may be controlled to be a flashing display in a dedicated specific number counter display provided separately from the image display device 5. This type of notification makes it easy to recognize that the time-saving state is being controlled based on the number of times the special game is played, increasing interest in the game and improving the marketability of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, a specific stop time corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3 in step AKS255 can be set. On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the recovery condition is not satisfied in step S4 of the game control main process shown in FIG. 288, the RWM initial setting process in step S7 is executed, and the game work area including the performance designation buffer after the winning is completed is cleared, and the performance designation value after the winning is completed is set to 00 [H]. In the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, based on the performance designation value after the winning is completed being 00 [H] in step AKS253, a normal stop time corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA1 in step AKS251 can be set without making a numerical judgment as to whether or not the count value of the specific number counter in step AKS254 is the reached judgment value. Therefore, after the initial setting is performed when the power is turned on, the normal stop time is set even in the special symbol game in which the count value of the specific number counter is supposed to be the reached judgment value. This prevents the fairness of play from being compromised based on the game history after initial settings are made when the power is turned on, and improves the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1, which has multiple states including a time-saving state.

While the normal stop time can be set by performing such initial settings when the power is turned on, when the initial settings when the power is turned on are not performed, a time-saving entry effect may be executed as a notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state when a specific number of times is reached, based on a specific stop time corresponding to the pattern stop setting SZA3. The pattern stop setting SZA3 is a setting that is performed by step AKS255 when the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching judgment value in step AKS254 of the special pattern stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19. When the count value of the specific number of times counter reaches the reaching judgment value, the time-saving condition based on the number of times the special pattern game is executed is established, and the game state transitions from the normal state to the time-saving state. At this time, a specific stop time different from the normal stop time is set as the stop time after the special pattern variation time has elapsed, corresponding to the pattern stop setting SZA3. A notification effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, such as a time-saving entry effect, may be executed based on the specific stop time.

In addition, while the normal stop time can be set by performing the initial setting when the power is turned on, in the special symbol stop time setting process shown in FIG. 294-19, after performing the symbol stop time setting SZA1 in step AKS251, if the count value of the specific number counter reaches the reaching judgment value in step AKS254, the symbol stop time setting SZA3 may be overwritten and set in step AKS255. Alternatively, while the normal stop time can be set by performing the initial setting when the power is turned on, in the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, steps AKS281 to AKS283 are executed after steps AKS279 and AKS280 to execute the first time-saving end judgment process to determine whether or not the first condition for terminating the time-saving state is satisfied, and if it is determined that the first condition is satisfied, the second time-saving end judgment process may not determine whether or not the second condition is satisfied.

The first specific number of times designation command and the second specific number of times designation command are not limited to those capable of designating the number of times remaining up to a specific number of times in response to the time-saving conditions controlled in the time-saving state, but may be those capable of designating the number of times remaining up to the time-saving number in response to the time-saving end conditions under which the time-saving state ends. For example, the specific number of times command data in the first specific number of times designation command and the second specific number of times designation command may be set based on the count value of the first time-saving counter.

As explained above, in the pachinko game machine 1, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 performs steps AKS273 and AKS274 of the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21, and time-saving subtraction shown in FIG. 294-23. The gaming state can be shifted to the normal state and the time saving state by processing steps AKS324, AKS325, step AKS188 of the jackpot end processing shown in FIG. 294-31, and the like. Furthermore, the count value of the specific number counter, which is numerical information, can be updated by step AKS272 of the counter subtraction process shown in FIG. 294-21. Then, based on the fact that the count value of the specific number of times counter is the attainment determination value in step AKS272, by executing the data set process in step AKS274, it is possible to shift the gaming state based on the numerical information. Then, when the power is turned on, by executing the specific number command transmission process shown in FIG. 294-8, a first specific number designation command, which is a first command regarding the remaining number of times up to the specific number, is transmitted. On the other hand, for example, by executing the data set process in step AKS306 of the special symbol buffer shift process shown in FIG. A second specific number of times designation command is transmitted as a second command different from the first command. The first specific number designation command has a total of 6 bytes from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03, as shown in FIG. 294-9. The second specific number of times designation command is a 2-byte production control command, as shown in FIG. 294-12(C). In this way, the first specific number of times designation command has a larger number of bytes than the second specific number of times designation command. The first specific number designation command uses the first transmission data of the first set AKC01, the second transmission data of the second set AKC02, and the third transmission data of the third set AKC03, so that the remaining number of times up to the specific number is, for example, 7F. It is possible to specify the remaining number of times in the case where the first number of times is less than [H] and the case where the second number of times is greater than the first number, for example, 7F[H] or more. On the other hand, the second specific number of times notification command can be set from 00[H] to 7F[H] according to the specific number of times command data, so when the remaining number of times until the specific number of times is the first number, the remaining number of times can be set. While it is possible to specify the remaining number of times, if the second number of times is greater than the first number of times, it is not possible to specify the remaining number of times. As a result, when the power is turned on, a first specific number designation command that can accurately specify the remaining number of times up to the specific number is sent, and a second specific number designation command with a smaller number of bytes is sent in response to execution of variable display. Therefore, while making it possible to transmit accurate information when the power is turned on, the processing load corresponding to the execution of variable display can be reduced, and the marketability of the pachinko game machine 1 can be improved.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 22AK)
A gaming machine which performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, the gaming machine comprising: a game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game; and a presentation control means capable of controlling presentation based on a command from the game control means, the game control means including: a state control means capable of transitioning a gaming state between a normal state and a special state; an update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display; and a transmission means capable of transmitting a command, the state control means being capable of transitioning a gaming state based on the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, and the transmission means being capable of transmitting a command when the power is turned on. A first command is transmitted with respect to the number of times remaining until the specified number of times, and a second command different from the first command is transmitted with respect to the number of times remaining until the specified number of times in response to the execution of the variable display, the first command has a larger number of bytes than the second command, and the number of times remaining until the specified number can be specified in the cases where the number of times remaining until the specified number is the first number and the number of times remaining until the specified number is the second number that is larger than the first number, and the second command can specify the number of times remaining until the specified number of times when the number of times remaining until the specified number is the first number, while the second command cannot specify the number of times remaining until the specified number of times when the number of times remaining until the specified number is the second number. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming control means may be, for example, a CPU 103 of a gaming control microcomputer 100. The presentation control means may be, for example, a presentation control CPU 120. The special state may be, for example, a time-saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 executing steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS325, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, the count value of a specific number counter. The update means may be, for example, the CPU 103 executing step AKS272. The transmission means may be, for example, the CPU 103 executing a specific number command transmission process and a command set process. The specific value may be, for example, "0". Transmitting the first command when the power is turned on may be, for example, the execution of a specific number command transmission process. Transmitting the second command in response to the execution of the variable display may be, for example, the execution of a command set process in step AKS308. The number of bytes greater than the second command may be, for example, a total of 6 bytes from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03 of the first specific number command 91XX[H] for the second specific number designation command 94XX[H] consisting of 2 bytes. The first number of times may be, for example, less than 7F[H], and the second number of times may be, for example, 7F[H] or more.
With such a configuration, the processing load for transmitting commands and the program capacity can be reduced, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[1] The first command is composed of a predetermined number of command data that combines one byte of first control data indicating a command type and one byte of second control data related to numerical information updated by the update means, and the game control means may create the first command by executing a specific command process. Here, the first control data may be, for example, command type data. The second control data may be, for example, the first transmission data to the third transmission data. The predetermined number may be, for example, a total of three sets from the first set AKC01 to the third set AKC03. The specific command process may be, for example, a specific number of command transmission processes.
In such a configuration, accurate commands relating to numerical information can be transmitted when the power is turned on, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[2] The transmitting means transmits a command based on the command data stored in the data storage area, and the game controlling means transmits a command every time command data constituting the first command is created by executing specific command processing. It may be stored in the data storage area in the specific command processing. Here, the data storage means may be, for example, a serial communication data register. What may be stored in the data storage area in the specific command processing is, for example, steps AKS063, AKS064, AKS066, AKS067, AKS070, and AKS071.
In such a configuration, commands can be stably transmitted and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[3] The game control means is equipped with a storage means capable of storing control information, and the game control means is capable of executing a determination process for determining whether or not the stored information in the storage means is normal, and the game control means is capable of executing a determination process for determining whether or not the stored information in the storage means is normal, and whether the determination result of the determination process is normal or not. In some cases, when a specific command process is executed based on the stored numerical information, and the judgment result from the judgment process is not normal, the numerical information corresponding to the initial value is set by performing the initial setting process of the storage means. Then, specific command processing may be executed based on numerical information corresponding to the initial value. Here, the storage means may be, for example, the RAM 102 or the like. The determination process may be, for example, the RWM check process in step S3 and the part in step S4. Executing the specific command process based on the stored numerical information may be the part that executes the command transmission process a specific number of times in step S13 in the case of YES in step S4. Executing the specific command process based on the numerical information corresponding to the initial value may be performed as long as the specific number of command transmission processes in step S13 are executed in the case of No in step S4.
In such a configuration, a command related to numerical information can be sent regardless of whether the stored information is normal or not, thereby increasing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[4] The game control means may not execute other processes during the execution of the specific command process, such as a part that executes the process of sending a command a specific number of times in step S13 after step S1.
In such a configuration, accurate commands relating to numerical information can be transmitted, improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[5] The game control means may include a storage means capable of storing control information, and the game control means may execute a judgment process for judging whether the information stored in the storage means is normal or not, and may execute a specific command process when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since power-on, and may control a command corresponding to the judgment result of the judgment process to be transmittable before the predetermined period of time has elapsed. Here, the storage means may be, for example, the RAM 102. The judgment process may be, for example, the RWM check process of step S3 and the part of step S4. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since power-on, it may be, for example, when the wait process of step S12 is executed. The control for enabling the command corresponding to the judgment result to be transmitted may be, for example, a part that executes the command set process of step S10 after steps S6 and S9.
In such a configuration, commands can be transmitted reliably, improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[6] The second command is composed of one set of command data that is a combination of one byte of first control data indicating the command type and one byte of second control data regarding numerical information updated by the updating means, The game control means may create the second control data in an update process in which the numerical information is updated by the update means. Here, the first control data may be, for example, command type data. The second control data may be, for example, specific number of times command data. The update process may be, for example, the counter subtraction process in step AKS125.
In such a configuration, the capacity of the second command can be prevented from increasing, and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[7] The game control means is capable of executing an update process when the variable display time has elapsed, and compares the numerical information updated by the update means by executing the update process with judgment information indicating a specific judgment value, When the numerical information is greater than or equal to the specific judgment value, the judgment information is stored in the command information storage area as the second control data of the second command, and when the numerical information is less than the specific judgment value, the judgment information is stored as the second control data of the second command. Numerical information updated by the updating means may be stored as control data in the command information storage area. Here, when the variable display time has elapsed, it is sufficient if, for example, the counter subtraction process is executed in step AKS125 of the special symbol variation process. The specific judgment value may be, for example, an upper limit judgment value corresponding to the upper limit value of the specific number of commands. The determination information may be stored in the command information storage area, for example, in step AKS275. Numerical information may be stored in the command information storage area, for example, in step AKS277.
In such a configuration, the capacity of the second command can be reduced and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[8] A reserved memory means is provided that can store information related to variable display that has not yet started as reserved memory information, and the game control means can execute a stored information shift process when the reserved memory information is stored in the reserved memory means, and in the stored information shift process, the game control means may control the second command to be transmittable using the stored information in the command information storage area. Here, the reserved memory means may be, for example, a special symbol buffer. The stored information shift process may be, for example, the special symbol buffer shift process of step AKS202. Controlling the second command to be transmittable may be, for example, a part of steps AKS305 and AKS306.
In such a configuration, the second command can be appropriately transmitted, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[9] The game control means is provided with a reserved memory means capable of storing information related to a variable display that has not yet started as reserved memory information, and the game control means is capable of executing a reserved memory determination process for determining whether or not reserved memory information is stored in the reserved memory means, and when it is determined in the reserved memory determination process that the reserved memory information is not stored, the game control means may control the second command to be transmittable using the stored information in the command information storage area. Here, the reserved memory means may be, for example, a special symbol buffer. The reserved memory determination process may be, for example, a normal process for special symbols including step AKS101. When it is determined that the reserved memory information is not stored, the control to be transmittable for the second command may be, for example, a part of steps AKS111 and AKS112.
In such a configuration, the second command can be transmitted stably, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[10] When it is determined in the reserved memory determination process that the reserved memory information is not stored, the game control means may control so as to transmit a command related to a non-game state together with the second command using the stored information in the command information storage area. For example, the standby command transmission table AKT15 may be specified in step AKS111, and the command set process in step AKS112 may be executed.
In such a configuration, commands can be sent appropriately, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[11] The game control device includes a storage means capable of storing control information, and the game control means is capable of executing a judgment process for judging whether the information stored in the storage means is normal when the power is turned on, and when the judgment result of the judgment process is normal, the game control means is capable of controlling using the stored numerical information, and when the judgment result of the judgment process is not normal, the game control means performs an initial setting process for the storage means to set numerical information corresponding to an initial value, and is capable of controlling using the numerical information corresponding to the initial value, and the performance control means is capable of displaying a suggestion indicating the number of times remaining up to a specific number of times, and includes a suggestion display control means for controlling the suggestion display to be possible in a special mode that is different from the mode after the end of the advantageous state after the power is turned on, and makes it difficult to recognize the number of times remaining up to the specific number of times, and a suggestion performance control means for controlling the suggestion performance suggesting the number of times remaining up to the specific number of times to be possible to be executed when the suggestion display is in the special mode, and the suggestion performance control means may execute the suggestion performance based on the first command. Here, the storage means may be, for example, a RAM 102 or the like. The judgment process may be, for example, the RWM check process of step S3 and a part of step S4. Being controllable using stored numerical information may be such that data setting using the backup time setting table specified in step S6 does not include an initial value setting for a specific number counter. Being controllable using numerical information corresponding to an initial value may be such that data setting using the initialization time setting table specified in step S9 includes an initial value setting for a specific number counter. The suggestive display may be, for example, a display in the number display unit 5Z. The special mode may be, for example, an unknown number mode. The suggestive performance may be, for example, a remaining number suggestive performance. The suggestive performance control means may be, for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS535 and AKS536.
In such a configuration, suggestive displays and suggestive performances can increase interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[12] The performance control means may include a predetermined performance control means for controlling a predetermined performance that notifies the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times based on the transmission of the numerical information updated by the update means as the second control data of the second command. Here, the predetermined performance may be, for example, a countdown performance. The predetermined performance control means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS539 and AKS540.
In such a configuration, the predetermined presentation can increase the interest in the game, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[13] When the first command is transmitted, the performance control means stores the remaining number of times up to a specific number based on the first command in the number storage area, and when the second command is transmitted, when the determination information is transmitted as the second control data of the second command, the storage content of the number storage area may not be changed based on the reception result of the second command, and when the numerical information updated by the update means is transmitted as the second control data of the second command, the storage content of the number storage area may be changed based on the reception result of the second command. Here, the number storage area may be, for example, a suggestion performance counter. The storage content of the number storage area may be changed, for example, in the part of steps AKS512 and AKS513.
In such a configuration, the remaining number of times up to a specific number of times can be appropriately stored, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

[14] A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, comprising a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can control the performance, The game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling to a special state different from the normal state, an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a stop control means after the variable display time has elapsed. variable display control means for controlling the display results of the variable display so that they can be stopped and displayed at different times; The variable display control means can be controlled to a special state based on the end of an advantageous state, and the variable display control means can control the stop time when the numerical information updated by the updating means does not reach a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times. When the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the specific number of times, the specific stopping time is set as the stopping time, and the production control means, based on the specific stopping time, It may also include a notification effect control means for executable control of a notification effect to notify that the special state is controlled. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The specific value may be, for example, "0". The ability to control to a special state based on the end of an advantageous state may be provided, for example, in step AKS188. The normal stop time may be the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 007D[H] in response to the symbol stop time setting SZA1, for example. The specific stop time may be, for example, the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 4F7E[H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. The notification effect may be, for example, a time-saving effect. The notification effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS541 and AKS542.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game through notification effects while preventing an increase in capacity, thereby increasing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[15] A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and includes a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and the game control means is configured to display a variable display after the variable display time has elapsed. The game control means includes a variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display so that it can be stopped and displayed during the stop time, and the game control means performs a normal setting for setting the normal stop time as the stop time in the setting process for setting the stop time. , After the normal setting, perform a specific judgment regarding a specific condition, and if the judgment result of the specific judgment is that the specific condition is met, an overwrite setting that sets a specific stop time corresponding to the specific condition as the stop time. and performs control based on the specific stop time set by the override settings, and if the judgment result of the specific judgment is determined that the specific condition is not met, the control is performed based on the normal stop time set by the normal settings. Control may also be performed. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The normal stop time may be the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 007D[H] in response to the symbol stop time setting SZA1, for example. The normal setting may be the part of step AKS251, for example. The specific condition may be, for example, that the performance designation value after the winning is 00 [H]. The specific determination may be made, for example, at step AKS253. The specific stop time may be, for example, the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 4F7E[H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. The overwrite settings may be made, for example, at step AKS255.
With such a configuration, increase in program capacity can be prevented and the marketability of the game machine can be improved.

[16] A gaming machine comprising a first variable display means for performing a first variable display and a second variable display means for performing a second variable display, and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. The game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and a state control means capable of controlling the second variable display to a special state in which it is more likely to be executed than the normal state; variable display control means for controlling the display result of the variable display so that it can be stopped and displayed; and the second condition that the number of times of the second variable display during the special state has reached the second number, the special state is terminated, and the game control means terminates the special state. In the setting process for setting the stop time, a first condition is determined as to whether the first condition is satisfied, and if the first condition is satisfied, the stop time is set in response to the first condition being satisfied. , performs a variable display determination as to whether or not the second variable display has been executed, performs a second condition determination as to whether or not the second condition is satisfied when the second variable display is executed, and determines whether the second condition is satisfied. If the second condition is satisfied, the stop time is set in response to the second condition being satisfied, and if it is determined that the first condition is satisfied by the first condition determination, the variable display determination and the second condition determination are not performed. good. Here, the first variable display means may be, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variable display means may be the second special symbol display device 4B or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The first condition may be, for example, that the count value of the first time saving counter is updated to "0". The second condition may be, for example, that the count value of the second time saving counter is updated to "0". Setting the stop time in response to the establishment of the first condition may be performed, for example, in a part where the symbol stop time setting SZA2 is performed in step AKS260 in the case of Yes in step AKS257. The variable display determination may be performed at step AKS258, for example. Setting the stop time in response to the establishment of the second condition may be performed, for example, in a part where the symbol stop time setting SZA2 is performed in step AKS260 in the case of Yes in step AKS259.
In such a configuration, the processing load for controlling the special state can be reduced, and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[17] A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, comprising a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can control the performance, The game control means includes a state control means that can be controlled to a special state different from the normal state, a variable display control means that controls the display results of the variable display to be stopped and displayed during a stop time after the variable display time has elapsed; The effect control means includes an updating means that can update numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a counting means that can set counting information in response to the end of an advantageous state. The state control means is configured to perform variable display effects in different presentation modes depending on whether the counted information is the first specified value or the second specified value, and the state control means specifies the numerical information updated by the updating means. The variable display control means can be controlled to a special state based on a specific value corresponding to the number of times, and can be controlled to a special state based on the end of an advantageous state. If it is different from the initial setting value after inputting, a numerical judgment is made as to whether the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, and when it does not become a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, A normal stop time is set as the stop time, and when a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times is reached, a specific stop time is set as the stop time, and when the counting information set by the counting means matches the initial setting value, the numerical value The normal stop time is set as the stop time without making a determination, and the effect control means controls the notification effect to enable execution of a notification effect to notify that the special state will be controlled based on the specific stop time. May include. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The stop time may be, for example, a special symbol stop time. The variable display control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes special symbol variation processing. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The count information may be, for example, a designated value for performance after winning. The counting means may be, for example, a performance designation buffer after winning ends. The first designated value may be, for example, 00 [H]. The second specified value may be any value other than 00[H], for example. Variable display performances with different performance modes may be different as long as the patterns that can be determined are different depending on the performance state selection designation value, for example. The specific value may be, for example, "0". The ability to control to a special state based on the end of an advantageous state may be provided, for example, in step AKS188. The initial setting value may be, for example, 00 [H]. Numerical determination may be performed, for example, in step AKS254. The normal stop time may be the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 007D[H] in response to the symbol stop time setting SZA1, for example. The specific stop time may be, for example, the special symbol stop time when the initial value of the special symbol process timer is set to 4F7E[H] corresponding to the symbol stop time setting SZA3. If the count information matches the initial setting value, it is sufficient if the answer in step AKS253 is Yes, for example. The notification effect may be, for example, a time-saving effect. The notification effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS541 and AKS542.
In such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the game through the notification effect while maintaining the fairness of the game, thereby increasing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[18] A gaming machine comprising a first variable display means for performing a first variable display and a second variable display means for performing a second variable display, which can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, The game control means is equipped with a game control means capable of controlling the progress, the game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and the state control means at least Either one of the first condition in which the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display becomes the first number of times, and the second condition in which the number of times of the second variable display during the special state becomes the second number. The special state is terminated based on the fulfillment of the condition, and the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the first condition and a second counting means corresponding to the second condition, and the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the second condition, and Performing a count value update process for updating the count value by the second counting means; when the first condition is satisfied, performing a process related to ending the special state; performing a count value update process for updating the count value by the second counting means; When two conditions are met, a process related to the end of the special state is performed, a count update process is performed to update the count by the first counting means, and when the first condition is met, the count by the second counting means is updated. There is no need to perform count value update processing to update the . Here, the first variable display means may be, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variable display means may be the second special symbol display device 4B or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The first condition may be, for example, that the count value of the first time saving counter is updated to "0". The second condition may be, for example, that the count value of the second time saving counter is updated to "0". The first counting means may be, for example, a first time saving counter. The second counting means may be, for example, a second time saving counter. The count value update process may be, for example, a time-saving subtraction process. If the first condition is satisfied, it is sufficient if, for example, the time-saving subtraction process in step AKS280 results in Yes in step AKS323.
In such a configuration, the processing load for controlling the special state can be reduced, and the marketability of the gaming machine can be improved.

[19] A gaming machine that displays a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, which includes a game control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance that is controlled based on commands from the game control means. The game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling to a special state different from a normal state, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display. , a transmitting means capable of transmitting commands according to the progress of the game, and in a numerical value updating process in which numerical information can be updated by the updating means, it is determined whether to control to an advantageous state based on the executed variable display. When an advantageous judgment is made and the judgment result of the advantageous judgment is that the control is to be controlled to an advantageous state, the numerical information is not updated by the updating means and the judgment result of the advantageous judgment is a judgment that the control is not to be controlled to an advantageous state. In some cases, the updating means updates the numerical information, and performs processing related to special state control based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, and the transmitting means updates the numerical information by the updating means. When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, a specific command that can be specified to control the special state is transmitted, and the production control means is controlled to the special state based on the specific command. The information processing apparatus may include a notification effect control means for executable control of a notification effect for notifying the user of the event. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The transmitting means may be the CPU 103 or the like that executes command set processing. The numerical value update process may be, for example, a counter subtraction process. The advantageous determination may be made in step AKS271, for example. If the determination is to control to an advantageous state, it is sufficient if the determination is Yes in step AKS271, for example. If the determination is not to control the vehicle to an advantageous state, it is sufficient if the determination is No in step AKS271, for example. The process related to the control of the special state may be, for example, steps AKS273 and AKS274. The specific command may be, for example, a special symbol state designation command, a second specific number of times designation command, or the like. The notification effect may be, for example, a time-saving effect. The notification effect control means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes steps AKS541 and AKS542.
In such a configuration, the interest in the game can be improved by appropriately executing the notification effect, and the marketability of the game machine can be enhanced.

[20] A gaming machine comprising a first variable display means for performing a first variable display and a second variable display means for performing a second variable display, and capable of being controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous for a player. The game control means is equipped with a game control means capable of controlling the progress, the game control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which the second variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state, and the state control means at least Either one of the first condition in which the total number of times of the first variable display and the second variable display becomes the first number of times, and the second condition in which the number of times of the second variable display during the special state becomes the second number. The special state is terminated based on the fulfillment of the condition, and the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the first condition and a second counting means corresponding to the second condition, and the game control means includes a first counting means corresponding to the second condition, and Performing a count value update process for updating the count value by the second counting means; when the first condition is satisfied, performing a process related to ending the special state; performing a count value update process for updating the count value by the second counting means; When the two conditions are satisfied, the processing related to the termination of the special state is performed, and in both cases, in the case where the first condition is satisfied and the case where the second condition is satisfied, in the processing related to the termination of the special state, The counts by the first counting means and the second counting means may be initialized. Here, the first variable display means may be, for example, the first special symbol display device 4A. The second variable display means may be the second special symbol display device 4B or the like. The advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The game control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The first condition may be, for example, that the count value of the first time saving counter is updated to "0". The second condition may be, for example, that the count value of the second time saving counter is updated to "0". The first counting means may be, for example, a first time saving counter. The second counting means may be, for example, a second time saving counter. The count value update process may be, for example, a time-saving subtraction process. The process related to ending the special state may be performed at steps AKS324, AKS327, etc., for example.
In such a configuration, the special state can be appropriately controlled and the marketability of the gaming machine can be enhanced.

[21] A gaming machine that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, which is based on a state control means that can control to a special state different from a normal state, and that the variable display is executed. and a pattern selection means capable of selecting a variable display pattern using pattern selection data. The pattern selection means can be controlled to a first special state, and can be controlled to a second special state of the special states based on the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times. , in the normal state after the first special state ends, a variable display pattern is selected using the special pattern selection data, and in the normal state after the second special state ends, the same initial settings as after the power is turned on are set. The variable display pattern is selected using the normal pattern selection data, and the variable display pattern selectable using the normal pattern selection data does not include the variable display pattern selectable using the special pattern selection data. Good too. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1. The special state may be, for example, a time saving state. The state control means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number of times counter. The updating means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The pattern selection data may be, for example, a jackpot variation pattern type selection table, a small win variation pattern type selection table, a loss variation pattern type selection table, a variation pattern determination table, or the like. The pattern selection means may be, for example, the CPU 103 that executes the variation pattern setting process in step AKS108. The special pattern selection data may be, for example, a jackpot fluctuation pattern type selection table, a fluctuation pattern determination table, etc. corresponding to performance state selection designation values of 01 [H] and 02 [H]. The data for normal pattern selection may be, for example, a jackpot time fluctuation pattern type selection table, a fluctuation pattern determination table, etc. corresponding to the performance state selection designation value 00 [H]. The variable display patterns that can be selected using the special pattern selection data may be, for example, variable patterns PB57, PB68, etc., which become determinable patterns when the performance state selection designation value is 01 [H] or 02 [H]. .
In such a configuration, it is possible to select an appropriate variable display pattern after the special state ends, thereby increasing the marketability of the gaming machine.

[22] A gaming machine which performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, comprising: state control means capable of controlling to a special state different from a normal state; update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display; and advantageous control means capable of controlling to an advantageous state, wherein the advantageous control means is capable of controlling to a first advantageous state among the advantageous states when the display result of the variable display is a first advantageous result, and is capable of controlling to a second advantageous state among the advantageous states when the display result of the variable display is a second advantageous result, and the state control means is capable of controlling to the first special state among the special states when the first advantageous state ends, and is capable of controlling to the second advantageous state among the special states when the second advantageous state ends. The second special state can be controlled to the third special state among the special states based on the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times, and the first processing and the second processing are performed in both cases when the first advantageous state ends and when the second advantageous state ends, and when the first advantageous state ends, the first processing allows the setting of the first special state, and when the second advantageous state ends, the first processing allows the setting of the second special state, and when the first advantageous state ends and when the second advantageous state ends, the initial value of the numerical information updated by the update means can be set by the second processing. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko game machine 1. The special state may be, for example, a time-saving state. The state control means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes steps AKS273 and AKS274, AKS324 and AKS327, and AKS188. The numerical information may be, for example, a count value of a specific number counter. The update means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes step AKS272. The advantageous control means may be, for example, a CPU 103 that executes a large prize opening pre-opening process, a large prize opening open-in process, a large prize opening post-opening process, and a large prize end process. The first advantageous result may be, for example, a large prize designation value of 01 [H] or 02 [H]. The first advantageous state may be, for example, a large prize opening open-in maximum number of times, such as ... The first special state may be, for example, a time-saving state in which the initial value of the first time-saving counter is 0006 [H] and the initial value of the second time-saving counter is 0001 [H] corresponding to the jackpot end state setting type SX1. The second special state may be, for example, a time-saving state in which the initial value of the first time-saving counter is 02AD [H] corresponding to the jackpot end state setting types SX3, SX4, and SX6. The first process may be, for example, step AKS188. The second process may be, for example, the data set process of step AKS190.
In such a configuration, an increase in program capacity can be prevented, thereby improving the marketability of the gaming machine.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning port, 11 Main board, 12 Performance control board, 13 Sound control board, 15 Relay board, 9020 Special pattern LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First start port switch, 22B Second start port switch, 23 Count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passing gate, 9050 Fourth pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information based on the establishment of a starting condition, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player when the variable display is displayed as a specific display result,
a performance execution means capable of performing a performance using the performance means ;
a state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which a starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
Equipped with
The state control means is capable of controlling the special state to a special state after a predetermined display result based on the variable display being displayed with a predetermined display result different from the specific display result,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to perform variable display of production identification information,
In the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, it is possible to make the production identification information in an emphasized mode before the specific display result is stopped and displayed,
In the variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed, the production identification information is not highlighted before the predetermined display result is stopped and displayed,
After the specific display result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform an effect that notifies that the control will be in the advantageous state,
After the predetermined display result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to perform an effect that notifies that the predetermined display result will be controlled to a special state,
In the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed, the aspect of the presentation means may be a special aspect,
In the variable display in which the predetermined display result is displayed, the aspect of the presentation means is not a special aspect,
In the variable display in which the specific display result is displayed in a special state after the predetermined display result, the aspect of the presentation means may be a special aspect,
Effect data for setting the mode of the effect means to a special mode in a variable display in which the specific display result in the non-special state is displayed, and a variable display in which the specific display result in the special state is displayed after the predetermined display result. The production data for making the mode of the production means a special mode includes common data,
Variable display is performed with different variable display patterns in the variable display in which the specific display result in the non-special state is displayed and the variable display in which the specific display result in the special state is displayed after the predetermined display result. However, with common performance data, the mode of the production means becomes a special mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images